MASTER 
NEGATIVE 
NO. 91-S0009-2 





MICROFILMED 1991 
COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES/NEW YORK 


as part of the 
“Foundations of Western Civilization Preservation Project” 


Funded by the 
NATIONAL ENDOWMENT FOR THE HUMANITIES 


Reproductions may not be made without permission from 
Columbia University Library 





COPYRIGHT STATEMENT 


The copyright law of the United States -- Title 17, United. 
States Code -- concerns the making of photocopies or other 
reproductions of copyrighted material... 


Columbia University Library reserves the right to refuse to 


accept a copy order if, in its judgement, fulfillment of the order 
would involve violation of the copyright law. 





AUTHOR: 


GOODWIN, WILLIAM W. 


TITLE: 


SYNTAX OF THE MOODS 


PLACE: 


BOSTON 


DATE: 


18/5 





COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES 
PRESERVATION DEPARTMENT 


BIBLIOGRAPHIC MICROFORM TARGET 





Master Negative # 


A |1-FO0004F- 





Original Material as Filmed - Existing Bibliographic Record 


8656 
de end tenses of the τῶ 


Restrictions on Use: 


TECHNICAL MICROFORM DATA 


Pit. ΖΕ 9 6 | REDUCTION EAH:  _ 
IMAGE PLACEMENT: fe IIb 


DATE FILMED: ὦ 2. oe ae INITIALS... er 
FILMED BY: RESEARCH PUBLICATIONS, INC_WOODBRIDGE, CT | 






































































































































| 
: 
ΓΝ “ 
ἢ ; 
© uy 
: 
᾿ 
cv % eas Rak ghe Me «ἄφρον: ln aol tS 
; : 


























- Ἢ mba nh 
δ ΝΆ ΔΝ τ 




















oo 


























ib gate 


δτρκο τῷ 





τὰ 


αὐλῶν epg iS 











) 
i 
+ 
ἀ 
‘ 
fede s6he Sey asi Nees ee 
᾿ 
1 























' 
* - 
" 
᾿ 
ΠΩΣ " 
‘ 
re 
. 
a 
i ¥ : 
; “᾿ 
ε ΕΣ 
ν 
¥. > 
Ϊ 
toe Ι i 
τ ' ᾿ 
nw a 
4 a) t 
: , i 
= ebay Me cai : 
ag a yg’ eer Boe es 
i os ὍΝ δ : 
" * i t i 
my + Ε Ῥ 
Ῥ ᾿ ‘ μὲ : 





























































f Z 
a 
a 
ν * μ 
ἶ 
ot P \ ἤν 
, Ῥ ? # 
τῇ Ψ 
f : 
. ἫΝ 
᾿ ΡΞ 
Ὁ τες E 
, &, A “ 








τ λα, en eg OF ζω χα te 
. 


be 




























































δὰ ᾿ 
ε΄. 
a 
tae . 
τς ‘ υ 
ἧς * 
ΓῚ s * 






































ΠΠ[ΠΠ||ΠπΠ||πη Uff fru ul [fun ru {pun pu 


[| --- — 








eT 





vIiIT 
| if 


ἢ 


riinn 


-.ὄ.» ...---- 











Ὑ{ππ||ππ|{ππ||ππ||πΠ||ππ||ππἸππ||ππ|]|ππ|Ὲππὶ| 














SYNTAX 


THE MOODS AND TENSES 


THE GREEK VERB. 


WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, Pu. D., 


ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 


SIXTH EDITION, REVISED. 


BOSTON: 
GINN BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS. 
1875. 





Entored according to Act of Congress, in the year 1860, by 


W. W. GOODWIN, 
tm the Clerk’s Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetés. 


UNIVERSITY Press: WELCH, BiGELow, & Co., 
CAMBRIDGE. 


PREFACE 


TO THE SECOND EDITION. 





Ix the first edition of the present work, published in 1860, 
I attempted to give a plain and practical statement of the prin- 
ciples which govern the relations of the Greek Moods and 
Tenses. Although many of these principles were established 
beyond dispute, there were others (and these often the most ele- 
mentary) upon which scholars had long held the most opposite 
opinions. Upon many of these latter points I presented new 
views, which seemed to me to explain the phenomena of the 
language more satisfactorily than any that had been advanced. 
The favorable opinion of scholars has confirmed my belief, that 
some such attempt as I have made was demanded by the ris- 
ing standard of classical scholarship in this country, and has 
given me reason to hope that my labor has not been entirely a 
thankless one. 

The progress in grammatical science in this century has 
been made step by step, like that in every other science; and 
so it must long continue to be. He who imagines that every 
important principle of Greek and Latin syntax is as well un- 
derstood and as clearly defined as the rules for addition and 
multiplication in Arithmetic, has not yet begun to learn. It is 
no disparagement of even the highest scholars, therefore, to say 
that they have left much of the most important work to be 
lone by their successors. 

The vague notions so often expressed on the Greek Moods, 
even by scholars of otherwise high attainments, are in strange 
contrast with the accuracy demanded by scientific scholarship 
in other departments. If the study of language is to retain its 
present place (or indeed any prominent place) in the mental 


19100 


rd 





u PREFACE. 


discipline of youth, it must be conducted on strictly scientific 
principles, and above all with scientific accuracy. On no other 
ground can we defend the course of elementary grammatical 
training, which is the basis of all sound classical scholarship. 
An elementary grammar should be as short as the best scholar 
can make it, but it should be as accurate as a chapter in Geom- 
etry. To those who cannot appreciate the importance of 
accuracy in scholarship, or even distinguish it from pedantry, 
to those who cannot see the superiority of the Greek in this 
respect over Chinese or Choctaw, it is useless to speak; but 
surely no scholar can fail to see that an accurate knowledge of 
the uses of the Greek Verb, with its variety of forms, each ex- 
pressing its peculiar shade of meaning, must be indispensable 
to one who would understand the marvellous power of the 
Greek language to express the nicest distinctions of thought. 
One great cause of the obscurity which has prevailed on this 
subject is the tendency of so many scholars to treat Greek syn- 
tax metaphysically rather than by the light of common sense. 
Since Hermann’s application of Kant’s Categories of Modality 
to the Greek Moods, this metaphysical tendency has been con- 
spicuous in German grammatical treatises, and has affected 
many of the grammars used in England and America more 
than is generally supposed. The result of this is seen not 
merely in the discovery of hidden meanings which no Greek 
writer ever dreamed of, but more especially in the invention of 
nice distinctions between similar or even precisely equivalent 
expressions. A new era was introduced by Madvig, who has 
earned the lasting gratitude of scholars by his efforts to restore 
Greek syntax to the dominion of common sense.. Madvig is 
fully justified in boasting that he was the first to give full and 
correct statements on such elementary matters as the meaning 
of the Aorist Optative and Infinitive, and the construction of ὅτε 
and ὡς in oratio obliqua; although Professor Sophocles dis- 
tinetly recognized the same principles in his Grammar, published 
later in the same year with Madvig’s (1847). I can hardly 
express my great indebtedness to Madvig’s Syntax der griechi- 
schen Sprache, and to his Bemerkungen iiber einige Puncte der 
griechischen Wortfiigungslehre (in a supplement to the Philolo- 
gus, Vol. II.). The works of this eminent scholar have aided 


PREFACE. ill 


me not only by the material which they have afforded 88 8 
basis for the present work, but also by the valuable suggestions 
ith which they abound. ae 

γον» “Madvig, I must acknowledge my obligations to 
Kriiger’s Griechische Sprachlehre, which has everywhere ted 
plied me with important details and most excellent examples. 
I have been frequently indebted to the other grammarians, 
who need not be specially mentioned. Biumlein’s — 
suchungen tiber die griechischen Modi reached me _ ~~ a : 
ing of the first edition was begun. I have often be ome e 

to his valuable collection of examples, and have derived many 
hints from his special criticisms; I regret that I cannot — 
with the general principles to which he refers the uses τὴ 2 L 
mood, especially as his criticisms of the prevailing — Ὁ 1e- 
ories on this subject are most satisfactory and instructive. am 
indebted to the personal advice and suggestions of my pone 
colleague, Professor Sophocles, in the preparation = Ἢ 1 
editions, for information which no books could have supplied. 

I must acknowledge the following special obligations. The 
notes on the tenses of the Indicative in Chapter il. are — 
mainly on Kriiger, ὃ 93. The chapters = the pegs 2 
Participle are derived chiefly from Madvig's Syntax ( 1ap 
V. and VI.), and partly from Kriiger, § 55, 8 56. The note 
on the Future Optative after ὅπως, &e. (ὃ 26, Note 1) contains 
the substance of Madvig’s Bemerkungen, pp. 97 - 29; and the 
account of the various constructions that follow verbs of hin- 
drance and prevention (§ 995, 2 and 3) is based mn ans 
work, pp. 47-66. The statement of the principles of in rare 
discourse (Chapter IV. Section IV.) was written in ness y its 
present form before Madvig’s Syntax reached me; and I was 
strongly confirmed in the views there expressed, by inane 
that they agreed.almost exactly with those of Madvig. — 
anticipated by him in my statement of the occasional use of t e 
Present Optative to represent the Imperfect, and in my quota- 
tion of Dem. in Onet. I. 869, 12 to illustrate 1t. I am entirely 
indebted to him, however, for the statement of the important 
principle explained in § 74, 2. 

It remains to state what new material the present work pro- 
fesses to offer to scholars. ‘The most important and most 





iv PREFACE. 


radical innovation upon the ordinary system will be found in 
the classification of conditional sentences (§ 48), with its devel- 
opment in the rules that follow. I have explained the grounds 
of this classification at some length in the Proceedings of the 
American Academy, Vol. VI. p. 363, and will therefore merely 
allude to them here. The great difficulty (or rather the im- 
possibility) of defining the force of the Subjunctive in protasis 
as distinguished from the Present Indicative, has arisen from 
neglect of the distinction between particular and general suppo- 
sitions. When this is recognized, the distinction between the 
Subjunctive and the Present Indicative is seen to be entirely 
one of time; whereas all the common distinctions based on 
possibility, certainty, &c. will apply only to select examples, 
which of course are easily found to illustrate them. In the 
first edition, I could not persuade myself to abandon the old 
doctrines so completely as to exclude the common distinction 
between the Subjunctive and the Optative in protasis, — that 
the former implies a “prospect of decision,” while the latter 
does not. Subsequent experience has convinced me that there 
is no more distinction between ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῇ and εἰ τοῦτο ποιοίη 
than between the English if he shall do this and if he should 
do this; and I think every one must see that here there is no 
distinction but that of greater or less vividness of expression. 
The simple fact that both could be expressed by the Latin sz 
hoc faciat is a strong support of this view. 

The principles of conditional sentences being first settled, I 
have attempted to carry out the analogy between these and 
conditional relative sentences more completely. It seems to 
me that it is only by adopting the classification of conditional 
sentences which I have given, that the true nature of the anal- 
ogous relative sentences can be made clear. (See § 60, § 61, 
§ 62.) Upon a right classification of conditional sentences 
depends also the right understanding of the forms used to ex- 
press a wish (§ 82, § 83). 

The frequent use of the Subjunctive with ἵνα, ὅπως, &c., 
after past tenses, instead of the Optative, of which I had never 
seen a satisfactory explanation, is here explained on the prin- 
ciple of oratio obliqua. (See § 44, 2; § 77, 2.) The con- 
struction of the Infinitive with verbs like χρῆν and ἔδει, forming 


PREFACE. Vv 


an apodosis, is explained in the present edition on a new prin- 
ciple, which (it is hoped) will remove many of the difficulties 
which the old explanation did not reach. (See § 49, 2, Note 3 
and Remarks.) In the first edition, the usual distinction be- 
tween the constructions that follow od μή was adopted with 
hesitation, including Elmsley’s punctuation, by which the sec- 
ond person of the Future in prohibitions with od μή is made 
interrogative. In this edition both constructions are explained 
more satisfactorily upon the same principle. (See ὃ 89, 1 and 2, 
with Notes and Remarks.) It is hoped that the new statement 
of the force of the Perfect Infinitive; in § 18, 3, (a) and (ὁ) of 
this edition, will meet the difficulties which that tense presents. 
The statement in the former edition was very defective. 

It may seem strange to some that no general definitions of 
the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative are attempted in the 
first chapter. I have rather taken warning from the numerous 
unsuccessful attempts that have been made to include all the 
uses of these moods in comprehensive definitions, and have 
preferred merely to illustrate their various uses by simple ex- 
amples at the outset, leaving the explanations to their proper 
place in the book. For one, I am not ashamed to admit that I 
cannot propose a definition comprehensive enough to include 
all the examples in § 1, § 2, or § 3, which shall still be limited 
enough to be called a definition. 

Besides the special changes already mentioned, the work hag 
been subjected to a thorough revision, 50 that in many parts 
the new edition might claim to be an entirely new work.* 


sisi ig tba manta tnaesatasiitai tte 

* Notwithstanding the changes in the second edition, very few alterations 
have been made in numbering the paragraphs or notes. The following are 
the only changes (except a few omissions) which can affect references al- 
ready made to the first edition: — § 18, 8 is subdivided into (a) and (δ): § 18, 
8, Rem. takes the place of § 18, 4, Note; § 24, Notes 1 and 2 are rearranged ; 
§ 87, Note 2 is omitted, and N. 3 is changed to N. 2; ὁ 45, N. 2 is subdivided 
into (a) and (6); in § 49, 2, N. 8, the present divisions (Cc), (d), and (e) were 
included in (δ); ὁ 64, 1 and 2 are rearranged; in § 92, 2, Note 1 is changed to 
Remark; § 109, N. 9 was included in N. 3. 

The following additions have been made in the second edition: — § 49, 2, 
N. 6 (δ); § 50, 1, Rem. 2; § 52, 2, Rem.; § 53, N. 4; § 64, Rem. 2; § 65, 3, 
N. 2; § 65, 4; ὁ 69, 5; § 71, Rem. 2; § 89, 2, tem. 1 and 2; § 92, 2, N. 1; 
§ 95,3, Rem.; § 108, N. 4 (6); § 112, 1, Rem.; § 112, 2, Rem.; § 118, Rem. 
after N. 10. The following have been materially changed in subject or in 
substance in the second edition: — 4 25, 1, N. 5 (5); § 41, N. 4; § 43, Rem.; 
Remarks 1 and 2 after § 49, 2, N. 8; § 82, Rem. 2; ἡ 89, 2. Notes 1 and 2. 





vl PREFACE. 


Especially, the collection of examples has been revised and 
greatly enlarged, with the object of illustrating every variety 
of each construction from as wide a range of classic authors as 
possible. An index to these examples (more than 2,300 in 
number) is added to this edition. This index includes those 
which are merely cited, as well as those actually quoted, many 
of the former being quite as important as the latter. In the 
new edition, the matter printed in the two larger types has 
been reduced, and made as concise as was consistent with 
accuracy, while that printed in the smallest type has been 
greatly increased. It should be understood that only the first- 
mentioned portion of the work is intended for use as a gram- 
matical text-book, while the notes and remarks in the smallest 
type are intended only for reference: with this view, the latter 
are often extended toa greater length than would otherwise 
be justifiable. 

The Dramatists are cited by Dindorf’s lines, except the 
fragments, which follow the numbers in Nauck’s edition ; 
Plato, by the pages of Stephanus; and Demosthenes, by 
Reiske’s pages and lines. In the Index to the Examples, 
nowever, the sections of Bekker’s German editions of Demos- 
thenes have been added in each case, to facilitate reference. 
Other citations will be easily understood. 


CAMBRIDGE, June, 1865. 


PREFACE 


TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 


Since the publication of the second edition of this work in 
1865, several changes of expression and many corrections 
have been made, which it 1s impossible to enumerate in full. 
In preparing the fourth edition in 1870, and the fifth edition 
in 1873, the work has been carefully revised ; several sections 
and notes have been rewritten, and some notes have been 
added. ‘The only changes which can affect references made to 
the earlier editions (besides those mentioned on page v.) will 
be found in § 10, 1, Remark; § 11, Note 7 ; § 18, 1, Note; 
§ 19, Note 6; ὃ 66, 2, Note § 78, Note; and § 114, 2, 
Note: these have been added since the second edition was 
printed. Changes of expression and additions will be found 
ἫΝ the Remark before § 12; § 18,1; § 23, 2, Note 3; § 37, 
1; § 45, Note 7 (a); § 69, 1; § 70,13 § 86, Note 1 (0); 


i 
: 
Q 
o 


. 
5 


§ 88, Remark; and § 89, 2, Note 1 and Remark 1; not to 
mention others of less importance. The most important change 
made in the fifth edition will be found in the statement of the 
classification of conditional sentences (§ 48). This has been 
adopted to make clearer the position of the present and past 
“general suppositions ” which have the subjunctive and opta- 
tive in Greek (8 51), as opposed to the present and past “ par- 
ticular suppositions ” which have the simple indicative (ὃ 49,1 ). 
This distinction of these two classes in protasis is a striking 
peculiarity of Greek syntax ; most languages having a single 
form of expression for both particular and general conditions 
here, as the Greek has in other kinds of conditions. I can- 
not state too distinctly, that the chief peculiarity of my classi- 





PREFACE. 


fication of conditional sentences consists in treating present 
and past general conditions as closely allied to ordinary pres- 
ent and past conditions (being actually united with them in 
one class in most languages, and occasionally even in Greek), 
and as only remotely connected, at least in sense, with the 
externally similar forms of future conditions which have the 
subjunctive and optative. This relation is especially obvious 
when we see that ἐὰν ποιῇ as a general supposition is occa- 
sionally represented by εἰ ποιεῖ, whereas ἐὰν ποιῇ in a future 
condition is equivalent to εἰ ποιήσει in the indicative. I have 
explained this at greater length in the Philologus, Vol. 
XXVIII. pp. 741-745 (Gottingen, 1869), and in a paper 
read before the American Philological Association in July, 
1873. The change in § 48 has made necessary slight changes 
of expression in ὃ 12; § 13,1; ὃ 20; §21,1; § 49,1; 891; 
8 60; § 61, 1; and ὃ 62. An index to the examples which 
have been added in the later editions is given on page 242. 


CaMBRIDGE, September, 1873. 


CONTENTS. 





CHAPTER I. 


GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. 


. The five Moods , ° ᾿ ᾿ ᾿ 
-4. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative . " 
-7. Imperative, Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal in -réos 


CHAPTER Il. 


USE OF THE TENSES. 


§ 8,1. The seven Tenses ° . . 
2. Primary and Secondary Tenses 
8 9. Relative and absolute Time . . : 


Present and Imperfect. 


A. In the Indicative. 


8 10,1. Present Indicative . ° 
2. Historic Present . ° ᾿ 
8 11. Imperfect . . . . ° . 


B. Present in the Dependent Moods. 


Rem.—Distinction between Present and Aorist 
§ 12. Present Subjunctive . Α . 
§ 13,1. Present Optative, not in indirect discourse 
2. Present Optative in indirect discourse : — 
(a.) Representing a Present Indicative . ° . 
(b.) Representing Pres. Subj. (in questions of doubt) 
§ 14. Present Imperative . ° ὃ . 
§ 15. Present Infinitive --- 
1. In its ordinary use (indefinite in time) 
2. In indirect discourse ° . ° 
3. As Imperfect Infinitive . ° . 
§ 16. Present Participle : -- 
1. As Present . ° 


2. As Imperfect 





CONTENTS. 


Perfect and Pluperfect. 


A. In the Indicative. 


§17,1 Perfect Indicative . : ; ee ° 
2. Pluperfect Indicative ‘ 
N. 2. Compound forms (εἰμί and 7 ἣν with Perf. Part.) 


B. Perfect in the Dependent Moods. 


§ 18. Relations of the Perfect to the Present . 
1. Perfect Subjunctive and Optative 
2. Perfect Imperative. ᾿ 
8. Perfect Infinitive . . ‘ 
4, Perfect Participle phir 


Aorist. 


A. In the Indicative. 


§ 19. Aorist Indicative ‘ 
N. 2. Distinction between Aorist and Imperfect 


B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods. 


§ 20. Aorist Subjunctive 
N. 1. Aorist Subjunctive as ; Future Perfect . 
§ 21,1. Aorist Optative not in indirect discourse 
2, Aorist Optative in indirect discourse : — 
(a.) Representing an Aorist Indicative 
(b.) Representing an interrogative Aor. Subj. 
§ 22. Aorist Imperative . ; , . . ° 
§ 23. Aorist Infinitive : — 
1. In its ordinary use . : : . 
2. In indirect discourse . 
N. 2. After verbs of hoping, promising, &e. 
§ 24. Aorist Participle . : 
N. 1. With λανθάνω, φθάνω, ἄτα. 
N. 2. With περιεῖδον, ἐπεῖδον, ὅζο. « 


Future. 


8 25,1. Future Indicative . ‘ 
N. 5. Future with force of ‘Imperative . 
N. 6. Future denoting present intention 
2. Periphrastic Future - pn) . 
§ 26. Future Optative . ; ‘ 
N. 1. After ὅπως and μή , ° ° . ° ° 
§ 27. Future Infinitive 
N. 1. Distinction between Future and Present or Aorist 
N. 2. Future used for Present or Aorist . ‘ + δὲ, 
N. 3. Future after verbs of hoping, ΔΩ, Mees τἢ 
. Future Participle Se ee ee . 
. Future Perfect . ° : . ἘΠῚ" 


CONTENTS. 


N. 3. Expressed by Perfect Participle and € hei 
N. 6. In the dependent moods. ‘ ; 


Gnomic and Iterative Tenses. 


§ 80, 1. Gnomic Aoris* and Perfect . eee ee 
N. 5. Gnomic Aorist in Infinitive ‘end Participle 
N. 6. Gnomic Perfect in Infinitive : ‘ ᾿ 
2. Iterative Imperfect and Aorist with ἄν . : 
Notes. — Iterative Aorist in -σκον, -oxdpnv- 


Dependence of Moods and Tenses. 


§ 31,1-2. General Rules . ' ‘ ; ‘ " 48 
Distinction between Primary ‘and Secondary ‘Tenses :— 

8 32. Inthe Indicative . ‘ ° : . 49, 50 

ξ 33. In the Subjunctive and Imperative . ‘ ‘ ; 50 

ξ 34. Inthe Optative - ° . 50-53 

§ 35. In the Infinitive and Parti ciple . . 53, 54 


CHAPTER III. 
THE PARTICLE “AN. 


9. Two uses of ἄν. . 5 , 
*ay not used with the Present andl Perfect Indicative 


τὰν with Future Indicative in early Poets 


N. 1. In Attic Greek (rare) 
“ay with Secondary Tenses of the Indicative 
ἂν with the Subjunctive in Protasis, &e. . 
_ “Ay with the Subjunctive in Apodosis iad 
§ 39. Av with the Optative . : ° ° 
§ 40. “Av not used with the Imperative 
§ 41. “Ay with the Infinitive and Participle 
1. Present . . . ° . 
2. Perfect . . 
8. Aorist . ; . . 
4, Future ° ° 
8 42,1-—4. Position and repetition of ἄν 


CHAPTER IV. 
USE OF THE MOODS. 
SECTION I. 


Frvat AND Ossect CLAUSES AFTER “Iva, ‘Qs, Ὅπως; 
“Odpa, AND Μή. 


8 48. Classification - ; ; : . 65-67 
N. 2. Negative Particle ; ‘ a 





CONTENTS. 


A. Pure Final Clauses. 


§ 44,1. Subjunctive and Optative after iva, os, ὅπως, py, &c. 67 
N. 1. Future Indicative after ὅπως, &c. , ‘ . 68 

N. 2 and 8. “Av in Final Clauses. . . 68-70 

2. Subjunctive after secondary tenses - : ᾿ ς᾽, ἘΝ 

3. Secondary tenses of the Indicative after ἵνα, &e. . 72 


B. Clauses with Ὅπως and Ὅπως μή after Verbs of Striving, &c. 


§ 45. Future Indicative, &e. after ὅπως ° ᾿ . . Δ 
N. 2. Homeric construction after φράζομαι; &e. 
N. 7. Elliptical expressions ‘ ‘ : ᾿ 18, 19 
N. 8 (and foot-note). Dawes’s Canon on ὅπως; &c. 79, 80 


C. Clauses with Μή after Verbs of Fearing, &c. 


§ 46. Subjunctive and Optative after pn + - ‘ 80 
N. 1. Future Indicative afterpn. + > ° o = 
N. 2. Elliptical expressions . ‘ ° . ° 83 
N. 5. Present and past tenses of the Indic. after μή 83-85 


SECTION II. 
CoNDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


§ 47,1. Protasis and Apodosis explained - 87 
2. “Ay or κέ in Protasis and Apodosis_” - - 87 
8 (and Note). Negative particles . : ° 88 
§ 48. Classification of Conditional Sentences . ‘ . 88-92 


I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences. 
A. Present and Past Conditions. 


§ 49,1. Simple Indicative in Protasis and Apodosis a 
N. 3. Future Indicative expressing present intention 93 

2. Secondary tenses of the Indic. (cond. not fulfilled) . 93 

N. 2. Omission of ἄν in Apodosis : ° . a 

N. 3. Verbs of necessity, &c. without av,in Apod. 97-100 

N. 6. Homeric Optative for Indicative. . - 101, 102 


B. Future Conditions. 


Subjunctive with ἐάν in Protasis. - 102 
N. 1. Future Indicative in Protasis . . . 108 
N. 2. Homeric peculiarities . Ξ : ; . 104 
N. 3. Εἰ for ἐάν with Subjunctive in Attic (rare) 105 

. Optative in both Protasis and Apodosis - . 105 
N. 1. Omission of ἄν in Apodosis_ . . 106 
N. 2. “Av with Optative in Protasis . . “ 107 


II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 


§ 51. Subjunctive and Optative in Protasis . + + 10%, 108 
N. 8. Indicative aftereiris + “ς . ἣν 


CONTENTS. 


Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 


§ 52,1. Protasis implied in another clause, or expressed in a 
Participle or other word : , : . . 110 
N. 1 and 2. Ellipsis of Verb of the Protasis . 111,112 
2. Protasis suppressed. ° ° ‘ ς . . 112 
N. Optative with ἄν like Imperat. or Fut. Ind. . 
§ 53. Apodosis expressed in Infinitive or Participle ‘ . 113 
Norres.—Ellipsis of the Apodosis ‘ . . 114-116 


Mixed Constructions. — Irregularities. 


_3. Protasis and Apodosis differing in form . 116-119 
_ Two or more Protases with the same Apodosis » 129 
. Apodosis in a dependent construction. . — — 
after verbs expressing wonder, indignation, &e. . 120 
in Apodosis - a να eg 121 


SECTION III. 
RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 


§ 58,1. Relative and Temporal Words . ° ° - 121 
9. Definite and Indefinite Antecedent . 121, 122 
3. Negative particles - ‘ . . . 122 


A. Relative with a Definite Antecedent. 


§ 59. Indicative after Relative with Definite Antecedent . 
N. 1. Other constructions - ‘ : . . 


B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent. 


§ 60, 1, 2. Conditional Relative explained. : 
3. *ay in Conditional Relative clauses’ - , . 
§ 61. Four forms of Conditional Relative clauses correspond- 
ing to the four forms of ordinary protasis . 125-129 
1. Simple Indicative (like § 49, 1). . : . . 125 
2. Secondary tenses of the Indicative (like § 49, 2 > 
3. Subjunctive (like § 50, i). : . , . . 1 
4. Optative (like ὃ ὅ0, 2) . : . (0 ge sa 
§ 62. Conditional Relative clauses with general suppositions : — 
Subjunctive and Optative (like §51) . : . 129 
N. 1. Indicative in these sentences (after Sorts) + 131 
N. 3. Subjunctive in Homeric similes . , : . 132 
ὁ 63, 1. Relative without ἄν, with the Subjunctive ‘ » 
2, 3, 4. Peculiarities in Cond. Relative clauses . 183-135 
5. Parenthetical Relative clauses (6 τι ποτ᾽ ἐστίν) a 


Assimilation in Conditional Relative Clauses. 


§ 64,1. Assimilation after Subjunctive or Optative - . 135 
9. Assimilation after secondary tenses of Indicative . 136 


Relative Clauses expressing 8 Purpose or Result. 
§ 65,1. Future Indicative after Relatives ‘ ‘ 5 . 131 


Te 
Ὡπ ποτ. ay sera Olt a LI 


fee τως 





CONTENTS | 
CONTENTS. 


N. 2. Subjunctive and Optative in Homer - .188 i 
Pas et Relative clauses expressing ἃ result ° 140 7 et sc EAE 
2. Ῥὶ ature Tn dicative after if’, ἐφ' dre 140 | 5 74, 1. Quotation of dependent clauses with a Subjunctive, or 
: icative after ὥστε. ° ; . . . 140 a Present, Perfect, or Future Indicative . ~- 160 
. . 162 


ee ee ee ee ἢ N.1. Mixed constructions. +, + > 
q 2. Quotation of dependent clauses with Imperfect, Plu- 


Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before q perfect, or Aorist ee ΠΣ ΣΝ 
dent clauses with secondary tenses of Indicative 165 


A. Ἕως " * rae: Ἢ 75. Depen 
͵ Ῥ ΕΝ ἐπῶν Αχρι, Μέχρι, Ἑϊσόκε, Οφρα, Uniil. 3 76. Dependent clauses with Optative . , . 165 
. Ἕως, &c. with past tenses licativ ¥ . , 5 
” 9. “Ἕως av, το. af tne ghd ge neem, ὡς 142 Single Dependent Clauses 18 Indirect Quotation. 
9 » OC. W ive ' ᾿ ae 
8. Ἕως, &c. with secondary tenses of Indicative Ξ : ; = Ἷ 77, 1. (a.) Clauses depending on an Infinitive after verbs of 
4. Ἕως, &c. with Subj. and Opt. after general statements 144 commanding, &c.— (6-) Causal sentences stating a 
B. πρίν, Until, Before that ἢ cause assigned by others. —(c.) Clauses after εἰ or 
3 .- ἐάν, in case that.—(d.) Relative and temporal 
clauses expressing a past intention. — 


§ 67. Finite Moods and Infinitive after πρίν. ; : 144 ᾿ (e.) Relative 
. sentences containing the thought of another 


. 166 


1. Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optati 
rah , ) ὃ ptative after πρί f 
cae after πρίν (see $106) . : ἫΝ ᾿ : ᾿ ἢ 2. Same principle applied to clauses after iva, ὅπως, &c. 169 
- 3. Πρὶν ἤ, πρότερον fj, πρόσθενῆ . . - 146 Ἷ “Ὅπως and Ὅ in Indirect Quotations 


§ 78, 1. “Ὅπως for ὅτι or bs. 2. Homeric ὅ for ὅτι 
Nore. — -Οθούνεκα and οὕνεκα for ore 


SECTION IV. 170 
171 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
. San 


Direct and Indirect Quotations distinguished . 8 79. Ὅτι before Direct Quotations. 


2. Manner of introducing Indi ° 
; ὸ irect Quotat ‘ 
. Indirect Questions .  . Q p ai ἷ SECTION V. 
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 


» 171 
171 


General Principles. 4 C 
6 . i οἱ “| ἣν . ᾿ 80. a al arti le . . ο Fy e e 2 
§ 69,1. Principles of Indirect Quotations after ὅτι and ἁ τῇ ἔτι i, Indicative in Causal sentences. ‘ ° ‘ . 


to express a cause 
. ῃ o aie 


173 


and of Indirect i 4 : 
2. Secondary Gan we υττηβθωξ τὴ 2. Optative after secondary tenses, 
8. Infinitive and Participl ; ie assigned by others . . ° 
4. *Ay in Indirect ὁ όσῳς «οὴ pide ἣν 3 N. 1. Cause expressed by an Apodosis - + . 
5. Negative particles in Indirect Discourse . . 3 SECTION VL 
Indirect Quotation of Simple Sentences. EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 
Rem. — Two classes of Wishes i νοι 


70. Indicativ be Repel : 
§ me ἊΨ Optative after ὅτι or ὡς, and in Indirect τῷ 8. 82. Optative in Wis! 173, 174 
Ques poe ἢ . Optative in Wishes. “Ths τὰ" . Arse 
» — after primary tenses . ; : 4 § 83, 1. Secondary tenses of Indicative in Wishes’ - «ὦ 
R sprative or Indicative after secondary tenses . Ξ ; Ε Σ᾿ νῶν with ea ee , ; + re 
a 1 and 2. Both Moods in the same quotation . 181 eke: — Grok and ee ae aia er ae 
. 1. (a.) Imperfect and Pluperfect retained . ἘΠ ‘ SECTION VII 


(b.) Present O i rf 
° ptative as Impe ect ; Ξ q 
εἰ. IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN CoMMANDS, EXHOR- 


N. 3. Inde O ; 
; . ὃ. ἶ pendent Optative (often with ya 
$ 71. Interrogative Subjunctive in Indirect Qr γάρ) ΐ ' Ῥ 
1estions . 154, TATIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS. 


§ 72. Indicative or Optative with dv i ; : 

ptative with ἄν in Indirect D . 

73. 1. ταν : : vin indirect Discourse . : 

ἀὴν 2. Participle with é iia oe ΟΝ Discourse . ; : Ἢ sng of Subjunctive in exhortations ἦν 
ithout ἄν, in Indirect Di 86 Ἐ ἢ Ov. 5 8 “ὦ ἀρ ye a a 

-- 4 § 86. Pres. Imperat. or Aor. Subj. in prohibitions with μὴ . 180 


a e 











CONTENTS. 


SECTION VIII. 


SUBJUNCTIVE (LIKE Fut. Inv.) ΙΝ INDEPENDENT SENTENCES, 
— INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.— Ov’ μή WITH SuBJUNC- 
TIVE AND FuTuRE INDICATIVE. 


§ 87. Independent Subjunctive in Homer . . . . 181 

Note. — With ἄν, in apodosis . ° . . 2 

§ 88. Interrogative Subjunctive (with or without βούλει) . 182 
§.89. Double Negative, οὐ μή :— 

1. With Subj. (rarely Fut. Ind.), as emphatic Future . 184 

“. With Future Indicative in prohibitions . . - 185 


CHAPTER V. 


THE INFINITIVE. 


. Infinitive as a Verbal Noun . > a 
. Infinitive as Subject . ; . 188 
. Infinitive as Object : — 

1. Not in indirect discourse . ° . . : - 189 
2. In indirect discourse . ° ° ° . . .« 192 
N. 3. Infinitive after Relatives (by assimilation) . 193 
§ 93, land 2. Infin. after Adjectives and Adverbs . . 193-195 
§ 94. Infinitive (with Article) after Prepositions . . ae 
§ 95, 1. Infinitive as Genitive or Dative . ° . . . 197 
2. Two constructions after verbs of hindrance, &c. . 198 
N. 1. Negative particles. Double Negative, μὴ od . 200 

3. Infinitive with τὸ μή, after expressions implying pre- 
vention, omission, or denial . . ‘ : . 201 
§ 96. Infinitive and its adjuncts preceded by τό. 1: > ἄν 
§ 97. Infinitive expressing a purpose ἢ . ° .ς 203 
N. 4. Infin. after Comparative and ἤ, than 204 
§ 98, 1. Infinitive after ὥστε (result) ‘ : ‘ 205 
2. Infin. after ὥστε (condition or purpose) . 205 
N. 1. ‘Qs for ὥστε, with Infinitive ‘ ° 206 
§ 99. Infinitive after ἐφ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε. , ° ‘ 207 
§ 100. Absolute Infinitive (generally with ὡς or ὅσον) 207 
N. 1. ᾽Ολίγου (δεῖν), almost, litile short of . 208 
N. 2. ‘Exay εἶναι, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, &e. ° ° 208 
8 101. Infinitive used imperatively . : ; 208 
ὃ 102. Infinitive in wishes (like the Optative ‘ 209 
ὃ 103. Infinitive in laws, treaties, proclamations, &c. 209 
§ 104. Infinitive expressing surprise or indignation . . 209 
§ 105. Infinitive in narration ° ° ‘ ‘ . . eo 
8 106. Infinitive after πρίν ‘ - . ° 210, 211 
NoTES. — [piv ἤ, πρότερον 7, πρόσθεν ἤ, πάρος. 211, 212 
Rem.— Tenses of the Infinitive . ‘ ; . 212 


ae 


oe 
SORA ee 3 ie 


A 


eer 


δ» as 4 
—siipevasistiaoe: 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER VI. 


THE PARTICIPLE. 


§ 107. Three uses of the Participle . . ; . . 218 
§ 108, 1. Participle as Adjective . : “ae . . δὲ 
2. Participle (as Adjective) used substantively . . 213 
§ 109. Partic. defining the circumstances of an action :— 
1-4. Time, means, manner, cause, &c. . ‘ ἃ | κι. 
5-7. Purpose, condition, opposition, &c. . ‘ , ,. Μι1 
8. Attendant circumsiances . . ° . . . —_—— 
Nores 1-5. Adverbs, &c. with Part. of §109 . 218-221 
N. 7. (a.) Partic. in Rel. or Interrog. sentences ὦ. 
(b.) Ti μαθών ; Τί παθών; wherefore? . . 221, 222 
§ 110, 1. Genitive Absolute . ‘ . : ' ᾿ aa 
2. Accusative Absolute ν . - ee . 224 
§ 111. Gen. or Accus. Absol. and ordinary Partic. combined 225 
§ 112. Participle with verbs (like Infinitive) : — 
1. With verbs signifying to begin, to cease, &c. . .« 226 
2. With διατελέω, λανθάνω, τυγχάνω, φθάνω, &e. - .ω 5»: 
§ 113. Partic. in indirect discourse (after verbs signifying [0 see, 
to perceive, to know, &c.) . , ° . . .ς 229 
N. 1. Participle with δῆλός (φανερός) εἰμι. , . 5. 
N. 6. Participle with σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώσκω . 230 
N. 10. ‘Qs with these Participles : . . 281, 232 


CHAPTER VII. 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -réos. 


§ 114. Two constructions of the Verbal in -réos: — 
1. Personal construction : ᾿ ; ‘ . 233 
2. Impersonal construction oe ° 233, 234 





AppEnDIxX I. . 
AppEeNpDIx Il. . ‘ 
INDEX TO EXAMPLES 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
GREEX INDEX. 

















ΕΝ 


ne 
> ων pte Ψὶ τοῦ = 


4 
Γ 
Σ 
τῷ 
᾿ 

: 
a 

2 


CHAPTER 1. 
GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. 


$4. Tue Greek verb has five Moods, the Indicative, 
Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive. The 
first four, as opposed to the Infinitive, are called finite 
moods. 


$2, The Indicative is used in simple, absolute as- 
» 


sertions; as γράφει, he writes ; ἔγραψεν, he wrote ; γράψει, 
he will write; γέγραφεν, he has written. 

The Indicative is used also to express various other 
relations, which the following examples will illus- 
trate :— 


El τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστι, χαίρω, if this is true, I rejoice. Ei ἔγραψεν, 
ἦλθον ἄν, if he had written, I should have come. Ei τοῦτο ποιήσει; 
καλῶς ἕξει, if he shall do this, it will be well. ᾿Ἐπιμελεῖται ὅπως τοῦτο 
γενήσεται; he takes care that this shall happen. Eide pe €xretvas, 
ὡς μήποτε τοῦτο ἐποίησα, O that thou hadst killed me, that I might 
never have done this! Eide τοῦτο ἀληθὲς ἦν, O that this were true. 
Λέγει ὡς τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστιν, he says that this is true. Ἐἶπεν ὅτι τοῦτο 
πράξει, he said that he would do this. ’Epwra ri ἐγράψαμεν, he 
asks what we wrote. 


These constructions will be explained in Chapter IV. They are 
sufficient to show the impossibility of including all the uses of the 
Indicative in one definition. Any definition which is to include 
these must be comprehensive enough to include even the Imperfect 
and Pluperfect Subjunctive in Latin ; for εἰ ἔγραψεν, ἦλθον ἄν is 
equivalent to si scripsisset, venissem. It would be equally impossible 
to give a single definition sufficiently precise to be of any use in 
practice, including all the uses of the Subjunctive or Optative. 


$$. The various uses of the Subjunctive — in 
. . τ , 
clauses denoting a purpose or object, after +a, μή; Ke. $ 


in conditional, relative, and temporal sentences ; and 
1 A 




















2 GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS. [§ 3. 


in certain independent sentences — may be seen by the 
following examples : — 


"Epxerat iva τοῦτο ἴδῃ, he is coming that he may see this. Φοβεῖται 
μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, he fears lest this may happen. Ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιεῖν 
βούληται, δυνήσεται, if he shall wish to do this, he will be able. 
"O re dv ποιεῖν ὥΖούληται δυνήσεται, whatever he shall wish to do he will 
be able (to do). "Edy τι ποιεῖν βούληται, τοῦτο ποιεῖ, if he (ever) 
wishes to"do anything, he (aways) ‘does it. Ὅ τι ἂν ποιεῖν βούλ nrat 
ποιεῖ, whatever he wishes (at any time) to do he (always) does. Ὅταν 
τοῦτο ποιεῖν βούληται, δυνήσεται, when he shall wish to do this, he 
will be able. Ὅταν ποιεῖν τι βούληται, ποιεῖ, whenever he wishes to 
do anything, he (always) does it. “I wpe y, let us go. Μὴ θαυμάσητε, 
do not wonder. Οὐ μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, this will (surely) not happen. 
Ti εἴπω; what shall I say? 


$4. The various uses of the Optative—in clauses 
denoting a purpose or object after iva, μή, &¢.; in con- 
ditional, relative, and temporal sentences; in indirect 
quotations and questions ; and in independent sentences 
Gin apodosis with ἄν, or in expressions of a wish) — 
may be seen by the following examples : — 


Ἦλθεν iva τοῦτο ἴδοι, he came that he might see this. ᾿Εφοβεῖτο μὴ 
τοῦτο γένοιτο, he feared lest this might happen. Ei τοῦτο ποιεῖν 
βούλοιτο, δύναιτ᾽ ἄν. if he should wish to do this, he would be able. 
"O τι ποιεῖν βούλοιτο δύναιτ᾽ ἄν, whatever he should wish to do, he 
would be able (to do). Ἐ τι ποιεῖν βούλοιτο, τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίει, if he 
(ever) wished to do anything, he ( always) did it. ὍὝὍ τι ποιεῖν 
βούλοιτο ἐποίει, whatever he wished (at any time) to do he (always) 
did. “Ore τοῦτο ποιεῖν βούλοιτο, δύναιτ᾽ ἄν, whenever he should 
wish to do this, he would be able. “Ore ποιεῖν τι βούλοιτο, ἐποίει, 
whenever he wished to do anything, he (always) did it. Ἐπεν ὅτι τοῦτο 
ποιοίη, he said that he was doing this. Εἶπεν ὅτι τοῦτο ποιήσειεν, 
he said that he had done this. ἘΕΠπεν ὅτι τοῦτο ποιήσοι, he said that 
he would do this.’Hpdérev τί roto in (ποιήσειεν or ποιήσοι), they 
asked what he was doing (had done, or would do). 

Avvair ἂν τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he would be able to do this. Eide μὴ ταῦτα 
πάσχοιεν, O that they may not suffer these things! ’Amérotro, 
may he perish! Μὴ τοῦτο γένοιτο, may this not happen ! 


Nore. For a discussion of the relation of the Optative to the 
Subjunctive, see Appendix. 


$@. The Imperative is used to express a command, 
exhortation, entreaty, or prohibition. 


$6. The Infinitive expresses the simple idea of the 


! z TENSES. 3 
8.9.1 USE OF THE TENSES 


verb without restriction of person or number, and may 
be considered as a verbal noun with many attributes of 


a verb. 


§'7. To the Moods may be added the Participle, 


° ’ ρ i . aad 
and the Verbal in -réos or -réov. Both are verbal ad 


jectives. 


CHAPTER Il. 


USE OF THE TENSES. 


§®. 1. Tere are seven Tenses, — the Present, lm- 


perfect, Perfect, Pluperfect, Aorist, Future, and Future 


Perfect. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occur only = 
the Indicative; the Futures are wanting in the Sub- 


junctive and Imperative. 


9. These tenses are divided into primary and second- 
ary ; the primary tenses being those which refer to οὐρᾷ 
ent or future time, and the secondary being those which 
refer to past time. ae 

The primary tenses of the Indicative are the Present, 
Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect. The secondary 
tenses are the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist. 

Note. This distinction will be more fully explained at the end 
of this chapter, §§ 31-39. 

89. In speaking of the time denoted by any verb, we must 
distinguish between time which is present, past, or future with 
reference to the time of the speaker or writer (that is, time 
absolutely present, &c.), and time which is present, past, or 


future with reference to the time of some other verb with which 
the verb in question is connected (that is, time relatively pres- 


ent, &c.). Thus, when we say τοῦτο ἀληθές ἐστιν, this 18 ~ 
ἐστίν denotes time present with reference to the me of speak- 











4 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 9. 


ing: but when we say ἔλεξε τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἶναι, or ἔλεξεν ὅτι, τοῦτο 
ἀληθές ἐστιν (or εἴη), he said that this was true (i. 6. he said 
“this is true”), we use the Present tense; but this tense here 
denotes time present with reference to the time of the leading 
verb, ἔλεξε, or time absolutely past and only relatively present. 
The same distinction is seen between the Future in τοῦτο 
γενήσεται, this will happen, and in ἔλεξε τοῦτο γενήσεσθαι or ὅτι 
γενήσεται (γενήσοιτο), he said that this would happen ; where the 
Future in the first case denotes time absolutely future, in the 
other cases time only relatively future, which may even be 
absolutely past.- Again, in τοῦτο ἐγένετο, this happened, the 
Aorist is absolutely past; but in ἔλεξε τοῦτο γενέσθαι, or ἔλεξεν 
ὅτι τοῦτο ἐγένετο (or γένοιτο), he said that this had happened, it 
denotes time past with reference to the time of ἔλεξεν, which 
makes it doubly past. 

It is to be noticed as a special distinction between the Greek 
and English idioms, that the Greek oftener uses its tenses to 
denote merely relative time. Thus, in the examples given 
above, we translate the Greek Presents εἶναι and ἐστί after 
ἔλεξε by our Imperfect was ; the Futures γενήσεσθαι and γενή- 
σεται by would happen ; and the Aorists γενέσθαι and ἐγένετο by 
had happened. This principle is especially observed in the 
Indicative, Optative, and Infinitive in indirect quotations; in 
final and object clauses after iva, ὅπως, &c.; and usually in the 
Participle. 


PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. 


A. In the Indicative. 


810. 1. The Present Indicative represents an action 
. / ‘ “,»" 
as going on now; as γράφω, 1 write, or I am writing. 
Remark. A single important exception occurs when the Present 


Indicative in indirect discourse denotes time present relatively te 
the leading verb. See above, § 9; and § 70, 2. 


Note 1. As the limits of such an action on either side of 
the present moment are not defined, the Present may express 
8 customary or repeated action, or a general truth. E. g. 





§ 10, 1.] PRESENT INDICATIVE. 5 


Πλοῖον eis Δῆλον ᾿Αθηναῖοι πέμπουσιν; the Athenians send a ship 
to Delos (every year). PLAT. Phaed. 58 A. Tixres τοι κόρος ὕβριν, 
ὅταν κακῷ ὄλβος ἕπηται, satiety begets insolence, whenever prosperity 
follows the wicked. THEOGN. 153. Ἐν χρόνῳ ἀποφθίνει τὸ τάρβος 
ἀνθρώποισιν. Arscu. Agam. 857. 

Pre | ntinuance of 

Nore 2. The Present denotes merely the co 2 
an action, without reference to its completion: sometimes, how- 
ever, it is directly implied by the context that the action 1s not 
to be completed, so that the Present denotes an attempted ac- 
tion. Especially, δίδωμι, in the sense TI offer, and πείθω, Ttry 
to persuade, are used in this sense. E. g. 

= ah 

Νῦν δ᾽ ἅμα 7 αὐτίκα πολλὰ διδοῖ» he offers many things. I. IX, 

519. Πείθουσι ὑμᾶς ἐναντία καὶ τοῖς νόμοις καὶ τῷ δικαίῳ ψηφίσα- 


σθαι, they are trying to persuade you to vote contrary both to the laws 
and to justice. Isax. de Cleon. Hered. § 26. 


This signification is much more common in the Imperfect. See 
§ 11, N. 2, and the examples. 

Nore 3. The Present is often used with expressions denot- 
ing past time, especially πάλαι; in the sense of a Perfect and 
Present combined. E. g. 

Keivov ἰχνεύω πάλαι, I have been tracking him a long time (and 
still continue it). Sopu. Aj. 20. Ov πάλαι got he y@ ὅτι prides ons 
εἶναι; i. 6. have I not long ago told you, (and do I not still repea ) 

. . ἢ ΐ Ν Σ > . ov 
that I call it the same thing? Piat. Gorg. 489 C. So Πολὺν xpov 
τοῦτο ποιῶ. 

So in Latin, Jam dudum loquor. 

» 

Nore 4. The Presents ἥκω, 1 am come, and οἴχομαι; I am 
gone, are used in the sense of the Perfect. An approach to 
the signification of the Perfect is sometimes found in such 
Presents as φεύγω, in the sense I am banished, ἁλίσκομαι; Iam 
captured, νικάω and κρατέω, J am victorious, ἡττάομαι, [ am con- 

Ψ ΄ 
quered, ἀδικέω, I have been unjust (Lam ἄδικο). So ἵκω and 
ἱκάνω in Homer, with ὄλλυμαι and similar verbs and sometimes 
rixrw in the Tragedians. KE. g. 

Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥ κω παρὰ σέ, I, Themistocles,am come to mye ie 
I, 137. Οἴχεται eis ἅλα δῖαν, he is gone to the divine sea. τς A 
223. Ἰλίου ἁλισκομένου, Ilium having been captured. Tuve. V1, 2 
So Hpr. I, 85. Εἰ πάντα ταῦτα ἐλυμαίνετο τοῖς ὅλοις; ἕως ἀνέτρεψε. 
τί Δημοσθένης ἀδικεῖ; DEM. Cor. 827,1. Πύργων eg gs ΤΟΝ 
ναυσὶν ἔβαν, I embarked after the towers had been destroyed. KUR. iph. 


T. 1108. So ἀνοιγομένης θύρης, Hor. I, 9. "Hoe τίκτει ce, this 
woman is thy mother. Eur. Ion. 1560. 























USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 10, 1 


prea 5. The Greek, like other languages, often allows the 
use of the Present of such verbs as J hear, I learn, I say, even 


Oi Σικελιῶται ‘ 
στασιάζουσιν, ὡς πυνθαν ὁ cili 
“tapi ’ ᾽ ανόμεθα, the Sicilians 
discord, as we learn. Tuuc. VI. 16. he \ oN ς > ΠΡ αν 
Ἂς ΚΕ ae dX 4 “Τί πόλεις, ὡς εγὼ AKON 
μαι, μέλλομεν ἰέναι μεγάλας. THuc. VI, 20 ᾿ 


= 

Norte 6. res ἷ ᾿ 
The Present εἶμι, J am going, through all its 
moods, is used like a Futur ; aes } 
uture. Its compounds are sometimes 


used i S T 
ed in the same sense. (The Poets, especially Homer, some- 
times use εἶμι as a Present.) E. ¢ 

. >* 


Σεῦ ὕστερος εἶ μ᾽ ὑπὸ γαῖ τασ 

εἶν 2 γαῖαν, I shall go. Tl. XVII, 333 ᾽ ‘ 

em ἐκεῖνα, I shall recur to that. PLat. Phaed. 100 B. γῆς oe — 

σοῦ δ᾽ οὐ φροντιῶ. ARIST. Nub. 125. Ὦ φίλ᾽, ἐγὼ ὲν ἃ κὐκήρήρονὶ ον 

ei reg amen gy Od. XVII, 598. γ) ἐγὼ μὲν ἄπειμι; σύας 
Sc TY δὲν δ᾽ μὰν ales με deund os 

as a star moves, &c. Il. XXII, 4 — μετ ἀστράσι νυκτὸς ἀμολγῷ, 


Μένομεν ἕως ἂν ἕ ‘ i ἡ 
Tuuc. VI. 77. Εἰ 82 dou pede ks ληφθῶμεν ; shall we wait? 
IC. ’ - ε φησιν οὕτος, δειξά VG Ral 
I will tak a 9 ato, kayo kataBaiva, and 
I BE Bg seat. Dem. F. L. 351, 4. Σὺ εἶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, ἣ ἕτερον 
μεν; art thou he that should come, or do we look for 


another? Matru. Evans. X : , 
(See § 17, N. 6.) vang. XI, 3. ᾿Απόλλυμαι, 1 shall perish. 


9 . : 
. The Present is often used in narration for the 


Aorist, to gi re li 
“= rist, to give a more lively statement of a past event 
us is called the Historic Present. E. σ 
. δ" 
Βουλὴν ἐπιτεχνᾶται ὅ ὴ ἁ ῃ 
᾿ x at ὅπως μὴ ἁλισθεῖεν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, he contriv 
επκλικὰ μετα the Athenians from collecting. Apr. I, 63 Redes. ? 
μ ἄνδρας" . . . . ἀποστέλλουσιν οὖν, καὶ περὶ αὐτῶν ὅ 


Θημιστοκλῆς κρύ ΄ 
ir ε pupa πέμπει. THuc. I, 9 : . ἊΨ 
παῖδες γίγνονται δύο. XEN, An. I, 1, i Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος 


ΝΟΤΕ. The Historic Present is not found in Homer. 


Sil. 3 
οἷ The Imperfect represents an action as going 
in past time ; as eypadov, I was writing. : 
Nore 1. 


“eal The Imperfect is thus a Present transferred to 
past, and it retains all the peculiarities of the Present 





§ 11.] IMPERFECT. 7 


which are not inconsistent with the change to past time. Thus 
the Imperfect denotes customary ΟΥ̓ repeated action, as opposed 
to the Aorist, which denotes the simple occurrence of an action. 


(See § 19, Ν. 2.) E.¢. 


Ἐπὶ Κέκροπος ἡ ᾿Αττικὴ κατὰ πόλεις φκεῖτο, καὶ οὐ ξυνήεσαν 
, > ‘ cd » La 4 
βουλευσόμενοι. ἀλλ᾽ αὐτοὶ ἕκαστοι ἐπολ ιτεύοντο καὶ ¢Bovdev- 

Ε 4 4 4 > , ? ‘ a , ? 
οντο. Ἐπειδὴ δὲ Θησεὺς ἐβασίλευσεν; ἐς τὴν νὺν πόλιν οὖσαν 
’ , Ἂ - 
ξυνῴκισε πάντας. Tuuc. Il, 15. (Here the Imperfects refer to 
the state of the country or the customs, the Aorists to single actions; 


ἐβασίλευσε, became king, ξυνῴκισε; collected into one state.) 


Nore 2. The Imperfect, like the Present (§ 10, N. 2), 
sometimes denotes attempted action, being in this case strictly 
an Imperfect tense. So especially ἐδίδουν and ἔπειθον. E. g. 


Φίλιππος ᾿Αλόννησον ἐδίδου, Philip offered Halonnesus (lit. tried 
to give it). ArscH. Cor. ὃ 83. Ἕκαστος ἔπειθεν αὐτὸν ὑποστῆναι 
τὴν ἀρχήν, each one tried to persuade him to undertake the command. 
Xen. An. VI, 1,19. Κῦμα torar’ ἀειρόμενον, κατὰ 8 ἥρεε Πηλείωνα, 
and was about to overpower the son of Peleus. Il. XXI, 327: Ἐμι- 
σθοῦτο παρ᾽ οὐκ ἐκδιδόντος τὴν αὐλήν, he tried to hire the yard of one 
who refused to let it. Hpr. I, 68. Πέμψαντες ἐς Σάρδις χρυσὸν 
ὠνέοντο, they wanted to buy gold. Hor. I, 69. ᾿Ἐπεθύμησε τῆς 
χλανίδος, καὶ αὐτὴν προσελθὼν ὠνέετο, he tried to buy it. Hor. Ill, 
139. *A ἐπράσσετο οὐκ ἐγένετο, what was attempted did not 
happen. Tuuc. VI, 74. So προσετίθει, she wanted to add. ARIST. 


Nub. 63. 

Nore 3. When the Present has the force of the Perfect 
(§ 10, 1, N. 4), the Imperfect has regularly the force of a Plu- 
perfect. (See § 17, N. 3). E.g. 

Ὁ ὄχλος κατὰ θέαν ἧ κεν, the crowd were come to look on. THUC. 


VI, 31. Ἐπεὶ ᾧχεο νηὶ Πύλονδε; after thou wast gone by ship to 
Pylos. Od. XVI, 24. 


Nore 4. The Imperfect sometimes denotes likelihood, in- 
tention, or danger in past time. (See § 10, 1, N.7.) E.g. 


Ἐπειδὴ τῷ ψεύδεσθαι ἀπώλλυτο, when he was on the point of 
ruin through his deceit. ANTIPHON. de Caed. Herod. § 37. Καὶ τἄμ᾽ 
ἔθνησκε τέκν᾽, ἀπωλλύμην δ᾽ ἐγώ, and my children were about to 
die, and I was about to perish. Eur. Here. F. 538. 


Note 5. The Imperfect is sometimes found in simple narration, 
where the Aorist would be expected, especially in Homer. The 
meaning of the verb often makes it indifferent which of the two is 
used. ‘Thus βαῖνον and βῆ are used without any perceptible differ- 
ence in II. I, 437, 439; so βάλλετο and βάλετο; Il, 43, 45; θῆκεν 
and rider, XXIII, 653, 656; δῶκε and δίδου, VII, 303, 305; ἔλιπεν and 
λεῖπε, LI, 106, 107; compare also μίστυλλον and ὥπτησαν, 1, 465, 466. 























ras oa NE ila enchant er Sa N eerie. 


Sta 





























USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 11. 


Herodotus and Thucydides use ἔλεγον and ἐκέλευον as Aorists. 
Compare ἔλεγον, Tuuc. I, 72, with εἶπον and ἔλεξε, I, 79. 

Note 6. The Imperfect sometimes expresses a fact, which is 
either the result of a previous discussion, or one that is just recog- 
nized as a fact by the speaker or writer, having previously been 
denied, overlooked, or misunderstood. In the latter case, the 
particle dpa is often joined to the verb. E. g. 

Ὦ πόποι, οὐκ ἄρα πάντα vonpoves οὐδὲ δίκαιοι ἦσαν Φαιήκων ἡγή- 
ropes ἠδὲ μέδοντες, i. 6. they are not, as I once imagined. Od. XIII, 
209. Οὐκ dpa μοῦνον ἔη ν ἐρίδων γένος, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ γαῖαν εἰσὶ δύω, there 
is not after all merely one race of discords, but there are two on earth. 
Hes. Op. 1. δ᾽ ἦν dpa ὁ ξυλλαβών με, this is then the one who 
seized me. Sopu. Phil. 978. Οὐ σὺ μόνος ἄρ᾽ ἦσθ᾽ ἔποψ; are 
you not then the only epops (as I thought)? Arist. Av. 280. Ἦν " 
μουσικὴ ἀντίστροφος τῆς γυμναστικῆς. εἰ μέμνησαι, music then (as we 
proved) corresponds to gymnastics. Piat. Rep. VII, 522 A. Ac- 
αφθεροῦμεν ἐκεῖνο; ὃ τῷ μὲν δικαίῳ βέλτιον ἐγίγνετο, τῷ δὲ ἀδίκῳ 
ἀπώλλυτο. we shall destroy that which (as we proved) becomes better 
by justice and is ruined by injustice. PLar. Crit. 47 D. *Ap’ οὐ τόδε 
ἦν τὸ δένδρον. ἐφ᾽ ὅπερ ἦγες ἡμᾶς ; 18 not this after all the tree to 
which you were bringing us? PLat. Phaedr. 230 A. 

Note 7. The Greek sometimes uses an idiom like the English 
he was the one who did it for he is the one who did it; as ἦν ὁ τὴν 
γνώμην ταύτην εἰπὼν Πείσανδρος, Tuuc. VIII, 68; τίς ἦν ὁ βοηθήσας 
τοῖς Βυζαντίοις καὶ σώσας αὐτούς; Dem. Cor. 255, 2. (See Note 6.) 


B. The Present in the Dependent Moods. 


Remark. The distinction of time which marks the Present 
and Aorist in the Indicative is retained in the Optative and 
Infinitive of indirect discourse, and usually in the Participles. 

But in all other constructions, this distinction of time dis- 
appears in the dependent moods, and the Present and Aorist 
differ only in this, that the Present denotes a continued or 
repeated action, while the Aorist denotes the s¢mple occurrence 
of an action, the time being determined by the construction. 
In these cases the Present and Aorist are the tenses chiefly 
used ; the Perfect is seldom required (8 18,1, N.), and the 
Future is exceptional (δ 27, Notes). It must bé remembered 
that the Greek distinction between the Present and Aorist in 
the Subjunctive and Optative is one which the Latin could not 
express; the Present, for example, being the only form found 
in the Latin Subjunctive to express a condition which the 
Greek can express by the Present or Aorist Optative, and some- 
times by the Present or Aorist Subjunctive, each with some 


§ 12.] PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 9 


peculiar meaning. Thus εἰ τοῦτο moto in, if he should do this 
(habitually), εἰ ποιήσειε; (simply) if he should do this, and 
sometimes ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῇ (Or ποιήσῃ). if he (ever) does this, 
may each be translated by st hoc faciat. 

This distinction, although in general strictly observed, was 
sometimes neglected even by the best authors : we occasionally 
find, for example, the Present Subjunctive where the Aorist 
would have expressed the idea more exactly, and vice versa. 
In other examples the two seem to be used in nearly the same 
sense. (See XEN. Cyr. V, 5, 13.) These are to be considered 
merely as exceptions ; when, however, the Aorist is wanting, 
as in εἰμί, the Present regularly takes the place of both. 


§ 412. The Present Subjunctive denotes ἃ continued 
or repeated action, the time of which is determined as 
follows : — Pe. 

(a.) In clauses denoting ἃ purpose after ἵνα, ὅπως, 
&c., or the object of fear after μή, it refers to time fu- 
ture relatively to that of the leading verb. 

(6.) In conditional sentences, — in ordinary protasis 
(8 50, 1), the Subjunctive refers simply to the future ; 
if the supposition is general (depending on ἃ verb of 
present time which expresses a repeated action or ἃ 
general truth), the Subjunctive is indefinite in its time, 
but is expressed in English by the Present. ‘This ap- 
plies also to all conditional relative and temporal sen- 
tences. ; 

(c.) In independent sentences (in exhortations, pro- 
hibitions, questions of doubt, &c.) the Subjunctive 
refers to the future. LE. δ. 


’ ε “ 

(α.) Δοκεῖ μοι κατακαῦσαι τὰς ἁμάξας, ἵνα μὴ τὰ ἰύγη ἀρῶν σὸν 
τηγῇ: ἀλλὰ πορευώμεθα ὅπῃ ἂν τῇ στρατιᾷ i τῷ οὖ Ὁ 
good to me to burn the wagons, that our beasts of burden ᾿ - he 
our generals, and that we may go on whithersoever ὦ may be est J : 
the army. XEN. An. Til, 2, 27. Kat yap βασιλεὺς αἱρεῖται, οὐχ wa 
ἑαυτοῦ καλῶς ἐπιμελῆται, ἀλλ᾽ wa καὶ οἱ ἑλόμενοι δι᾿ αὑτὸν εὖ 


πράττωσι. Xen. Mem. ΠῚ, 2, 3. 


(b.) *Ay δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται; πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι; Ἕ if any 
one shall stand opposed to us, we will try to subdue him. AEN. An. 
1* 




















10 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 12. 


Vv * ‘ Φ κυ * ᾿ 
Il, 3, 11. “Κἂν πόλεμος ἦ, ἕως ἂν ἐπ᾽ ἄλλον ἔχωμεν στρατεύεσθαι, 
σοῦ τε καὶ τῶν σῶν ἀφεξόμεθα, and if there shall be war, so long as we 
shall be able, &c. Id. Hell. IV, 1, 38. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἡ ἃ poKw βέ 
ee 241, an ἢ ἂν γιγνώσκω βελτι- 
στα ἐρῶ, but I will speak as I shall think best. Tuuc. VI, 9. Οὖὗς ἂν 
, , ’ ΄ > ~ ’ ; 
βούλῃ ποιήσασθαι φίλους, ἀγαθόν τι λέγε περὶ αὐτῶν πρὸς τοὺς ἀπαγ- 
γέλλοντας, whomsoever you shall wish, &c. 1500. Demon. p. 9 C. § 33 
Ara λ , a > - ‘ , , ΄ , : Ἁ is. eae 
: ; eyes, av ἀπῇ Ta πράγματα, paratoy τι φαίνεται καὶ κενόν, all 
ey if (wherever) deeds are wanting, appears vain and useless. DEM 
IL, 21, 2 ri ‘rows ἐθέ EGE ee 
, 21, 20. Συμμαχεῖν τούτοις ἐθέλουσιν ἅπαντες, ois ἂν ὁρῶσι 
παρεσκευασμένους, all are willing to be allied to those whom they see 


prepared. Id. Phil. I, 42, 1. 


(c.) Πειθώμεθα πάντες: φεύγωμεν σὺν νηυσὶ φίλην ἐς πατρίδα 
γαῖαν, let us all be persuaded ; let us fly, &c. Il. U, 139. Τί φῶ, a 
δρῶ; what shall I say? what shall I do? Sigs ole περὶ τον μι 
ποιῶμεν; how then shall we act about this? PLar. Phileb. 63 A. - 


See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 


ὁ is. 1. The Present Optative, when it is not in 
indirect discourse, denotes a continued or repeated ac- 
tion, the time of which is determined as follows : — 

(a.) In clauses denoting a purpose after ἵνα, ὅπως, 
&c., or the object of fear after μή, it refers to time Su- 
ture relatively to that of the leading verb. 

(6.) in conditional sentences, — in ordinary protasis 
(§ 00, 2), the Optative refers to the future (only more 
vaguely than the Subjunctive) ; if the supposition is 
general (depending on a verb of past time which ex- 
presses a repeated action or general truth), the Optative 
refers to indefinite past time. This applies also to all 
conditional relative and temporal sentences. 

(6.) In independent sentences (that is, in expressions 
of a wish, and in Apodosis with av) the Optative refers 
to the future. KE. g. 


, > , a 
᾿Ξ ον a ἵνα εὖ πράττοι, he desired this in order that 
ee » osperity. EdoBeiro μὴ τοῦτο ποιοῖεν, he feared lest 
y shou do this (habitually). Δῆλος ἦν ἐπιθυμῶν ἄρχειν, ὅπως πλεί 
one aed ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ τιμᾶσθαι, ἵνα πλείω κερδαΐνοι" des το 
Ἢ σατο adhe wpe igi ane ngroe i ἀδικῶν μὴ δεδοίη δίκην. 
ferred to single acts of note tet getting aut aias ona 
ment, while the present refers aaa mate vas τ 
course of conduct.) Ἔ re 


§ 13, 2.] PRESENT OPTATIVE. 1 


(b.) οὐ yap ἂν ἐπαινοίη pe, εἰ ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας, 
for he would not praise me, if I should banish my benefactors. XEN. 
An. VIL, 7,11. Eins φορητὸς οὐκ ἂν, εἰπράσσοις καλῶς, you would 
not be endurable, if you should be in prosperity (at any time). AESCH. 
Prom. 979. Πῶς yap ἄν τις, ἅ ye μὴ ἐπίσταιτο, ταῦτα σοφὸς εἴη; 
for how could any one be wise in that which he did not understand ? 
(i. 6. εἴ τινα μὴ ἐπίσταιτο.) XEN. Mem. IV, 6, 7. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἴ Te μὴ 
φέροιμεν, @Tpuvev φέρειν, but if we neglected to bring anything, he 
always exhorted us to bring 1. Eur. Ale. 755. Οὐκ ἀπελείπετο ἔτι 
αὐτοῦ, εἰ μή τι ἀναγκαῖον εἴη, he never left him, unless there was some 
necessity for it. XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 40. Ὁπότε Evaydpav ὁρῷεν; 
ἐφοβοῦντο, whenever they saw Evagoras, they were afraid. 1500. Evag. 
193 D. § 24. 

(c.) Εἴθε τοῦτο εἴη (utinam sit), O that this may be. Εἴθε μὴ 
ταῦτα πάσχοιεν, may they not suffer these things (habitually). But 
εἴθε μὴ πάθοιεν, may they not suffer (in a single case). See examples 
of Apodosis with ἄν above, under (0). 

See other examples under the rules in Chapter IY. 

2. In indirect quotations and questions, each tense 
of the Optative denotes the same time, relatively to the 
leading verb, which the tense (of any mood) which it 
represents denoted in the direct discourse. (See § 69, 1.) 

(a.) If therefore the Present Optative represents a 
Present Indicative of the direct discourse, it denotes a 
continued or repeated action, contemporary with that of 
the leading verb (that is, relatively present). Εἰ. δ. 

Περικλῆς προηγόρευε, ὅτι ᾿Αρχίδάᾶμός οἱ ξένος ein, Pericles an- 
nounced that Archidamus was his friend (i. e. he said ξένος poi ἐστιν). 
Tuue. Il, 13. Ἔγνωσαν ὅτι κενὸς ὁ φόβος εἴη, they learned that their 
fear was groundless (i. 6. they learned κενός ἐστιν). XEN. An. I, 2, 

21. Ἐπυνθάνετο εἰ οἱ κοῖτο ἡ χώρα; he asked whether the country was 
inhabited (i. e. he asked the question, Is the country inhabited ?). XEN. 
Cyr. IV, 4, 4. 

(b.) But if it represents a Present Subjunctive of the 
direct discourse, it denotes a continued or repeated 
action, which is futwre with reference to the leading 


verb. KE. g. 


Κλέαρχος ἐβουλεύετο, εἰ πέμποιέν τινας ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν. Clear- 
chus was deliberating whether they should send a few, or should all 
go. Xen. An. 1. 10, 5. (The question was, πέμπωμέν τινας ἢ 
πάντες ἴωμεν; shall we send a few, or shall we all go? See § 88.) 


Remark. Examples of the Present Optative representing the 























12 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 13, 2. 


~ ate Racer or Subjunctive in a dependent clause of the 
mani 7a to which the same principles apply, may be found 
Nore 1. It will be seen, by a comparison of the examples 
under (a) and (6), that an ambiguity may sometimes arise from 
uncertainty whether the Optative stands for the Present In- 
dicative or for the Present Subjunctive in a question of doubt 
(§ 88). Thus ἠγνόουν ὅ τι ποιοῖεν might mean they knew not 
what they were doing (the Optative representing τί ποιοῦμεν ; 
what are we doing 3) or they knew not what to do (the Optative 
representing τί ποιῶμεν ; what shall we do?). The context 
must decide in each case. See § 71. 
_ Nore 2. In the few instances in which the Present Optative in 
indirect quotations represents the Imperfect of the direct discourse 
it of course denotes time past relatively to the leading verb. See 


§ 70, 2, N.1 (0). 


§ 14. The Present Imperative refers to a continued 
or repeated action in future time; as φεῦγε, begone ; 
xatpovtwr, let them rejoice; μὴ νομίζετε, do not believe. 


8 15. The Present Infinitive has three distinct 
uses : — 


1. First, in its ordinary use (either with or without 
the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse, it 
denotes a continued or repeated action without γῶν to 
time, unless its time is specially defined by the context. 


EK. g. 


Ἔξξεστι μένειν, it is possible to remain. Ἐξέσται τοῦτο ποιεῖν, tt will 
be possible to do this. Δέομαι ὑμῶν μένειν, I beg you to remain. τί 
τὸ κωλῦον ἔτ᾽ αὐτὸν ἔσται βαδίζειν ὅποι βούλεται, what will there be 
to prevent him from going whither he pleases? Dem. Ol. I, 12, 22. 
Εκέλευσα αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιεῖν, [ commanded him to do this. ᾿Ἐβού- 
Aero σοφὸς εἶναι; he wished to be wise. Δεινός ἐστι λέγειν, hers skilled 
in speaking. Ὥρα βαδίζειν, it is time to be going. Πᾶν ποιοῦσιν 
ὥστε δίκην μὴ διδόναι, they do everything, so as to avoid beiny 
punished. Prat. Gorg. 479 C. Tod μὲν οὖν ἐπιτιμᾶν ἴσως φήσαι τις 
ἂν ῥᾷδιον εἶναι, τὸ δ᾽ ὅ τι δεῖ πράττειν ἀποφαίνεσθαι, τοῦτ᾽ εἶναι 
συμβούλου, some one may say that finding fault is easy but that 
rag what ought to be done is the duty of an adviser. Dem. Ol. I 
— oe a pag pr ap vee and πράττειν belong under 

gs under ὃ 15, 2.) Οὐ πλεο- 


§ 15, 2.] PRESENT INFINITIVE. 13 


νεξίας ἕνεκεν ταῦτ᾽ ἔπραξεν, ἀλλὰ τῷ δικαιότερα τοὺς Θηβαίους ἣ vpas 
ἀξιοῦν, he did this not from love of gain, but because of the Thebans 
making juster demands than you. Dem. Phil. Il, 69, 6. ᾿Ἐτειχίσθη 
δὲ ᾿Αταλάντη νῆσος, τοῦ μὴ λῃστὰς κακουργεῖν τὴν Εὔβοιαν, in order to 
prevent pirates from ravaging Euboea. THUC. I, 32. 


Remark. The Infinitive in this its ordinary use has usually no 
more reference to time than any verbal noun, and the distinction of 
tense therefore disappears, the Present differing from the Aorist 
only by expressing a continued or repeated action. An Infinitive 
which in itself has no reference to time may, however, be referred 
to some particular time, like any other verbal noun, by the verb on 
which it depends, by some particle like Sore or πρίν; or by some 
other word in the sentence. Thus ὥστε denoting a purpose refers 
the Infinitive to the future: the Infinitive without ὥστε expressing 
a purpose is likewise future. After a large class of verbs, as those 
of commanding, advising, desiring, asking, &c., whose signification 
points to the future, the Infinitive necessarily denotes relative future 
time. (For an irregular use of the Future Infinitive after such 
verbs, see § 27, N. 2.) The time denoted by the Infinitive in any 
of these constructions must be carefully distinguished from that 
which it denotes in indirect discourse (§ 15, 2), where its tense is 
fully preserved. 

Nore 1. For a discussion of the Infinitive with the article and 
a subject, with reference to its time, see Appendix, II. 


Note 2. Xpao, ἀναιρέω, θεσπίζω, and other verbs sionifying to 
give an oracular response, are sometimes followed by the Present (as 
well as the Aorist) Infinitive, where we might expect the Future on 
the principle of indirect discourse (8 15,2, Ν. 1). These verbs here 
take the ordinary construction of verbs of commanding, advising, and 
warning. E. g. 

Λέγεται δὲ ᾿Αλκμαίωνι τὸν ᾿Απόλλω ταύτην τὴν γῆν χρῆσαι οἰκεῖν; 
it is said that Apollo gave a response to Alemaeon that he should τη- 
habit this land. Tuuc. II, 102. The Future is sometimes found. 


For the Aorist, see § 23, 1, N. 2. 
2. Secondly, the Present Infinitive in indirect dis- 


course is used to represent a Present Indicative of the 
direct discourse, and therefore denotes a continued or 
repeated action, which is contemporary with that of the 
leading verb, that is, relatively present. KH. g. 

Φησὶ γράφειν, he says that he is writing ; ἔφη γράφειν, he said 
that he was writing (i. 6. he said “ I am writing”); φήσει γράφειν; 
he will say that he is (then) writing. ᾿Αρρωστεῖν προφασίζεται, he 
sretends that he is sick. ᾿Εξώμοσεν ἀρρωστεῖν τουτονί, he took his 
oath that this man was sick, DEM. F. L. 379,15 and 17. Οὐκ ἔφη 
αὐτὸς GAN ἐκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν; he said that not he himself, but Nicias, 





14 USE ΟΡ THE TENSES. 


was general ; 1. 6. he said, οὐκ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνος στρατηγεῖ. 
Tuuc. IV, 28. For the Present Infinitive with ἄν (not included 
here), see § 41. 


Nore 1. The Infinitive is said to stand in indirect discourse, with 
its tenses thus corresponding to the same tenses of the Indicative, 
ouly when it depends upon verbs implying thought or the expression 
of thought (verba sentiendi et declarandi), and when also the thought, 
as originally conceived, would have been expressed by some tense 
of the Indicative, which the corresponding tense of the Infinitive 
can represent. Thus verbs of commanding, wishing, and others 
enumerated in § 92, 1, although they may imply thought, yet never 
introduce an indirect quotation in the sense here intended, as an 
Infinitive after them never stands for an Indicative, but is merely 
the ordinary Infinitive used as a verbal noun, without any definite 
time. See § 73, 1, Remark; where the principle is stated in full, 
so as to include all the tenses and the Infinitive with ἄν. 


Norte 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to expect, to 
promise, and the like, after which the Future Infinitive stands 
regularly in indirect discourse (as representing a Future Indicative 
of the direct discourse), sometimes take the Present or the Aorist 
Infinitive. E. g. 


Ὡμολόγεις καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς πολιτεύεσθαι, you agreed to live according 
to us (the laws). Prat. Crit. 52 C. Ξυνέθου πολιτεύεσθαι. Id. 
52 D. Προσαγαγὼν ἐγγυητὰς ἢ μὴν πορεύεσθαι, having giving 
securities that he would go. XEN. Cyr. VI, 2, 39. Ἐλπίζει δυνατὸς 
εἶναι ἄρχειν, he hopes to be able to rule. PLAT. Rep. LX, 573 C. 
(But in Hpr. I, 30, ἐλπίζων εἶναι ὀλβιώτατος ἐπειρώτα, means, he 
asked, trusting that he was, εἶναι being a recular Present Infinitive of 
indirect discourse. So I. 22, ἐλπίζων . . 
σθαι.) 

In these cases the Infinitive seems to be used nearly as in § 15, 
1, without regard to time. The Greek makes no more distinction 
than the English between ἐλπίζει τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he hopes to do this, 
and ἐλπίζει τοῦτο ποιήσειν, he hopes that he shall do this. Compare 
φαμὲν τοῦτον ὡμολογηκέναι ταῦτα ποι ἥσειν with φάσκοντές σε ὡμολο- 

ἠκέναι πολιτεύεσθαι. PLAT. Crit. 51 E and δ2 D. The Future, 
nw is the regular form (§ 27, N. 3). For the Aorist, see § 23, 
2, N. 2. 


᾽ A ‘ 4 ΄ 
ee E€ELVAL Kai TOY λεὼν τετρυ- 


Norte 8. Even verbs of saying and thinking, — as λέγω, when it 
signifies to command, and δοκεῖ, it seems good, — may be followed by 
the ordinary Infinitive of § 15, 1, referring to the future. Εἶπον is 
very seldom followed by the Infinitive, except when it signifies to 
command. (See ὃ 92,2, N.1.) The context must distinguish these 
5568 from indirect quotations. E. g. 


Τούτοις ἔλεγον πλεῖν, I told them to sail. Dem. F. L. 388, 4. 
“Τούτους ἔλεγον πλεῖν would mean J said that they were sailing.) 
+? , . . . 

Εἰπὼν μηδένα παριέναι eis τὴν ἀκρόπολιν, having given orders that no 


INT IN T. 15 
8 15, 3.] PRESENT INFINITIVE AS IMPERFEC 


2 i ἡμῖν τοῦτο 
one should pass into the citadel. XEN. Hell. V, 2, 29. Δοκεῖ ἡμῖν “- 
ποιεῖν, it pleases us to do this. (But δοκεῖ μοι vpas ἐς ὰ τ 
means it seems to me that you are doing this, by § 15, 2.) 


ὃ δι . ts aia τ! 
in the sense it was resolved, introducing a resolution or enactment, 
followed by the Present or Aorist (not Future) Infinitive. 


8. Thirdly, the Present Infinitive belongs also to the 
Imperfect, and is used in indirect discourse to repre- 
mperfect, 8 An | aoe se ee 
sent an Imperfect Indicative of the direct disco ay 
It here denotes continued or repeated action pc: is 
past with reference to the leading verb, thus supplying 

the want of an Imperfect Infinitive. Εἰ. g. 


vey by Di ὅτ᾽ ἔσπεν- 
Τίνας οὖν εὐχὰς ὑπολαμβάνετ “ἔχεσθει - = ΝΣ 
what prayers ; suppose Philip made wh 
δεν; what prayers then do you suj ῳ ᾿ : 
ing the libations? Dem. F. L. 381, 10. (Here the temporal epee 
ὅτ᾽ ἔσπενδεν shows the past time denoted by εὔχεσθαι.) — ole ed 
΄ εξ ΄“ @ ὦ 
πλέον Φωκέας Θηβαίων ἢ Φίλιππον ὑμῶν ΚΡΌΤΟ be Priot nade 
: ᾿ o ad 
“tore j cians over the £hebans, t 
, : that the superiority of the Pho 
I Philip ¢ gi in the war (the war being then 
‘Philip ov as the greater in the war (the war being 
of Philip over you, was ( jar (ine wat Β6-Ὁ 
vent) ? ‘Dan F. L. 387, 6. (Here the direct discourse μενοι = 
a 7 ; aig j é 7 ~ ‘ » ~ > ΄ i- 
ἐκράτουν and ἐκράτει.) Πῶς γὰρ οἴεσθε δυσχερῶς ἀκούειν Ολυνθι- 
¥ τίς τι λέγοι κατὰ Φιλίππου κατ ἐκείνους TOUS χρόνους, oT 
ἡ πένόνν ἀνε ad d.; dpa προσδοκᾶν αὕτους 
᾿Ανθεμοῦντα αὐτοῖς ἀφίει, K. τ. Ages ss ὦ gpk: 
οιαῦτα πείσεσθαι (sc. οἴεσθε) ; » « + + ἀρ οἴεσθε, ὅτε τοὺς eo 
zed@adne νὰ a ; for yunwillingly 
ἐξέβαλλε, (τοὺς Θετταλοὺς) yh ser ght ἂν Kk. τ. λ.; —— aE 
Ὁ YG ink the Ol ians used to hear u, uf any one s¢ 
do you think the Olynthians y nee — 
ii lip 2 , 1e was ceding Anthemus to them, 
tt Ph those times when he was cedin . 
against Philip in oS ee τ λολτον 
Ke. | ink were expecting to suffer 8 ngs 3 
&e.? Do you think they ( Se 
T: as al e despots, were 
ink ssalians, when he was expelling th ἶ 
you think that the Thessalia : a he w ὦ δ ig στοῶν 
υὐθαβεαετρηα &e.? Dem. Phil. II, p. 70, 25 to p. 71, or ον ὅροι ν 
7 x ; 2 . . 
discourse here was πῶς - . «+ ἦκουον, εἰ - “τ λέγοι ; and προσεδόν < 
ce ὺς ἐπὶ τῶ j “μῶν λέγοντας ἀκούω τούτῳ τῷ εθει 
Καὶ γὰρ τοὺς ἐπὶ τῶν προγόνων ἡμῶν Λεγοντ' ἀρὰ ὄρ ae 
σθαι, [ hear that they used to follow this custom. eM. Ol. ΠΙ, 
; ὲ ‘ δν με sc. 
δι 17 Ta μὲν mpd “Ἕλληνος οὐδὲ εἶναι ἡ ἐπίκλησις -_ τ “ 
re : 7 oe 4 J v 
δου in the times before Hellen this name does not —— ἊΝ 
even existed. Tuuc. I, 3. Again, in the same sentence of Lhucyd 
YE « . J . 5 . 5 : a δὴ μι by 
des, παρέχεσθαι, to have furnished. Mera ταῦτα ἔφη — 
S, ' ᾿ 4 
δειπνεῖν; τὸν δὲ Σωκράτη οὐκ εἰσιέναι" Tov οὖν “Ayal κα Ὑρρ 
ι 1 ὲ } . Ad Ἷ .Ψ 
λάκις κελεύειν μεταπέμψασθαι τὸν Σωκράτη; € δὲ yr : peri 
. > - ε ε 
Symp. 176 C. (He said, ἐδειπνοῦμεν, 6 δε 2. οὐκ εἰσῇ 5 
aioe ἐγὼ δὲ οὐκ εἴ Σ εἶν γὰρ (ἔφη) ᾿Ατρεστίδᾳ mapa 
ἐκέλευεν - - - - ἐγὼ δὲ οὐκ εἴων.) δΣυντυχεῖν yap | ΡΟΣ 
, é ὶ ᾿ αὐτοῦ ιδάρια 
( €T αὐτοῦ yuvata Kat παιθα ει 
Φιλίππου πορευομένῳ, καὶ μ καὶ παιῦς τ» 
or he said that he had met (Aor.) Atrestidas one a a 
Ἶ . . . Ἢ > ᾿ : τ 
and that there were walking with him, &c. Dem. τὸ Ὁ ; ea 
ἐγώ φημι δεῖν ἐμὲ μὴ λαθεῖν, I say that this ought not to have escaped 
ἐγώ ι δεῖ , 1 sai —= . ' = 
εν white Dem. Cor. 291,27. (The direct discourse here “vas τοῦ 


ἔδει ἐμὲ μὴ λαθεῖν. § 49, 2, N, 3.) 








16 USE OF THE TENSES. 


For the Imperfect Participle, see § 16, 2. 


Remark 1. This use of the Present of the Infinitive as an Im- 
perfect cannot be too carefully distinguished from its ordinary use 
after past tenses, where we translate it by the Imperfect, as in ἔλεγε 
τὸ στράτευμα μάχεσθαι, he said that the army was fighting. But here 
μάχεσθαι refers to time present, relatively to ἔλεγε ; Whereas, if it had 
been used as an Imperfect, it would have referred to time past 
relatively to ἔλεγε; as in ἔλεγε TO στράτευμα τῇ προτεραίᾳ μάχεσθαι, 
he said that the army had been fighting on the day before. ἯΣ the 
former case the direct discourse was μάχεται; in the latter it was 
ἐμάχετο. Such an Imperfect Infinitive differs from the Aorist in 
the same construction only by expressing a continued or repeated 
action (as in the Indicative) : it gives, in fact, the only means of 
representing in the Infinitive what is usually expressed by λέγει ὅτι 
ἐποίει, he says that he was doing, differing from λέγει ὅτι ἐποίησεν, he 
says that he did. (For the rare use of the Present Optative to 
represent the Imperfect in the same way, see § 70, 2, N. 1, (0).) It 
must be observed, that this construction is never used unless the 
context makes it certain that the Infinitive represents an Imper- 
fect and not a Present, so that no ambiguity can arise. See the 
examples. 

ReMARK 2. This important distinction between the ordinary 
Present Infinitive referring to the past (when it takes its time 
from a past tense on which it depends), and the same tense used 
as an Imperfect and referring to the past by its own signification, 
seems to be overlooked by those who would call the former also a 
case of Imperfect Infinitive. But in the former case ἔφη τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν is translated he said that he was doing this merely to suit 
the English idiom, whereas the Greeks used the Present because 
the time was to be present (relatively to ἔφη); the direct discourse 
being τοῦτο ποιῶ: in the other case, however, ἔφη τοῦτο ποιεῖν TH 
mporepaia, he said that he had been doing this the day before, the Greeks 
used ποιεῖν as a regular Imperfect (relatively to ἔφη), the direct 
discourse being τοῦτο ἐποίουν. So in Latin (Cic. Phil. VIII, 19), 
Q. Scaevolam memoria teneo bello Marsico, cum esset summa 
senectute, quotidie facere omnibus conveniendi potestatem sui. So 
(Cic. de Off. I, 30), Q. Maximum accepimus facile celare, tacere, 
dissimulare, insidiari, praeripere hostium consilia. 

The frequency of such constructions and their principle have 
been often overlooked, from the fact that they occur only when the 
context prevents all possible ambiguity. 


16. 1. The Present Participle regularly refers to a 
continued or repeated action, which is contemporary 
with that of the leading verb. Εἰ. g. 


Τοῦτο ποιοῦσιν νομίζοντες K. T. Δ.» they do this because they think, 
&e. Ἐποίουν νομίζοντες, they were doing it in the thought, &e. 
Emoinoav νομίζοντες, they did it because they thought, ὅτ. Ποιή- 


§ 16, 2.] PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 17 


σουσιν νομίζοντες, they will do i in the thought, &o. Ταῦτ᾽ ἐπράχθη 
Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος, these things were done when Conon was 
general. 800. Evag. p. 200 C. § 56. (Srparnyoovros is present rela- 
tively to ἐπράχθη.) Καὶ τοιαῦτα πράττων τί ἐποίει; απ ἴῃ doing 
such things what was he doing? Drm. Phil. III, 114, 20. 


Nore. When the Present Participle is used like an ordinary 
Adjective or Substantive (as in § 108), it occasionally refers to 
time absolutely present, even when the leading verb is not present. 
This must always be denoted by an adverb like νῦν, or by some- 
thing else in the context. E. g. 

Τὴν νῦν Βοιωτίαν καλουμένην ᾧκησαν, they settled in the country 
now called Boeotia. Tuuc. 1, 12. Ὁ τοίνυν Φίλιππος ἐξ ἀρχῆς, οὔπω 
Διοπείθους στρατηγοῦντος, οὐδὲ τῶν ὄντων ἐν Χερρονήσῳ νῦν ἀπε- 
σταλμένων, Σέρρειον καὶ Δορίσκον ἐλάμβανε, Philip then in the begin- 
ning, when Diopeithes was not yet general, and when the soldiers who 
ARE Now in the Chersonese had not yet been sent out, seized upon 
Serrium and Doriscus. Dem. Phil. Ill, 114, 15. (Here orparn- 
yoovros is present to the time of ἐλάμβανε, while ὄντων is present to 
the time of speaking.) 


9 The Present Participle is also used as an Imper- 
fect, like the Present Infinitive. With the Participle 
this use is not confined (as it is with the Infinitive) to 
indirect discourse. KE. g. 

Οἱσυμπρεσβεύοντες καὶ παρόντες καταμαρτυρήσουσιν, those 
who were his colleagues on the embassy and who were present will 
testify. Dem. F. L. 381, 5. (Here the embassy is referred to as ἃ 
well-known event in the past.) Φαίνεται yap ἡ νῦν Ἑλλὰς καλουμένη 
οὐ πάλαι βεβαίως οἰκουμένη; ἀλλὰ μεταναστάσεις τε οὖσαι τὰ 
πρότερα, καὶ ῥᾳδίως ἕκαστοι τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀπολείποντες, i. 6. the 
following things are evident, Ἑλλὰς οὐ πάλαι βεβαίως φκεῖτο, ἀλλὰ 

εταναστάσεις ἦσαν, καὶ ἕκαστοι τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἀπέλειπον. Tuuc. I, 2. 
Οἶδα τὸν Σωκράτην δεικνύντα τοῖς ξυνοῦσιν ἑαυτὸν καλὸν κἀγαθὸν 
ὅντα. Οἶδα δὲ κἀκείνω σωφρονοῦντε;, ἔστε Σωκράτει συνήστην. 
Xen. Mem. I, 2, 18. (The direct discourse here was ἐδείκνυ and 
ἐσωφρονείτην.) 

The principles stated in § 15, 3, with Remarks (cf. § 73, 1) in re- 
gard to the Present Infinitive used as an Imperfect apply equally to 
the Participle. 

Remark. The rules for the time of the Infinitive and Participle 
given in this chapter do not include the Infinitive and Participle 
with dy. For these see Chapter ΠΗ. § 41. 








USE OF THE TENSES. 


PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. 


A. In the Indicative. 


§ 17.1. The Perfect represents an action as already 
finished at the present time ; as γέγραφα, I have written 
(that is, my writing is now finished). 

2. The Pluperfect represents an action as already 
finished at some specified past time; as ἐγεγράφειν, I 
had written (that is, my writing was finished at some 
specified past time). 


Note 1. The consideration that the Perfect, although it implies 
the performance of the action in past time, yet states only that it 
stands completed at the present time, will explain why the Perfect is 
classed with the Present and Future among the primary tenses, that 
is, the tenses of present or future time. 


Note 2. The Perfect Indicative and the Pluperfect may be 
expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Present or Imperfect 
of εἰμί. Here, however, each part of the compound generally re- 
tains its own signification, so that this form expresses more fully the 
continuance of the result of the action down to the present time (in 
the case of the Perfect), and down to the past time referred to (in 
the case of the Pluperfect). E. ¢g. 

Πεποιηκώς ἐστιν (or ἦν), he is (or was) in the condition of having 
lone, —he has done (or had done). ᾿Ἐμοῦ οἱ νόμοι οὐ μόνον ame yva- 
κότες εἰσὶ μὴ ἀδικεῖν, ἀλλὰ καὶ κεκελευκότες ταύτην τὴν δίκην» 
λαμβάνειν, it rs the laws which have not only acquitted me of injustice, 
but have commanded me to inflict this punishment. Lys. de Morte 
Erat. p. 95, 4. ὃ 34. Οὐρανὸς γεγονώς ἐστί τε καὶ ἔτ᾽ ἔσται, 
heaven has been formed (and still exists), and will still continue. 
PuatT. Tim. 31 B. 


Remark. The latter part of Note 2 of course does not apply to 
cases where the compound form is the only one in use, as in the 
third person plural of the Perfect and Pluperfect Passive and 
Middle of mute and liquid verbs. 

On the other hand, the simple form very often implies the con- 
tinuance of the result of the action down to the present time, or 
down to a specified past time; but not so distinctly as the com- 
a form, and not necessarily. (See the last two examples.) 

κὰν 

Ἐπιμελῶς οἱ θεοὶ ὧν οἱ ἄνθρωποι δέονται κατεσκευάκασιν, the 
Gods have carefully provided what men need. XEN. Mem. IV, 3, 3. 
Τῶν ποιητῶν τινες ὑποθήκας καταλελοίπασιν; some of the poets have 
left us maxims. Isoc. Nicocl. p. 15 Β. ὃ 3. ᾿Ακήκοα μὲν τοὔνομα, 


§ 18.] PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT. 19 


νημονεύω δ᾽ οὔ, I have heard the name, but I do not remember it. 
>rAT. Theaet. 144 B. Ἅ σοι τύχη κέχρηκε; ταῦτ᾽ —s For- 
tune has taken back what she has lent you. MENAND. Frag. Incert. 
No. 41. 


Nore 8. The Perfect of many verbs has the signification of 
a Present, which is usually explained by the peculiar meaning 
of these verbs. Thus θνήσκειν, to die, τεθνηκέναι, to be dead ; 
καλεῖν, to call, κεκλῆσθαι, to be called or named ; γίγνεσθαι, to 
become, γεγονέναι, to be; μιμνήσκειν, to remind, μεμνῆσθαι, 
to remember ; οἶδα (novi), J know ; &e. 

The Pluperfect of such verbs has the signification of the 
Imperfect ; as οἶδα, 7 know, jdew, 1 knew. (ὃ 29, N. 5.) 


Nore 4. In Homer and Herodotus the Pluperfect is sometimes 
found in nearly the same sense as the Aorist. E. g. 

Βεβλήκει γλουτὸν κατὰ δεξιόν. Il. V, 66. (Here two Aorists 
follow, referring to the same time as βεβλήκει.) Ταῦτα ὡς ἐπύθοντο, 
ὡρμέατο βοηθέειν, when they heard this, they started to carry aid. 
Hor. IX, 61. ἤλλλοι δὲ ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες ὡρμέατο ἐπὶ τὸ ἱρόν. Hot 
VIII, 35. 

Norte 5. In epistles, the Perfect and Aorist are sometimes used 
where we might expect the Present, the writer transferring himself 
to the time of the reader. E. g. 

᾿Απέσταλκά σοι τόνδε τὸν λόγον, I send you this speech. Isoc. De- 
mon. ὃ 2. Mer ᾿Αρταβάζου, ὅν σοι ἔπεμψα; πράσσε. Tuuc. I, 129. 
(Here ὃν ἔπεμψα refers to the man who was to carry the letter.) 
So scripst in Latin. 

Note 6. The perfect sometimes refers to the future, to denote 
the certainty or likelihood that an action will immediately take 
place, in a sense similar to that of the Present (§ 10, N. 7), but with 
more emphasis, as the change in time is greater. E. g. 

Ὥστ᾽ εἴ pe τόξων ἐγκρατὴς αἰσθήσεται, ὄλωλα, 1 shall perish at 
once. Sopu. Phil. 75. Κἂν τοῦτο νικῶμεν, πάνθ᾽ ἡμῖν πεποίηται. 
Xen. An. I, 8, 12. So perii in Latin. 

The Pluperfect can express the same certainty or likelihood 
transferred to the past. 


B. Perfect in the Dependent. Moods. 


§ 18. As the Perfect Indicative represents an act as 
finished at the present time, so the Perfect of any of the 
dependent moods represents an act as finished at the 
time (present, past, or future) at which the Present of 
that mood would represent it as gong on. 











20 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 18, 1. 


1. The Perfect Subjunctive and Optative are very 
often expressed in the active, and almost always in 


the passive and middle, by the Perfect Participle with 
ω and εἴην > and can always be resolved into these. 
Their time, therefore, in each case, can be seen by 
applying the principles stated in §§ 12 and 13 to the 
ὦ or εἴην. Where the Present would denote future 
time, the Perfect denotes futwre-perfect time. ΕἾ. g. 

Τὸ χρόνον γεγενῆσθαι πολὺν δέδοικα μή τινα λήθην ὑμῖν πεποιήκῇῃ» 
I fear lest the fact that a long time has passed may (when you come to 
decide the case) prove to have caused in you some forgetfulness 
Dem. F. L. 342, 10. (Μὴ ποιῇ would mean lest it may cause, the 
time being the same as before.) Χρὴ αὐτὰ [ἃ τελευτήσαντα ἑκάτερον 
περιμένει] ἀκοῦσαι, iva τελέως ἑκάτερος αὐτῶν ἀπειλή φῃ τὰ ὀφειλό- 
μενα, we must hear what awaits each of them after death, that (when we 
have finished) each may have fully received his deserts. PLAT. Rep. X, 
614 A. Τοὺς μὲν ἄλλους, κἂν δεδωκότες ὦσιν εὐθύνας, τὴν ἀειλογίαν 
ὁρῶ προτεινομένους, I see that other men, even if they have already gwen 
their accounts, —i. e. even if they are (in the state of) persons who 
have given their accounts, — always offer a perpetual reckoning. DEM. 
F. L. 341, 14. ᾿Ανδρεῖόν ye πάνυ νομίζομεν, ὃς ἂν πεπλήγῃ πατέρα, 
we always consider one who has beaten his father very manly. ARIST. 
Av. 1350. Νόμον θήσειν μηδενὶ τῶν Ἑλλήνων ὑμᾶς βοηθεῖν ὃς ἂν μὴ 
πρότερος βεβοηθη κὼς ὑμῖν 7, 1. 6. to assist no one who shall not pre- 
viously have assisted you. Dem. F. L. 345, 28. (Ὃς ἂν μὴ πρότερος 
βοηθῆ would mean who shall not previously assist you. The Aorist 
βοηθήση would differ very little from the Perfect. See § 20, N. 2.) 

Ἔδεισαν μὴ λύσσα ἡμῖν ἐμπεπτώκοι; they feared lest madness 
might prove to have fallen upon us. XEN. An. V, 7, 26. (Μὴ ἐμπίπτοι 
would mean lest it might fall upon ws.) Πῶς οὐκ ἂν οἰκτρότατα 
πάντων ἐγὼ πεπονθὼς εἴην, εἰ ἐμὲ ψηφίσαιντο εἶναι ξένον ; how 
should I not have suffered the most pitiable of all things, if they should 
vote me to be an alien? Dem. Eubul. 1312,17. (This could have 
been expressed, with a very slight difference in meaning, πῶς οὐ 
ἐν νι νον πεπονθὼς ἔσομαι, Fut. Perf., ἐὰν ψηφίσωνται ; how shall 1 
not have suffered, &c.) Ei ὁτιοῦν πεπονθὼς ἑκάτερος ἡμῶν εἴη, 
οὐ καὶ ἀμφότεροι ἂν τοῦτο πεπόνθοιμεν; if each of us should have 
suffered anything whatsoever, would not both of us have suffered ut? 
Pxat. Hipp. M. 301 A. Οὐκ ἂν διὰ τοῦτό γ᾽ εἶεν οὐκ εὐθὺς δεδωκότες, 
this, at least, cannot be the reason why they did not pay it at once ; 1. 6, 
they would not (on inquiry) prove to have not paid it on this account. 
Dem. Onet. I, 867, 1. So Sopn. Oed. Τὶ 840. Ἔλεγε ὅσα ἀγαθὰ 
Κῦρος Πέρσας πεποιήῆκοι, he told how many services Cyrus had 
done the Persians. Hor. III. 75. (Πεποιήκοι here represents πεποίηκε 
of the direct discourse.) Οὗτοι ἔλεγον ὡς πεντακόσιοι αὐτοῖς εἴησαν 
ἐκ τοῦ Πειραιῶς δεδεκασμένοι. Lys.in Philocr. p. 182, § 12 


(Here the direct discourse was πεντακόσιοί εἶσιν δεδεκασμένοι.. 





§ 18, 2.] PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 21 


Notre. The Perfect Subjunctive in protasis (§ 50, 1) corresponds 
exactly to the Latin Future Perfect Indicative ; but the Greek sel- 
dom uses this cumbrovus Perfect, preferring the less precise Aorist 
(§ 20, N. 2). The Perfect Optative, in both protasis and apodosis, 
corresponds to the Latin Perfect Subjunctive, but is seldom used. 

The Perfect Optative can seldom be accurately expressed in 
Encslish. For when we use the English forms would have suffered 
and should have suffered to translate the Perfect Optative, these are 
merely vaguer expressions for will and shall have suffered. (See 
the examples above.) J should have suffered is commonly past in 
English, being equivalent to ἔπαθον ἄν ; but here it is future, and is 
therefore liable to be misunderstood. There is no more reference 
to past time, however, in the Perfect Optative with av, than there 
is in the Future Perfect Indicative in such expressions as μάτην ἐμοὶ 
κεκλαύσεται. 1 shall have had my whipping for nothing (reterring 
to one received in his boyhood); Arist. Nub. 1436. 


2. The Perfect Imperative may express ἃ command 
that something just done or about to be done shall be 
decisive and final. It is thus equivalent to the Perfect 
Participle with the Imperative of εἰμί, FE. g. 


Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταύτῃ εἰρήσθω, let so much have been thus said, 1. 6 
"ot what has been thus said be sufficient. PLat. Crat. 401 D. But 
ὅμως δὲ εἰρήσθω ὅτι, kK. τ. As still let as much as this (which follows) 
be said (once for all), that, &c. Prat. Rep. X, 607 C. Περὶ τῶν 
ἰδίων τοῦτά por προειρήσθω, let this have been said (once for all) 


> 


by way of introduction. Isoc. Paneg. p. 43 D.§ 14. Ταῦταπεπαίσθω 
re ὑμῖν, καὶ ἴσως ἱκανῶς ἔχει, let this be the end of the play, &c. PLAT. 
Euthyd. 278 Ὁ. Τετάχθω ἡμῖν κατὰ δημοκρατίαν ὁ τοιοῦτος ἀνήρ, 
let such a man remain where we have placed him, &c. PLAT. Rep. 
VII, 561 E. ᾿Απειργάσθω δὴ ἡμῖν αὕτη ἡ πολιτεία, let now this be 
a sufficient description of this form of government. Id. 553 A. Μέχρι 
τοῦδε ὡρίσθω ὑμῶν ἡ βραδυτής, at this point let the limit of your slug- 
gishness be fixed. 'THuc. Ε 71: 


This use seems to be confined to the third person singular of the 
passive and middle. The third person plural in the same sense 
could be expressed by the Perfect Participle with the Imperative of 
εἰμί, as in Prat. Rep. VI, 502 A: οὗτοι τοίνυν τοῦτο πεπεισμένοι 
ἔστων, grant then that these have been persuaded of this. 


Norte 1. On this principle the Perfect Imperative is used in 
mathematical language, to imply that something is to be considered 
as proved or assumed once for all, or that lines drawn or points 
fixed are to remain as data for a following demonstration. E. g. 


Εἰλήφθω ἐπὶ τῆς AB τυχὸν σημεῖον τὸ Δ, καὶ ἀφῃρήσθω ἀπὸ 
τῆς AY τῇ ΑΔ ἴση ἡ AE, let any point A be (assumed as) taken in the 
line AB, and AE equal to AA as cut off from AT Evct. I, Pr. 9. 











22 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 18, 2. 


Note 2. The Perfect Imperative of the second person is rare}; 
when it is used, it seems to be a little more emphatic than the Pre- 
sent or Aorist. E. g. 


Ἠὲ σὺ τόνδε δέδεξο. Il. V, 228. Μὴ πεφόβησθε. Tuvc. VI, 
17. Μόνον σὺ ἡμῖν πιστὰ θεῶν πεποίη σο καὶ δεξιὰν δός, only make 
us (immediately and once for all) solemn pledges and give the right 
hand. Xen. Cyr. IV, 2,7. Πέπαυσο, stop! not another word! Drm. 
Timoe. 721, 6. 

Note 8. In verbs whose Perfect has the force of a Present 
(8 17, N. 3) the Perfect Imperative is the ordinary form, as μέμνησο; 
κεκλήσθω, ἑστάτω, τεθνάτω, ἴστω. ‘The Perfect Imperative active 
seems to have been used only in such verbs. Occasionally we find 
the periphrastic form with the Participle and εἰμί, as ἔστω ξυμβε- 
βηκυῖα. Prat. Leg. V, 736 B. 


3. (a.) The Perfect Infinitive in indirect discourse 
represents a Perfect Indicative of the direct discourse, 
and therefore denotes an action which is finished at the 
time of the leading verb. HE. g. 


Φησὶ τοῦτο πεπραχέναι, he says that he has done this ; ἔφη τοῦτο 
πεπραχέναι, he said that he had done this; φήσει τοῦτο πε- 
πραχέναι, he will say that he has done this (the direct discourse in 
each case being πέπραχα). “Edn χρήμαθ᾽ ἑαυτῷ τοὺς Θηβαίους 
ἐπικεκηρυχέναι, he said that the Thebans had offered a reward for 
his seizure. Dem. F. L. 347, 26. In Arist. Nub. 1277, προσ- 
κεκλῆσθαί μοι δοκεῖς (according to Mss. Rav. & Ven.), you seem 
to me to be sure to be summoned to court (to be as good as already sum- 
moned), the Infinitive represents a Perfect Indicative referring to 
the future (§ 17, N. 6). 80 κεκωλῦσθαι ἐδόκει. THve. I, 8. 


(6.) In other constructions the Perfect Infinitive 
represents an act as finished at the time at which the 
Present in the same construction would represent it as 
going on (ὃ 15,1). Eg. 


: οὐ βουλεύεσθαι ἔτι ὥρα, ἀλλὰ βεβουλεῦσθαι" τῆς γὰρ 
ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς πάντα ταῦτα δεῖ πεπρᾶχθαι, it is no longer time to 
be deliberating, but (tt is time) to have finished deliberating ; for all 
this must be done (and finished) within the coming night. Par. Crit. 
46 A. Kal μὴν περὶ ὧν ye προσετάξατε.... προσήκει διῳκηκέναι, 
and tt is his duty to have attended (during his absence) to the business 
about which you gave him instructions. Dem. F. L. 342, 28. (This 
refers to an ambassador presenting his accounts on his return.) 
Ξυνετύγχανε πολλαχοῦ διὰ τὴν στενοχωρίαν τὰ μὲν ἄλλοις ἐμβε- 
βληκέναι τὰ δ᾽ αὐτοὺς ἐμβεβλῆσθαι, δύο τε περὶ μίαν . 
ξυνηρτῆσθαι, it often befell them to have made an attack on one 
side and (at the same time) to have been attacked themselves on the 


ἢ. 18, 4.] PERFECT INFINITIVE. 23 


other, ἕο. Tuuc. VII, 70. ᾿Ανάγκη yap τὰ μὲν μέγιστ᾽ αὐτῶν ἤδη 
κατακεχρῆσθαι μικρὰ δέ τινα παραλελεῖφθαι, for it must be 
that the most important subjects have been used up, and that only unim- 
portant ones have been left. Isoc. Pan. p. 55 D. ὃ 74. Οὐκ ἤθελον 
ἐμβαίνειν διὰ τὸ καταπεπλῆχθαι τῇ Hoon, they were unwilling to 
embark on account of having been terrified by the defeat. Tuuc. VII, 
12. Τὸ yap πολλὰ ἀπολωλεκέναι κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον τῆς ἡμετέρας 
ἀμελείας ἄν τις θείη δικαίως, τὸ δὲ μήτε πάλαι τοῦτο πεπονθέναι 
πεφηνέναι τέ τινα ἡμῖν συμμαχίαν τούτων ἀντίρροπον, τῆς παρ᾽ 
ἐκείνων εὐνοίας εὐεργέτημ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγε θείην, for our having lost many 
things during the war any one might justly charge upon our neglect ; 
but our never having suffered this before and the fact that an alliance 
has now appeared to us to make up for these losses I should consider a 
benefaction, ἕο. Dem. Ol. I, 12, 3. (Compare γεγενῆσθαι in the 
first example under § 18, 1.) Ἔφθασαν παροικοδομήσαντες; ὥστε 
μηκέτι μήτε αὐτοὶ κωλύεσθαι ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν, ἐκείνους τε καὶ παντάπασιν 
adweotepnkévat.... . σφᾶς ἀποτειχίσαι, i. 6. they carried their 
own wall beyond that of the Athenians, so as no longer to be themselves 
interfered with by them, and so as to have effectually prevented them, 
&e. Tuuc. VII, 6. Ἐπεμελήθη καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν, ὦστε τῶν παρόντων 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἀγαθῶν μηδὲν μὲν ἄνευ τῆς πόλεως ε ivat, τὰ δὲ πλεῖστα 
διὰ ταύτην γεγενῆσθαι. Isoc. Pan. p. 48 B. § 38. Τοιαῦτα καὶ 
τοσαῦτα κατεσκεύασαν ἡμῖν, ὥστε μηδενὶ τῶν ἐπιγιγνομένων ὑπερβολὴν 
λελεῖφθαι, they made such and so great acquisitions as to have no 
possibility of surpassing them left to any one who should come after 
them. Dem. Ol. III, 35, 18. Δίδομεν αὐτοῖς προῖκα συγκεκόφθαι, 
we allow them to have cut us up for nothing (1. e. we make no account 
of their having done so). Arist. Nub. 1426. 


Norse. The Perfect Infinitive is sometimes used like the Perfect 
Imperative (§ 18, 2), signifying that the action is to be decisive and 
permanent, and sometimes it seems to be merely more emphatic 
than the Present or Aorist Infinitive. Εἰ. g. 

Εἶπον τὴν θύραν κεκλεῖσθαι, they ordered that the door should be 
shut and remain so. XEN. Hell. V, 4, 7. Βουλόμενος ἀγῶνι καὶ 
δικαστηρίῳ μοι διωρίσθαι παρ᾽ ὑμῖν ὅτι τἀναντία ἐμοὶ καὶ τούτοις 
πέπρακται, 1. 6. wishing to have it definitely and once for all settled in 
your minds. Dem. F. L. 410, 28. Θελούσας πρὸς πύλαις πεπτω- 
κέναι, eager to fall before the gates. AESCH. Sept. 462. Ἤλαυνεν 
ἐπὶ τοὺς Μένωνος, ὥστ᾽ ἐκείνους ἐκπεπλῆχθαι καὶ τρέχειν ἐπὶ τὰ 
ὅπλα, he marched against the soldiers of Menon, so that they were (once 
for all) thoroughly frightened and ran to arms. XEN. An. I, 5, 13. 
(Here ἐκπεπλῆχθαι is merely more emphatic than the Present would 
have been.) 

Remark. The Perfect Infinitive belongs also to the Pluperfect, 
and is occasionally used to represent that tense in indirect discourse. 
This occurs chiefly (perhaps only) when the Infinitive is modified 
by ἄν. See the first example under § 41, 2. 


4. The Perfect Participle in all its uses refers to an 

















24 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 19. 


action 85. already finished at the time of the leading 
verb. HK. g. 


Ἐπαινοῦσι τοὺς εἰρηκότας, they praise those who have spoken. 
Ἐπήνεσαν τοὺς εἰρηκότας; they praised those who had spoken. 
Ἐπαινέσουσι τοὺς eipnxdras, they will prarse those who have (then) 
spoken. ᾿Ἐπέδειξα οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπηγγελκότα (Αἰσχίνην); I showed 
that Aeschines had announced nothing that was true (1. Θ. I showed, 
οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπήγγελκεν). Dem. F. L. 396, 30. 


AORIST. 


A. In the Indicative. 


519. The Aorist Indicative expresses the simple 
momentary occurrence of an action in past time; as 
4 
ἔγραψα, I wrote. 


This fundamental idea of simple occurrence remains the 
essential characteristic of the Aorist through all the dependent 
moods, however indefinite they may be in regard to time. 


Note 1. The Aorist of verbs which denote a state or 
condition generally expresses the entrance into that state o” 
condition. E. g. 


Βασιλεύω, I am king, ἐβασίλευσα, I became king; ἄρχω, 1 hold 
office, ἦρξα, 1 obtained office ; πλουτῶ, ἐπλούτησα; ] became rich. T7 
ἀληθείᾳ συνῴκει καὶ οὐδέπω ἀπολέλοιπεν" - - + > " ἀλλὰ παρὰ ζῶντος 
Τιμοκράτους ἐκείνῳ συνῴκησε; she was his wife in good faith, and 
has not even yet been divorced; .+++-s but she went io live with him, 
ἕο. Dem. Onet. I, 873, 8. 


Note 2. The Aorist differs from the Imperfect by denoting the 
momentary occurrence of an action or state, while the Impertect 
denotes a continuance or repetition of the same action or state. 
This is especially obvious in the verbs mentioned in Note 1, as 
ἐβασίλευον, ἦρχον, ἐπλούτουν, I was king, held office, was rich. (See 
especially the last example under N. 1.) The Aorist 1s therefore 
the tense most common in narration, the Imperfect 1n description. 
The Aorist may sometimes refer to a series of repetitions; but it 
refers to them collectively, as a single whole, while the Impertect 
refers to them separately, as individuals. So the Aorist may even 
refer to a continued action, if (as a whole) it is viewed as a single 


event in past time. E. g. 


Ἐγὼ δὲ ἦλθον; εἶδον, ἐνίκησα, I came, I saw, I conquered 
(Veni, vidi, vici). App. Bell. Civ. Il, 91. So ἐβασίλευσε δέκα 





8. 19.} AORIST IN THE DEPENDENT MOODS. 25 


ae 


ἔτη may be used to mean he had a reign of ten years (which is now 
viewed as a single past event); whereas ἐβασίλευε δέκα ἔτη would 
mean he continued to reign ten years. 


Norte 8. The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist was 
sometimes neglected, especially by the older writers. See § 11, 
Note 5. 


Nore 4. (a.) The Aorist is sometimes found where we 
should expect the Perfect or the Pluperfect; the action being 
simply referred to the past, without the more exact specifi- 
cation afforded by the Perfect and Pluperfect. E. g. 


Τῶν οἰκετῶν οὐδένα κατέλιπεν, GAN ἅπαντα πέπρακεν. AE- 
SCHIN. Timarch. § 99. ᾿Ετράποντο ἐς τὸν Πάνορμον, ὅθενπερ avnya- 

οντο, they turned towards Panormus, whence they had set sail. 
Tuc. Il, 92. Κῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν 
σατράπην ἐποίησεν; of which he had once made him satrap. XEN. 
An. i, 1, 2. 


(b.) Especially the Aorist is generally used, even where we 
should expect the Pluperfect, after particles of time like ἐπεί, 
ἐπειδή, ὡς (when), ὅτε, ἕως, πρίν, ἕο. KE. g. 

Ἐπειδὴ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη ᾿Αρταξέρξης, after Darius 
had died and Artaxerxes had become established. XEN. An. I, 1, 3. 
Οὐ πρόσθεν ἐξενεγκεῖν ἐτόλμησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς πόλεμον, πρὶν τοὺς 
στρατηγοὺς ἡμῶν συνέλαβον, before they had seized our generals. 
Xen. An. IL, 2, 29. Of 8 ὅτε δὴ λιμένος πολυβενθέος ἐντὸς ἵκοντο, 
when they had entered. Il. 1, 432. So in Latin, postquam venit, after 
he had come. 


Note 5. The Aorist is sometimes used in colloquial language 
by the poets (especially the dramatists), when a momentary action, 
which is just taking place, is to be expressed as if it had already 
happened. E. g. 

Ἐπήνεσ᾽ ἔργον καὶ πρόνοιαν ἣν ἔθου, I must approve your act, ὅτα. 
Sorn. Aj. 536. Ἥσθην ἀπειλαῖς, ἐγέλασα ψολοκομπίαις, 1 am 
amused by your threats, I cannot help laughing, &c. ARIST. Βα. 696. 

Nore 6. The Aorist sometimes refers vividly to the future, like 
the Present or Perfect ($ 10, N. 7; § 17, N. 6); as ἀπωλόμην et 
pe λείψεις, I perish if you leave me, Eur. Alc. 386. 

So in questions with ri od expressing surprise that something 18 
not already done, and implying an exhortation to do it; as τί οὖν 
οὐ διηγήσω; why then do you not tell us the story? PLAT. Prot. 
310 A. See also ri οὖν οὐκ ἐκαλέσαμεν; Prot. 317 Ὁ. 


B. Aorist in the Dependent Moods. 


Remark. The Aorist of the dependent moods differs from 
the Present as is explained in the Remark before § 12. 
2 

















USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 20. 


§20. The Aorist Subjunctive denotes a single or 
momentary action, the time of which is determined by 
the rules that apply to the time of the Present Subjunc- 
tive, ὃ 12:— 

3 That is, in clauses denoting a purpose or objet, after 
/ . . . 

ἵνα, μή, &c., it refers to time future relatively to the 
leading verb ; in conditional sentences (including con- 
ditional relative and temporal sentences), — in ordinary 
protasis (δ 50,1), the Subjunctive refers to the future ; 
in general suppositions after verbs of present time (§ 51), 
it refers to indefinite time represented as present. In 
independent sentences it refers to the future. K. g. 

Δέδοικα μὴ ἐπιλαθώμε θα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, I fear lest we may forget 
the road home. Xen. An. Il, 2, 25. Διανοεῖται τὴν γέφυραν λῦσαι; 
ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε ἀλλ᾽ ἀποληφθῆτε, he intends to destroy the bridge, 
that you may not pass over but be caught. Id. Il, 4,17. Ἢν τὴν εἰρήνην 
ποιησώμεθα, μετὰ πολλῆς ἀσφαλείας τὴν πόλιν οἰκήσομεν, if we 
shall make the peace, &c. Isoc. Pac. p. 163 A. § 20. “Qs ἂν εἴπω 
πειθώμεθα, let us obey as I shall direct. Tl. IX, 704. Ἣν ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ 
θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν, if death comes near (the moment that 
death comes near), no one wants to die. Eur. Ale. 671. Ὃν μὲν ἂν 
ἴδῃ ἀγνῶτα (se. ὁ κύων), χαλεπαίνει" ὃν δ᾽ ἂν γνώριμον (sc. ἴδῃ), 
ἀσπάζεται, i. 6. whomsoever the dog sees (at any time). PLAT. Rep. I I, 
376 A. Αναλογισώμεθα τὰ ὡμολογημένα ἡμῖν, let us enumerate 
the points which have been conceded by us. Prat. Prot. 332 Ὁ. 
Μηδὲν φοβη θῇ ς, fear not (in this case). (But μηδὲν φοβοῦ, be not 
timid.) Ti ποιήσω; what shall I do (ma single case)? (But ri 
ποιῶ; what shall I do (generally) ?) Ov μὴ τοῦτο εἴπῃ ς») you will 
not say this. Ov μὴ γένηται, it will not happen. So in the Ho- 
meric οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι, nor shall I ever see. 

See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 


Notre 1. When the Aorist Subjunctive depends on ene 
δάν (ἐπάν, ἐπήν), after that, it is referred by the meaning of the 
particle to a moment of time that precedes the action of the 


leading verb, so that ἐπειδὰν τοῦτο ἴδω; ἐλεύσομαι means @fter 
1 shall have seen this, I will come; and ἐπειδὰν τοῦτο ἴδω, 
ἀπέρχομαι, after I have seen this, I (always) depart. In such 
cases it is to be translated by our Future Perfect, when the 
leading verb is future; and by our Perfect, when the leading 
verb denotes a general-truth and is translated by the Present. 
As the Subjunctive in this construction can never depend 





§ 20.] AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE AS FUTURE PERFECT. 27 


upon a verb expressing simply present time, it is obvious that 
it can never refer to time absolutely past: we use the Perfect 
Indicative in translating such Aorists after verbs expressing 
general truths, merely because we use the Present in translate 
ing the leading verb, although that is properly not merely 
present, but general in its time. 

In like manner, after ἕως, πρίν, and other particles signify- 
ing until, before that, and even after the relative pronoun 
or ἐάν, the Aorist Subjunctive may be translated by our Future 
Perfect or Perfect, when the context shows that it refers 
to a moment of time preceding that of the leading verb. 
EK. g. 

Χρὴ δὲ, ὅταν μὲν τιθῆσθε τοὺς νόμους, ὁποῖοί τινές εἰσιν σκοπεῖν, 
ἐπειδὰν δὲ θῆσθε, φυλάττειν καὶ χρῆσθαι, while you are enacting 
laws, you must look to see of what kind they are; but after you have 
enacied them, you must guard and use them. Dem. Mid. 525, 11. 
(Here the Present τιθῆσθε after ὅταν, while, refers to an action con- 
tinuing through the time of the leading verb; but θῆσθε after 
ἐπειδάν, after that, refers to time past relatively to the leading verb.) 
Ταῦτα, ἐπειδὰν περὶ τοῦ γένους εἴπω, τότε, ἂν βούλησθε ἀκούειν, 
ἐρῶ, when I shall have spoken about my birth, then, if you desire to 
hear, I will speak of these things. DEM. Eubul. 1303, 25. (Here the 
Aorist εἴπω, though absolutely future, denotes time past with refer- 
ence to ἐρῶ.) ᾿Ἐπειδὰν διαπράξωμαι ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω, when I shall 
have accomplished what I desire, I will come. XEN. An. Il, 3, 29. 
Ἐπειδὰν δὲ κρύψωσι γῇ» ἀνὴρ ἡρημένος ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως λέγει ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτοῖς ἔπαινον τὸν πρέποντα, when they have covered them with earth, 
&e. Tuuc. I, 34. Ἕως ἂν σώζηται τὸ σκάφος, τότε χρὴ προθύμους 
εἶναι" ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἡ θάλαττα ὑπέρσχῇῃ» μάταιος ἡ σπουδῆ, as long as 
it remains in safety (Present) ;— but the moment that the sea has over- 
whelmed it (Aorist). DEM. Phil. 1Π,| 128, 22. Ἕως ἂν ἐκμάθῃς; 
ἔχ᾽ ἐλπίδα, επί you have learnt fully, have hope. SOPH. Ο. T. 834. 
Mia δὲ κλίνη κενὴ φέρεται τῶν ἀφανῶν, οἱ ἂν μὴ εὑρεθῶσιν ἐς 
ἀναίρεσιν, and one bier is always carried empty, in honor of the miss- 
ing, whose bodies have not been found. THUC. ΤΙ, 34. Tis διανοεῖται; 
ἃ ἂν ἄλλοι τῇ ἀρετῇ καταπράξωσι; τούτων ἰσομοιρεῖν ; who ever 
thinks of having an equal share in those things which others by their 
valor have acquired? XEN. Cyr. I, 3, 5. Πάνθ᾽ ὅσ᾽ ἂν ἐκ πολέμου 
γιγνομένης εἰρήνης προεθῇ. ταῦτα τοῖς ἀμελήσασιν ἀπόλλυται; all 
things which are (or have been) abandoned when peace 18 made are 
always lost to those who abandoned them, DEM. F. L. 388, 9. Ἣν δ᾽ 
dpa καί του πείρᾳ σφαλῶσιν; ἀντελπίσαντες ἄλλα ἐπλήρωσαν τὴν 
χρείαν, if they have been disappointed in anything, they always supply 
the deficiency, &c. THUC. I, 70. (See § 30, 1.) Οὐχὶ παύσομαι, 
πρὶν ἄν σε τῶν σῶν κύριον στήσω τέκνων; I will not cease before I 
have (shall have) made you master of your children. SOPH. O. C. 








USE OF THE TENSES [8 20. 


1040. Μὴ orévate πρὶν μάθῃς: do not groan until you have heard. 
Sop. Phil. 917. 


Note 2. The use of the Aorist Subjunctive mentioned in Note 1 
sometimes seems to approach very near to that of the Perfect Sub- 
junctive (§ 18, 1); and we often translate both by the same tense 
in English. » But with the Perfect, the idea of an action completed 
at the time referred to is expressed by the tense of the verb, with- 
out aid from any particle or from the context; with the Aorist, the 
‘dea of relative past time can come only from the particle or the 
context. (See § 18, 1, Note.) E. g. 

*Ov μὲν ἂν ἴδῃ ἀγνῶτα (ὁ κύων), χαλεπαίνει " ὃν δ᾽ ἂν γνώριμον 
(ἴδῃ): ἀσπάζεται, κἂν μηδὲν πώποτε ὑπ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἀγαθὸν πεπόνθη, 
whomsoever he sees whom he knows, he fawns upon, even if he has 
hitherto received no kindness from him. Piar. Rep. I, 376 A. Com- 
pare this with ἐὰν ἀγαθόν τι πάθῃ ὑπό τινος, ἀσπάζεται, if he ever 
happens to receive any kindness from any one, he always fawns upon 
him; and ἐπειδὰν ἀγαθόν τι πάθῃ; ἀσπάζεται, after he has received 
any kindness, he atways fawns upon him. See examples under 
§ 18, 1. 


5 Φ!. 1. The Aorist Optative, when it is not in in- 
direct discourse, denotes a single or momentary action, 
the time of which is determined by the rules that apply 


to the time of the Present Optative, §13,1:— 

That is, in clauses denoting ἃ purpose ΟΥ̓ object, after 
iva, ὅπως, μή; &c., it refers to time future relatively to 
the leading verb; in conditional sentences (including 
conditional relative and temporal sentences ),— in ordi- 
nary protasis (§ 50, 2), the Optative refers to the future 
(only more vaguely than the Subjunctive) ; in general 
suppositions after verbs of past time (§ 51), it refers to 
indefinite past time. In independent sentences it refers 
to the future. KE. g. 


Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ ἦν μὴ ἐκφύγοι τὰ πράγματα αὐτόν, Philip was 
in fear lest the control of affairs might escape him. Dem. Cor. 236, 19. 
Εἰ ἔλθοι, πάντ᾽ ἂν ἴδοι, i he should go, he would see all. Ei ἔλθοι; 
πάνθ᾽ ἑώρα, if ever (whenever) he went, he (always) saw all. Οὐδ᾽ 
εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι; πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβαλοίμεθ᾽ ἂν τοὺς 
πολεμίους, not even if all the Persians should come, should we sur- 
pass the enemy in numbers. XEN. Cyr. Il, 1,8. “Ore ἔξω τοῦ δεινοῦ 

évowvro, καὶ ἐξείη πρὸς ἄλλους ἄρχοντας ἀπιέναι; πολλοὶ αὐτὸν 
ἀπέλειπον, but when they were come out of danger and it was in their 
power (Present) to go 10 other commanders, (in all such cases) many 


left him. XEN. An. LI, 6, 12. “Avev γὰρ ἀρχόντων οὐδὲν ἂν οὔτε καλὸν 


§ 21, 2.] AORIST OPTATIVE. 29 


οὔτε ἀγαθὸν γένοιτο; nothing could be done, &e. Xen. An. III, 1 38. 
Οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι ἄν τις χρήσαιτο αὐτοῖς, 1 do not know what use any 
one could make of them. XEN. An. III, 1, 40. Eiée σὺ τοιοῦτος ὧν 
φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο» may you become a friend to us. Xen. Hell. 1V, 
1, 38. Μὴ γένοιτο; may it not happen. 

See other examples under the rules in Chapter IV. 


Nore. When the Aorist Optative depends upon ἐπειδή OF ἐπεί, 
after that, it is referred by the meaning of the particle to a moment 
of time preceding that of the leading verb, like the Aorist Sub- 
junctive in § 20, N. 1, so that ἐπειδὴ ἴδοι; ἀπήρχετο means after he 
‘nad seen, he (always) went away. This gives the Aorist in transla- 
tion the force of a Pluperfect. So after ἕως; until, and in the other 
cases mentioned in § 20, N.1. E.g. 

Ods μὲν ἴδοι εὐτάκτως ἴοντας; τίνες TE εἶεν ἠρώτα; καὶ ἐπεὶ πύθοιτο; 
ἐπήνει, he asked any whom he saw marching wm good order, who they 
were; and after he had ascertained, he praised them. XEN. Cyr. V; 
3, 55. Περιεμένομεν ἑκάστοτε ἕως ἀνοιχθε in τὸ δεσμωτηριον" 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη, εἰσήειμεν παρὰ τὸν Σωκράτη, we waited each 
morning uniil the prison was opened (or had been opened); and after 
it was opened, we went in to Socrates. PLAT. Phaed. 59 Ὁ. Ovda- 

όθεν ἀφίεσαν, πρὶν παραθεῖεν αὐτοῖς ἄριστον; before they had 
placed breakfast before them. Xen. An. IV, 5, 90. 


9. From the general rule for indirect discourse (ἢ 69, 
1) we derive the following special rules :— 

(a.) First, if the Aorist Optative in indirect discourse 
represents an Aorist Indicative of the direct discourse, 
it denotes a momentary ΟΥ̓ single action which is past 
with reference to the leading verb. K. δ: 

"Ἐλεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς ὁ βασιλεύς, they said that the king had 
sent them (i. e. they said ἔπεμψεν ἡμᾶς ὁ βασιλεύς). XEN- Cyr. ΠΗ, 
4,7. Tore ἐγνώσθη ὅτι οἱ βάρβαροι τὸν ἄνθρωπον ὑποπέμψαιεν; 
then it became known that the barbarians had sent the man. XEN. An. 
Il, 4,22. *EroApa λέγειν ὡς πολλὰ τῶν ἐμῶν λάβοιεν; he dared to 
say that they had taken much of my property. Dem. Aph. I, 828, 25. 
ἮἨρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν; I asked him whether he had set 
saul (i. 6. 1 asked him the question, dvéndevoas;). DEM. Polycl. 1223, 
21. Ἐπειρώτα τίνα ἴδοι, he asked whom he had seen (i. 6. τίνα 
εἶδες, whom did you see 9). Hor. I, 31. So I, 116: εἴρετο κόθεν 
λάβοι. 

(b.) But if it represents an Aorist Subjunctive of the 
direct discourse, it denotes ἃ momentary or single action 
which is future with reference to the leading verb. 


K. g. 

















USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 21, 2. 


οἱ Ἐπιδάμνιοι τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴ 
πόλιν, they asked whether they should deliver up their pn to the Co. 
rinthians (1. 6. they asked the question, rapad@pev τὴν πόλιν; shall 
we deliver up our city?). Tauc. I, 25. ᾿Εσκόπουν San adr 5 
ἐνέγκαιμ᾽ αὐτόν, I looked to see how I could best endure him (i J 
asked, πῶς ἐνέγκω αὐτόν; how can I endure him?). Eur. Hipp 
393. Διεσιώπησε σκοπῶν 6 τι ἀποκρίναιτο, he continued silent, 


thinking what he should answer (i Τὶ 
τ ἷ x 1. 6. think fa , : 
Xen. Mem. IV, 2, 10. ( ing, τι αποκρινωμαι 3)s 


ἌΝ Examples of the Aorist Optative representing the 
a +s yjunctive in a dependent clause of the direct discourse, to 
᾿ nich ~ same principles apply, may be found under § 74, 1. The 
— ndicative is, however, generally retained in dependent 
clauses of indirect quotations: see § 74, 2, with N. 1. | 
ΓΝ 1. It will be seen by a comparison of the examples 
ul i B, 2, Ni 
inder (a) and (0), as in § 13, 2, Note 1, that an ambiguity 
aad sometimes arise from uncertainty whether the Aorist 
tative stands for the Aoris icativ hati 
eae , al 1e Aorist Indicative, or for the Aorist 
yjunctive in a question of doubt. Thus, ἠγνόουν 6 τι ποιή - 
— might mean, they knew not what they had done (the 
ativ Ξ ~ 3 , Φ , 
: ptative representing τί ἐποιήσαμεν ; what did we do 3), or they 
new not what they should do (the Optative representing ri 
ὰ 9 a rT. : wa 
ποιήσωμεν ; What shall we do?). The context must decide in 
6 : : ' : We 
58 _ ; but in most cases the latter construction is intended. 
or the manner of avoidi simi igui 74," 
ὃ avoiding a similar ambiguity, see ὃ 74, 2, 


N. 1.) 


2 ε : 
§ 22. The Aorist Imperative refers to a momen- 


tary or singl i i ἰπέ 
ξέρω e action in future time; as eve pot, tell 
me; OOTE μοι τοῦτο, give me this. 


§ 23. The Aorist Infinitive has two distinct uses 
corresponding to the first two uses of the Present le 
finitive (ὃ 15):— 

L First, in its ordinary use (either with or without 
the article), whenever it is not in indirect discourse 
it denotes a momentary or single action without regard 


to time, unless its time is especially defined by the con- 
text. Εἰ. g. 


Ππόλ , 2 Spar , . 
he gether poh elle a pat γενέσθαι, it is death for a city to 
: - In Leocr. p. 155, 35. ὃ 61 "0 . 
. . σπερ τῶν 





§ 23, 1.] AORIST INFINITIVE. 31 


ἀνδρῶν τοῖς καλοῖς κἀγαθοῖς αἱρετώτερόν ἐστι καλῶς ἀποθανεῖν ἣ ζῆν 
αἰσχρῶς, οὕτω καὶ τῶν πόλεων ταῖς ὑπερεχούσαις λυσιτελεῖν (ἡγοῦντο) 
ἐξ ἀνθρώπων ἀφανισθῆναι μᾶλλον ἣ δούλαις ὀφθῆναι γενομέναις, 
as it is preferable for honorable men to die (Aor.) nobly rather than to 
(Pres.) in disgrace, so also they thought that t was 

-eminent among states to be (at once) made ἀν 

than to be (once) seen to have fallen int. 

. 8 95. Πέμπουσιν ἐς τὴν Κέρκυραν 
φθειρομένους, ἀλλὰ τούς τε 

τὸν τῶν βαρβάρων πόλεμον 

them to be destroyed, but to 

end to the war. THUC. 

1: 2%. Ύ ν ἐστιν, to learn is 


to acquire know 
αὐτὰ πάντων μάλιστ 
them behind. XEN. 

? ἘΝ ἢ ν 
οὕτω γε χαλεπὸν ὥσπερ τὸ λαβόντα 

Cyr. VII, 5, 82. Τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία, 

ΤΉσσ. VII, 84. Κελεύει αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν; 
Ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν, he commanded him to go. Kedevoet αὐτὸν 
ἐλθεῖν, he will command him to go. Πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείας 
λαβεῖν, τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους ἐλύσατο, besides receiving nothing from 
the embassy, he ransomed the captives. Dem. F. L. 412, 21. Ei mpo 
rod τοὺς Φωκέας ἀπολέσθαι ψηφίσαισθε βοηθεῖν, if before the de- 
struction of the Phocians you should vote to go to their assistance. 
Dem. Cor. 236, 20. Tas αἰτίας προὔγραψα, τοῦ μή τινα ζητῆσαί 
ποτε ἐξ ὅτου τοσοῦτος πόλεμος κατέστη; that no one may ever ask the 
reason, why, &c. Truc. I, 23. Cf. DEM. Cor. 295, 13; Eur. Orest. 
1529. 


2eyaRK. The Remark which follows § 15, 1 applies also to the 
Aorist Infinitive. 


Nore 1. Fora discussion of the time denoted by the Infinitive 
when it has the article and also a subject, see Appendix, I. 


Note 2. Χράω, dvatpéo, θεσπίζω, and other verbs signifying to 
give an oracular response, are sometimes followed by the Aorist (as 
well as by the Present) Infinitive, which expresses the command, 
advice, or warning given by the oracle. These verbs here simply 
take the ordinary construction of verbs of commanding and advising. 
EK. g. 

Χρωμένῳ δὲ τῷ Κύλωνι ἀνεῖλεν ὁ θεός, ἐν τῇ τοῦ Διὸς τῇ μεγίστῃ 
ἑορτῇ καταλαβεῖν τὴν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀκρόπολιν, that he should seize. 
Truc. I, 126. But we find ἀνεῖλεν ἔσεσθαι in Tuve. I, 118. 
Ἐκέχρητο yap τοῖσι Σπαρτιήτῃσι, ἢ Λακεδαίμονα ἀνάστατον γε- 
νέσθαι, ἣ τὸν βασιλέα σφέων ἀπολέσθαι. Hot. VU, 220. 
Ἐθέσπισε κομίσαι -- - - καὶ εἰσιδεῖν. Eur. Iph. Taur. 1014. 
So "Eermé οἱ... + vovo@ Um dpyahén φθίσθαι - -. .- ἢ ὑπὸ 
Τρώεσσ' δαμῆναι; the diviner told him that he must either die by 








USE OF THE TENSES. 


pamful disease at home, or perish at the hands 
¢ » OF peri s of the Trojans. Tl. 
XII, 667. So after χρησμός, PLat. Rep. III, 415 C. : 

For the Present see ὃ 15, 1. N. 2. 


ὩΣ The ΣΝ of αἴτιός εἶμι, IT am the cause, is often used 
reference to the past, where logically a past tense should be 
used ; as αἰτιὸς ἐστι τούτῳ θανεῖν, he is the cause of his death, instead 
of αἴτιος ἣν τούτῳ θανεῖν, he was the cause of his death This ofte 

gives an ordinary Aorist Infinitive after this form the appear on 
of a verb of past time, like the Aorist Infinitive in sarees Mead ti ‘ 
This will be explained in each case by mentally substituti σ΄ oa 
tense for the present. E. g. cainihsaagin sce he 


» > > 4 Sa 

᾿Αἴτεοι οὖν εἰσι καὶ ὑμῖν πολλῶν ἤδη Ψευσθῆναι καὶ δὴ ἀδίκως 
—- ἀπολέσθαι, they are the cause why you were deceived 
"Ἂν ome even perished G. e. they caused you to be deceived and 
some even to perish). Lys. de Arist. Bon. 156, 28. ὃ 51. Τεθνᾶσιν" 
oi de Savres αἴτιοι θανεῖν. Sopn. Ant. 1173. Ἥ μοι “ye 
δον δε» μόνη μεταίτιος. SOPH. Trach. 1233. ΓΟ 

For the construction of the Infinitive see § 92, 1, Note 2 (end) 


2. Secondly, the Aorist Infinitive in indirect dis- 
course 15 used to represent an Aorist Indicative of the 
direct discourse, and therefore denotes a momentary a 
single action, which is past relatively to the leading 
verb. KE. g. ΤῊΣ 


Φησὶν τοῦτο ποιῆ : id this (i 
Ἔλα τῷ τοιῆσαι; he says that he did this (i. 6. he says τοῦτο 
Ἢ zee eA pn τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; he said that he had done this (i. ὁ 
of oe TOUTO ener al Φήσει τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; he will say that he 
ως is (i. 6. Le will Say τοῦτο ἐποίησα). “O Κῦρος λέγεται γενέσθαι 
- nara es is said to have been the son of Cambyses. XEN. Cyr 
» 2, 1. αλαιότατοι λέγονται ἐν μέ ὶ τῆς χά teens 
2, . pet τινὶ τῆς χώρας Κυκλωπ 
οἰκῆσαι, they are said to have settled. Tuuc VI οἷ fi "ine 
yr isk alae ids , β Hue. » 2» Hoay ὕποπτοι 
Ke ta ——n - a ἃ ἔπεμψαν, they were suspected 
th sent them with alacrity wha id s ‘ 
175. y what they did send. Tuve. 

Nore 1. Th inci i 

: 1. The principle stated in 5, 2, ΝΜ i ide i 

doubtful cases whet] 2 tl > Infiniti Sts te te iain 
ases whether the Infinitive stands in indirect discourse or 
in the construction of § 23, 1. 


N ς a ΡΞ ᾿ af 7 . . 
Nore 2. Verbs and expressions signifying to hope, to ex- 
a ‘ oe and the like, after which the Infinitive in 
indirect discourse w aturally i ) ὃ : 
_ se ould naturally be in the Future (§ 27, N. 
3), as representing a Future Indicative of the direct discourse 

παρα: scourse, 
sometimes take the Aorist (as well as the Present) Infinitive. 
(See ὃ 15, 2, N. 2.) E. g. 

> 


Ἐέλπετο κῦδος ἀρέσθαι, he was hoping to obtain glory. Tl. XII, 


§ 23, 2.1 AORIST INFINITIVE. 83 


407. Πάλιν ἔμολ᾽ ἃ πάρος οὔποτε ἤλπισεν παθεῖν. Eur. Here. F. 
746. Ei yap κρατήσειαν τῷ ναυτικῷ, τὸ “Ρήγιον ἤλπιζον ῥᾳδίως 
χειρώσασθαι, they hoped to subdue Rhegium. Tuuc. IV, 24. Οὐδ᾽ 
ἂν ἐλπὶς ἦν αὐτὰ βελτίω γε νέσθαι, there would not be even a hope of 
their becoming better. Dem. Phil. I, 40, 18. Ἐκ μὲν τοῦ κακῶς πράτ- 
τειν τὰς πόλεις μεταβολῆς τυχεῖν ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον εἰκός ἐστιν, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ 
παντάπασι γενέσθαι ἀνάστατον καὶ τῶν κοινῶν ἐλπίδων στερηθῆναι. 
Lycura. in Leocr. p. 155, 30. § 60. (Cf. below, ἐλπὶς ἐκ τοῦ κακῶς 
πράξαι μεταπεσεῖν.) Ὑποσχόμενος μὴ πρόσθεν παύσασθαι, πρὶν 
αὐτοὺς καταγάγοι οἴκαδε, having promised not to stop until he had re- 
stored them to their homes. XEN. An. I, 2, 2. Ὑπέσχετό μοι βουλεύ- 
σασθαι. 14. Il, 8,20. Ἠπείλησαν ἀποκτεῖναι ἅπαντας τοὺς ἐν 
τῇ οἰκίᾳ. Χεν. Hell. V, 4, 7. 

Nore 3. In all the cases which belong under Note 2, the lead- 
ing verb by its own signification refers to the future, so that the 
expression is seldom ambiguous: thus ὑπέσχετο ποιῆσαι Can never 
mean anything but he promised to do, although the Aorist Infinitive 
appears to represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse, 
contrary to § 15, 2, N.1. The case is different, however, when the 
Aorist Infinitive follows verbs whose sionification has no reference 
to the future, like νομίζω, οἴομαι, or even φημί, and still appears to 
represent a Future Indicative; 6. 5. where in ARIST. Nub. 1141* 
δικάσασθαί φασί μοι 18 said to mean, they say they wili bring an 
action against me, while just below, vs. 1180, θήσειν τὰ πρυτανεῖά φασί 
μοι means, they say they will deposit the Prytaneia. Stall, unless we 
decide to correct a large number of passages, against the authority 
of the Mss. (which is actually done by many critics, especially 
Madvig), we must admit even this anomalous construction; al- 
though it is to be considered strictly exceptional, and is, moreover, 
very rare In comparison with the regular one with the Future or the 
Aorist with ἄν. Εἰ. g. 

@dro yap ricac Gat ἀλείτας, for he said that he should punish the 
offenders. Od. XX, 121. (In Ii. ΠῚ, 28, we have in most Mss. and 
editions φάτο yap tiger Oat ἀλείτην, in precisely the same sense. 
Cf, Il. IL, 366.) Καὶ αὐτῷ ov μέμψασθαι Ampiny (86. ἀπεκρίνατο) " 
παρέσεσθαι γὰρ καὶ αὑτὸς καὶ ἄλλους ἄξειν, and (he answered) 
that Apries should not blame him; for he would not only be present 
himself, but would bring others. Hpr. II, 162. (Notice the strange 
transition from the Aorist (?) to the two Futures.) Φησὶν οὐδὲ τὴν 
Διὸς Ἔριν πέδῳ σκήψασαν ἐμποδὼν σχεθεῖν. AESCH. Sept. 429. 
Οἶμαι γάρ νιν ἱκετεῦσαι τάδε, I think of imploring. Eur. Iph. Aul. 
462. (Here Hermann reads ἱκετεύσειν, by conjecture.) ᾿Ἑνόμισαν 
ἐπιθέμενοι ῥᾳδίως κρατῆσαι; they thought they should gain the victory. 
Tuuc. II, 8. Νομίζω, ἣν ἱππεὺς yevopat, ἄνθρωπος πτηνὸς γενέσθαι. 
Xen. Cyr. IV, 8, 16. Τοῦτο δὲ οἴεταί οἱ μάλιστα γενέσθαι, εἰ σοὶ 
συγγένοιτο; and he thinks that this would be most likely to happen to 
him if he should join himself with you. PLAT. Prot. 316 C. (Here 


we should expect γενέσθαι av, to correspond to εἰ συγγένοιτο.) 


* I find δικάσεσθαι here in Cod. Par. 2712, and by correction in 2820. 


(1872.) 








84 USE OF THE TENSES. Γδ 23, 2. 


§ 24.] AORIST PARTICIPLE. 35 


y 7 τ, 

τωρ iges 4. Verbs like λέγω or εἶπον, when they signify to com: 
owe ὯΝ sag by the Aorist (as well as the Present) Infini- 
uve in its ordinary sense, referring to the future ; son state 
Sick. ἵψ' ; g uture ; as has been stated 


ΓΝ 


Βουλοίμην ἂν λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών, I shoula dike τὸ get away 
without his knowing it. Xen. An. I, 3,17. Τοὺς ἀνθρώπους λήσομεν 
ἐπιπεσόντες. Id. VI, 3, 43. Εὐλαβεῖσθαι παρακελεύσεσθε ἀλ- 
λήλοις, μὴ πέρα τοῦ δέοντος σοφώτεροι γενόμενοι λήσετε διαφθαρέν- 
res, lest, having become wiser than is proper, you shall become cor- 
rupted before yot know it. PLat. Gorg. 487 D. (Here γενόμενοι is 
an ordinary Aorist, past with reference to the phrase λήσετε διαφθα- 


? , ΓῚ , ann ” 
μα. φίλοι; ἤδη μέν κεν ἐγὼν εἴποιμι καὶ ἄμμιν μνηστήρων ἐς ὅμιλον 
οντίσαι, now 7 would command you to join me in hurling, &e 
σον 


Od. XXII, 262. - ἢ : 
ὼς oes οὐ Παραδοῦναι λέγει, he tells us to give her up. 





>) iD? ° 
$24. The Aorist Participle regularly refers to a 
momentary or single action, which is past with refer- 


ence to the time of the leading verb. E. ¢ 
. =" 


“ , ; ᾿ , 

a a eo ἀπελθεῖν βούλονται, having done this, they 

Ἢ βδιις τοῖοτας ντες ἀπῆλθον, having said this, they 

Ps eg ey lage 6 Φαίνονται ξυνελθόντες, not many appear 

= 7 n the expedition. Tnvuc. 1, 10. Βοιωτοὶ of ἐξ “Apvns 

es gts ride Pies Βοιωτίαν — Boeotians who had been driven 
seltiled Boeotia. Tuuc. I, 12. ᾿Αφίκετο δεῦρο τὸ πλοῖον, 


͵ -~ , > , 
ag Se . τῶν Κεφαλλήνων, ἀντιπράττοντος ToUTOU, . 
te Cephallenians having determined to sail in 


osed it. in Ze 36 
posed it. DEM. in Zenoth, 886, 1. (Here γνόντων denotes time past 


relatively to ἀφί ἱντιπρά ἶ 
: , αφίκετο, and αντιπραττοντος time present relatively to 
γνοντων, which is its leading verb. See § 16,1 

᾽ . 


. καταπλεῖν, 
, although this man op- 


igh When the Aorist Participle is used to contain the 
eading j cpressi 7 
: g idea of the expression, with λανθάνω, to escape the 
no πο of, τυγχάνω, to happen, and φθάνω, to get the start of 
(8 » 3), it does not denote time past with reference to the 
verb, but coincides with it in time. 
means they w DK ἔ 

ns they went away secretly ; οὐκ ἔφθησαν ἀπελθόντες, NO soon- 


er were = ἢ j 
; they gone ; ἐτυχον εἰσελθόντες, they came in by chance, or 
they happened to come in. E. σ } 

Ὁ" 


rr . ΕΣ b ] , 
Thus ἔλαθον ἀπελθόντες 


οὐ > » ’ Α care 

Pee! ps wage ἂν ota ἐλήθομεν, nor did we come without 
καὶ καταφλε "θέ ὦ: τόμ ἢ ux ast gl wh id itn Riera 
we okie, Pear Ty.’ everything took fire and was consumed before 
frst. Il XVI ee Chaar rie 6peEdpevos, he aimed a blow 
: ere ey yap εφθὴ μοι συμβᾶσα ἡ arvyi ᾿ 
μόν; ἀν αννπμὴ for no sooner did this misfortune come μὸν me fa they 
undertook, &c. Dem. Eubul. 1319, 8. Στρατιὰ ov πολλὴ καὶ ee 
Ισθμοῦ mapeX θοῦσα, an army of no great size iad i, Pea 
marched as Jar as the Isthmus. Tuuc. VI, 61 “Ervye δὲ πὶ ἐδ ον τῶ 
ὦ : : . OUT 
id. vir, πῆρ δ. and he happened to come just at that nick of ἕω, 
a -: γ 2. ίγα πρὸς τὰ ἔ γε , ὸ ᾿ 
ηγοῦνται), they think thew HE ss ‘ants . lish ¢ δα lit te 
comparison with their expectations. Id, I, 70 iia 





évres.) ‘Ommdrepos κε φθῇσιν dpeEdpevos χρόα καλόν, whichever 
shall first hit, &c. Il. XXUI, 805. 
The last four examples show that this use of the Participle was 
allowed even when the whole expression referred to the future. 


Note 2. A use of the Aorist Participle similar to that 
noticed in Note 1 is found after περιοράω and épopdw (περιεῖδον 
and ἐπεῖδον) to allow, and occasionally after other verbs which 
take the Participle in the sense of the Infinitive (§ 112, 1). 
In this construction the Aorist Participle seems to express 
merely a momentary action, the time being the same that the 
Aorist Infinitive would denote if it were used in its place 
(§ 23, 1). E. g. 


Προσδεχόμενος τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους κατοκνήσειν περιιδεῖν αὐτὴν [τὴν γῆν] 
τμηθεῖσαν, ἀνεῖχεν, expecting that they would be un willing to allow their 
land to be ravaged, ὅς. Tuuc. II, 18. But in I, 20, we find the 
Aorist Infinitive, ἤλπιζεν τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἂν περιιδεῖν τμη θῆ vat, refer- 
ring to precisely the same thing. Μὴ περιίδητε ἡμέας διαφθαρέν- 
τας. do not allow us to be destroyed. Hpt. ΙΥ͂, 118. Οὐ μή o ἐγὼ 
περιόψομαι ἀπελθόντα, I will by no means let you go. ARIST. 

Ran. 509. “ErAnoav ἐπιδεῖν .. - - ἐρήμην μὲν τὴν πόλιν γενομένην; 

τὴν δὲ χώραν πορθουμένην; -. - - - ἅπαντα δὲ τὸν πόλεμον περὶ τὴν 
πατρίδα τὴν αὑτῶν γιγνόμενον. Isoc. Pan. p. 60 Ὁ. 896. (Here 
the Aorist Participle denotes the laying waste of the city (as a single 
act), while the Presents denote the continuous ravaging of the coun- 
try, and the gradual coming on of astate of war. This is precisely 
the difference that there would be between the Present and Aorist 
Infinitive in a similar construction. See note on the passage, added 
to Felton’s 3d ed. p. 99.) So πραθέντα τλῆναι, endured to be sold. 
Arscu. Agam. 1041; and σπείρας érda, Sept. 754. 

Instances occur of the Aorist Participle in this sense even with 
other verbs, denoting that in which the action of the verb consists } 
as εὖ γ᾽ ἐποίησας ἀναμνήσας pe, you did well in reminding me. 
Puat. Phaed. 60 Ὁ. So καταψηφισάμενοι, Apol. 30 D. 


Remark. Ifa reference to the past is required in the Participle 
with the verbs mentioned in Notes 1 and 2, the Perfect 18 used. 
The Present can of course be used to denote a continued action or 


state. LE. g. 
Ἐτύγχανον ἄρτι παρειληφότες τὴν ἀρχήν, they happered to have 








USE OF THE TENSES. [8 24. 


just received their authority. Tauc. VI, 96. Ἐάν τις 78exnkos τι 
τυγχάνῃ τὴν πόλιν. Dem. Cor. 268, 23. ᾿Ελάθομεν ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς 
παίδων οὐδὲν διαφέροντες. Piat. Crit. 49 B. 


Norte 3. In such passages as ὡμολόγησαν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις τείχη 
re περιελόντες καὶ vais παραδόντες φόρον τε ταξάμενοι; 
Tuuc. I, 108, the Aorist Participle is used in its ordinary sense, 
being past with reference to the time of the beginning of the peace 
to which ὡμολόγησαν refers. The meaning is, they obtained terms 
of peace, on condition that they should first (i. e. before the peace 
began) tear down their walls, &c. (Such passages are T'Hvc. I, 101, 
108, 115,117. See Kriiger’s Note on I, 108, and Madvig’s Bemer- 
kungen, p. 46.) 

Note 4. For the use of the Aorist Infinitive and Participle with 
ἄν, see § 41, 3. For the Aorist Participle with ἔχω, as a circumlo- 
cution for the Perfect, as θαυμάσας ἔχω, see ὃ 112, N. 7. For the 
rare use of the Aorist Participle with ἔσομαι as a circumlocution for 
the Future Perfect, see § 29, N. 4. 


FUTURE. 


§ 25. 1. The Future denotes that an action will 
take place in time to come; as γράψω, I shall write, or 
1 shall be writing. 


Nore 1. The action of the Future is sometimes continued, 
and sometimes momentary: thus ἔξω may mean either J shall 
have, or I shall obtain; ἄρξω, I shall rule, or I shall obtain 
power. E. g. 

Πραγματεύονται ὅπως ἄρξουσιν, they take trouble to gain power. 
Xen. Rep. Laced. XIV, 5. Διαιρετέον οἵτινες ἄρξουσίν τε καὶ 


ἄρξονται, we must distinguish between those who are to rule and 
those who are to be ruled. Puat. Rep. ΠῚ, 412 B. 


Note 2. The Future is sometimes used in a gnomic sense, to 
denote that something will always happen when an occasion offers. 


E. g. 
᾿Ανὴρ ὁ φεύγων καὶ πάλιν μαχήσεται. MENAND. Monost. 45. 


Note 3. The Future is sometimes used to express what will 
hereafter be proved or recognized as a truth. This is analogous to 
the use of the Imperfect, § 11, N. 6. Εἰ g. 


Φιλόσοφος ἡμῖν ἔσται ὁ μέλλων καλὸς κἀγαθὸς ἔσεσθαι φύλαξ, he 
will prove to be a philosopher. PLat. Rep. I, 376 C. See Od. II. 270, 


Nore 4. The Future is sometimes used in questions of doubt, 
where the Subjunctive is more common (8 88). E. g 


δ" 





§ 25, 1.] FUTURE INDICATIVE. 37 


Ti δῆτα δρῶμεν ; μητέρ᾽ ἦ φονεύσομεν; what can we do? shall 
we kill our mother? Eur. El. 967. Ποῖ tes τρέψεται; whither 
shall one turn? Δέξεσθε, ἢ ἀπίωμεν ; will you receive him, or shall 
we go away? PLat. Symp. 212 E. Εἶτ᾽ ἐγώ σου φείσομαι; ARIST. 
Acharn. 312. Ti οὖν ποιήσομεν; πότερον εἰς τὴν πόλιν πάντας 
τούτους παραδεξόμεθα; what then shall we do? <Are we to recewwe 
all these into the state? Piar. Rep. III, 397 D. 


Note 5. (a.) The second person of the Future may express a 
concession, permission, or obligation, and 18 often a mild form of 
imperative. KE. g. 

Πρὸς ταῦτα πράξεις οἷον ἂν θέλῃς, you may act as you please. 
Sopu. O. C. 956. Πώντως δὲ τοῦτο δράσεις; but by all means do 
this. Arist. Nub. 1352. So in the common imprecations, ἀπολεῖσθε, 
οἰμώξεσθε, may you perish, &c. Χειρὶ δ᾽ οὐ Ψαύσεις ποτέ. EUR. 
Med. 1320. 


(b.) A few instances occur in which the Future Indicative with 
un expresses a prohibition, like the Imperative or Subjunctive with 
un (8 86). E.g. 

, ᾿ 35 ἜΣ 

Ταύτην, ἄν μοι χρῆσθε συμβούλῳ, φυλάξετε τὴν πίστιν, καὶ μὴ 
βουλήσεσθε εἰδέναι, x. τ. λ., Uf you follow my advice, keep this 
faith, and do not wish to know, &c. Dem. Aristoc. 659, 15. Ἐὰν δὲ 
εὖ φρονῆτε, καὶ νυνὶ τοῦτο φανερὸν ποιήσετε; καὶ μηδεμίαν autos 
ἄδειαν δώσετε. Lys. Phil. 818. (In _ the preceding examples 
φυλάξετε and ποιήσετε belong under a.) Kat Tapa τεύχη PNT 
ἀγωνάρχαι τινὲς θήσου σ᾽ ᾿Αχαιοῖς, μήθ᾽ ὁ λυμεὼν ἐμὸς. SOPH. Aj. 
572. Ξένον ἀδικήσεις μηδέποτε καιρὸν λαβών. MENAN. Mon. 
397. So perhaps μηδὲν τῶνδ᾽ ἐρεῖς κατὰ πτόλιν. AESCH. Sept. 
250. . or 

These examples are sometimes explained by supposing an ellipsis 
of ὅπως from the common construction omws μὴ TovTO Epets (se. 
σκόπει). See § 45, N. 7. 

ZemarK. The use of the Future stated in Note 5 gives the 
most satisfactory explanation of the Future with ov μή in ‘prohibi- 
tions, especially in such expressions as οὐ μὴ λαλήσεις, ἀλλ ἀκολου- 
θήσεις ἐμέ, do not prate, but follow me, and ov μὴ προσοίσεις xetpas 
pnd ἅψει πέπλων, do not bring your hand near me, nor touch m 
garments. See § 89, 2, with Notes. 

Nore 6. The Future sometimes denotes a present intention, 
expectation, or necessity that something shall be done, in which 
sense the periphrastic form with μέλλω 18 more common. E. σ. 


΄ 
τί διαφέρουσι τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγκης κακοπαθούντων, εἴ ye πεινησουσι 
καὶ διψήσουσι καὶ ῥιγήσουσι καὶ ἀγρυπνήησουσιν; 1. 6. ¥ 
they are to endure hunger and thirst, &c. XEN. Mem. Hy 4; τὦῷἢ 
(Here εἰ μέλλουσι πεινῆν καὶ διψῆν, &c. would be more common, 88 
in the last example under § 25, 2.) Atpe mAnxtpov, εἰ μαχεῖ. raisé 
your spur, if you are going to fight. Arist. Av. 759. The impor 





38 USE OF THE TENSES. [8 25, 1. 


tance of this distinction will be seen when we come to conditional 
sentences. (See § 49, 1, N. 3.) 


_ Astill more emphatic reference to a present intention is found 
in the question ri λέξεις; what dost thou mean to say? often found 


in tragedy; ἃ8 ἴῶμοι, τί λέξεις; ἦ yap ἐγγύς ἐστί που; Eur. Elec. 
1124. 

Nore 7. For the Future Indicative and Infinitive with ἄν, 
see § 37, 2, and § 41,4. For the Future Indicative in protasis, 
see ὃ 50, 1, N. 1; in relative clauses expressing a purpose, &c., see 
§ 65, 1 and 2; with οὐ μή, see § 89. 


2. A periphrastic Future is formed by μέλλω and the 
Present or Future (seldom the Aorist) Infinitive. This 
form sometimes denotes mere futurity; and sometimes 


intention, expectation, or necessity. E. g. 


Μέλλει τοῦτο πράττειν (or πράξειν), he is about to do this, or he 
intends to do this. So in Latin, facturus est for faciet. Μέλλω ὑμᾶς 
διδάξειν, ὅθεν μοι ἡ διαβολὴ γέγονε. PLAT. Apol. 21 B. Δεήσει 
τοῦ τοιούτου τινὸς ἀεὶ ἐπιστάτου, εἰ μέλλει ἡ πολιτεία σώζεσθαι, 
if the constitution is to be preserved. Ῥι,Ατ. Rep. III, 412 A. 


Note 1. The Future Infinitive after μέλλω forms the only 
regular exception to the general principle of the use of that 
tense. (See § 27, N. 1.) The Future and the Present seem 
to be used indiscriminately. 


Nore 2. The Imperfect (seldom the Aorist) of μέλλω is 


used to express a past intention or expectation. E. g. 


Κύκλωψ, οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ἔμελχες ἀνάλκιδος ἀνδρὸς ἑταίρους ἔδμεναι ἐν 
σπῆι γλαφυρῷ, you surely were not intending to eat, &e. Od. IX, 475. 
Εμελλόν σ᾽ ἄρα κινήσειν ἐγώ, I thought I should start you off. 
Arist. Nub. 1301. See Il. 1]. 36. 


$26. The Future Optative in classic Greek is used 
only in indirect discourse after secondary tenses, to 
represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. 
Even here the Future Indicative is very often retained 
in the indirect discourse. (See § 69.) E. g. 


Ὑπειπὼν τἄλλα ὅτι αὐτὸς τἀκεῖ πράξοι, ᾧχετο, having suggested 
as to what remained, that he would himself attend to the affairs there, 
he departed. Tuuc. I, 90. (Here πράξοι represents πράξω of the 
direct discourse, which might have been expressed by πράξει in 
the indirect quotation. See in the same chapter of Thucydides, 
ἀποκρινάμενοι ὅτι πέμψουσιν, having replied that they would send, 








§ 26.] FUTURE OPTATIVE. 39 


where πέμψοιεν might have been used.) Ei τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο; 
προηγόρευεν ὅτι ὡς πολεμίῳ χρήσοιτο. XEN. Cyr. ΠῚ, 1, 3. 
(Here the announcement was εἴ τινα λήψομαι, ὡς πολεμίῳ χρήσομαι.) 
Ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἕτοιμος εἴη ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ Δέλτα, ἔνθα πολλὰ 
λήψοιντο. XEN. An. VII, 1, 88. Αἱρεθέντες ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ξυγγράψαι 
νόμους, καθ᾽ οὕστινας πολιτεύσοιντο, having been chosen for the 
purpose of making a code of laws, by which they were to govern. XEN. 
Hell. II, 3,11. (Here we have an indirect expression of the idea 
of the persons who chose them, of which the direct form is found 
just before (II, 3, 2), ἔδοξε τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθαι, of τοὺς πατρίους 
νόμους ξυγγράψουσι, καθ᾽ ods πολιτεύσουσι.) 

REMARK. ‘The term indirect discourse here, as elsewhere, must 
be understood to include, not only all cases of ordinary indirect 
quotation, introduced by ὅτε or ws or by the Accusative and the 
Infinitive, after verbs of saying and thinking, but also all dependent 
clauses, in any sentence, which indirectly express the thoughts of 
any other person than the writer or speaker, or even former thoughts 
of the speaker himself. (See § 68.) 

Note 1. The Future Optative is sometimes used in final 
and object clauses after secondary tenses; but regularly only 
with ὅπως or ὅπως μή after verbs of striving, &c., occasioually 
with μή (or ὅπως μή) after verbs of fearing, and very rarely (if 
ever) in pure final clauses. As these clauses express the pur- 
pose or fear of some person, they are in indirect discourse 
according to the Remark above. (See § 44, 2.) 

(a.) The most common case of the Future Optative in sen- 
tences of this class is with ὅπως or ὅπως μή after secondary 
tenses of verbs signifying to strive, to take care, and the like; 
the Future Indicative in this case being the most common 
form in the construction after primary tenses, which here cor- 
responds to the direct discourse. Thus, if any one ever said 
or thought, σκοπῶ ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσεται; I am taking care that 
this shall happen, we can now say, referring to that thought, 
ἐσκόπει ὅπως τοῦτο γενήσοιτο, he was taking care that this 
should happen, changing the Future Indicative to the Future 
Optative (8 77). E. g. 

Ἐσκόπει ὁ Μενεκλῆς ὅπως μὴ ἔσοιτο Gras, ἀλλ᾽ ἔσοιτο αὐτῷ 

᾿ , ‘ , » " 
ὅστις ζῶντά τε γηροτροφήσοι καὶ τελευτήσαντα θάψοι αὐτὸν, 
καὶ εἰς τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον τὰ νομιζόμενα αὐτῷ ποιήσοι. ΒΑΕ. de 
Menecl. Hered. 8 10 (11). ᾿ἘἘμηχανώμεθα ὅπως μηδείς . . . - 
νώσοιτο, νομιοῦσι δὲ πάντες, K. τ. A., we were striving that no one 


should know, &c., but that all should think, &. Par. Tim. 18 C 
(Here the second verb, νομιοῦσι, is retained in the Future Indica 











40 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 26. 


tive, while the other, γνώσεται, is changed to the Optative.) See 
also PLat. Tim. 18 E. Μηδὲν οἴου ἄλλο μηχανᾶσθαι, ἢ owas. - - - 
δέξοιντο. Puat. Rep. 1V, 430 A. (See § 15, 3.) _ Emepeheiro 
δὲ ὅπως μήτε ἄσιτοι μήτε ἄποτοί ποτε ἔσοιντο. ΧΕΝ. Cyr. γ il, 1, 
43. Other examples are Prat. Apol. 36 C; Xen. Cyr. VI, 
1,10, Hell. VI, 5, 3; Isax. de Philoct. Hered. p. 59, 41. § 35. 

In this construction the Future Indicative is generally retained, 
even after secondary tenses. See § 45. 


(b.) The Future Optative is seldom found with μή or ὅπως 
μή after secondary tenses of verbs of fearing, as here the 
Future Indicative is not common after primary tenses. LE. g. 

Od μόνον περὶ τῆς βασάνου καὶ τῆς δίκης ἐδεδοίκει, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ 
τοῦ γραμματείου, ὅπως μὴ ὑπὸ τοῦ Μενεξένου συλληφθησοιτο. 
Isoc. Trapez. p. 808 B. 8 22, (Here the fear was expressed origi- 
nally by ὅπως μὴ συλληφθήσεται.) Κατέβαλε τὸ Ἡρακλεωτῶν τεῖχος; 
οὐ τοῦτο φοβούμενος, μή τινες -. +++ πορεύσοιντο ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκείνου 
δύναμιν. XEN. Hell. VI, 4, 27. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ τοὺς θεοὺς ἂν ἔδεισας 
παρακινδυνεύειν, μὴ οὐκ ὀρθῶς αὐτὸ ποιήσοις. PLAT. Euthyphr. 
15 D. 

Here the Present or Aorist Optative, corresponding to the same 
tenses of the Subjunctive after primary tenses, is generally used. 
See § 46. 


(c.) In pure Final clauses (§ 44, 1) it would be difficult to find 
an example of ὅπως with the Future Optative, in which the weight 
of Mss. authority did not favor some other reading. Such is the 
case in XEN. Cyr. V, 4,17, and in Dem. Phaenipp. 1040, 20. Still, 
there can be little doubt of the propriety of such a construction, as 
the Future Indicative with ὅπως was in use (though rare) after 
primary tenses. (ὃ 44, 1, N. 1.) ΝᾺ 

The single example cited for the use of the simple μή with the 
Future Optative in a pure final clause is Piar. Rep. it, 393 E: 
᾿Αγαμέμνων ἠγρίαινεν, ἐντελλόμενος νῦν τε ἀπιέναι καὶ αὖθις μὴ ἐλθεῖν, 
μὴ αὐτῷ τό τε σκῆπτρον καὶ τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ “στέμματα οὐκ ἐπαρκέσοι. 
(Here there is another reading, ἐπαρκέσειεν, Οἱ inferior authority, 
which is adopted by Bekker.) If the reading ἐπαρκέσοι is retained 
(as it is by most editors), it can be explained only by assuming that 
Plato had in his mind as the direct discourse μὴ οὐκ ἐπαρκέσει. 
We must remember that Plato is here paraphrasing Homer (Il. I, 
25-28), and by no means literally. The Homeric line is Μή νύ 
τοι ov χραίσμῃ σκῆπτρον καὶ στέμμα θεοῖο. 

The other final particles, iva and ὡς, which seem never to take 
the Future Indicative, of course do not allow the Future Optative. 


(See § 44,1, N 1.) 


Note 2. Many authors, especially Thucydides, show a decided 
preference for the Future Indicative, even where the Future Opta- 
tive might be used. As the tense was restricted to indirect dis- 











§ 27. | FUTURE INFINITIVE. 41 


course, it was a less common form than the Present and Aorist, and 
for that reason often avoided even when it was allowed. 


§27. The Future Infinitive denotes an action 
which is future with reference to the leading verb. 
K. g. 

"Εσεσθαί φησι, he says that he will be ; ἔσεσθαι ἔφη, he said that he 
would be; ἔσεσθαι φήσει, he will say that he will be. Toddovs ye 
ἔσεσθαι ἔλεγον τοὺς ἐθελήσοντας, they said that there would be many 
who would be willing. XEN. Cyr. LIT, 2, 26. 

Note 1. The most common use of the Future Infinitive 
is in indirect discourse, after verbs of saying, thinking, &c., to 
represent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. (See 
the examples above.) In other constructions, the Present and 
Aorist Infinitive, being indefinite in their time, can always 
refer to the future if the context requires it (88 15, 1; 23, 1); 
so that it is seldom necessary to use the Future, unless 
emphasis is particularly required. 

Therefore, after verbs and expressions whose signification 
refers a dependent Infinitive to the future, but which yet do 
not introduce indirect discourse, as verbs of commanding, 
wishing, &c. (δ 15, 2, N. 1), the Present or Aorist Infinitive 
(not the Future) is regularly used. Thus the Greek would 
express they wish to do this not by βούλονται τοῦτο ποιήσειν; 
but by βούλονται τοῦτο ποιεῖν (or ποιῆσαι). See examples 
under §§ 15, 1 and 23, 1. So, when the Infinitive follows 
ὥστε and other particles which refer it to the future, or is used 
to denote a purpose without any particle (8 97),— and when 
it is used as a noun with the article, even if it refers to future 
time,—it is generally in the Present or Aorist, unless it is 
intended to make the reference to the future especially em- 
phatic. See examples in Chapter V. 

A single regular exception to this principle is found in the 
Future Infinitive after péAdo (ὃ 25, 2). 


Note 2. On the other hand, when it was desired to make 
the reference to the future especially prominent, the Future 
Infinitive could be used in the cases mentioned in Note 1, 
contrary to the general principle. 

(a.) Thus we sometimes find the Future Infinitive after 











42 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 27. 


verbs and expressions signifying to wish, to be unwilling, to 
tntend, to ask, to be able, and the like, where we should expect 
the Present or Aorist. This was particularly a favorite con- 
struction with Thucydides. E. g. 


᾿Εδεήθησαν δὲ καὶ τῶν Μεγαρέων ναυσὶ σφᾶς ξυμπροπέμψειν. 
Τησο. I, 27. Ἐβούλοντο προτιμωρήσεσθαι. Id. ὟΙ, δῖ. τὸ 
στόμα αὐτοῦ διενοοῦντο κλήσειν. Id. VII, 56. ᾿Εφιέμενοι μὲν τῆς 
πάσης ἄρξειν, βοηθεῖν δὲ ἅμα εὐπρεπῶς βουλόμενοι τοῖς ἑαυτῶν 
ξυγγενέσι καὶ ξυμμάχοις. Id. VI, 6. (Here βοηθεῖν follows the rule.) 
Tov ταῖς ναυσὶ μὴ ἀθυμεῖν ἐπιχειρήσειν; to prevent them from being 
without spirit to attack them in ships. Id. VI, 21. Οὔτ᾽ ἀποκωλύ- 
σειν δύνατοι ὄ ὄντες. Id. III, 28. Εἴ τις εἰς τοῦτο ἀναβάλλεται ποιή - 
σειν τὰ δέοντα, if any one postpones doing his duty as far as this. 
Dem. Ol. III, 31,1. (The ordinary construction would be ἀναβάλ- 
λεται ποιεῖν or «οιἦσα!) Οὔτε τῶν προγόνων μεμνῆσθαι [δεῖ] οὔτε 
τῶν λεγόντων ἀνέχεσθαι, νόμον τε θήσειν καὶ γράψειν, κ. τ. λ. 
Dem. δ L. 345, 27. (Here we have δεῖ θήσειν.) Πολλοῦ δέω 
ἐμαυτόν γε ἀδεκάνοιν καὶ κατ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐρεῖν αὐτός. PLAT. Apol. 
37 B. In Arist. Nub. 1130 we find, ἴσως βουλήσεται κἂν ἐν 
Αἰγύπτῳ τυχεῖν ὧν μᾶλλον ἣ κρῖναι κακῶς, perhaps he will wish that 
he might (if possible) find himself by some chance in Egypt, rather than 
wish to judge unfairly. (Here τυχεῖν ἄν is used in nearly the same 
sense as the Future in the second example. In this ex cample and 
some others here given there seems to be an approach to the con- 
struction of indirect discourse.) 

See also Tuuc. IV, 115 and 121; V, 85; VII, 11; VIII, 55 and 
74, In several of these passages the Mss. vary between the Future 
and Aorist, although the w ἃ ΤῊ of authority is for the Future. See 
Kriiger’s Note on “TrHve. I, 27, where the passages of Thucydides 
are collected. 


(d.) In like manner, the Future Infinitive is occasionally 
used for the Present or Aorist, after ὥστε and in the other 
constructions mentioned in Note 1, to make the idea of futurity 
more prominent. E. g. 


Προκαλεσάμενος ἐς λόγους Ἱππίαν, ὥστε ἣν μηδὲν ἀρέσκον λέγῃ, 
πάλιν αὐτὸν καταστήσειν ἐς τὸ τεῖχος. ON condition that he 
would in that case restore him. Tuuc. Ill, 34. Τοὺς ὁμήρους παρέ- 
δοσαν τῷ ᾿Αργείων δήμῳ διὰ ταῦτα διαχρήσεσθαι, 57 they might 
put them to death. 'T'nuc. VI, 61. So πεύσεσθαι, I, 26. Ἐλπίδι 
τὸ ἀφανὲς τοῦ κατορθώσειν ἐπιτρέψαντες, having committed to hope 
what was uncertain in the prospect of success. Tuuc. II, 42. (Here 
κατορθώσειν is more explicit than the Present κατορθοῦν would be: 
τὸ ἀφανὲς τοῦ κατορθοῦν would mean simply what was uncertain in 
regard to success.) Τὸ μὲν οὖν ἐξελέγξειν αὐτὸν θαρρῶ καὶ πάνυ 
πιστευω, | have courage and great confidence as to my convicting him. 
Dem. F. L. 342, 2. (Here most of the ordinary Mss. read ἐξελέγχειν.) 











§ 29.] FUTURE PERFECT. 43 


Note 3. The Future Infinitive is the regular form after 
verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, &c., since it stands here 
in indirect discourse (§ 15, 2, N.1). E. g. 


Τρωσὶν δ᾽ ἔλπετο θυμὸς νῆας ἐνιπρήσειν κτενέειν θ᾽ ἥρωας 
᾿Αχαιούς. Il, ΧΥ͂, 701. Ὑπό τ᾽ ἔσχετο καὶ κατένευσεν δωσέμεναι. 
Il. ΧΠῚ, 368. Παῖδά τε σὸν προσδόκα τοι ἀπονοστήσειν. ἮΡΤ. 
I, 42. Kat προσδοκᾶν χρὴ δεσπόσειν Ζηνός τινα 5 yg scu. Prom. 
930. Ἤλπιζεν γὰρ μάχην ἔσεσθαι. Truc. IV, Ἔν ἐλπίδι 
ὧν τὰ τείχη αἱρήσειν. Id. VII, 46. Τὸν στρατηγὸν cereal ταῦτα 
πράξειν. XEN. An. III, 1, 14. Ἔκ τούτου ὑπέσχετο μηχανὴν 
παρέξειν. Id. Cyr. VI, 1, 21. Σὺ γὰρ ὑπέσχου ζητήσειν. ῬΠΑΤ. 
Rep. IV, 427 E. ‘So διώμοτοι ἦ μὴν ἄξειν, Sopu. Phil. 594, 


Yet all of these verbs can take the Aorist or Present Infinitive 
without apparent change of meaning. They form an intermediate 
class between verbs which take the Infinitive in indirect discourse 
and those which do not. For examples of the Present and Aorist, 
see ὃ 15, 2, N. 2; and ὃ 23, 2, N. 2. 


§28. The Future Participle denotes an action 


which is future with reference to the leading verb. 
EK. g. 


o 


Τοῦτο ποιήσων ἔρχεται, ἦλθεν or ἐλεύσεται, he comes, went, or 
will come, Sor the purpose of doing this. Οἶδα αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιήσοντα, 
I know that he will do this: οἶδα τοῦτο ποιήσων, J know that 1 shall 
= this. So ἥδειν αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιήσοντα, J knew that he would do 
this. 


Note. For the various uses of the Future Participle, and ex- 
amples, see Chapter VI. 


FUTURE PERFECT. 


§29. The Future Perfect denotes that an action 
will be already finished at some future time. It is thus 
a Perfect transferred to the future. E. g. 


Kai pe ἐὰν ἐξελέγξης, οὐκ ἀχθεσθήσομαί σοι, ἀλλὰ μέγιστος evep- 
γέτης map ἐμοὶ ἀναγεγράψει, you will have been enrolled as the 
greatest benefactor. PLat. Gorg. 506 Ὁ. Ἣν δὲ μὴ γένηται, μάτην 
ἐμοὶ κεκλαύσεται, σὺ δ᾽ ἐγχανὼν τεθνήξεις. 1 shall then have 
had my whipping for nothing, and you will have died. Arist. Nub. 
1435 


Note 1. The Future Perfect often denotes the contin- 





+ orem pee tae sel ve ee ree 





44 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 29. 


uance of an action, or the permanence of its results, in future 
time. E. g. 
Τῆς δυνάμεως ἐς ἀίδιον τοῖς ἐπιγιγνομένοις μνήμη καταλελε ί- 
erat, the memory of our power will be left to our posterity forever. 
Tuuc. II, 64. (Compare ὃ 18, 2.) 


Note 2. The Future Perfect sometimes denotes the cer- 
tainty or likelihood that an action will immediately take place, 
which idea is still more vividly expressed by the Perfect (§ 17, 
Note 6). E. g. 

El δὲ παρελθὼν εἷς ὁστισοῦν δύναιτο διδάξαι, πᾶς ὁ παρὼν φόβος 
λελύσεται, all the present fear will be at once dispelled. Dem. 
Symmor. 178, 17. (Here the inferior Mss. have λέλυται, which 
would have the same force, like ὄλωλα quoted in § 17, N. 6.) 
Φράζε, καὶ πεπράξεται, speak, and it shall be no sooner said than 
done. ARIST. Plut. 1027, Εὐθὺς ᾿Αριαῖος ἀφεστήξει, ὥστε φίλος 
ἡμῖν οὐδεὶς λελείψεται. XEN. An. 1], 4, 5. 


Nore 3. The Future Perfect can be expressed by the 
Perfect Participle and ἔσομαι. In the active voice this com- 
pound form is the only one in use, except in a few verbs. 
E. g. ae 

λὰν ταῦτ᾽ εἰδῶμεν, καὶ τὰ δέοντα ἐσόμεθα ἐγνωκότες καὶ λόγων 
ματαίων ἀπηλλαγμένοι; we shall have already resolved to do our 
duty and shall have been freed from vain reports. Dem. Phil. I, 54, 
22. (See 8 17, N. 2). 


Note 4. A circumlocution with the Aorist Participle and 
ἔσομαι is sometimes found, especially in the poets. E. g. 


Οὐ σιωπήσας ἔσει; SopH. O. T. 1146. Aumnbets ἔσει. Sopu. O. 
C. 816. 


Nore 5. (a.) When the Perfect is used in the sense of a Present 
(§ 17, N. 3), the Future Perfect is the regular Future of that tense. 
E. g. 

Κεκλήσομαι, μεμνήσομαι, ἀφεστήξω, I shall be named, I shall re- 
ruember, I shall withdraw, &e. 


(b.) With many other verbs, the Future Perfect differs very 
slightly, if at all, from an ordinary Future. Thus, πεπράσομαι is the 
regular Future Passive of πιπράσκω. Still, where there is another 
form, the Future Perfect. is generally more emphatic, and may be 
explained by Note 1 or Note 2. 


Nore 6. The Future Perfect of the dependent moods is rare, 
except in the verbs referred to in Note 5. When it occurs, it 
presents no peculiarity, as it bears the same relation to the Indicative 
which the corresponding forms of the Future would bear. E. g. 


- 
τω... 


ceo Raa a pone oy oa τινῶν hs 2 oS ἑὼ τι li gyetie oe 





§ 30, 1.] GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 45 


e 


Ταῦτα (φησί) πεπράξεσθαι δυοῖν ἢ τριῶν ἡμερῶν, he says that 
these things will have been accomplished within two or three days. 
q rn or > - ὦ A : 
Dem. F. L. 864,18. (Here the direct discourse was πεπράξεται.) 


2EMARK. It must be remembered that, in most cases in which 
the Latin or the English would use a Future Perfect, the Greeks 
use an Aorist or even Perfect Subjunctive. (See § 18, 1, and § 20, 
N. 1, with the examples.) 


GNoMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 


840. 1. The Aorist and sometimes the Perfect In- 
dicative are used in animated language to express 
general truths. These are called the gnomic Aorist and 
the gnomie Perfect, and are usually to be translated by 
our Present. 


These tenses give a more vivid statement of general truths, 
by employing a distinct case or several distinct cases in past 
time to represent (as it were) all possible cases, and implying 
that what has occurred will occur again under similar circum- 
stances. E. g. 

Κάτθαν᾽ ὁμῶς & τ᾽ ἀεργὸς ἀνὴρ ὅ τε πολλὰ ἐοργώς, both alike must 
die. Il. IX, 320. Ὅστε καὶ ἄλκιμον ἄνδρα φοβεῖ καὶ ἀφείλετο 
νίκην, who terrifies, and snatches away. II. XVII,177. (See Note 2.) 
Bia δὲ καὶ μεγάλαυχον ἔσφαλεν ἐν χρόνῳ. Pinp. Pyth. VII, 20. 
Σοφοὶ δὲ μέλλοντα τριταῖον ἄνεμον ἔμαθον; οὐδ᾽ ὑπὸ κέρδει βλάβεν. 
Pinp. Nem. VII, 25. Καὶ δὴ φίλον τις ἔκταν᾽ ἀγνοίας ὕπο. AESCH. 
Supp. 499. ᾿Αλλὰ τὰ τοιαῦτα εἰς μὲν ἅπαξ καὶ βραχὺν χρόνον 
ἀντέχει, καὶ σφόδρα γε ἤνθησεν ἐπὶ ταῖς ἐλπίσιν, ἂν τύχῃ, τῷ 
χρόνῳ δὲ φωρᾶται καὶ περὶ αὑτὰ καταρρεῖ. Dem. Ol. Il, 21,1. 
(See Note 2.) “Hv dpa... . σφαλῶσιν, ἀντελπίσαντες ἄλλα ἐπλή- 
ρωσαν τὴν χρείαν, they supply the deficiency (as often as one occurs). 
Tuc. I, 70. Ἢν δέ τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέ- 
θεσαν, i.e. they impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. 
Xen. Cyr. I, 2, 2. Δεινῶν τ᾽ ἄημα πνευμάτων ἐκοίμισε στένοντα 
πόντον. SOPH. ΑἹ. 614. Mi ἡμέρα τὸν μὲν καθεῖλεν ὑψόθεν, τὸν 
δ᾽ ip’ ἄνω. Evr. Ino. Fr. 424. “Ὅταν ὁ Ἔρως ἐγκρατέστερος γένηται; 
διαφθείρει τε πολλὰ καὶ ἠδίκησεν. Puat. Symp. 188 A. Ὅταν 
τις ὥσπερ οὗτος ἰσχύσῃ; ἡ πρώτη πρόφασις καὶ μικρὸν πταῖσμα ἅπαντα 
ἀνεχαίτισε καὶ ἡ ἔλυσεν. Dem. Ol. Il, 20, 27. ΣΝ 
map ἐμοῦ μάθῃ, ἐὰν μὲν βούληται, ἀποδέδωκεν ὃ ἐγὼ πράττομαι 
ἀργύριον, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ, ἐλθὼν εἰς ἱερὸν ὀμόσας, ὅσου ἂν φῇ ἄξια εἶναι τὰ 
μαθήματα, τοσοῦτον κατέθηκεν. Pat. Prot. 828 Β. (Here the 
Perfect and Aorist are used together, in nearly the same sense, he 
pays.) Πολλοὶ διὰ δόξαν καὶ πολιτικὴν δύναμιν μεγάλα κακὰ πεπόνθα- 





46 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 30, 1. 


σιν, 1. Θ. many always have suffered, and many do suffer. XEN. 
T On a ‘ »* > ἫΝ > 

Mem. IV, 2, 35. Τὸ δὲ μὴ ἐμποδὼν ἀνανταγωνίστῳ εὐνοίᾳ τετί- 

μηται. Tuuc. Il, 45. 


ReMARK. The gnomic Perfect is not found in Homer. 


Nore 1. The sense, as well as the origin of the construc- 
tion, is often made clearer by the addition of such words as 
πολλάκις, ἤδη, OF οὔπω. Such examples as these form a simple 
transition from the common to the gnomic use of these 
tenses :— 


\ » , 5 
Πολλὰ στρατόπεδα ἤδη ἔπεσεν ὑπ᾽ ἐλασσόνων, i. 6. many cases 
ἫΝ already arisen, implying, it often happens. Tuvuc. II, 89. Μέλ- 
ov Ὑ ἰατρὸς, τῇ νόσῳ διδοὺς χρόνον, ἰάσατ᾽ ἤδη μᾶλλον ij τεμὼν 


χρόα. Eur. Ὲ rag. 1057, Πολλάκις ἔχων τις οὐδὲ τἀναγκαῖα νῦν αὔριον 
ἐπλούυτησ᾽, ὦστε χἀτέρους τρέφειν, 1. 6. cases have often occurred 
tn which such a man has become rich the next day, ἕο. ῬΗΙ ΕΜ. Fr. 
Inc. 29. Αθυμοῦντες ἄνδρες οὔπω τρόπαιον ἔστησαν. PLAT. Crit. 
108 C. Οὐδεὶς ἐπλούτησεν ταχέως δίκαιος ὦν. MENAND. Col. Fr. 
6. (Kriiger, § ὅ8, 10, A. 2.) 

Nore 2. General truths are more commonly expressed in 
Greek, as in English, by the Present. (See § 10, N. 1.) 

Ἢ » > τ: . . 

Examples of the Present and Aorist, used in nearly the same 
sense in the same sentence, are given under ὃ 30, 1. The 
gnomic Aorist is, however, commonly distinguished from the 
ν᾿ . i . . 7 = -- » . 
Present, either by being more vivid, or by referring to an 
action which is (by its own nature) momentary or sudden, 
while the Present (as usual) implies duration. See the second 
and sixth examples under § 30, 1. 


Nore 3. An Aorist resembling the gnomic Aorist is very 
common in Homer, in similes depending on past tenses, where 
it seems to stand by assimilation to the leading verb, It is 
usually to be translated by the Present. E. g. 


[ἬἬριπε δ᾽ ὡς ὅτε τις δρῦς ἤριπεν, and he fell, as when an oak falls 
(literally, as when an oak once fell). Tl. XVI, 389. 


Note 4. It is very doubtful whether the Imperfect was ever 
used in a gnomic sense, so as to be translated by the Present. 
NoTE 5. An instance of the gnomic Aorist in the Infinitive ig 
fcund in Sopu. Aj. 1082:— 
σ eo 4, , a , a 
Ὅπου δ΄ ὑβρίζειν δρᾶν θ᾽, ἃ βούλεται, παρῇ, 
Ταύτην νόμιζε τὴν πόλιν χρόνῳ ποτὲ 
Ἐξ οὐρίων δραμοῦσαν ἐς βυθὸν πεσεῖν. 








§ 80, 2.1 GNOMIC AND ITERATIVE TENSES. 47 


Here πεσεῖν represents ἔπεσεν in the direct discourse; the sense 
being, believe that that city must at some time fall. (See Schneide- 
win’s note.) So probably in Prat. Phaedr. 232 B: ἡγουμένῳ - - - - 
διαφορᾶς γενομένης κοινὴν ἀμφοτέροις καταστῆναι τὴν συμφοράν. 

Even the Aorist Participle seems to be occasionally used in the 
same sense; as in THuc. VI, 16: οἶδα τοὺς τοιούτους ἐν μὲν τῷ κατ᾽ 
αὐτοὺς βίῳ λυπηροὺς ὄντας, τῶν δὲ ἔπειτα ἀνθρώπων προσποίησιν 
ξυγγενείας τισὶ καὶ μὴ οὖσαν καταλιπόντας; I know that such men, 
although in their own lifetimes they are offensive, yet often leave to some 
who come after them a desire to claim connexion with them, even where 


there is no ground for tt. 
Nore 6. The gnomic Perfect is found in the Infinitive in Dem. 
Ol. Il, 23, 14: εἰ δέ τις σώφρων ἣ Sixaws,.... παρεῶσθαι καὶ 


ἐν οὐδενὸς εἶναι μέρει τὸν τοιοῦτον (φησίν); such a man ts always thrust 
aside, and is of no account. 


2. The Imperfect and Aorist are sometimes used 

. . ἡ ῃ 
with the particle av to denote a customary acton, 
being equivalent to our phrase in narration, “ he would 


often do this,” or “he used to dott.” K. g. 

Διηρώτων ἂν αὐτοὺς τί λέγοιεν, I used to ask them (I would ask 
them) what they said. Piar. Apol. 22 B. Εἴ τινες ἴδοιέν πῃ τοὺς 
σφετέρους ἐπικρατοῦντας, ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν, whenever any saw their 
friends in any way victorious, they would be encouraged (1. e. they were 
encouraged in all such cases). Tuuc. VII, 71. Πολλάκις ἠκού- 
σαμεν ἄν τι κακῶς ὑμᾶς βουλευσάμενους μέγα πρᾶγμα, we used very 
often to hear you, &c. Arist. Lysist. 511. Ei τις αὐτῷ περί του 
ἀντιλέγοι μηδὲν ἔχων σαφὲς λέγειν, ἐπὶ τὴν ὑπόθεσιν ἐπανῆγεν ἂν 
πάντα τὸν λόγον, he always brought the whole discussion back to the 
main point. XEN. Mem. IV, 6,13. Ὁπότε προσβλέψειέ τινας τῶν ἐν 
ταῖς τάξεσι, τοτὲ μὲν εἶπεν ἂν; ὦ ἄνδρες, K. τ. Aw. . « + τοτὲ δ᾽ αὖ ἐν 
ἄλλοις ἂν ἔλεξεν. XEN. Cyr. VII, 1, 10. 

This construction must be carefully distinguished from that with 
ἄν in ordinary apodosis (8 49, 2). For the iterative Imperfect 
transferred to the Infinitive, see § 41, N. 3. 

Nore 1. (a.) The Ionic tterative Aorist in -oxov and 
-σκόμην expresses the repetition of a momentary action; the 
Imperfect with the same endings expresses the repetition of a 
continued action. E. g. 

ἤλλλους μὲν yap παῖδας ἐμοὺς πόδας ὠκὺς ᾿Αχιλλεὺς πέρνασχ᾽ ὅν 
τιν ἕλεσκε. Il. XXIV, 751. “Oxws ἔλθοι ὁ Νεῖλος ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ 
πήχεας, ἄρδεσκε Αἴγυπτον τὴν ἔνερθε Μέμφιος. Hor. I, 13. 

(b.) In Homer, however, the iterative forms are someumes 
used in nearly or quite the same sense as the ordinary forms; 
thus ἔσκε in Homer does not differ from ἦν. E. g. 








USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 30, 2. 


Aanp αὖτ᾽ ἐμὸς ἔσκε κυνώπιδος, εἴ mor’ ἔην γε. Il. III, 180. “Os οἱ 
πλησίον ἷζε, μάλιστα δέ μιν φιλέεσκεν. Od, ὙΠ] 171. 


Note 2. Herodotus sometimes uses the iterative forms in -σκον 
and -σκόμην with ἄν, in the construction of § 30,2. (He uses the 
iterative Aorist in only two passages, in both with av.) E. g. 


> 


’ 
Φοιτέουσα κλαίεσκε ἂν καὶ ὀδυρέσκετο. Hor. III, 119. Ἐς 
/ a a» , κ᾿ 
τούτους ὅκως ἔλθοι ὁ Σκύλης, τὴν μὲν στρατιὶὴν καταλείπεσκε ἐν τῷ 
, > ‘ 4 ad ‘ - ae 8 
προαστείῳ, αὐτὸς δὲ ὅκως ἔλθοι ἐς τὸ τεῖχος . . .« . λάβεσκε ἂν 
ε λλ ΠΣ > “- Η τω σαν T "πὸ 
Ἑλληνίδα ἐσθῆτα. DT. IV, 78. 


DEPENDENCE OF Moops AND TENSES. 


§31. 1. In depondent sentences, where the con- 
struction allows either a Subjunctive or an Optative, 
the Subjunctive is used if the leading verb is primary, 
and the Optative if it is secondary. (See § 8,2.) KE. σ. 


, a , 
i Πράττουσιν ἃ ἂν βούλωνται, they do whatever they please: but 
a, , : : 
ἔπραττον ἃ βούλοιντο; they did whatever they pleased. 


2. In like manner, where the construction allows 
either an Indicative or an Optative, the Indicative 
follows primary, and the Optative follows secondary 
tenses. ΕἸ. g. 
4 Λέγουσιν ὅτι τοῦτο βούλονται, they say that they wish for this, 
ἔλεξαν ὅτι τοῦτο βούλοιντο, they said that they wished for this. 

Note 1. To these fundamental rules we find one special 
exception : — 

In indirect discourse of all kinds (including sentences 
denoting a purpose or object after ἵνα, μή, &c.), either an In- 
dicative or a Subjunctive may depend upon a secondary 
tense, in order that the mood and tense actually used by the 
speaker may be retained in the indirect discourse. (See § 69.) 
E. g. 

Ἐἶπεν ὅτι βούλεται; for εἶπεν ὅτι βούλοιτο, he said that he 
wished (i. e. he said βούλομαι). ᾿Ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ τοῦτο γένηται, for 
ἐφοβεῖτο μὴ τοῦτο γένοιτο, he feared lest tt should happen (i. 6. he 
thought, φοβοῦμαι μὴ γένηται). (See § 44, 2. 


Nore. 2. An only apparent exception to these rules occurs 
when either an apodosis with ἄν, or a verb expressing a wish, stands 
in a dependent sentence. In both these cases the form which would 


§ 32.] DEPENDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 49 


have been required in the apodosis or in the wish, if it had been 
independent, 15 retained without regard to the leading verb. It 
will be obvious from the principles of such sentences (Chapter IV), 
that a change of mood would in most cases change the whole 
nature of the apodosis or wish. E. g. 

Ἐγὼ οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅπως ἄν τις σαφέστερον ἐπιδείξειεν; I do not 
know how any one could show this more clearly. Dem. Aph. I, 828, 
23. Δεῖ yap ἐκείνῳ. τοῦτο ἐν τῇ γνώμῃ παραστῆσαι, ὡς ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῆς 
ἀμελείας ταύτης «++ - ἴσως ἂν ὁρμήσαιτε. DEM. Phil. I, 44, 25. 
Εἰ δ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἄλλο τι γνώσεσθε. ὁ μὴ γένοιτο; τίνα οἴεσθε αὐτὴν Ψυχὴν 
ἕξειν; DEM. Aph. Il, 842, 14. 

The learner needs only to be warned not to attempt to apply the 
rules § 31, 1, 2 to such cases as these. See § 44, 1, N. 3 (6). 


Nore 3. A few other unimportant exceptions will be noticed 
as they occur. See, for example, § 44, 2, Note 2. 


Remark. It is therefore of the highest importance to ascertain 
which tenses (in all the moods) are to be considered primary, and 
which secondary; that is, which are to be followed, in dependent 
sentences, by the Indicative or Subjunctive, and which by the 
Optative, where the rules of § 31 are applied. The general prin- 
ciple, stated in § 8, 2, applies chiefly to the Indicative, and even 


there not without some important modifications. 


§ $2, 1. In the Indicative the general rule holds, that the 
Present, Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are primary 
tenses, and the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist are secondary 
tenses. 


2. But the historical Present is a secondary tense, as it 
refers to the past; and the gnomic Aorist is a primary tense, 
as it refers to the present. 

See the first example under § 10, 2, where an historical 
Present is followed by the Optative ; and the sixth, seventh, 
and eighth examples under § 30, 1, where enomic Aorists are 
followed by the Subjunctive. 


3. (a.) The Imperfect Indicative in protasis or apodosis 
denoting the non-fulfilment of a condition (8 49, 2), when it 
refers to present time, is a primary tense. EK. g. 

Ἔγραφον ἃν ἡλίκα ὑμᾶς εὖ ποιήσω, εἰ εὖ ἤἥδειν, I would tell you 
in my letter how great services I would render you, if I knew, &c. 
Dem. F. L. 353, 24. Πάνυ ἂν ἐφοβούμην, μὴ ἀπορήσωσι λόγων. 
PLAT. Symp. 193 E. ᾿Εφοβούμην ἂν σφόδρα λέγειν, μὴ δόξω: 
κι τ᾿ X., 1 should be very much afraid to speak, lest I should seem, &c. 
Pat. Theaet. 143 E. Ταῦτ᾽ ἂν ἤδη λέγειν ἐπεχείρουν, ἵν εἰδῆτε. 
Dem. Aristocr. 623, 11. 

3 D 








50 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 32. 


(5.) On the other hand, the Aorist Indicative in the same 
sense in protasis and apodosis, and also the Imperfect when it 


refers to the past, are secondary tenses. LE. g. 


᾿Αλλὰ Kal τοὺς θεοὺς ἂν ἔδεισας παρακινδυνεύειν, μὴ οὐκ ὀρθῶς αὐτὸ 
ποιήσοις- PLat. Euthyph. 15 Ὁ. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐδὲ μετὰ πολλῶν μαρτύ- 
ρων ἀποδιδοὺς εἰκῇ τις ἂν ἐπίστευεν, ἵν᾿ εἴ τις γίγνοιτο διαφορὰ, 
κομίσασθαι ῥᾳδίως map ὑμῖν δύνηται. Dem. Onet. I, 869, 18. 
(Here the Subjunctive δύνηται will be explained by ὃ 44, 2, but the 
Optative shows that the leading verb is secondary.)* 


8 $3. All the tenses of the Subjunctive and Imperative 
are primary, as they refer to present or future time. E. g. 


Ἕπεσθ᾽ ὅπῃ ἄν τις ἡγῆται; follow whithersoever any one leads 
the way. Tuuc. Il, 11. 


8 $4. As the Optative refers sometimes to the future and 
sometimes to the past, it exerts upon a dependent verb some- 
times the force of a primary, and sometimes that of a secondary 
tense. 

When it refers to the past, as in general suppositions after 
ei and relatives, depending on past tenses (88 51 and 62), it is 
of course secondary, like any other form which refers to past 
time. 

When it refers to the future, it is properly to be considered 
primary. In many cases, however, a double construction is 
allowed: on the principle of assimilation the Greeks preferred 
the Optative to the Subjunctive in certain clauses depending 


* It is difficult to determine the question whether the secondary tenses 
of the Indicative in this construction (§ 32, 3) are primary or secondary in 
their effect on the dependent verb, as sentences of nearly every class de- 
pending upon them take by assimilation a secondary tense of the Indica- 
tive. (So in most final clauses, § 44, 3; in protasis after εἰ, § 49, 2; and 
after relatives, § 64.) There remain only indirect quotations, and the few 
cases of final clauses that do not take the Indicative by assimilation ; but 
hoth of these have the peculiarity of allowing the Indicative and Subjunc- 
tive, when the writer pleases, to stand as they were in the direct discourse, 
instead of being changed to the Optative. Madvig (Bemerkungen, p. 20) 
classes them all as primary forms, considering the two examples of the 
Optative after the Aorist, quoted above, § 32, 3 (b), as exceptions. But 
these cannot be accounted for on the supposition that both Aorist and 
Imperfect are primary: they are, however, perfectly regular, if we con- 
sider the present forms primary and the past forms secondary (as in other 
cases); while the other examples in which the Indicative or Subjunctive 
= ssa the past forms may all be explained on the principle of ὁ 3l, 

ote 1. 


§ 34.] DEPENDENCE OF MOODS AND ‘TENSES. 51 


on an Optative, the dependent verb referring to the future like 
the leading verb, and differing little from a Subjunctive in 
such a position. This assimilation takes place regularly in 
protasis and conditional relative clauses depending on an 
Optative; but seldom in final and object clauses after ἵνα, ὅπως, 
μή, &c., and very rarely in indirect quotations or questions. 

The three classes of sentences which may depend on an 
Optative referring to the future are treated separately : — 

1. (a.) In protasis and in conditional relative sentences 
depending upon an Optative which refers to the future, the 
Optative is regularly used to express a future condition, rather 
than the Subjunctive. E. g. 

Eins φορητὸς οὐκ ἂν, εἰ πράσσοις καλῶς, you would be unendur- 
able, if you should ever prosper. ἈΈΒΟΗ. Prom. 979. ᾿Ανδρὶ δέ κ᾽ 
οὐκ εἴξειε μέγας Τελαμώνιος Αἴας, ds θνητός τ᾽ εἴη καὶ ἔδοι Δημήτερος 
ἀκτήν. Il. XIU, 821. Πῶς γὰρ ἄν τις, ἅ γε μὴ ἐπίσταιτο, ταῦτα 
σοφὸς εἴη ; for how should any one be wise in those things which he did 
not understand? XEN. Mem. IV, 6, 7. Δέοιτο ἂν αὐτοῦ μένειν, ἔστε 
σὺ ἀπέλθοις. XEN. Cyr. V, 8, 18. Ei ἀποθνήσκοι μὲν πάντα, ὅσα 
τοῦ ζὴν μεταλάβοι, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀποθάνοι, μένοι ἐν τούτῳ . -- - 
Gp’ οὐ πολλὴ ἀνάγκη τελευτῶντα πάντα τεθνάναι; PLAT. Phaed. 72 Ὁ. 
Ὡς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος, ὅ τις τοιαῦτά ye ῥέζοι, may any other man 
likewise perish, who shall do such things. Od. 1, 47. Τεθναίην, ὅτε μοι 
μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι, may I die, when I (shall) no longer care for 
these! Mimn. Fr. I, 2. (Here ὅταν μηκέτι μέλῃ might be used with- 
out change of meaning. But ὅτε μέλει, found in the passage as 
quoted by Plutarch, would refer to the present in classic Greek.) 


(b.) On the other hand, the dependent verb is sometimes in 
the Subjunctive (or Future Indicative with εἰ), on the ground 
that it follows a tense of future time. This happens especially 
after the Optative with ἄν used in its sense approaching that of 
the Future Indicative (8 52, 2, N; § 54,1, ὁ.) E.g. 

Ἢν οὖν μάθῃς μοι τοῦτον, οὐκ ἂν ἀποδοίην, if then you should 
(shall) learn this for me, I would not pay, &c. Arist. Nub. 116. Ἤν 
σε ἀφέλωμαι, κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην. Id. Ran. 586. ᾿Εγὼ δὲ ταύτην 
μὲν τὴν εἰρήνην, ἕως ἂν εἷς ᾿Αθηναίων λείπηται, οὐδέποτ᾽ ἂν συμ- 
βουλεύσαιμι ποιήσασθαι τῇ πόλει, 1 would never advise the city to make 
this peace, as long as a single Athenian shall be left. Dem. Εἰ, L. 345, 
14. (Here ἕως λείποιτο would be the common form.) Ὥσπερ ἂν 
ὑμῶν ἕκαστος αἰσχυνθείη τὴν τάξιν λιπεῖν ἣν ἂν Tax OH ἐν TO πολέμῳ, 
as each one of you would be ashamed to leave the post at which he might 
be placed in war. ἈΈΒΟΗΙΝ. Cor. § 7. (Here ἣν ταχθείη would be 
the more common expression.) Τῶν ἀτοποτάτων ἂν ein, εἰ ταῦτα 
δυνηθεὶς μὴ πράξει Dem. Ol.1,16, 25. Many such examples may 
be explained equally well by ὃ 54, 1 (@). 








52 USE OF THE TENSES. [§ 34, 1. 


Note. It will be understood that no assimilation to the Optative 
can take place when the protasis (after ei or a relative) consists of a 
present or past tense of the indicative, as in this case a change to 
the Optative would involve a change of time. See § 64, Rem 2. 


9. In final and object clauses after wa, ὅπως, μή, &c., the 
Subjunctive (or Future Indicative) is generally used when the 
leading verb is an Optative referring to the future; the 
Optative, however, sometimes occurs. The preference for the 
Subjunctive here can be explained on the general principle 
(§ 31, Note 1, and § 44, 2). E.g. 


(Subj.) "Oxvoinv ἂν eis ra πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν, μὴ καταδύσῃ" φοβοί- 

μὴν δ᾽ ἂν τῷ ἡγεμόνι ἕπεσθαι, μὴ ἡμᾶς ἀγάγῃ ὅθεν οὐχ οἷόν τε ἔσται 

ἐξελθεῖν. XEN. An. 1, 3, 17, Olopa ἂν ὑμᾶς μέγα ὀνῆσαι τὸ στρά- 

τευμα, εἰ ἐπιμεληθείητε ὅπως ἀντὶ τῶν ἀπολωλότων ὡς τάχιστα στρατη- 
οἱ καὶ λοχαγοὶ ἀντικατασταθῶσιν. XEN. An. III, 1, 38. 

(Opt.) Πειρῴμην ἂν μὴ πρόσω ὑμῶν εἶναι, ἵνα, εἴ που καιρὸς εἴη, 
ἐπιφανείην. XEN. Cyr. Il, 4,17. ‘H φυλακὴ γελοία τις ἂν φαί- 
νοιτο, εἰ μὴ σύγε ἐπιμελοῖο ὅπως ἔξωθέν τι εἰσφέροιτο. XEN. 
Oecon. VI, 39. Other examples of the Optative are AESCH. 
Eumen. 298 (ἔλθοι, ὅπως γένοιτο) ; SOPH. Aj. 1221 (ὅπως προσεί- 
ποιμεν) ; SoPH. Phil. 325; Eur. Hee. 839; XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 22. 


Note. In relative sentences expressing a purpose the Future 
Indicative is regularly retained, even after past tenses of the Indica- 
tive. For exceptional cases of the Optative in this construction, 
depending on the Optative with ἄν, see § 65, 1, Notes 1 and 3. 


3. In indirect quotations and questions, depending upon an 
Optative which refers to the future, the Indicative is the only 
form regularly used to represent an Indicative of the direct 
discourse. But in indirect questions the Optative is sometimes 
found representing a dubitative Subjunctive of the direct 
question (§ 88). E. δ. 


Οὐδ᾽ ἂν els ἀντείποι ὡς ov συμφέρει τῇ πόλει. DEM. Megal. 202, 
24. El οὖν νῦν ἀποδειχθείη τίνα χρὴ ἡγεῖσθαι; - + - - οὐκ ἂν ὁπότε οἱ 
πολέμιοι ἔλθοιεν βουλεύεσθαι ἡμᾶς δέοι. ΧΕΝ. An. III, 2, 36. 

Οὐκ ἂν ἔχοις ἐξελθὼν ὅ τι χρῷο σαυτῷ, if you should withdraw, 
you would not know what to do with yourself. PLAT. Crit. 45 B. οὐκ 
ἂν ἔχοις ὅ τι XpN Tato σαυτῷ, ἀλλ᾽ ἰλιγγιῴης ἂν καὶ χασμῷο οὐκ ἔχων 
ὅ τιεἴποις. id. Gorg. 486 Β. The direct questions here were τι 
χρῶμαι; ; — τί χρήσωμαι; ;— τί εἴπω ; The Subjunctive can always 
be retained in this construction, even after past tenses. See § 71. 


Note. In Dem. Megal. 203, 12, we find a case of the Optative in 
an indirect quotation: Οὐ yap ἐκεῖνό γ᾽ ἂν εἴποιμεν, ὡς ἀνταλλάξασθαι 
βουλοίμεθ᾽ ἀντιπάλους Λακεδαιμονίους ἀντὶ Θηβαίων There are 


§ 35, 2.] DEPENDENCE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 53 


no other readings; and it is doubtful whether we must consider it as 
an exceptional case of assimilation (we could not say this, that we 
wished, &c.), or emend it, either by reading βουλόμεθα (as proposed 
by Madvig, Bemert. p. 21), or by inserting ἄν, which may easily have 
been omitted in the Mss. before either dvradAdEuc Gat Or ἀντιπάλους. 
In Puat. Rep. VII, 515 D, we find in the best Mss. Τί ἂν οἴει αὐτὸν 
εἰπεῖν, εἴ τις αὐτῷ λέγοι ὅτι τότε μὲν ἑώρα φλυαρίας, νῦν δὲ ὀρθότερα 
βλέποι; what do you think he would say, if any one should tell him 
that all that time he had been seeing foolish phantoms, but that now he 
sees more correctly? Some Mss. read βλέπει. 


In Il. V, 85, Τυδείδην οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη, the Opta- 
tive in the indirect question represents μέτεστιν, but οὐκ Gy γνοίης 
here refers to the past, meaning you would not have known, (See 
g 49, 2, N. 6.) 


§ $5. 1. The Present, Perfect, and the Futures in the 
Infinitive and Participle regularly denote time which is merely 
relative to that of the leading verb of the sentence. They are 


therefore primary when that is primary, and secondary when 
that is secondary. 


Βούλεται λέγειν τί τοῦτό ἐστιν, he wishes to iell what this is. 
Ἐβούλετο λέγειν τί τοῦτο ein, he wished to tell what this was. Φησὶν 
ἀκηκοέναι τί ἐστιν, he says he has heard what it is. "Ἔφη ἀκηκοέναι 

“ * 


ri ein, he said he had heard what it was. Φησὶ ποιήσειν ὁ τι ἂν 
βούλησθε: he says he will do whatever you shall wish. "Eqn ποιή- 
σειν 6 τι βούλοισθε; he said he would do whatever you should wish. 
Mévovow βουλόμενοι εἰδέναι Ti ἐστι. ἜἜμενον βουλόμενοι εἰδέναι 
τί εἴη. Μένουσιν ἀκηκοότες τί ἐστιν. “Epevov ἀκηκοότες τί εἴη. 
Μένουσιν ἀκουσόμενοι τί ἐστιν. “Epevoy ἀκουσόμενοι τί εἴη. 


Nore. When the Present Infinitive and Participle represent 
the Imperfect (without ἄν) they are secondary without regard to 
the leading verb. E. g. 


Πῶς yap οἴεσθε δυσχερῶς ἀκούειν, εἴ τίς τι λέγοι; how unvwill- 
ingly do you think they heard it, when any one said anything? See 
this and the other examples under § 15, 3, and § 73, 2. 


2. When the Aorist Infinitive in ttself does not refer to any 
definite time, it takes its time from the leading verb (like the 
Present), and may be either primary or secondary. But when 
it refers to time absolutely past, it is always a secondary tense. 
E. g. 

Βούλεται γνῶναι τί τοῦτό ἐστιν. he wishes to learn what this ts. 
Ἐβούλετο γνῶναι Ti τοῦτο εἴη, he wished to learn what this was. 


(§ 23, 1.) 


But φησὶ γνῶναι τί τοῦτο εἴη; he says that he learned what this 





54 THE PARTICLE “AN. [§ 35, 2. 


was (§ 23, 2). “Edn γνῶναι τί τοῦτο εἴην he said that he had learned 
what this was. (Τνῶναι has the force of a primary tense in the first 
example, that of a secondary tense in the others.) 

8, The Aorist Participle refers to time past relatively to the 
leading verb. It is therefore secondary when the leading 


verb is past or present and the Participle refers to time 


absolutely past; but it may be primary when the leading verb 
is future, if the Participle refers to time absolutely future. 
E. g. 

Ἴστε ἡμᾶς ἐλθόντας ἵνα τοῦτο ἴδοιμεν you know that we came 
that we might see this. πειπὼν τἄλλα ὅτι αὐτὸς τἀκεῖ πράξοι; 
ᾧχετο. THUC. I, 90. Τῇ μάστιγι τυπτέσθω πληγὰς ὑπὸ κήρυκος ἐν 
ἀγορᾷ, κηρύξαντος ὧν ἕνεκα μέλλει τύπτεσθαι. Puat. Leg. ΧΙ, 
917 E. Ψήφων δείσας μὴ δεηθείη . . . τρέφει. Arist. Vesp. 109. 

4, The tenses of the Infinitive and Participle with ἄν are 
followed, in dependent clauses, by those constructions that 
would have followed the finite moods which they represent, in 
the same position. See § 41, § 82, 3, and § 34. 





CHAPTER Ill. 


THE PARTICLE “AN. 


§%6. The adverb av (Epic κέ, Doric xd) has two 
uses, which must be carefully distinguished. 


1. In one use, it denotes that the action of the verb 
to which it is joined is dependent upon some condition, 
expressed or implied. This is its force with the 
secondary tenses of the Indicative, and with the 
Optative, Infinitive, and Participle: with these it 
forms an apodosis, and belongs strictly to the verb. 


. ., " δ τὰ ψιω ἡ 
9. In its other use, it is joined regularly to εἰ: if, and 
to all relatives and temporal particles, (and occasionally 


/ 


to the final particles ὡς; ὅπως, and ὄφρα.) when these 





§ 37, 2.] THE PARTICLE “AN. 55 


words are followed by the Subjunctuve. Here it seems 
to belong entirely to the relative or particle, with which 


/ e/ 


. . 3 “ ΄ 
it often coalesces, as In €av, OTA, ἐπειδαν. 


ΒΕΜΑΒΚΊ. The rules, § 36, 1, 2, include only the constructions 
which are in good use in Attic Greek. For the Epic use of av with 
the Subjunctive in apodosis, see ὃ 38, 2 ; for ἄν with the Future In- 
dicative, see § 37, 2. 


ReMARK 2. There is no word or expression in English which can 
be used to translate ἄν. In its first use (ὃ 36, 1) we express it by 
the mood of the verb which we use; as βούλοιτο ἄν, he would wish. 
In its second use, with the Subjunctive, it has no force that can be 
made perceptible in English. Its peculiar use can be understood 
only by a study of the various constructions in which it occurs. 
These are enumerated below, with references (when itis necessary) 
to the more full explanation of each in Chapter IV. 


$37. 1. The Present and Perfect Indicative are 
never used with av. 


When this seems to occur, there is always a mixture of construc- 
tions. Thus in Puat. Leg. IV, 712 E, ἐγὼ δὲ οὕτω νῦν ἐξαίφνης ἂν 
ἐρωτηθεὶς ὄντως, ὅπερ εἶπον, οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν. ἄν was used with a view 
to οὐκ ἂν εἴποιμι or some such construction, for which οὐκ ἔχω εἰπεῖν 
was substituted: the meaning is, if 1 should suddenly be asked, I 
could not say, &e. So in PLat. Men. 72 C, κἂν εἰ πολλαὶ . - . εἰσὶν, 
ἕν γέ τι εἶδος ταὐτὸν πᾶσαι ἔχουσι: i.e. even if they are many, stil 
(it would seem to follow that) they all have, &c. Examples like the 
last are very common in Aristotle, who seems to use κὰν εἰ almost 
like καὶ εἰ, without regard to the mood of the leading verb. 

Remark. Constructions like those mentioned in § 42, 2, Note, 
must not be referred to this head. For οὐκ ἄν pot δοκεῖ εἶναι iS 
never it would not seem to me to be ; but always, tt does not seem to 


me that it would be; ἄν belonging to εἶναι. 


29. The Future Indicative is often used with av or 
κέ by the early poets, especially Homer. The addition 
of ἄν makes the Future more contingent than that 
tense naturally is, giving it a force approaching that of 
the Optative with av in apodosis (§ 39). E. δ. 


" ᾽ , ’ , 
᾿Αλλ᾽ ἴθ᾽, ἐγὼ δέ κέ τοι Χαρίτων μίαν ὁπλοτεράων δώσω, ὀπνυιέμεναι 
> ΓΙ 


καὶ σὴν κεκλῆσθαι ἄκοιτιν. Il. XIV, 267. Καί κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρεει 
Τρώων ὑπερηνορεόντων, perhaps some one will thus speak. Tl. 1V, 176. 


Ὁ δέκεν κεχολώσεται; ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι, and he will perhaps be angry 
to whom I come. Il. 1,189. Eid aye, τοὺς ἂν ἐγὼν ἐπιόψομαι " οἱ 
Ld 


δὲ πιθέσθων. Π. 1X, 167. Tap’ ἔμοιγε καὶ ἄλλοι, οἵ κέ με τιμη- 








56 THE PARTICLE “AN. [8 37, 2. 


covet, i. 6. who will honor me when occasion offers. Il. I,174. Ei 
δ᾽ ᾽οδυσεὺς ἔλθοι καὶ ἵκοιτ᾽ és πατρίδα γαῖαν, αἶψά κε σὺν ᾧ παιδὶ Bias 
ἀποτίσεται ἀνδρῶν. Od. XVII, 539. (In this passage the Future 
with κέ is used nearly in the sense of the Optative, corresponding to 
the Optatives in the Protasis. ᾿Αποτίσεται may also be Aorist Sub- 
junctive, by § 38, 2.) Μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ. Prinv. Nem. VII, 68. 
Kay ἔτ᾽ ἔτι φόνιον ὄψομαι aipa. kur. Elect. 484. (So the 
Mss.) 


Nore 1. The use of ἄν with the Future Indicative in Attic Greek 
is absolutely denied by many critics, and the number of the ex- 
amples cited in support of it have been greatly diminished by the 
more careful revision of the texts of the Attic writers. Still several 
passages remain, even in the best prose, where we must either 
emend the text against the authority of the Mss., or admit the con- 
struction as a rare exception to the general rule. E. g. 

Αἰγυπτίους δὲ . - - - οὐχ ὁρῶ ποίᾳ δυνάμει συμμάχῳ χρησάμενοι 
μᾶλλον ἂν κολάσεσθε τῆς νῦν σὺν ἐμοὶ οὔσης. XEN. An. II, 5, 13. 
᾿Απισχυρισάμενοι δὲ σαφὲς ἂν [καταστήσετε] αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἴσου 
ὑμῖν μᾶλλον προσφέρεσθαι. ‘THuc. I, 140. (Here most editors read 
καταστήσαιτε, on the authority of inferior Mss.) Ἔφη οὖν τὸν 
ἐρωτώμενον εἰπεῖν, οὐχ ἥκει, φάναι, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο, nor will he be 
likely to come hither. Piat. Rep. X, 615 D. (Here the only other 
reading is ἥξοι, which is of course corrupt.) "Edn... - λέγων 


πρὸς ὑμᾶς ὡς, εἰ διαφευξοίμην, ἤδη ἂν ὑμῶν οἱ υἱεῖς ... . πάντες 
παντάπασι διαφθαρήσονται. Id. Apol. 29 C. 


The construction is perhaps less suspicious in the dramatic chorus, 
which belongs to lyric poetry. See the last example under § 37, 2. 
See § 41, 4, on the Future Infinitive and Participle with av. 


Note 2. The form κέ is much more common with the Future in 
Homer than the form ἄν. 


3. The most common use of av with the Indicative 
is with the secondary tenses, generally the Imperfect 
and Aorist, in apodosis. It here denotes that the condi- 
tion upon which the action of the verb depends 2s τού or 
was not fulfilled. See § 49, 2. 


Nore. The Imperfect and Aorist are sometimes used with 
ἄν in an iterative sense; which construction must not be con- 
founded with that just mentioned. See § 30, 2. 


§38. 1. In Attic Greek the Subjunctive is used 
. Ν . > . 2 OR 
with av only in the cases mentioned in § 36, 2; never 
in independent sentences. See § 47, 2, § 50,1, § 51, 











§ 41.] THE PARTICLE AN. 


and § 60, 3. For the occasional use of av in final 
clauses, see § 44, 1, Note 2. 


2. In Epic poetry, when the Subjunctive is used 
nearly in the sense of the Future Indicative (ὃ 87), 
it sometimes takes κέ or av. The combination forms an 
apodosis, with a protasis expressed or understood, and 
is nearly or quite equivalent to the Future Indicative 
with av. E. g. 

Ei δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἔλωμαι; and if they do not 
give her up, I will take her myself. Il. I, 137. (Cf. Il. I, 324.) 

See § 50, 1, Note 2 (a). 

Nore. This Epic use of κέ or ἄν with the Subjunctive must 
not be confounded with the ordinary construction of § 38, 1. 
In the latter the ἄν is closely connected with the particle or 
relative, while in the former it is joined with the verb, as it is 
with the Indicative or Optative. It in fact bears more resem- 
blance to the ordinary Optative with dy in apodosis in Attic 
Greek, than to any other Attic construction. 


$39. The Optative with av always forms an apo- 
dosis, to which a protasis must be either expressed or 
implied. It denotes what would happen, if the con- 
dition (expressed or implied) upon which the action 
of the verb depends should ever be fulfilled. See § 50, 
2, and § 52, 2. 


RemMaArRK. Such constructions as are explained in § 44, 1, N. 3, 
y ° μα ” 
a, and § 74,1, N. 2, are no exception to this rule, as there ay does 


not belong to the verb. 
Note. The Future Optative is not used with ἄν. See § 26. 


840. The Imperative is never used with av. 


Nore. All passages formerly cited for ἄν with the Imperative 
are now emended on Mss. authority, or otherwise satisfactorily ex- 
plained. See Passow, or Liddell and Scott, s. v.”Av. 


541. The Infinitive and Participle can be used 
with ἄν in all cases in which a finite verb, if it stood in 


. . ὟΝ . 
their place, would be accompanied with av. This com- 
3% 











THE PARTICLE “AN. [§ 41, 1. 


bination always forms an apodosis (except in its itera- 
tive sense, Note 8): it can never form a protasis, as the 
finite verb never has av joined to itself in protasis. (See 
§ 36, 2.) 

Fach tense of the Infinitive and Participle with av 
forms the same kind of apodosis which the correspond. 
ing tense of the Indicative or Optative would form in its 
place. The context must decide whether the Indicative 
or the Optative is represented in each case. 


1. The Present Infinitive and Participle (which represent 
also the Imperfect, by § 15, 8, and § 16, 2), when they are 
used with ἄν, may be equivalent either to the Imperfect Indica- 
tive with ἄν or to the Present Optative with ἄν. They can 
represent no other form, as no other form of the Present is 
used with ἄν in apodosis in the finite moods. EK. g. 


Φησὶν αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν εἶναι, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, he says that 
they would (now) be free, if they had done this (εἶναι ἄν representing 
ἦσαν ἄν, § 37, 3). Φησὶν αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν εἶναι, εἰ τοῦτο 
πράξειαν, he says that they would (hereafter) be free, if they should do 
this (εἶναι ἄν representing εἴησαν ἄν, § 39). Οἴεσθε γὰρ τὸν πατέρα 
οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν λαμβάνειν τῶν ξύλων; do you 
think he would not have taken care and_ have received the pay? 
Dem. Timoth. 1194, 20. (Here the direct discourse would be 
ἐφύλαττεν ἂν καὶ ἐλάμβανεν.) Οἶμαι γὰρ ἂν οὐκ ἀχαρίστως μοι 
ἔχειν, for I think it would not be a thankless labor ; i.e. οὐκ av ἔχοι. 
Xen. An. II, 3,18. Μαρτυρίῳ ἐχρῶντο, μὴ av ξυστρατε vetv, εἰ 
μή τι ἠδίκουν ois ἐπήεσαν, that they would not join in expeditions, unless 
those against whom they were marching had wronged them. ‘THUC. 
If], 11. (Here évorparevew ἄν represents ξυνεστράτευον ἄν.) 

Οἶδα αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους ἂν ὄντας, εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, I know they 
would (now) be free, if they had done this. Οἶδα αὐτοὺς ἐλευθέρους 
ἂν ὄντας, εἶ τοῦτο πράξειαν, I know they would (hereafter) be free, 
if they should do this. (In the former ὄντας ἄν represents ἦσαν ἄν, 
in the latter εἴησαν ἄν.) Τῶν λαμβανόντων δίκην ὄντες ἂν δικαίως 
(i. 6. ἦμεν ἄν), whereas we should justly be among those who inflict 
punishment. Dem. Eubul. 1300, 8. Ὅπερ ἔσχε μὴ - - - - THY Πελο- 
πόννησον πορθεῖν, ἀδυνάτων ἂν ὄντων (ὑμῶν) ἐπιβοηθεῖν, when you 
would have been unable to bring aid (sc. if he had done it). Tuvce. I, 
73. Πόλλ᾽ ἂν ἔχων ἕτερ᾽ εἰπεῖν περὶ αὐτῆς παραλείπω, although ] 
might be able (if I should wish) to say many other things about it, 1 
omit them. Dem. Cor. 313, 4. ᾿Απὸ παντὸς av φέρων λόγου δικαίου 
μηχάνημα ποικίλον (i. 6 ὃς ἂν φέροις), thou who wouldst derive, &c 
Sopu. O. C. 761. 








§ 41, 3.] THE PARTICLE "AN. 59 


2. The Perfect Infinitive and Participle (which represent 
also the Pluperfect, by § 18, 3, Rem.), when they are used 
with ἄν, may be equivalent either to the Pluperfect Indicative 


with ἄν or to the Perfect Optative with ἄν. KE. g. 


Εἰ μὴ τὰς ἀρετὰς ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἐκείνας οἱ Μαραθῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι πα- 
ρέσχοντο, . - - - πάντα ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων ἂν ἑαλωκέναι 
(sc. φήσειεν av τις), Uf those at Marathon and Salamis had not ez- 
hibited those deeds of valor in their behalf, any one would say that all 
these would have been captured by the barbarians. DEM. F. L. 441, 
21. Here ἑαλωκέναι ἄν represents ἑαλώκεσαν ἄν, Plup. Ind.) ᾿Αλλ᾽ 
οὐκ ἂν ἡγοῦμαι αὐτοὺς δίκην ἀξίαν δεδωκέναι, εἰ ἀκροασάμενοι 
αὐτῶν καταψηφίσαισθε, but 1 do not believe they would (then) have 
suffered sufficient punishment, if you after hearing them should con- 
demn them. Lys. XXYVII, 8 9. (Here the protasis in the Optative 
shows that δεδωκέναι ἄν represents δεδωκότες ἂν εἶεν (§ 18, 1); but 
if the protasis had been εἰ κατεψηφίσασθε, if you had condemned them, 
δεδωκέναι ἄν would have represented ἐδεδώκεσαν ἄν, they would have 
suffered.) See also, in § 8 of the same oration, οὐκ ἂν ἀπολωλέναι 

 . . ἀλλὰ δεδωκέναι. ᾿Ανδραποδώδεις ἂν δικαίως κεκλῆσθαι 
ἡγεῖτο. XEN. Mem. I, 1, 16. (Here κεκλῆσθαι ἄν represents κεκλη- 
μένοι ἂν εἶεν.) 

These constructions are of course rare, as the forms of the finite 
moods here represented themselves seldom occur. 


8 The Aorist Infinitive and Participle with ἄν may be 
equivalent either to the Aorist Indicative with ἄν or to the 
Aorist Optative with ἄν. E. g. 


Οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ᾽ αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν; do you not believe that (if 
this had been so) he would even have run thither 2? i. 6. οὐκ ἂν ἐπέ- 
δραμεν ; Dem. Aph. I, 831, 10. “Avev δὲ σεισμοῦ οὐκ ἄν μοι δοκεῖ TO 
τοιοῦτο ξυμβῆναι γενέσθαι (οὐκ ἂν ξυμβῆναι representing οὐκ ἂν 
EvvéBn), but unless there had been an earthquake, ut does not seem to 
me that such a thing could have by any chance happened. Tuue. ΜΙ, 
89. Τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἤλπιζεν ἴσως av ἐπεξελθεῖν καὶ τὴν γῆν οὐκ 
ἂν περιιδεῖν τμηθῆναι (1. 6. ἴσως ἂν ἐπεξέλθοιεν καὶ οὐκ ἂν περιί- 
δοιεν). Id. 11,20. Οὐδ᾽ ἂν κρατῆσαι αὐτοὺς τῆς γῆς ἡγοῦμαι (1. 6. 
κρατήσειαν ἄν). Id. VI, 37. 

᾿Αλλὰ ῥᾳδίως ἂν ἀφεθ εὶς; εἰ καὶ μετρίως τι τούτων ἐποίησε, προεί- 
Xero ἀποθανεῖν, whereas he might easily have been acquitted, &c. XEN. 
Mem. IV, 4, 4. Καὶ εἰ ἀπήχθησθε ὥσπερ ἡμεῖς, εὖ ἴσμεν μὴ ἂν 
ἧσσον ὑμᾶς λυπηροὺς γενομένους τοῖς ξυμμάχοις, καὶ ἀναγκα- 
σθέντας ἂν ἣ ἄρχειν, κι τὰ. (i. 6. οὐκ ἂν ἐγένεσθε, καὶ ἠναγκάσθητε 
dv), if you had become odious as we have, we are sure that you would 
have been no less oppressive to your allies, and that you would have 
been forced, &c. Tuuc. 1, 76. Ὁρῶν τὸ παρατείχισμα ἁπλοῦν by, καὶ 
i ἐπικρατήσειέ tis... - ῥᾳδίως ἂν αὐτὸ ληφθέν (i. 6. ῥᾳδίως as 


εὐτὸ ληφθείη), seeing that it would easily be taken, ἕο. Id. VIL, 42 























60 THE PARTICLE “AN. [8 41, 3. 


Οὔτε ὄντα οὔτε Gv γενόμενα λογοποιοῦσιν, they relate things which 
are not real, and which never could happen (i. 6. οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο). Id. 


VI, 38. 


4, The Future Infinitive and Participle with ἄν would be 
equivalent to the Homeric con’truction of ἄν with the Future 
Indicative (§ 37, 2). As, however, ἄν is not found in Homer 
with either the Future Infinitive or the Future Participle 
(see below, Note 2), this construction rests chiefly on the 
authority of passages in Attic writers, and is subject to the 
same doubt and suspicion as that of the Future Indicative 
with ἄν in those writers. (See § 37, 2, Note 1.) In the 
following passages it is still retained in the best editions, with 
strong support from Mss. 

Νομίζοντες, εἰ ταύτην πρώτην λάβοιεν, ῥᾳδίως ἂν σφίσι τἄλλα 
προσχωρήσειν. TuHuc. Il, 80. (Here the direct discourse 
would regularly have been either in the Fut. Ind. without ay, or in 
the Aor. Opt. with ἄν.) The same may be said of Tuuc. V, 82, 
νομίζων μέγιστον ἂν σφᾶς ὠφελήσειν. (Here one Ms. reads by 
correction ὠφελῆσαι.) See also Tnuc. VI, 66; VIII, 25 and 71. 
Σχολῇ ποθ᾽ ἥξειν δεῦρ᾽ ἂν ἐξηύχουν ἐγώ, I declared that I should be 
very slow to come hither again. Sopu. Ant. 390. ᾿Αφίετε i) μὴ ἀφίετε, 
ξ > - > Δ ΄ ν »Φ» > , ͵ , 
ὡς ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἂν ποιησοντος ἄλλα, οὐδ᾽ εἰ μέλλω πολλάκις τεθνάναι. 
Plat. Apol. 80 C. Τοὺς ὁτιοῦν ἂν ἐκείνῳ ποιήσοντας ἀνῃρηκότες ἐκ 
τῆς πόλεως ἔσεσθε. DEM. F. L. 450, 27. (Here Cod. A. reads 
ποιήσαντας.) 


Nore 1. As the Future Optative is never used with ἄν (§ 39, 
Note), this can never be represented by the Future Infinitive or 
Participle with av. 

Note 2. The Participle with ἄν or κέ is not found in Homer or 


Pindar. ‘The Infinitive with ἄν occurs in these poets very seldom, 
and only in indirect discourse. E. g. 


Kai δ᾽ ἂν τοῖς ἄλλοισιν ἔφη παραμυθήσασθαι. Il. IX, 684. 
(The direct discourse is given in the words of Achilles in vs. 417, 
καὶ δ᾽ ay... - παραμυθησαίμην.) 


Nore 3. The Infinitive with ἄν sometimes represents an iterative 
Imperfect or Aorist Indicative with ἄν (§ 30,2). This must be 
carefully distinguished from an apodosis. LE. g. 


᾿Ακούω Λακεδαιμονίους τότε ἐμβαλόντας ἂν καὶ κακώσαντας τὴν χώραν 
ἀναχωρεῖν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου πάλιν, I hear that the Lacedaemonians at that 
time, after invading artd ravaging the country, used to return home 
again. Dem. Phil. ΠῚ, 123, 16. (Here ἀναχωρεῖν ay represents 
ἀνεχώρουν ἄν in its iterative sense, they used to return.) 


Ln ae 





§ 42, 2.] THE PARTICLE “AN. 61 


Note 4. The Infinitive with ἄν commonly stands in indirect 
discourse after a verb of saying or thinking, as in most of the ex- 
amples given above. Occasionally, however, it is found in other 
constructions, where the simple Present or Aorist Infinitive is regu- 
larly used. E. g. 

Ta δὲ ἐντὸς οὕτως ἐκαίετο, ὥστε ἥδιστα ἂν ἐς ὕδωρ ψυχρὸν σφᾶς 
αὐτοὺς ῥίπτειν, so that they would most gladly have thrown themselves 
into cold water. Tuuc. 11, 49. (Ὥστε ῥίπτειν would be the ordi- 
nary expression here: with ἄν it represents an Imperfect Indicative, 
ἔρριπτον ἄν.) "Exeivous ἀπεστερηκέναι, εἰ καὶ Kparoter, μὴ ἂν ἔτι σφᾶς 
ἀποτειχίσαι;, to have deprived them of the power of ever again walling 
them in, even if they should be victorious. Id. VII, 6. See ὃ 27, N. 2 
(a), for an example of βούλομαι and the Infinitive with av. We 
have given examples of verbs of hoping, &c. with the Present, 
Aorist, and Future Infinitive; they sometimes take the Infinitive 
with ἄν, as a slight change from the Future; as in Tuc. VI, 61: 
τὸ τῆς τύχης κἂν pe ἡμῶν ἐλπίσαντες στῆναι. (See § 27, N. 3.) 
Ἐλπίζω is found also with ὡς and the Future Optative in Tuuc. 
VI, 30; and with os and the Aorist Optative with av in V, 9. 

Nore 5. The Participle with ἄν can never represent a protasis, 
because there is no form of protasis in the finite moods in which ἄν 
is joined with the verb itself. For examples of apparent violations 
of this principle, incorrectly explained by Matthiae and others as 
cases of the Participle with ἄν in protasis, see § 42, 3, Note 1. 

§ 42, 1. When ἄν is used with the Subjunctive, if it does 
not coalesce with the relative or particle into one word (as in 
ἐάν, ὅταν), it is separated from it only by such words as μέν, δέ, 
τέ, yap, &c. See examples under § 62. 


2. When ἄν stands in apodosis with any verbal form, it may 
be either placed near the verb, or attached to some more em- 
phatic word in the sentence. 

Particularly, it is very often placed directly after inter- 
rogatives, negatives, adverbs of time, place, &c., and other 
words which especially affect the sense of the sentence. E. g. 

᾿Αλλὰ τίς δὴ θεῶν θεραπεία εἴη ἂν ἡ ὁσιότης; PLAT. Euthyph. 18 
D. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὁμῶς τὸ κεφάλαιον αὐτῶν ῥᾳδίως ἂν εἴποις. Id. 14 A. Οὐκ 
ἂν δὴ τόνδ᾽ ἄνδρα μάχης ἐρύσαιο μετελθὼν, Τυδείδην, ὃς νῦν γε ἂν καὶ Διὶ 
πατρὶ μάχοιτο. Il. V, 456. Πῶς ἂν τὸν αἱμυλώτατον, ἐχθρὸν ἄλημα, 
τούς τε δισσάρχας ὀλέσσας βασιλῆς, τέλος θάνοιμι καὐτός. SOPH. ΑἹ. 
889. ἸΤάχιστ᾽ ἄν τε πόλιν οἱ τοιοῦτοι ἑτέρους πείσαντες ἀπολεσειαν. 
Tuuc. UL, 63. 

Note. For the sake of emphasis, ἄν is often separated 
from its verb by such words as οἴομαι; δοκέω, φημί, οἶδα, Ke. In 


























THE PARTICLE “AN. [§ 42, 2. 


such cases care must be taken to connect the ἄν with the verb 
to which it really belongs. E. g. 


Καὶ viv ἡδέως ἄν μοι δοκῶ κοινωνῆσαι, and now I think I 
should gladly take part (av belonging to κοινωνῆσαι). XEN. Cyr. 
VII, 7, 25. Οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὑμεῖς οἶδ᾽ ὅτι ἐπαύσασθε πολεμοῦντες, nor 
would you (I am sure) have ceased fighting. Dem. Phil. II, 72, 
25. Ti οὖν av, ἔφην, εἴη ὁ Ἔρως; PLAT. Symp. 202 D. This is 
especially irregular in the expression οὐκ οἶδα ἂν εἰ, or οὐκ ἂν οἶδα 
εἰ, followed by an Optative to which the ἄν belongs; as οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν 
εἰ πείσαιμι, 1 do not know whether I could persuade him (sc. if I 
should try). Eur. Med. 941. The more regular form would be 
οὐκ οἶδα εἰπείσαιμι av. See Elmsley ad loc. (vs. 911). 


3. “Av is sometimes used twice, or even three times, with 
the same verb. This may be done in a long sentence, to make 
the conditional force felt through the whole, especially when 
the connection is broken by intermediate clauses. It may also 
be done in order to emphasize particular words with which it 
is joined, and to make them prominent as being affected by the 
contingency. E. g. 

“Ὥστ᾽ ἂν, εἰ σθένος λάβοιμι, δηλώσαιμ᾽ ἂν ot’ αὐτοῖς φρονῶ. 
ΚΟΡΗ. El. 333. Οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ᾽ αὐτὸν κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν. Dem. 
Aph. I, 831, 10. Οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἑλόντες αὖθις ἀνθαλοῖεν ἄν. AESCH. 
Ag. 840. Αλλους γ᾽ ἂν οὖν οἰόμεθα τὰ ἡμέτερα λαβόντας δεῖξαι ἂν 
μάλιστα εἴ τι μετριάζομεν. THuc. I, 76. (See 8 42, 2, Ν.) Odr’ 
ἂν κελεύσαιμ᾽, οὔτ᾽ ἂν, εἰ θέλοις ἔτι πράσσειν, ἐμοῦ γ᾽ ἂν ἡδέως δρῴης 
μέτα. ϑοΡΗ. Ant. 09. Λέγω καθ᾽ ἕκαστον δοκεῖν ἄν μοι τὸν αὐτὸν 
ἄνδρα παρ᾽ ἡμῶν ἐπὶ πλεῖστ᾽ ἂν εἴδη καὶ μετὰ χαρίτων μάλιστ᾽ ἂν 
εὐτραπέλως τὸ σῶμα αὔταρκες παρέχεσθαι. THuc. 1, 41. (Here 
μὰ e . , c a . om» 
ἄν is used three times, belonging to παρέχεσθαι.) Ὑμῶν δὲ ἔρημος 
ὧν οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς οἶμαι εἶναι οὔτ᾽ ἂν φίλον ὠφελῆσαι οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθρὸν 
ἀλέξασθαι. XEN. An. I, 3, 6. (Here ἄν is used three times, be- 
longing to εἰναι.) 


Nore 1. This principle, taken in connection with that 
stated in ὃ 42, 2, by showing that ἄν can be joined to any 
word in the sentence which it is important to emphasize, as 
well as to its own verb, and even to both, explains many 
cases in which ἄν and a Participle appear to form a protasis. 
(See § 41, Note 5.) Ifa Participle takes the place of a 
protasis, it is of course one of the most important words in 
the sentence, and one to which the particle ἄν is especially 
sikely to be attached. The dv, however, does not qualify 
such a Participle, any more than it does a negative or in- 


§ 42, 4.] ΗΕ PARTICLE “AN. 63 


terrogative with which it is connected for the same purpose ; 
but it always belongs to the principal verb of the apodosis. 
E. g. 

Νομίσατε τό τε φαῦλον καὶ τὸ μέσον καὶ τὸ πάνυ ἀκριβὲς ἂν ξυγ- 
κριθὲν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ἰσχύειν, believe ἐμαὶ these, uf they should be 
united, would be especially strong. Tuuc. VI, 18. (Here ξυγκραθέν 
alone (not with ἄν) 1s equivalent to εἰ ξυγκραθείη (8 52, 1), and the 
ἄν is placed before it merely to emphasize it, as containing the pro- 
tasis to the verb ἰσχύειν, to which this ay, as well as the other, 
belongs.) ᾿Αγῶνας ἄν τίς pot δοκεῖ, ἔφη, ὦ πάτερ, προειπὼν 
ἑκάστοις καὶ ἄθλα προτιθεὶς μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ποιεῖν εὖ ἀσκεῖσθαι; ut 
seems to me, said he, father, that if any one should proclaim contests, 
&e., he would cause, ἕο. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 18. (Here the protasis 
implied in the Participles is merely emphasized by av, which be- 
longs to ποιεῖν.) Λέγοντος ἄν τινος πιστεῦσαι οἴεσθε; (i. 6. εἴ 
τίς ἔλεγεν, ἐπίστευσαν ἄν ;) do you think they would have believed 
it, if any one had told them? Dem. Phil. II, 71, 4. (Here too the 
ἄν stands near λέγοντος only to point it out as the protasis, to which 
its own verb πιστεῦσαι is the apodosis.) Meet. 

In these cases, the protasis expressed by the Participle is affected 
by the ἄν, only as the ordinary protasis with εἰ is affected in the 
example from Sopu. El. 333, quoted above, under ὃ 42, 3. 


Note 2. “Av is sometimes used elliptically without a verb, 


when one can be supplied from the context. E. g. 

Οἱ οἰκέται ῥέγκουσιν᾽ ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ (sc. ἔρρεγκον); the slaves 
are snoring; but they wouldn’t have done so once. AnistT. Nub. 5. 
(Oc οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἀστῶν τῶνδ᾽ ἂν ἐξείποιμί τῳ, οὔτ᾽ ἂν τέκνοισι τοῖς ἐμοῖς, 
στέργων ὅμως. ϑὅοΡΗ. O. Ο. 1528. So πῶς γὰρ av (sc. εἴη); how 
could it? πῶς οὐκ ἄν; and similar phrases ; especially ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ 

also written as one word, ὡὥσπερανεί), in which the av belongs to 

the verb that is understood after εἰ; as φοβούμενος ὥσπερ av et 
παῖς, fearing like a child (i. ὁ. φοβούμενος ὥσπερ ἂν ἐφοβήθη εἰ παῖς 
ἦν). “Puat. Gorg. 479 A. (See ὃ 53, N. 3.) 

In like manner ἄν may be used with εἰ in protasis, or with a con- 
ditional relative, the verb being understood ; as in XEN. An. I, 3, 
6: ὡς ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς, οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε. 
(That is, ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς inte.) 

Nore 3. Repetition of κέ is rare; yetit sometimes occurs. E. g. 

Τῷ κε μάλ᾽ # κεν ἔμεινε Kal ἐσσύμενός περ ὁδοῖο, ᾿ 
Ἤ κέ με τεθνηυῖαν ἔνι μεγάροισιν ἔλειπεν. Od. IV, 733. 

On the other hand, Homer sometimes joins ἄν and κέ in the same 
sentence for emphasis. E. g. 

Kaprepal, ἃς ovr’ ἄν κεν Apns ὀνόσαιτο μετελθὼν, 
Οὔτε x’ ᾿Αθηναίη λαοσσόος. Ll. XII, 127. 


4. When an apedosis consists of several co-ordinate clauses 











64 THE PARTICLE “AN. [§ 42, 4. 


with the same mood, ἄν is generally used only in the first, and 
understood in the others; unless it is repeated for emphasis, or 
for some other special reason. KE. g. 


Οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐμὲ, ἡνίκα δεῦρο ἀποπλεῖν ἐβουλόμην, κατεκώλυεν, οὐδὲ 
τοιαῦτα λέγειν τούτῳ προσέταττεν, ἐξ ὧν ἥκισθ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἐμέλλετ᾽ 
ἐξιέναι. Dem. F. L. 357, 3. (Here ἄν is understood with προσέ- 
ταττεν.) Οὕτω δὲ δρῶν οὐδὲν ἂν διάφορον τοῦ ἑτέρου ποιοῖ, ἀλλ᾽ 
ἐπὶ ταὐτὸν ἀμφότεροι ἴοιεν. ῬιΑτ. Rep. II, 360 C. Οὐκοῦν κἂν, εἰ 
πρὸς αὐτὸ τὸ φῶς ἀναγκάζοι αὐτὸν βλέπειν, ἀλγεῖν τε ἂν τὰ ὄμματα 
καὶ φεύγειν ἀποστρεφόμενον (οἴει); Id. VII, 515 E. (This ex- 
ample illustrates also the principle of § 42, 3, κἄν belonging to the 
Infinitives.) See also Xen. An. ΗΠ, 5,14. Πάντα ἥρει ὁ Φίλιππος, 
πολλὰ λέγοντος ἐμοῦ καὶ θρυλοῦντος ἀεὶ, τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὡς ἂν εἰς κοινὸν 
γνώμην ἀποφαινομένου, μετὰ ταῦτα δ᾽ ὡς ἀγνοοῦντας διδάσκοντος, τελευ- 
τῶντος δὲ ὡς ἂν πρὸς πεπρακότας αὑτοὺς καὶ ἀνοσιωτάτους ἀνθρώπους 
οὐδὲν ὑποστελλομένου. Dem. Εἰ. L. 390, ὅ. (The first ἄν belongs to 
ἀπεφαινόμην implied, as I should have declared τί, if I had been speaking 
to inform my colleagues ; in the following clause the same tense (€dida- 
exov) is implied, and dy is not repeated; in the third clause, on 
the contrary, an Optative is implied, ὡς ἂν λέγοιμι; and therefore 
the ἄν again appears.) In Prat. Rep, II, 398 A, we find ἄν used 
with two co-ordinate Optatives, understood with a third, and 
repeated again with a fourth to avoid confusion with a dependent 
Optative. “Av may be understood with an Optative even in a 
separate sentence, if the construction is continued from a sentence 
in which ἄν is used with the Optative; as in Piar. Rep. I, 352 
E:—"Eo@ ὅτῳ ἂν ἄλλῳ ἴδοις ἢ ὀφθαλμοῖς; Οὐ δῆτα. Τί δέ; 
ἀκούσαις ἄλλῳ ἣ ὠσίν ; So with πράττοι, Id. IV, 439 B. 

Nore. The Adverb τάχα, in the sense of perhaps, is often 
joined with ἄν, in which case the phrase τάχ᾽ ἄν is nearly 
equivalent to ἴσως. This, however, cannot be used unless the 
ἄν would form an apodosis with the verb of the sentence, if the 
τάχα were not joined with it. Thus τάχ᾽ ἂν γένοιτο means τί 
might perhaps happen. So τάχ᾽ ἂν ἐγένετο means it would per- 
haps have happened ; but it can never (like ἴσως ἐγένετο) Mean 
perhaps it happened. 


FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 


CHAPTER IV. 
USE OF THE MOODS. 


Tis chapter includes all those constructions which 
require any other form of the finite verb than the 
simple Indicative expressing an absolute assertion (3 4 
The Infinitive and Participle are included here only so 
far as they are used in indirect discourse, or in Protasis 
and Apodosis. 


These constructions are divided into the following 
classes : — 


I. Final and Object Clauses after iva, ὡς, ὅπως, 

ὄφρα, and μή. 

II. Conditional Sentences. 

III. Relative and Temporal sentences. 

IV. Indirect Discourse, including Indirect Quota- 
tions and Questions. 

V. Causal Sentences. 

VI. Expressions of a Wish. 

VII. Imperative and Subjunctive in Commands, 
Exhortations, and Prohibitions. 

VIII. Subjunctive (like the Future Indicative) in 
Independent Sentences. — Interrogative Sub- 
junctive. — Ov μή with the Subjunctive or 
Future Indicative. 


SECTION I. 


FINAL AND OssEcT CLAUSES AFTER “Iva, ‘Qs, Ὅπως, “Opa; 
AND Μή. 


§ 43. The clauses which depend upon the so- 


. 7 ς Ψ ¥ ’ 
called final particles, ἵνα, ws, ὅπως, odboa, that, i 
E 




















66 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [8 43. 


order that, and μή, lest, that not, may be divided into 
three classes : — 


A. Pure final clauses, in which the end, purpose, 
or motive of the action of any verb may be expressed, 
after any one of the final particles; as ἔρχεται ἵνα 
τοῦτο ibn, he is coming that he may see this ; ἀπέρχε- 
ται μὴ τοῦτο ἴδῃ, he is departing that he may not see 
this. 


B. Object clauses wi ith ὅπως or ὅπως μή after verbs 
of striving, &e. ; ; as σκόπει ὅπως γενήσεται, see that it 
happens ; σκόπει ὅπως μὴ γενήσεται, see that it does 
not happen. These clauses express the direct olyect τῇ 
the verb of striving, &c., so that they may stand i 
apposition to an object accusative like τοῦτο ; as σκόπει 
τοῦτο ὅπως μή σε ὄψεται, see to this, viz., that he does 
not see you. They also imply the end or gurpoee of the 
action of the leading verb, and to this extent they par- 
take of the nature of final clauses. 


C. Object clauses wi ith μή after verbs of fearing, 
&c.; as φοβοῦμαι μὴ γένηται, I fear lest it may happen ; 
φοβοῦμαι μὴ τοῦτο ἐγένετο, 1 fear lest this happened. 
These express simply the object of fear, without even 
implying any purpose to prevent that object from being 
realized. Thus if we say φοβοῦμαι τοῦτο, μὴ κακῶς 
πράξω, I fear this, lest Imay fall into misfortune, the 
clause with μή merely explains τοῦτο, the direct object 
of φοβοῦμαι. 


Remark. Although the object clauses of the class B par- 
take slightly of the nature of final clauses, so that they some- 
times allow the same construction (the Subjunctive for the 
Future Indicative, § 45), still the distinction between these 
two classes is very strongly marked. An object clause, as we 
have seen, can stand in apposition to a preceding τοῦτο; 
whereas a final clause could stand in apposition to τούτου 





§ 44, 1.] PURE FINAL CLAUSES. 67 


ἕνεκα, AS ἔρχεται τούτου ἕνεκα, iva ἡμῖν βοηθήσῃ; he comes for this 
purpose, viz., that he may assist us. The two can be combined 
in one sentence ; aS σπουδάζει ὅπως mAouTH GEL, ἵνα τοὺς φίλους 
εὖ ποιῇ, he ts eager to be rich, that he may benefit his friends. 

Care must be taken not to mistake the nature of an object 
clause, when its subject is attracted by the leading verb; as 
σκοπεῖν τὴν πόλιν ὅπως σωθήσεται for σκοπεῖν ὅπως ἡ πόλις σωθή- 
σεται, to see that the city is saved. 


Note 1. “Odpa is found only in Epic and Lyric po- 
etry. 


Note 2. The regular negative adverb after wa, ὡς, ὅπως, 
and ὄφρα is py; but after μή, dest, οὐ is used. E. g. 


᾿Απέρχεται, iva μὴ τοῦτο ἴδῃ, he is departing that he may not see 
this. Φοβεῖται μὴ οὐ τοῦτο γένηται, he is afr aid lest this may not 
happen. This use of οὐ as the negative after μή seems to have no 
other object than to avoid repetition of μή. Where, however, the 
sentence is so long that this panes would not be noticed, we find 
μή repeated ; as in XEN. Mem. I, 2, 7: ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἴ τις sees φο- 
βοῖτο μὴ ὁ γενόμενος καλὸς κἀγαθὸς τῷ τὰ μέγιστα εὐεργετήσαντι 


μὴ τὴν μεγίστην χάριν ἕξοι. 
A. Pure Final Clauses. 


$44. 1. In pure final clauses the Subjunctive is 
regularly used, if the leading verb is primary; and the 
Optative, if the leading verb is secondary. HE. g. 

Νῦν δ᾽ ἔρχεσθ' ἐπὶ δεῖπνον, ἵ ἵνα “ξυνάγωμεν “Apna. Il. II, 381. Sot 


δ᾽ ὧδε μνηστῆρες ὑποκρίνονται, ἵν᾽ εἰδῇς αὐτὸς σῷ θυμῷ, εἰδῶσι δὲ 
πάντες ᾿Αχαιοί. Od. 11,111. Εἴπω τι δῆτα κἄλλ᾽ ’ ἵν᾽ ᾿ὀργίζῃ πλέον; 
Sopu. O. R. 364. Καὶ γὰρ βασιλεὺς αἱρεῖται; οὐχ ἵνα ἑαυτοῦ καλῶς 
ἐπιμελῆται, ἀλλ᾽ ν» καὶ οἱ ἑλόμενοι St αὐτὸν εὖ πράττωσι. 
XEN. Mem. Π|,.2, 8. Δοκεῖ μοι κατακαῦσαι τὰς ἁμάξας, ἵ ἵνα μὴ τὰ 
ζεύγη ἡμῶν ak. XEN. An. IL, heart "Ωρνυθ᾽, ἵν᾽ ἀθανάτοισι 
φόως φέροι ἠδὲ βροτοῖσιν. Od. V, 2. Φίῶλος ἐβούλετο εἶναι τοῖς 
μέγιστα δυναμένοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ διδοίη δίκην. XEN. An. Hl, 6, 
21. 

Βουλὴν δ᾽ ᾿Αργείοις ὑποθησόμεθ', ἣ τις ὀνήσει, ὡς μὴ πάντες ὄλων- 
ται ὀδυσσαμένοιο τεοῖο. Il. ΥΠ|, 80. Διανοεῖται τὴν γέφυραν λῦσαι, 
ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε; ἀλλ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ ἀποληφθῆτε. XEN. An. I, 4, 17. 
Πέφνε δ᾽ Εὔρυτον, ὡς Αὐγέαν λάτριον μισθὸν πράσσοιτο. PInD. 
Ol. XI (X), 34. Τούτου ἕνεκα φίλων aero δεῖσθαι, ὡς συνεργοὺς 
ἔχοι. XEN. An. I, 9, 21. 























68 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [8 44, 1 


Tov δὲ μνηστῆρες λοχῶσιν, ὅπως ἀπὸ φῦλον ὄληται ἐξ Ἰθάκης. 
Od. XIV, 181. Μέθες τόδ᾽ ἄγγος νῦν, ὅπως τὸ πᾶν μάθῃς. SOPH. 
ἘΠ. 1205. Εἰς καιρὸν ἥκεις, ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς. XEN. Cyr. 
III, 1, 8. Παρακαλεῖς ἰατροὺς. ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ. Xen. Mem. I, 
10, 2. Οἶμαι δὲ ταῦτα γίγνεσθαι, οὐχ ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς χοροὺς κρί- 
νωσιν οἱ πολῖται, οὐδ᾽ ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς αὐλητὰς ἐπαινῶσιν; οὐδ᾽ 
ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς ποιητὰς αἱρῶνται; οὐδ᾽ ἵνα τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἥἤδωνται, 
ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα τοῖς νόμοις πείθωνται. XEN. Mem. ΙΥ,4,10. Ἐν χείρεσ- 
σιν ἔθηκεν, ὅπως ἔτι πῆμα φύγοιμι. Od. XIV, 312. ᾿Επρεσβείοντο 
ἐγκλήματα ποιούμενοι, ὅπως σφίσιν ὅτι μεγίστη πρόφασις εἴη τοῦ 
πολεμεῖν. ΤῊσυσ. I, 126. 

Κεφαλῇ κατανεύσομαι, ὄφρα πεποίθῃς. Il. I, 524. Ὄρσεο δὴ 
νῦν, ξεῖνε, πόλινδ᾽ ἴμεν ὄφρα σε πέμψω. Od. VI, 255. Δόμον 
Φερσεφόνας ἐλθὲ, ὄφρ᾽ idoic’ υἱὸν εἴπῃς. Pinp. Ol. XIV, 30. 
Αὐτὰρ ἐμοὶ γέρας αὐτίχ᾽ ἑτοιμάσατ᾽, ὄφρα μὴ οἷος ᾿Αργείων ἀγέραστος 
ἔξω. Π.Ὶ1, 118. Ὡς ὁ μὲν ἔνθα κατέσχετ᾽ ἐπειγύμενός περ ὁδοῖο, ὄφρ᾽ 
ἕταρον θάπτοι καὶ ἐπὶ κτέρεα κτερίσειεν. Od. III, 284. 

᾿Αλλὰ σὺ μὲν νῦν αὖτις ἀπόστιχε; μή τι νοήσῃ Ἥρη᾽ ἐμοὶ δέ κε ταῦτα 
μελήσεται, ὄφρα τελέσσω. Il. I, 522. Οὐ δῆτ᾽ αὐτὸν ἄξεις δεῦρο; μή 
τις ἀναρπάσῃ; Sopu. Aj. 986. Λυσιτελεῖ ἐᾶσαι ἐν τῷ παρόντι, μὴ 
καὶ τοῦτον πολέμιον προσθώμεθα. XEN. Cyr. Il, 4,12. Λέγεται 
εἰπεῖν ὅτι ἀπιέναι βούλοιτο, μὴ ὁ πατήρ τι ἄχθοιτο καὶ ἡ πόλις μέμ- 
φοιτο. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 25. 


Nore 1. The Future Indicative sometimes (though rarely) 
takes the place of the Subjunctive in pure final clauses, after 
ὅπως and ὄφρα (ὅπως μή, ὄφρα μή) ;— never after iva or ὡς, and 
very seldom after the simple μή. (Μή with the Future is 
commonly found only after verbs of the next two classes; 
§§ 45, 46.) Here, as well as after verbs of striving and of 
fearing, the Future differs from the Subjunctive only by being 
a more vivid form of statement. E. g. 


Αἰεὶ δὲ μαλακοῖσι καὶ αἱμυλίοισι λόγοισι θέλγει; ὅπως Ἰθάκης ἐπιλ n- 
σεται. Od. 1,56. Ovdé dv ἐν ἄλλο τρέφονται ἣ ὅπως μαχοῦνται 
ὑπὲρ τῶν τρεφόντων. XEN. Cyr. I, 1, 21. Χρὴ ἀναβιβάζειν ἐπὶ τὸν 
τροχὸν τοὺς ἀναγραφέντας. ὅπως μὴ πρότερον νὺξ ἔσται πρὶν πυθέσθαι 
τοὺς ἄνδρας ἅπαντας. ANDOC. de Myster. I, p. 6, 88. ὃ 48. Ἐπ᾿ 
αὐτοὺς τοὺς προλόγους σου τρέψομαι, ὅπως τὸ πρῶτον τῆς τραγῳδίας 
μέρος πρώτιστον βασανιῶ. Arist. Ran. 1120. In Nub. 1466, ὅπως 
ἀπολεῖς μετελθών (not per’ ἐμοῦ ἔλθ) is to be explained by § 45, N. 
7. Θάρσυνον δέ οἱ ἦτορ evi φρεσὶν, ὄφρα καὶ Ἕκτωρ εἴσεται. 1]. 
XVI, 242. So Od. IV, 108. Ὥστ᾽ εἰκὸς ἡμᾶς μὴ βραδύνειν ἐστι, μὴ 
καί τις ὄψεται xnav ἴσως κατείπῃ. ARIST. Eccles. 495. So μὴ 
κεχολώσεται, Il. ἄχ 301. This construction is very rare in Attic 
prose. 


Nore 2. The Particle ἄν (κέ) is sometimes joined with 


8 44, 1.] PURE FINAL CLAUSES. 69 


ὡς, ὅπως, and ὄφρα, before the Subjunctive in final clauses; 
especially with ὡς and ὄφρα in Homer. The ἄν here is always 
joined to the particle, and (as in protasis) it adds nothing to 
the sense which can be made perceptible in English. E. g. 


Πείθεο, ὡς ἄν μοι τιμὴν μεγάλην καὶ κῦδος dpnat, obey, that thou 
mayest gain for me great honor and glory. Il. XVI, 84. (Here ὡς 
ἂν ἄρηαι seems to be merely a weaker form of expression than ὡς 
ἄρηαι would have been.) ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἴθι, μή p’ ἐρέθιζε, σαώτερος ὥς κε 
vénac, that thou mayest go the more safely. Il. 1, 82. ᾿Αλλ’ οὗτος μὲν 
viv σοὶ ἅμ᾽ ἕψεται, ὄφρα κεν €Vdy σοῖσιν ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν. Od. III, 
359. Προσδεόμεθα . . . . συμπέμψαι ἡμῖν, ὡς ἄν μιν ἐξέλωμεν 
ἐκ τῆς χώρης. Hor. I, 36. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐάσωμεν, φίλοι, ἕκηλον αὐτὸν, ὡς 
ἂν εἰς ὕπνον πέ σῇῃ- Sopu. Phil. 825. Τουτὶ λαβών μου τὸ σκιάδειον 
ὑπέρεχε ἄνωθεν, ὡς ἂν μή μ᾽ ὁρῶσιν οἱ θεοί. ARIST. Av. 1508. 
Kai φατε αὐτὸν τοιοῦτον εἶναι, ὅπως ἂν φαίνηται ὡς κάλλιστος καὶ 
ἄριστος. PLAT. Symp. 199 A. “Av γέ τινας ὑποπτεύῃ ἐλεύθερα 
φρονήματα ἔχοντας μὴ ἐπιτρέψειν αὐτῷ ἄρχειν, (πολέμους κινεῖ) ὅπως 
ἂν τούτους μετὰ προφάσεως ἀπολλύῃ;, that he may destroy them. 
PLAT. Rep. VIII, 567 A. ‘Qs ἂν padns, ἀντάκουσον. XEN. An. 
II, 5,16. See also An. VII, 4,2; AEscH. Prom. 10 (ὡς av), 824 
(ὅπως ἄν), Eumen. 573 (όπως ἄν). 


Norte 8. (α.) Homer and Herodotus sometimes use ἄν or κέ in 
final clauses with the same particles before the Optative, with no 
apparent effect upon the verb. E. g. 

Kai μιν μακρότερον καὶ πάσσονα θῆκεν ἰδέσθαι, ὥς κεν Φαικήκεσσι 
φίλος πάντεσσι γένοιτο. Od. VIII, 20. Ἐννῆμαρ δ᾽ ἐς τεῖχος ἵει 
ῥόον" ὗε δ᾽ ἄρα Ζεὺς συνεχὲς, ὄφρα κε θᾶσσον ἁλίπλοα τείχεα Gein. 
Il. XII, 25. Σὺ δέ pe προίεις és πατέρα, ὄφρ᾽ ἂν ἑλοίμην δῶρ. 
Od. XXIV, 334. Διώρυχα (ὥρυσσεν), ὅκως ἂν τὸ στρατόπεδον 
ἱδρυμένον κατὰ νώτου λάβοι. ΗΡΤ. I, 75. Ταῦτα δὲ περὶ ἑωυτὸν 
ἐσέμνυε τῶνδε εἵνεκεν, ὅκως ἂν μὴ ὁρέοντες οἱ ὁμήλικες λυπεοίατο 
καὶ ἐπιβουλεύοιεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἑτεροῖός σφι δοκέοι εἶναι μὴ ὁρέωσι, in 
order that his campanions might not be offended by seeing him and plot 
against him, but that he might appear to them to be of another nature by 
their not seeing him. Id. I, 99. 


(b.) Apart from this use, however, the Optative can be recularly 
joined with ἄν in any final clause, if it forms an apodosis with the 
verb, to which there is a protasis expressed or distinctly understood. 
Such Optative with dy can follow primary as well as secondary 
tenses. (881, Ν. 2.) E. g. 

Ἡγείσθω ὀρχηθμοῖο. ds κέν τις φαίη γάμον ἔμμεναι ἐκτὸς ἀκούων, 
let him lead off the dance, so that any one who should hear without 
would say there was a marriage. Od, XXIII, 134. Ὡς δ᾽ ἂν 
ἥδιστα ταῦτα φαίνοιτο, αὐτός τις αὑτῷ ταῦτα παρασκευάσει, lit. but 
each one must acquire these things for himself, to cause that they would 
appear most agreeable (if any one should experience them). XEN. Cyr. 























70 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [8 44, 1 


, =~ , on , 

VII, 5, 81. Ἔδωκε χρήματα ᾿Ανταλκίδα, ὅπως ἂν, πληρωθέντος 
ναυτικοῦ ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων, ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι μᾶλλον τῆς εἰρήνης προσ- 
δέοιντο. XEN. Hell. IV, 8, 16. (Here πληρωθέντος ναυτικοῦ, κι 


the navy should be manned, stands as a protasis to the Optative 


προσδέοιντο ἄν.) 

Such sentences as Dem. Phil. II, 66, 15, ὡς δὲ κωλύσαιτ᾽ ἂν 
ἐκεῖνον πράττειν ταῦτα, παντελῶς ἀργῶς ἔχετε, bul as to any measures 
by which you could prevent him from doing these things, you are wholly 
inactive, are not final clauses, but relative sentences with an ante- 
cedent implied. See ὃ 65,1, N. 4. 

ReMARK. Μή, lest, can be followed by a verb with ἄν only in a 
regular apodosis after verbs of fearing, &c. (See § 46, N. 3.) “Iva 
is never used with ἄν, except when it means where. A single case 
of iva with κέ in a final clause occurs, Od. XII, 156:—’AAA’ ἐρέω 
μὲν ἐγὼν, ἵνα εἰδότες ἢ κε θάνωμεν, ἤ κεν ἀλευάμενοι θάνατον καὶ 
κῆρα φύγωμεν. But here the κέ belongs not to ἵνα, but to the 
Subjunctives: see § 87, Note. 

Nore 4. A purpose can be expressed by a relative and the 
Future Indicative (§ 65, 1), or by the Future Participle (δ 109, 5). 
For the use of ὥστε to express a purpose, see ὃ 98, 2. 


2. As all final clauses express the purpose or motive 
of some person, they admit of the double construction of 
indirect discourse ($ 77, 2) ; so that, instead of the Op- 
tative after secondary tenses, we can have the mood and 
tense which the person himself might have used when he 
conceived the purpose in his own mind. That is, we 

. 3 “ >f . 
can say either ἦλθεν ἵνα ἐδοι, he came that he might see 
5 “ Υ . 
(by § 44, 1) ; or ἦλθεν ἵνα ἴδῃ, because the person himself 
. ¥ “ »Μ 
would have said ἔρχομαι ἵνα td, I come that I may see. 

Hence the Subjunctive in final clauses after second- 
ary tenses is nearly as common as the more regular 
Optative. KH. g. 

᾿Επεκλώσαντο δ᾽ ὄλεθρον ἀνθρώποις, iva ἦσι καὶ ἐσσομένοισιν 
ἀοιδή. Od. VIII, 579. Kai ἐπίτηδές σε οὐκ ἤγειρον, ἵνα ὡς ἥδιστα 
διάγῃς. Pxiat. Crit. 43 B. Πλοῖα κατέκαυσεν iva μὴ Κῦρος 
διαβῇ. Χεν. Αη. 1, 4,18. ᾿Αχλὺν δ᾽ αὖ τοι aw ὀφθαλμῶν ἕλον; 
ἣ πρὶν ἐπῆεν, ὄφρ᾽ εὖ γιγνώσκῃς ἠμὲν θεὸν ἠδὲ καὶ ἄνδρα. ἜΥ, 
127, ᾿Αριστεὺς ξυνεβούλευεν ἐκπλεῦσαι, ὅπως ἐπὶ πλέον ὁ σῖτος 
ἀντίσχῃ.- Tuuc. I, 65. Ἦλθον πρεσβευσόμενοι, ὅπως μὴ σφίσι τὸ 
᾿Αττικὸν (ναυτικὸν) προσγενόμενον ἐμπόδιον γένηται. LHUC. I, 31. 


> , , - ΄ τ , 

Ἐχώρουν ἐκ τῶν οἰκιῶν, ὅπως μὴ κατὰ φῶς προσφέρωνται καὶ 
Γ > ~ - εἰ ry’ vr 

σφίσιν ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου γίγνωνται, ἀλλ᾽. . .. ἥσσους ὦσι. THUC. 





y 44, 2.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER SECONDARY TENSES. 71 


II, 8. Ταύτας ἵνα κωλύηθ᾽ οἱ νόμοι συνήγαγον ὑμᾶς, οὐχ ἵνα κυρίας 
τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι ποιῆτε. Dem. F. L. 341,12. Καὶ περὶ τούτων ἐμνή- 
σθην, ἵνα μὴ ταὐτὰ πάθητε. Dem. Οἱ. IL, 30, 10. (Here the pur 
pose was conceived in the form, iva μὴ ταὐτὰ πάθωσιν.) 

ReMArkK. This principle applies equally well to the clauses 
which follow ὅπως and ὅπως μή after verbs of striving (§ 45), and 
μή after verbs of fearing, &c. (ὃ 46). 

_This is a favorite construction with certain authors, as Thucy- 
dides ; who also, on the same principle, prefer the Indicative to the 
Optative in ordinary indirect quotations after secondary tenses. 
See § 70, 2, Remark 2.* 

Note 1. This use of the Subjunctive instead of the Op- 
tative makes the language more vivid, by introducing as nearly 
as possible the exact words or thoughts of the person whose 
purpose is thus stated. 

As the two forms are equally correct (the only difference 
being that just stated), we find them both in the same sen- 
tence, as we find the Indicative and Optative interchanged in 
indirect quotations. (See § 70,2, Remark 1.) E.g. 

‘Efaxoaious λογάδας ἐξέκριναν, ὅπως τῶν te Ἐπιπολῶν εἴησαν 
φύλακες, καὶ ἣν ἐς ἄλλο τι δέῃ, ταχὺ ξυνεστῶτες παραγίγνωνται 
they selected them, that they might be guards of Epipolae, and that they 
might be on hand if they should be needed for anything else. Tuc. 
V I, 96. Παρανῖσχον δὲ φρυκτοὺς, ὅπως ἀσαφῆ τὰ σημεῖα τοῖς πολεμίοις 
ἢ καὶ μὴ βοηθοῖεν, they raised fire-signals at the same time, in order 
that the enemy’s signals might be unintelligible to them, and that thei 
(the enemy) might not bring aid. Tuuc. IL, 22. ᾿ 

The ordinary interpretation of the latter and similar passages 

proposed by Arnold, viz. “ that the Subjunctive mood indicates the 
immediate, and the Optative the remote consequence of the action 
contained in the principal verbs, the second being a consequence of 
the first,” manifestly cannot apply to the first example. 
_ Nore 2. (a.) The use of the Optative for the Subjunctive in 
final clauses after primary tenses is, on the other hand, very rare 
and is to be viewed as a mere irregularity of construction. It oc- 
curs chiefly in Homer. E. g. 

"AEq@ τῆλ᾽ Ἰθάκης, ἵνα μοι βίοτον πολὺν dd gor. Od. XVII, 250 

. , 250. 


So Il. I, 344, ὅππως μαχέοιντο. 





* Madvig remarks (Bemerkungen, p. 12) that he finds in the first two 
books of Thucydides no erample of the Optative after ὅπως or μή depend- 
ing on a secondary tense of a verb of striving or fearing; although he 
cites fifleen examples of the Subjunctive from the same books. In pure 
final clauses after secondary tenses, the usage in Thucydides is nearly 
equally divided between the Subjunctive and the Optative. Xenophon 
on the other hand, generally follows the rule, § 44, 1. ; 





























72 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 44, 2. 


(b.) Sometimes the Optative is used because the leading verb 
implies a reference to the past as well as the present. E. g. 

Τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν τρόπον ὁ νόμος, ἵνα μηδὲ πεισθῆναι μηδ᾽ ἐξαπατη- 
θῆναι γένοιτ᾽ ἐπὶ τῷ δήμῳ. DEM. Androt. 596, 17. (Here ἔχει 
implies also the past existence of the law ; the idea being, the law 
was made as it is, so that it might not be possible, &c.) 


8. The secondary tenses of the Indicative are used in 
final clauses after ἵνα, sometimes after ὡς or ὅπως, to 
denote that the end or object is dependent upon some 
unfulfilled condition, and therefore 7s not or was not 
attained. This construction is peculiar to Attic Greek. 

These tenses of the Indicative have here the same difference 
in meaning as in conditional sentences (ὃ 49, 2), the Imperfect 
referring to present time or to continued or repeated action in 
past time, the Aorist and Pluperfect to past time. Thus ἵνα 
τοῦτο ἔπραττεν means in order that he might be doing this (but 
he is not doing it), or that he might have been doing this (but he 
was not) ; ἵνα τοῦτο ἔπραξεν means that he might have done this 
(but he did not) ; ἵνα τοῦτο ἐπεπράχει Means that he might have 
done this (but he has not). E. δ. 


Οὐκ ἂν ἐσχόμην, κι τ.λ.» ἵν᾽ ἦ τυφλός τε καὶ κλύων μηδέν, in that 
case I should not have forborne (to destroy my hearing), so that I 
should be both blind and devoid of hearing (implying that really he is 
not so). Sopu. O. T. 1387. Φεῦ, φεῦ, τὸ μὴ τὰ πράγματ᾽ ἀνθρώποις 
ἔχειν φωνὴν, ἵν᾽ ἦσαν μηδὲν οἱ δεινοὶ λόγοι; Alas ! alas! that the 
facts have no voice for men, so that words of eloquence might be as 
nothing. Eur. Hippol. Frag. 442. “Expyy εἰσκαλέσαντας μάρτυρας 
πολλοὺς παρασημήνασθαι κελεῦσαι τὰς διαθήκας, iv’, εἴ τι ἐγίγνετο 
ἀμφισβητήσιμον, ἦν εἰς τὰ γράμματα ταῦτ᾽ ἐπανελθεῖν. Dem. Aph. 
ΤΙ, 837,11. (This implies that they did not have the will thus 
sealed, so that it is not now possible to refer to it in case of dispute.) 
Ἐχρῆν αὐτοὺς ζητεῖν, iva ἀπηλλάγμεθα τούτου τοῦ δημαγωγοῦ, 
they ought to have made an investigation, in order that we might have 
been already freed from this demagogue (but we have not been freed 
from him). Dixarcn. in Demosth. p. 91, 24. ᾿Ἐζήτησεν ἄν pe τὸν 
παῖδα, ἵν᾽ εἰ μὴ παρεδίδουν μηδὲν δίκαιον λέγειν ἐδόκουν. Dem. Aph. 
III, 849, 24. Τί μ᾽ οὐ λαβὼν ἔκτεινας εὐθὺς, ws ἔδειξα μήποτε 
ἐμαυτὸν ἀνθρώποισιν ἔνθεν ἦ γεγώς; that 1 might never have shown as 
T have done. Soru. O. T. 1391. El γάρ μ᾽ ὑπὸ γῆν ἧκεν, os μήτε 
beds μήτε τις ἄλλος τοῖσδ᾽ ἐγεγήθει, would that he had sent me 
under the earth, so that neither any God nor any one else should have 
rejoiced at these things (as they have done). Arscu. Prom. 152. (lf 
we read ἐπεγήθει, we must translate, might be rejoicing, as they 




















8 45] SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 73 


are.) Ti δῆτ᾽ .. .. οὐκ ἔρριψ᾽ ἐμαυτὴν τῆσδ᾽ ἀπὸ πέτρας, ὅπως 
΄ 


τῶν πάντων πόνων ἀπηλλάγην; why did I not throw myself from this 
rock, that I might have been freed from all my toils? Id. 747. 


Remark. This construction is especially common when a final 
clause depends either upon an apodosis which contains a secondary 
tense of the Indicative (§ 49, 2) implying the non-fulfilment of the 
condition, as is the case in examples 1, 3, 4, and 5, above, or upon 
a verb expressing an unfulfilled wish, as in examples 2 and 7. In 
these cases the Indicative seems to be used by a sort of assimila- 
tion. 


Note 1. The particle ἄν is very rarely joined with the second- 
ary tenses of the Indicative in final clauses. When it is used, it 
denotes that the sentence is an apodosis (as well as a final clause), 
with a protasis expressed or understood. E. g. 


Ζῶντι ἔδει βοηθεῖν, ὅπως ὅτι δικαιότατος ὧν καὶ ὁσιώτατος ἔζη τε 
ζῶν καὶ τελευτήσας ἀτιμώρητος ἂν κακῶν ἁμαρτημάτων ἐγίγνετο, 
i. 6. that he might be exempt from punishment after death (as he would 
be, if he had so lived). Prat. Leg. XII, 959 B. 


Note 2. The Indicative can never be used in this construction, 
unless it is distinctly implied that the result is not (or was not) 
attained, that is, unless the final clause refers either to the present 
or to the past (as in the examples given above) : if it refers to the 
future, it must be expressed in the ordinary way by the Subjunctive 
or Optative, even although it depends on one of the class of verbs 
mentioned above (Remark). Both constructions may occur in the 
same sentence. E. g. 

Obs (τῶν νέων τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς) ἡμεῖς ἂν ἐφυλάττομεν ἐν ἀκροπόλει; 
“ ‘ > ‘ μ » » » " > ‘ > 4 « 
ἵνα μηδεὶς αὐτοὺς διέφθειρεν; ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ ἀφίκοιντο εἰς τὴν ἡλι- 
κίαν, χρήσιμοι γίγνοιντο ταῖς πόλεσιν, We should have kept them 
(in that case) in the Acropolis, that no one might corrupt them (as 
they are now corrupted), and that when (in the future) they should 
become of age they might become useful to their states. PLAT. Men. 89 
ΒΒ. Ταῦτ᾽ ἂν ἤδη λέγειν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐπεχείρουν, iv’ εἰδῆτε, x.T-A., 1 
should (if that were so) be now undertaking to say this to you, that you 
might (hereafter) know, κα. Dem. Aristocr. 623, 11. ‘See also the 
examples under § 32, 3 (0.). 


B. Object Clauses with Ὅπως and Ὅπως μή after Verbs of 
Striving, 80. 


§ 45. After verbs signifying to strive, to take care, to 
effect, and the like, the Future Indicative is regularly 
used with ὅπως and ὅπως μή, if the leading verb is 
primary. The Subjunctive also occurs, but much less 


frequently than the Future. 
4 





74 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [8 45 


If the leading verb is secondary, the Future Optative 
may be used, to correspond to the Future Indicative 
after primary tenses; but generally the Future Indica- 
tive is employed here also, on the principle of § 44, 2. 
The other tenses of the Optative are sometimes used, to 
correspond to the same tenses of the Subjunctive after 
primary tenses; or the Subjunctive itself may be em- 
ployed (8 44,2). LE. g. 


Ἐπιμελεῖται ὅπως (or ὅπως μὴ) γενήσεται ΟΥ̓ γένηται; he takes care 
that it may (or may not) happen. ᾿Ἐπεμελεῖτο ὅπως γενήσεται, yevn- 
σοιτο, or γένοιτο, he took care that it should happen. re 

(Fut.) “Ὥσπερ τὸν ποιμένα δεῖ ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ὅπως σῷαι τεέσον - 
ται αἱ oles καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξουσιν, οὕτω καὶ τὸν στρατηγὸν ἐπι- 
μελεῖσθαι δεῖ ὅπως σῷοί τε οἱ στρατιῶται ἔσονται καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 
ἕξουσι, καὶ, οὗ ἕνεκα στρατεύονται, rouro €oTrat. XEN. Mem. ΠῚ, 
2,1. Καλὸν τὸ παρασκευάζειν ὅπως ὡς βέλτισται ἔσονται τῶν πολι- 
τῶν αἱ ψυχαί. PLat. Gorg. 503 A. Μίκραν πρόνοιαν ἔχειν δοκεῖ ὅπως 
ὁ νόμος κύριος ἔσται καὶ μήτε συγχυθήσεται μὴτ αὖ μετα- 
ποιηθήσεται; Dem. Aristocr. 640,10. Καλῶς δὲ δημαγωγήσεις, 
ἣν σκοπῇς ὅπως οἱ βέλτιστοι μὲν τὰς τιμὰς ἔξουσιν, oi δ᾽ ἄλλοι 
μηδὲν ἀδικήσονται. Isoc. Nicocl. p. 18 A. § 16. Ορα ὅκως μὴ 
ἀποστήσονται. Hp. ΠΙ, 86. Σοὶ μελέτω ὅκως μὴ σε ὄψεται. 
Hor. I, 9. Φρόντιζ᾽ ὅπως μηδὲν ἀνάξιον τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης πράξεις. 
Isoc. Nicocl. p. 22 Β. 8 87. Τί μάλιστ᾽ ἐν ἅπασι διεσπούδασται τοῖς 
νόμοις ; ὅπως μὴ γενήσονται οἱ περὶ ἀλλήλους φόνοι. Dem. Lept. 
505, 9. Δεῖ εὐλαβεῖσθαι, μάλιστα μὲν ὅπως μὴ ἐγγενήσεσθον., ἂν 
δὲ ἐγγένησθον, ὅπως ὅτι τάχιστα ἐκτετμήσεσθον. PLAT. Rep. 
VII, 564 C. (For the force of the Future Perfect, see ὃ 29, N. 1.) 

(Subj.) Ἄλλου του ἐπιμελήσει, ἢ ὅπως ὅτι βέλτιστοι πολῖται 
ὦμεν; Prat. Gorg. ὅ15 Β. Παρασκευάζεσθαι ὅπως σὺν θεῷ ἀγωνι- 
ζώμεθα. XEN. Cyr. I, 5,14. Οὐ γὰρ ὅπως πλείονος ἄξιος γένηται 
ἐπιμελεῖται, ἀλλ᾽ ὅπως αὐτὸς ὅτι πλεῖστα ὡραῖα καρπώσεται. 
(Subj. and Fut. combined.) ΧΕΝ. Symp. VIII, 25. sa 

(Fut. Opt.) "Ἐζη ὑπὸ πολλῆς ἐπιμελείας ὅπως ὡς ἐλάχιστα μέν 
ὄψοιτο, ἐλάχιστα δ᾽ ἀκούσοιτο, ἐλάχιστα δ᾽ ἔροιτο. XEN. 
Oecon. VII, 5. (Here the construction after a primary tense would 
be, ὅπως ὄψεται. . . . ἀκούσεται . . . - ἔρηται.) ᾿ἘἘπεμελεῖτο ὅπως 
μὴ ἄσιτοί ποτε ἔσοιντο. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 1, 43. See the other ex- 
amples of the Future Optative under ὃ 26, Note 1 (a). 

(Fut. Ind. after Secondary Tenses.) Ἔπρασσον ὅπως τις βοήθεια 
née. THuc. III, 4. Προθυμηθέντος ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ὅπως ἡ vais προ- 
ἐξει. Tuuc. VI, 31. Εὐλαβεῖσθαι παρεκελεύεσθε ἀλλήλοις, ὅπως μὴ 
λήσετε διαφθαρέντες. PLat. Gorg. 487 1). Οὐδ᾽ ὅπως ὀρθὴ πλεὺ- 
σεται προείδετο, ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ αὑτὸν ὅπως ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ἐσται 
παρεσκεύασεν. Dem. F. L. 419, 28. : here ᾿ 

(Pres. or Aor. Opt.) ᾿Ἐπεμέλετο αὐτῶν, ὅπως ἀεὶ ἀνδράποδα δια- 








§ 45.] Ὅπως AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING. 79 


τελοῖεν. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 1, 44. ᾿Απεκρίνατο, ὅτι αὐτῷ μέλοι 
΄ ΄“ a» ——— > ΠῚ τι , 4 > “ a ¢ 
ὅπως καλῶς εχοι. XEN. An. I, 8, 18. Εμεμελήκει δὲ αὐτοῖς ὅπως ὁ 
ἱππαγρέτης εἰδείη οὗς δέοι πέμπειν. XEN. Hell. III, 3, 9. 

(Subj. after Secondary Tenses.) Ἔπρασσεν ὅπως πόλεμος γένη- 

mr ae KO" Han - > , ᾽ ͵ a 

ται. THUC. ἕξ, ol. ἔπρασσον πως αποστησωσιν Αθηναίων THY 
πόλιν. Id. IIT, 70. ’Qveivac παρ᾽ αὐτῶν ὅπως μὴ ἀπίωμεν ἐκ Μακε- 
δονίας, he bribed them to effect that we should not leave Macedonia. 
Dem. Cor. 236,12. (Subj. after Historic Present.) 


It will thus be seen that the Future Indicative is the most 
common construction in these sentences, after both primary and 
secondary tenses; the Future Optative, which is theoretically 
the regular form after secondary tenses, being rarely used, for 
the reason stated in § 26, Note 2. 

For the distinction between these object clauses and final 
clauses, see § 43, Remark. 


REMARK. Ὅπως (like os) is originally a relative adverb, mean- 
ing as. See Tuuc. VII, 67, οὕτως, ὅπως δύνανται, as they can. 
Then it is used in indirect questions, in the sense of ὅτῳ τρόπῳ, how, 
in what way, and is followed by the Future Indicative; as σκοπεῖν 
ὅπως ἡ πόλις σωθήσεται, to see how the city shall be saved. So 
τοῖς πονηροῖς, ὅπως μὴ δώσουσι δίκην, ὁδὸν δείκνυσι, he shows them 
how they can avoid suffering punishment (ὅτῳ τρόπῳ μὴ δώσουσι). 
Dem. Timoc. 733, 20. (See below, Note 2.) Then, by a slight 
modification in sense, it may denote also the object to which the 
striving, &e., is directed; so that σκοπεῖν (or σκοπεῖν τοῦτο) ὅπως ἡ 
πόλις σωθήσεται May mean to see (to this, viz.) that the city shall be 
saved. Here, however, the Subjunctive is sometimes allowed, as 
the interrogative force of ὅπως is lost sight of, and its force as a 
final particle, meaning in order that, begins to appear. E. g. 

Σκόπει ὅπως μὴ ἔξαρνος ἔσει ἃ νῦν λέγεις, see that you do not 
deny what you now say. PLAT. Euthyd. 283 C. Σκεπτέον ἐστὶν 
ὅπως ἐλάχιστα μὲν τραύματα λάβωμεν, ὡς ἐλάχιστα δὲ σώματα 
ἀνδρῶν ἀποβάλωμεν, we must see that we receive as few wounds as 
possible, and that we lose as few men’s lives as possible. XEN. An. IV, 
6, 10.* 


From this it becomes established as a final particle, and denotes 
the purpose in ordinary final clauses. From the original force of 
ὅπως as a relative, used in indirect questions in the sense of how, we 





* Compare Dem. Megal. 207, 5, σκοπεῖν ἐξ ὅτου τρόπου μὴ yevn- 
σονται (φίλοι), to see in what way they can be prevented from becoming 
friends; and Tuvc. I, 65, ἔπρασσεν ὅπῃ ὠφελία Tis γενήσεται, he 
was effecting that, &c.; quoted by Madvig, Syntax, p. 125, whose views in 
the main are given in the text, above. See also Tuuc. IV, 128, ἔπρασ- 
σεν ὅτῳ τρόπῳ τάχιστα τοῖς μὲν ξυμβήσεται τοῖς δὲ ἀπα) λάξε 
ται. 





76 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 45 


must explain its occasional use in indirect quotations in the sense 
of ὡς or ὅτι (8. 78). See also § 65, 1, Rem. 


Note 1. Ὅπως in this construction sometimes (though rarely) 
takes the particle ἄν when it is followed by the Subjunctive ; never, 


when it is followed by the Future Indicative. Its use is the same 


as in ordinary final clauses (§ 44, 1, N. 2). 
When ἄν is used with the Optative after a verb of striving, it 
δ), and ὅπως 18 


denotes an ordinary apodosis, as in ἃ 44, 1, N.3 ( 
simply interrogative. E. g. 

Ἢ ἄλλου ἐφιέμενοι δικάσουσιν ἣ τούτου; ὅπως ἂν ἕκαστοι μήτ᾽ 
ἔχωσι τἀλλότρια μήτε τῶν αὑτῶν στέρωνται; PLAT. Rep. IV, 435 
E. ᾿Ἐὰν δ᾽ ἔλθῃ; μηχανητέον; ὅπως ἂν διαφύγῃ καὶ μὴ da δίκην ὁ 
ἐχθρός. Id. Gorg. 481 A. Μᾶλλον i πρόσθεν εἰσήει αὐτοὺς ὅπως ἂν 
καὶ ἔχοντές τι οἴκαδε ἀφίκωνται. ΧΕΝ. An. VI, 1, 17. (Here 
ἐπιμέλεια Or SOME such word is understood as the subject of εἰσήει.) 
ὅπως ἂν ὡς ῥᾷστα διάγοιεν; ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἂν μάλιστα ἂν εὐφραι- 


Σκοπῶ: 0 . ἃ 
νοίμεθα θεώμενοι αὐτούς, 1 try to see how they might (if they should 


choose) live the easiest lives, &c. XEN. Symp. VI, 2. So ἐπιμελη- 
θῆναι ὅπως ἂν γένοιτο; Id. Cyr. I, 6, 1. 


Note 2. (a.) The Homeric construction which most re- 
sembles that of § 49 is found after such verbs as φράζομαι, 


βουλεύω, λεύσσω, OF μερμηρίζω, £0 consider, and πειράω, to try. 
ctive (sometimes with 


Here ὅπως or ὡς is used with the Subjun 
xé) after primary tenses, and with the Optative after secondary 
tenses. E. δ. 


Αὐτοὶ δὲ φραζώμεθ' ὅπως ὄχ᾽ ἄριστα γένηται: 
consider how the very best things may be done. Od. XIII, 365. Φρα- 
é Od. II, 


ζόμεθ᾽ (imperf.) ᾿Αργείοισιν ὅπως ὄχ᾽ ἄριστα γένοιτο. 

129. Φράζεσθαι ὅππως κε μνηστῆρας κτείνῃ: Od. I. 295. Περι- 
φραζώμεθα πάντες νόστον; ὅπως ἔλθῃσιν;, 1. © how he may come. 
Od. I, 76. Φράσσεται ὥς κε νέηται; ἐπεὶ πολυμήχανός ἐστιν. Od. 
[, 205. “Apa πρόσσω καὶ ὀπίσσω λεύσσει; OT OS ὄχ᾽ ἄριστα γένηται; 
;. 6. he looks to see how, Χο. Π. ΠῚ, 110. Μερμήριζεν ὅπως ἀπο- 
λοίατο πᾶσαι νῆες. Od. IX, 554. Μερμήριζε κατὰ φρένα @s ᾿Αχιλῆα 
τιμήσῃ (or τιμήσει): i. 6. how he might honor Achilles. Tl. 11, ὃ. 
Βούλευον ὅπως ὄχ᾽ ἄριστα γένοιτο. Θά. 1X. 420. Πείρα ὅπως κεν 
δὴ σὴν πατρίδα γαῖαν ἵκηαι; i. 6. try to find means by which you 
may go, &c. Od. IV. 545. Πειρᾷ ds κε Τρῶες ὑπερφίαλοι ἀπό- 
λωνται. Il. XXI, 459. 

In some of these examples ὅπως or ὡς seems to be used as an in- 
terrogative, meaning how, the Subjunctive of the direct question 
being the common Homeric form explained in § 87. (For the Sub- 
junctive with κέ, see ὃ 87, Note.) But in other examples, especially 
those with πειράω, there is a nearer approach to the construction of 

45. The two following examples will further illustrate the 


Homeric usage : — ἤδη γάρ μοι θυμὸς ἐπέσσυται; ὄφρ᾽ ἐφαμίνω 


_ let us ourselves 











K “ 
§ 45.] Ὅπως AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING. 77 


Τρώεσσιν, Il. VI, 361; : ; 
, ll. VI, 361; φραζέσθω pn τίς of apei t 
‘od ς οἱ ἀμείνων σ ty 
Il. V, 411. See also Od. VI. 113. i ΝΑ i athe 
b. lh or 6 c 
᾿ εὐ ve aan ee Future Indicative chiefly when it 
‘ ᾿ ‘rely as an indirect interrogativ 7] ere 
' ; el) ; PF ve, witl ( τον ve’ < 
purpose, as in Il. I, 252, οὐδέ ri πω σάφα ἴδμε Paap ies νος: 
γε χροὶ plang μεν OT WMS ἔσται Ta 
nei edie’ ag even know certainly how these things are to be; 8 
phe tee : 376, φράζευ ὅπως μνηστῆρσιν ἀναιδέσι χεῖρας ἐφή eae 
= - vow you wil lay hands on the shameless suitors. It oe are 
δον uture on as other tenses) when it is used as a simple rela 
2; as in Il. 36 Ἱνταξ ᾿ oe 
‘Bec ~ - Ἐν, ὅπως ἀντάξιον ἔσται, as shall be an equivalent 
(See Remark, abor e.) Occasionally also we find the Future aft . 
ὅπως in final clauses (8 44, 1, N. 1) fi 


Note 3. As many verbs of this class imply caution, the 
may be followed by the simple μή (without ὅπως), like + ὃς 
of caution and fearing (8 46). See especially Spa and σ ok 
Here, as elsewhere, μή takes the Subjunctive more νον 


than the Future Indicative. E. ¢ 
σ. 


Σκοπεῖ δὴ μὴ Υ a ἃ 
μὴ τούτοις αὑτὸν ἐξαιτήσ ὶ 
ὴΝ - Reo 0n Tat K 1 
Dem. Mid. 563, 26. Ὅρα οὖν μή τι oa ai καταγελάσῃ. 
Symp. 213 D. Ὅρα μὴ πολλῶν ἑκάστῳ ἡ Ὡς rane: 
Xen. Cyr. IV, 1, 18. Σκόπει, μή » ἡμῶν χειρῶν δεήσει. 
ΚΟΡΗ. O. C. 1180. “ ee ον θεοῦ φυλακτέα. 
eee . Ὅρα ov, μὴ νῦν μέν τις εὐχερὴ As. S 
Phil. 519. χερὴς παρῇ -ς- SOPH. 
F eee ee use of ὅπως μή, instead of μή, after verbs 
caring, &e., § 46, Note 2. It is often diffic fe | 
{ » 2. is often difficult to dr i 
vy δΣ 3 ; : raw the 
between the two constructions of § 45 and § 46.) ss 


Note 4. ‘Qs i 
ITE 4. s 15 sometimes σ᾽ ly i 
after verbs of striving ears the Subj ct πριυῤχονοωῖ. -. 
riving. ubjunctive , 
the Future Indicative. E. ¢ ‘ oe ee 
7. 
> 
Ἐπιμελοῦνται ὡς € ὕτως. NEN ζ 
ἕξει με ἬΝ S ἐχῇῃ οὔτως. Xen. Oecon. XX, 8. Ὡς δὲ καλῶς 
; ὑμέτερα, ἐμοὶ μελήσει. NEN. Cyr. III, 2, 18, ᾿Ἐπεμελήθη a 
τύχοιεν πάντων τῶν καλῶν. Id. VII, 3,17. Σπεύδοντες ἃ Ζεὶ alae 
ἄρξειεν θεῶν. AESCH. Prom. 203. Occasion: “find the τὰ 
pee Ge is a ie . 208. ecasionally we find the Sub- 
᾿ . “ 4 ? > - 
ee: τὸ ὅσα ἂν γνῷ ἀγαθὰ εἶναι ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ὡς ἂν 
ραχθῇ" - - « - Οὐ oe καρπὸν, ἣν μή τις ἐπιμελῆται ὡς ἃ 
ταῦτα περαίνηται. XEN. Hipparch. ΙΧ,2. (8 μ wig 
- . >] ad + ( ee above, N. 1.) 


Note 5 , : i 
= : OTE ὅ. Some verbs which are regularly followed by an 
Ir sep ο μὴν object occasionally take an object clause with 
ὅπως (rarely with other particles), 1 i 
ee p s), in nearly or quite the same 

a. 5 ‘tt 

= ) Verbs of exhorting, entreating, and commanding are 

ra followed by ὅπως, and those of forbidding by ὅπως 
μή, after the analogy of verbs of striving. E. g 

3° 





78 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [8 49 


Δίσσεσθαι δέ μιν αὐτὸς ὅπως νημερτέα εἴπῃ», and implore him 
thyself to speak the truth. Od. ΠῚ, 19. (Compare the regular con- 
struction, οὐδέ σε λίσσομα! μένειν; Il. I, 114.) Λίσσετο δ᾽ aiet 
Ἥφαιστον κλυτοεργὸν ὅπως λύσειεν “Apna, he implored him to 
liberate Ares. Od. VIII, 344. Κείνῳ τ᾽ ἐμὴν ἀγγείλατ᾽ ἐντολὴν; 
ὅπως τὸν παῖδα δείξει. ὅ0ΡΗ. Aj. 567. Διακελεύονται ὅπως 
τιμωρήσεται πάντας τοὺς τοιούτους. PLAT. Rep. VIII, 549 E. So 
παραγγέλλει ὅπως μὴ ἔσονται, Id. Ill, 415 Β. “Epocye ἀπηγό- 
peves ὅπως μὴ τοῦτο dmoxptvoipny. (Fut. Opt.) Id. I, 339 A. 
᾿Απειρημένον αὐτῷ ὅπως μηδὲν ἐρεῖ ὧν ἡγεῖται, when he is forbidden 
to say a word of what he believes. d. 1,337 E. See Sopn. Trach. 604. 

In Od. XVII, 362, we find drpuvev ὡς ἂν πύρνα κατὰ μνηστῆρας 


dveipot, where the ἄν is used with the particle as in the examples 


under § 44, 1, N. 3 (a). 
(b.) “Iva is used in the same sense in a single passage of the 
Odyssey, ΠῚ, 327: — Λίσσεσθαι δέ μιν αὐτὸς ἵνα νημερτὲς ἐνίσπῃ: 
and implore him yourself to speak the truth. 
This use of ἵνα is not found in Attic Greek, but it reappears in 
the later language. E. g. 
Ἐντολὴν καινὴν δίδωμι ὑ 


μῖν, ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους, α New Ccom- 
mandment I give unto you, that ye l 


ove one another. JOH. Evang. 


XIII, 34. So ἐδεήθην ἵνα ἐκβάλλωσιν, Luc. ΙΧ, 40. So in Latin, 
rogat ut liceat. 
(c.) A case of ὡς and the Subjunctive (instead of an object In- 


finitive) after a verb implying a, promise is found in 1]. I, 558:— 


Τῇ σ᾽ ὀίω κατανεῦσαι ἐτήτυμον, as ᾿Αχιλῆα τιμήσῃς: ὀλέσῃς δὲ 
πολέας ἐπὶ νηυσὶν ᾿Αχαιῶν, that you promised by your nod to honor 
Achilles, &c. 

Note 6. (a.) On the other hand, some verbs which regularly 
take ὅπως are occasionally found with an Infinitive of the object, 
sometimes with the article. (See § 46, N. 8.) E.g. 

Nef τινα ἐπεμέλοντο σφῶν αὐτῶν ἐν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς εἶναι, they always 
took care thal one of their own number should be in the offices (where 
we should expect ὅπως τις ἔσται ΟΥ̓ ἔσοιτο). THuc. VI, 54. Οὐδ᾽ 
ἐπεμελήθην τοῦ διδασκαλόν μοί τινα γενέσθαι τῶν ἐπισταμένων. 
Χεν. Mem. IV, 2, 4. So the Infinitive with τό, Mem. IV, 3, 1. 

b.) Verbs of this class can be followed by an indirect question 


introduced by ei, whether. E. g. 
Εἰ ξυμπονήσεις καὶ Evvepyacet σκόπει, see whether thou wilt assist 


me, kc. SopH. Ant. 41. (See § 46, Note 6, ¢.) 

Note 7. (a.) Both ὅπως and ὅπως μή are sometimes used 
with the Future Indicative in exhortations and pro- 
ending on some imperative like σκόπει, take care, 
“Ὅπως μή allows also the Subjunctive. E. g. 


prove thyself a man. Ὅπως μοί; 


elliptically 
hibitions, dep 
understood. 


“Oras ἀνὴρ ἔσει (Sc. σκύπει)» 





§ 45.] Ὅπως AFTER VERBS OF STRIVING. 79 


Ὁ ἊΨ , " “ “ ed ’ 

ὦ ἄνθρωπε, μὴ ἐρεῖς ὅτι ἔστι τὰ δώδεκα δὶς ἕξ, see that you do ποῖ 

tell me that twice six are twelve. Piat. Rep. 1, 337 A. Ὅπως οὖν 

» ” ” - ᾽ ͵, a 

ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας (SC. σκοπεῖτε), prove yourselves men 

worthy of freedom. Xen. An. I, 7, 3. “Ὅπως γε; ἄν τι τούτων γίγνη- 

, > , A , A 

Tat, τούτους ἐπαινέσεσθε καὶ τιμήσετε καὶ στεφανώσετε, 

= δὲ μή" καὶ μέντοι κἄν τι τῶν ἐναντίων, ὅπως τούτοις ὀργιεῖσθε 
> ORE a σ , ‘ a , ἃ 
ΕΜ. F. L. 355, 11. Ὅπως τοίνυν περὶ τοῦ πολέμου μηδὲν ἐρεῖς, 

see therefore that you say nothing about the war. Id. 370,22. Ὅπως 

4 > , ε “ Pas 
ye μὴ ἐξαπατήσῃ ἡμᾶς. PLAT. Prot. 313 C. (See § 46, N. 4.) 


_ (δ.) We occasionally find the Future Indicative with μή in an 
independent sentence, expressing a prohibition. This may be ex- 
plained by supposing an ellipsis of ὅπως from the construction just 
mentioned (ὅπως μὴ τοῦτο ἐρεῖς becoming μὴ τοῦτο ἐρεῖς); but it 
seems more natural to consider it as an independent construction. 
See § 25, 1, N. 5 (δ), and the examples. 


Remark. The construction of Note 7 (a) is confined almost 
exclusively to the second person of the verb; yet the first and third 


persons are sometimes found. E. g. 


A @ @ > - 
Καὶ ig ὥσπερ ἐρωτῶσι προθύμως, οὕτω καὶ ποιεῖν ἐθελή- 
σουσιν. DEM. Chers. 99, 14. Ὅπως δὲ τὸ σύμβολον λαβόντες 
ἔπειτα πλησίον καθεδούμεθα. Arist. Eccles. 297. 


: Note 8. When an Aorist Subjunctive active or middle was to 
ἣν used with ὅπως OF ὅπως μή after a verb of striving, the second 
orist was preferred to the jirst, if both forms were in use. This 
arose from the great similarity in form between these first Aorists 
and the F uture Indicative (as βουλεύσῃ and βουλεύσει, βουλεύσηται 
and βουλεύσεται) : this made it natural for a writer, if he intended 
to use the Subjunctive at all, to avoid those forms of it which were 
nearly identical with the more regular Future Indicative. This of 
course did not apply to the first Aorist Subjunctive passive, which 
has no resemblance to the Future Indicative. The same remark 
applies to the Subjunctive after ov μή, in the construction described 
-- § 89. In both constructions the Subjunctive differs from the 
uture only by being a less vivid form of expression.* 





jae T et general rale, first laid down by Dawes (Misc. Crit. pp. 222 and 

aah Ww ich declared the first Aorist Subjunctive active and middle a sole- 
= viol ες and ov μή, was extended by others so as to include 
paps καπ "laden τῶ piace authors were emended to conform to it. 
a ερῆξο a 10 other foundation than the accidental circumstance 

᾿ ed in Note 8, it naturally fails in many cases, in some of which 
even emendation is impossible. Thus in the example, κελεύουσι προστα- 
τεῦσαι ὅπως ἐκπλεύσῃ ἡ στρατιά, XEN. An. V, 6, 32, ἐκπλεύσῃ 
cannot he a mistake for ἐκπλεύσει, as the Attic Future is ἐκπλεύσομαι 
or ἐκπλευσοῦμαι. So in ὅοΡη. Phil. 381, οὐ μή wor ἐς τὴν Σκῦρον 
ἐκπλεύσῃς;, no emendation is possible. See also Prat. Rep. X, 609 


B, ov μὴ ἀπολέσῃ; where the Future would be ἀπολεῖ. The rule of 











80 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 


C. Object Clauses with μή after Verbs of Fearing, Se. 


$46. After verbs and phrases which express or 
imply fear, caution, or danger, un, lest or that, is used 
with the Subjunctive if the leading verb is primary, and 
with the Optative if the leading verb is secondary. By 
the principle of § 44, 2, the Subjunctive can also follow 
secondary tenses, in order that the mood in which the 
object of the fear originally occurred to the mind may 
be retained. 

Mn (like the Latin ne) denotes fear that something 
may happen which is not desired ; μὴ ov (ut = ne non) 
denotes fear that something may not happen which 2s 
desired. HK. g. 

Φοβοῦμαι μὴ γένηται (vereor ne accidat), I fear that it may hap- 
pen: φοβοῦμαι μὴ ov γένηται (vereor ul accidat), 1 fear that it may 
not happen. Nov δ᾽ αἰνῶς δείδοικα κατὰ φρένα μή σεπαρείπῃ. Il. I, 
555. Acido μὴ Onpecow ἕλωρ καὶ κύρμα γένωμαι. Od. V, 473. 
Οὐ φοβῇ μή σ᾽ “Apyos ὥσπερ κἄμ᾽ ἀποκτεῖναι θέλῃ. EvR. Or. 770. 


Ποῖον ἔθνος ov δοκεῖ φοβούμενον μή τι πάθη; XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 10. 
Φροντίζω μὴ κράτιστον ἦ μοι σιγᾶν. XEN. Mem. IV, 2, 89. Φυλατ- 
τόμενος μὴ δόξῃ μανθάνειν τι. Id. IV, 2, 8. Δέδοικα μὴ οὐδ᾽ ὅσιον ἢ 


ἀπαγορεύειν. PLAT. Rep. Il, 368 B. Ta περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς πολλὴν 





Dawes is now generally abandoned; but most editors still hold to it (at 
least in practice) so far as to exclude the prohibited forms with ὅπως 
when it follows verbs of striving, &c., and with ov μή. Even here, how- 
ever, the rule is maintained only by changing many passages against 
Mss. authority. Thus in Dem. Ol. I, p. 9, 17, all Mss. except one read 
παρασκευάσασθαι ὅπως ἐνθένδε Bon θήσητε; καὶ μὴ πάθητε ταὐτόν, 
while nearly all editions have βοηθήσετε. In the Third Philippic of 
Demosthenes two similar examples occur: p. 128, 25, ὅπως μηδεὶς 
ἀνατρέψει; τοῦτο σκοπεῖσθαι, where all Mss. have ἀνατρέψῃ, which 
Schaefer emended to ἀνατρέψει ; and p. 125, 10, ὅπως μὴ δουλεύσου- 
σιν πράττοντες, where the weight of Mss. authority decidedly favors 
δουλεύσωσιν. For ov μή; see § 89, 2, Rem. 2. 

Whatever view is taken of these last examples, there certainly seems to 
be no reason for extending the rule of Dawes to ὅπως in pure final clauses, 
as in these the Future is used only by exception (ὁ 44, 1, N.1). There 
is no objection, therefore, to such sentences as these: --τ ὧν ἕνεκα ἐπιτα- 
θῆναι, ὅπως ἀπολαύσωμεν καὶ ὅπως γενώμεθα, Xen. Cyr. VII, 
5, 82; and ἐκκλησίαν ξυνήγαγον, ὅπως ὑπομνήσω καὶ μέμψωμαι,; 
ΤῊσο. Π.60. So with ὅπως ἀριστοποιήσωνται, Tuve. VII, 39. 
In elliptical prohibitions with ὅπως μή (§ 45, N. 7) the Subjunctive seems 
to be allowed from the analogy of ordinary prohibitions (§ 86). 




















§ 46. ] Μή AFTER VERBS OF FEARING. 81 


ἀπιστίαν παρέχει τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, μὴ ἐπειδὰν ἀπαλλαγῇ τοῦ σώματος 
οὐδαμοῦ ἔτι 7, ἀλλὰ διαφθείρηταί τε καὶ ἀπολλύηται. Prat. 
Phaed. 70 A. Οὐκοῦν νῦν καὶ τοῦτο κίνδυνος, μὴ λάβωσι προστάτας 
αὑτῶν τινας τούτων, there is danger of this, that they may take, &c. 
Xen. An. VII, 7, 31. Kivduvdés ἐστι, μὴ μεταβάλωνται καὶ γέ- 
νωνταῖι pera τῶν πολεμίων. Isoc. Plataic. p. 303 Εἰ. ὃ 38. ᾿Οκνῶ μή 
μοι ὁ Λυσίας ταπεινὸς φανῇ. PLAT. Phaedr. 257 ὦ. ἘἙὐλαβοῦ δὲ μὴ 
φανῇς κακὸς γεγώς. ϑ΄ΟΡΗ. Trach. 1129. Οὐδὲν δεινοὶ ἔσονται μὴ 
βοηθέωσι ταύτῃ. Ηντ. VU, 235. Ὑποπτεύομεν καὶ ὑμᾶς μὴ οὐ 
κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε. THuc. ΠΙ, 53. Αἰσχυνόμενος μὴ φορτικῶς σκο- 
πῶμεν. PLAT. Theaet. 188 E. 

᾿Δείσας μή πώς οἱ ἐρυσαίατο νεκρὸν ᾿Αχαιοΐί. Il. V, 298. “Αζετο 
γὰρ μὴ Νυκτὶ θοῇ ἀποθύμια ἔρδοι. Il. XIV, 261. Ἐγὼ γὰρ ἥμην 
ἐκπεπληγμένη φόβῳ, μή μοι τὸ κάλλος ἄλγος ἐξεύροι ποτέ. SOPH. 
Trach. 25. ἜἜδεισαν of Ἕλληνες μὴ προσάγοιεν πρὸς τὸ κέρας καὶ 
αὐτοὺς κατακόψειαν. XEN. An. I, 10, 9. Οὐκέτι ἐπετίθεντο, 
δεδοικότες μὴ ἀποτμηθείησαν. Id. 1Π, 4, 29. "Ἔδεισαν μὴ λύττα 
τις ὥσπερ κυσὶν ἡμῖν ἐμπεπτώκοι. Id. V, 7, 26. Ὑποπτεύσας μὴ 
τὴν θυγατέρα λέγοι; ἤρετο, having suspected that he might mention his 
daughter. Xen. Cyr. V, 2,9. ᾿Ηθύμησάν τινες, ἐννοούμενοι μὴ τὰ 
ἐπιτήδεια οὐκ ἔχοιεν ὁπόθεν λαμβάνοιεν. Xen. An. III, 5, 3. Οὐδεὶς 
γὰρ κίνδυνος ἐδόκει εἶναι, μή τις ἄνω πορευομένων EK TOU ὄπισθεν ἐπί- 
σποιτο. Id. LV, 1, 6. 
Oi Φωκαιέες τὰς νήσους οὐκ ἐβούλοντο πωλέειν, δειμαίνοντες μὴ 
ἐμπόριον γένωνται. Hor. I, 165. Τῷ γὰρ δεδιέναι μὴ λόγοις ἥσ- 
σους ὦσι, τολμηρῶς πρὸς τὰ ἔργα ἐχώρουν. THuC, III, 88. Περιδεὴς 
γενόμενος μὴ ἐπιπλεύσωσιν ai νῆες. THuc. III, 80. Ἔδεισα μὴ 
Τροίαν ἀθροίσῃ καὶ ξυνοικίση πάλιν. Eur. Hec. 1188. Οἱ θεώμενοι 
ἐφοβοῦντο μή τι πάθῃ. XEN. Symp. Il, 11. Δῆλος ἦν πᾶσιν 
ἐκ “ὦ ὅτι ὑπερεφοβεῖτο μή οἱ ὁ πάππος ἀποθάνῃ. XEN. Cyr. I, 
<2 

It will be seen by the examples that the construction with μή is 
very often used when the leading verb only implies the fear, cau- 
tion, or danger, as after ὑποπτεύω and ὀκνῶς On this principle we 
must explain passages like Il. X, 100; οὐδέ τι ἴδμεν, μή πως καὶ διὰ 
νύκτα μενοινήσωσι μάχεσθαι, where the idea is we know of no security 
against their deciding to fight during the night, —implying we fear lest 
they may. 


Remark. These clauses with μή, when they follow verbs of 
caution like φυλάττομαι, εὐλαβοῦμαι, &c., partake of the nature of 
final clauses to the same extent with the construction of § 45, since 
they imply the end or purpose of the caution. (See § 43, Remark.) 
On the other hand, when they follow φοβοῦμαι and other verbs 
expressing fear or danger, no purpose is expressed or implied, but 
there is merely an apprehension that something will happen, or, in 
some cases, that something is now taking place or has already 
happened. We should hence expect that these verbs would follow 
the analogy of verbs of thinking, &c., and take either the Indicative 
with ὡς or the Infinitive, to denote the object of the fear. (This 

Ε 





82 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [8 46. 


actually happens in a few cases; as ov πέρα ρας ἐλασσώσεσθαι, 
Τηῦσ. V, 105; μὴ φοβοῦ ὡς ἀπορήσεις, XEN. Cyr. V, 2,12. See 
below, Note 6.) Still, verbs of fearing, when the object of the 
fear is future, as it commonly is, are closely connected in sense 
with those like φυλάττομαι; as they imply at least a desire 
(though not a purpose) to prevent the result. The Greeks 
generally apply to both the same construction, and as they say 
φυλάττομαι μὴ γένηται, they say also φοβοῦμαι μὴ γένηται. When 
the object of the fear is already past or actually present, so that no 
desire of preventing a result can be implied, verbs of fearing are still 
followed by μή as before; but now all analogy to final clauses dis- 
appears, and the dependent. verb is put in the proper tense of the 
Indicative, as in ordinary cbject clauses after ὅτε and ὡς. (See be- 
low, Note 5.) 

Note 1. Sometimes, though seldom, μή takes the Future 
Indicative after verbs of fearing, ἕο. E. g. 

Φοβοῦμαι δὲ, μή τινας ἡδονὰς ἡδοναῖς εὑρήσομεν ἐναντίας. PLAT. 
Phil. 13 A. Φοβερὸν καὶ σφαλερὸν, μὴ σφαλεὶς κείσομαι. PLAT. 
Rep. V, 451 A. 

The Future seems to differ from the Subjunctive in these cases, 
as in final clauses, only by expressing the result more vividly and 
marking its futurity more strongly. Thus φοβοῦμαι μὴ εὕρωμεν 
would not differ from φοβοῦμαι μὴ εὑρήσομεν quoted above, ex- 
cept in the manner of expression; just as ἐὰν μὴ εὕρωμεν would 
differ from εἰ μὴ εὑρήσομεν. (See ὃ 44,1, N. 1.) For the rare use 
of the Future Optative after verbs of fearing, &c., see § 26, Note 
1 (0). 

Nore 2. Verbs denoting fear and caution are sometimes 
followed by ὅπως μή, with the Future Indicative or the Sub- 
junctive after primary tenses and the Optative after secondary 
tenses, like verbs of striving, &c. Many verbs (like ὁρῶ and 
σκοπῶ) belong equally well to both classes (δὲ 45,46). It 
will be noticed, that ὅπως μή here is exactly equivalent to μή, 
so that φοβοῦμαι ὅπως μὴ γενήσεται (or γένηται) means J fear 
that it will happen (not, J fear that it will not happen). (See 
Note 6,a.) E. g. 

Tov δαίμονος δέδοιχ᾽ ὅπως μὴ τεύξομαι κακοδαίμονος. ARIST. Eq. 
112. Εὐλαβούμενοι ὅπως μὴ οἰχήσομαι. ῬΠΑΤ. Phaed. 91 C. Δέ- 
δοικα ὅπως μὴ ἀνάγκη γένηται, ἰ fear that there may be a necessity. 
Dem. Phil. ΠΙ, 130, 14. Οὐ φοβεῖ, ὅπως μὴ ἀνόσιον πρᾶγμα 
τυγχάνῃς πράττων; PLAT. Euthypbr. 4 E. Φυλάττονυ, ὅπως μὴ εἰς 
τοὐναντίον ἔλθῃς. XEN. Mem. III, 6, 16. Ἡδέως ἂν (θρέψαιμι τὸν 
ἄνδρα), εἰ μὴ φοβοίμην ὅπως μὴ ἐπ᾽ αὐτόν pe τράποιτο. XEN. Mem. 
II, 9, 2. 


Nore 3. The particle ἄν is never used with μή and the Sub- 

















§ 46.] Μή AFTER VERBS OF FEARING. 83 


a 
junctive. It is sometimes joined with an Optative depending upon 
μὴ atter verbs of fearing, in which case it always forms an apodosis 
with the Optative. Such an Optative with ἄν can of course follow 
ee! as well as secondary tenses, by § 31, Note 2. (See § 44, 1, 
N. 3, Rem.) E. g. 

/ 4 4 , 4 , > > a 
Δέδοικα γὰρ μὴ mpd λέγοις ἂν τὸν πόθον τὸν ἐξ ἐμοῦ, I fear that 
you might tell (if you should have an opportunity). Sopu. Trach. 631. 
(Cf. Philoct. 493.) Οὔτε προσδοκία οὐδεμία ἦν μὴ ἄν ποτε οἱ πολέμιοι 
ἐπιπλεύσειαν. THuc. Il, 98. ᾿Ἐκεῖνο ἐννοῶ μὴ λίαν ἂν ταχὺ 
σωφρονισθείην, lest (in that case) I should be very soon brought to 
my senses. XEN. An. YI, 1, 28. 
Nore 4. Μή with the Subjunctiv dé ) Wi 
7 1€ Subjunctive, and ὅπως μή with the 
Future Indicative (seldom the Subjunctive), are sometimes 
used elliptically, depending upon some verb of fear or caution 
understood. (See § 45, N. 7,a.) This expresses an appre- 
hension or anxiety, sometimes a mere suspicion. It is espe- 
cially common in Plato. E. g. 
᾿Αλλὰ μὴ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ 7 χαλεπὸν, θάνατον φυγεῖν, but (I fear) lest this 
may not be the difficult thing, to avoid death. PLat. Apol. 39 A. Μὴ 
ἀγροικότερον ἢ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, (I fear) lest it may be too rude to 
speak the truth. Puat. Gorg. 462 E. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ ody οὕτως ἔχῃ, GAN 
ἀναγκαῖον ἢ εἰδότα τίθεσθαι τὸν τιθέμενον τὰ ὀνόματα. PLAT. Crat. 436 
>. Οἰμοι τάλας, ὁ Ζεὺς ὅπως μή μ᾽ ὄψεται. ARIST. Av. 1494. 
(This example belongs equally well under § 45, N. 7, a.) Ὅπως 
οὖν μὴ ἀπολεῖ μαστιγούμενος. XEN. Cyr. I, 3,18. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὅπως μὴ 
ἐν τοῖς ζωγραφήμασιν ἡ τοῦτο, τὸ μὴ ὀρθῶς διανέμειν, ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς ὀνόμασιν 
οὗ, ἀλλ᾽ ἀναγκαῖον ἢ ἀεὶ ὀρθῶς. Ῥι,ΑΥ. Crat. 430 E. 
In XEN. Mem. ἂν 2 12, μὴ οὖν, ἔφη, ov δύναμαι ἐγὼ τὰ τῆς 
δικαιοσύνης ἐξηγήσασθαι, (I fear) that I am not able to explain, &c., 
the Present Indicative belongs under Note 5 (a.) 


Nore 5. Verbs of fearing may refer to objects of fear 
which are past or immediately present; so that no desire or 
even possibility of preventing the result can be implied. (See 
Rem. before Note 1.) Here, therefore, all analogy to final 
clauses disappears, and μή is followed by the present and past 


tenses of the Indicative, as ὅτι or ὡς would be in indirect 
quotations. The following cases occur: — 


(α.) Μή with the Present Indicative expresses a fear that 
something ts now going on. E. g. 


Ὁρῶμεν μὴ Νικίας οἴεται τι λέγειν, let us be cautious lest Nicias 
18 thenking that he says something. Prat. Lach. 196 C. (Here tho 
Subjunctive οἴηται would have meant lest Nicias may think, refer. 
ring to the future.) δέδοικα μὴ πληγῶν δέει. ARIST. Nub. 493 

















84 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 46. 


. 
Φοβεῖσθε, μὴ δυσκολώτερόν τι νῦν διάκειμαι ἣ ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν 
βίῳ, you are afraid lest I am now in a more peevish state of mind, &c 
(where the Subjunctive would have referred to the future, lest J 
may be). Prat. Phaed. 84 E. Ἐπίσχες, ὡς ἂν προὐξερευνήσω στίβον͵ 
μή τις πολιτῶν ἐν τρίβῳ φαντάζεται, κἀμοὶ μὲν ἔλθῃ φαῦλος ὡς 
δούλῳ ψόγος. Eur. Phoen. 92. (Here μὴ φαντάζεται means lest any 
one is now to be seen; and μὴ ἔλθῃ, lest any report may come here- 
after.) “Ava&, ἐμοί τοι; μή τι Kat θεήλατον τοὔργον τόδ᾽, ἡ ξύννοια 
βουλεύει πάλαι. Sopu. Ant. 278. (The idea is, my mind has long 
been anxious, lest this is the work of the Gods, ἐστίν being understood 
after μή.) “Opa μὴ ἐκεῖνον κωλύει. PLat. Charm. 163 A. ᾿Αλλ’ 
εἰσόμεσθα, μή τι καὶ κατάσχετον κρυφῆ καλύπτει καρδίᾳ θυμουμένη, 
δόμους παραστείχοντες. SOPH. Ant. 1253. (The idea is, we shall 
learn the result of our anziety lest she is concealing, ὅκα.) 


(ὁ) My with the Perfect Indicative expresses a fear lest 
something has already happened. The difference between 
this and the Perfect Subjunctive is often very slight, the 
latter expressing rather a fear that something may hereafter 
prove to have happened. (See examples, ὃ 18,1.) LE. g. 


Nov δὲ φοβούμεθα, μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἅμα ἡμαρτήκαμεν; but now we 
fear lest we have missed both at once. Tuuc. Ill, 53. (The Perfect 
Subjunctive here would strictly have meant lest it may hereafter 
prove that we have missed.) Δέδοικα μὴ λελήθαμεν [τὴν εἰρήνην] 
ἐπὶ πολλῷ ἄγοντες, I fear that we have been unconsciously enjoying a 
peace borrowed at high interest. Dem. F. L. 372,1. Φοβοῦμαι μὴ 
λόγοις τισὶ ψευδέσιν ἐντετυχήκαμεν. ΚΑΤ. Lys. 218 D. 








* That this is the correct explanation of the passage, Sopu. Ant. 278, 
and that we need not emend it with Nauck, so as to read τοὔργον τόδ᾽ iE 
ξύννοια βουλεύει πάλαι; is evident from the Scholion on the passage: 
Ἡ σύννοια μοι βουλεύεται καὶ οἴεται μὴ καὶ θεηήλατόν ἐστι τὸ πρᾶγμα. 
So perhaps we should read μὴ ἐλαύνει in Dem. Phil. III, 124, 25. 

+ In this passage, if anywhere, it would seem necessary to admit the 
interrogative force usually ascribed to pn, which would make it equivalent to 
ei ov, whether not. But here, as in the other passages quoted, it is plain 
that the dependent clause after μή expresses the object of an apprehension. 
To establish a purely interrogative force in pn, it would seem necessary to 
find examples in which μή not only follows a verb like οἶδα, but also is 
followed by a clause in which no object of apprehension is contained 
(Such a sentence would be εἰσόμεσθα μὴ οἱ φίλοι ζῶσιν, we shall learn 
whether our friends are not living; but no such example can be found, at 
least in any classic writer. The Greeks would have said εἰσόμεσθα εἰ ov 
ζῶσιν or et ζῶσιν.) The use of εἰ; whether, after verbs of fearing (Note 6, 
6), usually adduced as an argument to prove the interrogative force of μῆι 
rather seems to show that, when the Greeks wished to introduce an indi 
rect question after verbs of fearing, they had recourse to εἶν ‘as in othet 
cases. 





8 46.] Μή WITH THE INDICATIVE. 


(c.) My can be used with the Imperfect or the Aorist In- 
dicative, to express fear lest something happened in past time. 
This can be expressed only in this way, as the Subjunctive 
and Optative would refer to (relatively) future time. E. g. 

Acido μὴ δὴ πάντα θεὰ νημερτέα εἶπεν, I fear that all that the 
Goddess said was true. Od. V, 300. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὅρα μὴ παίζων ἔλεγεν» 
but be very careful lest he was speaking in jest. PLAT. Theaet. 145 B. 
(This implies a fear that he was speaking in jest.) 

Nore 6. (a.) As verbs of fearing, &c., imply thought, 
they sometimes take the construction of ordinary indirect dis- 
course. Here ὡς (and even ὅπως), that, may be used to intro- 
duce the object of the fear, thus taking the place of μή in the 
common construction. (Ὅτι seems to be used only in the case 
mentioned in Note 7.) E. g. 

᾿Ανδρὸς μὴ φοβοῦ ws ἀπορήσεις ἀξίου, do not fear that you will 
be at a loss. Xen. Cyr. V, 2,12. (Here the direct discourse would 
be ἀπορήσω, I shall be at a loss.) Μὴ δείσητε ὡς οὐχ ἡδέως καθευ- 


δήσετε, do not fear that you will not sleep sweetly. Id. VI, 2, 30. 
(Here μὴ οὐχ would be the ordinary expression.) Μὴ τρέσης, ὅπως 
σέ τις ἀποσπάσει βίᾳ, lest any one shall tear you away by force. 
Eor. Heracl. 248. Μὴ φοβεῦ μήτε ἐμὲ, ὥς ceo πειρώμενος λέγω 
λόγον τόνδε, μήτε γυναῖκα τὴν ἐμὴν, μή τί τοι ἐξ αὐτῆς γένηται 
βλάβος, do not fear either that Iam saying this to try you (ὡς λέγω), 
or lest any harm shall come (μὴ γένηται). Hot. 1,9. (Here the two 
constructions after φοβεῦ make the principle especially clear.) 

In all these cases μή or ὅπως μή would have been more regular, 
and exactly equivalent to ὡς and ὅπως here. (See Note 2.) 


(b.) We also find the Future Infinitive after verbs of 
fearing, standing in indirect discourse to represent a Future 
Indicative of the direct discourse. (See § 73, 1, Rem.) 
E. g. 

Οὐ φοβούμεθα ἐλασσώσεσθαι, we are not afraid that we shall 


be defeated. Tuuc. V, 105. (Here μή with the Subjunctive or the 
Future Indicative would have been more regular.) 


(c.) Verbs of fearing may also be followed by an indirect 
question introduced by εἰ, whether, or by some other inter- 
rogative particle. Ὅπως used interrogatively in such sentences 
is not to be confounded with ὅπως in its use explained above 


(a). E. g. 


> 


Οὐ δέδοικα εἰ Φίλιππος ζῇ; ἀλλ᾽ εἰ τῆς πόλεως τέθνηκε τὸ τοὺς 
ἀδικοῦντας μισεῖν καὶ τιμωρεῖσθαι, I have no fear (on the question) 























86 FINAL AND OBJECT CLAUSES. [§ 46. 


whether Philip is alive; but I have fear (about this), whether the cus- 
tom of the city to hate and punish evil-doers is extinct. Drm. F. L. 
434, 6. Φόβος εἴ μοι ζῶσιν obs ἐγὼ θέλω. Eur. Heracl. 791. é- 
ρουσά σοι νέους ἥκω λόγους, φόβω μὲν εἴ τις δεσποτῶν αἰσθήσεται, 
through fear whether any one will perceive it (where μὴ αἰσθήσεται or 
αἴσθηται might have been used, meaning lest any one shall perceive 
it). Eur. Androm. 61. Φοβοῦνται ὅποι ποτὲ προβήσεται ἡ τοῦ 
ἀνδρὸς δύναμις. XEN. Hell. ΥἹ, 1,14, (The direct question would 
be ποῖ προβήσεται;) Thy θεὸν δ᾽ ὅπως λάθω δέδοικα, [ am in fear 
(about the question) how I shall escape the Goddess. Eur. Iph. T. 
995. (The direct question was πῶς λάθω; ὃ 88.) 


Note 7. Verbs of fearing may be followed by ὅτι, because, and 


an ordinary causal sentence with the Indicative (§ 81). E. g. 


Οὐκ ἄξιον διὰ τοῦτο φοβεῖσθαι τοὺς πολεμίους, ὅτι πολλοὶ τυγ- 
άνουσιν ὄντες, to fear them, because they happen to be many. 
soc. Archid. p. 128 C. § 60. Φοβουμένης τῆς μητρὸς, ὅτι τὸ 
χωρίον ἐπυνθάνετο νοσῶδες εἶναι. Isoc. Aegin. p. 388 D. § 22. 
"Ore δὲ πολλῶν ἄρχουσι, μὴ φοβηθῆτε, ἀλλὰ πολὺ μᾶλλον διὰ τοῦτο 
θαρρεῖτε, do not be afraid because they rule many, &c. XEN. Hell. 
Ill, 5, 10. (Μὴ ἄρχουσιν φοβεῖσθαι would mean to fear lest they 
rule.) Φοβούμενος τὸ κάεσθαι καὶ τὸ τέμνεσθαι, ὅτι ἀλγεινόν, fearing 
them, on the ground that they are painful. PLat. Gorg. 479 A. (But 
for the analogy of the preceding examples, we might be inclined to 
translate this fearing that they are painful, like μὴ ἀλγεινόν.) ἜΦο- 
βεῖτο, ὅτι ὀφθήσεσθαι ἔμελλε τὰ βασίλεια οἰκοδομεῖν ἀρχόμενος, he 
was afraid, because he was about to be seen beginning to build the 
palace. XEN. Cyr. III, 1, 1. 


Norte 8. (a.) Verbs of fearing may be followed by an Infinitive 
(without pn), which is sometimes preceded by the article. - Such an 
Infinitive denotes the direct object of the fear, as in English, J fear 
togo. E.g. 


Φοβοῦμαι οὖν διελέγχειν σε, μὴ ὑπολάβῃς, κι τ.λ.,) 7 am afraid to 
refute you, lest you may suspect, &c. Piat. Gorg. 457 E. (Here 
both constructions occur.) Φοβήσεται ἀδικεῖν, he will be afraid to 
do wrong. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 7, 15. (But φοβήσεται μὴ ἀδικῇ, he 
will fear that he may do wrong.) Πέφρικα Ἐρινὺν τελέσαι τὰς 
κατάρας, I shudder at the idea of the Fury fulfilling the curses. AESCH. 
Sept. 720. (But in 790, rpém μὴ τελέσῃ means 7 tremble lest she 
may fulfil them.) See also Xen. An. I, 3,17. Τὸ ἀποθνήσκειν 
οὐδεὶς φοβεῖται, τὸ δὲ ἀδικεῖν φοβεῖται. PLat. Gorg. 522 E. 

See § 92, 1, Remark 2, and Note 8. 


(5.) Verbs of caution may be followed by an Infinitive (with or 
without pn), which is sometimes preceded by the article; the In- 
finitive having the same meaning as a clause with μή and the Sub- 


junctive or Optative. E. g. 


Πῶς οὐκ ἄξιον αὐτόν ye φυλάξασθαι τοιοῦτον γενέσθαι; why 











§ 47, 2.1 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 87 


ought he not to guard against becoming such a man himself? Xun. 
Mem. I, 5,3. (Here γενέσθαι is equivalent to μὴ γένηται.) Φυλατ- 
τόμενος τὸ λυπῆσαί τινα, taking care to offend no one. Dem. Cor. 
313, 6. Φυλάσσειν μηδένα περαιοῦσθαι. THuc. VII, 17. Φυλαττό- 
μενον καὶ προορώμενον μὴ καταισχῦναι ταύτην. [Dem.] Aristog. I, 
773, 1. (For μή see § 95, 2, N. 1.) In Tuuc. VII, 77, 5, we find 
the Infinitive with ὥστε after φυλάσσω. 


(c.) Kivduvos ἐστι, the principal expression denoting danger which 
takes μὴ and a finite verb, is quite as regularly followed by the 
Infinitive (without μή). E. g. 

Ov σμικρὸς κίνδυνός ἐστιν ἐξαπατηθῆναι, there is no little danger 
of their being deceived. PLat. Crat. 436 B. 

Κινδυνεύω is regularly followed by the Infinitive, by § 92, 1. 


Remark. All the Infinitives referred to in Note 8 belong regu- 


larly under the rule, § 92,1. For the article before such Infinitives, 
see ὃ 92, 1, Note 8. 





SECTION Il. 
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


§47. 1. In conditional sentences the clause con- 
taining the condition is called the protasis, and that 
containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The 
protasis is regularly introduced by the particle εἰ, 7, 
negatively εἰ μή. 


Note. Aiis the Doric form for εἰ. It is sometimes used 
also in Epic poetry, but only when κέ immediately follows. 


2. The adverb av (Epic κέ or κέν, Doric xa) is regu- 
larly joined with εἰ in the protasis, when the verb is in 
the Subjunctive (§ 50, 1); εἰ with av (ἃ) forming the 
compound ἐάν, av (a), or ἤν. See § 38,1.) The simple 
εἰ is used in the protasis with the Indicative and the 
Optative. 

The same adverb ἄν is regularly used in the apodosis 
with the Optative (§ 50, 2), and also with the secondary 








Φ- δου δ een, SEE 


pe Se 


ree 





88 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


tenses of the Indicative in the construction explained in 
§ 49,2. (See § 37, 3, and § 39.) 

8. The negative particle of the protasis is regularly 
μή, that of the apodosis is ov. 


Note. When the last rule is violated, and ov is found in a 
protasis, it is always closely connected with a particular word 
(generally the verb), with which it forms a single negative 

nay . . . . nay 7 *\ 
expression ; so that its negative force does not (like that of μή; 
affect the protasis as a whole. E. g. 

Πάντως δήπου (οὕτως ἔχει), ἐάν τε σὺ καὶ "Avuros οὐ Pre ἐάν τε 
φῆτε, if you deny i, as well as if you admit uw. ῬΊΑΥ. Apol. 25 B. 
(Here ἐὰν μὴ φῆτε would mean unless you admit i.) Ei μὲν ov 
πολλοὶ ἦσαν, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἂν περὶ τούτων ἠκούετε, if there were only 
a few, &c. Lys. Agorat. p. 135; 8 62. Cf. p. 137; § 16. (Here 
ov πολλοί are used together in the sense of dAiyo.) Τῶνδε μὲν οὐδὲν 

, > ε Ἢ ~ - > , > ‘ > , a” 
ἴσον ἐστὶν, εἴγε ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν ye τῶν ἐν μέσῳ οὐδεὶς οὐδέποτε ἄρξε- 
rat, there is no fairness in this, if (it ts the plan, that) no one is ever 
to begin with us. XEN. Cyr. 11, 2, 3. 

The following example makes the difference between ov and μή 
particularly clear, ov affecting merely the verb, and μή affecting 
the whole (including the ov): εἰ μὴ Πρόξενον οὐχ ὑπεδέξαντο, 
ἐσώθησαν ἄν, if it had not been that they did not receive Proxenus, they 
would have been saved. Dem. F. L. 364, 11. 


When several clauses, introduced by μέν and δέ, depend 
upon a single εἰ which precedes them all, οὐ is used even more 
frequently than μή; as such clauses have their own construc- 
tion independently of the εἰ, which merely introduces each of 
them as a whole, not affecting the construction of particular 
words. E. g. 

Δεινὸν ἂν εἴη, εἰ of μὲν ἐκείνων ξύμμαχοι ἐπὶ δουλείᾳ τῇ αὑτῶν φε- 
ροντες οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν, ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῷ αὐτοὶ σώζεσθαι οὐ κ ἄρα δαπανή- 
σομεν, it would be a hard thing, if (1 is a fact that) their allies will not 
refuse, &c., while we will not contribute. Truc. I, 121. Εἶτ᾽ οὐκ 
αἰσχρὸν, εἰ τὸ μὲν ᾿Αργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων 
ἀρχὴν, ὑμεῖς δὲ βάρβαρον φοβήσεσθε; is it not then disgraceful, if (ul 
is true, that) the Argive people did not fear, ἕο. Dem. Rhod. 197, 9. 


Classification of Conditional Sentences. 


§48. The supposition contained in a protasis may 
be either particular or general. A particular supposi- 





ppt Boe aaa Rates ee ee κῷς 5,..ς 











§ 48. | CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONS. 89 


tion refers to a definite act or a definite series of acts. 
A general supposition refers to any one of a class of 
acts, which may occur (or may have occurred) on any 
one of a series of possible occasions, — if having the 
force of if ever or whenever. 

The following examples contain particular suppositions : — 

If he is (now) able to do this, he és doing it, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖν 
δύναται, ποιεῖ. Lf he was able to do this, he did it, εἰ τοῦτο ποι- 
εῖν ἐδύνατο, ἐποίει. If he (shall) be able to do this, he will do t, 
ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιεῖν δύνηται, mance. Lf he should be able to do this, 


he would do it, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖν δύναιτο, ποιοίη ἄν. 


The following contain general suppositions : — 

lf he is (ever) able to do this, he (always) does tt, ἐὰν τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν δύνηται, ποιεῖ. Lf any one (ever) wishes to go, it is (always) 
permitted, ἐάν τις βούληται ἰέναι, ἔξεστιν. Tf he was (ever) able to 
do this, he (always) did it, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖν δύναιτο, ἐποίει. Lf any 
one (ever) wished to go, it was (always) permitted, εἴ τις βού- 
λοιτο ἰέναι, ἐξῆν. If any one shall (ever) wish to go, rt will (al- 
ways) be permitted, ἐάν τις ἰέναι βούληται, ἀεὶ ἐξέσται. If any 
one should (ever) wish to go, it would (always) be permitted, εἴ 
τις ἰέναι βούλοιτο, ἀεὶ ἂν ἐξείη. 

Although this distinction can logically apply to all suppositions 
(present, past, and future), yet the Greek distincuishes the two 
classes in construction only in present and past conditions, even 
here excepting those which imply non-fulfilment of the egndition. 
Therefore all the classes under L., except A. 1, include both partic- 
ular and general suppositions. 

I. Excluding from A. 1 the past and present general sup- - 
positions, which have a peculiar construction, we have Sour 
Jorms of ordinary conditional sentences : — 

A. If the protasis refers to the present or the past, the 
question as to the fulfilment of the condition which it ex- 
presses has been already decided (in point of fact) either 
affirmatively or negatively ; the speaker, however, either may 
or may not wish to imply by his form of statement how that 
question has been decided. He will, therefore, state such a 

condition in one of two ways: — 





ee ne ae en τος κοο ἐιλώνω 


90 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 48. 


1. If he refers to a present or past condition, expressing no 
opinion as to its fulfilment, he may say tf he is doing this, εἰ 
τοῦτο πράσσει, ---- if he was doing tt, εἰ ἔπρασσεν, ---- tf he did it, 
εἰ ἔπραξεν, ---- ἡ he has done it, εἰ wempayev, —tf he had already 
done it, εἰ ἐπεπράχε. The apodosis, expressing the result of 
the fulfilment of such a condition, may refer to the present, the 
past, ov the future. ‘Thus we may say, 

Εἰ πράτσει τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔχει, if he is doing this, it ts well. 

Ei πράσσει τοῦτο, ἡμάρτηκεν, if he is doing this, he has errcd. 

Ei πράσσει τοῦτο, καλῶς ἕξει, tf he is doing this, it will be well. 

Ei ἔπραξε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔχει (εἶχεν, ἔσχεν, or ἕξει), fhe did this, tt 
ts (was or will be) well ; and so with the other tenses in the protasis. 
(See § 49, 1.) 

So in Latin, Si hoc facit, bene est ; Si hoc fecit, bene erit. 


2. If, on the other hand, he refers to a present or past con- 
dition, wishing to imply that it 7s not or was not fulfilled, he 
may say if he were now doing this, ei τοῦτο ἔπρασσεν ; or if he 
had done this (although he did not do it), εἰ ἔπραξεν. The 
apodosis here denotes what would be or would have been the 
result, if the false supposition in the protasis were a valid one. 
The apodosts here contains the adverb ἄν, which distinguishes 
it from those forms of apodosis belonging under 1 in which past 
tenses are used. Thus we may say, 

Ei ἔπρασσε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν, if he were (now) doing this, tt 
would be well. Ei ἔπρασσε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν may also mean if he 
had been doing this, it would have been well. 

Ei ἔπραξε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν ἔσχεν (or ἂν εἶχεν), if he had done this, 
it would have been well (or it would now be well). On the other 
hand, εἰ ἔπραξε τοῦτο, καλῶς ἔσχεν (without ἄν) would mean if he 
did this, it was well. (See § 49, 2. 

In Latin: Si hoc faceret, bene esset ; Si hoc fecisset, bene fuisset. 


RemaRK 1. The Greek has thus a special form (A, 2) implying 
that a condition is not or was not fulfilled, and another (A, 1) im- 
plying nothing whatever as to its fulfilment. There is no special 
form implying that the condition is or was fulfilled, — a force often 
erroneously assigned to the form A, 1. If this is to be expressed at 
all, it must be done by the context, not by the form of the verb. 


B. If the protasis refers to the future, the question as to 
the fulfilment of the condition is, of course, at present unde- 
cided, and a speaker may state such a condition in either of 
two ways (B, 1 and 2), which differ more in the form of state- 
ment than in their meaning : — 








§ 48.] CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONS. 91 


1. He may say if he shall do this, ἐὰν πράσσῃ τοῦτο (or 
still more vividly, εἰ πράξει τοῦτο), making a distinct maou 
tion of a future case. The natural apodosis to such a protasis 
expresses what will be the result, if the condition shall be ful- 
filed. We may therefore say, 


> 4 ΄ = - — 5 ᾿ a . 
Ἐὰν πράσσῃ τοῦτο, καλῶς ἕξει, if he do this, it will be well; or εἰ 
πράξει τοῦτο, καλῶς ἕξει, if he shall do this, it will be well. (See § 50 
+ . ve . . ᾽ 
1.) In Latin: Si hoc faciet (more frequently si hoc Jecerit), bene 
erit ; rarely si hoc faciat, bene erit. 


2. He may also say, if he should do this, ei πράσσοι τοῦτο, 
still supposing a case in the future, but less distinctly and vividly 
than before. The natural apodosis to such a protasis is a simi- 
lar indefinite expression, ἐξ would be. We can therefore say, 


Ei πράσσοι τοῦτο, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if he should do this, it would be 
well. (See § 50,2.) In Latin: Si hoc faciat, bene sit. 


REMARK 2. The two forms of protasis which the Greck ex- 
presses by the Subjunctive (ἐὰν πράσσῃ τοῦτο) and the Optative (εἰ 
πράσσοι τοῦτο) have only one equivalent form in Latin; si hoc 
Jaciat meaning if he shall do this (ἐὰν τοῦτο πράσσῃν, as well as if he 
should do this (εἰ τοῦτο πράσσοι). (See § 50, 2, Rem. δ.) But in 
ὃν — sense the Latin commonly employs the Future Indica- 
ive, st hoc faciet (corresponding i τοῦτο mpd ] 
this), or the Fike Perfect si] ; : ecerit, I nanos ΓΝ aps = 
his) . oc fecerit, leaving the form si hoc 
Jaciat to represent the Greek εἰ τοῦτο πράσσοι, if he should do this. 


Ἢ. In general suppositions the two following classes are 
distinguished in construction from the corresponding particular 
suppositions (I. A, 1). 

A. First, when the apodosis contains a verb of present 
time, expressing a customary or repeated action or a general 
truth, and the protasis refers to indefinite time represented in 
English as present. We may then say, 

Ἐάν tis τοῦτο πράσσῃ, καλῶς ἔχει, if any one (ever) does this, it is 
(in all such cases) well. ᾿Ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιεῖν δύνηται, ποιεῖ, if he is 


(ever) able to this, he (in all such cases) does it. "Edy τις τούτου πίῃ, 
ἀποθνήσκει, if any one (ever) drinks of this, he dies. 


B. Secondly, when the apodosis expresses a customary or 
repeated action or a general truth in past time, and the pro- 
tasis refers to indefinite past time. We may then say, 


? 


Εἴ τις τοῦτο πράσσοι, καλῶς εἶχεν, if any one (ever) did this, it was 
(tn all such cases) well. Ei τοῦτο ποιεῖν δύναιτο, ἐποίει, if he was 
(ever) able to do this, he (always) did it. Ἐ τις τούτου πίοι, ame Oyn- 
σκεν, if any one (ever) drank of this, he died. 





92 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [8 48. 


REMARK 1. General suppositions referring to the future (see 

. 89), as well as those referring to the present or past with non- 
fulfilment of the condition implied, not being distinguished by their 
form from particular suppositions, are included under the rules of 
§ 49, 2 and § 50, 1 and 2. 

REMARK 2. Although the Latin occasionally agrees with the 
Greek in the construction of general conditional sentences, — using 
si faciat and si faceret like ἐὰν mpaoon and εἰ πράσσοι above, — it 
commonly agrees with the English in not distinguishing this class 


from I, A, 1. 


I. Four Forms of Ordinary Conditional Sentences. 
A. Present and Past Conditions. 


8 49. 1. (Particular Suppositions.) When the 
protasis in a particular supposition simply states a 
present or a past condition, implying nothing as to the 
truth of the supposition, the verb is in one of the present 
or past tenses of the Indicative, after εὐ. Any tense of 
the Indicative may be used in the apodosis, to express 
the result of the fulfilment of the condition. E. g. 


4 


Ei ἐβρόντησε, καὶ ἤστραψεν, if it thundered, it also lightened. (This 
does not imply that the speaker has any knowledge or opinion on 
the question whether it actually thundered.) Ei δ᾽ οὕτω τοῦτο 
ἐστὶν, ἐμοὶ μέλλει φίλον εἶναι. Il. I, 564. See I, 178. Εἰ τότε 
κοῦρος €a, νῦν αὖτέ με γῆρας ὀπάζει. Il. IV, 821. Εἰ θεοί τι 
δρῶσιν αἰσχρὸν, οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί. Eur. Beller. Fr. 294. Ei ἐγὼ 
Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ, καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι" ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐδέτερά ἐστι 
τούτων, if 1 dv not know Phaedrus, I have Sorgotten myself; but 
neither of these is the case. PLAT. Phaedr. 228 A. (See ὃ 48, I, A, 
Rem. 1.) Ei μὲν (᾿Ασκληπιὸς) θεοῦ ἦν, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδὴς, εἰ ὃ 

.] > - ‘ * 
αἰσχροκερδὴς, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ. PLAT. Rep. III, 408 C. Εἰ μηδὲν τούτων 
πεποίηκας; τί φοβήσῃ; 


Note 1. The Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations 
or prohibitions, or the Optative in wishes, may stand in the 
apodosis. LE. g. 


᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ σοι, στεῖχε, if thou art resolved, go. Sopu. Ant. 
98. (Here ἐὰν δοκῇ would refer to the future, while εἰ δοκεῖ 18 
strictly present in its time. Cf. Antig. 76.) ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ, Th éw- 
μεν, ὁρμάσθω ταχύς. Sopn. Phil. 526. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἴ που πτωχῶν γε 
θεοὶ καὶ ἐρινύες εἰσὶν, ᾿Αντίνοον πρὸ γάμοιο τέλος θανάτοιο κιχείγ. 
Od. XVII, 475. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ σοι ταῦθ᾽, ὑπαί τις ἀρβύλας λύοι 
τάχος, but if this pleases you, let some one quickly loose the shoes, &e. 











§ 49, 2.] PRESENT AND PAST CONDITIONS. 93 


Arson. Agam. 944, Κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην, Ξανθίαν εἰ μὴ φιλῶ. 
Arist. Ran. 579. In the last three examples the Optative ex- 
presses a wish (§ 82), and must not be confounded with the Opta- 
tive with ay in apodosis (§ 50, 2). 


REMARK. A protasis of this class may also be followed by an 
apodosis in the Optative with ἄν, as εἰ τοῦτ᾽ ἀληθές ἐστιν, ἡδέως ἂν 
ἀπέλθοιμι, 0 this is true, I should be glad to depart. But such an 
apodosis always implies a protasis with an Optative, which is inde- 
pendent of the one expressed ; so that these examples belong under 
the mixed constructions of ὃ 54. See § 54,1 (a). 


Note 2. Under this head belong all cases of particular supposi- 
tions referring to the present or the past in which the non-fulfilment 
of the condition is not implied. We must be careful not to include 
in this class the general suppositions explained in § 51; which require 
a Subjunctive or Optative in the protasis, although we commonly 


~ 
4 


translate them in English by the simple Indicative. 


Nore 3. The condition may still be present, even when 
the Future Indicative stands in the protasis, if that tense ex- 
presses merely a present intention or necessity that something 
shall happen hereafter; as when εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσει Means uf he ἐξ 
(now) about to do this, and not (as it does in an ordinary 
future condition) tf he shall do this. E. σ΄. 


Aipe πλῆκτρον, εἰ μαχεῖ, raise your spur, if you are going to fight. 
Arist. Av. 761. (Εἰ μαχεῖ in protasis commonly means if” you shall 
fight, being equivalent to ἐὰν μάχῃ.) Οἱ eis τὴν βασιλικὴν τέχνην 
παιδευόμενοι. . .. τί διαφέρουσι τῶν ἐξ ἀνάγκης κακοπαθούντων, et 
γε πεινήσουσι καὶ διψήσουσι καὶ ῥιγώσουσι καὶ ἀγρυπνή-" 
σουσι καὶ τἄλλα πάντα μοχθήσουσιν ἑκόντες; how do they differ, 
&c., of they are to suffer hunger, thirst, &e. (i. 6. if it is necessary that 
they should suffer) ? Xen. Mem. II, 1,17. Ἦ νῦν ἐγὼ μὲν οὐκ ἀνὴρ, 
αὕτη δ᾽ ἀνὴρ, εἰ ταῦτ᾽ ἀνατεὶ τῇδε κείσεται κράτη, if this is to pass 
unpunished. Sopu. Ant. 484. So εἰ πόλεμος Sapa, Il, I, 61; and 
εἰ διαβληθήσομαι, Eur. Hee. 863. 

This use of the Future must be carefully distinguished from that 
found in future conditions, where it is equivalent to the Subjunctive. 
(§ 50,1, Note 1). The periphrastic form of the Future with μέλλω 
and the Infinitive (8 25, 2) is more common in this construction. 
Here the tense of μέλλω (as in εἰ μέλλουσι τοῦτο ποιεῖν for εἰ τοῦτα 
ποιήσουσιν) shows that the condition is really present and not future. 
So with the Latin periphrastic Future, si hoc Jacturus est. 


2. In sentences containing present or past conditions, 
when it is implied that the condition of the protasis 7s 
not or was not fulfilled, and when the apodosis expresses 





94 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. | § 49, 2. 


what would be (or would have been) the result if that 
condition were (or had been) fulfilled, the secondary 
tenses of the Indicative are used in both protasis and 
apodosis. The apodosis regularly contains the adverb 
¥ 

αν. 

The Imperfect here refers to present time or to a con- 
tinued or repeated action in past time, the Aorist to an 
action simply occurring in past time, and the (rare) 
Pluperfect to an action completed in past or present 
time. KE. g. 


El rovro mpage, καλῶς ἂν εἶχεν, if he were (now) doing this, 
it would be well (implying that he 18 not doing 10). This may also 
mean if he had been doing this, it would have been well (implying that 
he was not doing it). The context must decide, in each case, to 
which time the Imperfect refers. Ei τοῦτο € mpage, καλῶς ἂν 
ἔσχεν, if he had done this, tt would have been well (implying ὌΝ oe 
did not do it.) Ei τοῦτο ἐπεπράχει, καλῶς ἂν εἰχεν, if he bac 

nished doing this (now, or at any past time), τί would be well (imply- 
ing either he has not, or he had not finished it). ca i 
Tatra οὐκ ἂν ἐδύναντο ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ καὶ διαίτῃ μετρίᾳ ἐχρῶντο; 


they would not be able to do this, if they did not lead an abstemious 
life. XEN. Cyr. I, 2,16. Πολὺ ἂν θαυμαστότερον ἦν, εἰ ἐτιμῶντο; 


ey Fagg hee Ἂν 
ii would be much more wonder ful, if they were honored. Puat. Rep. VI, 


489 B. Οὐχ οὕτω δ᾽ ἂν προθύμως ἐπὶ τὸν πόλεμον ὑμᾶς παρεκάλου ve 
εἰ μὴ THY εἰρήνην ἑώρων αἰσχρὰν ἐσομένην, I should not exhort you, di 
I not see (as I do), &c. Isoc. Archid. Ρ. 134 A. ὃ 87. Λέγουσι 
πάντα ἧ ἔχει" καί τοι εἰ μὴ ἐτύγχανεν αὑτοῖς ἐπιστημή ἐνουσα, οὐκ 
ἂν οἷοί τ᾽ ἦσαν τοῦτο ποιήσειν, they tell everything as it is: and yet ὑ 
knowledge did not chance to be in them, they could not do this. I LAT. 
Phaed. 73 A. Ev ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι εἴ τι ἐμοῦ ἐκήδου, οὐδενὸς ἂν οὑτω pe 
ἀποστερεῖν ἐφυλάττου ὡς ἀξιώματος καὶ τιμῆς, if yor cared for me 
at all, you would take care, ἕο. XEN. Cyr. V, 5, 84. Ei μὴ ἄπληστός 
τε €as χρημάτων καὶ αἰσχροκερδὴς, οὐκ ἂν νεκρῶν θήκας ἀνέῳφγε 
Hipr. 1, 187. (This implies ἄπληστος εἰ; thou art insatiable, anc 
dvewyes, thou didst open.) : 

Οὐκ ἂν νήσων ἐκράτει; εἰ μή τι καὶ ναυτικὸν εἶχεν, he would not 
have been master of the islands, if he had not had also some naval force 
(implying ναυτικὸν εἶχεν and νήσων ἐκράτει, he had a navy, and he 
was master of the islands). Tuuc. 1, 9. (Ταῦτα) οὐκ ἂν προέλ εγεν; 
εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευεν ἀληθεύσειν, he would not have declared = 
(referring to several), had he not been confident that he shoul¢ sped 
the truth. XEN. Mem. I, 1, 5. Ei ἦσαν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ, ws ov φῇς, 
οὐκ ἄν more ταῦτα ἔπασχον, if they had been good men, as you say, 
they would never have suffered these things (referring to several vases). 
Piat. Gorg. 516 E. 





§ 49, 2.] SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 95 


Kai νύ κ᾽ ἔτι πλέονας Λυκίων κτάνε δῖος ᾽Οδυσσεὺς, εἰ μὴ dp ὀξὺ 
νόησε μέγας κορυθαίολος Ἕκτωρ, i. 6. Ulysses would have killed still 
more, had not Hector perceived him. Il. V. 679. Kai νύ κεν ἤια πάντα 
κατέφθιτο καὶ peve’ ἀνδρῶν, εἰ μή tis pe θεῶν ὀλοφύρατο καί p 
ἐσάωσεν. Od. IV, 868. Καὶ ἴσως ἂν διὰ ταῦτ᾽ ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ 
ἡ ἀρχὴ διὰ ταχέων κατελύθη. PLat. Apol. 32 D. Τί ποτ᾽ ἂν 
ἔπαθον ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν, εἰ πλείω χρόνον ἐπετροπεύθην; .. -. εἰ 
κατελείφθην μὲν ἐνιαύσιος, ἐξ ἔτη δὲ προσεπετροπεύθην in 
αὐτῶν, οὐδ᾽ ἂν τὰ μικρὰ ταῦτα map αὐτῶν ἀπέλαβον. Dem. Aph. I, 
838, 12--19. Εἰ τοίνυν ὁ Φίλιππος τότε ταύτην ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, 
οὐδὲν ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν, οὐδὲ τοσαύτην ἐκτήσατο 
δύναμιν. Dem. Phil. I, 41, 18. (See below, Remark ὃ; and 42, 
4.) 

Ei μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα, if you had 
not come, we should (now) be on our way to the King. (Aor. and Im- 
perf.) Xen. An. I],1,4. Ei yap ἐκ τοῦ παρεληλυθότος χρόνου τὰ 
δέοντα οὗτοι συνεβούλευσαν, οὐδὲν ἂν ὑμᾶς viv ἔδει βουλεύεσθαι, 
if they had given the necessary advice in time past, there would now be 
no need of your deliberating. Dem. Phil. I, 40, 9. Τοῦτο εἰ ἀπε- 
κρίνω, ἱκανῶς ἂν ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκη, if you had 
answered this, I should have already learned, &c. (implying ἀλλ᾽ οὐ 
μεμάθηκα, but now I have not learned). Piat. Euthyph. 14 C. 
Λοιπὸν δ᾽ ἂν ἦν ἡμῖν ἔτι περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι τῆς ἡμετέρας, εἰ 
μὴ προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο. (This implies ἀλλὰ τὴν 
εἰρήνην προτέρα πεποίηται.) Isoc. Phil. p. 98 C.§ 56. Τῶν ἀδικη- 
μάτων ἂν ἐμέμνητο τῶν αὑτοῦ, εἴ τι περὶ ἐμοῦ γἔγραφεν. DEM. 
Cor. 251, 28. 

Different tenses can of course be used in the protasis and apodosis, 
if the sense requires it. See especially the example quoted above 
from Dem. Phil. I, p. 40, 9, and the preceding one. 

This construction is the exact equivalent of the Latin Imperfect 
and Pluperfect Subjunctive in protasis and apodosis. With regard 
to the tenses, the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek 
Imperfect Indicative referring to present time; while the Latin 
Pluperfect Subjunctive represents the Greek Aorist and Pluperfect 
Indicative, and also the Imperfect referring to past time. 


ReMARK. (a.) It will be seen by the examples, that this 
construction usually implies, not merely that the condition of 
the protasis is not (or was not) fulfilled, but also that the 
action of the apodosis does not (or did not) take place: thus, 
εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξεν, ἐσώθη av, if he had done this, he would have 
been saved, implies not merely that he did not do this, but also 
that he was not saved. The denial of the apodosis is not, how- 
ever, inferred as a necessary consequence from the denial of the 
protasis, which would often be an illogical inference; for (ix 
the example above) the person might have been saved in some 








96 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 49, 2. 


other way, even if he did not do the thing referred to. Indeed, 
where it is not implied that the action of the apodosis depends 
as a result upon that of the protasis as its condition, the action 
of the apodosis is not denied: this happens when the protasis 
expresses a concession, introduced by καὶ εἰ, even tf, although, 
or οὐδ᾽ εἰ, not even if; as καὶ εἰ τοῦτο ἔπραξεν, ἐσώθη ἄν, even tf he 
had done this, he would have been saved, where it may be 
implied that he was saved. 


(b.) In this form of conditional sentence, therefore, the verb 
of the protasis always (and the verb of the apodosis generally) 
implies its opposite ; the Imperfect always implying a Present 
or Imperfect, the Aorist an Aorist, and the Pluperfect usually 
a Perfect or Pluperfect. Thus εἰ ἔπρασσε, when it means if he 
were doing, implies ἀλλ᾽ ov πράσσει; but really he is not doing ; 
when it means if he had been doing, it implies ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἔπρασσε, 
but really he was not doing: εἰ μὴ ἔπραξεν, if he had not done, 
implies ἀλλ᾽ ἔπραξεν, but really he did do: εἰ ἐπεποιήκει τοῦτο, τῇ 
he had already done this, implies either ἀλλ᾽ οὐ πεποίηκεν, but 
really he has not done tt, or ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐπεποιήκει, but really he had 
not done it, according to the context. This principle will 
show which tense of the Indicative is to be used in any given 
case, in writing Greek. 

The Aorist, however, is very often used here, as elsewhere, 
where the Pluperfect would express the time intended more 
exactly (8 19, N. 4); as in the sentence above quoted, οὐδὲν 
ἂν ὧν νυνὶ πεποίηκεν ἔπραξεν, where the Perfect πεποίηκεν shows 


that the Pluperfect might have been used for ἔπραξεν. 


Nore 1. In Homer, the Imperfect in this construction 
refers to past time, and is to be translated by our Pluperfect. 
E. g. 

a 4 » 4 " , a , > oe δ. 8 δ ‘ ,΄ 

Ἔνθα κε λοιγὸς ἔην καὶ ἀμήχανα epya γένοντο, εἰ μὴ ap ὀξὺ νόησε 
πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, then there would have been, &c. Il. VIL, 
130. Ei yap ἐγὼ τάδε 75’ ἐνὶ φρεσὶ πευκαλίμῃσιν; οὐκ ἂν ὑπεξέφυγε 
Στυγὸς ὕδατος αἰπὰ ῥέεθρα, if I had known, &e. Id. 366. 

Nore 2. Sometimes ἄν is omitted in the apodosis, although 
the non-fulfilment of the condition is still implied. This merely 
gives a more emphatic expression, as when we say it had been 
for it would have been. The ἄν can be omitted only when the 





§ 49, 2.] APODOSIS WITHOUT “AN. 97 


context shows conclusively that the construction is not that of 

4] J C Py 
$4, 1. bg. 

Nai pa Δία ἠσχυνόμην μέντοι, εἰ ὑπὸ πολεμίου γε ὄντος ἐξηπα- 
τήθην, yes, by Zeus, I were indeed ashamed, if I had been deceived, 
&e. XEN. An. ᾿ II, 6, 21. Καλὸν ἦν αὐτῷ, εἰ οὐκ ἐγεννήθη ὁ ἄν- 
θρωπος ἐκεῖνος, it had been good for that man, if he had not been born. 
Matra. Evang. XXVI, 24. 

Compare Vere. Aen. XI, 115: Aequius huic Turnum fuerat se 
opponere morti, it had been more just, &c., where fuisset would have 
been the regular form. 


Ὕ " ἥ | δ ν Mn . . 
Nore 8. (α.) An apodosis without ἄν, but implying the 
non-fulfilment of a condition, is often formed by an Infinitive 
depending on the Imperfect of a verb denoting necessity, obli- 
gation, propriety, possibility, or the like. This combination 
merely expresses in other words what might have been ex- 
pressed by the verb of the Infinitive in a past tense of the 
. . 7 . Γ ΕΝ a 
Indicative with ἄν. Thus ἔδει σε τοῦτον φιλεῖν means you ought 
to love him (or ought to have loved him),— implying, but you do 
not love him (or did not love him),— and is equivalent to 
”~ * * 5) > , + 
τοῦτον ἂν ἐφίλεις, εἰ τὰ δέοντα ἐποίεις, you would love him (or 
would have loved him), if you did (or had done) what you 
> > ~ - 
ought. So εἰκὸς ἦν σε τοῦτο ποιῆσαι Means you would properly 
have done this (but you did not), being equivalent to εἰκότως 
rout ἂν ἐποίησας. 
rr . . . 
This construction occurs chiefly after the impersonal Imper- 
fects χρῆν or ἐχρῆν, ἔδει, ἐξῆν, ἐνῆν, προσῆκεν, εἰκὸς ἦν, ἥρμοττεν 
. oe ee : : 
(decebat), ἦν or ὑπῆρχεν (tt was possible), and ἦν with nouns and 
adjectives expressing necessity, propriety, ἕο. So when ἦν is 
used with the verbal in -τέον (equivalent to ἔδει with the Infini- 
tive). When the Present Infinitive is used, the construction 
refers to present time or to continued or repeated action in past 
time; when the Aorist Infinitive is used, it refers to a single or 
. . . © 
momentary action in past time. E. g. 
ϑ δ 8 ε [ὦ , > , e , oe 
Εἰ ἐπ᾽ ἡμέας μούνους ἐστρατηλάτεε ὁ Πέρσης, χρῆν αὐτὸν πάντων 
τῶν ἄλλων ἀπεχόμενον οὕτω ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὴν ἡμετέρην" καὶ ἂν ἐδήλου 
πᾶσι ὡς ἐπὶ Σκύθας ἐλαύνει, ὑ the Persian were making his expedition 
against us alone, he ought, letting alone all others, to be marching 
directly into our country ; and then he would show that he tas march- 
ing against Scythians. Hpt. IV, 118. Here χρῆν ἰέναι means he 
ou = τὰ marching into our country (like ἤιϊεν av), if he were loing what 
wool f ἔ ρ > ᾽ν νδν.ν > > = ' ᾿ ᾿ 
e expected under such circumstances,— implying that this 


5 G 





98 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 49, 2. 


condition is not fulfilled. (See below, Rem. 1.) Ἐχρῆν μὲν οὖ» 
καὶ δίκαιον ἦν τοὺς τὸν στέφανον οἰομένους δεῖν λαβεῖν αὑτοὺς ἀξίους 
ἐπιδεικνύναι τούτου, μὴ ἐμὲ κακῶς λέγειν" ἐπειδὴ δὲ τοῦτο παρεν- 
τες ἐκεῖνο ποιοῦσιν; κι τ. Δ.» i. 6. those who think they ought to receive the 
crown would (if they did what is right and just) be- showing that they 
deserve it themselves, and not be abusing me; but since now they have 
neglected the former and do the latter, Χο. ΕΜ. Cor. Trier. 1228, 
28. Ei γὰρ ὑπ᾽ ὀδόντος τοι εἶπε τελευτήσειν με, χρῆν δή σε ποιέειν 
τὰ ποιέεις" νῦν δὲ ὑπ᾽ αἰχμῆς, if he had said that I was to be killed by 
a tooth, then you would have to do as you now do. Hor. I, 39. a (See 
below, Rem. 1.) Ἔδει μὲν τοὺς λέγοντας ἅπαντας pyre πρὸς ἔχθραν 
ποιεῖσθαι λόγον μηδένα μήτε πρὸς χάριν, 1. 6. the speakers ought not 
to say a word out of regard either to enmity or to favor (and yet they 
do so). Dem. Chers. 90, 1. Πότερον αὐτὴν ἐ χρῆν ἐν τῇ Θετταλῶν 
καὶ Δολόπων τάξει συγκατακτᾶσθαι Φιλίππῳ τὴν τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
ἀρχήν; i. 6. ought she to have helped Philip acquire his dominion over 
the Greeks (sc. as she would have done by your policy) ? DEM. Cor. 
246,1. Ἐμὲ εἰ μὲν ἐν ἄλλαις τισὶν ἡμέραις NOikno€ τε τούτων ἰδιώτην 
ὄντα, ἰδίᾳ καὶ δίκην προσῆκεν αὐτῷ διδόναι; 1. 6. he would properly 
have given satisfaction by a private suit (as if he had said προσηκόντως 
ἰδίᾳ δίκην ἂν ἐδίδου). Dem. Mid. 525, 3. ς Καὶ πολλοῖς δόξω, ws οἱος 
τ᾽ dv σε σώζειν εἰ ἤθελον ἀναλίσκειν χρήματα, ἀμελῆσαι: Ἰ. 6. where- 
as I might have saved you, if I had been willing to spend money, &e 
Prat. Crit. 44 C. Οὐ yap ἐνῆν μὴ παρακρουσθέντων ὑμῶν μεῖναι 
Φιλίππῳ, for Philip could not have remained, unless you had been 
deceived (implying he did remain). DEM. F. L. 379, 2. (See § 52, 
1.) Καὶ μάλιστα εἰκὸς ἦν ὑμᾶς προορᾶσθαι αὐτὰ καὶ μὴ μαλακῶς, 
ὥσπερ νῦν, ξυμμαχεῖν. Tuuc. VI, 78. ( The orator adds, ἀλλ 
οὔθ᾽ ὑμεῖς νῦν γέ πω οὔθ᾽ οἱ ἄλλοι ἐπὶ ταῦτα ὥρμησθε.) Εἰ μὲν τοίνυν 
αἰσχρόν τι ἔμελλον ἐργάσεσθαι, θάνατον avr αὐτοῦ mpoatpe τέον ἣν 
(i. 8. προαιρεῖσθαι ἔδει). XEN. Mem. II, 7, 10. So in Latin : Quem 
patris loco, si ulla in te pietas esset, colere debebas. (τσ. Phil. I, 38. 


(ὁ) The Aorist and Imperfect of ὀφείλω (ferro) are 
sometimes used with the Infinitive like χρῆν, ἔδει, &c.; as in Il. 
1, 353, τιμήν πέρ por ὄφελλεν Ὀλύμπιος ἐγγυαλίξαι Ζεὺς ὑψιβρε- 
μέτης " νῦν δ᾽ οὐδέ με τυτθὸν ἔτισεν, i. 6. Zeus ought to have secured 
me honor; but now he has not honored me even a little. From 
this comes the common use of this form in expressions of a 
wish; as ὥφελε Κῦρος ζῆν, would that Cyrus were living (lit. 
Cyrus ought to be living). This is an apodosis, implying as a 
protasis if it were possible, or something similar. See ὃ 83, 2. 


(c.) Similar to this is the occasional use of ἐβουλόμην (with- 
out ἄν) to express what some one wishes were now true (but 
which zs not true). 


4 4 > , > - 
Ἐβουλόμην μὲν οὖν καὶ τὴν βουλὴν καὶ τὰς ἐκκλησίας ὀρθῶς 


§ 49, 2.] APODOSIS WITHOUT ΑΝ. 99 


διοικεῖσθαι καὶ τοὺς νόμους ἰσχύειν, would that both the Senate 
and the assemblies were rightly managed, and that the laws were in 
force (implying the opposite of ὀρθῶς διοικεῖσθαι and ἰσχύειν). 
This is analogous to ὥφελεν εἶναι, would that it were, and ἔδει εἶναι, 
wt ought to be (but is not). ΔΈΒοπιν. Cor. § 2. Ἐβουλόμην μὲν 
οὐκ ἐρίζειν ἐνθάδε, would that I were not contending here (as 1 am). 
ARIST. Ran. 866. See below, Rem. 2. 


(d.) Κινδυνεύω is used with the Infinitive, as a periphrasis 


for the verb of the Infinitive with ἄν. E. g. 


Ἡ πόλις ἐκινδύνευσε πᾶσα διαφθαρῆναι, εἰ ἄνεμος ἐπεγε- 
veto, the city was in danger of being utterly destroyed, if a wind had 
arisen. Tuuc. III, 74. Ei μὴ ἐξεφύγομεν εἰς Δελφοὺς, ἐκινδυνεύ- 
σαμεν ἀπολέσθαι, if we had not escaped to Delphi, we were in 
danger of perishing (or there was danger that we should perish) 
AESCHIN. Cor. § 123. (If the meaning had been that there would 
have been danger, we should have had ἐκινδυνεύσαμεν ἄν.) 


(e.) The Imperfect of μέλλω is sometimes used to express 
a past intention or likelihood which was not realized. E. g. 


Μέλλεν μέν ποτε οἶκος ὅδ᾽ ἀφνειὸς καὶ ἀμύμων ἔμμεναι" νῦν δ᾽ ἑτέ- 
pas ἐβόλοντο θεοί, this house was destined to be rich and faultless ; but now 
the Gods have willed it otherwise. Od. 1, 232. ᾿Αλλὰ τὰ μέν που μέλ- 
Aev ἀγάσσεσθαι θεὸς αὐτός, but even a God might have grudged us 
this (lit. was likely to grudge us this), if we had obtained it. Od. IV, 
181. So ἔφην in Od. IV, 171: Kai μιν ἔφην ἐλθόντα φιλήσεμεν 
ἔξοχον ἄλλων ᾿Αργείων, εἰ vow ὑπεὶρ ἅλα νόστον ἔδωκεν (Ζεύς), i. 6. 
[ intended to love him (had Zeus allowed us to return). See Dem. 
I’. L. 391,11: οὐ συστρατεύσειν ἔμελλον, they would not have joined 
him. Soin Latin: Hoe facturi erant, nisi venisset, they were intend- 
iny to do this (and would have done it), had he not come. 


REMARK 1. It will be seen that in the construction of Note 3 a 
protasis is implied with the apodosis; ἔδει σε τοῦτον φιλῆσαι being 
strictly equivalent to τοῦτον ἂν ἐφίλησας εἰ τὰ δέοντα ἐποίησας, you 
would have loved him, if you had done what you ought, or simply you 
should have loved him. (See § 52, 1.) This form therefore com- 
monly stands as an apodosis with no other protasis expressed; and 
even if another is added (as in the first example under a), the im- 
plied protasis always remains the prominent one. Especially, this 
implied protasis expresses the condition, the non-fulfilment of which 
prevents the action of the apodosis from taking place. The whole 
expression χρῆν τοῦτο ποιεῖν, &c. thus becomes the apodosis to the 
expressed protasis, if one is added. In the third example under a 
(Hor. I, 39), the real apodosis may be you would then do from 
necessity what you now do (implying that now you do not do it from 
necessity) ; or we may perhaps explain χρῆν better by Note 2. 

In this construction the Infinitive (of course modified by the lead- 
ing verb, as shown above) contains the main idea of the apodosis. 





100 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [8 49, 2. 


When the main idea is contained in the verb of necessity, &c., so 
that the non-fulfilment of the condition of the protasis affects this 
rather than the infinitive, we have χρῆν ἄν, ἔδει ἄν, προσῆκεν ἄν, &c., 
forming an ordinary apodosis (δ 49, 2). Thus εἰ ra δέοντα οὗτοι 
συνεβούλευσαν, οὐδὲν ἂν ὑμᾶς νῦν ἔδει βουλεύεσθαι, if these men haa 
given the necessary advice, there would now be no need of your deliber. 
ating, implies but now there is need of your deliberating. Occasion- 
ally both constructions can be used to express essentially the same 
apodosis: thus in Lys. in Erat. § 32, we find, χρῆν δέ σε, εἴπερ ἦσθα 
χρηστὸς, τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἀδίκως ἀποθανεῖσθαι μηνυτὴν γενέσθαι, τῇ 
you had been an honest man, you ought to have become an informer in 
behalf of those who were about to suffer death unjustly (implying but 
you did not do 80, οὐκ ἐγένου μηνυτής) ; but in § 48, referring to the 
same thing, the orator says, εἴπερ ἦν ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς, ἐχρῆν ἂν πρῶτον 
μὲν μὴ παρανόμως ἄρχειν, ἔπειτα τῇ βουλῇ μηνυτὴν γενέσθαι, k.T.Az, 
if he had been a good man, it would have been his duty, ἕο. (implying 
οὐκ ἐχρῆν). The latter construction, however, is very rare where 
the former would be admissible. 

The distinction between ἔδει σε τοῦτον φιλεῖν and ἔδει ἄν σε τοῦτον 
φιλεῖν would be expressed in Latin by te oportebat hune amare and 
te oporteret hunc amare. 


Remark 2. The greatest difficulty in understanding the forms 
explained in Note 3 is caused by the defect in the English verb 
ought, which makes it impossible to translate them accurately. 
Thus we translate οὐκ ἔδει σε τοῦτο ποιῆσαι (or ποιεῖν), non oportuit 
te hoc facere, you ought not to have done this, expressing the past 
time by the tense of the Infinitive, which we should express by the 
past tense of ought if there were one. (You oughted not to do this 
would represent the Greek and Latin idiom. The vulgar ex- 
pression you had n’t ought comes very near it.) 

A further trouble appears when such phrases as οὐκ ἔδει σε τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν refer to present time, meaning you ought not to be doing this 
(as you are). The Imperfect here refers to present time, as it does 
in the ordinary construction of § 49, 2. The Latin has the same 
idiom, non oportebat te hoc facere. But in English, owing to the 
defect in the verb ought, we are obliged to use the simple present; 
so that we cannot distinguish in translation between ἔδει σε φιλεῖν, 
oportebat te amare, and δεῖ σε φιλεῖν, oportet te amare, — both be- 
ing expressed by you ought to love, although the former implies but 
you do not love, while the latter implies no condition. 

It needs perhaps to be added, that the tenses of the infinitive here 
express no time of themselves, but are used in the ordinary con- 
structions of § 15, 1, and § 23, 1. The equivalent Latin forms 
(facere representing both ποιεῖν and ποιῆσαι) will make this clear. 


Remark 3. It must not be understood that the Imperfects ἐχρῆν 
ἔδει, &c. with the Infinitive are always used in the construction of 
Note 3. Thus ἔδει δὲ μένειν, in Dem. F. L. 379, 14, means simply 
but he was obliged to remain (and did remain). 


§ 49, 2.] SECONDARY TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 101 


: > {2 In Il. XXIII, 526 κέ is used with a secondary 

ense of the Indicative in protasis, apparently adding nothing to the 
16 Indic asis, appé δ othing 

sense. (See ὃ 50, 2. N. 2, ὁ.) ὧν ᾿ ‘3 a 


> , >» ’ / 4 
Ei δέ k ἐτι προτέρω γένετο δρόμος ἀμφοτέροισιν, 
, > »Ὸἤ , ΕΝ 
Τῷ κέν μιν παρέλασσ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἀμφήριστον ἔθηκεν. 


ἂν τὸ i . eae 
᾿ (ὁ.) When ἄν stands in the protasis with a secondary tense of the 
— > έ . Ὺ Ὁ . . . 4 - 
ndicative in Attic Greek, the expression is so obviously an apodosis 
τς the ae time, as to present no difficulty. ”Avy can never coa- 
esce wit ( ‘av 1 Ces, as 1 ' 
ι 1 εἰ to form ἐάν in these sentences, as it always belongs ta 
the verb. E. g. : 2 


ee ᾿ 

Et τοίνυν τοῦτο ἰσχυρὸν ἦ ν ἂν τούτῳ τεκμήριον, κἀμοὶ γενέσθω τεκμή- 
ριον, k.T-X., Uf then this would have been a strong proof for him (sc. had 
he had it to bring forward), so let it be also a proof for me, &e. Dem. 

Timoth. 1201, 19. (This sentence properly belongs to the class of 
ὃ 49, 1; for the protasis really is if it is true that this would have been 
a proof, to which the apodosis in the Imperative corresponds.) In 
Dem. Cor. 260, 2, καὶ ris οὐκ ἂν ἀπέκτεινέ με δικαίως, εἴ τι τῶν ὑπαρ- 
χόντων τῇ πόλει καλῶν λόγῳ μόνον καταισχύνειν ἐπεχείρησ᾽ ἄν; --- 
if we retain the final ἄν (which is strongly supported by Mss. autho- 
rity), we must translate εἰ ἐπεχείρησ᾽ “ἄν if it is true that I would 
iweesier any circumstances) have undertaken, &c., and not simply if J 
δ _indertaken (εἰ ἐπεχείρησα). See § 50, 2, Note 2, a; and § 

+? 

Note 5. In some cases the Aorist is found in the apodosis refer- 
ring to present time, after a protasis in the Imperfect; it always 
denotes, however, a momentary or sudden occurrence or some other 
idea which the Imperfect would not express so well. Ἔ. g. 


Ei μὲν οὖν σύ pe ἠρώτας τι τῶν νῦν δὴ, εἶπον ἂν, κιτ.λ.; if then 
you were asking me any one of the questions before us, I should (at 
once) say, ὅς. Puiat. Euthyph. 12 ἢ. Ei ἐπεθύμεις ταύτης (τῆς 
σοφίας), καὶ ἐγώ σε ἐτύγχανον ἀνερωτῶν, et ἘΞ τί ἄν μοι ἀπε- 
κρίνω; Uf you desired this kind of wisdom, and I happened to be asking 
you, Sc. what should you reply? [Piat.] Theag. 123 B. See also 
Pat. Prot. 318 A; Gorg. 447 D; Symp. 199 D. 


Norte 6 (a ) Tr : . 

I a 6. (a. 1 avery few passages j - 

tative with af ti ὅδ © ben Ρ mag ς Homer we find the Op- 
ορραβεευβνσν ΔΙ sis referring to the past, where we should 
expect a secondary tense of the Indicative. E. 


g. 

Kai vu κεν ἐνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Αἰνείας, εἰ μὴ ἄρ᾽ ὀξὺ νόησε 
Διὸς θυγάτηρ ᾿Αφροδίτη, Aeneas would have perished, had not A phrodite 
quickly percewed him. Il. V, 311. Καί νύ κεν ἐνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο" Ἀρης 
τος πολέμοιο, εἰ μὴ ᾿Ηεριβοία Ἑρμέᾳ ἐξήγγειλεν. Il. V, 388. (in 
both these cases ἀπώλετο would be the regular form, in Homeric as 
well as in Attic Greek.) So Il. XVII, 70, ἔνθα κε φέροι 15 used 
for ἔνθα K ἔφερεν, he would have carried. So Il. V, 85, Τυδείδην δ᾽ 
οὐκ ἂν γνοίης ποτέροισι μετείη, you would not have known to which 
army he belonged: for the dependent Optative, see § 31, 3, Note. 





102 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 49, 2. 


(b.) The Imperfect Indicative is not used in Homer in the con- 
struction of § 49, 2 referring to present time. (See Note 1.) Ina 
few cases where the Attic Greek would use that form, we find the 
present Optative in Homer. E. gc. 


Ei μέν τις τὸν ὄνειρον ᾿Αχαιῶν ἄλλος ἔνισπε, ψεῦδός κεν φαῖμεν, 
καὶ νοσφιζοίμεθα μᾶλλον, i. 6. if any other one had told it, we 
should call it a falsehood, and should rather turn away from it. Tl. II, 
80. In Il. XXIII, 274, we find the Optative in both protasis and 
apodosis, where the Attic Greek would use the Imperfect Indiéa- 
tive: εἰ νῦν emi ἄλλῳ ἀθλεύοιμεν, ἦ τ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ τὰ πρῶτα λαβὼν 
κλισίηνδε φεροίμην, i. 6. if we were now contending in honor of 
another (than Patroclus), I should take the first prize and bear it to m y 
tent. The present Optative in Homer is used also in its regular 
sense, referring to the Future (See § 50, 2.) The constructions 
included in this note seem to be arelic of an ancient use of the 
Optative in conditional sentences like that of the secondary tenses 
of the Latin Subjunctive. (See Appendix I.) For the similar 
Homeric use of the Present Optative in expressions of a wish, see 
§ 82, Rem. 2. 


B. Future Conditions. 


$00. 1. When a supposed future case is stated dis- 
tinctly and vividly (as in English, ¢f I shall go), the 
protasis takes the Subjunctive with ἐάν, av (ἃ), or ἤν 
(Epic εἴ κε or αἴ κε). 

The apodosis denotes what will be the result, if the 
condition of the Protasis shall be fulfilled. It therefore 
takes the Future Indicative, or some other future form, 
like the Imperative. E. g. 


Ἐάν τι λάβω, δώσω σοι, if 1 (shall) receive anything, I will give it to 
you. Ἔν τι λάβῃς, δός μοι, if you receive anything, give it tome. Ei δέ 
κεν ὡς EpEns καί τοι πείθωνται Ayal, γνώσῃ ἔπειθ᾽ ὅς θ᾽ ἡγεμόνων 
κακὸς ὅς τέ νυ λαῶν, but if you shall do thus and the Achaeans obey 
you, you will then learn both which of the leaders and which of the 
soldiers ts bad. 1]. II, 364. (For εἴ xe see § 47, 2.) Αἴ κ᾽ αὐτὸν 
γνώω νημερτέα πάντ᾽ ἐνέποντα, ἕσσω μιν χλαῖνάν τε χιτῶνά τε, εἵματα 
καλά. Od. XVII, 549. So αἴ κε δῶσι, Il. I, 128. (See § 47, 1, 
Note.) Ei μέν κεν Μενέλαον ᾿Αλέξανδρος καταπέφνῃ,, αὐτὸς ἔπειθ᾽ 
Ελενην ἐχέτω καὶ κτήματα πάντα, ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἐν νήεσσι νεώμεθα πον- 
τοπόροισιν. εἰ δέ κ᾿ ᾿Αλέξανδρον κτείνῃ ξανθὸς Μενέλαος, Τρώας ἔπειθ' 
Ελένην καὶ κτήματα πάντ᾽ ἀποδοῦναι. Il. Ill, 281. Here ἐχέτω, 
νεώμεθα (Subj. in exhortation), and ἀποδοῦναι (Infin. for Impera- 
tive) are in the apodosis. Αἴ κα τῆνος ἕλῃ κεραὸν τράγον, αἶγα τὺ 
λαψῇ-. ΤΉκοσ. I, 4. *Av δέ τις ἀνθιστῆται, σὶν ὑμῖν πειρα- 


8 ὅ0,1.} SUBJUNCTIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE. 103 


σόμεθα χειροῦσθαι, if any one shall stand opposed to us, we will try 
to overcome him. XEN. An. VII, 3,11. *Av μὴ viv ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ 
πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ᾽ ἴσως ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν, if we 
Shall not now be willing to fight him there, we shall perhaps be forced to 
do so here. Dem. Phil. I, 54, 20. Here viv refers to time immedi- 
ately following the present: if Dem. had meant if we are not now 
willing, he would have said εἰ μὴ viv ἐθέλομεν (§ 49, 1). Ἢν 
yap ταῦτα καλῶς ὁρισώμεθα, ἄμεινον βουλευσόμεθα καὶ περὶ τῶν 
ἄλλων. Isoc. Pac. p. 162 D.§ 18. Ἣν δὲ τὴν εἰρήνην ποιησώμεθα, 
καὶ τοιούτους ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς παράσχωμεν, μετὰ πολλῆς ἀσφαλείας τὴν 
πόλιν οἰκήσομεν. Ib. p. 163 A. ὃ 20. ᾿Εὰν οὖν ins νῦν, πότε ἔσει 


. οἴκοι; XEN. Cyr. V, 3, 27. Καὶ χρῶ αὐτοῖς, ἐὰν ὃ ἔῃ τι, and use 


them, if there shall be any need. 10. V, 4, 30. Ἢν μὲν πόλεμον 
αἱρῆσθε, μηκέτι ἥκετε δεῦρο ἄνευ ὅπλων, εἰ σωφρονεῖτε" ἣν δὲ 
εἰρήνης δοκῆτε δεῖσθαι, ἄνευ ὅπλων ἥκετε᾽ ὡς δὲ καλῶς ἕξει τὰ 
ὑμέτερα, ἣν φίλοι γένησθε, ἐμοὶ μελήσει. Ib. III, 2, 18. ᾿Εὰν 
γάρ τί σε φανῶ κακὸν πεποιηκὼς, ὁμολογῶ ἀδικεῖν" ἐὰν μέντοι μηδὲν 
φαίνωμαι κακὸν πεποιηκὼς μηδὲ βουληθεὶς, οὐ καὶ σὺ αὖ ὁμολογή- 
σεις μηδὲν ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀδικεῖσθαι; Ib. V, ὅ, 18. (Here ὁμολογῶ must 
be understood as referring to the future, like ὁμολογήσεις. ὃ 10, 1, 
N. 7.) Ἐὰν μὴ ἢ οἱ φιλόσοφοι βασιλεύσωσιν ἣ οἱ βασιλῆς φιλο- 
σοφήσωσιν, οὐκ ἔστι κακῶν παῦλα ταῖς πόλεσιν, unless either the 
philesophers shall become kings or the kings philosophers, there is no 
escape from troubles for states. PLAT. Rep. V,473 ἢ. Δίδωσ᾽ ἑκὼν 
κτείνειν ἑαυτὸν, ἢν rade ψευσ θῇ λέγων. SopH. Phil. 1342. ᾿Εὰν 
μὴ ἡμῖν βεβοηθηκότες ὦσιν, ov δεῖ ἡμᾶς αὐτοῖς βοηθεῖν, if they 
shall not have assisted us, there is no need of our assisting them. "Ἤν 
ge τοῦ λοιποῦ mor ἀφέλωμαι χρόνου, κάκιστ᾽ ἀπολοίμην, i. e. 
may I perish, if I ever take you again. Arist. ἤδη. ὅ86. (See 884,1.) 


REMARK 1. It will be seen that the apodosis in this construction 
may take any form of the verb that refers to the future,—the 
Future Indicative, the Imperative, the Subjunctive in exhortations 
and prohibitions, the Infinitive in any future sense, or the Optative 
in wishes. It may also contain a Present Indicative including a 
reference to the future (like χρή or det) or a Present merely used 
emphatically for the Future, like ὁμολογῶ above quoted from XEN. 
Cyr. V, 5. 13, or παῦλά ἐστι from PLAT. Rep. 473 ἢ). 


ReMARK 2. The English (especially the colloquial language) 
seldom expresses the important distinction between this form of 
protasis and that of § 49, 1. Thus modern usage allows us to use 
the inexact expression if he wishes, not merely for εἰ βούλεται (if he 
now wishes), but alse for ἐὰν βούληται (if he shall wish). The sense, 
however, generally makes the distinction clear. 


Note 1. The Future Indicative with εἰ is very often used 
in the protasis in the same sense as the Subjunctive with ἐάν, 
sometimes alternating with it in the same sentence. This is 





Plat Lae δα ee ENB = ge 


CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [8 50, 1. 


merely a more vivid form of expression than the Subjunctive, 
both corresponding to the English if J shall do this, ke. E. g. 


Ei yap ᾿Αχιλλεὺς οἷος ἐπὶ Τρώεσσι μαχεῖται, οὐδὲ μίνυνθ᾽ ξξουσι 
ποδώκεα Πηλείωνα, if Achilles shall fight, &e. Tl. XX, 206. Ei δὲ σύ γ 
ἐς πόλεμον πωλήσεαι, ἢἦ τέ σ᾽ ὀΐω ῥιγήσειν πόλεμόν γε, καὶ εἴ χ᾽ ἐτέ- 

͵ Υ Or > ‘ ‘ ΄ oy , 4 
poh πύθηαι. Il. V, 350. Ei δὲ πρὸς τούτοισι ἔτι τελευτήσει τὸν 

, ε > «A - - / “ ” , > al 
βίον ev, οὗτος ἐκεῖνος τὸν σὺ ζητεῖς ὄλβιος κεκλῆσθαι ἄξιός ἐστι. Hp. 
Ι, 82, (See Rem. 1.) Εἰ μὴ καθέξεις γλῶσσαν, ἔσται σοι κακά. 
Eur. Aeg. Frag. ὅ. Εἰ δὲ μὴ τοῦτ᾽ ἐπιδείξει, πῶς χρὴ ταύτῃ τῇ 
προκλήσει προσέχειν ὑμᾶς τὸν νοῦν; Dem. Aph. I. 829, 28. Εἰ δ᾽ ὑμεῖς 
ἄλλο τι γνώσεσθε, ὃ μὴ γένοιτο, τίνα οἴεσθε αὐτὴν ψυχὴν ἕξειν; 
Dem. Aph. II, 842, 15. (Referring to the same thing, p. 834, 24, 
Demosthenes had said ἂν yap ἀποφύγῃ pe οὗτος, ὃ μὴ γένοιτο, τὴν 
> Ζ ’ 5 , “a > , > , ξ ‘ “-- Γ , 
ἐπωβελίαν ὀφλήσω.) “Hv ἐθέλωμεν ἀποθνήσκειν ὑπὲρ τῶν δικαίων, 
εὐδοκιμήσομεν" εἰ δὲ φοβησόμεθα τοὺς κινδύνους, εἰς πολλὰς ταρα- 
χὰς καταστήσομεν ὑμᾶς αὐτούς. 500. Archid. p. 138 A. § 107. 

This use of the Future must not be confounded with its less com- 
mon use in present conditions, § 49, 1, N. 3, where it is not equiva- 
lent to the Subjunctive. 


Note 2. In the Homeric language the following peculiari- 
ties appear in this construction : — 

(a.) The Subjunctive with κέ is sometimes used in the 
apodosis instead of the Future Indicative, thus making the 
apodosis correspond in form to the protasis. E. ¢. 


Ei δέ xe μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, and if he do not 
give her up, I will take her myself. Tl. I, 324. (Compare I, 137.) 
This gives a form of sentence analogous to that in which the 
Optative is used in both protasis and apodosis. See § 87, Note. 
(For the use of δέ in apodosis, see below, § 57.) 


(0.) Ἤν is the only contraction of εἰ ἄν found in Homer. 
The most common Homeric form is, however, εἴ xe (sometimes 
εἰ δέ κε). Ei dy is rarely found, as II. III, 288. 


(c.) Ei xe or ai xe is sometimes found even with the Future 
Indicative in Homer. E. g. 

Al κεν ἄνευ ἐμέθεν... . Ἰλίου πεφιδήσεται, οὐδ᾽ ἐθελήσε 
ἐκπέρσαι, ἴστω τοῦτο. Il. XV, 213. 

For κέ (and even ἄν) with the Future in apodosis, see § 87, 2. 

(d.) The simple εἰ (without ἄν or κέ) is often used with the 
Subjunctive in Homer, apparently in the same sense as εἴ κε oF 
the Attic ἐάν. E. g. 

Ei δ᾽ αὖ τις ῥαίῃσι θεῶν ἐνὶ οἴνοπι πόντῳ, τλήσομαι ἐν στήθεσσιν 
ἔχων ταλαπενθέα θυμόν. Od. V, 221. Οὐδὲ πόλινδε ἔρχομαι, εἰ μή 
πού τι περίφρων Πηνελόπεια ἐλθέμεν ὀτρύνῃσιν. Od. XIV, 372. 





ὃ ὅ0, 2.7 ΟΡΤΑΤΙΥ͂Ε IN PROTASIS AND APODOSIS. 105 


Norte 3. (a.) The Homeric use of the simple εἰ with the 
Subjunctive continues in lyric poetry, and is found in the 
chorus of the Attic drama, and even in some passages of the 
ordinary dialogue. E. g. 


Ei γὰρ θάνῃρ καὶ τελευτήσας ἀφῇς. Sopu. Aj. 496. Avorddawa 
τἄρ᾽ ἐγὼ, εἴ σου στερη θῶ. Sopu. O. C. 1442. Ei μή σ᾽ ἐκφάγω 
ἐκ τῆσδε τῆς γῆς, οὐδέποτε βιώσομαι. ARIST. Eq. 698. Εἴ τις εὖ 
πάσχων λόγον ἐσλὸν ἀκούσῃ. ῬΙΝΡ. Isth. IV, 16. 


(6.) In Attic prose, this construction is extremely rare, and its 
existence is denied by many high authorities; if we follow the Mss., 
however, we must admit it in a few passages, as Tuuc. VI, 21: Οὐ 
ναυτικῆς στρατιᾶς μόνον δεῖ, ἀλλὰ καὶ πεζὸν πολὺν ξυμπλεῖν, ἄλλως τε 
καὶ εἰ ξυστῶσιν αἱ πόλεις φοβηθεῖσαι. (Here only a few of the 
worst Mss. read ἤν for εἰ.) 


Note 4. For the change from the Subjunctive to the Optative 
after secondary tenses in indirect discourse, see § 74, 1. 


2. When a supposed future case is stated less dis- 
tinctly and vividly than it would be stated by the Sub- 
junctive (as in English, if I should go), the protasis 
takes the Optative with εἰ. 

The apodosis here denotes what would be the result if 
the condition of the protasis should be fulfilled, and 
takes the Optative with av. E. g. 


Ei ἔλθοι, πάντ᾽ ἂν ἴδοι, if he should go, he would seeall. Kio 
οὕτως ἐθέλοι φιλέειν κήδοιτό τε θυμῷ, τῷ κέν τις κείνων γε καὶ 
ἐκλελάθοιτο γάμοιο, if she should be willing thus to love you, &c 
Od. Ill, 223. Ἦ κεν γηθήσαι Πρίαμος Πριάμοιό τε παῖδες. ἄλλοι 
τε Τρῶες μέγα κεν κεχαροίατο θυμῷ, εἰ σφῶιν τάδε πάντα πυθοίατο 
μαρναμένοιιν. Il. I, 255. (See § 47,2.) ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἴ μοί τι πίθοιο, τό 
κεν πολὺ κέρδιον εἴη. Il. ὙΠ, 28, Eins φορητὸς οὐκ ἂν, εἰ πράσ- 
gots καλῶς. AESCH. Prom. 979. Εἰ δέ τις τοὺς κρατοῦντας τοῦ 
πλήθους ἐπ᾽ ἀρετὴν προτρέψειεν, ἀμφοτέρους ἂν ὀνήσειε. Isoc. 
ad Nicocl. p. 16 C. 8 8. Εἴ τις τῶν σοι συνόντων ἐπαρθείη ποιεῖν 
ἃ σὺ τυγχάνεις εὐλογῶν, πῶς οὐκ ἂν ἀθλιώτατος εἴη; Isoc. Busir. p. 
280 C. ὃ 47. Οὐδὲ γὰρ ἂν Μήδοκός pe ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐπαινοίη, εἰ 
ἐξελαύνοιμι τοὺς εὐεργέτας. XEN. An. VII, 7,11. Εἰ μὴ δυνατὸν 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν εἴη σωθῆναι, ἀποκτείναιμ᾽ ἂν ἐμαυτόν. Dem. Enbul. 
1820, 25. Οὐδ᾽ εἰ πάντες ἔλθοιεν Πέρσαι, πλήθει γε οὐχ ὑπερβα- 
λοίμεθ᾽ ἂν τοὺς πολεμίους. XEN. Cyr. II, 1, 8. Οὐ πολλὴ ἂν 
ἀλογία εἴη, εἰ φοβοῖτο τὸν θάνατον ὁ τοιοῦτος; PLAT. Phaed. 68 
B. Oikos δ᾽ αὐτὸς, εἰ φθογγὴν λάβοι, σαφέστατ᾽ ἂν λέξειεν. 
ἈΈΒΟΗ. Ag. 87. Πῶς οὖν οὖκ ἂν οἰκτρότατα πάντων ἐγὼ πεπονθὼ : 


δᾺ 








CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


εἴην, εἰ ἐμὲ ψηφίσαιντο εἶναι ξένον; how then should I not have 
suffered (lit. be in the condition of having suffered) the most pitiable of 
all things, if they should vote me a foreigner? Dem. Eubul. 1312, 17. 
(See § 18, 1, and examples of the Perfect Optative there quoted.) 


ReMARK. (a.) This form of the conditional sentence must be 
especially distinguished from that of § 49, 2; the more so, as we often 
translate both εἴη ἄν and ἦν ἄν by the same English expression, it 
would be; although the latter implies that the supposition of the 
protasis is a false one, while the former implies no opinion of the 
speaker as to the truth of the supposition. 


(6.) On the other hand, the distinction beween this form and that 
of § 50, 1 is less marked, and it is often of slight importance which 
of the two is used in a particular case. Thus it is often nearly in- 
different in English whether we say if we shall go (or if we go), it 
will be well, or if we should go, it would be well ; in Greek, the former 
Is ἐὰν ἔλθωμεν, καλῶς ἕξει, and the latter is εἰ ἔλθοιμεν, καλῶς ἂν 
ἔχοι. (See § 48,1, B, Rem. 2.) In writing Greek, this distinction 
can generally be made, by first observing the form of the apodosis 
in English ; if that is expressed by would, it should be translated by 
the Greek Optative with dv; if it is expressed by will, it should be 
translated by the Future Indicative. (Other forms of the apodosis, 
as the Imperative, will present no difficulty.) The form to be used 
in the protasis will then appear from the rules for dependence of 
Moods (§ 32 and § 34); the Optative will require another Optative 
with εἰ in the dependent protasis (i. 6. the form of § 50, 2, εἰ ἔλθοι- 
μεν, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι); while the future Indicative or any other 
primary form will require a Subjunctive with ἐών, or a Future Indi- 
cative with εἰ (i. 6. the form of § 50,1, ἐὰν ἔλθωμεν, καλῶς ἕξει, 
or εἰ ἐλευσόμεθα, καλῶς ἕξει). 

In indirect discourse we often find an Optative in protasis, which 
merely represents the same tense of the Subjunctive or Indicative 
in the direct discourse. See ὃ 69,1; § 74,1; and § 77. 


Norte 1. Cases of the omission of ἄν in an apodosis of this class 
are rare; they occur chiefly in Homer, less frequently in the Attic 
poets (even then chiefly in questions, and after such expressions as 
οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως), and seldom or never in Attic prose where the text 
is beyond suspicion on other grounds. E. g. 

‘O δὲ χερμάδιον λάβε χειρὶ Τυδείδης, μέγα ἔργον, ὃ ov δύο γ᾽ ἄνδρε 
φέροιεν, which two men could not lift (of they should try). Il. V, 
303. (See ὃ 52, 2.) Τέαν, Zed, δύνασιν τίς ἀνδρῶν ὑπερβασία kara - 
σχοι; SopH. Ant. 605. ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὑπέρτολμον ἀνδρὸς φρόνημα ris 
λέγοι; ΑΕΒΟΗ. Choeph. ὅ94. “Eor’ οὖν ὅπως ΓΑλκηστις ἐς γῆρας 
μόλοι; Eur. Ale. 52. - Οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως λέξαιμι τὰ ψευδῆ καλά. 
ἈΈΒΟΗ. Ag. 620. Οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ᾽ ἣ σοί. 
ἈΈΒΟΗ. Prom. 292. Πῶς οὖν τάδ᾽, ὡς εἴποι τις, ἐξημάρτανες ; i. 6. 
as one might say. Eur. Andr. 929. “Ὥσπερ εἴποι τις τόπος, as one 
would say romos.(?) Arist. Av. 180. 





§ 51.] “AN IN PROTASIS. 107 


Nore 2. (a.) The adverb ἄν is sometimes used with the Opta- 
tive in the protasis, but only when the protasis is itself at the same 
time an apodosis, with another protasis expressed or implied. This 
is, of course, no exception to the general rule (§ 39); and it is to be 
noticed that the ἄν in this case always belongs strictly to the verb, 
and never joins the εἰ to form ἐάν. E. g. 

Οὔτοι παντελῶς, οὐδ᾽ εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιτ᾽ ἂν τοῦτο, εὐκαταφρόνητόν 
ἐστιν, tt is not wholly to be despised, even if you would not do this (if 
an opportunity should occur). Dem. Phil. I, 44, 30. Kai ἐγὼ, εἴπερ 
ἄλλῳ τῳ ἀνθρώπων πειθοίμην ἂν, καὶ σοὶ πείθομαι, if 1 would trust 
any other man (if he should give me his word), I trust you. ῬῚΑΥ. 
Prot. 329 B. Et ye μηδὲ δοῦλον axparn δεξαίμεθ᾽ ἂν, πῶς οὐκ 
ἄξιον αὐτόν ye φυλάξασθαι τοιοῦτον γενέσθαι; if we would not take 
even a slave who was intemperate (sc. if one should be offered), &c. 
XEN. Mem. I, 5, 3. (Such conditional sentences as the three pre- 
ceding belong properly under § 49, 1. Compare the last example 
under ὃ 54, Rem.) See ὃ 49, 2, N. 4, ὃ. 

So occasionally in Homer; as Il. V, 273, εἰ τούτω κε λάβοιμεν; 
ἀροίμεθά κε κλέος ἐσθλόν, if we could (in any case) obtain these, we 
should gain great glory; and Il. I, 60, Εἴ κεν θάνατόν ye puyowper, if 
we would escape death (where εἰ θάνατον φύγοιμεν Would mean if we 
should ever escape death). 


(b.) Commonly, however, when εἴ κε occurs in Homer, κέ belongs 
to the ei, and no force of an apodosis is perceptible. Here, as in 
final clauses (§ 44, 1, N. 3, a), the κέ adds nothing to the sense that 
can be expressed in English. E. g. 

Πῶς ἂν ἐγὼ δέοιμι μετ᾽ ἀθανάτοισι θεοῖσιν, εἴ κεν “Apns οἴχοιτο 
χρέος καὶ δεσμὸν ἀλύξας. Od. VIII, 352. Τῶν κέν τοι χαρίσαιτο 
πατὴρ ἀπερείσι᾽ ἄποινα, εἴ κεν ἐμὲ ζωὸν πεπύθοιτ᾽ ἐπὶ νηυσὶν 
᾿Αχαιῶν. Ll. VI, 49. 

But if the κέ is separated from the εἰ (except by μέν, δέ, τέ, γάρ, 
&c.), or if the sense shows clearly that it belongs to the verb, it is 
the sign of an apodosis, as in the Homeric examples under (α). 
See § 49, 2, N. 4, a. 


Note 3. It follows from § 26, that the Future Optative cannot 
be used in protasis or apodosis, except in indirect discourse to rep- 
resent a Future Indicative of the direct discourse. 


Nore 4. For arare Homeric use of the Optative for the Imper- 
fect or Aorist Indicative, see § 49, 2, N. 6. 


II. Present and Past General Suppositions. 


8 $i. A present or past supposition is said to be 
general, when the protasis refers indefinitely to any one 
of a series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or 

















ee ee 


108 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


a definite series of acts. The apodosis must express a 
customary or repeated action or a general truth. 

Here the protasis takes the Subjunctive with éap 

5 . 5 
after primary tenses, and the Optative with εἰ after 
secondary tenses. The apodosis may take the Present 
or Imperfect Indicative, or any other form which im- 
plies repetition. E. g. 

"Hy ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται, σοὶ τὸ γέρας πολὺ μεῖζον (sc. ἐστίν), if 
ever a division comes, your prize is always much greater. Il. I, 166. 
"Hy ἐγγὺς ἔλθῃ θάνατος, οὐδεὶς βούλεται θνήσκειν, if (or when) death 
comes near, no one 18 (ever) willing to die. Eur. Ale. 671. ᾿ Απας 
λόγος, ἂν ἀπῇ τὰ πράγματα, μάταιόν τι Φαίνεται καὶ κενόν, all speech, 
if deeds are wanting, appears mere emptiness and vanity. Dem. Ol. 
II, 21, 20. Διατελεῖ μισῶν, οὐκ ἢν Tis TL αὐτὸν ἀδικῇ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐάν τινα 
ὑποπτεύσῃ βελτίονα ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι, he continues to hate, not if any 
one wrongs him, but if he ever suspects that any one is better than him- 
self. XEN. Cyr. V, 4, 35. Εὐλαβοῦ τὰς διαβολὰς, κἂν ψευδεῖς ὦσιν, 
beware of slanders, even when they are false. Isoc. Demon. p. 5 
C. § 17. 

Εἰ δέ τινας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο, τὸ αἴτιον τούτου σκοπῶν 
κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο, whenever he saw any making a 
disturbance, he always tried, &e. XEN. Cyr. V, 3,55. Οὐκ ἀπελεί- 
πετὸ ἔτι αὐτοῦ, εἰ μή τι ἀναγκαῖον εἴη, he never left him, unless there 
was some necessity for it. XEN. Mem. IV, 2,40. Et τις ἀντείποι, 
εὐθὺς τεθνήκει, if any one refused, he was immediately put to death. 
Tuuc. VIL, 66. "Hy τοῖς μὲν ὀφθαλμοῖς ἐπικούρημα τῆς χιόνος, εἴ τις 
μέλαν τι ἔχων πρὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν πορεύοιτο, τῶν δὲ ποδῶν εἴ τις 
κινοῖτο. XEN. An. IV. ὅ, 18. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἴ τι μὴ φέροιμεν, ὥτρυνεν 
φέρειν. Eur. Ale. 755. Ἐπειδὴ δὲ εἶδον αὐτὸν τάχιστα, συλλαβόντες 
ἄγουσιν ἄντικρυς ὡς ἀποκτενοῦντες, οὗπερ καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἀπέσφαττον, 
εἴ τινα λῃστὴν i) κακοῦργον συλλάβοιεν, i. 6. where they had been 
in the habit of killing any others whom they took. Lys. Agor. p. 
137, § 78. 

The QOptative in these examples, referring to past time, must 
be especially distinguished from the Optative in ordinary protasis 
(δ 50, 2), referring to the future. Ei and ἐάν in this construction are 
almost equivalent to ὅτε or ὅταν (which are the more common ex- 
pressions), and the protasis has precisely the same construction as 
the relative sentences of § 62. 

The Present and Aorist Subjunctive and Optative here do not 
differ except as explained in Remark before § 12. 


Remark. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and 
tterative tenses of § 30, can be used in the apodosis of these 
general propositions. The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is con- 


sidered a primary tense (§ 32,2). E. g. 











§ 51.] GENERAL 8UPPOSITIONS 109 


Ἢν σφαλῶσιν,. ἀντελπίσαντες ἄλλα ἐπλήρωσαν τὴν χρείαν, 
if they fail, they aiways supply the deficiency, &e. Tuuc.I, 70. Ἣν 
δέ τις τούτων τι παραβαίνῃ, ζημίαν αὐτοῖς ἐπέθεσαν, they 
(always) impose a penalty upon every one who transgresses. XEN. 
Cyr. I, 2, 2. Εἴ τινες ἴδοιέν πῃ τοὺς σφετέρους ἐπικρατοῦντας, 
ἀνεθάρσησαν ἄν, whenever any saw their friends in any way 
victorious, they would be encouraged (i. e. they were encouraged in all 
such cases). ‘Tnuc. VII, 71. (See § 30, 2, and Xen. Mem. IV, 6, 
13, there quoted.) 


Note 1. The Optative in this construction is not found in 
Homer, although it is very common in the equivalent relative sen- 
tences (§ 62). 


Norte 2. Here, as in ordinary protasis, the poets sometimes use 
the simple εἰ with the Subjunctive instead of ἐάν. (See § 50, 1, N. 
3.) E. g. 


Εἴπερ γάρ τε χόλον ye καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψη, 
᾿Αλλά γε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον, ὄφρα τελέσσῃ. Il. I, 81. 
Εἰ δὲ φύγῃ μὲν κῆρα τανηλεγέος θανάτοιο, 

Νικήσας δ᾽ αἰχμῆς ἀγλαὸν εὖχος ἔλῃ, 
Πάντες μιν τιμῶσιν ὁμῶς νέοι ἠδὲ παλαιοὶ, 

Πολλὰ δὲ τερπνὰ παθὼν ἔρχεται εἰς ᾿Αίδην. Tyrt. XII, 35. 
᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄνδρα, κεἴ τις ἦ σοφὸς, τὸ μανθάνειν 
Πόλλ᾽ αἰσχρὸν οὐδὲν καὶ τὸ μὴ τείνειν ἄγαν. Sopu. Ant. 710. 


Note 3. The Indicative is sometimes found in the place 
of the Subjunctive or Optative in a general protasis of this 
kind. Here the speaker merely refers to one of the many 
cases in which the event may occur, as if it were the only 
case, — that is, he states the supposition as if it were particular, 
and not general. E. g. 

Εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται, μάταιός ἐστιν, if 
any one counts upon two or even more days, he is a fool. Sopu. Trach. 
944. ᾿Ελευθέρως πολιτεύομεν, ov δι’ ὀργῆς τὸν πέλας, εἰ καθ᾽ ἡδονήν τι 
δρᾷ, ἔχοντες, i. 6. not (having a habit of) being angry with our neigh- 
bor, if he acts in any case as he pleases. Tuuc. II, 37. (Here the 
Indicative δρᾷ is used as if some particular act of some one neighbor, 
and not any act of any neighbor, were in the speaker’s mind.) Εἴ 
τίς τι ἐπηρώτα, ἀπεκρίνοντο, if any one asked anything, they replied (to 
all such). Tuc. VII, 10. Ἐμίσει οὐκ εἴ ris κακῶς πάσχων ἡμύνε- 
το, ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τις εὐεργετούμενος ἀχάριστος φαίνοιτο. XEN. Ages. 
XI, 3. (Here, without any apparent reason, the writer changes 
from the Indicative to the Optative.) See § 62, N. 1. 

This use of the Indicative is exceptional in Greek, but it is the 
regular construction in Latin and English. See § 48, II. Rem. 2. 





110 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [8 52, 1. 


Ellipsis and Substitution in Protasis or Apodosis. 


$32. 1. Very often the protasis is not expressed 
in its regular form with εἰ or ἐάν, but is either emplied 
in something that precedes or follows, or expressed in 
a participle, a preposition with its case, an adverb like 
οὕτως; or some other part of the sentence. 

When a participle takes the place of a protasis, it is 
always in the same tense in which the finite verb which 
it represents would itself have stood after εἰ or ἐάν, in 
the Indicative, Subjunctive, or Optative. (See § 109, 
6.) The Present participle stands for both Present and 
Imperfect, and the Perfect for both Perfect and Pluper- 
fect. (See § 16,2; §18,3,Rem.) E.g¢ 


7 
© 


Οὔτε ἐσθίουσι πλείω ἣ δύνανται φέρειν, διαρραγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν" οὔτ᾽ 
ἀμφιέννυνται πλείω ἢ δύνανται φέρειν, ἀποπνιγεῖεν γὰρ ἄν, they do 
not eat more than. they can bear, Jor (if they Should) they would burst, 
&e. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 2, 21. Αὐτοὶ ἂν ἐπορεύθησαν ἡ οἱ ἄλλοι" τὰ 
δ᾽ ὑποζύγια οὐκ ἦν ἄλλῃ ἢ ταύτῃ ἐκβῆναι, they would have gone them- 
selves where the others went ; but the animals could not go otherwise 
nt τ τῳ did. XEN. An. IV, 2,10. 80 ἢ yap ἂν λωβήσαιο, 

Τοῦτο ποιοῦντες εὖ πράξουσιν (i. 6. ἐὰν ποιῶσιν), if they shall do 
this (habitually), they will prosper. Τοῦτο ποιήσαντες εὖ πράξουσιν 
(. 6. ἐὰν ποιήσωσιν), if they shall (once) do this, they will prosper. 
Touro ποιοῦντες εὖ ἂν πράττοιεν (i. 6. εἰ ποιοῖεν), if they should do 
this (habitually), they would prosper. Τοῦτο ποιήσαντες εὖ ἂν πράττοιεν 
(. 6. εἰ ποιήσα ve v), if they should (once) do this, they would prosper. 
Touro ποιοῦντες εὖ ἂν ἔπραττον (i. 6. εἰ ἐποίο vv), if they were doing 
this (or if they had been doing this), they would be in prosperity. Τοῦτο 
ποιήσαντες εὖ ἂν ἔπραττον (i. 6. εἰ ἐποίη σαν), if they had done this 
they would be in prosperity. 
_ Πῶς δῆτα δίκης οὔσης ὁ Ζεὺς οὐκ ἀπόλωλεν τὸν πατέρ᾽ αὑτοῦ δήσας; 
1. Θ. how is it that Zeus has not been destroyed, if Justice exists ? ARIST. 
Nub. 904. (Here δίκης οὔσης represents εἰ δίκη ἐστίν.) ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰσόμε- 
σθα δόμους παραστείχοντες (i. 6. ἐὰν παραστείΐχωμεν), but we 
shall know, uf we shall enter the house. Sopu. Ant. 1255. Σὺ δὲ nd Jes 
εἰσει τάχα (1. 6. ἐὰν κλύῃς), but you will soon know, if you listen. 
ARIST. Av. 1375. So μὴ μαθών, unless I learn, for ζὰν μὴ μάθω 
Nub. 792. Καί κεν τοῦτ᾽ ἐθέλοιμι Διός γε διδόντος ἀρέσθαι and 
this I should like to obtain, if Zeus would only give it. Od. L 390. 
(Here Atos διδόντος = εἰ Ζεὺς διδοίη.) Τοιαῦτά τὰν γυναιξὶ συνναίων 
ἔχοις (i. 6. εἰ συνναίοις), such things would you suffer, if you should 








8 52,1.] ELLIPSIS OR SUBSTITUTION IN PROTASIS. 1}1 


live with women. ᾿ἈΈΒΟΗ. Sept. 195. Οὐδ᾽ ἂν σιωπήσαιμι τὴν ἄτην 
ὁρῶν στείχουσαν ἀστοῖς (i.e. εἰ ὁρῷμι). ὅ0ΡΗ. Ant. 1856. ᾿Αθηναίων 
δὲ τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο παθόντων, διπλασίαν ἂν τὴν δύναμιν εἰκάζεσθαι 
(οίμαι), but if the Athenians should ever suffer this (παθόντων -εΞ εἰ 
πάθοιεν), I think it would be inferred that their power was twice as 
great. Tnruc. I, 10. (Here nothing but the context shows that 
παθόντων does not represent εἰ ἔπαθον, if they had ever suffered.) 
Μαμμᾶν δ᾽ ἂν airnoavros ἧκόν σοι φέρων ἂν ἄρτον, and if you ever 
asked for something to eat, I used to come bringing you bread. ARIST. 
Nub. 1383. (Here αἰτήσαντος represents εἰ αἰτήσειας in a general 
supposition, ὃ 51. For ἧκον ἄν see ὃ 30, 2, and § 42,3.) Πρὶν 
γενέσθαι ἠπίστησεν ἄν τις ἀκούσας (i. 6. εἰ ἤκουσεν), before it hap- 
pened, any one would have disbelieved such a thing, if he had heard it. 
aHuC. VII, 28. Οὐ γὰρ ἂν μεταπείθειν ὑμᾶς ἐζήτει μὴ τοιαύτης 
οὔσης τῆς ὑπαρχούσης ὑπολήψεως, for he would not be seeking to 
change your minds, if such were not the prevailing opinion (i. e. εἰ μὴ 
τοιαύτη ἦν). Dem. Cor. 304, 1. Μὴ κατηγορήσαντος Αἰσχίνου 
μηδὲν ἔξω τῆς γραφῆς οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐγὼ λόγον οὐδένα ἐποιούμην ἕτερον (i. 68. 
εἰ μὴ κατηγόρησεν). Ib, 236, 28. Τὰ αὐτὰ ἂν ἔπραξε καὶ πρώτη 
λαχοῦσα (i. 6. εἰ πρώτη ἔλαχεν), it (the soul) would have done the 
same, even if it had been the first to draw the lot. PLat. Rep. X, 620 Ὁ. 
So Tuuc. VII, 13, 1. 

Τὸ μὲν ἐπ’ ἐκείνῳ πολλάκις ἂν διελύθησαν, if it had depended on 
him, they often would have been disbanded. Isoc. Pan. p. 70 Β. § 142. 
Διά ye ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς πάλαι ἂν ἀπολώλειτε, if tt had depended on your- 
selves, you would long ago have been ruined. Dem. Cor. 242,10. (So 
καθ᾽ ὑμᾶς.) Πάλαι yap ἂν ἕνεκά ye ψηφισμάτων ἐδεδώκει δίκην, 
for, if decrees were of any avail, he would long ago have suffered 
punishment. Dem. Ol. III, 32,16. (Here the protasis is implied in 
ἕνεκα ψηφισμάτων.) Οὕτω γὰρ οὐκέτι τοῦ λοιποῦ πάσχοιμεν ἂν 
κακῶς, for in that case we should no longer suffer. Dem. Phil. I, 44, 
12. So ὡς οὕτω περιγενόμενος ἄν, XEN. An. I, 1, 10. Οὐδ᾽ ἂν 
δικαίως ἐς κακὸν πέσοιμί τι. SOPH. Ant. 240. 

In these cases the form of the apodosis will generally show what 
form of protasis is implied. When the apodosis is itself expressed 
by an Infinitive or Participle (§ 53), asin Tuuc. I, 10, the form of 
the protasis is shown only by the general sense of the passage. 

ReMARK. The Future participle is not used in protasis to rep- 
resent the Future Indicative, as it would denote time future rela- 
tively to the time of the apodosis (§ 28), which the Future Indica- 
tive in protasis does not do. The Present and Aorist participles, 
representing the Present and Aorist Subjunctive, express future 
conditions, thus making the Future participle unnecessary. The 
Aorist participle in protasis can always represent an Aorist Subjunc- 
tive in the sense explained § 20, N. 1. 

Nore 1. An ellipsis of the verb of the protasis takes place 
in the Homeric εἰ δ᾽ dye, for εἰ δὲ βούλει, ἄγε, and in such ex- 
pressions as εἰ μὴ διὰ τοῦτο, had it not been for this. E. δ. 





112 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [8 52, 1. 


~ 


Ei δ᾽ ἄγε, τοι κεφαλῇ κατανεύσομαι. Tl. 1, 524. Ei δ᾽ ἄγε μὴν, 
reipnoat, ἵνα γνώωσι καὶ οἵδε, but if you wish, come now, try ut. Il. I, 
302. Καὶ εἰ μὴ διὰ τὸν πρύτανιν, ἐνέπεσεν ἄν, and, had tt not been for 
the Prytanis, he would have been thrown in. Piat. Gorg. 516 E. 
(Compare διά ye ὑμᾶς, Dem. Cor. 242, 10, quoted § 52,1.) Οὐ yap 
ὡς εἰ μὴ διὰ Λακεδαιμονίους, οὐδ᾽ ὡς εἰ μὴ Πρόξενον οὐχ ὑπεδέξαντο, 
οὐδ᾽ ὡς εἰ μὴ δ Ἡγήσιππον, οὐδ᾽ ὡς εἰ μὴ διὰ τὸ καὶ τὸ, ἐσώθησαν ἂν 
οἱ Φωκεῖς, οὐχ οὕτω τότε ἀπήγγειλεν, for he did not then report that, if 
it had not been for the Lacedaemonians, — or if they had not refused 
to receive Proxenus,—or if it had not been for Hegesippus,——or tf it 
had not been for this and that,— the Phocians wauld have been saved. 
Dem. F. L. 364, 12. So εἰ μὴ κρεμάσας, had J not done it by hanging 
up, &c. Arist. Nub. 229. So in alternatives: see Note 2. (Cf. 
§ 53, Note 1.) 


Nore 2. In alternatives, εἰ δὲ μή, otherwise, regularly intro- 
duces the latter clause, even when the former clause is negative. 
Εἰ δὲ μή is much more common than ἐὰν δὲ μή, even when ἐὰν 
μέν with the Subjunctive precedes. 


Πρὸς ταῦτα μὴ τύπτ᾽" εἰ δὲ μὴ, σαυτόν ποτ᾽ αἰτιάσει, therefore do 
not beat me; but if you do, you will have yourself to blame for i. 
Arist. Nub. 1433. Πόλεμον οὐκ εἴων ποιεῖν" εἰ δὲ μὴ; Kai αὐτοὶ 
ἀναγκασθήσεσθαι ἔφασαν φίλους ποιεῖσθαι ots οὐ βούλονται, they said 
that otherwise (εἰ δὲ μή) they should be obliged, κα. Tuuc. I, 28. 
Εἶπον (Παυσανίᾳ) τοῦ κήρυκος μὴ λείπεσθαι" εἰ δὲ μὴ, πόλεμον αὐτῷ 
Σπαρτιάτας προαγορεύειν, they ordered him not to be left behind by the 
herald: and if he should be (εἰ δὲ μή), (they told him) that the Spartans 
declared war against him. Id. I, 131. ᾿Εὰν μέν τι ὑμῖν δοκῶ λέγειν 
ἀληθὲς, ξυνομολογήσατε" εἰ δὲ μὴ; παντὶ λόγῳ avriteivere. PLAT. 
Phaed. 91 C. Soin Dem. Phil. ILI, p. 129, 14, ἐὰν μὲν πείσητε, . 
εἰ δὲ μὴ, K.T.A. 


2. The protasis is often altogether suppressed, leaving 
. . Ν . . . sd 

only an Optative with av or an Indicative with av as an 
apodosis. Here some indefinite or general protasis is 
always implied; as if he pleased, if he could, of an 
opportunity should offer, if it were necessary, if wt were 
true, if we should consider, if what is natural should 
happen, &c. KE. g. 

Ἴσως ἂν οὖν τις ἐπιτιμήσειε τοῖς εἰρημένοις, perhaps some one 
might (if he pleased) find fault with what has been said. Isoc. Areop. 
Ρ. 146 E.§ 36. Τῷ οὐκ ἂν βασιλῆας ava στόμ᾽ ἔχων ayopevors, 
therefore you should not take kings upon your tongue and talk (i. 6. 


you would not, if you should do as you ought). Il. Il, 250. Τοῦτο οὔτ 
Ay οὗτος ἔχοι λέγειν οὔθ᾽ ὑμεῖς πεισθείητε, neither would he be 














§ 53.] SUPPRESSION OF THE PROTASIS. 113 


able to say this (if he should try), nor would you believe it. Drm. 
Andr. 598, 20. Ἡδέως δ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγ᾽ ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην, but I would 
gladly ask Leptines (if an opportunity should offer). Id. Lept. 496, 8. 
Δειξάτω ὡς of Θετταλοὶ viv οὐκ ἂν ἐλεύθεροι γένοιντο ἄσμενοι, let 
him show that they would not now gladly become free (if they could). 
Id. Ol. II, 20, 18. Βασίλεια οἰκοδομεῖν ἤρχετο, ws ἂν ἱκανὰ ἀπομάχε- 
σθαι etn, so that it might be strong enough to fight from (if ut should be 
necessary). XEN. Cyr. Il, 1, 1. 

Od γὰρ ἦν 6 τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε, for there was nothing that you could 
have done (if you had tried). Drm. Cor. 240, 15. Ποίων δ᾽ ἂν ἔργων 
ἢ πόνων ἣ κινδύνων ἀπέστησαν; and from what acts, §c., would they 
have shrunk (i. e. if they had been required)? Isoc. Pan. p. 57 C. 
§ 83. Πολλοῦ yap ἂν ἦν ἄξια, for they would be worth much (if that 
were true). PLat. Rep. Il, 374 D. So βουλοίμην ἄν (velim), 7 
could wish (in a certain future case) ; ἐβουλόμην ἄν (vellem), I should 
now wish (on a certain condition, not fulfilled). 

Note. The Optative with ἄν, used in this way, often has 
the force of a mild command or exhortation, and sometimes 
a sense approaching that of the Future Indicative. E. g. 

Aéyots ἄν, you may speak (lit. you could speak, if you should desire 
it), implying εἰ βούλοιο. Σὺ μὲν κομίζοις ἂν σεαυτὸν 7 θέλεις, you 
may take yourself off whither you please. Sopu. Antig. 444. (This 
is merely a milder expression than κόμιζε.) Κλύοις ἂν ἤδη, Φοῖβε 
προστατήριε, 1. 6. hear now. Id. El. 637. Χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω. Id. 
Phil. 674. So Antig. 1339. Ποῖ οὖν, ἔφην ἐγώ, τραποίμεθ᾽ ἂν 
ἔτι; in what other direction then, said I, shall we turn (lit. should we 
turn, if we should wish)? Piat. Euthyd. 290 A. Οὐκ ἂν μεθείμην 
τοῦ θρόνου, I will not give up the throne. Arist. Ran. 880, 


ReMARK. In such examples as Hor. I, 2, Ἑλλήνων τινάς φασι 
ἁρπάσαι Eipamnv: εἴησαν δ᾽ ἂν οὗτοι Κρῆτες, there is no excep- 
tional use of the Optative with ἄν referring to the past; but the 
meaning is these would prove to be Cretans (if we should examine the 
case). So αὗται δὲ οὐκ ἂν πολλαὶ εἴησαν, these would not prove (on 
investigation) to have been many. Tuvc. I, 9. 


§ 53. The apodosis may be expressed by an Infini- 
tive or Participle, where the construction of the sentence 
requires it; each tense of the Infinitive or Participle 
representing its own tenses of the Indicative or Optative. 
(The Present includes also the Imperfect, and the Per- 
fect also the Pluperfect.) 

If a finite verb in the apodosis would have taken av, 
that particle is joined with the Infinitive or Participle. 
The Present Infinitive or Participle with av represents 

H 





114 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. § 53. 


bs ᾿ . 5 ᾿ ¥ 

either an Imperfect Indicative with av, or a Present 

. . “ a . . 
Optative with av; the Perfect, either a Pluperfeet Indic- 
ative or a Perfect Optative; and the Aorist, either an 

= ὡς γ᾽ 4 ᾿ς ᾿ πε ' ᾽ ‘ + , : > 

Aorist Indicative or an Aorist Optative. (See § 41.) 
ry " 5 2 
I'he context must decide in each case, Whether an In- 
na . . Mh ὰ >, . . a aS. ν᾿ . . 
finitive or Participle with av represents the Indicative 
or the Optative. E. g. 

Hyovpat, εἰ τοῦτο ποιεῖτε, πάντα καλῶς ἔχειν, I believe that, uf you 
are doing this, all is well. Ἡγοῦμαι, ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῆτε, πάντα καλῶς 
ἕξειν, 1 believe that, if you (shall) do this, all will be well. “Hyotpa, 
εἰ τοῦτο ποιοιτε, πάντα καλῶς ἂν ἔχειν, I believe that, if you should 
do this, all would be well. “Ἡγοῦμαι, εἰ τοῦτο ἐποιήσατε, πάντα καλῶς 
ἂν ἔχειν, 1 believe that, if you had done this, all would (now) be well. 
Ovda ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῆτε, εὖ πράξοντας, I know that, if you do 
this, you will prosper. Σκεμματα τῶν ῥᾳδίως ἀποκτιννύντων καὶ dva- 
βιωσκομένων γ᾽ ἂν, εἰ οἷοί τε ἦσαν, considerations for those who 
readily put men to death, and who would bring them to life again too, if 
they could, Piart. Crit. 48 C. CAvaBtwoxopevav ἄν = ἀνεβιώσκοντο 
av.) See the examples of each tense of the Infinitive and Participle 
with ἄν, under ὃ 41 and § 73. 

Πῶς yap οἴεσθε δυσχερῶς ἀκούειν Ὄλυνθίους, εἴ τίς τι λέγοι κατὰ 
Φιλίππου KaT ἐκείνους τοὺς χρόνους ; how unwillingly do you think 
they heard tt, if any one said anything against 1 *hilip in those times ? 
Dem. Phil. Il, 70, 25. (Here ἀκούειν represents the Imperfect 
ἤκουον, $15, 3.) For an example of the Perfect Infinitive with ἄν, 
representing the Pluperfect, see § 41, 2. 


Note 1. The apodosis is sometimes omitted for effect, 
when some such expression as ἐξ 7s well can be supplied, or 
some other apodosis at once occurs to the reader. E. 5. 

» » ‘ , , ; ‘ a” 4 ‘ 
_ AAN εἰ μὲν δώσουσι γέρας μεγάθυμοι ᾽Αχαιοὶ, ἄρσαντες κατὰ θυμὸν, 
ὅπως ἀντάξιον ἔσται; --- εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι. 
Il. 1. 135, (Here we must understand ed ἕξει, it will be well, or 
something similar, after ἔσται.) Ei περ γάρ κ᾽ ἐθέλῃσιν ᾿Ολύμπιος 
aa repomntns ἐξ ἑδέων στυφελίξαι  --- ὁ γὰρ πολὺ φέρτατός ἐστιν. II. 
Ι, 580. (Here we must understand he can do it after the protasis. 
I'he following γάρ refers to this suppressed apodosis.) Ei μὲν ἐγὼ 
ὑμᾶς ἱκανῶς διδάσκω οἵους δεῖ πρὸς ἀλλήλους εἶναι. ---- εἰ δὲ μὴ, καὶ παρὰ 
τῶν προγεγενημένων μανθάνετε. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 7, 28. Compare 
AEscH. Prom. 835. 


Note 2. Very often the apodosis is not directly expressed 
by the verb on which the protasis depends, but is merely im- 


plied in the context. Here the form of the protasis is deter- 
mined hy the implied apodosis. In such sentences εἰ or ἐάν 











§ 53. ] ELLIPSIS OR SUBSTITUTION IN APODOSIS. 115 


may generally be translated by supposing that, or in case that. 
E. g. 

Τοὔνεκα νῦν τὰ σὰ γούναθ᾽ ἱκάνομαι, at κ᾿ ἐθέλῃ σθα κείνου λυγρὸν 
ὄλεθρον ἐνισπεῖν, therefore I am now come to your knees, in case you 
shall be willing to tell me of his sad death (i. e. that you may tell me, in 
case you shall be willing). Od. III, 92. See Od. 1, 94. (Here ixavo- 
μαι does not contain the apodosis to αἴ x’ ἐθέλῃσθα, which is rather 
implied in what follows.) Τῶν νῦν μιν μνήσασα παρέζεο καὶ λαβὲ 
γούνων, αἴ κεν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, grasp his knees, 
in case he shall be willing to assist the Trojans (i. 6. that you may cause 
him to assist them, tf he shall be willing). Ul. I, 408. So αἴ κέν πως 
βούλεται (often explained as an indirect question), Il. I, 66. Οὐκοῦν 
ἔτι ἐλλείπεται TO ἣν πείσωμεν ὑμᾶς ws χρὴ ἡμᾶς ἀφεῖναι; is not 
this then δἰ left to us, —in case we shall persuade you that you must 
let us go (sc. to have you do this)? i. e. to have you let us go, if we 
shall persuade you that you must? PLat. Rep. I, 327 C. Ακουσον καὶ 
ἐμοῦ, ἐάν σοι ταὐτὰ δοκῇ, hear me also, in case the same shall please 
you, i. 6. that then you may assent to it. Ib. 11. 358 B. Ἔτι καὶ νῦν 
ἀρὰς ποιοῦνται, εἴ Tis ἐπικηρυκεύεται Πέρσαις, even to this day 
they invoke curses, if there is any one who sends heralds to the Persians. 
Isoc. Pan. p. 73 1). § 157. Ἱκέται πρὸς σὲ δεῦρ᾽ ἀφίγμεθα, εἴ τινα 
πόλιν φράσειας ἡμῖν εὔερον, we are come hither as suppliants to you, 
in case you should tell us of some fleecy city (implying thinking that we 
might go and live in such a city, if you should tell us of one). ARIST. 
Av. 120. Οἱ δ᾽ ᾧκτειρον, ei ἁλώσοιντο, and others pitied them, 
in case they should be captured (i. e. thinking what they would suffer 
if they should be captured). XEN. An. 1,4, 7. Πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, εἰ 
emtBonOotev, ἐχώρουν, they marched towards the city, in case they 
(the citizens) should rush out (i. 6. that they might meet them, if they 
should rush out). Tuuc. VI, 100. Οὐδ᾽ ἦν τοῦ πολέμου πέρας οὐδ᾽ 
ἀπαλλαγὴ Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους καὶ Θετταλοὺς ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε 
τῇ πόλει, 1. 6. Philip saw that he could neither end nor escape the war, 
unless he should make the Thebans and Thessalians hostile to the city. 
Dem. Cor. 276, 1. See Sopu. O. C.1770; Prat. Rep. IV, 434 A. 

In the examples from Homer and Plato the protasis belongs under 
§ 50, 1, the implied apodosis referring to the future; in the example 
from Isocrates the protasis belongs under ὃ 49, 1; in that from 
Aristophanes, under § 50, 2, the implied apodosis being in the 
Optative with ἄν or some equivalent form; whilein the next three 
the protasis has been changed (on the principle of indirect discourse) 
from εἰ ἁλώσονται, ἐὰν ἐπιβοηθῶσιν, and ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσω of the direct 
discourse, on account of the past tense of the leading verb. Fora 
further explanation of this construction, and other examples, see 
§ 77,1. 5. See also § 71, N. 1, and the examples, which are to be 
explained on the principle of this note. 


Nore 8. Sometimes the adverb ἄν stands alone to represent the 
apodosis, when the verb to which it belongs can be easily supplied 
from the context. In like manner εἰ alone may represent the pro 





116 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 


tasis. 
ὡσπερανεί, quasi) includes both cases. See § 4: Ὶ ᾿ 
568. 66 ὃ 42 2, W 
Sate. é § 42, 3, N. 2, with the 
΄σ Φ ἂν "ἃ 
Ὥσπερ with the participle (8 109, N. 9) generally belongs to an 
é © 


€ t Ae 9 


E varkep 4. When πλὴν εἰ is used for εἰ μή, unless, there is an 
ellipsis of an apodosis after πλήν. E. g 
. 855 
34," ᾿ ae τ᾽, - ΄ 

Οὐδὲ τὰ ὀνόματα οἷόν τε αὐτῶν εἰδέναι, πλὴν εἴ τις κωμῳδοποιὸς 
ire ὧν, ut is not possible to know even their names, except (it is 
᾿ ee +. ν 4 ‘ 
possible) in case one happens to be a comedian. Piat. Apol. 18 C 


ReMARK. Expressi , . ἢ 

cCMARK. Iuxpression a wis - δ 5. ΄ : 

Wide aaldie te ae ie ee 
γ ὅ ι γὰρ ἐγένετο, O that it had been, are protases with the 


v me e ow . “ 
The expression ὥσπερ ἂν εἰ (sometimes written as one word, 


apodosis suppressed. See Rem. at the end of Sect. VI. 


Mixed Constructions. — Irregularities in Protasis or 
Apodosis. 


9 δά. The regular forms of protasis and apodosis ex- 
plained above (88 49, 50, 51) include by far the greater num- 
ber of the examples found in the classic authors. Many cases 
remain, however, in which the protasis and apodosis do not 
belong to the same form. These admit of various explana- 
tions : — 

1. (a.) When an Indicative in the protasis (in either of the 
constructions of § 49, 1 or 2) is followed by an Optative with 
ἄν in the apodosis, the latter properly belongs to an implied 


rotasis in the Optativ princi FO ¢ 
p ptative (on the principle of ὃ 52, 2). Thus, in 


the sentence εἰ ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει, οὐκ ἂν δικαίως κολάζοιτο tf this 
4S 80, he would not justly be punished, κολάζοιτο ἄν belied toa 
protasis in the Optative, ¢f justice should be done implied Ἢ 
δικαίως ; while the protasis εἰ... . ἔχει belongs my condition 
to the expressed apodosis with its implied protasis. The sense 
therefore is, of this is so, (the result is that) he would not be 


punished if justice should be done. The same principle applies 
to a primary tense of the Indicative in protasis, followed by a 
secondary tense with ἄν in apodosis. | 

This is sometimes the meaning, when a Subjunctive or 
Future Indicative (ὃ 50, 1) is in the protasis, with an Optative 
with dy in the apodosis. (See the last two examples.) E. g. 














§ 54, 1.] MIXED CONSTRUCTIONS. 111) 


᾿ 5 > ’ > ᾽ a > , > 4 eo 

Ei δέ ris ἀθακάτων ye κατ ovpavou εἰλήλουθας, οὐκ ἂν eywye 
θεοῖσιν ἐπουρανίοισι μαχοίμην, but if thou art one of the immortals 
come from heaven, I would not fight against the Gods of heaven. I. 
VI, 128. (Here the principal protasis to μαχοίμην ἄν is implied, if 1 
should have my choice.) Πολλὴ γὰρ ἂν εὐδαιμονία ε in περὶ τοὺς νέους, 

> τ ‘ ΄ > ἃ , ς ἊΨ b) “ 9 

εἰ εἷς μὲν μόνος αὐτοὺς διαφθείρει; οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ὠφελοῦσιν; jor 
there would (naturally) be great happiness, &c. Prat. Apol. 25 B. 
Ὥστ᾽ εἴ μοι καὶ μέσως ἡγούμενοι μᾶλλον ἑτέρων προσεῖναι αὐτὰ πολεμεῖν 
ἐπείσθητε, οὐκ ἂν εἰκότως νῦν τοῦ γε ἀδικεῖν αἰτίαν φεροίμην; ¥ 
you were persuaded to make war by thinking, δ᾽.» I should not now 
justly be charged with injustice. Tuuc. Il, 60. (Here a protasis 
to φεροίμην ἄν is implied in εἰκότως.) Ei yap οὗτοι ὀρθῶς ἀπέστη- 
σαν, ὑμεῖς ἂν οὐ χρεὼν ἄρχοιτε; 707 if these had a right to secede, 
it would follow that your dominion is unjust. Id. III, 40. Ei νῦν ye 


δυστυχοῦμεν; mas tavavti av πράττοντες ov σωζοίμε θ᾽ ἄν; of 
now we are unfortunate, how should we not be safe if we should do the 
opposite? ARIST. Ran. 1449. (Here πράττοντες --Ξ εἰ πράττοιμεν is 
the principal protasis to which the optative refers.) Ei τοῦτ᾽ ἐπε- 
χείρουν λέγειν, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ Goris οὐκ ἂν εἰκότως ἐπιτιμήσει έ μοι, if 
7 were undertaking to say this (§ 49, 2), every one would censure me 
with reason (i. 6. εἰ τὰ εἰκότα ποιήσειεν). Dem. Cor. 296, 24. (Here 
many Mss., and Dion. Hal. p. 1054, read ἐπετίμησε, the ordinary 
apodosis.) Ei μηδένα τῶν ἄλλων ἱππεύειν εἴασαν; οὐκ ἂν δικαίως 
ὀργίζοισθε αὐτοῖς. Lys. Alcib. II, § 8. 

Καίτοι τότε τὸν Ὑπερείδην, εἴπερ ἀληθὴ pov νῦν κατηγορεῖ, μᾶλλον 
ἂν εἰκότως ἢ τόνδ᾽ ἐδίωκεν, and yel, if he is now making true charges 
against me, he would then have prosecuted Hypereides with much more 
reason than this man. Dem. Cor. 302, 24. (Here ἐδίωκεν ἄν refers 
chiefly to the implied protasis, if he had done what was more reason- 
able.) Such examples seldom occur. 

Οὐδὲ γὰρ ἂν πολλαὶ γέφυραι ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν ἂν ὅποι φυγόντες 
ἡμεῖς σωθῶμεν. XEN. An. Il, 4,19. (Here the implied protasis is 
if we should wish to escape.) See An. V, 1, 9. 

Φρούριον εἰ ποιήσονται, τῆς μὲν γῆς βλάπτοιεν ἄν τι μέρος, 
οὐ μέντοι ἱκανόν γε ἔσται κωλύειν ἡμᾶς, κιτ.λ.» if they shall build a 
fort, they might (under favorable circumstances) injure some part of 
our land; but it will not be sufficient to prevent us, &e. Tauc. I, 142. 


(b.) A Subjunctive or Future Indicative in the protasis 
sometimes depends on an Optative with ἄν in the apodosis, 
when no other protasis can readily be supplied. ‘This expresses 
the protasis more vividly than the regular Optative. (See 
§ 50, 2, Rem. ὃ, and ὃ 34, 1, b.) It must be remembered also 
that the Optative with ἄν is sometimes merely a softened ex- 
pression for the Future Indicative (8 52, Note). E. δ: 

Ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιήσω, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι; if I do this, ut would be well. 
(Ilere the irregularity is the same in English as in Greek: the regu- 





118 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 54, 1. 


lar form in both would be either ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιήσω, καλῶς ἕξει, if 1 do 
this, it will be well; or εἰ τοῦτο ποιήσαιμι, καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if I should do 
this, τὲ would be well.) Kai οὕτως ἂν δεινότατα πάντων πάθοιεν, εἰ 
οὗτοι ὁμόψηφοι κατ᾽ ἐκείνων τῶν ἀνδρῶν τοῖς τριάκοντα γενήσονται. 
Lys. Agor. p. 139, 6.§ 94. (Here we should expect εἰ γένοιντο.) 
γεν "" » , , > , ~ » ΄ bad > 
Tov ἀτοποτάτων μέντ᾽ ἂν ein, εἰ, ἃ νῦν ἄνοιαν ὀφλισκάνων ὅμως ἐκλα- 
Aci, ταῦτα δυνηθεὶς μὴ πράξει. Dem. Ol. Ι,10, 25. Ἢν οὖν μάθῃς 
‘ »” ΄- ΄ » > > NY U >Or A La A 4 > τ , 
μοι τὸν ἄδικον τοῦτον λόγον, οὐκ dv ἀποδοί nv οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὀβολὸν οὐδενί, 
if you shall learn this for me, I will not (or J would not) pay even an 
obol to any one. Arist. Nub. 116. (This and many other examples 
might be explained equally well on either principle, a or b.) 


2. (a.) An Optative in the protasis sometimes depends 


upon a primary tense of the Indicative or an Imperative in the 
apodosis. This arises from the slight distinction between the 
Subjunctive and Optative in protasis, as ἐὰν ἔχῃ and εἰ ἔχοι, for 
which the Latin has but one form, si habeat. (See § 48, I, B, 
Rem. 2.) In fact, the irregularity in εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο, πάντα 
καλῶς ἕξει, is precisely the same as in the English ἐγ this should 
happen, all will be well, where the more regular apodosis would 


be all would be well, as in Greek, πάντα καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι. KE. σ΄. 


᾿Αλλ᾽ εἴ τίς μοι ἀνὴρ ἅμ᾽ ἔποιτο καὶ ἄλλος, μᾶλλον θαλπωρὴ καὶ 
θαρσαλεώτερον ἔσται. 1]. Χ, 222, Εἰ θέλ οἐμεν σκοπεῖν τὰς φύσεις 
τὰς τῶν ἀνθρώπων, εὑρήσομεν, κιτ.Ὰλ. Isoc. ad Nicocl. p. 23 D. 
$45. Εἴτις rade rapaBaivor, ἐναγὴς ἔστω. AESCHIN. Cor. § 110. 
In such cases the Optative is a less animated form of expression than 
the regular Subjunctive. 


(6.) The Optative sometimes stands in the protasis, when 
the apodosis contains a primary tense of a verb denoting 
necessity, obligation, propriety, possrbility, &c., with an Infinitive, 
the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in 
sense to an Optative with ἄν. E. g. 

Ei yap εἴησαν δύο τινὲς ἐναντίοι νόμοι, οὐκ ἀμφοτέροις ἔνι δήπου 
ψηφίσασθαι, for if there should be two laws opposed to each other, 
you could not surely vote for both. Dem. Timocr. 7] 1,8. (See § 63, 
4, δ.) This.is analogous to the use of the Imperfect of the same 
verbs, explained in § 49, 2, Note 3. There, for example, ἐνὴν αὐτῷ 
ἐλθεῖν, he could have gone, is nearly equivalent to ἦλθεν ἄν, and here 
ἔνεστιν αὐτῷ ἐλθεῖν, he could 90, is nearly equivalent to ἔλθοι ἄν. 


3. A few irregular constructions remain, which can be ex- 
plained only as cases of anacoluthon, in which the speaker 


adapts his apodosis to a form of protasis different from that 
which he has actually used. E. g. 











᾽ IONS. 
§ 55, 2.] MIXED CONSTRUCT 


DS τά ὃ : ὑμην πᾶσι Πέρ- 

Ἐγὼ μὲν ἂν, εἰ ἔχοιμι; ὡς τάχιστα ὅπλα ΣΡ ig eat el "ἡ 

ais. XEN. Cyr. II, 1,9. (Here ἐποιούμην ἄν is usec as if εἰ ΙΧ ‘ 

if T were able, had preceded. We should expect ποιοίμην av, which 

3 : 2 > 4 ‘ ὄν Oo 

is found in one Ms.) Ei μὲν yap εἰς γυναῖκα σωφρονεστέραν ξίφος 

μνῶν ns ἂν ἦ j Eur. Orest. 1132. (Here we 
μεθεῖμεν, δυσκλεὴς av ἦν φόνος. : 

should expect εἴη.) 


ss i νύν Opta- 
REMARK. The same apodosis, in either the Indicative ΟΡ νὴ 

tive, may take one protasis in the Indicative referring to ath id 
re ‘ z . .Ψ ν . ὶ = 

past time, and another. in the Optative referring to a suppose fu 


case. Ε g. ee as he 
᾿Εγὼ οὖν δεινὰ ἂν εἴη ν εἰργασμένος, εἰ, ὅτε μεν με οἱ ἄρχοντες 
pte 5 δὲ θεοῦ τάττοντος, λίποιμι τὴν τάξιν, ἴ 
γε φοδὲ Tete (arene OY trageously, if when the state 
should therefore (prove to) have behaved outrageously, 1 Se παρ ἐρομ 
authorities stationed me I stood my chery bog? “Here vt 
ς ser ost. PLAT. Apol. 28 KH, e 
tions me I should desert my p 28 de τ 
combination of the two acts is the future condition on which the 
y a t ὑμᾶς 
apodosis depends.) ᾿Ἐπεύχομαι πᾶσι τούτοις, εἰ ἀληθῆ ty Pe 
: Ξ »,ν» > ‘4 > ~ , 
εἴποιμι καὶ εἶπον καὶ τότ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐν τῷ δήμῳ, ae ant — 
i. e. if I should speak the truth and did speak it then, C. : ἘΜ. Ke : 
᾿ : > , > ~ 
274, 28. Eide μήτ᾽ ἔστι μήτε ἦν μήτ᾽ ἂν εἰπεῖν ἔχοι py ms μηδέπω 
ink ela f ἐχρῆ iv; if there neither is nor 
Kal τήμερον, Ti τὸν σύμβουλον ἐχρὴν — ee ἘΣ ae aii peut 
such thi 1 if no man yet even at this dat sibl: 
was (any such thing), and 1 ἶ ᾿ ἐρῤφανᾷ esgic 
᾽ 1e statesman to have done (wh 
tell of any, what ought the st : 
done)? Ib. 291, 28. (See § 50, 2, N. 2, and § 49, 2, N. 3.) 


§ 55. 1. Two or more protases, not co-ordinate, may be- 
e . 
long to one apodosis. LE. g. ᾿ = 
= e - ome , 
i ya i Ἴ ἐρον Φίλιππον ποιήσετε; 
Καὶ γὰρ ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ: ταχέως ὑμεῖς ETEPO ante θέτε 
ἄνπερ οὕτω προσέχητε τοῖς πράγμασι τὸν vouv. LEM. Pig 
12. Ei δ᾽ ἦμεν νέοι dis καὶ γέροντες, εἰ τις halal testa rey 
ov λαχό ἐξωρθούμεθ᾽ ἄν. Eur. Suppl. 1084. Et ris ce ὦ 
pearing 95 4 ἢ i αὐτῷ εἶ ὃ ογγυλότης, εἰ σοι 
ροιτο τοῦτο, τί ἐστι σχημα; εἰ αὐτῷ εἰπες μή. “ον πα Ν᾽ 5 
εἶπεν ἅπερ ἐγὼ, εἶπες δήπου ἂν ὅτι σχῆμά te. ILAT. Men. . 


2. It sometimes happens, that the apodosis is itself na 
dependent sentence (as in a final clause), which — its 
mood without reference to the preceding rules. In this -_ 
if the leading verb is in a secondary tense, so that Bie ong 
takes the Optative, the protasis also takes the Optative by : e 
general rule (§ 31, 1), even if it would otherwise have the 
Subjunctive. E. g. ea 

Ταῦτα δ᾽ εἶπεν, iv εἰ μὲν καὶ νῦν nperte eS aso 
ἀπολογούμενος περὶ αὐτῶν διατρίβοιμι; εἰ δὲ παρα : phe ; 
αὐτὸς εἴποι, and he said this, in order that, if on the on 


should still expect him to tell it, I should waste time pers in my δε 
fence; but if on the other hand I should omit it. he might now ‘elt t 








120 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. [§ 55, 2 


ree Dem. Aph. I, 830, 8. (Ifa primary tense stood for εἶπεν, we 

5 γῶ, > ΄ ΄ v3: >’ ‘ Ἂ , 

ri d have, 6. g. ταῦτα λέγει, ἵν᾿ ἐὰν μὲν προσδοκήσω αὐτὸν ἐρεῖν, 
ιατρίβω, ἐὰν δὲπαραλίπω, νῦν εἴπῃ.) 


᾿ ΒΝ ὦ Ὕ 
\EMARK. For the forms assumed by such sentences when con- 
structed on the principle of indirect discourse, see § 77, 1. 


$06. After many verbs expressing wonder, delight 
contentment, indignation, disappointment, and similar 
ideas, a protasis with εἰ may be used where a causal 
sentence would seem more natural. Such verbs are 
especially θαυμάζω. αἰσχύνομαι, ἀγαπάω, and ἀγανα- 


κτέω. Eig 

σ. 

΄ » a» > 4 ~ 

Θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ᾽ ἐνθυμεῖται μήτ᾽ ὀργίζεται 
ὁρῶν, x.t.r., I wonder that no one of you is either concerned or anqra 
when he sees, &c. (lit. if no one is either concerned or angry, I andes 
Dem. Phil. I, 52, 17. (See Rem. below.) ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνο pa ir 
Λακεδαιμονίοις μέν ποτε ἀντήρατε, νυνὶ δ᾽ ὀκνεῖτε ἐξιέναι καὶ μέλλετε 
εἰσφέρειν, but I wonder at this, that you once opposed the Lacedaemo 
nians, but now are unwilling, &e. Id. Ol. Ἐ 2% α (The lit aa 
meaning 18, if (it is true that) you once opposed, §c., then I oeaaer) 
Οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ εἰ μὴ δίκην ἔδωκεν, ἀλλ᾽ εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ we 
φανωθήσεται ἀγανακτεῖ, he is not content if he was not punished ; but 
4 he is not also to be crowned with a golden crown, he is indignant. 
oe are ὴ at. (Here the former protasis belongs under 

9, 1, and the atter under § 49, 1, N. 3.) 

Kai ws ἀληθῶς ἀγανακτῶ, εἰ οὑτωσὶ ἃ vod μὴ οἷός τ᾽ εἰμὶ εἰπεῖν 
I am indignant that (or if) Tam not able, &e. Pat. Lek 194A. 
Ou δὴ θαυμαστόν ἐστιν, εἰ στρατευόμενος καὶ πονῶν ἐκεῖνος αὐτὸς 
ὑμῶν μελλόντων καὶ ψηφιζομένων καὶ πυνθανομένων περιγίγνεται, il is 
no wonder that he gets the advantage of you, &e. Dem. ΟἹ ἯΙ 24 2 3, 
Μηδὲ μέντοι τοῦτο μεῖον δόξητε ἔχειν, εἰ οἱ Κυρεῖοι πρόσθεν aa ὧν 
ταττόμενοι νῦν ἀφεστήκασιν, 1. 6. do not be discontented, if (or that) the 
Cyraeans have now withdrawn. Xen. An. III, 2, 17. 

These verbs may also be followed by ὅτε and a causal sentence 
as 1n Pat. Theaet. 142 A, ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι οὐχ οἷός τ᾽ ἦ εὑ ἂν The 
construction with εἰ gives a milder or more polite form of “a session, 

utting the object of the wonder, &c. into the form of a sui callers, 
instead of stating it as a fact, as we should do in Enelish | The forms 
: protasis — above belong under § 49, 1. For the Sinn ates: 
imes assumed by these sentences incl πρός ais, 
— - τῆρ κάλ sentences on the principle of indirect dis 


ἐτο ταρ νῷ This construction must not be mistaken for that in 
ota say or ag the sense of whether, to introduce an indirect 
; aS, ἐπύθετο εἰ σὺ παρείης, he asked whether 1 
Ὶ : sk ou were pr 
Por this see § 68, 3, and § 70. ' sai 





§ 58, 2.] Aé IN APODOSIS. 121 


§ 7. The apodosis is sometimes introduced by the con- 
junction δέ, as if the apodosis formed a sentence co-ordinate 
with the protasis, instead of being (as it is) the leading sen- 
This is especially common in Homer and Herodotus, 


tence. 
It occurs when the apodosis is to be 


and rare in Attic prose. 
emphatically opposed to the protasis. Instead of de we some- 


times find ἀλλά or αὐτάρ. KE. g. 

Ei δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ Kev αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι, but if they do not give 
it up, then I will take it myself. Il. I, 137. ᾿Αλλά is found in Il. I, 
82, quoted § 51, N. 2. Ei περ yap T ἄλλοι γε περικτεινώμεθα πάντες 
νηυσὶν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αργείων, σοὶ δ᾽ οὐ δέος ἔστ᾽ ἀπολέσθαι. Il. XU, 245. Et 
δὲ θανόντων περ καταλήθοντ᾽ εἰν ᾿Αίδαο, αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ καὶ κεῖθι φίλου 
μεμνήσομ᾽ ἑταίρου. Il. XXII, 389. Εἰ ὑμῖν ἐστι τοῦτο μὴ δυνατὸν 

1 μέες δὲ ἔτι καὶ νῦν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου ἡμῖν ἔζεσθε. Hor. VIII, 


ποιησαι, ὑμεες ὁ 
4 δι , 4 a ΄ 
92. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ μηδὲ τοῦτο βούλει ἀποκρίνασθαι, σὺ δὲ τοὐντεῦθεν λέγε. 


Xen. Cyr. V, 5, 21. 

This δέ in apodosis cannot be expressed 
verbs then, yet, still, &c., necessarily fail to give the fore 
δέ, which is always a conjunction. 

ReMArK. Aé may be used in the same way t 
sentence upon which a relative clause depends. 
fore § 65. 


in English; as our ad- 
e of the Greek 


o introduce the 
See Remark be- 





SECTION III. 


RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 


§58. 1. Relative sentences may be introduced not 
only by relative pronouns and pronominal adjectives, 
but also by relative adverbs of time, place, or manner. 
They include therefore all temporal clauses, except 
those introduced by πρίν and other particles meaning 
until, which are treated separately (ὃ 66 and § 67). 
Relative sentences may be divided into two 


mee 


classes : — 
First, those in which the antecedent of the relative 18 


definite ; that is, in which the relative pronouns refer to 
definite persons or things, and the relative adverbs to 


definite points of time, place, &. 
6 





122 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 08, 2. 


Secondly, those in which the antecedent is indefinite , 
that is, in which no such definite persons, things, times, 
or places are referred to. 

Both the definite and the indefinite antecedent may 
be either expressed or understood. KE. g. 


(Definite Antecedents). Ταῦτα ἃ ἔχω ὁρᾷς, you see these things 
which I have; or ἃ ἔχω ὁρᾷς. “Ore ἐβούλετο ἦλθεν, (once) when he 
wished, he came. 

(Indefinite Antecedents.) Πάντα ἃ ἂν βούλωνται ἕξουσιν, they 
will have everything which they may want; or ἃ ἂν βούλωνται ἕξουσιν, 
they will have whatever they may want. “Ore βούλοιτο ἤρχετο, when- 
ever he wished, he came. 


8. When the antecedent is indefinite, the negative 
particle of the relative clause is μὴ . when the ante- 
cedent is definite, ov is regularly used, unless the general 
construction requires #7, asin prohibitions, wishes, &e. 


(See § 59, Note 1.) 


A. Relative with a Definite Antecedent. 


§ 59. When the relative refers to a definite ante- 
cedent, expressed or understood, it has no effect upon 
the mood of the following verb; and it therefore takes 
the Indicative, unless the general sense of the passage 
requires some other construction. KE. g. 


Λέγω ἃ οἶδα. Λέγω ἃ ἤκουσα. Λέξω ἃ ἀκήκοα. ἜΕλεξαν ἃ ἤκου- 
σαν. Πάντα λέγει ἃ γενήσεται. Πράσσουσιν ἃ βούλονται (or ὡς 
βούλονται), they are doing what they please. (On the other hand, 
πράσσουσιν ἃ ἂν βούλωνται (or ὡς ἂν βούλωνται.) they always do 
whatever they please; the antecedent being indefinite.) Aéyo ἃ οὐκ 
ἀγνοῶ. 1 am saying that of which I am not ignorant. 

᾿Αλλ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥ᾽ ἐκ τοῖο δυωδεκάτη γένετ᾽ ἠὼς, καὶ τότε δὴ πρὸς 
Ολυμπον ἴσαν θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες. Il. 1,493. Τίς ἔσθ᾽ ὁ χῶρος δῆτ᾽, ἐν 
ᾧ βεβήκαμεν. SOPH. Ο. C. 52. Ἕως ἐστὶ καιρὸς, ἀντιλάβεσθε 
τῶν πραγμάτων, i. 6. now, while there is an opportunity, ἕο. Dem. Ol. 
I, 15,6. (If the exhortation had been general, he might have said 
ἕως ἂν ἢ καιρός, (on all occasions) so long as there is an opportunity, 
§ 62.) ‘O δὲ ἀναβὰς, ἕως μὲν βάσιμα ἦν, ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου ἦγεν" ἐπεὶ δὲ 
ἄβατα ἣν, καταλιπὼν τὸν ἵππον ἔσπευδε πεζῇ. Xen. An. ΠῚ, 4, 49. 
So Il. I, 198, ἕως ὥρμαινε. Οἵπερ δὲ καὶ τῶν ἀποβαινόντων τὸ πλέον 
τῆς αἰτίας ἔξομεν;, οὗτοι καὶ καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν τι αὐτῶν προΐδωμωεν, we 








§ 60, 1.} DEFINITE ANTECEDENT. 123 


who are to bear the greater part of the blame, 6. Tuvc.I, 83. Ὅθεν 
δ᾽ οὖν ῥᾷστα μαθήσεσθε περὶ αὐτῶν, ἐντεῦθεν ὑμᾶς καὶ ἐγὼ πρῶτον 
πειράσομαι διδάσκειν. Dem. Aph. I, 814, 4. (Here ἐντεῦθεν refers to 
a particular point, at which he intends to begin.) Compare the 
first example under Note 1. Ἦ δὴ λοίγια py’, ὅτε μ᾽ ἐχθοδοπῆσαι 
ἐφήσεις Ἥρῃ; ὅτ᾽ ἂν μ᾽ ἐρέθῃσιν ὀνειδείοις ἐπέεδσιν, surely there will 
be sad work, when you shall impel me, &c. Il. I, 518. (Here ὅτε refers 
to some time conceived as definite by the speaker; whereas ὅτ᾽ ἂν 
ἐρέθῃσιν, whenever she shall provoke me, is indefinite, and belongs 
under § 61, 3.) Νὺξ δ᾽ ἔσται ὅτε δὴ στυγερὸς γάμος ἀντιβολήσει 
οὐλομένης ἐμέθεν, τῆς τε Ζεὺς ὄλβον ἀπηύρα. Θά. XVIII, 272. 

Nore 1. When the sense requires it, these clauses admit 
all the constructions allowed in independent sentences. LE. g. 

Αρξομαι δ᾽ ἐντεῦθεν ὅθεν καὶ ὑμεῖς paor ἂν μάθοιτε κἀγὼ τάχιστ᾽ 
ἂν διδάξαιμι. Dem. Aph. ΠΙ, 846, 15. (Here the relative 
clause contains an apodosis with ἄν, with a protasis εἰ ἀρξαίμην im- 
plied. This must not be confounded with the use of the Optative 
without dv, in the other class of relative sentences. See § 61, 4.) 
Nov δὲ τοῦτο οὐκ ἐποίησεν, ἐν ᾧ τὸν δῆμον ἐτίμησεν ay, bul he did 
not do this, in which he would have honored the people (if he had done 
it). Id. Mid. 536, 25. Εἰς καλὸν ὑμῖν “Avutos ὅδε παρεκαθέζετο, ᾧ 
μεταδῶμεν τῆς ζητήσεως. PLat. Men. 89 E. (Subjunctive in 
an exhortation.) Οὔκουν ἄξιον τοῖς τῶν κατηγόρων λόγοις πιστεῦσαι 
μᾶλλον ἢ τοῖς ἔργοις καὶ τῷ χρόνῳ, ὃν ὑμεῖς σαφέστατον ἔλεγχον τοῦ 
ἀληθοῦς νομίσατε. Lys. de Bon. Arist. p. 157, § 61. (Here the 
Imperative νομίσατε is used in a sort of exclamation after ὅν, where 
ordinarily δεῖ νομίσαι would be used.) “Av γὰρ ἀποφύγῃ με οὗτος, ὃ 
μὴ γένοιτο; τὴν ἐπωβελίαν ὀφλήσω. Dem. Aph. I, 834, 25. 
(Optative in a wish.) Ἔσσεται ἦμαρ ὅτ᾽ ἄν mor ὀλώλῃ Ἴλιος tpn, 
a day will come when sacred Ilium will fall. Tl. V1, 448. (Here 
ὀλώλῃ ἄν is used like a Future Indicative, ὃ 87, Note; and the ante- 
cedent of ὅτε is definite. If ἄν belonged to ὅτε, the clause would be 
a protasis, meaning when Ilium shall fall, a day will come.) 


Note 2. The relative may be used to express a purpose (§ 65, 1), 
or in a causal sense (8 65,4). The antecedent may then be either 
definite or indefinite. 


B. Relative with an Indefinite Antecedent. 


560. 1. When the relative refers to an indefinite 
antecedent, expressed or understood, the action of its 
verb is not stated absolutely as a definite fact, but con- 
ditionally as a supposed case; and such a relative sen- 
tence has many of the essential qualities of a conditional 
sentence. 





124 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 60, 1. 


Thus, when we say ἃ νομίζει ταῦτα λέγει, he ts saying what he 
(actually) thinks, or ἃ ἐνόμιζε ταῦτα ἔλεγεν, he was saying what he 
thought, the actions of νομίζει and ἐνόμιζε are stated as actual 
facts, occurring at definite times; but when we say ἃ ἂν νομίζῃ 
(ταῦτα) λέγει, he (always) says whatever he thinks, or ἃ νομίζοι 
(ταῦτα) ἔλεγεν, he (always) said whatever he happened to be think- 
ing, νομίζῃ and νομίζοι do not state any such definite facts, but 
rather what some one may think (or may have thought) on any 
occasion on which he is (or was) in the habit of speaking. So, 
when we say ἃ νομίζει ταῦτα λέξει, he will say what he (now) 
thinks, νομίζει denotes a fact; but when we say 4 ἂν νομίζῃ λέξει, 
he will say whatever he happens to be (then) thinking, νομίζῃ 
denotes merely a case supposed in the future. Again, — to 
take the case in which the distinction is most liable to be 
overlooked, — when we say ἃ οὐκ οἶδα οὐκ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what 
I do not know, I do not think that I know, οὐκ oi8a, as before, 
denotes a simple fact, and its object, d, has a definite antece- 
dent; but when Socrates says ἃ μὴ οἶδα οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, the 
meaning is tf there are any things which I do not know, I do 
not even think that I know them. In sentences like this, unless 
a negative is used (μή being the sign of an indefinite, οὐ of a 
definite antecedent), it is often difficult to decide whether the 
antecedent is definite or indefinite: thus ἃ οἶδα οἴομαι εἰδέναι 
may mean either what I (actually) know, I think that I know, 
or if there is anything which I know, I think that I know tt. 


The analogy of these indefinite relative clauses to conditional 
sentences will be seen at once. The following examples will 
make this clearer: — 


Ὅ re βούλεται δώσω, I will give him whatever he (now) wishes. 
Εἴ τι βούλεται, δώσω, if he wishes anything, I will give it. (§ 49, 1.) 

"O τι ἐβούλετο ἔδωκα ἄν, I should have given him whatever he had 
wished. ὍὍ rt μὴ ἐγένετο οὐκ ἂν εἶπόν, I should not have told what 
had not happened. Ei ts ἐβούλετο, ἔδωκα ἄν, if he had wished any- 
thing, I should have given it. Ei τι μὴ ἐγένετο, οὐκ ἂν εἶπον, if any- 
thing had not happened, I should not have told it. (8 49, 2. 
Ὅ τι ἂν βούληται, δώσω, I will give him whatever he shall wish. 
Eav τι βούληται, δώσω, if he shall wish anything, I will give it. 
(§ 50, 1.) 

“O τι βούλοιτο δοίην ἄν, I should give him whatever he might 
wish, Ei τι βούλοιτο, δοίην ἄν, if he should wish anything, I shoula 
give wt. (ὃ 50, 2.) 





801, 1.7 CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 125 


Ὅ τι ἂν βούληται δίδωμι, 1 (always) give him whatever he wishes. 
Ὅ τι βούλοιτο ἐδίδουν, I always gave him whatever he wished. *Eav 
τι βούληται, δίδωμι, if he ever wishes anything, I (always) give i. 
Εἴ τι βούλοιτο, ἐδίδουν, if he ever wished anything, 1 (always) gave it. 


(§ 51.) 

2. The relative with an indefinite antecedent may 
therefore be called the conditional relative, and the 
clause in which it stands may be called the protasis 
“1. e 3 27 
(like clauses with « or eav), and the antecedent clause 
may be called the apodosis. 


. Ν . . ως . 

3. The particle av (Epic κεν is regularly joined with 
all relative words, when they are followed by the Sub- 
junctive. The particle here (as always in protasis) is 
joined to the relative, never to the verb. (See § 38, 1, 
and § 47, 2.) 

Nore. With ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, and ἐπειδή, ἄν coalesces, forming 
ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπάν or ἐπήν (Ionic ἐπεάν), and ἐπειδάν. In Homer, 
where κέ is generally used for dv, we have ὅτε xe, &c. (like εἴ xe), 
where in Attic we have ὅταν, 6. Ἐπήν, however, occurs often in 
Homer. 

Remark. The classification of common conditional sentences, 
given in § 48, applies equally to conditional relative sentences. 
The distinction between those containing general suppositions 
(§ 62) and the corresponding forms containing particular supposi- 
tions (§ 61, 1) is especially important. 

8 61. We have four forms of the conditional rela- 
tive sentence which correspond to the four forms of 
ordinary protasis (§ 49, 1, 2, and § 00, 1, 2): — 

1. When the relative clause refers to a definite act 
in the present or the past, and no opinion of the speaker 
is implied as to the truth of the supposition, the verb 
is put in one of the present or past tenses of the In- 
dicative. (§ 49, 1.) 

The antecedent clause can have any form allowed in 
an apodosis (§ 49,1, Note 1). E. g. 


*A μὴ οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι (like εἴ τινα μὴ οἶδα). PLAT. Apol. 





126 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 61, 1. 


21D. (See above, ὃ 60, 1.) Χρήσθων ὅ τι βούλονται; let them 
deal with me as they please (i. 6. εἴ τι βούλονται). ARIST. Nub. 489. 
Ἐπίσταμαι ὁρᾶν θ᾽ ἃ δεῖ pe, κοὐχ ὁρᾶν ἃ μὴ πρέπει; I know how to 
see anything which I ought to see, and not to see anything which I ought 
not. Eur. Ino. Fr. 417. (‘A δεῖ is nearly equivalent to εἴ τινα δεῖ, 
and ἃ μὴ πρέπει to ef twa μὴ πρέπει.) Ὑοὺς πλείστους ἔνθαπερ ἔπεσον 
ἑκάστους ἔθαψαν" obs δὲ μὴ εὕρισκον, κενοτάφιον αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν. 
i.e. they raised a cenotaph for any of them whom they did not find 
like εἴ τινας μὴ εὕρισκον). XEN. An. VI, 4, 9. Ti γάρ; ὅστις δαπα- 
νηρὸς ὧν μὴ αὐτάρκης ἐστὶν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ τῶν πλησίον δεῖται; καὶ λαμ- 
βάνων μὴ δύναται ἀποδιδόναι, μὴ λαμβάνων δὲ τὸν μὴ διδόντα μισεῖ; 
οὐ δοκεῖ σοι καὶ οὗτος χαλεπὸς φίλος εἶναι; (i. 6. supposing a case, εἴ 
τις ..--- μὴ αὐτάρκης ἐστὶν, κι τ. λ.). Id. Mem. Ll, 6, 2. So ἥτις 
μηδαμοῦ ξυμμαχεῖ, Tuuc. I, 35. Ἅ τις μὴ προσεδόκησεν, 
οὐδὲ φυλάξασθαι ἐγχωρεῖ, there is no opportunity to guard against 
what we did not expect (like εἴ τινα μὴ προσεδόκησέ τις). ANTIPHON. 
p. 131, 80. 8 19. Εἰς τὰ πλοῖα τούς τε ἀσθενοῦντας ἐνεβίβασαν καὶ 
τῶν σκευῶν ὅσα μὴ ἀνάγκη ἦν ἔχειν (like εἴ τινα τῶν σκενῶν μὴ ἀνάγκη 
ἦν ἔχειν), i.e. any of tt which they did not need. XEN. An. Vea, i 
᾿Ανθρώπους διέφθειρεν (ἡ θάλασσα) ὅσοι μὴ ἐδύναντο φθῆναι πρὸς 
τὰ μετέωρα ἀναδραμόντες, i. 6. if any were unable to escape soon enough 
to the high land, so many the sea destroyed. Tuc. ΠΙ, 89. Οἷς μὲν 
αἵρεσις γεγένηται τἄλλα εὐτυχοῦσι, πολλὴ ἄνοια πολεμῆσαι" εἰ δ' 
ἀναγκαῖον ἦν, κι τ. Δ.» for any who have had the choice given them, while 
they are prosperous in other respects, it is great folly to go to war (i. 6. 
εἴ τισιν αἵρεσις γεγένηται). Truc. Il, 61. Πάντες ἴσμεν Χαβρίαν 
οὔτε τύπτοντα οὔθ᾽ ἁρπάζοντα τὸν στέφανον οὔθ᾽ ὅλως προσιόνθ' ὅποι 
μὴ προσῆκεν αὐτῷ, nor going anywhere at all where it was not law- 
ful for him (i. 68. εἴ ποι μὴ προσῆκεν). Dum. Mid. 535,15. Πῶς οὖν οἱ 
ἀγαθοὶ τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς φίλοι ἔσονται, ot μήτε ἀπόντες ποθεινοὶ ἀλλήλοις 
μήτε παρόντες χρείαν αὑτῶν ἔχουσι; (i. 6. εἰ μὴ - - - ἔχουσι). PLA. 
Lys. 215 B. Nixon δ᾽ ὅ τι πᾶσιν ὑμῖν μέλλει συνοίσειν (i. 6. εἴ τι 
ἔλλει), may any plan prevail which will benefit you all. Dem. Phil. 
, 55, 7. So Sopu. Ant. 375, ὃς τάδ᾽ ἔρδει. 


Nore. Care must be taken here (as in conditional sentences, 
§ 49, 1, Note 2), not to include under this class the general suppo- 
sitions of § 62, which require the Subjunctive or Optative. On the 
other hand, the- examples falling under § 62, Note 1, in which the 
Indicative is allowed, might properly be placed here, as they state a 
general supposition for emphasis as if it were a particular one (§ 51, 
Note 3). See also § 61, 3, Note. 


2. When a relative clause, referring to the present or 
the past, implies that the condition which it expresses 
is not or was not fulfilled (like a protasis of the form 
§ 49, 2), its verb is put in a secondary tense of the Ir 
dicative. 











« 


ξ 61, 8.3] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 127 


The antecedent clause also contains a secondary tense 
of the Indicative, implying the non-fulfilment of a con- 
dition, which may be in an apodosis with av or a pro- 
tasis (ὃ 49, 2), or in an expression of a wish (ὃ 83). 


EK. g. | 

‘A μὴ ἐβούλετο δοῦναι, οὐκ ἂν ἔδωκεν, he would not have given 
what he had not wished to give (i. 6. εἴ τινα μὴ ἐβούλετο δοῦναι, οὐκ ἂν 
ἔδωκεν). Οὔτε γὰρ ἂν αὐτοὶ ἐπεχειροῦμεν πράττειν ἃ μὴ ἤπιστά- 
μεθα, οὔτε τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐπετρέπομεν, ὧν ἤρχομε v, ἄλλο τι πράττειν 1 
5 τι πράττοντες ὀρθῶς ἔμελλον πράξειν " τοῦτο δ᾽ ἦν ἂν, ov ἐπιστη- 
μην εἶχον, for (uf that were so) we should not be undertaking (as we 
are) to do things which we did not understand, nor should we permit 
any others whom we were ruling to do anything else than what they 
were likely to do properly ; and this would be whatever they had knowl- 
edge of. Prat. Charm. 171 E. (Here ἃ μὴ ἠπιστάμεθα = εἰ τινα 
μὴ ἠπιστάμεθα, if there were any things which we did not ansat ὧν 
ἤρχομεν = εἴ τινων ἤρχομεν. --- ὅ τι ἔμελλον = εἰ τι ἔμελλον, — and ov 
ἐπιστήμην εἶχον = εἴ τινος εἶχον. It is implied that none of the cases 
here supposed ever actually arose, as the whole passage refers to an 
unfulfilled condition expressed in the preceding sentence.) Et δὲ 
οἴκοι εἶχον ἕκαστοι τὰς δίκας, τούτους ἂν ἀπώλλυσαν οἵτινες φίλοι μάλι- 
στα ἦσαν ᾿Αθηναίων τῷ δήμῳ, υἱ' each had their trials at home, they 
would ruin any who were especially friendly, &c. XEN. Rep. Athen. 
1.16. (Here οἵτινες ἦσαν, = εἴ τινες ἦσαν, forms ἃ second protasis to 
the apodosis ἀπώλλυσαν av. See § 90, 1.) Σ ao ; 

Εἰ ξένος ἐτύγχανον ὧν, ξυνεγιγνώσκετε δήπου ἄν pot, el ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ 
φωνῇ τε καὶ τῷ τρόπῳ ἔλεγον ἐν οἷσπερ ereOpappny, ¥ I happened 
to be a foreigner, you would surely pardon me, if 1 were (now) address- 
ing you in doth the language and the manner in which 1 had been 
brought up. Puat. Apol. 17 D. Qs δὴ ἔγωγ ὄφελον μάκαρός vu τευ 
ἔμμεναι υἱὸς ἀνέρος, ὃν κτεάτεσσιν ἑοῖς ἔπι γῆρας ETETPEDV, O that I 
were the son of some fortunate man, whom old age had found upon his 
own estate (i. e. if old age had found any such man, would that I had 
been his son). Od. I, 217. ae ς- 

So when the relative sentence depends on an indicative in ἃ final 
clause (§ 44, 8); as in Dem. Arist. 635, 15: ταῦτά γε δήπου προσῆκε 
γράψαι, ἵνα ὅτῳ ποτὲ τοὔργον ἐπρᾶχ On, τούτῳ τὰ ἐκ τῶν νόμων ὑπῆρχε 
δίκαια, he ought to have writen τὶ m this way, in order that any one by 
whom the deed had been done might have his rights according to the 
laws. (This implies that the law was not so written, so that the 


case supposed in ὅτῳ ἐπράχθη never arose. ) 


Remark. All examples of this form fall equally well under the 
general rule for assimilation, § 64, 2. 


2. When the relative clause refers distinctly and viv- 
idly to the future (like a protasis of the form § 50, 1), 





128 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 61, 3. 


apd the verb of the antecedent clause also refers to 
. . ὡς ἢ . Ὗ Ν 

the future, the relative is joined with av (or «é) and 

followed by the Subjunctive. E. g. 


5 

Τάων ἥν κ᾽ ἐθέλωμι φίλην ποιήσομ᾽ ἄκοιτιν (like εἴ κέ τινα ἐθέ- 
λωμι), whomsoever of these I may wish I shall make my wife. Il. IX, 
397. Ἔκ yap Ὀρέσταο τίσις ἔσσεται ᾿Ατρείδαο, ὁππότ᾽ ἂν ἡ βήσῃ τε 
καὶ ἧς ἱμείρεται αἴης, i. 6. vengeance will come from Orestes, when 
he shall grow up, &c. (like ἐάν ποτε ἡβήση). Od. 1, 40. Τότε δ᾽ αὖτε 
μαχήσεται, ὁππότε κέν μιν θυμὸς ἐνὶ στήθεσσιν ἀν ὦ γῃ καὶ θεὸς ὄρσῃ. 
Tl. LX, 102. ᾿Αλλ’ ἄγεθ᾽, ὡς ἂν ἐγὼν εἴπω, πειθώμεθα πάντες, let us 
obey as I may direct, 1. 6. if I give any direction (ἐάν πως εἴπω), let us 
obey it. Il. LU, 139. Ἡμεῖς adr’ ἀλόχους re φίλας καὶ νήπια τέκνα 
ἄξομεν ἐν νήεσσιν, ἐπὴν πτολίεθρον ἕλωμεν, when we shall have taken 
the city. Il. IV. 238. So εὖτ᾽ ἂν πίπτωσιν, Il. I, 242. Οὐκοῦν, ὅταν 
δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι, therefore, when I shall have no more 
strength, 1 will cease. Sopu. Ant. 91. Ταῦτα, ἐπειδὰν περὶ τοῦ γένους 
εἴπω, ἐρῶ, I will speak of this, when I shall have spoken about my 
birth. Dem. Eubul. 1303, 25. (See § 20, Note 1.) ᾿Επειδὰν dca- 
πράξωμαι ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω. XEN. An. 11, 3, 29. Τίνα οἴεσθε αὐτὴν 
ψυχὴν ἕξειν, ὅταν ἐμὲ ἴδῃ τῶν πατρῴων ἀπεστερημένον ; what feelings 
do you think she will have, when (or if at any time) she shall see me, 
Χο. Dem. Aph. II, 842, 16. Τούτων δὲ ᾿Αθηναίους φημὶ δεῖν εἶναι 
πεντακοσίους, ἐξ ἧς ἄν τινος ὑμῖν ἡλικίας καλῶς ἔχειν SoKH, from whatever 
age it shall seem good to you to take them (i. 6. if from any particular 
age, &c.) Id. Phil. I, 45, 27. Τῶν πραγμάτων τοὺς βουλευομένους 
(ἡγεῖσθαι δεῖ), ἵνα ἃ ἂν ἐκείνοις δοκῇ ταῦτα πράττηται, in order that 
whatever shall seem good to them shall be done. Ib. 51, 19. Οὔ μοι 
φόβου μέλαθρον ἐλπὶς ἐμπατεῖν, ἕως ἂν αἴθῃ πῦρ ἐφ᾽ ἑστίας ἐμῆς Αἴγι- 
σθος, so long as he shall kindle fire, ἕο. Arscu. Agam. 1488. 


Note. The Future Indicative is rarely, if ever, used in condi- 
tional relative clauses, as in common protasis (§ 50, 1, Note 1), in 
the place of the Subjunctive ; as it would generally be ambiguous, 
appearing as if the antecedent were definite. Ὅσοι βουλήσονται, 
Tuuc. I, 22, is perhaps to be explained in this way. See XEN. 
Cyr. I, 5,13. In such examples as 6 μή τις αὐτὸς παρέσται, un- 
less he was to be present himself, the Future is used as it is in the 
form of protasis explained § 49, 1, N. 3. 


4, When the relative clause refers to the future less 
distinctly and vividly (like a protasis of the form § 50, 
2), and the antecedent clause contains an Optative re- 
ferring to the future, the relative is followed by the 
Optative (without av). 

The Optative in the antecedent clause may be in an 





§ 62.] GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS. 129 


. . ¥ . . 
apodosis with av or ἃ protasis (8 50, 2), in an expres- 
sion of a wish (§ 82), or in a final clause. E. g. 


Maha κεν θρασυκάρδιος εἴη, ὃς τότε γηθήσειεν ἰδὼν πόνον οὐδ 
ἀκάχοιτο (i. 8. εἴ τις γηθήσειε, μάλα κεν θρασυκάρδιος εἴη), any one 
who should then rejoice would be very stout-hearted. Tl. XIII, 848 
So Il. VI, 329 and 521; XIV, 247: Arist. Nub. 1250. Οὐκ ἂν οὖν 
θρέψαις ἄνδρα, ὅστις ἐθέλοι τε καὶ δύναιτο σοῦ ἀπερύκειν τοὺς 
ἐπιχειροῦντας ἀδικεῖν σε; would you not support any man who shoula 
be both willing and able, &e.? XEN. Mem. II, 9,2. Πεινῶν φάγοι ἂν 
ὁπότε βούλοιτο, when he is hungry, he would eat whenever he might 
wish (like ef more βούλοιτο). Ib. II, 1, 18. So Mem. I, 5, 4; I, 7, 
3; IV, 2,20. Πῶς οὖν ἂν εἰδείης περὶ τούτου τοῦ πράγματος, οὗ παν- 
τάπασιν ἄπειρος eins; how then could you know about that thing of 
which you had no experience at all? Puat. Men. 92 C. *Ap’ ἂν 
ἡγοῖο ταῦτα σὰ εἶναι, ἅ σοι ἐξείη καὶ ἀποδόσθαι καὶ δοῦναι καὶ θῦσαι 
ὅτῳ βούλοιο θεῶν; Id. Euthyd. 302 A. Τί ἂν παθεῖν (δύναιτο), ὃ 
μὴ καὶ ὑφ᾽ αὑτοῦ πάθοι; what could he suffer, unless he should suffer 
it also from himself? (i. 6. εἰ μὴ πάθοι). PLAT. Lys. 214 E. “Ὃ δὲ 
μὴ ἀγαπῴη. οὐδ᾽ ἂν φιλοῖ (i. 6. εἴ τε μὴ ἀγαπῴη, οὐδ᾽ ἂν φιλοῖ τοῦτο). 
Ib. 215 Β. Ὅσῳ δὲ πρεσβύτερος γίγνοιτο. μᾶλλον ἀεὶ ἀσπάζοιτο 
ἂν (χρήματα). the older he should grow, the more he would always cling 
fo il (1. 6. εἴ τι πρεσβύτερος γίγνοιτο, τόσῳ μᾶλλον ἀσπάζοιτο ἄν). 
PLAT. Rep. VIII, 549 B. So ΠῚ, 412 D; VIII, δδ7 Β. Φήσομεν 
μηδέποτε μηδὲν ἂν μεῖζον μηδὲ ἔλαττον γενέσθαι, ἕως ἴσον εἴη αὐτὸ 
ἑαυτῷ, so long as it should remain equal to τιϑε. Piat. Theaet. 
155 A. So βουλοίμην κε, . . . ᾧ μὴ εἴη, Od. XI, 489. 

Εἰ δὲ βούλοιο τῶν φίλων τινὰ προτρέψασθαι ὁπότε ἀποδημοίης 
ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῶν σῶν, τί ἂν ποιοίης; XEN. Mem. II, 3,12. Εἰκότως 
ἂν καὶ παρὰ θεῶν πρακτικώτερος εἴη, ὅστις μὴ ὁπότε ἐν ἀπόροις εἴη τότε 
κολακεύοι, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε τὰ ἄριστα πράττοι τότε μάλιστα τῶν θεῶν 
μεμνῷτο. Id. Cyr. 1,6, 8, ‘Qs ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος, ὃ τις τοιαῦτά 
γε ῥέζοι, O that any other man might likewise perish who should do 
the like (i. 6. εἴ τις τοιαῦτα ῥέζοι). Od. I, 47. ᾿Ἐγίγνωσκε δεῖν τοὺς 
ὑπηρέτας τοῦτο ἀσκεῖν, ὡς πάντα νομίζοιεν πρέπειν αὑτοῖς πράττειν ὅσα 
ὁ ἄρχων προστάττοι. XEN. Cyr. I, I, 81. 


ReMARK. All these examples fall also under the general rule for 
assimilation, § 64, 1. 


$62. A conditional relative sentence (like a pro- 
tasis, § 51) may express a general supposition. This 
happens when the verb of the antecedent clause denotes 
a customary or repeated action or a general truth, while 
the relative clause refers indefinitely to any one of a 
series or class of acts, and not to a definite act or a 
definite series of acts. 





PROT PE nee 


παρα 


ee 


130 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 62. 


. . . ἃ ¥ “ . 7 
Here the Subjunctive with ὃς av, orav, ἄρ. 15 used 
. . . ” 
after primary tenses, and the Optative (without av) 
after secondary tenses. ΕἸ. g. 


"ExOpds yap μοι κεῖνος ὁμῶς ᾿Αἴδαο πύλῃσιν, ὅς χ᾽ ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ 
ἐνὶ φρεσὶν, ἄλλο δὲ ein, for that man (i. 6. any man) is hated by me 
like the very gates of Hades, who conceals one thing in his mind and 
speaks another. Il. 1X, 312. Νεμεσσῶμαί ye μὲν οὐδὲν κλαίειν ὅς κε 
θάνῃσι βροτῶν καὶ πότμον ἐνίσπῃ: I am never at ail indignant at 
weeping for any mortal who may die, &c. Od. IV, 195. Καὶ yap συμ- 
payeiv τούτοις ἐθέλουσιν ἅπαντες, obs ἂν ὁρῶσι παρεσκευασμένους, for 
all men are (always) willing to be allies to those whom they see prepared. 
Dem. Phil. I, 42,1. Καίπερ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ev ᾧ μὲν ἂν πολεμῶσι, 
τὸν παρόντα (πόλεμον) ἀεὶ μέγιστον κρινόντων, although men always 
consider the present war the greatest, so long as they are engaged in it. 
Tuuc. I, 21. Πυρεύονταί re yap ai ἀγέλαι ἡ ἂν αὐτὰς εὐθύνωσιν οἱ 
νομεῖς; νέμονταί τε χωρία ἐφ᾽ ὁποῖα ἂν αὐτὰς ἐφιῶσιν; ἀπέχονταί τε 
ὧν ἂν αὐτὰς ἀπείργωσι᾽" καὶ τοῖς καρποῖς ἐῶσι τοὺς νομέας χρῆσθαι 
οὕτως ὅπως ἂν αὐτοὶ βούλωνται" ἄνθρωποι “δὲ er οὐδένας μᾶλλον 
συνίστανται ἢ ἐπὶ τούτους ods ἂν αἴσθωνται ἄρχειν αὐτῶν ἐπιχειροῦν- 
ras. XEN. Cyr. 1, 1, 3. Νομίζω προστάτου ἔργον εἶναι οἵου δεῖ, ὃς 
ἂν ὁρῶν τοὺς φίλους ἐξαπατωμένους μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ, i. 6. such as one ought 
always to be, who, &c. Id. Hell. Η, 3, 51. Καταφρόνησις δὲ (ἐγγί- 
yverat), ὃς ἂν καὶ γνώμῃ πιστε ύῃ τῶν ἐναντίων προέχειν, ὃ ἡμῖν ὑπάρ- 
χει. Tuuc. Il, 62. (Here the ὅ refers to all that precedes, as a 
definite antecedent.) 

Οὐ μὲν yap μεῖζον κλέος ἀνέρος, ὄφρα κ᾽ ἔῃσιν; ἢ ὅ τι ποσσίν τε 
péén καὶ χερσίν. Od. VIII, 147. ("Odpa κ᾽ ἔῃσιν, so long as he 
lives.) (Θεοὺς) παρατρωπῶσ᾽ ἄνθρωποι λισσόμενοι; ὅτε κέν Tis ὕὑπερ- 
βήῃ καὶ ἁμάρτῃ. Ul. IX, 500. ἭΜμισυ γάρ τ’ ἀρετῆς ἀποαίνυται 
εὐρύοπα Ζεὺς ἀνέρος, εὖτ᾽ ἄν μιν κατὰ δούλιον ἦμαρ ἕλῃσιν. Od. 
XVII, 322. Φιλέει δέ κως προσημαίνειν, εὖτ᾽ dv μέλλῃ μεγάλα κακὰ 
ἢ πόλι ἢ ἔθνει ἔσεσθαι. Hor. VI, 27. Φεύγουσι γάρ τοι χοὶ θρασεῖς, 
ὅταν πέλας ἤδη τὸν Αιἰδην εἰσορῶσι τοῦ βίου. SOPH. Ant. 580. 
Ἡνίκ᾽ ἂν δ᾽ οἴκοι γένωνται, δρῶσιν οὐκ ἀνασχετά. Arist. Pac. 
1179. Ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἡ ἐκφορὰ 7, Adpvaxas ἄγουσιν ἅμαξαι. THUC. 
ΤΙ, 34. Ἐπειδὰν δὲ κρύψωσι γῇ; ἀνὴρ ἡρημένος ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως, 
ὃς ἂν γνώμῃ τε δοκῇ μὴ ἀξύνετος εἶναι, λέγει ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἔπαινον τὸν 
πρέποντα. Ibid. Ἕως ἂν σώζηται τὸ σκάφος, τότε χρὴ προθύμους 
εἶναι" ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἡ θάλαττα ὑπέρσχῃ; μάταιος ἡ σπουδή. DEM. 
Phil. ΠΙ, 128, 22. So ἔστ᾽ ἂν δείσωσιν;:; Xen. Mem. III, 5, 6. 

Οὔ τινα γὰρ τίεσκον ἐπιχθονίων ἀνθρώπων, οὐ κακὸν οὐδὲ μὲν ἐσθλὸν, 
ὅ τίς σφεας εἰσαφίκοιτο; i. 6. they were never in the habit of honor- 
ing any one who came to them. Od. XXII, 414. Kai obs μὲν ἴδοι 
εὐτάκτως καὶ σιωπῇ ἰόντας, προσελαύνων αὐτοῖς τίνες τε εἶεν ἠρώτα, καὶ 
ἐπεὶ πύθοιτο ἐπήνει. XEN. Cyr. V,3. 55. (Here ἠρώτα and ἐπήνει 
denote the habit of Cyrus.) Καὶ τοῖς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίοις ηὔξετο τὸ ναυτικὸν 
ἀπὸ τῆς δαπάνης ἣν ἐκεῖνοι ξυμφέροιεν; αὐτοὶ δὲ, ὁπότε ἀποσταῖεν; 
ἀπαράσκευοι καὶ ἄπειροι ἐς τὸν πόλεμον καθίσταντο, and the Athenian 




















62. ] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 131 


navy continued to increase from the money which these contributed, and 
they, whenever they revolted, always found themselves unprepared and 
inexperienced for war. Tuuc. I, 99. 

Ἐπὶ Moiptos βασιλέος, ὅκως ἔλθοι ὁ ποταμὸς ἐπ᾿ ὀκτὼ πήχεας, 
ἄρδεσκε Αἴγυπτον τὴν ἔνερθε Μέμφιος, i. 6. whenever the river rose. 
Hor. II, 13. Τὸν δὲ χοῦν τὸν expopedpevor, ὅκως γίνοιτο νὺξ, és 
τὸν Τίγριν ἐξεφόρεον, 1. 6. they carried ut away every night. Id. 1. 
150. Οἱ δὲ (Κᾶρες), ὅκως Μίνως δέοιτο, ἐπλήρουν οἱ τὰς νέας. 14. 
I, 171. Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀνοιχθείη; εἰσήειμεν παρὰ τὸν Σωκράτη, 1. 6. 
each morning, when the prison was opened, &c. PLAT. Phaed. 59 D. 
"Ore ἔξω τοῦ δεινοῦ γένοιντο; πολλοὶ αὐτὸν ἀπέλειπον; Many (always) 
left him, when they were out of danger. Xen. An. UH, 6, 12. (if 
ἐγένοντο had been used, the whole sentence would refer to a particu- 
lar case in which many left him.) 


Remark. The gnomic Aorist, and the other gnomic and 
iterative tenses of § 30, can be used in the antecedent clause of 
these general propositions. The gnomic Aorist, as usual, is ἃ 
primary tense. (See ὃ 32,2.) E.g. 

Ὅς xe θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται; μάλα τ᾽ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ, whoever obeys 
the Gods, to him they are ready to listen. Il. I, 218. Ὅταν τις ὥσπερ 
οὗτος ἰσχύσῃ; ἡ πρώτη πρόφασις ἅπαντα ἀνεχαίτισε καὶ διέλυ- 
σεν. Dem. Ol. II, 20, 27. Ὁπότε προσβλέψειέ τινας τῶν ἐν ταῖς 
τάξεσι, εἶπεν ἂν, ὦ ἄνδρες, κι τ. Δ.» 1. 6. he used to say, Χο. XEN. 
Cyr. VII, 1, 10. (See ὃ 80, 2.) Οὔτ᾽ ἄλλοτε πώποτε πρὸς χάριν 


ε 
J 


εἱλόμην λέγειν, 6 τι ἂν μὴ καὶ συνοίσειν πεπεισμένος ὦ, I have never on 
other occasions preferred to say anything in order to please, unless I 
have been convinced that it would also be for your advantage. DEM. 
Phil. I, 54, 27. (Here εἱλόμην is used in a sense approaching that 
of the gnomic Aorist, so as to be followed by a Subjunctive. See 
§ 30, 1, N. 1.) 


Nore 1. The Indicative is sometimes used instead of the 
Subjunctive and Optative in relative sentences of this class. 
(See § 51, N. 3.) Here the speaker refers to one of the cases 
in which the event in question is liable to occur, as if it were 
the only case, instead of referring indefinitely to all possible 
cases alike (as when the Subjunctive or Optative is used). 
This use of the Indicative occurs especially after the indefinite 
relative ὅστις ; as the idea of indefiniteness, which is usually 
expressed by the Subjunctive or Optative, is here sufficiently 
expressed by the relative itself. LE. g. 

᾿Εχθρὸς γάρ pot κεῖνος ὁμῶς Aidao πύλῃσιν 
Γίγνεται, ὃς πενίῃ εἴκων ἀπατήλια βάζει. Od. XIV, 156 
vompare this with the first example (Il. LX, 312) under § 62. 








RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 62 


Ἐμοὶ yap ὅστις πᾶσαν εὐθύνων πόλιν 

Μὴ τῶν ἀρίστων ἅπτεται βουλευμάτων, 

᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐκ φόβου του γλῶσσαν ἐγκλείσας ἔ EXEL, 

Κάκιστος εἶναι νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ" 

Καὶ μείζον᾽ ὅστις ἀντὶ τῆς αὑτοῦ πάτρας 

Φίλον νομίζει, τοῦτον οὐδαμοῦ λέγω. SopH. Ant. 178. 


(Here we might have had ὃς av. . . μὴ ἅπτηται; GAA s2 5 ἔχη; and 
ὃς ἂν νομίζῃ, without any essential difference i in meaning.) 
Οἵτινες πρὸς τὰς ξυμφορὰς γνώμῃ μὲν ἥκιστα λυποῦνται; ἔργῳ δὲ 
μάλιστα ἀντέ ουσιν;, οὗτοι καὶ πόλεων καὶ ἰδιωτῶν κράτιστοί εἰσιν. 
Pace. II, 64. So in the same chapter, ὅστις λαμβάνει. ἜἜθαπτον 
τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ὁπόσους ἐπελάμβανεν ἡ στρατιά, they con- 
tinued to bury in the same way as many as the army took up. XEN. 
An. VI, 5, 6. (Here ἐπιλαμβάνοι might have been used.) Ὅστις 
δ᾽ ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτὸν, πάντας ἀπεπέμπετο. 
Ib. I, 1, 5. Ὅπου δὲ χιλὸς σπάνιος πάνυ εἴη, αὐτὸς δ᾽ ἐ ἐδύνατο παρα- 
σκευάσασθαι, διαπέμπων ἐκέλευε τοὺς φίλους i ἱπποις ἐμβάλλειν τοῦτον. 
Ib. I, 9, 27. (In the last two examples there is some Ms. authority 
for the more regular ἀφικνοῖτο and δύναιτο.) See also An. I, 9, 13. 
All these examples fall under the first class of conditional celadive 


sentences, § 61,1. Soin common protasis, § 51, N. 3. 


Note 2. The Greek generally uses the Indicative in relative 

clauses depending on general negative sentences, where in Latin a 
Subjunctive is more common. E. g. 
Παρ’ ἐμοὶ δὲ οὐδεὶς μισθοφορεῖ, ὅστις μὴ ἱκανός ἐστιν ἴσα πονεῖν ἐμοί, 
1. Θ. no one who is not able (no one unless he is able), nemo qui non 
possit. XEN. Hell. VI, 1.5. These sentences are regular protases, 
and belong under the rule of § 61,1. (See Note 1.) 


Norte 3. (a.) In Homer, similes and comparisons are often 
expressed by the Subjunctive after as, ὥς τε, ὡς ὅτε, ὡς ὅς 
(seldom, ὡς ἄν, &c.), where we should expect the Present In- 
dicative, which sometimes occurs. Besides the singular use of 
the Subjunctive in these expressions, the omission of dy or κέ is 
especially to be noticed. (See § 63,1.) E. g. 

Ὡς δὲ γυνὴ κλαίῃσι φίλον πόσιν ἀμφιπεσοῦσα, 
Ὅς τε ἑῆς πρόσθεν πόλιος λαῶν τεπέσῃησιν; 


“Ως ᾿Οδυσεὺς ἐλεεινὸν ὑπ᾽ ὀφρύσι δάκρυον εἶβεν, 
Ulysses wept as a wife weeps, &c. Od. VIII, 523-531. 


Ὡς δ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ὐπωρινὸς Βορέης φορέῃσιν ἀκάνθας 

"Apu πεδίον, πυκιναὶ δὲ πρὸς ἀλλήλῃσιν ἔ ἔχονται, 

“ως τὴν ἂμ πέλαγος a ἄνεμοι φέρον ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα. Od. V, 328. 
Ὡς δ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἂν ἀστράπτῃ πόσις Ἥρης ἠυκόμοιο, “a 

“Ὡς πυκίν᾽ ἐν στήθεσσιν ἀνεστενάχιζ᾽ bas “alae Il. bs 5-9. 


Oi δ᾽, ὥς τ᾽ ἀμητῆρες ἐναντίοι ἀλλήλοισιν ὄγμον ἐλαύνωσιν. ὡς 




















§ 63, 2.7 CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 133 


Ses καὶ ᾿Αχαιοὶ én’ ἀλλήλοισι θορόντες δήουν. Il. ΧΙ, 67-71. See 
a Il, XII, 167-172. 


(b.) In many cases the Subjunctive or the Present Indica- 
tive is followed by the gnomic Aorist in the same simile, the 
Aorist being merely amore vivid form of expression than the 
others. (See § 8 30, 1, Notes 2 and 3.) E.g 


Ὡς δ᾽ ὅτε καπνὸς ἰὼν eis ov ρανὸν εὑρὺν ἵκηται 

Αστεος αἰθομένοιο, θεῶν δέ ἑ μῆνις ἀνῆκεν; 

Πᾶσι δ᾽ ἔθηκε πόνον, πολλοῖσι δὲ κήδε' ἐφῆκεν, 

Ως ᾿Αχιλεὺς Τρώεσσι πόνον καὶ κήδε ἔθηκεν. 1]. XXI, 522, 


Ὁ δ᾽ ἐν κονίῃσι χαμαὶ πέσεν, αἴγειρος ὡς, 
Η part ἐν εἱαμενῇ ἕλεος μεγάλοιο πεφύκῃ 
ein, ἀτάρ τέ οἱ ὄζοι ἐπ᾽ ἀκροτάτῃ πεφύασιν" 
Τὴν μὲν θ᾽ ἁρματοπηγὸς ἀνὴρ αἴθωνι σιδήρῳ 
᾿ξέταμ' , ὄφρα ἴτυν κάμψῃ περικαλλέι δίφρῳ " 
‘H μέν τ᾽ ἀζομένη κεῖται ποταμοῖο map ὄχθας " 
Τοῖον ἄρ᾽ ᾿Ανθεμίδην were ἐξενάριξεν 
Αἴας διογενὴς. Il. IV, 


Ψ 


8 63. 1. (a.) In Homer, the relatives (like εἰ) often take 
the Subjunctive without ἄν or κέ, the sense being apparently the 
same as when ἄν is used. (§ 50,1, N. 2.) E. g. 

Ὅττι μάλ᾽ ov δηναιὸς, ὃς ἀθανάτοισι μάχηται. Il. V, 407. 

᾿Ανθρώπους ἐφορᾷ, καὶ τίνυται ὅς τις ἁμάρτῃ. Θά. XI, 214, 

Ζεὺς δ᾽ αὐτὸς νέμει ὄλβον ᾿Ολύμπιος ἀνθρώποισιν, 


᾿Εσθλοῖς ἠδὲ κακοῖσιν, ὅπως ἐθέλῃ σιν: ἑκάστῳ. Od. VI, 188. 
Ov μὴν σοί ποτε ἶσον ἔχω γέρας, ὁππότ᾽ ᾿Αχαιοὶ 

Τρώων ἐκπέρσωσ᾽ εὐναιόμενον πτολίεθρον. Ii. I, 163. 

οὐ μὲν γάρ ποτέ φησι κακὸν πείσεσθαι ὀπίσσω, 

"Οφρ᾽ ἀρετὴν παρέχωσι θεοὶ καὶ γούνατ᾽ ὀρώρ 


so long as the Gods shall supply valor, ἕο. Od. XVM. 132. 
(.) The same omission of ἄν is not uncommon in the Attic 


poets; and even in prose a few exceptional cases occur, if we 


follow the Mss. (ὃ 50,1, N. 3). E. g. 


Γέροντα δ᾽ ὀρθοῦν φλαῦρον, 6 ὃς νέος πέσῃ. Sopa. O. ©. 395. Τῶν 
de πημονῶν μάλιστα λυποῦσ᾽ at φανῶσ᾽ αὐθαίρετοι. Id. O. i. 1231. 
Τοῖσι γὰρ μήτε ἄστεα μήτε τείχεα ἦ ἐκτισμένα, . . + - κῶς οὐκ ἂν εἴησαν 
οὗτοι ἄμαχοι; Hpr. IV, 46. (See § θ8, 4, α.) ᾿ἘἘπιχώριον ὃν ἡμῖν 
οὗ μὲν βραχεῖς ἀρκῶσι μὴ πολλοῖς χρῆσθαι, it being our national halit 
not to use many words where few suffice. Tuvce. IV,17. (Yet the 


sentence continues, πλείοσι δὲ ἐν ᾧ ἂν καιρὸς 7, κι τ.λ. ) See § 66,4, N. 


2. The adverb ἄν is sometimes used with the Optative or 
Indicative in conditional relative clauses, when the relative 








Re ied is. - ate 


crmwnan Ὁ. 


A IM et ata Nain νῷ. 


oe 


134 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 63, 2. 


clause is itself an apodosis, with a protasis expressed or im- 
plied. In Homer κέ with the Optative sometimes occurs where 
there is no apodosis, as in common protasis. (See § 50, 2, 


Ν. 2, α, δ.) Evg. 


Ἔξ ὧν ἄν τις εὖ λέγων διαβάλλοι, ἐκ τούτων αὐτοὺς πείσεσθαι 
(ἔφη), he said that they would form their opinion upon any slanders 
which any good speaker might (if he pleased) chance to utter. Tuuc. 
Vil, 48. But in Od. I, 54, ὥς κε... «-. δοίη ᾧ κ᾽ ἐθέλοι, that he 
might give her to any one he pleased, & x’ ἐθέλοι does not differ from 
the ordinary ᾧ ἐθέλοι --- εἴ τινε ἐθέλοι. In Dem. Phil. I, 41, 3, οἷον 
ἂν βούλοισθε is merely a conjectural emendation for οἷον ἂν βού- 
Anode, which is a regular example illustrating § 62. Ὅντιν ἂν 
ὑμεῖς εἰς ταύτην τὴν τάξιν κατεστήσατε, οὗτος τῶν ἴσων αἴτιος ἦν ἂν 
κακῶν ὅσωνπερ καὶ οὗτος, any one soever whom you might have ap- 
pointed (if you had chosen) to this post would have been the cause of 
as great calamities as this man has been. Dem. F. L. 350, 83, (With- 
out the ἄν after ὅντινα, this would have been a regular example 
under § 61, 2, ὅντινα κατεστήσατε being equivalent to εἴ τινα ἄλλον 
κατεστήσατε, if you had appointed any one else (which you did not do). 
With the dy, it is itself an apodosis with a suppressed protasis; un- 
less we can suppose that the ἄν was used, like κέ in the Homeric ex- 
ample, without affecting the sense. See § 49, 2, N. 4.) 


3. A conditional relative clause, like a common protasis, 
may depend upon an Infinitive or Participle (with or without 


dy), or upon a final clause. See the last three examples under 
§ 61,3. (Compare § 53; § 55, 2.) 


4, The conditional relative clause may have a form different 
from that of its apodosis. This happens under the same cir- 
cumstances as in common protasis. (See § 54.) 


(a.) An Indicative or Subjunctive in the relative clause may de- 
pend upon an Optative with ἄν in the apodosis, either when the 
expressed apodosis belongs to an implied protasis (8 54, 1, a), or 
when the Optative with ἄν is considered a primary tense, from its 
resemblance in sense to the Future Indicative (54, 1, δ). See also 
ὃ 84,1, ὃ. E.g. 


Οὐκοῦν καὶ τὸ ὑγιαίνειν καὶ τὸ νοσεῖν, ὅταν ἀγαθοῦ τινος αἴτια γί- 
γνηται, ἀγαθὰ ἂν εἴη, i. 6. when they prove to be the causes of any good, 
they would be good things (if we should accept your doctrine). XEN. 
Mem. IV, 2. 32. So Mem. II, 2, 3; and Puar. Rep. Il, 379 B, 
᾿Εγὼ δὲ ταύτην μὲν τὴν εἰρήνην, ἕως ἂν εἷς ᾿Αθηναίων λείπηται, οὐδέ- 
ποτ᾽ ἂν συμβουλεύσαιμι ποιήσασθαι τῇ πόλει, I would never advise the 
city to make this peace, so long as a single Athenian shall be left. Dem. 
F. L. 345, 14. (Here ἕως λείποιτο, so long as one should be left, 
would be more regular.) So Arist. Nub. 1151; Sopu. El. 697, 











§ 64,1.] CONDITIONAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 139 


(b.) The Optative (without ἄν) in the relative clause occasionally 
depends upon a primary tense in the apodosis. hig may arise from 
the slight distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in such 
sentences (8 54, 2, a); asin Il. XIII, 317, αἰπύ oi ἐσσεῖται νῆας ἐνι- 
πρῆσαι, ὅτε μὴ αὐτός γε Κρονίων ἐμβάλοι αἰθόμενον δαλὸν νήεσσι; it will 
be a hard task for him, unless the son of Kronos should hurl, &c. 
(More regularly, dre xe μὴ ἐμβάλῃ, unless he shall hurl, &c.) 

The Optative in the Relative clause sometimes depends on a 
verb of necessity, obligation, propriety, possibility, &c. with an Infini- 
tive, the two forming an expression that is nearly equivalent in sense 
to an Optative with ἄν, which would be expected in their place 
(§ 54, 2,6). E.g. 

᾿Αλλ᾽ ὃν πόλις στήσειε; τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν, we should obey any one 
whom the state appoints (if the state should appoint any one, we ought 
to obey him). Sopu. Ant. 666. (Χρὴ κλύειν 18. followed by the 
Optative from its resemblance in sense to δικαίως ἂν κλύοι τις.) 
᾿Αλλὰ τοῦ μὲν αὐτὸν λέγειν ἃ μὴ σαφῶς εἰδείη φείδεσθαι δεῖ, 1. Θ. we 
ought to abstain, &c.; like φείδοιτο ἄν τις. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 19. Ous 
δὲ ποιήσασθαΐ τις βούλοιτο συνεργοὺς προθύμους, τουτοὺυς παντάπασιν 
ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ ἀγαθοῖς θηρατέον εἰναι. Ib. Il, 4. 10. (Here θηρατέον 
εἶναι = θηρᾶν δεῖν.) Ὑπερορᾶν ov δυνατὸν ὑμῶν ἀνδρὶ os εἰ Sein κυρίους 
ὄντας ὅ τι βούλεσθε αὐτῷ χρῆσθαι. Id. Hell. VIl, 3, 7. 

5. The Indicative is generally used in Greek (as in Latin) 
in parenthetical relative clauses, like 6 τι ποτ᾽ ἐστίν, whatever it 
ts (quidquid est), ὅστις ποτ᾽ ἐστίν (or ἔσται), ἕο. EH. g. 

Ζεὺς. ὅστις mor ἐστὶν, εἰ τόδ᾽ αὐτῷ φίλον κεκλημένῳ, τοῦτό νιν 
προσεννέπω, Zeus, whoever he may be, &e. ArscH. Agam. 160. 
Δουλεύομεν θεοῖς, 5 τι ποτ᾽ εἰσὶν θεοί. Eur. Orest. 418. 


The Subjunctive, however, sometimes occurs ; in which case the 
expression belongs under § 62 or § 61, 3: as in AESCHIN. Tim. § 127, 
ἀλλ᾽ ὁ προσαψάμενος αὐτῶν kal παρατυχὼν, ooTis ἂν ἢ; λόγον παρεχει- 
So Dem. Phil. I, 47, 24. 


Assimilation in Dependent Relative Clauses. 


8 64. 1. When a conditional relative clause referring to 
the future depends on a Subjunctive or Optative referring to 
the future, it regularly takes by assimilation the same mood 
with its leading verb. Such a leading verb may be in pro- 
tasis or apodosis, in another conditional relative clause, in 
the expression of a wish (ὃ 82), or in a final clause. E. g. 


Ἐάν tives oft ἂν δύνωνται τοῦτο ποιῶσι, καλῶς ἕξει, tf any who shall 
be able do this, it will be well. Et τινες οἱ δύναιντο τοῦτο ποιοίεν, 
καλῶς ἂν ἔχοι, if any who should be able should do this, i wauld 5e 





nt eaten be tnentisiaiitimrianaie Sent 
AA NE NE BG 


Say κυ ρήβηρμις 


130 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [8 64, 1]. 


well. Eide πάντες of δύναιντο τοῦτο ποιοῖεν, O that all who may be 
able would do this. (Here the principle of assimilation makes οἱ 
δύναιντο after an Optative preferable to ot ἂν δύνωνται, which would 
express the same idea.) So in Latin: Si absurde canat is qui se 
haberi velit musicum, turpior sit.— Sic injurias fortunae quas ferre 
nequeas defugiendo relinquas. 

For examples see § 61, 3 and 4. 


2. When a conditional relative clause depends on a secondary 
tense of the Indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condi- 
tion, it regularly takes a secondary tense of the Indicative by 
assimilation. The leading Indicative may be in protasis or 
apodosis (ὃ 49, 2), in another conditional relative clause 
(8 61, 2), in an expression of a wish (§ 83), or in a final clause 
(§ 44,3). Evg. 


Ei τινες of ἐδύναντο τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, καλῶς ἂν ἔσχεν, if any who had 
been able had done this, it would have been well. Eide πάντες. ot ἐδύ - 
ναντο τοῦτο ἔπραξαν, O that all who had been able had done this. So 
in Latin: Nam si solos eos diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset, 
neminem tu quidem eorum qui viverent exciperes. 


Remark 1. It will be seen that this principle of assimilation 
accounts for the Indicative and Optative in a conditional relative 
sentence, which have been already explained by the analogy of the 
ordinary forms of protasis. (See § 61, 2 and 4.) In fact, wherever 
this assimilation occurs, the relative clause stands as a protasis to its 
antecedent clause, although the latter may be itself a protasis to 
another apodosis. (See § 34.) Occasionally this principle is dis- 
regarded, so that a Subjunctive depends on an Optative. (See the 
examples under § 34, 1, b, and § 63, 4, a.) 


REMARK 2. The Indicative in the construction of § 61, 1, refer- 
ring sumply to the present or past, cannot be affected by assimila- 
tion, as that would change its time. ΕἸ. g. 

Myr’ ἐμοὶ παρέστιος γένοιτο, μήτ᾽ ἴσον φρονῶν, ὃς τάδ᾽ ἔρδ ει (i. 6. 
εἴ τις τάδ᾽ ἔρδει). Sopu. Ant. 372. 


Note 1. The principle of § 64 applies only to conditional rela- 
tive clauses. If the relative refers to a definite antecedent, so that 
its verb denotes a fact and not a supposition, the principle of assimi- 
lation does not apply, and the Indicative (or any other construction 
required by the sense, § 59, N. 1) is used. E. g. 


Ei τῶν πολιτῶν οἷσι νῦν πιστεύομεν, τούτοις ἀπιστήσαιμεν, οἷς 
δ᾽ οὐ χρώμεθα, τούτοισι χρησαίμεσθα, σωθείημεν ἄν. Arist. Ran. 
1440, Εἴθ᾽ ἦσθα δυνατὸς δρᾶν ὅσον πρόθυμος εἶ, O that thou couldst 
do as much as thou art eager to do. Eur. Heracl. 731. (If the Im- 
perfect had been used by assimilation, the meaning would be as 
“auch as thou wert (or mightest be) eager to do.) 











§ 65, 1. ASSIMILATION. — Aé IN APODOSIS. 137 
9 


Note 2. Conditional relative clauses depending on a Sub- 
junctive or Optative in a general supposition (§ 51, § 62) 
are generally assimilated to the Subjunctive or Optative; but 
sometimes they take the Indicative on the principle of § 62, 
Note l. E. g. 


Οὐδ᾽, ἐπειδὰν ὧν ἂν πρίηται κύριος γένηται, τῷ προδότῃ συμβούλῳ 
περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν ἔτι χρῆται. ἘΜ. Cor. 241, 15. See Piat. Rep. 
VI, ὅ08 C and D; Charm. 164 Β. ῳὉ δὲ τότε μάλιστα ἔχαιρεν, ὁπότε 
τάχιστα τυχόντας ὧν δέοιντο ἀποπέμποι. XEN. Ages. IX, 2. 

Airia μὲν γάρ ἐστιν, ὅταν τις WAG χρησάμενος λόγῳ μὴ παράσχηται. 
πίστιν ὧν λέγει, ἔλεγχος δὲ, ὅταν ὧν ἂν εἴπῃ τις καὶ τἀληθὲς ὁμοῦ 
δείξῃ. Dem. Androt. 600, 5. (Here ὧν λέγει and ὧν ἂν εἴπῃ are 
nearly equivalent.) ᾿Ἐκάλει δὲ καὶ ἐτίμα ὁπότε τινὰς ἴδοι τοιοῦτον 
ποιήσαντας ὃ πάντας ἐβούλετο ποιεῖν. ΧΕΝ. Cyr. Il, 1, 30. (Here 
βούλοιτο for ἐβούλετο would have corresponded to δέοιντο in the 
second example quoted.) 





Remark. The conjunction δέ is occasionally used to intro- 
duce the clause on which a relative depends. Its force here is 
the same as in apodosis. (See ὃ 57.) E. g. 


< 


Οἴη περ φύλλων γενεὴ, τοίη Sé καὶ ἀνδρῶν. Tl. VI, 146. Ἐπεί re ὁ 
πόλεμος κατέστη, ὁ ὃ ὲ φαίνεται καὶ ἐν τούτῳ προγνοὺς τὴν δύναμιν, and 
when the war broke out, (then) he appears, &c. Tuuce. Il, 65. Μέχρι 
μὲν οὖν of τοξόται εἶχον τε τὰ βέλη αὐτοῖς καὶ οἷοί τε ἦσαν χρῆσθαι, οἱ 
ὃ ἐ ἀντεῖχον, so long as their archers both had their arrows and were 
able to use them, they held out. Id. II, 98. “Ὥσπερ of ὁπλῖται, οὕτω 
ὃ ἐ καὶ oi πελτασταί. XEN. Cyr. VII, 5,12. So φαίνονται δέ, Tove. 
I, 11; and ἐγίγνοντο δέ, AEScHIN. Cor. ὃ 69. 


Relative Clauses expressing a Purpose, Result, &c. 


§ 608. 1. The relative is used with the Future In- 
dicative to denote a purpose or olject. KE. g. 


Πρεσβείαν δὲ πέμπειν, ἥτις ταῦτ᾽ ἐρεῖ καὶ παρέσται τοῖς πρά- 
γμασιν, and to send an embassy to say these things, and to be present αἱ 
the transaction. Dem. Ol. I, 10,1. nyt δὴ δεῖν ἡμᾶς πρὸς Θεττα- 
Aovs πρεσβείαν πέμπειν, ἣ τοὺς μὲν διδάξει ταῦτα, τοὺς δὲ mapo 
ξυνεῖ. Ib. I, 21,10. "Εδοξε τῷ δήμῳ τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθαι, οἵ 
τοὺς πατρίους νόμους ξυγγράψουσι, καθ᾽ οὗς πολιτεύσουσι. 
XEN. Hell. ἢ], 8, 2. Οὐ γὰρ ἔστι μοι χρήματα, ὁπόθεν ἐκτίσω, for l 
have no money to pay the fine with. Prat. Apol. 37 C, 








138 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 65, 1. 


The antecedent of the relative, in this case, may be either definite 
or indefinite; but the negative particle is regularly pq, as in final 
clauses (8 43, N. 2). 


REMARK. Ὅπως as a relative is sometimes used in this construc- 
tion in a way which illustrates its use as a final particle. (See § 45, 
Rem.) E. g. 

Ποίεε δὲ οὕτω ὅκως τῶν σῶν ἐνδεήσει μηδέν, and act so that there 
shall be nothing wanting on your part; lit. act in that way by which, 
&e. Hot. ΥἹΙ, 18. Τὸ οὕτως ἐπίστασθαι ἀνθρώπων ἄλλων προστατεύ- 
ew ὅπως ἕξουσι πάντα τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, . . . τοῦτο θαυμαστὸν ἐφαίνετο, 
i. 6. in such a way that they shall have, &c. ΧῈΝ. Cyr. 1, 6, 7. So 
Cyr. I, 4, 31. 


Nore. 1. (a.) The Future Indicative is the only form regularly 
used in prose after the relative in this sense. It is retained even 
after secondary tenses, seldom being changed to the Future Opta- 
tive, which would here be expected by § 31, 2, and by the analogy 
of clauses with ὅπως (8 45). The Future Optative, however, 18 
found in Soru. O. T. 796, ἔφευγον ἔνθα μήποτ᾽ ὀψ οίμην oveidn, — 
and probably in Puat. Rep. IL, 416 C, φαίη av τις δεῖν καὶ Tas οἰκή- 
σεις καὶ τὴν ἄλλην οὐσίαν τοιαύτην αὐτοῖς παρασκευάσασθαι, ἥτις μήτε 
τοὺς φύλακας ὡς ἀρίστους εἶναι παύσοι αὐτοὺς, κακουργεῖν τε μὴ 
ἐπαροῖ περὶ τοὺς ἄλλους πολίτας. 


(b.) When, however, this Future is quoted indirectly after a past 
tense, or depends upon a clause expressing a past purpose (which 
is equivalent to standing in indirect discourse, § 26, N. 1), it is 
sometimes changed to the Future Optative, like any other Future 
Indicative. Ε g. 

Ἐσκόπει ὅπως ἔσοιτο αὐτῷ ὅστις ζῶντά TE γηροτροφήσοι καὶ 
τελευτήσαντα Gayot αὐτόν. 54Ε. de. Menecl. Her.§ 10. Αἱρεθέντες 
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε ξυγγράψαι νόμους, καθ᾽ οὕστινας πολιτεύσοιντο; having 
been chosen with the condition that they should compile the laws by which 
they were to govern. XEN. Hell. II, 3,11. (This is a sort of indirect 
quotation of the sentence which appears in its direct form in Hell. 
iL 3, 2, the example under § 65, 1.) 


Note 2. In Homer, the Future Indicative is sometimes used 
in this sense ; as in Od. XIV, 333, émapréas, of δή μιν πέμψον- 
σιν. Sometimes the Optative with κέ, as an apodosis, takes 
the place of the Future ; as in Od. IV, 167, ἄλλοι οἵ κεν ἀλάλ- 
cov. ‘The more common Epic construction is, however, the 
Subjunctive (generally with κέ joined to the relative) after 
primary tenses, and the Optative (Present or Aorist, never 
Future), without κέ, after secondary tenses. E. g. 

Ἕλκος δ᾽ ἰητὴρ ἐπιμάσσεται, ἠδ᾽ ἐπιθήσει 
Φάρμαχ᾽, ἅ κεν παύσῃσι μελαινάων ὀδυνάων. Il. IV, 191. 














8 65, 1.7 RELATIVE CLAUSES EXPRESSING A PURIOSE. 139 


᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄγετε, KANTOUS ὀτρύνομεν, οἵ κε τάχιστα 

"Ἔλθωσ᾽ ἐς κλισίην Πηληιάδεω ᾿Αχιλῆος. I. TX, 165. 
"Ἔκδοτε, καὶ τιμὴν ἀποτινέμεν ἣν τιν᾽ ἔοικεν, 

Ἥ τε καὶ ἐσσομένοισι μετ᾽ ἀθανάτοισι πέληται. Il. 1Π|, 459. 
“Ayyedov ἧκαν, ὃς ἀγγείλειε γυναικί. Od. XV, 458. 
Πάπτηνεν δ᾽ ἀνὰ πύργον ᾿Αχαιῶν, εἴ τιν᾽ ἴδοιτο 

Ἡγεμόνων, ὅς τίς οἱ ἀρὴν ἑτάροισιν ἀμύναι. Il. XU, 332. 


ReMARK. It will be noticed that the earlier Greek here agrees 
with the Latin (in using the Subjunctive and Optative), while the 
Attic Greek differs from the Latin by using the more vivid Future 
Indicative. 


Nore 3. (a.) The Attic Greek allows the Subjunctive in such 
phrases as ἔχει 6 τι εἴπῃ, he has something to say; a the irregu- 
larity seems to be caused by the analogy of the common expression 
οὐκ ἔχει ὅ τι (Or τί) εἴπῃ, equivalent to οὐκ οἶδεν 6 τι εἴπῃ, he knows 
τὰ what he shall say, which contains an indirect question (ὃ 71). 
4. ο΄, 


5 
Τοιοῦτον ἔθος παρέδοσαν, ὥστε ... ἑκατέρους ἔχειν ἐφ᾽ οἷς φιλοτι- 
ηθῶσιν, that both may have things in which they may glory. Isoc. 
Fine: p. 49 C.§ 44. (Here there is no indirect question, for the 
meaning is not that they may know in what they are to glory. See 
note added to Felton’s Isocrates, p. 135.) Οὐδὲν ἔτι διοίσει αὐτῷ, 


’ 


ἐὰν μόνον ἔχη ὅτῳ διαλ an rat, if only he shall have some one to talk 


with. PLAT. Symp. 194 Τοῖς μέλλουσιν ἕξειν 6 τι εἰσφέρωσιν. 
XEN. Oecon. VII, 20. (Compare ἀπορεῖς 6 τι —— and εὐπορεῖς 


ὅ τι λέγῃς in the same sentence, Prat. Ion. 535 B.) 


(b.) The Present or Aorist Optative very rarely occurs in Attic 
Greek after a past tense, but more frequently after another Opta- 
tive. E. g. 

*Avdpa οὐδέν᾽ ἔντοπον (ὁρῶν), οὐχ ὅστις ἀρκέσειεν, οὐδ᾽ ὅστις 
νόσου κάμνοντι συλλάβοιτο, 1. 6. when I saw no one there to assist 
me, &c. SOPH. Phil. 281. Γόνιμον δὲ ποιητὴν ἂν οὐχ εὕροις ἔτι ζητῶν 
ἂν, ὅστις ῥῆμα γενναῖον λάκοι, i.e. a poet to speak a noble word. 
Arist. Ran. 96. (Yet in vs. 98 we have the regular ὅστις φθέγξε- 
ται, depending on the same οὐκ ἂν evpos.) So in Pxat. Rep. Ii, 
398 B, ds μιμοῖτο καὶ λέγοι, depending on χρῴμεθα ἄν. TH ἡμε- 
répa πόλει οὐδὲν ἂν ἐνδείξαιτο τοσοῦτον οὐδὲ ποιήσειεν, ὑφ᾽ οὗ πεισθέν- 
τες τινὰς Ἑλλήνων ἐκείνῳ προεῖσθε, i. 6. nothing so great, that you 


would be persuaded by ἃ to sacrifice any of the Greeks to him. Drm. 
Phil. I, 67, 20. 


Nore 4. ‘Qs as a relative, in the sense of by which (with an 
antecedent like anything understood), is sometimes followed by an 
Optative with ἄν in apodosis, expressing a purpose or object. E. g. 


Ὡς μὲν ἂν εἴποιτε δικαίους λόγους καὶ λέγοντος ἄλλου συνείητε, 
, ‘ > > ΄“ 
ἄμεινον Φιλίππου παρεσκεύασθε, ὡς δὲ κωλύσαιτ᾽ ἂν ἐκεῖνον mpar 








140 RELATI¥& AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [ὃ 65, 1. 


τειν ταῦτα ep ὧν ἐστι νῦν, παντελῶς ἀργῶς ἔχετε; 1. 6. as to means by 
which you could make just speeches, §c., you are better prepared than 
Philip ; but as to anything by which you could prevent him from doing 
what he is now about, you are wholly inactive. Dem. Phil. 11, 66, 15. 
So at the end of the same oration, ὡς δ᾽ ἂν ἐξετασ θείη μάλιστ᾽ 
ἀκριβῶς, μὴ γένοιτο, i. e. may nothing come upon us by which the truth 
of what 1 say would be thoroughly tested. 


Note 5. The relative with any tense of the Indicative, or 
even with the Optative and ἄν, can be used to denote a result, 
where ὥστε might have been expected. (8 65, 3). This 
occurs chiefly after negatives, or interrogatives implying a 
negative. 

Tis οὕτως εὐήθης ἐστὶν ὑμῶν, ὅστις ἀγνοεῖ τὸν ἐκεῖθεν πόλεμον 
δεῦρο ἥξοντα, ἂν ἀμελήσωμεν ; 1. 6. who of you is so simple as not to 
know, &c.? Dem. Ol. 1, 13, 16. (Here ὥστε ἀγνοεῖν might have 
‘been used.) Tis οὕτω πόρρω τῶν πολιτικῶν ἦν πραγμάτων, ὅστις οὐκ 
ἐγγὺς ἠναγκάσθη γενέσθαι τῶν συμφορῶν; Isoc. Pan. p. 64 B. 
§ 118, Τίς οὕτως ῥᾷάθυμός ἐστιν, ὅστις οὐ μετασχεῖν βουλήσεται 
ταύτης τῆς στρατείας; Ib. p. 79 1). ὃ 185. Οὐδεὶς ἂν γένοιτο οὕτως 
ἀδαμάντινος, ὃς ἂν μείνειεν ἐν τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ, no one would ever be- 
come so adamantine that he would remain firm in justice. PLAt. Rep. 


Il, 360 B. 


2. Ἐφ᾽ 6 or ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, which is commonly 
followed by the Infinitive (§ 99), sometimes takes the Future 


Indicative. E. σ. 


"Emi τούτῳ δὲ ὑπεξίσταμαι τῆς ἀρχῆς, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ὑπ᾽ οὐδενὸς ὑμέων 
ἄρξομαι, ἰ withdraw upon this condition, that I shall be ruled, &c. 
Hor. III, 83. Τούτοισι δ᾽ ὦν πίσυνος ἐὼν κατήγαγε, ἐπ᾽ ᾧτε οἱ ἀπόγο- 
vot αὐτοῦ ἱροφάνται τῶν θεῶν ἔσονται. Hor. VII, 153. Καὶ τὴν 
Βοιωτίαν ἐξέλιπον ᾿Αθηναῖοι πᾶσαν, σπονδὰς ποιησάμενοι ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τοὺς 
ἄνδρας κομιοῦνται. ΤῊσσ. I, 118. ξυνέβησαν ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ἐξίασιν 
ἐκ Πελοποννήσου ὑπόσπονδοι καὶ μηδέποτε ἐπιβήσονται αὐτῆς. Id. 
I, 103. 

It will be noticed here (as in Note 1) that the Future Indicative 
generally remains unchanged even after a secondary tense. 


8. “ere (sometimes ws), 80 that, so as, is usually 
followed by the Infinitive. (See § 98.) But when the 
action of the verb expressing the result after ὥστε is 
viewed chiefly as an independent fact, and not merely 
as a result, the Indicative can be used. 


The Infinitive is sometimes used even here, when the Indic- 
































§ 65, 4. ] CAUSAL RELATIVE SENTENCES. 141 


ative would seem more natural; and it often makes quite as 
little difference which of the two is used, as it does in English 
whether we say some are so strange as not to be ashamed (οὕτως 
ἄτοποι ὥστε οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι, Dem. F. L. 439, 29), or some are 80 
strange that they are not ashamed (ὥστε οὐκ αἰσχύνονται). Here, 
although both expressions have the same general meaning, the 
former expresses the result merely as a result, while the latter 
expresses it also (and more distinctly) as an independent fact. 
EK. g. 

Οὕτως ἀγνωμόνως ἔχετε, ὥστε ἐλπίζετε αὐτὰ χρηστὰ γενήσεσθαι; 
K.T-A. are you so senseless that you expect, &c. Dem. OL. I, 25, 19. 
(Here ὥστε ἐλπίζειν, so senseless as to expect, would merely make 
the fact of their expecting less prominent.) Οὕτως ἡμῖν δοκεῖ παντὸς 
ἄξια εἶναι, ὥστε πάντες TO καταλιπεῖν αὐτὰ μάλιστα φεύγομεν; 80 
that we all especially avoid, ἕο. XEN. Mem. 11,2, 8. Οὐχ ἧκεν" ὥσθ 
οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐφρόντιζον. Id. An. II, 3, 25. Εἰς τοῦτ᾽ ἀπληστίας 

a > ? > ’ » συ 4 ‘ A ~ > 4 > 
ἦλθον, ὥστ᾽ οὐκ ἐξήρκεσεν αὐτοῖς ἔχειν THY κατὰ γῆν ἀρχὴν, ἄλλα 
καὶ τὴν κατὰ θάλατταν δύναμιν οὕτως ἐπεθύμησαν λαβεῖν, ὥστε τοὺς 
συμμάχους τοὺς ἡμετέρους ἀφίστασαν. Isoc. Panath. p. 254 A. 
§ 103. So after ὡς, ὃ 98, 2, N. 1: Οὕτω δή τι κλεινὴ ἐγένετο, ws καὶ 
πάντες οἱ Ἕλληνες Ῥοδώπιος τοὔνομα ἐξέμαθον, 1. 6. 80 that all the 
Greeks came to know well the name of Rhodopis. Hor. ἢ, 135. 


Nore. As ὥστε in this construction has no effect whatever upon 
the mood of the verb, it may be followed by any construction that 
would be allowed in an independent sentence. (See § 59, N. 1.) 
It may thus take an Optative or Indicative in apodosis with dy, or 
even an Imperative. E. g. 

Ὥστ᾽ οὐκ ἂν αὐτὸν γνωρίσαιμ᾽ ἂν εἰσιδών. Eur. Or. 379. 
Παθὼν μὲν ἀντέδρων, ὥστ᾽, εἰ φρονῶν ἔπρασσον, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ὧδ᾽ ἐγι- 
γνόμην κακός. SopH. O. C. 271. Θνητὸς δ᾽ ᾿᾽ορέστης᾽ ὥστε μὴ λίαν 
στένε. Id. ΕἸ. 1172. So with οὐ μή and the Subjunctive (89, 1); 

peice? : ae" - Soeur’ : Pose = 
οὕτως ἐπιτεθύμηκα ἀκοῦσαι, ὥστε . . . οὐ μή σου ἀπολειφθῶ. Prat 


Phaedr. 227 D. 


4. The relative has sometimes a causal signification, being 
equivalent to ὅτι, because, and a personal pronoun or demon- 
strative word. The verb is in the Indicative, as in ordinary 
causal sentences (§ 81,1). E. g. 

Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν οὐδὲν δίδως, you doa strange thing in 
giving us nothing (like ὅτι σὺ οὐδὲν δίδως). XEN. Mem. 1], 7, 13. 
Δόξας ἀμαθὴς εἶναι, bs... ἐκέλευε, having seemed to be unlearned, 
because he commanded, &c. Hor. 1, 33. Τὴν μητέρα ἐμακάριζον, otwy 

΄ » , Φ fad ’ © ῳ» , > ‘ ε 
τέκνων ἐκύρησε (like ὅτι τοίων). Id. I, 81. Εὐδαίμων ἐφαίνετο, ὡς 
ἀδεῶς καὶ γενναίως ἐτελεύτα, i. 6. because he died so fearlessly and 
nobly (ὡς being equivalent to ὅτε οὕτως). PLAT. Phaed. 58 E. 








142 RELATIVE AND TEMPORA. SENTENCES. [ὃ 65, 4. 


Ταλαίπωρος εἶ, ᾧ μήτε θεοὶ πατρῷοί εἶσι μήθ᾽ ἱερά, i. 6. since you 
have no ancestral Gods, ἕο. Prat. Euthyd. 302 B. (See Remark.) 
Πῶς ἂν ὀρθῶς ἐμοῦ καταγιγνώσκοιτε, ᾧ τὸ παράπαν πρὸς τουτονὶ μηδὲν 
συμβόλαιόν ἐστιν; i. e. since I have no contract at all, ἕο. ΕΜ. 
Apat. 903, 22. So Arist. Ran. 1459. 


Remark. The ordinary negative particle of a causal relative 
sentence is οὐ, as in the first example above. (See § 81.) Butifa 
cunditional force is combined with the causal, μή can be used. Thus 
in the last examples above, in which μή is used, ᾧ μὴ θεοί εἰσιν 
(besides its causal force) implies if, as it appears, you are without 
ancestral Gods; and ᾧ μηδέν ἐστιν, tf, as it appears, I have no con- 
tract. ‘The same combination of a causal and a conditional force is 
seen in the Latin siquidem. 


Temporal Particles signifying Until and Before 
that. 


A. “Eos, "Eorte, "Axpt, Μέχρι; Εἰσόκε, "Odpa, Uniil. 


" y ς Μ ΓΚ / 

866. 1. When ἕως, ἐστε, axpt, μέχρί;, and ὄφρα, 
until, refer to a definite point of past time, at which the 
action of the verb actually took place, they take the 
Indicative. KE. g. 

Νῆχον πάλιν, ἕως ἐπῆλθον εἰς ποταμόν, I swam on again, until I 
came to a river. Od. VII, 280. live, ἕως ἐθέρμην᾽ αὐτὸν ἀμφιβᾶσα 
φλὸξ οἴνου Eur. Ale. 758. Ξυνεῖρον ἀπιόντες, ἔστε ἐπὶ ταῖς σκηναῖς 
ἐγένοντο. ΧΕνΝ. Cyr. VII, 5, 6. (So An. Ill, 4, 49.) Καὶ ταῦτα 
ἐποίουν μέχρι σκότος ἐγένετο. Id. An. IV, 2, 4. (So ΠΙ, 4, 8.) 
Ως μὲν Θρήικας ἄνδρας ἐπῴχετο Τυδέος υἱὸς, ὄφρα δυώδεκ᾽ ἔπεφνεν. 
Il. X, 488. Ἦρχ᾽ ἵμεν, ὄφρ᾽ ἀφίκοντο κατὰ στρατὸν, ἣ μιν ἀνώγει. 
IL ΧΙΠ, 329. Ἤιεν, ὄφρα μέγα σπέος ἵκετο. Od. V, 57. 


Note 1. *Aypeod and μέχρι ov are used in the same sense as 
ἄχρι and μέχρι. E. g. 
Τῶν δὲ ταῦτα πραξάντων ἄχρι οὗ ὅδε ὁ λόγος ἐγράφετο Τισίφονος 
΄ - > ΄- ‘ > Ἢ pe y av 
πρεσβύτατος ὧν τὼν ἀδελφῶν τὴν ἀρχὴν εἰχε- Xen. Hell. V1, 4, 37. 
σεν ὃ a ] ’ ; nw Γ , , © , δ 
fous Ἕλληνας ἀπελύσατο δουλείας, ὥστ ἐλευθέρους εἰναι μεχρι OV 
πάλιν αὐτοὶ αὑτοὺς κατεδοιὶ!λώσαντο. Piat. Menex. 245 A. 


Nore 2. Herodotus uses és 6 or ἐς οὗ, until, like ἕως, with the 
Indicative. E. g. 


Θ 


> , Ἂν 4 μή »» > ΟἹ ᾽ , , 
Απεδείκνυσαν παῖδα πατρὸς ἕκαστον ἐόντα, ἐξ ὁ ἀπέδεξαν ἁπάσας 
αὐτάς. Ht. Il, 143. Ἔς οὗ Aixns ἀνεῦρε. I, 67. 


2. When these particles refer to the future, they are 








§ 66, 3.] Ἕως; ETC. WITH INDIC., SUBJ., AND OPTATIVE. 143 


joined with av or κέ and take the Subjunctive, if the 
leading verb is primary. (See ὃ 61, 3.) But if such 
clauses depend upon an Optative in protasis or apodosis, 
or in a wish, they usually take the Optative (without 
av) by assimilation. (See § 61,4.) H.g. 


Μαχήσομαι αὖθι μένων, clos κε τέλος πολέμοιο κιχείω, until I shall 
come to an end of the war. Il. III, 291. Ἕως 3 ἂν οὖν πρὸς τοῦ παρόν- 
τος ἐκμάθης; ἔχ᾽ ἐλπίδα. SOPH. Ο. Τ. 834. Ἐπίσχες, ἔστ᾽ ἂν καὶ 
τὰ λοιπὰ προσμάθῃ ς; wait until you shall learn, &c. AESCH. Prom. 
697. Μέχρι δ᾽ ἂν eyo ἥκω, at σπονδαὶ μενόντων. XEN. An. II, 3, 
24. ᾿Αλλὰ per’, ὄφρα κέ τοι μελιηδέα οἶνον ἐνείκω, but wait, until I 
shall bring, χα. Il. VI, 258. So ὄφρ᾽ ἂν τίσωσιν, Il. I, 509. 

Καὶ τὸ μὲν ἂν ἐξαλείφοιεν, τὸ δὲ πάλιν ἐγγράφοιεν, ἕως ὅ τι μάλιστα 
ἀνθρώπεια ἤθη θεοφιλῆ ποιήσειαν, until they should make, &c. 
Puat. Rep. VI, 501 C. Εἰ δὲ πάνυ σπουδάζοι φαγεῖν, εἴποιμ᾽ ἂν ὅτι 
παρὰ ταῖς γυναιξίν ἐστιν, ἕως παρατείναιμι τοῦτον; i. 6. I would 
tell him this, until I put him to torture. Xen. Cyr. I, 3, 11. 


Note 1. It will be seen by the examples, that the clause after 
ζως and other particles signifying untd sometimes implies a future 


purpose or object, the attainment of which is desired. When such a 
sentence, implying a purpose or object which would have been 
originally expressed by a Subjunctive, depends upon a past tense, 
it generally takes the Optative (§ 31, 1); but the Subjunctive also 
may be used, in order to retain the mood in which the purpose 
would have been originally conceived (as in final clauses, § 44, 2). 
For the general principle, see § 77. E. g. 
Srovdas ἐποιήσαντο, ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα εἰς Λακεδαί- 
μονα, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said should 
be announced at Sparta. XEN. Hell. Ill, 2,20. (Here ἕως ἂν ἀπαγ- 
γελθῇ might have been used; as in THuc. I, 90, ἐκέλευεν (τοὺς 
, , ΡΜ eames SR RIE ¥ 
πρέσβεις) ἐπισχεῖν, ἕως ἂν TO TELxos LKaVOY αἴρωσιν.) See § 17,1, d. 
Note 2. Homer uses εἰς 6 xe (or εἰσόκε), until, with the Sub- 
junctive, as Herodotus uses ἐς & with the Indicative (§ 66, 1, N. 2); 
as μίμνετε, εἰς ὅ Kev ἄστυ μέγα Πριάμοιο ἕλωμεν, Il. II. 335. Eis 6 
xe may take the Optative, retaining née: asin Il. XV, 70. 
Nore 3. “Av is sometimes omitted after ἕως, &c. (including πρίν, 
§ 67, 1) when they take the Subjunctive, as in common protasis 
and in relative sentences (8 50, 1, N. 3; § 63, 1); after μέχρι and 
πρίν this occurs even in Attic prose. Thus ἔστ᾽ ἐγὼ μόλω, SOPH. 
Aj. 1188; μέχρι πλοῦς γένηται, Tuvc. I, 137: see Tuuce. IV, 16; 
AESCHIN. Cor. § 60. 


8 When the clause introduced by ἕως. &c., until, 
refers to a result which was not attained in past time in 
consequence of the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes 
a secondary tense of the Indicative. (See § 63, 2.) bh. g. 








aT A τ τι μὰς 


be 


et 


144 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [8 66, 3. 


Ἡδέως ἂν τούτῳ ἔτι διελεγόμην, ἕως αὐτῷ τὴν τοῦ ᾿Αμφίονος ἀπ έ- 
δωκα ῥῆσιν ἀντὶ τῆς τοῦ Ζήθου, ἰ should gladly have continued to talk 
with him, until I had given him, ἕο. Puat. Gorg. 506 Β. Οὐκ ay 
ἐπαυόμην, ἕως ἀπεπειράθην τῆς σοφίας ταυτησί. Id. Crat. 396 C 
Ἐπισχὼν ἂν, ἕως of πλεῖστοι τῶν εἰωθότων γνώμην ἀπεφήναντο; 
. 2+. ἡσυχίαν ἂν ἦγον, i. 6. I should have waited until most of the requ- 
lar speakers had declared their opinion, &c. Dem. Phil. I, § 1. (For 
ay here, see § 42, 3.) 

The leading verb must be an Indicative implying the non-fulfil- 
ment of a condition. 


. “ . 

4. When the clause introduced by ews, &c., until, de- 
pends upon a verb denoting a customary action or 
general truth, and refers indefinitely to any one of 

. . . W CO . . 2 
series of occasions, it takes av and the Subjunctive after 
primary tenses, and the simple Optative after secondary 
tenses. (See 8 62.) E. g. 

*a δ᾽ ἂν ἀσύντακτα 7, ἀνάγκη ταῦτα ἀεὶ πράγματα παρέχειν, ἕως ἂν 
χώραν λάβῃ; they must always make trouble, until they are put in 
order. XEN. Cyr. IV, 5, 37. Ὁπότε ὥρα εἴη ἀρίστου. ἀνέμενεν av- 
τοὺς ἔστε ἐμφάγοιέν TL, ὡς μὴ βουλιμιῷεν. Ib. VIII, 1,44. Περι- 
ἐμένομεν οὖν ἑκάστοτε, ἕως avorx ein τὸ δεσμωτήριον, we wailed 
every day, until the prison was opened. PLAT. Phaed. 59 D. (This 
may mean until the prison should be opened ; § 66, 2, N 1.) 

Γ᾽ . . . o Φ 

Nore. ἼΑν is sometimes omitted after ἕως, &c. and πρίν, when 
they take the Subjunctive in this sense, as well as in the other con- 
struction (§ 66, 2, N. 3); as ἐν τῷ φρονεῖν γὰρ μηδὲν ἥδιστος βίος, 
ἕως τὸ χαίρειν καὶ τὸ λυπεῖσθαι μάθῃς. Sor. Aj. 555. So ὄφρα τε- 
λέσσῃ, Ll. I, 82; and ἐς οὗ ἀποθάνωσι, τ. Ul, 31. 

REMARK. When ἕως and ὄφρα mean so long as, they are rela- 
tives, and are included under δὲ 58-64. “Od¢pa in all its senses is 
confined to Epic and Lyric poetry. (See § 43, N. 1.) 


B. πρίν, Until, Before that. 


§ G7. piv, before, before that, until, besides taking the 
Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, on the same principles 
with ἕως, &c. (§ 66), may also take the Infinitive (8 106). 
The question of choice between the Infinitive and the finite 
moods generally depends on the nature of the leading clause. 

Πρίν regularly takes the Subjunctive and Optative (when 
they are allowed) only if the leading clause is negative or 


§ 67, 2.] CONSTRUCTIONS AFTER Πρίν. 145 


interrogative with a negative implied; very seldom if that is 
affirmative. It takes the Indicative after both negative and 
affirmative clauses, but chiefly after negatives. 

In Homer the Infinitive is the mood regularly used with 
πρίν, after both aflirmative and negative clauses; in Attic 
Greek it is regularly used after affirmatives, and seldom after 
negatives. 


1. The Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative after 
πρίν follow the rules already given for eos, ἄο. (8 66). 
EK. g. 


(Indic. § 66, 1.) Οὐκ ἦν ἀλέξημ᾽ οὐδὲν, ἀλλὰ φαρμάκων χρείᾳ 
κατεσκέλλοντο, πρίν y ἐγώ σφισιν ἔδειξα κράσεις ἠπίων ἀκεσμάτων, 
until I showed them, &c. ἈΕΒΟΗ. Prom. 481. Πάλιν τοῦτο τέμνων 
οὐκ ἐπανῆκε, Tpw.... ἐλοιδόρησε μάλ᾽ ἐν δίκῃ. PLAT. Phaedr. 
266 A. Οὐκ ἠξίωσαν νεώτερόν τι ποιεῖν ἐς αὐτὸν, πρίν γε δὴ αὕτοις 
ἀνὴρ ᾿Αργίλιος μηνυτὴς γίγνεται; until he becomes, &c. (Histor. 
Pres.) Tuuc. 1,132. Πολλὰ ἔπαθεν, πρίν γέ οἱ χρυσάμπυκα Koupa 
χαλινὸν Παλλὰς ἤνεγκεν. Pinp. Ol. XIII], 92. ᾿Ανωλόλυξε πρὶν 
ὁρᾷ. Eur. Med. 1173. 

(Subj. and Opt. § 66,2.) Οὔ Ko σε ἐγὼ λέγω (εὐδαίμονα), πρὶν 
ἂν τελευτήσαντα καλῶς τὸν αἰῶνα πύθωμαι. Hpr. I, 32. Οὐδὲ 
λήξει, πρὶν dv ἣ κορέσῃ κέαρ, ἣ ~. ++ EAN τις ἀρχάν. AESCH. Prom. 
165. Οὐ χρή pe ἐνθένδε ἀπελθεῖν, πρὶν ἂν δ ὦ δίκην. XEN. AN. V, 
7,5. “ANN οὐπότ᾽ ἔγωγ᾽ ἂν, πρὶν ἴδοι μ᾽ ὀρθὸν ἔπος, μεμφομένων ἂν 
καταφαίην. Sopu. O. T. 505. So THEOGN. 126, πρὶν πειρηθείης. 
So πρὶν ἐξελκύσειεν, depending on a protasis (εἰ μὴ avein), PLaT. 
Rep. VII, 515 E. “Odoto μήπω, πρὶν padorp εἰ καὶ πάλιν γνώμην 
μετοίσεις. SOPH. Phil. 961, (Πρίν after Opt. in wish.) ᾿᾿Απηγύρευε 
μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλησθείη θηρῶν, unt Cyrus should 
be satisfied. XEN. Cyr. I, 4,14. (ὃ 66, 2, N. 1.) 

(Indic. ὃ 66,3.) Ἐχρῆν οὖν τοὺς ἄλλους μὴ πρότερον. περὶ τῶν 
ὁμολογουμένων συμβουλεύειν, πρὶν περὶ τῶν ἀμφισβητουμένων ἡμᾶς 
ἐδίδαξαν, they ought not to have given advice, §¢., until they had 
instructed us, &c. Isoc. Paneg. p. 44 ©. ὃ 19. 

(Subj. and Opt. ὃ 66, 4.) ὋὉρῶσι τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους οὐ πρόσθεν 
ἀπιόντας γαστρὸς ἕνεκα, πρὶν ἂν ἀφῶσιν οἱ ἄρχοντες. XEN. Cyr. 1, 
2,8. Οὐ γὰρ πρότερον κατήγορος παρὰ τοῖς ἀκούουσιν ἰσχύει; πρὶν ἂν 
ὁ φεύγων ἀδυνατήσῃ τὰς προειρημένας αἰτίας ἀπολύσασθαι. AES- 
cuin. F. L. § 2. Οὐδαμόθεν ἀφίεσαν, πρὶν παραθεῖεν αὐτοῖς apt 
στον, before they had placed before them. Xen. An. IV, 5, 30. 

(Subj. without ἄν. § 66, 2, N. 3.) Μὴ στέναζε, πρὶν μάθῃς. ΞΟΡΗ. 
Phil. 917. So Od. Χ, 11ὅ; Hor. I, 136; Prat. Phaed. 62 C. 


2. For πρίν with the Infinitive, see § 106. 


7 J 














146 RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES. [§ 67. 


Nore 1. In Homer, πρίν is not found with the Indicative, mpiv 

’ ὅτε taking its place; a few cases occur of the Subjunctive (with- 

out ἄν) and the Optative; but the most common Homeric construc~ 

tion, in sentences of all kinds, is that with the Infinitive (§ 106). 
E. g. 

Ἥμεθ᾽ ἀτυζόμεναι, σανίδες δ᾽ ἔχον εὖ ἀραρυῖαι, πρίν γ᾽ ὅτε δή με σὸς 
υἱὸς ἀπὸ μεγάροιο κάλεσσεν; i. 8. before the tume when, &e. Od. XXII, 
43. Soll. LX, 588; XII, 437. Ὦ φίλοι, οὐ yap πω καταδυσόμεθ᾽ ἀχνύ- 
μενοί περ εἰς ᾿Αίδαο δόμους, πρὶν μόρσιμον ἦμαρ ἐπέλθῃ. Od. Χ, 175. 
Οὐκ ἔθελεν φεύγειν πρὶν πειρήσαιτ᾽ ᾿Αχιλῆος. Il. XXI, ὅ80. Πρίν 
y ὅτ᾽ ἄν with the Subjunctive is found in Od. II, 374, and IV, 477. 


Norte 2. Πρίν with the Infinitive after negative sentences is most 
common in Homer (Note 1), rare in-the Attic poets, and again more 
frequent in Attic prose. (See Kriiger, Vol. Il, p. 258.) For ex- 
amples see § 106. 

Examples of the Subjunctive or Optative with πρίν after affirma- 
tive sentences are very rare. One occurs in Isoc. Paneg. p. 44 A, 
8 16; ὅστις οὖν οἴεται τοὺς ἄλλους κοινῇ τι πράξειν ἀγαθὸν, πρὶν ἂν 
τοὺς προεστῶτας αὐτῶν διαλλάξῃ; λίαν ἁπλῶς ἔχει. 


Note 8. Πρίν ἤ, πρότερον ἤ ( priusquam), and πρόσθεν ἤ may be 
used in the same constructions as πρίν. Πρὶν ἤ is especially common 
in Herodotus. E. g. 

Οὐ yap δὴ πρότερον ἀπανέστη, πρὶν ἤ σφεας ὑποχειρίους ἐποιή - 
σατο. Mpr. VI, 45. So Tuuc. VI, 61. ᾿Αδικέει ἀναπειθόμενος 
πρὶν ἣ ἀτρεκέως ἐκμάθῃ. Hort. VII, 10. ἘΕὔχετο μηδεμίαν οἱ συντυ- 
χίην τοιαύτην γενέσθαι, ἥ μιν παύσει καταστρέψασθαι τὴν Εὐρώπην, 
πρότερον ἢ ἐπὶ τέρμασι τοῖσι ἐκείνης γένηται. Id. Vil, 54. 
Πρότερον ἤ with Indic., PLat. Phaedr. 232 E. Πρόσθεν ἢ σὺ 
ἐφαίνον, τοῦτ᾽ ἐκηρύχθη. SOPH. O. T. 180. ᾿Απεκρίνατο ὅτι πρό- 
σθεν ἂν ἀποθάνοιεν ἢ τὰ ὅπλα παραδοίησαν, that they would die 
before they would give up their arms. XEN. Au, Ti, i, 16. (Bee 
9 66, 2.) 

For examples of the Infinitive after all these expressions, see 
§ 106. Even ὕστερον ἤ is found with the Infinitive. 


Note 4. Πρίν or πρὶν ἤ is very often preceded by πρότερον, 
πρόσθεν, πάρος, or another πρίν (used as an adverb), in the leading 
clause. E. g. 

Οὐ πρότερον πρὸς ἡμᾶς τὸν πόλεμον ἐξέφηναν, πρὶν ἐνόμισαν, 
κιτιλ. NEN. An. III, 1, 16. οὐ τοίνυν ἀποκρινοῦμαι πρότερον; 
πρὶν ἂν πύθωμαι. Prat. Euthyd. 295 Ὁ. Καὶ οὐ πρόσθεν ἔστησαν, 
πρὶν ἢ πρὸς τοῖς πεζοῖς τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων ἐγένοντο. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 23. 

For examples with the Infinitive, see § 106. 

Nore 5. When πρίν appears to be followed by a primary tense 
of the Indicative, it is an adverb qualifying the verb. E. g. 


Tn δ᾽ > % > Av Φ ΄ ‘ a »” ° " 
nv εγὼ au vo@ πριν μιν Kat γῆρας ἐπεισιν,. 1. Θ. snoner 


shall old age come upon her. Il. |, 29. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 


SECTION IV. 


INDIRECT DISCOURSE, INCLUDING INDIRECT QUOTATIONS 
AND QUESTIONS. 


§68. 1. The words or thoughts of any person may 
be quoted either directly or indirectly. 

A direct quotation is one which gives the exact words 
of the original speaker or writer. 

An indirect quotation is one in which the words of 
the original speaker conform to the construction of 
the sentence in which they are quoted. Thus the ex- 
pression ταῦτα βούλομαι may be quoted either directly, 
as λέγει τις “ταῦτα βούλομαι, ΟΥ̓ indirectly, as λεγεὺ TUS 
ὅτι ταῦτα βούλεται OF λέγει τίς ταῦτα βούλεσθαι, some 


one says that he wishes for these. 


2. Indirect quotations may be introduced by ὅτε or 
ὡς (negatively dtu ov, ὡς ov) or by the Infinitive, as in 
the example given above ; sometimes also by the Parti- 
ciple (§ 73, 2). 


8. Indirect questions follow the same rules as indirect 
quotations, in regard to their moods and tenses. (Yor 
examples see § 70.) 

Nore. The term indirect discourse must be understood to 
apply to all clauses which express indirectly the words or 
thoughts of any person (those of the speaker himself as well 
as those of another), after verbs which imply thought or the 
expression of thought (verba sentiendt et declarandi), and even 
after such expressions as δῆλόν ἐστιν, σαφές ἐστιν, &C. 

The term may be further applied to any single dependent 
clause in any sentence, which indirectly expresses the thought 
of any other person than the speaker (or past thoughts of the 
speaker himself), even when the preceding clauses are not in 
indirect discourse. (See § 77.) 








INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 69, 1. 


General Principles of Indirect Discourse. 


Remark. The following are the general principles of in- 
direct discourse, the application of which to particular cases is 
shown in §§ 70 -- 77. 


569. 1. In indirect quotations after ὅτε or ὡς and 
in indirect questions, after primary tenses, each verb 
retains both the mood and the tense of the direct dis- 
course, no change being made except (when necessary ) 
in the person of the verb. 

After secondary tenses, each primary tense of the 
Indicative and each Subjunctive of the direct discourse 
may be either changed to the same tense of the Opta- 
tive or retained in its original mood and tense. The 
Imperfect and Pluperfect, having no tenses in the Opta- 
tive, are regularly retained in the Indicative. (See, 
however, ὃ 70, Note 1,6.) The Aorist Indicative re- 
mains unchanged when it belongs to a dependent clause 
of the direct discourse (δ 74, 2) ; but it may be changed 
to the Optative, like the primary tenses, when it be- 
longs to the leading clause (ὃ 70, 2). The Indicative 
with av belongs under § 69, 2. 


2. All secondary tenses of the Indicative implying 
non-fulfilment of a condition (δ 49, 2), and all Opta- 
tives (with or without av), are retained without change 
in either mood or tense, after both primary and second- 
ary tenses. 


3. When, however, the verb on which the quotation 
depends is followed by the Infinitive or Participle, the 
leading verb of the quotation is changed to the corre- 
sponding tense of the Infinitive or Participle, after both 
primary and secondary tenses (av being retained when 
there is one), and the dependent verbs follow the pre- 
ceding rules. (See § 73.) 














§ 70, 1.7 SIMPLE SENTENCES. 149 


4. The adverb a is never joined with a verb in in- 
direct discourse, unless it stood also in the direct form : 
on the other hand, av is never omitted with a verd in 
‘ndirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form. 
When ἄν is joined to a relative word or particle before 
a Subjunctive in the direct discourse, it is regularly 
dropped when the Subjunctive is changed to the 
Optative in indirect discourse. (See, however, § 74, 1, 
N. 2.) 


5. The indirect discourse regularly retains the same 
negative particle which would be used in the direct 
form. But the Infinitive and Participle occasionally 
take μή in indirect quotation, where ov would be used 
in direct discourse. See examples under § 73. 


Simple Sentences in Indirect Quotations after ὅτι OF ὡς 
and in Indirect Questions. 


§'70. When the direct discourse is a simple sentence, 
the verb of which stands in any tense of the Indicative 
(without av), the principle of § 69, 1, gives the follow- 
ing rules for indirect quotations after ὅτε or ὡς and 
for indirect questions : — 

1. After primary tenses the verb stands in the In- 


dicative, in the tense used in the direct discourse. 
K. g. 

Aéyes ὅτι γράφει; he says that he is writing; λέγει ὅτι ἔγραφεν, 
he says that he was writing ; λέγει ὅτι γέγραφεν, he says that he has 
written; λέγει ὅτι ἐγεγράφει, he says that he had written; eye 
ὅτι ἔγραψεν; he says that he wrote; λέγει ὅτι γράψει; he says that 
he shall write. 

Λέγει yap ὡς οὐδέν ἐστιν ἀδικώτερον φήμης. AESCHIN. Timarch. 
€ 125. Οὐ γὰρ ἂν τοῦτό γ᾽ εἴποις, ὡς ἔλαθεν. Id. F. L.§ 151 (160). 
Εὖ δ᾽ ἴστε, ὅτι πλεῖστον διαφέρει φήμη καὶ συκοφαντία. Ib. § 145 
(153). ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐννοεῖν χρὴ τοῦτο μὲν, γυναῖχ᾽ ὅτι ἔφυμεν. Sopa. 
Ant. 61. Kat ταῦθ᾽ ὡς ἀληθῆ λέγω, Kai ὅτι οὔτε ἐδόθη ἡ ψῆφος ἐν 











150 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 70, 1 


ἅπασι πλείους τ᾽ ἐγένοντο τῶν ψηφισαμένων, μάρτυρας ὑμῖν παμέξο- 
μαι, I will bring witnesses to show that, &c. Dem. Eubul. 1303, 2. 

Epera τί βούλονται, he asks what they want; ἐρωτᾷ τί ποιήσου- 
σιν, he asks what they will do. ’Epwravres εἰ λῃσταί εἶσιν, asking 
whether they are pirates. Tuuc. I, 5. Εὐβοιίς . ὧν 8 iikagven, 
οὐκ ἔχω λέγειν. Sopu. Trach. 401. Ei ξιμπονήσεις καὶ Evvep- 
γάσει σκόπει. Id. Ant. 41. So Eur. Ale. 784. 


REMARK. It is to be noticed that indirect questions after primary 
tenses take the Indicative in Greek, and not the Subjunctive as in 
Latin. Thus, nescio quis sit, 1 know not who he is, in Greek is simply 
ἀγνοῶ tis ἐστιν. ‘This does not apply to indirect questions which 
would require the Subjunctive in the direct form (§ 71). 


2. After secondary tenses the verb may be either 
changed to the Optative or retained in the Indicative. 
The Optative is the more common form. In both 
Indicative and Optative, the tense used in the direct 
discourse must be retained. HE. g. 


” “ , 

_ Ἔλεξεν ὅτι γράφοι (or ὅτι γράφ εἰ), he said that he was writing ; 
i. 6. he said γράφω. Ἐλεξεν ὅτι γεγραφὼς εἴη (or ὅτι γέγρα- 
φε »)» he said that he had written; i. e. he said γέγραφα. ἴἤΕλεξεν ὅτι 
γράψοι (or ὅτι γράψει), he said that he should write; 1. 6. he said 
γράψω. "Edefev ὅτι γράψ εἰεν (or ὅτι ἔγραψεν), he said that he had 
written ; 1. 6. he said ἔγραψα. 

(Optative.) Ἐνέπλησε φρονήματος τοὺς ᾿Αρκάδας, λέγων ὡς μό- 
νοις μὲν αὐτοῖς πατρὶς Πελοπόννησος εἴη; πλεῖστον δὲ τῶν ᾿Ελληνικῶν 
φῦλον τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν εἴη; καὶ σώματα ἐγκρατέστατα ἔχοι. XEN. Hell. 
v Hl, 1, 23. (He said μόνοις μὲν ὑμῖν... .. ἐστι, πλεῖστον O€.... 
ἐστι, καὶ σώματα .... ἔχει: these Indicatives might have been used 
7 the place of εἴη, εἴη, and ἔχοι.) Ἔλεγε δὲ ὁ Πελοπίδας ὅτι 

ργεῖοι καὶ ᾿Αρκάδες μάχῃ ἥττημενοι εἰεν ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων. 
Ib. ΝΠ, 1, 35. (He said ἥττηνται, which might have been 
retained.) So Hpr. I, 83. Ὑπειπὼν τἄλλα ὅτι αὐτὸς Takei 
πράξοι, ᾧχετο, having hinted that he would himself attend to the 
affairs there. Tuuc. 1, 90. (He said τἀκεῖ πράξω; and πράξει 
might have been used for mpafor. Cf. ἀποκρινάμένοι ὅτι πέμψου- 
σιν, from the same chapter, quoted below.) For the Future Op- 
tative in general, see ὃ 26. Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν ὅτι ἔσοιντο. XEN. Cyr. 
Vu, 2, 19. (He said ἔσονται.) "Ἐλεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς ὁ 
Ινδῶν βασιλεὺς, κελεύων ἐρωτᾶν ἐξ ὅτου ὁ πόλεμος εἴη, they said 
that the king of the Indians had sent them, commanding them to ask 
on what account there was war. Ib. Il, 4, 7. (They said ἔπεμ- 
ψεν ἡμᾶς, and the question to be asked was ἐκ τίνος ἐστὶν ὁ πόλε- 
pos i) [Ἔλεγον ὅτι οὐπώποθ᾽ οὗτος ὁ ποταμὸς διαβατὸς γένοιτο πεζῇ 
εἰ μὴ τότε, they said that this river had never been (ἐγένετο) fordable 
except then. Id. An. I, 4,18. Περικλῆς προηγόρευε τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις, ὅτι 











§ 70, 2.) INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 151 


᾿Αρχίδαμος μὲν of ξένος ein, οὐ μέντοι ἐπὶ κακῷ γε τῆς πόλεως γέ" 
νοιτο, ke φηποιποεά that A. was his friend, but that he had not been 
made his “iend to the injury of the state. Tuuc. II,13. (He said ξένος 
poi ἐστιν. OU μέντοι . - - ἐγένετο.) So Hor. I, 25. ἜἜγνωσαν ὅτι 
κενὸς ὁ φοβος εἴη. Xen. An. II, 2, 21. προϊδόντες ὅτι ἔσοιτο ὁ 
πόλεμος, ἐβούλοντο τὴν Πλάταιαν προκαταλαβεῖν. Tuuc. Π. 2. Ἐπει- 
ρώμην αὐτῷ δεικνύναι, ὅτι οἴοιτο μὲν εἶναι σοφὸς, εἴη δ᾽ οὔ. PLAT. 
Apol. 21 C. 

(Indicative.) "Ἔλεγον ὅτι ἐλπίζουσιν σὲ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἕξειν 
μοι χάριν, they said that they hoped, &c. Isoc. Phil. p. 87 A. § 23. 
(They said ἐλπίζομεν, which might have been changed to ἐλπίζοιεν.) 
"Hee δ᾽ ἀγγέλλων τις ὡς τοὺς πρυτάνεις ὡς Ἐλάτεια κατείληπται, 
some one had come with the report that Elatea had been taken. DEM. 
Cor. 284, 21. (Here the Perf. Opt. might have been used.) Δει- 
vous λόγους ἐτόλμα περὶ ἐμοῦ λέγειν, ὡς ἐγὼ τὸ πρᾶγμ᾽ εἰμὶ τοῦτο 
δεδρακώς. 14. Mid. 548,17. Αἰτιασάμενος γάρ με ἃ καὶ λέγειν ἂν 
ὀκνήσειέ τις, τὸν πατέρα ὡς ἀπέκτονα ἐγὼ τὸν ἐμαυτοῦ, κιτ.λ. Id. 
Andr. 593,14. Φανερῶς εἶπεν ὅτι ἡ μὲν πόλις σφῶν τετείχισται 
ἤδη, he said that their city had already been fortified. THuc. J, 91. 
᾿Αποκρινάμενοι ὅτι πέμψουσιν πρέσβεις, εὐθὺς ἀπήλλαξαν. Id. I, 
90. (Cf. ὅτι πράξοι, quoted above from the same chapter.) 
"Ἤιδεσαν ὅτι τοὺς ἀπενεγκόντας οἰκέτας ἐξαιτήσομεν. Dem. Onet. 
J, 870,11. (Ἐξαιτήσοιμεν might have been used.) "EroApa λέγειν 
ὡς ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐχθροὺς ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν εἵλκυσε καὶ νῦν ἐν τοῖς ἐσχάτοις 
ἐστὶ κινδύνοις. Id. Andr. 611, 10. 

(Indirect Questions.) “Hporygey αὐτὸν τί ποιοίη (or τί ποιεῖ), 
he asked him what he was doing; 1. 6. he asked τί ποιεῖς; Ἠρώτησεν 
αὐτὸν τί πεποιηκὼς εἴη (or τί πεποίηκεν), he asked him what he 
had done; i.e. he asked ri πεποίηκας; Hpotnoev αὐτὸν Ti ποιήσοι 
(or τί ποιήσει)» he asked him what he should do; i. 6. he asked τί 
ποιήσεις; Ἠρώτησεν αὐτὸν τί ποιήσειεν (ΟΥ̓ τί ἐποίησεν), he 
asked him what he had done; i. 6. he asked τί ἐποίησας ; 

"Hpero, εἴ τις ἐμοῦ εἴη σοφώτερος, he asked whether any one was 
wiser than I. Puat. Apol. 21 A. (The direct question was ἔστι 
τις σοφώτερος;) Ὅ τι δὲ ποιήσοι οὐ διεσήμηνε, but he did not 
indicate what he would do. Xen. An. II, 1, 23. (The direct question 
was τί ποιήσω;) ᾿Ἐπειρώτα; τίνα δεύτερον μετ᾽ ἐκεῖνον ἴδοι, he 
asked whom he had seen who came next to him. Hor. I, 31. (The 
direct question was τίνα εἶδες;) Etpero κόθεν λάβοι τὸν παῖδα, he 
asked whence he had received the boy. 1ἃ.1,1106. Ἡρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ 
ἀναπλεύσειεν; 1 asked him whether he had set sail. Dem. Polycl. 
1223, 20. (The direct question was averhevoas 2) 

Ἠπόρουν τί ποτε λέγει, 1 was uncertain what he meant. PLAT. 
Apol. 21 B. (Here λέγοι might have been used.) Ἐβουλεύονθ' 
οὗτοι τίν αὐτοῦ καταλείψουσιν; they were considering the question, 
whom they should leave here. Dem. F. L. 378, 23. ᾿Ερωτώντων τινῶν 
γιὰ τί ἀπέθανεν; παραγγέλλειν ἐκέλευεν, κ.τ.λ. MEN. Hell. Il, 1, 4 


Remark 1. After secondary tenses the Indicative and 








152 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 70, 2. 


Optative are equally classic; the Optative being used when 
the writer wishes to incorporate the quotation entirely into his 
own sentence, and the Indicative, when he wishes to quote it 
in the original words as far as the construction of his own 
sentence allows. The Indicative here, like the Subjunctive in 
final and object clauses after secondary tenses (8 44, 2), is 
merely a more vivid form of expression than the Optative. 
We even find both moods in the same sentence, sometimes 
when one verb is to be especially emphasized, and sometimes 
when there is no apparent reason for the change. E. σ. 


φ' a - - ‘ ΄ a ᾽ 
Οὗτοι ἐλεγον ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, ᾿Αριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς ἐν 
τῷ σταθμῶ εἴη, καὶ λέγοι, κιτ.λ. XEN. An. II, 1, 3. (Here 
τέθνηκεν contains the most important part of the message.) Ἔκ dé 
τούτου ἐπυνθάνετο ἤδη αὐτῶν καὶ ὁπόσην ὁδὸν διήλασαν, καὶ εἰ 
ἰκοῖ ἡ χά Id. Cyr. IV, 4, 4, "Ero ; Ν ; 
οἰκοιτο ἡ χώρα. id. Cyr. » 4, 4,  EroApa λέγειν, ὡς χρέα τε 
πάμπολλα ἐκτέτικεν ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ καὶ ὡς πολλὰ τῶν ἐμῶν λάβοιεν. Dem. 
9 92 Ὺ > ς “ , o 4 
Aph. I, 828, 26. (See Rem. 2.) Ὅμοιοι ἦσαν θαυμάζειν ὅποι ποτὲ 
, «σ ‘ ϑ ὃ ~ » a - ‘ 
τρέψονται οἱ Ἕλληνες καὶ τί ἐν νῷ ἔχοιεν. XEN. An. III, 5, 13. 


ΒΕΜΑΒΚ 2. The Perfect and Future were less familiar forms 
than the other tenses of the Optative; so that they were frequently 
retained in the Indicative after secondary tenses, even. when the 
Present or the Aorist was changed to the Optative. (See the last 
two examples under Rem. 1.) In indirect questions the Aorist In- 
dicative was generally retained, for a reason explained in § 21, 2, 
N. 1. Some writers, like Thucydides, preferred the moods and 
tenses of the direct form, in all indirect discourse. (See § 44, 2, 


Rem.) 


Note 1. (a.) An Imperfect or Pluperfect of the direct 
discourse is regularly retained in the Indicative, after both 
primary and secondary tenses, for want of an Imperfect or 
Pluperfect Optative. E. g. 

ἯΝκεν ἄγγελος λέγων ὅτι τριήρεις ἤκουε περιπλεούσας, he came 
saying that he had heard, &c.; 1. 6. he said ἤκουον. XEN. An. I, 2. 
21. ᾿Ακούσας δὲ Ξενοφῶν ἔλεγεν ὅτι ὀρθῶς ἡτιῶντο καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ 
ἔργον αὐτοῖς paprupoin, he said that they had accused him rightly, 
and that the fact itself bore witness to them; i. 6. he said ὀρθῶς ἡ τιᾶ- 
σθε καὶ τὸ ἔργον ὑμῖν μαρτυρεῖ. Ib. 1Π, 3,12. Εἶχε yap λέγειν. 
καὶ ὅτι μόνοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων βασιλεῖ συνεμάχοντο ἐν Πλαταιαῖς, καὶ 
ὅτι ὕστερον οὐδέποτε στρατεύσαιντο ἐπὶ βασιλέα (he sad μόνοι 
συνεμαχόμεθα;. .. καὶ... οὐδέποτε ἐστρατευσάμεθα). XEN. 
Hell. VU, 1, 34. Τούτων ἕκαστον ἠρόμην, ᾿Ονήτορα μὲν καὶ Τιμοκράτην, 
εἴ τινες εἶεν μάρτυρες ὧν ἐναντίον τὴν προῖκ᾽ ἀπέδοσαν, αὐτὸν δ᾽ "Ago- 
Boy, εἴ τινες παρῆσαν ὅτ᾽ ἀπελάμβανεν, I asked each of these men, — 











§ 70, 2.] INDICATIVE AND OPTATIVE. 153 


Onetor and Timocrates, whether there were any witnesses before whom 
they had paid the dowry ; and Aphobus, whether there had been any 
present when he received it. Dem. Onet. I, 860,10. (The two 
questions were εἰσὶ μάρτυρές tives ; and παρῆσάν τινες ;) 


(b.) In a few cases the Present Optative is used after 
secondary tenses to represent the Imperfect Indicative. The 
Present may thus supply the want of an Imperfect Optative, 
as the Present Infinitive and Participle supply the want of 
Imperfects (8 15, 3 and ὃ 16, 2). This can be done only 
when the context makes it perfectly clear that the Optative 
represents an Jmperfect, and not a Present. E. g. 


Τὸν Τιμαγόραν ἀπέκτειναν, κατηγοροῦντος τοῦ Λέοντος ὡς οὔτε συσκη- 
γοῦν ἐθέλοι ἑαυτῷ, μετά τε Πελοπίδου πάντα βουλεύοιτο. _XEN, 
Hell. VII, 1, 38. (The words of Leon were οὔτε συσκηνοῦν ἤθελέ 
μοι, μετά τε Πελ. πάντα ἐβουλεύετο.) Ta πεπραγμένα διηγοῦντο, 
ὅτι αὐτοὶ μὲν ἐπὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις πλέοιεν; τὴν δὲ ἀναίρεσιν τῶν ναυαγῶν 
ποοστάξαιεν ἀνδράσιν ἱκανοῖς. Ib. I, 7, ὅ. (The direct discourse 
Was αὐτοὶ μὲν ἐπλέομεν, τὴν δὲ ἀναίρεσιν προσετάξαμεν.) Καί μοι 
πάντες ἀπεκρίναντο καθ᾽ ἕκαστον, ὅτι οὐδεὶς μάρτυς παρείη. κομί- 
Cotto δὲ λαμβάνων καθ᾽ ὁποσονοῦν δέοιτο “AoBos map αὐτῶν, they 
replied, that no witness had been present, and that Aphobus had received 
the money from them, taking it in such sums as he happened to want. 
Dem. Onet. I, 869, 12. (The direct discourse was οὐδεὶς μάρτυς 
παρῆν, ἐκομίζετο δὲ λαμβάνων καθ᾽ ὁποσονοῦν δέοιτο. Παρείη con- 
tains the answer to the question εἴ τινες παρῆσαν in the preceding 
sentence, which is quoted as the last example under a. The Im- 
perfect in the question prevents the Optatives used in the reply 
from being ambiguous.) So Piat. Rep. IV, 439 E. 

Note 2. In indirect discourse after secondary tenses, each 
tense of the Indicative or Optative is to be translated by ts 

. + . .“" r a ? σ 
own past tense, to suit the English idiom. Thus εἶπεν ὅτι 

. . 7 Φ, ὃ zs >? “΄ 
γράφοι (or γράφει) is he said that he was writing ; εἶπεν ὅτι 
γεγραφὼς εἴη (or γέγραφεν) is he said that he had written. 

In a few cases the Greek uses the same idiom as the Eng- 
lish, and allows. the Imperfect or Pluperfect to stand irregu- 
larly with ὅτε or ὡς after a secondary tense, where regularly 
the Present or Perfect (Optative or Indicative) would be re- 
quired. In such cases the context must make it clear that 
the tense represented is not an Imperfect or Pluperfect (Note 
la). E.g. ae 

Ἐν πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν of Ἕλληνες, ἐννοούμενοι μὲν OTL ἐπὶ ταις 


, ‘ > - , / > 
βασιλέως θύραις ἦσαν, κύκλῳ δὲ αὐτοῖς . . . πόλεις πολέμιαι σαν 
7* 
4 





154 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 


ἀγορὰν δὲ οὐδεὶς ἔτι παρέξειν ἔμελλεν, ἀπεῖχον δὲ τῆς “Ἑλλάδος 
οὐ μεῖον ἣ μύρια στάδια,.... προὐδεδώκεσαν δὲ αὐτοὺς καὶ ν᾽ 
βάρβαροι, μόνοι δὲ καταλελειμμένοι ἦσαν οὐδὲ ἱππέα οὐδενα 
σύμμαχον ἔχοντες. XEN. An. III, 1, 2. (In all these cases the drrect 
discourse would be in the Present or Perfect Indicative.) λέγεται 
δ᾽ αὐτὸν γνῶναι ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐχώρει, it is said that he knew for what he was 
coming. Tuuc. I, 134. (Here ywpoin or χωρεῖ would be the regular 
form.) Ara τὸν χθιζινὸν ἄνθρωπον, ὃς ἡμᾶς διεδύετ᾽, ἐξαπατῶν καὶ 
λέγων ὡς φιλαθήναιος ἦν καὶ Trav Σάμῳ πρῶτος κατείποι, 1. 6. saying 

ιλαθήναιός εἶμι καὶ τάν Σάμῳ πρῶτος κατεῖπον. ARIST. Vesp 
283. (Here εἰμί is changed to ἦν, and not to ein: κατεῖπον could 
have been changed only to κατείποι.) 

In these examples the principle usually observed in indirect dis- 
course, — that the tenses employed in the quotation denote relative 
not absolute time (§ 9),—1is given up, and the Imperfect and Plu- 
perfect denote absolute time, as in causal sentences (§ 81,1). See 
§ 81, 2, Rem. 


Note 8. (a.) An indirect quotation, with its verb in the Opta- 
tive after ὅτε or ὡς, is sometimes followed by an independent sen- 
tence with an Optative, which continues the quotation as if it were 
itself dependent on the ὅτε or ws. Such sentences are generally 
; . 
introduced by γάρ. E. σ΄. 

Ἤκουον δ᾽ ἔγωγέ τινων ὡς οὐδὲ τοὺς λιμένας καὶ Tas ἀγορὰς ἔτι 
δώσοιεν αὐτῷ καρποῦσθαι" τὰ γὰρ κοινὰ τὰ Θετταλῶν ἀπὸ τούτων δέοι 
διοικεῖν, for (as they said) they must administer, &. Dem. Ol. I, 15, 
22. ᾿Απεκρίναντο αὐτῷ ὅτι ἀδύνατα σφίσιν εἴη ποιεῖν ἃ προκαλεῖται 
ἄνευ ᾿Αθηναίων " παῖδες γὰρ σφῶν καὶ γυναῖκες παρ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἴησαν. 
Τηῦσ. Il, 72. Ἔλεγον ὅτι παντὸς ἄξια λέγοι Σεύθης " χειμὼν γὰρ 
εἴη, κιτιλ. XEN. An. ὙΠ, 3, 13. 


(b.) Such independent sentences with the Optative are sometimes 
found even when no Optative precedes, in which case the context 
always contains some allusion to another’s thought or expression. 


E. g. 


Ὑπέσχετο τὸν ἄνδρ᾽ ᾿Αχαιοῖς τόνδε δηλώσειν ἄγων" οἴοιτο μὲν 
ἁλισθ᾽ ἑκούσιον λαβὼν, εἰ μὴ θέλοι δ᾽, ἄκοντα, 1. 6. he thought (as he 
said), ἕο. ὅόορη. Phil. 617. ᾿Αλλὰ γὰρ οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἦν ἀθάνατον, 
ἀλλὰ καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ εἰς ἀνθρώπου σῶμα ἐλθεῖν ἀρχὴ ἦν αὐτῇ ὀλέθρου, 
ὥσπερ νόσος" καὶ ταλαιπωρουμένη τε δὴ τοῦτον τὸν βίον ζῴη, καὶ 
τελευτῶσά γε ἐν τῷ καλουμένῳ θανάτῳ ἀπολλύοιτο, and (according 
to the theory) it lives in misery, &c., and finally perishes in what is 
called death. Puat. Phaed. 95 D. (Plato is here merely stating 
the views of others. For the Imperfects in the first sentence, see 
§ 11, Note 6.) 


§ 71. When a question in the direct form would be 
expressed by an interrogative Subjunctive (8 88), indirect 








§ 71.] INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 


questions after primary tenses retain the Subjunctive ; 
after secondary tenses the Subjunctive may be either 
changed to the same tense of the Optative or retained 


in its original form. E. g. 


Πρὸς ἀμφότερα ἀπορῶ, ταύτην θ᾽ ὅπως ἐκδῶ καὶ τἄλλ᾽ ὁπόθεν 
διοικῶ, J amat a loss on both questions, how I shall give her a dowry 
(πῶς ταύτην ἐκδῶ;), and whence 1 shall pay other expenses (πόθεν 
τἄλλα διοικῶ;). Dem. Aph. I, 834, 18. Βουλεύομαι ὅπως σε 
ἀποδρῶ, Iam trying to think how I shall escape you (πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ ;). 
XEN. Cyr. 1,4, 18. Οὐκ ἔχω τί λέγω, I know not what I shall say. 
Dem. Phil. III, 124, 24. So in Latin, non habeo guid dicam. In 
AESCH. Prom. 470, οὐκ ἔχω σόφισμ᾽ btw... ἀπαλλαγῶ may be 
explained on this principle as interrogative; or by § 65, 1, N. 3, as 
a relative clause. Οὐ γὰρ δὴ δ ἀπειρίαν ye οὐ φήσεις ἔχειν ὅ τι 
εἴπῃς. for itis not surely through inexperience that you will declare 
that you know not what to say (i. 6. τί εἴπω;). Dem. F. L. 378, 4. 
So ὅ τι δῶ and οἷς δῶ. Xen. An. I, 7,7. Ta δὲ ἐκπώματα οὐκ οἶδ᾽ 


εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τούτῳ δῶ, 1] do not know whether I shall give them, &c. 
Id. Cyr. VIII, 4, 16. 


Ἐν δέ οἱ ἦτορ... .. μερμήριξεν, ἢ ὅ ye... τοὺς μὲν ἀναστήσειεν, 
ἡ δ᾽ ᾿Ατρείδην ἐναρίζοι, ἠὲ χόλον παύσειεν, ἐρητύσειέ τε θυμόν. 
[1. I, 191. (The direct questions were τοὺς μὲν ἀναστήσω, Arpei- 
δὴν δ᾽ ἐναρίζω; --2ἡ παύσω, ἐρητύσω τε;) KAnpovs πάλλον, 
ὑππότερος δὴ πρόσθεν ἀφείη χάλκεον ἔγχος, i. 6. they shook the lots, to 
decide which should first throw his spear, the question being πότερος 
πρόσθεν ἀφῇ ; Il. Ill,317. ἘἘπήροντο, εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν 
πόλιν, they asked whether they should give up their city, the question 
being mapad@pev τὴν πόλιν; THuc. I, 25. ἘἘβουλεύοντο εἰ ta 
σκευοφύρα ἐνταῦθα ἄγοιντο ἣ ἀπίοιεν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον. XEN. 
An. 1,10,17. (So An. 1, 10,5.) Ἠπόρει ὅ τι χρήσαιτο τῷ πρά- 
πε he was at a loss how to act in the matter, i. 6. τί χρήσωμαι; 
d. Hell. VII, 4, 89. Οὐ γὰρ eiyouev.... ὅπως δρῶντες καλῶς 
πράξαιμεν, for we could not see how we should fare well, if we did 
εἰ. ΟΡΗ. Ant. 272. 


, - 


᾿ ᾿Απορέοντος δὲ βασιλέος ὅ τι χρήσηται τῷ παρεόντι πρήγματι, 
Επιάλτης ἦλθέ οἱ ἐς λόγους. Hpt. VII, 218. Ἠπόρησε μὲν ὁποτέ- 
ρωσε διακινδυνεύσῃ χωρήσας. ΤῊσΟ. I, 68. Οἱ Πλαταιῆς ἐβου- 
λεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν ὥσπερ ἔχουσιν, εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσων- 
ται, whether they should burn them as they were, or deal with them in 
some other way. Id, 11, 4. ᾿Απορήσαντες ὅπῃ καθορμίσωνται, és 


Πρώτην τὴν νῆσον ἔπλευσαν. Id. IV, 13. 


_ Remark. The context must decide whether the Optative in 
indirect questions represents a Subjunctive (8. 71) or an Indicative 
(8 70, 2). The distinction is especially important when the Aorist 
Optative is used (8 21, 2, N.1). See also § 74, 2, N. 1. 


ReMARK 2. When the leading verb is in the Optative with ἄν, 





INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [ὃ 71 


the Optative may be used in indirect questions of this class. See 
examples in § 34, 3. 


Note 1. The particle commonly used in the sense of whether in 
indirect questions is εἰ, which can introduce a Subjunctive, as well 
as an Indicative or Optative. (See Xen. Cyr. VIII, 4, 16, quoted 
above.) "Edy cannot mean whether; and when this introduces a 
clause resembling an indirect question, the expression is really.a 
protasis, with an apodosis suppressed or implied (§ 53, N. 2). E. g. 


Εἰ δέ σοι μὴ δοκεῖ, σκέψαι ἐὰν τόδε σοι μᾶλλον ἀρέσκῃ" φημὶ yap 
ἐγὼ τὸ νόμιμον δίκαιον εἶναι. XEN. Mem. 1V, 4,12, (The meaning 
here is, but if that does not please you, examine, in case this shall suit 
you better (that then you may adopt it) ; and not, look to see whether this 
suits you better. If ἐὰν ἀρέσκῃ is an indirect question, it can represent 
no form of direct question which includes the ἄν. Even ἀρέσκῃ 
alone could not be explained as an interrogative Subjunctive, by 
§ 88.) ᾿Ἐὰν ἀρέσκῃ in the passage just quoted is similar to ἐὰν 
ἐνδειξώμεθα in Puat. Rep. V, 455 B: Βούλει οὖν δεώμεθα τοῦ ra 
τοιαῦτα ἀντιλέγοντος ἀκολουθῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἐάν πως ἡμεῖς ἐκείνῳ ἐνδει- 
ξώμεθα, ὅτι οὐδέν ἐστιν ἐπιτήδευμα ἴδιον ; shall we then ask the one 
who makes such objections to follow us, in case we can in any way show 
him that, &c.? See Xen. An. II, 1, 8; and Arist. Nub. 535. 
(Such sentences belong under ὃ 53, N. 2. See also § 77, 1, c.) 


ΝΌΤΕ 2. Ei xe with the Subjunctive in Homer sometimes forms 
an indirect question, representing the Epic Subjunctive with κέ in 
the direct question. (See ὃ 87, Note.) E.g. 

Mevere ὄφρα ἴδητ᾽ αἴ κ᾽ ὕμμιν ὑπέρσχῃ χεῖρα Κρονίων ; are you 
waiting that you may see whether the son of Kronos will hold his hand 
lo protect you? Il. 1V, 249. (The direct question would be ὑπέρ- 
σχη κε χεῖρα;) Here the κέ always belongs to the verb, so that this 
Epic construction is no authority for the supposed Attic use of ἐάν 
and the Subjunctive in the same sense. See Note 1. 


§'72. When the verb of the direct discourse stands 
with av in the Indicative or Optative (forming an apo- 
dosis), the same mood and tense are retained in indi- 
rect quotations with ὅτε and ὡς and in indirect questions, 


after both primary and secondary tenses. (See § 69, 2.) 
EK. g. 


Λέγει ὅτι τοῦτο ἂν ἐγένετο, he says that this would hare happened: 
ἔλεγεν ὅτι τοῦτο ἂν ἐγένετο, he said that this would have happened. 
Λέγει (or ἔλεγεν) ὅτι οὗτος δικαίως ἂν θάνοι, he says (or said) that 
this man would justly be put to death. 

(Θεμιστοκλῆς) ἀπεκρίνατο, ὅτι οὔτ᾽ ἃ ν αὐτὸς Σερίφιος ὧν ὀνομαστὸς 


» ΄ 


ἐγένετο οὔτ᾽ ἐκεῖνος ᾿Αθηναῖος, he replied that he should not have 

















3 73, 1.] INFINITIVE. 157 


hecome famous himself if he had been a Seriphian, nor would the other 
Ὑ he had been an Athenian. Prat. Rep. I, 330 A. “Evvoeire, ὅτι 
ἧττον ἂν στάσις εἴη ἑνὸς ἄρχοντος ἢ πολλῶν. XEN. An. VI, 1, 29. 
Απεκρίνατο, ὅτι πρόσθεν ἂν ἀποθάνοιεν ἢ τὰ ὅπλα παραδοίησαν. 
™h. 11,1, 10. (The direct discourse was πρόσθεν ἂν ἀποθάνοι- 
μεν.) Παρελθών tis δειξάτω, ὡς οἱ Θετταλοὶ νῦν οὐκ ἂν ἐλεύθεροι 
γένοιντο ἄσμενοι. Dem. ΟἹ. LI, 20, 18. Οὐδ᾽ εἰδέναι φησὶ τί ἂν 
τοιῶν ὑμῖν χαρίσαιτο. Id. F. L. 356,13. Οὐκ ἔχω τίς ἂν γενοΐ 
yav. ΑΕΒΟΗ. Prom. 905. So 907. Ἠρώτων εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτωι 
ra πιστά. EN. An. LV, 8, 7. 


Notr. The same rule applies when a secondary tense of the 
ndicative in apodosis with ἄν omitted (§ 49, 2, N. 2) is quoted. 

. g. 

(Ἔλεγεν ὅτι . . - - κρεῖττον ἦν αὐτῷ τότε ἀποθανεῖν, he said that u 
sere better for him to die at once. Lys. X, p. 117,§ 25. (The direct 
discourse was κρεῖττον 7 ν μοι.) 


§'73. 1. When the Infinitive is used in the indirect 
quotation of a simple sentence, which had its verb in 
the Indicative (with or without av) or the Optative 
(with av), the verb is changed in the quotation to the 
same tense of the Infinitive, after both primary and 
secondary tenses. If av was used in the direct dis- 
course, it must be retained with the Infinitive. 

The Present and Perfect Infinitive here represent the 
Imperfect and Pluperfect (as well as the Present and 
Perfect) Indicative. ( 15,3; ὃ 18,3, Rem.) ΕἸ. g. 

Φησὶ γράφειν, he says that he is writing; ἔφη γράφειν, he said that 


he was writing; φήσει γράφειν, he will say that he ws (then) writing. 
(The direct discourse is here γράφω.) Φησὶ (ἔφη) γράφειν av, εἰ 
ἐδύνατο, he says (or said) that he should now be writing, if he were 
able. (He says ἔγραφον ἄν.) Φησὶ (ἔφη) γράφειν ἂν, εἰ δύναιτο, 
he says (or said) that he should write, if he should (ever) be able. (He 
says αΦοιμι av. 

ok οὐκ he 2 that he wrote; ἔφη γράψαι, he said that he had 
written; φήσει γράψαι, he will say that he wrote. (He says ἔγραψα. 
See § 23, 2.) Φησὶ (ἔφη) γράψαι ἂν, εἰ ἐδυνήθη, he says (or said) 
that he should have written, of he had been able. (He says ἔγραψα 
dv.) Φησὶ (ἔφη) γράψαι ἂν, εἰ δυνηθείη, he says (or said) that he 
should write, if he should (ever) be able. (He says γράψαιμι av.) 

Φησὶ (φήσει) γεγραφέναι, he says (or will say) that he has written ; 
ἔφη γεγραφέναι, he said that he had written. (He says γέγραφα.) 
For the Perfect with ἄν, see below. ; 

Φησὶ (φήσει) γράψειν, he says (or will say) that he will write; ἔφη 
γράψειν, he said that he would write. (He says γράψω.) 





158 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 


+ - 
a nati Αρρωστεῖν προφασίζεται, he pretends that he is sick. 
νων ἀρρωώστειν τουτονί, he took his oath that this man was 
sick. Dem. F. L. 379, 15 and 17. Οὐκ ἔφη αὐτὸς ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον 
ἀν hed ger he said that not he himself, but Nicias, was general ; 
» > > 4 > 4A > > > ~ ᾿ 2 : . 
— e said, οὐκ ἐγὼ αὑτὸς GAN ἐκεῖνος στρατηγεῖ. THuc. IV, 28 
᾿ ς Qi > » Α ΄ 4». Ne 
τος mor εὐχὰς ὑπολαμβάνετ' εὔχεσθαι τὸν Φίλιππον ὅτ᾽ ἔσπενδεν; 
what prayers do you suppose Philip made, &e.? Dem. F. L. 381. 10 
ve Ἶ . in as . . . 9 .Ψ 
ΗΝ here represents ηὔχετο: for other examples of the Im- 
= »8ee ὃ 15,3.) Οἶμαι yap ἂν οὐκ ἀχαρίστως μοι ἔχειν, for! 
τανε «gaged not be a thankless labor ; i. 6. οὐκ ἂν ἔχοι. XEN. An 
mY ‘ 36 Pa yap Tov πατέρα. ... οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν καὶ τὴν 
μὴν μβάνειν τῶν πωλουμένων ξύλων, do you think that he would 
not have taken care and have received the pay, &c.? 1. 6. οὐκ ἂν 
ἐφύλαττεν καὶ ἐλάμβανεν; Dem. Timoth. 1194, 20. (See 
§ 41, 1.) 
fe a ne ἐν φησι τούτους, he says that he detained them. 
— τος μὰ @rovs οὐ ἐνθυμηθῆναί φησι λύσασθαι, but he says 
“es 6 did not even think of ransoming the prisoners. Dem. F. L. 353 
4a eave 4 τ αν » ΄ ἜΣ ἘΣ ΠῚ ἢ 
ν and 18, ᾿ (He says κατέσχον, and οὐδ ἐνεθυμήθην) Ὃ Κῦρος 
ae yeverGar Καμβύσεω, Cyrus is said to have been the son of 
; trie XEN, Cyr. I, 2, 1. Τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἤλπιζεν ἴσως ἂν 
ale ie . - 
ay eral cad γὴν οὐκ av περιιδεῖν τμηθῆναι, he hoped that 
ρων — a d pernaipe march out, and not allow their land to 
— Ἄς “sm ἂν ἐπεξέλθοιεν καὶ οὐκ ἂν περιίδοιεν. 
ae - dl, 20. myecav νομίσαντες μὴ ἂν ἔτι ἱκανοὶ γενέσθαι 
“es a τειχισμόν. Id. VI, 102. (Here οὐκ ἂν γενοίμεθα would 
© the direct lorm. (See §69,5.) SolI,139. Οὐκ ἂν ἡγεῖσθ᾽ αὐτὸν 
κἂν ἐπιδραμεῖν. do γι t believ | 
ase Hf 0 you not believe that (in that cuse) he would 
ave run thither? 1. 6, οὐκ ἂν ἐπέδ 
1 ¥ 1. 6, apev; Dem. Aph. I, 8: 2 
(See § 41, 3.) τ ΓΤ 
( “i Φησιν ares Grrtos γεγενῆσθαι, he Says, airtos γεγέ- 
νημαι. DEM. F. L. 352, 26. Εἴ ἢ ota ἴ ἢ 
eu 2, 26. ixalov ἢ διώκοντα οἴχεσθαι ἢ κατα: 
το —- “ado akon | aaah XEN. An. I, 10, 16. (Their 
Ἰοὺ σ 1 was ΄ Β a” a , a " 
N 45 ΑΝ, as ἢ ΩΣ ϑέχεται, ἢ . «- προελήλακεν. 566 § 10, 
mie 2 a χρημαῦ εαυτῷ τοὺς Θηβαίους ἐπικεκηρυχέναι, he said 
τα the Lhebans had offered a reward Jor him. Dem. F. L. 347, 26 
> > , . . . . ͵ ‘ Ξ ’ γᾷ i 
oe examples of the Perfect Infinitive with av, representing the 
—— Indicative and the Perfect Optative, see § 41, 2 ti 
oat , 4 , ΄ seek 
: ( es Ἐπαγγέλλεται τὰ δίκαια ποιήσειν, he promises to 
10 what is right. | Dem. F. L. 356, 10. So Il. I, 161. "Edn ἐντὸς 
ἡμερῶν εἰκοσιν ἢ ἄξειν Λακεδαιμονίους ζῶντας ἢ αὐτοῦ ἀποκτενεῖν 
Η ᾿ x . . ᾽ 
" said that within twenty days he would either bring them alive or kill 
them where they were. Tuuc. IV, 28. (Cleon said 4 ἃ ἢ 
apenas Age ; =. On sald ἢ ἄξω...ἣ 
on tay 8 aura (φησὶ) πεπράξεσθαι δυοῖν ἢ τριῶν ἡμερῶν, 
~ sgh at this will have been accomplished within two or three days 
EM. F. L. 364,18. (See § 29, Note 6.) For the rare Future In- 
finitive with dy, see § 41, 4. 


REMARK. F adil ρος. 
τ, ar ~ meaning of each tense of the Infinitive in 
urse, see ὃ 15, 2; ὃ 18, ὃ; § 23, 2; and § 27. It will 





PARTICIPLE. 159 


be seen that these tenses (especially the Aorist) in this use differ 
essentially from the same tenses in other constructions; it is there- 
fore important to ascertain in each case to which class the Infinitive 
oelongs. This must be decided by the context; but in general it 
may be stated that an Infinitive stands in indirect discourse, when 
it depends upon a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, 
and when also the thought, as originally conceived, would have been 
expressed by some tense of the Jndicative (with or without ἄν) or of 
the Optative (with dv), which can be transferred without change of 
tense to the Infinitive. (See § 15, 2, N. 1, which applies only to 
the Infinitive without dv.) Thus λέγω αὐτὸν ἐλθεῖν means 1 say that 
de came; but βούλεται ἐλθεῖν means he wishes to come, where ἐλθεῖν 
~ merely an ordinary Infinitive, belonging under ὃ 23,1. In the 
former case ἐλθεῖν represents ἦλθεν, but in the latter case it repre- 
sents no form of the Aorist Indicative or Optative, and is therefore 
not in indirect discourse. So with the Infinitive after all verbs of 
commanding, advising, wishing, and others enumerated in § 92, 1. 


2. When the Participle with the sense of the Infini- 
tive (§ 113) is used in the indirect quotation of a 
simple sentence, it follows the rules already given for 
the Infinitive (ὃ 73, 1), in regard to its tense and the 

» ᾿ 
use οὗαν. K. g. 

᾿Αγγέλλει τούτους ἐρχομένους; he announces that they are com- 
ing; ἤγγειλε τούτους ἐρχομένους, he announced that they were 
coming. (The announcement is οὗτοι ἔρχονται.) ᾿Αγγέλλει 
τούτους ἐλθόντας, he announces that they came; ἤγγειλε τούτους 
ἐλθόντας, he announced that they had come. (The announcement 
is ἦλθον.) ᾿Αγγέλλει τούτους ἐληλυθότας, he announces that they 
are come; ἤγγειλε τούτους ἐληλυθότας, he announced that they were 
come. (The announcement is ἐληλύθασιν.) ᾿Αγγέλλει (ἤγγειλε) 
rouro yevnadpevov, he announces (or announced) that this is (or 
was) about to happen. (He announces τοῦτο γενήσεται.) 

Τοῖς τε yap ἐπιχειρήμασιν ἑώρων οὐ κατορθοῦντες καὶ τοὺς στρα- 
τιώτας ἀχθομένους τῇ μονῇ, they saw that they were not succeeding, 
and that the soldiers were distressed ; i. 6. they saw, οὐ κατορθοῦμεν 
καὶ of στρατιῶναι ἄχθονται. Tuuc. VII, 47. Ἐμμένομεν οἷς apo- 

hoynoapev δικαίοις οὖσιν; do we abide by what we acknowledged to 
$e just (i. 6. δίκαιά ἐστινὴ ? Prat. Crit. 50 A. Πάνθ᾽ ἕνεκα ἑαυτοῦ 
wotay ἐξελήλεγκται, he has been proved to be doing everything for his 
awn interest. Dem. Ol. 11, 20, 12. Αὐτῷ Κῦρον oTparevorra 
πρῶτος ἤγγειλα, I first announced to him that Cyrus was marching 
against him. Xen. An. II, 3, 19. 

Ἐπιστάμενοι καὶ τὸν βάρβαρον αὐτὸν περὶ αὑτῷ τὰ πλείω σφα- 
λέντα, καὶ πρὸς αὐτοὺς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους πολλὰ ἡμᾶς ἤδη τοῖς ἅμαρ- 
τήμασιν αὐτῶν μᾶλλον ἣ τῇ ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν τιμωρίᾳ περιγεγενημένους. 
Tuuc. I, 69. (The direct discourse would be ὁ βάρβαρος .. - 
ἐσφάλη, καὶ ἡμεῖς . . . περιγεγενήμεθα.) So in the same chapter, 





160 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 73, 2. 


τὸν Μῆδον αὐτοὶ ἴσμεν ἐκ πειράτων γῆς ἐπὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον ἐλ A “rs 
i. 6. ὁ Μῆδος ἦλθεν. Οὐ yap decay αὑτὸν τε θνηκότα, jor they αἱ 
not know that he was dead (i. 6. τέθνηκεν). XEN. An. I, 10, 16. 
Ἐπέδειξα οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπηγγελκότα ἀλλὰ φενακίσαν θ ὑμᾶς, I have 
shown that he has reported nothing that is true, and that he deceived 
you. (Perf. and Aor.) Dem. F. L. 396, 30. 
Ei εὖ ἤδειν καὶ τὴν συμμαχίαν μοι γε V1) TOmevy V; / he 
1 should obtain an alliance also (i. 6. συμμαχία μοι γενήσεται). 10. 353, 
25. So XEN. Hell. IV, 7, 3. ‘O δ᾽ ἀντοφείλων ἀμβλύτερος, εἰδὼς οὐκ 
ἐς χάριν ἀλλ᾽ ἐς ὀφείλημα τὴν ἀρετὴν ἀπο ὃ ώσων, knowing that he shall 
return the benefit, &c. Tuuc. II, 40. Γνόντες οὔτ ἀποκωλύσειν δυνα- 
τοὶ ὄντες, εἴ τ᾽ ἀπομονωθήσονται τῆς ξυμβάσεως, κινδυνεύσοντες; 
ποιοῦνται ὁμολογίαν. Id. LI, 28. (The direct discourse would be 
οὔτε δυνατοί ἐσμεν, εἴ τ᾽ ἀπομονωθησόμεθα, κινδυνεύσομεν.) . 
Εὖ δ᾽ ἴσθι μηδὲν ἄν με τούτων ἐπιχειρῆσα yTa σε πείθειν, εἶ 
δυναστείαν μόνον ἣ πλοῦτον ἑώρων ἐξ αὐτῶν γενησόμενον. Isoc. 
Phil. p. 109 Β. ὃ 133. (Here μηδὲν ἂν ἐπιχειρήσαντα represents οὐδὲν 
ἂν ἐπεχείρησα, ὃ 69, 5; and γενησόμενον represents γενήσεται.) 
Σκοπούμενος οὖν εὕρισκον οὐδαμῶς a ν ἄλλως τοῦτο δι απρά ξαμ evos, 
I found that I could accomplish this (διαπραξαίμην ἄν) in no other way. 
Id. Antid. p. 311 Ὁ. § 7. ee 
Ὅπως δέ ye τοὺς πολεμίους δύναισθε κακῶς ποιεῖν, οὐκ οἶσθα μαν- 
θάνοντας ὑμᾶς πολλὰς κακουργίας, do you not know that you learned, 
&e. Xen. Cyr. I, 6, 28. (Here the Optative δύναισθε, as well as 
the whole context, shows that μανθάνοντας represents ἐμανθάνε τε, 
§ 16,2.) Μέμνημαι δὲ ἔγωγε καὶ παῖς ὧν Κριτίᾳ τῷδε ξυνόντα σε; I 
remember that you were with this Critias. PLAT. Charm. 156 A. 
(Ξυνόντα represents ξυνῆσθα.) See ὃ 16, 2, and the examples. 


if I were sure that 


Indirect Quotation of Compound Sentences. 


8724. When a compound sentence is to be indi- 
rectly quoted, its leading verb is expressed according to 
the rules given for simple sentences (88 10 -- 9). 


1. If the quotation depends on a primary tense, all 
the dependent verbs of the original sentence retain the 
moods and tenses of the direct discourse. 

If the quotation depends on a secondary tense, all 
dependent verbs of the original sentence which in the 
direct discourse stood in the Present, Perfect, or Future 
Indicative, or in any tense of the Subjunctive, may (at 
the pleasure of the writer) either be changed to the 











§ 74, 1.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 161 


same tenses of the Optative, or retain both the moods 
and tenses of the direct discourse. The Optative is 
the more common form. E. g. 


(After primary tenses.) *Av δ᾽ ὑμεῖς ἃ ἔγητε, ποιήσειν (φησὶ) 
ὃ μήτ᾽ αἰσχύνην μήτ᾽ ἀδοξίαν αὐτῷ φέρει. Dem. F. L. 854,8. (Here 
no change is made, except from ποιήσει to ποιήσειν.) Νομίζω yap, 
ἂν τοῦτ᾽ ἀκριβῶς μάθητε, μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς τούτοις μὲν ἀπιστήσειν 
ἐμοὶ δὲ βοηθήσειν. Id. Onet. I, 870, 27. Ἐὰν ἐκεῖνο εἰδῶμεν, 
ὅτι ἅπαντα ὅσα πώποτ᾽ ἠἡλπίσαμ έν τινα πράξειν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν καθ᾽ ἡμῶν 
εὑρηται; ... κἂν μὴ νῦν ἐθέλωμεν ἐκεῖ πολεμεῖν αὐτῷ, ἐνθάδ᾽ ἴσως 
ἀναγκασθησόμεθα τοῦτο ποιεῖν, x. τ. Χ. Id. Phil. I, 54, 18. Προ- 
λέγω ὅτι, ὁπότερ᾽ ἂν ἀποκρίνηται, ἐξελεγχθήσεται. PLAT. Euthyd. 
275 E. See Dem. Mid. 536, 1, where two such conditional ser- 
tences depend on εἰ πρόδηλον γένοιτο. (See ἃ 34, 3.) 

ὋὉρῶ σοὶ τούτων δεῆσον, ὅταν ἐπιθυμήσῃς φιλίαν πρός τινας 
ποιεῖσθαι. XEN. Mem. II, 6, 29. Παράδειγμα σαφὲς καταστήσατε, ὃς 
ἂν ἀφιστῆται, θανάτῳ ζημιωσόμενον. Tuuc. Ill, 40. See 
§ 73, 2. 

(Opt. after secondary tenses.) Εἶπε ὅτι ἄνδρα ἄγοι ὃν εἷρξαι δέοι, 
he said that he was bringing a man whom it was necessary to confine ; 
le. he said ἄνδρα ἄγω ὃν εἷρξαι Sei. XEN. Hell. V,4,8. *Ame- 
κρίνατο ὅτι μανθάνοιεν οἱ μανθάνοντες ἃ οὐκ ἐπίσταιντο, i. 6. he 
replied, μανθάνουσι ἃ οὐκ ἐπίστανται. PLAT. Euthyd. 276 E. (Here 
ἅ has a definite antecedent, § 59, and is not conditional; it takés the 
Optative only because it is in indirect discourse. So with ὅν in the 
preceding example.) ᾿Αγησίλαος ἔλεγεν ὅτι, εἰ βλαβερὰ πεπραχὼς 
εἴη, δίκαιος εἴη ζημιοῦσθαι, i. 6. he said εἰ βλαβερὰ πέπραχε, 
δίκαιός ἐστι ζημιοῦσθαι. XEN. Hell. V, 2,32. So An. VI, 6, 25. 

Ei δέ τινα φεύγοντα λήψοιτο, mponydpevev ὅτι ὡς πολεμίῳ η- 
σοιτο. Id. Ὁ ΠΙ. 1, ᾿ (This aa mains of a ccmabteinl 
sentence belonging under ὃ 50, 1, N. 1; εἴ τινα λήψομαι, ... χρήσο- 
μαι.) Τνόντες δὲ . .. ὅτι, εἰ δώσοιεν εὐθύνας, κινδυνεύσοιεν 
ἀπολέσθαι, πέμπουσιν καὶ διδάσκουσιν τοὺς Θηβαίους ds, εἰ μὴ στρα- 
τεύσοιεν; κινδυνεύσοιεν οἱ ᾿Αρκάδες πάλιν λακωνίσαι. Id. Hell. 
VII, 4, 84. (See § 82, 2.) "Hider γὰρ ὅτι, εἰ μάχης ποτὲ δεήσοι, ἐκ 
τούτων αὐτῷ παραστάτας ληπτέον εἴη. Id. Cyr. VII, 1, 10, 
(The direct discourse was εἴ τι δεήσει, . . . ληπτέον ἐστίν.) 

᾿Ελογίζοντο ὡς, εἰ μὴ μάχοιντο, ἀποστήσοιντο αἱ περιοικίδες 
πόλεις. Id. Hell. VI, 4, 6. (Ἐὰν μὴ μαχώμεθα, ἀποστήσονται.) 
Χρήμαθ᾽ ὑπισχνεῖτο δώσειν, εἰ τοῦ πράγματος αἰτιῷντο ἐμέ. DEM. 
Mid. 548, 20. (Δώσω, ἐὰν αἰτιᾶσθε..) Ἡγεῖτο γὰρ ἅπαν ποιήσειν 
αὐτὸν, εἴ τις ἀργύριον διδοίη. Lys. in Erat. p. 121, § 14. Εὔξαντο 
σωτήρια θύσειν, ἔνθα πρῶτον εἰς φιλίαν γῆν ἀ φίκοιντο. XEN. An. 
V,1,1. (The dependent clause is found in the direct discourse in III, 
2,9: δοκεῖ μοι εὔξασθαι τῷ θεῷ τούτῳ θύσειν σωτήρια ὅπου ἂν πρῶτον 
εἰς φιλίαν γῆν ἀφικώμεθα.) Τοῦτο ἐπραγματεύετο νομίζων, ὅσα τῆς 
πόλεως προλάβοι, πάντα ταῦτα βεβαίως ἕξειν. Dem. Cor. 234, ὃ. 
(σ᾽ ἂν προλάβω, βεβαίως ἕξω.) ᾿"λπιζον ὑπὸ τῶν παίδων, ἐπειδὴ 

K 


POO aa a Aa A gg ea MOEN ERT tae me τῶν 








162 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 74, 1. 


σθαι. Lys. Agor. p. 183, § 45. 


4 , , 
τελευτήσειαν τὸν Bior, ταφησε . «τοί, Baye Sg 
(Ἐπειδὰν τελευτήσωμεν, ταφησόμεθα.) Κόνων ἐδίδασ ty Sirti A 

υ Goat αὐτῷ αἱ πόλεις φιλίαι ἐσοιντο; εἰ θέ ( 
τ ϑρηρρώθαν “ἕ € ἡ la ἑκάστη πολλὰ πράγματα 
νερὸς ἔσοιτο; ἔλεγεν ὡς μία ε ῃ άγμα 
ΕΝ ων i κί ἴ ἡ καὶ οἱ Ἕλληνες, εἰ TavTa 
ἱκανὴ εἴη παρέχειν, καὶ κίνδυνος =f = ge : 
ἴ i XEN. Hell. = i. 3 
αἴσθοιντο, συσταῖεν. AE ! ee : ἘΝ 
Ἔτι δὲ γιγνώσκειν ἔφασαν φθονοῦντας SAP hee εἰ τι — 
Ἵ : ort : 
Ἰγαθὸν yi φηδομένους 4, εἴ Tis TULPopa προ 
ἀγαθὸν γίγνοιτο, ἐφηδομ ᾿ς συμι ees 
they sald in knew that they were envious 1} δον -_ Sper 
on, if 3; 3. ovet 
them, but pleased if any calamity befell them. Ib. ες 2, 2 ( sa 
a " » ΄ ι 
ἐν, ἐάν τι ἡμῖν ἀγαθὸν γίγνηται. ἐφήδεσθε ὃ, ἐάν τις συμῴῷορ 
seat ~ ¢ S δ] Τὴν αἰτίαν ἣ πρόδηλος ἣν ἐπ εκεινοὺυς 
aegis "4 "(δ Dem. Aristoc. 624, 20. 
ἥξουσα, εἴ τι πάθοι Χαρὶ rere: = ey 
("HE et, ἐάν te πάθῃ Χαρίδημος.) Nee ὃ 1, 2. aie 
i ' " TE 
(Subj. and Indic. after secondary tenses.) Ἔλεγον ort ἄκρα ᾿ 
i oi 4 λλοὶ. of παίουσιν τοὺς ἔνδον av- 
ἐστιν ἔνδον καὶ οἱ πολέμιοι πολλοί, οἱ Ta τλβίῳ, οἷς, -ρϑδου 
θρώπους, then said that there was a height, a Xex. An. V, 2, 
Ἵ i ave been used. 
(Here εἶεν and παίοιεν might have bee ἣν ge Se 
Ἐδόκει μοι ταύτῃ πειρᾶσθαι σωθῆναι, ἐν er oige Ξ δ τ 
᾿ : rg. Agor. p. 121, καὶ 15. 
3 ada ca ap goo ar a Te, ἣνσωθῇ 
, ° ΄ χω Ly Sse ᾿ 4 } 
i y might have been 
gg haar gaa 5 ἕειν ᾿Αθηναίους καὶ Λακε- 


» , 4 ¢ ~ δυνατὸν διαλλά 5 2 
οἴκαδε, κατά γε TO αὑτῷ ε (ip anid ie wots, 


; ML ip Tow Hell. 1. 6, 7. 

δαιμονίους, ἀπέπλευσεν. ΧΕΝ. . ’ ee ty ? > - 

. Ἢ: ͵ , H TEGYOVTO aUTOLS, 
which might have been changed to εἰ σωθείη.) Χ 


> ΄“ » A ‘ ’ Bp ‘ ΤῸ. 
ἣν ἐπὶ Ποτίδαιαν ἴωσιν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ἐς τὴν oe yee τ 
5 *Hy t σι μεν) So Tuuc. 1,137. Καὶ οὐκ ἐφα 
" νῆα eg ae ne a διδῷ Ὃ δ᾽ ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ 
ἰέναι; ἐὰν μή τις αὐτοῖς χρῆμα p-.. Ὁ ὃ avs, 
δλφειν κα νοῦ μνᾶς, ἐπὰν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἤκωσι, Kat ᾿Ξ ἐν 
ἐντελῆ, μέχρι ἂν καταστήσῃ τοὺς Ἑλληνας εἰς Ιωνίαν ma ᾿ς ἜΣ 
An. I, 4, 12 and 13. “Edn χρῆναι; eww ἘΜ ths qs 7 a) 
λοντες τῶν Ἑλλήνων, ws προδότας ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι. 10. ἢ] ὅ, 21. 
i δὲ μὴ, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔφασαν αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποκτενεῖν οὺς 
ΠΝ F δ, ("E ight have been used.) Ka- 
ἔχουσι ζῶντας. THuc. U,5. ([Ἔχοιεν might hi : ‘ 
i μὴ EKO ἱνοί XEN. An. 
vai ίσειν Tas πύλας ἔφασαν, εἰ μὴ EKOVTES ἀνοίξουσιν. AEN. ἃ 
VII, 1, 16. (Εἰ μὴ ἀνοίξοιεν might have been used.) Avrois τοιαύτη 
: : ‘ , ν ΕΝ a” , ; € νοις 
δόξα παρειστήκει; ὡς, εἰ μὲν πρότερον ἐπ ἄλλην πόλιν eee — 
καὶ ᾿Αθηναίοις πολεμήσουσιν" εἰ ὃ ἐνθάδε — —— A Bes 
οὐδένας ἄλλους τολμήσειν. K-T-A. Lys. Or. ΜΝ Εν Ρ so 
(Τοῦτο) πρόδηλον ἦν ἐσόμενον; εἰ μὴ ee Ser ~— gs 
already manifest that this would be so, unless you should pret iol t be 
Jove: εἰ μὴ κωλύσετε). AESCHIN. Cor. § 90. (Κωλύσοιτε τῇ: — 
used ; and κωλύσαιτέ, representing ἐὰν μὴ κωλύσητε, 18 found In 
: τ᾽ Η ᾿ on 9 
Ms. and many editions.) See § 73, 2. 
Note 1. The dependent verbs in indirect discourse ead 
be changed to the Optative, even when the — ver = 
icati sometimes oh rare a de- 
tains the Indicative; and sometimes (thoug! 7) ea 
pendent verb retains the Subjunctive or Indicative, whe 











§ 74, 1.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 163 


leading verb is changed to the Optative. This often gives 
rise to a great variety of constructions in the same sentence. 


ὦ, Ο' 
. 2° 
Δηλώσας ὅτι ἕτοιμοί εἶσι μάχεσθαι, εἴ τις ἐξέρχοιτο. XEN, 
Ὺ Υ - >” , , > 
Cyr. IV,1,1. (“Erowpoi eiow, ἐάν τις ἐξέρχηται.) Λύσανδρος εἶπε 
ὅτι παρασπόνδους ὑμᾶς ἔχοι, καὶ ὅτι οὐ περὶ πολιτείας ὑμῖν ἔσται 
ἀλλὰ περὶ σωτηρίας, εἰ μὴ ποιήσαιθ᾽ ἃ Θηραμένης κελεύοι. Lys. in 
Erat. p. 127, 8 74. (Ἔχω, καὶ ov... ἔσται, ἐὰν μὴ ποιήσηθ᾽ ἃ Θ. 
΄ Φ bd Φ ΄ 
κελεύει. There is no need of the emendations ποιήσετ᾽ and κελεύει.) 
IDs - ? ε ε 6 δε ἃ ” > , 
Εδόκει δῆλον εἶναι ὅτι aipnoovrat αὑτὸν, εἴ τις ἐπιψηφίζοι. 
ΧΕΝ. An. VI, 1,25. Οὐκ ἡγνόει Εὐβουλίδης ὅτι, εἰ λόγος ἀποδοθή- 
4 , ‘ ε “, 
σοιτο, καὶ παραγενοιντό μοι πάντες οἱ δημόται, καὶ ἡ ψῆφος 
δικαίως δοθείη, οὐδαμοῦ γενήσονται οἱ μετὰ τούτου συνεστηκότες. 
Dem. Eubul. 1303, 22. (Εἰ ἀποδοθήσεται, καὶ ἐὰν παραγένωνται, καὶ 
ψῆφος δοθῇ, οὐδαμοῦ γενήσονται.) ᾿Αγησίλαος γνοῦς ὅτι, εἰ μὲν μηδε- 
, , 4 > ΄ ΄ - σ > Ἁ 
τέερῳ συλλήψοιτο. μισθὸν οὐδέτερος λύσει τοῖς Ελλησιν, ἀγορὰν 
€ οὐδέτερος παρέξει, ὁπότερος τ᾽ ἂν κρατήσῃ; οὗτος ἐχθρὸς 
» = > a 7 ey , e , » 
ἔσται" εἰ δὲ τῷ ἑτέρῳ συλλήψοιτο, οὗτός γε φίλος ἔσοιτο, 
κιτιλ. NEN, Ages. II, 81. 
Pon σ΄ > + κ ΄ ~ \o@ ε , 
Ελεγον ὅτι εἰκότα δοκοῖεν λέγειν βασιλεῖ, καὶ ἥκοιεν ἡγημόνας 
ἔχοντες, οἱ αὐτοὺς, ἐὰν σπονδαὶ γένωνται, ἄξουσιν ἔνθεν ἕξουσι 
τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. XEN. An. II, 3, 6. ᾿Επηρώτα, ποῖα εἴη τῶν ὀρέων 
ὁπόθεν οἱ Χαλδαῖοι καταθέοντες ληίζονται. Id. Cyr. 1Π, 2. 1. 
Τούτοις προὔλεγον, ὅτι εἰρωνεύσοιο καὶ πάντα μᾶλλον ποιήσοις ἢ 
ἀποκρινοῖο; εἴ τίς τί σε ἐρωτᾷ. PLAT. Rep. I, 337 A. (Epwra 
in the direct discourse would belong under § 51, N. 3, the Futures 
. . τ: o , » ΄σ o ΄σ » 
denoting a habit.) "Ἐλεξας ὅτι μέγιστον εἴη μαθεῖν ὅπως δεῖ ἐξερ- 
γάζεσθαι ἕκαστα" εἰ δὲ μὴ, οὐδὲ τῆς ἐπιμελείας ἔφησθα ὄφελος οὐδὲν 
oo εἰ μή τις ἐπίσταιτο ἃ δεῖ καὶ ὡς δεῖ ποιεῖν. XEN. Oecon. 
XV, 2. 
In Dem. Cor. 276, 23, we have both the constructions of § 74,1 
in the same sentence: εἰ μὲν τοῦτο τῶν ἐκείνου συμμάχων εἰσηγοῖτό 
, “~ 5" ᾿ , rn . “κε - 
τις, ὑπόψεσθαι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐνόμιζε πάντας, ἂν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖος 7 ὁ τοῦτο 
ποιῶν, εὐπόρως λήσειν. (Here εἰ εἰσηγοῖτο represents ἐὰν εἰση- 
γῆται, corresponding to ἐὰν 7.) 


Note 2. According to the general rule (§ 69, 4), all relatives 
and particles which take ἄν and the Subjunctive lose the ἄν when 
such Subjunctives are changed to the Optative in indirect discourse 
after secondary tenses. In a few cases, however, the ἄν is irregu- 
larly retained, even after the verb has been changed to the Opta- 
tive. This must not be confounded with ἄν belonging to the 
Optative itself, making an apodosis. E. σ. 

Οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅστις οὐχ ἡγεῖτο τῶν εἰδότων δίκην με λήψεσθαι παρ᾽ αὐ- 
τῶν, ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα ἀνὴρ εἶναι δοκιμασθείην. Dem. Onet. I, 
865, 24. (The direct discourse was ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθῇ, and the 
regular indirect form would be either ἐπειδὴ δοκιμασθείην or ἐπειδὰν 
δοκιμασθῶ. Here the verb is changed, while the original particle 
ἐπειδάν is retained.) See also § 77, 1, Note 8. 


πω νασοΐτους 


ah SER 


eset 


ως. 


— 


~ δ Faye mF 


ss sii ae ok Ν — ee pes —_e 
ET PONTE A ποτ MP: AE τ LOOT A OTL: et ace 


δι 


— ἫΝ 


πο ον στ a AP a 








164 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 74, 2. 


2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect remain in the In- 
dicative unchanged, even after secondary tenses, in the 
dependent (as well as in the leading) clauses of indirect 
discourse, from the want of those tenses in the Optative. 


(8 70, 2, Note Pe 

The Aorist Indicative also regularly remains un- 
changed after secondary tenses, when it stood in a 
devendent clause of the direct discourse ; not being 


Ἴ 
changed to the Aorist Optative (as it may be when it 


stood in the leading clause, § 70,2). HE. δ. 


Ἐπιστεῖλαι δὲ σφίσιν αὐτοῖς τοὺς ἐφόρους (ἔφασαν) εἰπεῖν, ὡς ὧν 
μὲν πρόσθεν ἐποίουν μέμφοιντο αὐτοῖς, that they sent them to say that 
they blamed them for what they had done before ; i. 6. ὧν πρόσθεν 
ἐποιεῖτε μεμφόμεθα ὑμῖν. ΧΕΝ. Hell. III, 2, 6. 

Aorist Ind.) “HAmifov τοὺς Σικελοὺς ταύτῃ, ods μετέπεμψαν, 
sod that the Sikels whom they had sent for 
would meet them here. Tuuc. VII, 80. ᾿Αντέλεγον - - - λέγοντες μὴ 
ἀπηγγέλθαι πω τὰς σπονδὰς, ὅτ᾽ ἐσέπεμψαν τοὺς ὁπλίτας. Id. V, 
49. ($69, 5.) Ἔλεγον ὡς Ξενοφῶν οἴχοιτο ws Σεύθην οἰκήσων καὶ ἃ 
ὑπέσχετο αὐτῷ ἀποληψόμενος. Xen. An. VII, 7, ὅδ. Ἕκαστον 


> U > , φ - , 
ἠρόμην, εἴ τινες elev μάρτυρες ὧν ἐναντίον τὴν προῖκ᾿ ἀπέδοσαν. 


Dem. Onet. I, 869, 9. 


Nore 1. The Aorist Indicative is not changed to the Aorist 

Optative in the case just mentioned, as the latter tense in such de- 
J ese hee : : 

pendent clauses generally represents the Aorist Subjunctive of the 


direct discourse, so that confusion might arise. Thus ἔφη ἃ εὕροι 


δώσειν means he said that he would give whatever he might find (a 
ἃ εὕροι could also represent 


εὕροι representing ἃ ἂν εὕρων; but if 
ἃ εὗρον, it might also mean he said that he would give what he 
actually had found. In the leading clause the ambiguity is confined 
to indirect questions ; and in these the Aorist Indicative is generally 
retained for the same reason. (See § 70, 2, Rem. 2.) 
When no ambiguity can arise from the change of an Aorist In- 
dicative to the Optative, this tense may follow the general principle 
(§ 69, 1), even in dependent clauses of a quotation. This occurs 
chiefly in causal sentences after ὅτι, &c., because (§ 81, 2), in which 
the Subjunctive can never be used. E. g. 


.-. ‘ , ε , 4 A a > - 7 
Εἶχε yap λέγειν ὡς Λακεδαιμόνιοι διὰ τοῦτο πολεμήσειαν AUTOS, OFF 
» » , > > , ’ aa » » > ‘ > ‘ ω , 
οὐκ ἐθελήσαιεν per ᾿Αγησιλάου ἐλθεῖν ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸν οὐδὲ θῦσαι εα- 
σειαν αὐτὸν ἐν Αὐλίδι. XEN. Hell. VII, 1. 34. (‘The direct discourse 
was ἐπολέμησαν ἡμῖν, ὅτι οὐκ ἠθελήσαμεν. .-- οὐδὲ θῦσαι εἰάσα 
΄ e £ , ” , 

ev.) ᾿Απηγήσασθαί (φασι) ὡς ἀνοσιώτατον μὲν εἴη εἰργασμένος ὅτε 

=~ 3 -~ 3 ΄ ‘ ‘ , . @ ‘ Ud 
τοῦ ἀδελφεοῦ ἀποτάμοι τὴν κεφαλὴν, σοφώτατον δὲ ὅτι τοὺς φυλάκους 
καταμεθύσας καταλύσειε τοῦ ἀδελφεοῦ κρεμάμενον τὸν νέκυν Hor, 


ἀπαντήσεσθαι, they hoy 














ὁ 76. Ὶ 
§ 76.] COMPOUND SENTENCES. 165 


Π, 121. 16 ὅ f 

pa ΗΒ = " ὅτι καταλύσειε represents ὅτι κατέλυσα, because I 

mes =p a _ the Mss.) may also be understood in a 

Ke eames th = cad cut off. Madvig, however, reads ὅτε in 
so ὃ 77, 1, 6, and examples. 


Nore 2. ν sali 
cae 2 δίωω — ct ein gg sometimes stands irregu 
wep. endent (as well as in tl i ὃ et 
Len 1e δ ς ‘ ris - 
sec cr pels tense, to represent a Present or Reaver om after a 
would recularly aS . eriect indicative, whic 
Gade’ te Nye retained or changed to the Present or ρῶν 
é - Such clauses really abando ti at 
A andon the construc as 
disc 5. ke Υ , structio , 
liscourse. (See § 70, 2, N. 2; §77,1,N.2) E.g <he 
Eke ov ov ᾿- er : z “εν = 
pev a Sing τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἐλευθεροῦν αὐτὸν, εἰ ἄνδρας διέφθει 
ας ἀνταιρο ὔ Δὲ r τ 
αλὴν ἢ oan οὔτε πολεμίους. Truc. IIT, 32. (οὐ 
» eines ’ ta €Lpets. οὔ δ ἣν ~ 
ἐχειν, εἰ ταῖς μεγάλαις θυσί pest) 5 ροῦν δος, θεοῖς ἔφη καλῶς 
τε a ς θυσίαις μᾶλλον ἢ ταῖς μικραῖς ἔχαιρον. XEN 
Α oe? Seen t χαίρουσιν.) Καὶ ἔφη εἶ νοὶ Δ ἘΠ᾿ 
dyndaud : : 2 9 εἰναι παρ εαὐυτῷ ὅσον " ἢ 
' ΕΑΝ εἰν βενρο Ἢ mp. 1172,1. (Ὅσον μή ἐστιν dvghagaiin) 
" T € 4 > , fe , Vv. 
would give jae Sa των Cryoumny)» I thought that he 
> , — d aken fro ity: 1] δ᾽ 
ἀποδώσει. Id. F. L. 388, 17 Jrom the cy; 1.e. ἃ eidngpey 


7S. When ade 
$7. When a dependent clause of the original 
tence contains a secondar : Ν ak 
= 5. a secondary tense of the Indicative im- 
p ying the non-fulfilment of a condition, the same mood 
and tense are retained in the indirect discourse, after 
? 


both primary and secondary tenses. E. ¢ 
) es. . δ. 


b 
Ἐδόκει, εἶ μὴ € , 
ull πὸ" Ab ee y ξυλλαβόντες τοὺς ἄνδρας, προδοθῆναι ἂν τὴν 
ng es va » 61. (If ἔφθασαν had been changed to the O ἐκ 
“ὩΣ — eee would have become that of § 76.) Οἴεσθ 0 
ατέρα, εἰ μὴ Τιμοθέου nv τὰ Ev ΣΝ εν e , ΕΟ ἘᾺΝ 
- 1 vAa KC ὃ > a 
σχεῖν τὸ ναῦλον, ἐᾶσαι & ξ ᾿Ξ ἐδεήθη οὗτος αὐτοῦ... παρα- 
a ae » ἐᾶσαι ἄν ποτε, κ. τιλ., ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν φυλάττειν καὶ τὴν 
+ vee avew, ἐως ἐκομίσατο τὰ ἑαυτοῦ. Dem. Timoth 1194 
ae T@ ‘ » ᾽ > . . se . Ζ 
ἐπ: boar τι ἣν ἀληθὲς, οἰεσθ οὐκ ἂν αὐτὴν λαβεῖν; Id. Aph 1. 
᾽ €ws ἂν ὑμῶν πυθοίμην, τίν᾽ ἄν ποτε γνώμην περὶ ἐμ μ 
ov 


εἴχετε, εἰ μὴ ἐ ἰλλὰ : ἡ νό 
ΤΣ ᾧ tp ἐπετριηράρχησα ἀλλὰ πλέων φχόμην. Id. Polycl. 


“- 


§ 76. ive i 
Peres An Optative in a dependent clause of the 
iginal sentence (as in the leading clause) is retained 


without change of mood or tense in all indirect dis- 


course. ΕἸ. g. 








166 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 76. 


κιον πράξειαν. Tb. I, 9, 10. Δεινὸν ἄν τι παθεῖν σαυτὸν ἤλπιζες, εἰ 
πύθοινθ᾽ οὗτοι τὰ πεπραγμένα σοι. ὍΕΜ. F. 1. 416, 11. 


Remark. Sentences which belong under ὃ 76 are often trans- 
lated like those which in the direct discourse were expressed by a 
Future and a dependent Subjunctive, and which belong under § 74, 
1. Thus ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἔλθοι ἂν, εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο (or ἔλεγεν ἐλθεῖν ἂν, εἰ 
τοῦτο γένοιτο), as well as ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἐλεύσοιτο, εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο (Or 
ἔλεγον ἐλεύσεσθαι; εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο), may be translated he said that he 
would come if this should happen ; although in the first two sentences 
the direct discourse was ἔλθοιμι ἂν, εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο, I would come if 
this should happen; and in the last two, ἐλεύσομαι, ἐὰν τοῦτο γένηται, 


I will come if this shall happen. 


Single Dependent Clauses in Indirect Discourse. 


877. The principles which apply to dependent 
clauses of indirect discourse (ὃ 74, 1 and 2) apply also 
to any dependent clause in a sentence of any kind (even 
when what precedes is not in indirect discourse), if such 
a clause expresses indirectly the thought of any other 
person than the speaker, or even a former thought of 
the speaker himself. 

After primary tenses this never affects the construc- 
tion; but after secondary tenses such a clause may 
either take the Optative, in the tense in which the 
thought would have been originally conceived, or retain 
both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse. 
Here, as in § 74, 2, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and 
Aorist Indicative are retained unchanged. 


1. This applies especially (a) to clauses depending on the 
Infinitive which follows verbs of commanding, advising, wish- 
ing, &c.; these verbs implying thought or the expression of 
thought, although the Infinitive after them is not in indirect 
discourse. (See § 73, 1, Rem.) It applies also (0) to the 
Optative (though not to the Indicative) in causal sentences in 
which the speaker states the cause as one assigned by others 
(81, 2) ;— (6) to clauses containing a protasis with the apodo- 
sis implied in the context ($ 53, Note 2), or with the apodo- 


§ 77, 1.] SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 167 


sis expressed in a verb like θαυμάζω, &e. (8 56) ;— (d) to 
temporal sentences expressing a past intention or expectation, 
especially those introduced by ἕως and πρίν, until, after past 
tenses (§ 66, 2, Note 1);—and sometimes (e) even to ordi- 
nary relative sentences, which would otherwise take the In- 
dicative. E. g. 

(a.) Ἐβούλοντο ἐλθεῖν, εἰ τοῦτο γένοιτο, they wished to go, if this 
should happen. (Here ἐὰν τοῦτο γένηται might be used, as the 
form in which the wish would originally be conceived.) Γαδάταν de 
καὶ Γωβρύαν ἐκέλευσεν ὅ τι δύναιντο λαβόντας μεταδιώκειν " καὶ 
ὅστις εἶχε τὰς ἑπομένας ἀγέλας, εἶπε τούτῳ καὶ ἅμα πρόβατα πολλὰ 
ἐλαύνειν, ὅπῃ ἂν αὐτὸν πυνθάνηται ὄντα, ὡς ἐπισφαγείη. XEN. Cyr. 
VU, 3,7. (Here 6 τι δύναιντο represents 6 re ἂν δύνησθε in the 
direct command, while ὅπῃ ἂν πυνθάνηται represents ὅπη ἂν πυνθάνῃ.) 
Ἐβούλοντο γὰρ σφίσιν, εἴ τινα λάβοιεν, ὑπάρχειν ἀντὶ τῶν ἔνδον, ἣν 
ἄρα τύὐχωσί τινες ἐζωγρημένοι. THuc. ΠΠ, ὅ. (Ἢν λάβωμεν, and ἣν 
τύχωσι.) Οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι Θηβαῖοι, ods ἔδει παραγενέσθαι, εἴ τι μὴ προ- 
χωροίη τοῖς ἐσεληλυθόσιν, ἐπεβοήθουν. Ibid. (Ἐάν τι μὴ προ- 
χωρῇ.) 

Προεῖπον αὐτοῖς μὴ ναυμαχεῖν Κορινθίοις, ἣν μὴ ἐπὶ Κέρκυραν πλέ- 
wot καὶ μέλλωσιν ἀποβαίνειν. Id. 1, 45. (Hy μὴ πλέητε καὶ 
μέλλητε.) Καὶ παρήγγειλαν ἐπειδὴ δειπνήσειαν συνεσκευασμένους 
πάντας ἀναπαύεσθαι, καὶ ἕπεσθαι ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν τις παραγγέλλῃ. XEN. 
An. II], ὅ, 18. (Ἐπειδὰν δειπνήσητε, and ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν τις παραγγέλλῃ.) 
Περὶ αὐτῶν κρύφα πέμπει, κελεύων .. . μὴ ἀφεῖναι πρὶν ἂν αὐτοὶ πάλιν 
κομισθῶσιν. Tuuc. I, 91. (Πρὶν κομισθεῖεν might have been 
used.) Καὶ πολλάκις τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις mapyvet, ἣν ἄρα ποτὲ κατὰ γὴν 
βιασθῶσι, καταβάντας ἐς αὐτὸν ταῖς ναυσὶ πρὸς ἅπαντας ἀνθίστασθαι. 
Id. I, 91. (Ei βιασθεῖεν might have been used.) ᾿Ηξίουν αὐτοὺς 
ἡγεμόνας σφῶν γενέσθαι καὶ Παυσανίᾳ μὴ ἐπιτρέπειν, ἤν που βιάζηται. 
Id. I, 95. (Εἴ που βιάζοιτο might have been used.) ᾿Αφικνοῦν- 
“αι ὡς Σιτάλκην, βουλόμενοι πεῖσαι αὐτὸν, εἰ δύναιντο; στρατεῦσαι 
ἐπὶ τὴν Ποτίδαιαν. Id. I], 67. Ἕτοιμος ἦν ἀποτίνειν, εἰ καταγνοῖεν 


"αὐτοῦ. Isoc. Trapez. 361 E.§ 16. (This example might be placed 


also under 6.) Εἶπον μηδένα τῶν ὄπισθεν κινεῖσθαι, πρὶν ἂν ὁ πρόσθεν 
ἡγῆται; 1 commanded that no one, &c. XEN. Cyr. I, 2, 8. 

Παρηγγέλλετο yap αὐτοῖς δέκα μὲν ods Θηραμένης ἀπέδειξε χειρο- 
τονῆσαι, δέκα δὲ ods οἱ ἔφοροι κελεύοιεν. Lys. in Erat. p. 127, 
8 76. (Obs ἀπέδειξε, and ods ἂν κελεύωσιν. See ὃ 74, 2.) ᾿Εκέλευσέ 
με τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἣν ἔγραψα οἴκαδε δοῦναι, the letter which I had 
written. XEN. Cyr. Il, 2, 9. (Ἣν γράψαιμι would mean whatever 
letter I might write, representing ἣν ἂν γράψῃς.) So ὅθεν ἦλθον, 
Tuuc. VI, 27. 

(b.) Ἑκάκιζον ὅτι στρατηγὸς dv οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι;, they abused him 
because he did not lead them out (as they said). Tuuc. I, 21. 

See other examples under ὃ 81, 2. See also ὃ 81, 2, Rem. 

(c.) “Queretpov, ei ἁλώσοιντο, they pitied them, in case they 


moe 


1 lr 


AE a SRY Ot 


=e Ύ 


soi agp κι 


dnl, eae one eine Hin ansaid ᾿- 





ater 


epnbalyrcn ernlicduathsbe hi τὰ remand ΤᾺΝ 





SOE Se RE ee ee 


ame 3 -- 
ζω Sette ge gia 


cece ieee 


arama or 955-4 





168 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [8 77, 1. 


should be captured: the idea in full is, they pitied them, thinking of 
what would befall them if they should be captured. Xen. An. I, 4, 7. 
(Ei ἁλώσονται might have been used.) Διδόντος δ᾽ αὐτῷ πάμπολλα 
δῶρα Τιθραύστου, εἰ ἀπέλθοι. ἀπεκρίνατο, offering him many gifts, if 
he would go away. Id. Ages. IV, 6. (Ἐὰν ἀπέλθῃ might have been 
used.) Φύλακας συμπέμπει, ὅπως φυλάττοιεν αὐτὸν, καὶ εἰ τῶν ἀγρίων 
τι φανείη θηρίων, and (to be ready) in case any wild beasts shoula 
appear ; his thought being ἐάν τι φανῇ. Id. Cyr. I, 4, 7. See 
other examples of the Optative under § 53, N. 2. 
wn 7 m” * > ΄ ΄ ᾿ , - 

Hy δέ τις εἴπῃ ἢ ἐπιψηφίσῃ κινεῖν τὰ χρήματα ταῦτα ἐς ἄλλο τι, 
θάνατον ζημίαν ἐπέθεντο, they set death as the penalty, if any one should 
move, or put to vote a motion, to divert this money to any other purpose. 
Tuuc. 11, 24. (Εἰ εἴποι ἣ ἐπιψηφίσειεν might have been used.) 
Τἄλλα, ἣν ἔτι ναυμαχεῖν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τολμήσωσι, παρεσκευάζοντο, 1. 6. 
they made their other preparations, (to.be ready) in case the Athenians 
should dare, &c. Id. VU, 59. (Their thought was, we will be ready, 
in case they shall dare, ἣν τολμήσωσι.) So ἣν ἴωσιν, IV, 42. Οὐ τὸ 
λοιπὸν ἔμελλον ἕξειν, εἰ μὴ ναυκρατήσουσιν, they were not likely 
to have them (provisions) for the future (as they thought), unless they 
should hold the sea. Id. VII, 60. 

᾿Εθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἴ τις ἀρετὴν ἐπαγγελλόμενος ἀργύριον πράττοιτο, 
he wondered that any demanded money, &c. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 7. 
(But in I, 1, 13, we find ἐθαύμαζε δ᾽ εἰ μὴ φανερὸν αὐτοῖς ἐστιν, he 
wondered that it was not plain.) Εχαιρον ἀγαπῶν εἴ tis ἐάσοι, I re- 
joiced, being content if any one would let it pass. PLat. Rep. V, 450 
A. οὐκ ἠσχύνθη εἰ τοιοῦτο κακὸν ἐπάγει τῳ, he was not ashamed 
that he was bringing such a calamity on any one. Dem. Mid. 548, 24. 
Τῷ δὲ μηδὲν ἑαυτῷ συνειδότι δεινὸν cioner, εἰ πονηρῶν ἔργων ὃ ὁ ξ εἰ κοι- 
νωνεῖν τῷ σιωπῆσαι, ut seemed hard, if he was to appear to be impli- 
cated, &c.; he thought, δεινόν ἐστιν, εἰ δόξω (ὃ 49,1, N. 3). Id. 
F. L. 351,18. (Here δόξοι might have been used, like ἐάσοι above.) 
So AESCHIN. Cor.§ 10. Kai ἐγὼ τὸν Εὐηνὸν ἐμακάρισα, εἰ ὡς ἀληθῶς 
ἔχει ταύτην τὴν τέχνην καὶ οὕτως ἐμμελῶς διδάσκει, J congratulated 
him, if he really had this art (as he thought). Piat. Apol. 20 Β. 
(Here ἔχοι and διδάσκοι might have been used.) 


(d.) Σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο, ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα εἰς 
Λακεδαίμονα, they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said 
should be announced at Sparta; i. e. ἕως ἂν ἀπαγγελθῇ, which 
might have been retained. Xen. Hell. Ill, 2, 20. Ὦωρσε δ᾽ ἐπὶ 
κραιπνὸν Βορέην, πρὸ δὲ κύματ᾽ eager, ἕως 6 γε Φαιήκεσσι φιληρέτμοισι 
μιγείη, until Ulysses should be among the Phaeacians ; 1. Θ. ἕως ἂν 
μιγῇ. Od. V, 385. So eiws Oeppaivorro, Od. IX, 376. ᾿Απηγόρευε 
μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλησ θείη θηρῶν, until Cyrus should 
be satisfied. Xen. Cyr. I, 4, 14. (His words were πρὶν ἂν ἐμ- 
πλησθῇ.) Οἱ δὲ μένοντες ἕστασαν, ὁππότε πύργος ᾿Αχαιῶν ἄλλος ἐπελ- 
θὼν Τρώων ὁρμήσειε καὶ ἄρξειαν πολέμοιο, 1. 6. they stood wail- 
ing for the time when, &c. Il. 1V, 335. (Here ὁπόταν ὁρμήσῃ, &c. 
might be used.) So 1]. Il, 794. Προὐκίνησαν τὸ στῖφος, ὡς mavao- 
μένους τοῦ διωγμοῦ, ἐπεὶ σφᾶς ἴδοιεν προορμήσαντας, when they 
should see them, &c. XEN. Cyr. I, 4, 21. 


§ 77, 2.] SINGLE DEPENDENT CLAUSES. 169 


Οὐ yap δή σφεας ἀπίει ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἀποικίης, πρὶν δὴ ἀπίκωνται ἐς 
αὐτὴν Λιβύην. Hor. IV, 156. (CAmixowro might be used.) Oi 
δὲ Κορίνθιοι οὐ προεθυμήθησαν ξυμπλεῖν, πρὶν τὰ Ἴσθμια, ἃ τότε ἦν, 
διεορτάσωσιν. Tuuc. VIII, 9. 


(e.) Καὶ ἤτεε σῆμα ἰδέσθαι, ὅ tre pa οἱ γαμβροῖο πάρα Προίτοιο 
φέροιτο, he asked to see the token, which (he said) he was bringing 
from Proetus, i. 6. he said φέρομαι. Il. VI, 177. Karnydpeov τῶν 
Αἰγινητέων Ta πεποιήκοιεν προδόντες THY Ἑλλάδα, 1. 6. they accused 
them for what (as they said) they had done. Hot. VI, 49. Sora 
πεπονθὼς εἴη, 1, 44. Καλεῖ τὸν Λάιον, μνήμην παλαιῶν σπερμάτων 


ἔχουσ᾽, ὑφ᾽ ὧν θάνοι μὲν αὐτὸς, τὴν δὲ τίκτουσαν λίποι, by which 


(as she said) he had perished himself, and had left her the mother, &c. 
Sop. O. T. 1245. (if the relative clause contained merely the 
idea of the speaker, ἔθανε and ἔλιπε would be used. Here no am- 
biguity can arise from the use of the Aorist Optative. See-§ 74, 2, 
N. 1.) 


Note 1. Causal sentences are usually constructed without re- 
ference to this principle. See § 81, with Rem. 


Note 2. The Imperfect and Pluperfect occasionally represent 
the Present and Perfect Indicative in this construction, as in § 74, 2, 
N. 2. Such clauses are simply not included in the indirect discourse. 

. δ. 

‘Eroipos ἦν, εἰ μὲν τούτων τι εἴργαστο, δίκην δοῦναι, εἰ δ᾽ ἀπολυ- 
θείη, ἄρχειν, he was ready, if he had done any of these things, to be 
punished ; but if he should be acquitted, to hold his command. THUuc. 
VI, 29. (Eipyaoro represents εἴργασμαι, while εἰ ἀπολυθείη repre- 
sents ἐὰν ἀπολυθῶ.) 

Nore 3. “Av is occasionally retained with relatives and temporal 
articles in sentences of this kind, even when the Subjunctive to 
which they belonged has been changed to the Optative. See § 74, 
1, Note 2. E. g. 

Τοὺς δὲ λαμβάνοντας τῆς ὁμιλίας μισθὸν ἀνδραποδιστὰς ἑαυτῶν ἀπε- 
κάλει, διὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον αὐτοῖς εἶναι διαλέγεσθαι παρ᾽ ὧν ἂν λάβοιεν 
τὸν μισθόν, because they were obliged (as he said) to converse with those 
from whom they received the pay. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 6. (Here ὧν ἂν 
λάβοιεν represents ὧν ἂν λάβωσιν.) Καί μοι τάδ᾽ ἦν πρόρρητα, ve τὸ 
φάρμακον τοῦτο σώζειν ἐμὲ, ἕως ἂν ἀρτίχριστον ἁρμόσαιμί mov. 
Sopu. Trach. 687. (See Schneidewin’s note.) Ἠξίουν αὐτοὺς μα- 
στιγοῦν τὸν ἐκδοθέντα, ἕως ἂν τἀληθὴ δόξειεν αὐτοῖς λέγειν. 1500. 
Trap. 861 Ὁ. 8 15. Χαίρειν ἐῴης ἂν καὶ οὐκ ἀποκρίναιο, ews ἂν Ta ἀπ 
ἐκείνης ὁρμηθέντα σκέψαιο, you would not answer, until you should 
have examined, ἕο. PLAT. Phaed. 101 D. (The direct thought of 
the person addressed would be, ἕως ἂν σκέψωμαι.) See ὃ 34,1. 

It is doubtful whether ἐάν was ever used with the Optative in this 
way. 


2. Upon this principle (δ 77) final and object clauses with 
8 


israel Qh ἐξωτολρὶ 


STARE uo 


a RPA ih he EPR ye aes 


Nt ERS VEIT WOW see PST δὲ 





ann eeingne ree τα 


ED em τον ONE IEG OO PM 





170 INDIRECT DISCOURSE. [§ 77, 2. 
ἵνα, ὅπως, μή, &c., after secondary tenses, admit the double con- 
struction of indirect discourse. This appears in the frequent 
use of the Subjunctive or the Future Indicative instead of 
the Optative in these sentences, after secondary tenses, when 
either of these is the form in which the purpose would have 
been originally conceived. Thus we may say either ἦλθεν ἵνα 
ἴδοι or ἦλθεν ἵνα ἴδῃ, he came that he might see; the latter 
being allowed because the person referred to would himself 
have said ἔρχομαι ἵνα ἴδω. See § 44, 2, § 40, and § 46, with 
the examples. 


Nore. The principles of § 74 and ὃ 77 apply to clauses which 
depend upon final and object clauses, as these too are considered as 
standing in indirect discourse. KE. g. 

Ἐλθόντες és Λακεδαίμονα (ἔπρασσον) ὅπως ἑτοιμάσαιντο τιμω- 
ρίαν, ἣν δέ. Tuuc. I, 58. (Here εἰ δέοι might have been used. 
See § 55, 2.) ἘἘφοβεῖτο yap μὴ ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι σφᾶς, ὁπότε σαφῶς 
ἀκούσειαν, οὐκέτι ἀφῶσιν. Id. I, 91. (Here ὁπόταν ἀκούσωσιν 
is changed to ὁπότε ἀκούσειαν, although ἀφῶσιν is retained by § 77, 
2.) Μέγα τὸ δέος ἐγένετο μὴ παραπλέοντες οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι, εἰ καὶ ὡς 
μὴ διενοοῦντο μένειν, πορθῶσιν τὰς πόλεις, the fear was great lest 
the Peloponnesians as they sailed by, even if under the circumstances 
they had not been thinking of remaining, might destroy the cities. Id. 
III, 33. (Here διενοοῦντο is retained by § 74, 2:) 


“Ὅπως and”O in Indirect Quotations. 


§'78. 1. Ina few cases ὅπως is used in indirect quo- 
tations where we should expect ὡς or ὅτι. This occurs 
chiefly in poetry. E. g. 

Τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ μή μοι φράζ᾽, ὅπως οὐκ εἶ κακός. SOPH. O. T. 548. 
“Ava, ἐρῶ μὲν οὐχ ὅπως τάχους ὕπο δύσπνους ἱκάνω. Id. Ant. 223. 


‘ a) - oe ‘ ΄ ΄ ¢ > ; > ‘ 
So Ant. 685: ὅπως σὺ μὴ λέγεις. ᾿Ανάπεισον ὅκως μοι ἀμεινὼ ἐστί 
ταῦτα οὕτω ποιεόμενα. Hot. 1, 37. So III, 115. So ὅπως πάντα 


ἐπίσταμαι, PLAT. Euthyd. 296 E. 


e Ψ 
2. In ἃ few passages in Homer we find ὁ (the neuter 
ed d 
of os) used for or. K. g. 


Τιγνώσκων 6 of αὐτὸς ὑπείρεχε en ᾿Απόλλων, knowing that Apollo 


himself held over him his hands, 1]. V, 433. Εὖ vu καὶ ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν ὅ 
τοι σϑένος οὐκ ἐπιεικτόν. Il. ὙΠ], 32. Λεύσσετε γὰρ τὸ γε πάντες, 
ὅ μοι γέρας ἔρχεται ἄλλῃ, that my prize goes elsewhere. ], I, 120. 
So Od. XII, 295. 


§ 81, 1.] Ὅτι BEFORE DIRECT QUOTATIONS. 

NoTE. ‘O@ovvexa and οὕνεκα in the tragedians, and οὕνεκα in Ho- 
mer, are sometimes used like ὅτι or ὡς, that ; as ἄγγελλε ὁθούνεκα 
τέθνηκ᾽ ᾿Οορέστης, Sopu. El. 47; ἴσθι τοῦτο, οὕνεκα “Ἑλληνές ἐσμεν, 
Id. Phil. 232. See Sopn. El. 1478, Trach. 984 (οὕνεκα with Opt.) ; 
and Il, XI, 21; Odyss. V, 216; XIII, 309. 


“Ort before Direct Quotations. 


8 79. Even direct quotations are sometimes introduced by 
ὅτε. without further change in the construction. “Or thus 
used cannot be expressed in English. E. g. 

Ὁ δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι “ Οὐδ᾽ εἰ γενοίμην, ὦ Κῦρε, σοί γ᾽ ἄν ποτε ἔτι 
δόξαιμι." XEN. An. I, 6, 8. ᾿Απεκρίνατο ὅτι “70 δέσποτα, οὐ on, 
x.t.A.” Id. Cyr. VI, 3, 8. Εἶπε δ᾽ ὅτι “Els καιρὸν ἥκεις," ἔφη, 
( ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς." Ib. 1Π1|,1, 8. Ἢ ἐροῦμεν πρὸς αὐτοὺς, ὅτι 
«Ἠδίκει γὰρ ἡμᾶς ἡ πόλις, καὶ οὐκ ὀρθῶς τὴν δίκην ἔκρινε," — ταῦτα ἣ 
τί ἐροῦμεν; Puat. Crit. 50 Β. So Phaed. 60 A. See also Hor. 
II, 115. 





SECTION *¥. 
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 


8 80. Causal sentences express the cause or reason 
of something stated in the leading sentence. They 
may be introduced by ὅτι, SLOT’ OF διόπερ, οὕνεκα ΟΥ̓ 
ὁθούνεκα. and ὡς, because; or by ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὅτε, 
ὁπότε, εὖτε, and sometimes ὅπου, since, seeing that. 


REMARK. Ὅτι and ὡς in this causal sense must not be con- 
founded with ὅτι and ὡς, that, in indirect quotations; and ἐπεί, 
ἐπειδή, ὅτε, and ὁπότε must not be confounded with the same parti- 
cles in temporal sentences. 


§ Si. 1. Causal sentences regularly take the In- 
dicative, after both primary and secondary tenses; past 
causes being expressed by the past tenses of the Indica- 
tive. The negative particle is ov. HE. g. 


Kydero yap Δαναῶν, ὅτι pa θνήσκοντας ὁρᾶτο. Π.1, 56. Χωόμε: 
- 


τ greg. a ae 


ae ur a 


mieten tie 


ΒΝ 
ρα’ ἀφ me the, 


coal Southeast - φιτο τῶς Saat 


jean + Spe ae ὅτε 


rains 


i> ws agence Calica oR Pla Ol AT AGA RAMON SNEED AIRE LOMA OPN RC UPN AMO Ba RRR 








172 CAUSAL SENTENCES. [§ 81, 1. 


vos, Or ἄριστον ᾿Αχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας. Il. I, 244. Δημοβόρος βασι- 
λεὺς, ἐπεὶ οὐτιδανοῖσιν ἀνάσσεις. Il. I, 281. Μὴ δ᾽ οὕτως κλέπτε 
νόῳ, ἐπεὶ οὐ παρελεύσεαι οὐδέ με πείσεις. Il. I, 132. : Νοῦσον 
ava στρατὸν ὥρσε κακὴν, ὀλέκοντο δὲ λαοὶ, οὕνεκα τὸν Χρύσην ἢ τίμη σ᾽ 
ἀρητηρα᾿᾿Ατρείδης. 1]. 1,11. Καὶ τριήρης δέ τοι ἡ σεσαγμένη ἀνθρώπων 
διὰ τί ἄλλο φοβερόν ἐστι ἢ ὅτι ταχὺ πλεῖ ; διὰ τί δὲ ἄλλο ἄλυποι ἀλλή- 
λοις εἰσὶν οἱ ἐμπλέοντες ἢ διότι ἐν τάξει κάθηνται; XEN. Oec. VIII, 
8. Οἱ ἐμοὶ φίλοι οὕτως ἔχοντες μερὶ ἐμοῦ διατελοῦσιν, οὐ διὰ τὸ φιλεῖν 
ἐμὲ, ἀλλὰ διόπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ ἂν οἴονται βέλτιστοι γίγνεσθαι. Id. Mem. 
IV,8,7. (See ὃ 42, 2, Note.) Πρὸς ταῦτα κρύπτε μηδὲν, ὡς ὁ πάνθ᾽ 
ὁρῶν καὶ πάντ᾽ ἀκούων πάντ᾽ ἀναπτύσσει χρόνος, i. 6. since time 
develops all things. ὅοΡη. Hippon. Fr. 280. Μέγα δὲ τὸ ὁμοῦ τρα- 
ary ἐπεὶ καὶ τοῖς θηρίοις πόθος τις ἐγγίγνεται τῶν συντρόφων. 
XEN. Mem. II, 8,4. “Or οὖν παραινοῦσ᾽ οὐδὲν ἐς πλέον ποιῶ, ἱκέτις 
ἀφῖγμαι. Sopu. O. T. 918. Ὁπότε οὖν πόλις μὲν τὰς ἰδίας ξυμφορὰς 
οἷα τε φέρειν, εἷς δὲ ἕκαστος τὰς ἐκείνης ἀδύνατος (sc. ἐσ τὶ), πῶς οὐ 
χρὴ πάντας ἀμύνειν αὐτῇ; ΤῊσο. Il, 60. Ὅτε τοίνυν τοῦθ᾽ οὕτως 
ἔχει; προσήκει προθύμως ἐθέλειν ἀκούειν τῶν βουλομένων συμβουλεύειν. 
Dem. Ol. I, 9, 8. For εὖτε, since, see ὅοΡη. Aj. 715, O. C. 84; for 
ὅπου, see Hpr. I, 68. 


2. When, however, it is implied that the cause is as- 
signed by some other person than the speaker, the prin- 
ciple of indirect discourse (8 17, 1) applies to causal 
sentences. 

This has no effect upon the form after primary tenses ; 
but after secondary tenses it allows the verb to stand in 
the Optative, in the tense originally used by the person 
who assigned the cause. E. g. 


Tov Περικλέα ἐκάκιζον, ὅτι στρατηγὸς ὧν οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι, they abused 
Pericles, because being general he did not lead them out. ‘Tuve. II, 
21. (This states the reason assigned by the Athenians for reproach- 
ing Pericles: if Thucydides had wished to assign the cause merely 
on his own authority, he would have used ὅτι οὐκ ἐπεξῆγεν.) Τοὺς 
συνόντας ἐδόκει ποιεῖν ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀνοσίων, ἐπείπερ ἡγήσαιντο 
μηδὲν ἄν ποτε ὧν πράττοιεν θεοὺς διαλαθεῖν. XEN. Mem. I, 4, 19. 
(See ὃ 74, 2,N.1.) Οἶσθα ἐπαινέσαντα αὐτὸν (Ὅμηρον) τὸν ᾿Αγαμέ- 
pvova, ὡς βασιλεὺς εἴη ἀγαθός, because (as he said) he was a good 
king. Id. Symp. IV, 6. So ὡς εὑρήκοι, because (as he said) he 
had found, Hor. I, 44. 


ReMARK. We should suppose that in causal sentences of the 
second class (8 81, 2) the mood and tense by which the cause would 
have been originally stated might also be retained, as in ordinary 
indirect discourse; so that in the first example above (Tuc. II. 21) 
ὅτι οὐκ ἐπεξάγει might also be used, in the same sense as ὅτι οὐκ 


αὶ 82.] EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 173 


ἐπεξάγοι. This, however, seems to have been avoided, to pre- 
vent the ambiguity which would arise from the three forms, ἐπεξῆγεν, 
ἐπεξάγοι, and ἐπεξάγει. It will be remembered that the first form, 
which is the regular one in causal sentences of the first class (δ 81,1), 
is allowed only by exception in indirect quotations (§ 70, 2, N. 2); 
for in indirect discourse the tenses of the Indicative regularly de- 
note time present, past, or future relatively to the leading verb; while 
in causal sentences (as in most other constructions) they regularly 
denote time absolutely present, past, or future. (See § 9.) 


Note 1. The Optative in causal sentences appears to have been 
used only after ὅτι, ὡς, and ἐπεί. It is not found in Homer. 


Note 2. If a cause is to be expressed by an apodosis in which 
the Indicative or Optative with dy is required, those forms can of 
course follow the causal particles. E. g. 

Δέομαι οὖν σου παραμεῖναι ἡμῖν" ὡς ἐγὼ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἑνὸς ἥδιον ἀκού- 
σαιμι ἣ σοῦ, I beg you then to remain with us ; as there ts not one whom 
I should hear more gladly than you. Ῥ ΚΑΤ. Prot. 335 D. Nop δὲ 
ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἐθέλεις καὶ ἐμοί τις ἀσχολία ἐστὶ καὶ οὐκ ἂν οἷός τ εἴην σοι 
παραμεῖναι ἀποτείνοντι μακροὺς λόγους ---ἐλθεῖν γάρ mot με δεῖ--- εἰμι" 
ἐπεὶ καὶ ταῦτ᾽ ἂν ἴσως οὐκ ἀηδῶς σου ἤκονον. Ib. 335 Ὁ. 


Nore 3. For relative causal sentences, see § 65, 4. For the 
causal use of the Participle, see § 109, 4. 





SECTION VI. 


EXPRESSION OF A WISH. 


Remark. The Greek has one form to express a wish re- 
ferring to a future object, and another to express one referring 
to a present or past object which (it is implied) ἐδ not or was 
not attained. To the former class belong such wishes as O 
that he may come ! —O that this may happen ! — Utinam veniat ; 
to the latter, such as O that this had happened !—O that this 
were true /— Utinam hoc factum esset, — Utinam hoc verum 
esset. 


§ 82. If the wish refers to the future, the Optative is 
use after the particles of wishing εὐθε or εὐ yap (nega- 


er a ee 


— 


oo Sa ADORE ete SETI AT wie Lait eet OLS 





174 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. [8 82. 


tively, εἴθε μή, εἰ yap μή, or simply un), O that, O of. 
would that (0 that not, &c.). Εἴθε and εἰ yap may how- 
ever, be omitted ; and thus the Optative often stands 
alone to express a wish. 

The Present Optative refers to a continued or re- 
peated action or state in the future; the Aorist (which 
is the most common) refers to a momentary or single 


act in the future. E. g. 


At yap ἐμοὶ τοσσήνδε θεοὶ δύναμιν παραθεῖεν. O that the Gods 
would clothe me with so much strength! Od. IU, 205. Ai? ohins 
ee Διὶ πατρὶ γένοιο, mayest thou become in like manner 
ἜΝ lo father Zeus. Od. XIV, 440. Ὑμῖν μὲν θεοὶ δοῖεν Ὀλύμ- 
rs sand eeepc spe Nye ιάμοιο πόλιν, εὖ δ᾽ οἴκαδ᾽ ἱκέσθαι, may 
τδετα g ne u, xe. H. I, 18. _ Mn μὰν ἀσπουδί ye καὶ ἀκλειῶς 

πολοίμην. Il. XXII, 804. Τὸ μὲν νῦν ταῦτα πρήσσοις τάπερ ἐν 
tah a tig you Sor the present continue to do what you now have 
—— . Hot. ΗΠ, 5. Θῆσω πρυτανεῖ᾽, ἢ μηκέτι ζ ῴην ἐγώ, or may 

no longer live. Arist. Nub. 1255. Νικώη δ᾽ 6 τι πάσιν ὑμῖν 
Ὑ one Tg and may that opinion prevail, &e. Dem. Phil. I, 
ne } τ ainv, ὅτε μοι μηκέτι ταῦτα μέλοι. MimNerm. I, 2. 

λούσιον δὲ νομίζοιμι τὸν σοφόν. PLAT. Phaedr. 279 C. °Q παῖ 
γένοιο πατρὸς εὐτυχέστερος. Sopu. ΑἹ. 550. Οὕτω νικήσαιμί : 
ἐγὼ καὶ νομιζοίμην σοφός, on this condition may I gain the pated 
(in this case) and be (always) considered wise. Arist. Nub ‘520. 
age Note 4.) Ew’, ὦ λῷστε, φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο. XEN. Hell. IV, 
ον ΣῊΝ γενοίμην; τέκνον, ἀντὶ σοῦ νεκρός. EuR. Hippol. 

rt. muveveyKot μὲν ταῦτα ws βουλόμεθα. Tuuc. VI, 20 
ἘΝ ἄει ἐπιστήσει καὶ ἅπαντα, ἂν ἐγὼ βούλωμαι. ---- Αλλὰ ἄννυλη- 
᾿ (πε; — only be willing! Puat. Euthyd. 296 ἢ. So εἶεν, 

‘> » ΝΒ 

Μηκέτ ped Οδυσῆι κάρη ὦμοισιν ἐπείη, μηδ᾽ ἔτι Τηλεμάχοιο 
wen Ae : = ἥ ne = ae n ᾿ » — may the head of Ulysses no longer 
Telemachus. Il. II, 259. (See amis ΠΥ 


From its use in wishes th ; 
. . e O tatt = > Ld 
received its name. ptative Mood (ἔγκλισις €UKTLKN) 


Ἐς ἢ i δι τοι Optative was not used in wishes in 
lee ga 4 erfect was robably not used except in the 
rs mp of the Fresent (8 17, N. 3), as in the last example. If 

ch a phrase as εἴθε νενικήκοι were used, it would mean Ὁ that it 
may prove (hereafier) that he has been victorious! See § 18, 1 


ΑΙ ee 2 An Homer we occasionally find the Present Optative 
Ave 1 relerring to present time, where later writers would have 
used the Imperfect Indicative. E. g. 


O that I were the son of Zeus, and that Hera were my mo 
I were honored as Athene and Apollo are honored, &c. 


O that I were again so young, ἕο. 1]. VU, 157. 


in protasis, see § 49, 2, N. 6 (0). 


εἴθε or εἰ yap sometimes expresses 





OPTATIVE. 


> 4 ui @ 4 - > , 
Ei yap ἐγὼν οὕτω ye Διὸς mats αἰγιόχοιο 

“ ¢ , ΄ ‘ q 
Einv ἤματα mavra, TEKOL δέ με πότνια Hon, 
Τιοίμην δ᾽ ὡς τίετ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίη καὶ ᾿Απόλλων, 


Ὡς viv ἡμέρη ἥδε κακὸν φέρει ᾿Αργείοισιν, 
ther, and that 


Il. XIII, 825. 


Here τέκοι is nearly equivalent to μήτηρ εἴη: ef. ὦ τεκοῦσα, O mother. 


quoted under § 83, 1.) 


72 γέρον, εἴθ᾽, ὡς θυμὸς ἐνὶ στήθεσσι φίλοισιν 
Ὥς τοι γούναθ᾽ ἕποιτο, βίη δέ τοι ἔμπεδος εἴη" 
᾿Αλλά σε γῆρας τείρει ὁμοίιον - ὡς ὄφελέν τις 
᾿Ανδρῶν ἄλλος ἔχειν, σὺ δὲ κουροτέροισι μετεῖναι. 


The idea is, O that thy knees equalled thy heart in strength, &e. Il. 
IV, 313. At the end we have the more regular form, ὄφελέν τις 
ἄλλος ἔχειν, would that some other man had u (γῆρας). ὃ. 83, 2, N. 1. 


EO’ ὡς ἡβώοιμι; Bin δέ por ἔμπεδος εἴη" 
Τῷ κε τάχ᾽ ἀντήσειε μάχης κορυθαίολος Ἕκτωρ, 
See VII, 133. 
tional use in Homer of the Present Optative 
The optatives in the examples 
ferring to the future, 


For a similar excep 


uoted above may perhaps be explained as re 


and translated, O that I might be, &c. 


ΝΟΤΕ 1. In the poets, especially Homer, the Optative without 
ἃ concession or permission; and 


sometimes an exhortation, in a sense approaching that of the Impera- 


tive. δὰ g. 

Auris ᾿Αργείην “EXevnv Μενέλαος ἄγοιτο; Menelaus may take back 
Argive Helen. I1.1V,19. TeOvains, ὦ Προῖτ᾽, ἢ κάκτανε Βελλε- 
ροφόντην, either die, or kill Bellerophonites. ll. VI, 164. ᾿Αλλά τις 
Δολίον καλέσειε, let some one call Dolios. Od. IV, 735. So 


ArscuH. Prom. 1049 and 1051. 


Nore 2. The poets sometimes use the simple εἰ (without -θε or 
γάρ) with the Optative in wishes. E. g. 


ANN’ εἴ τις καὶ τούσδε μετοιχόμενος καλέσειεν. Tl. X, 111. 
Ei μοι γένοιτο φθόγγος ἐν βραχίοσιν. Eur. Hec. 836. 


Nore 3. The poets, especially Homer, sometimes use ὦ ς before 


the Optative in wishes. This ὡς cannot be expressed in English ; 
and it is not to be translated so (as if it were written os), or con- 


founded with οὕτως used as in Note 4. E. g. 

Ὡς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος, ὅτις τοιαῦτά ye ῥέζοι, O that any other alse 
may perish, &c. Od. 1,47. See Od. XXI, 201. Ὡς ὁ rade πορὼν 
ὄλοιτ᾽, εἴ μοι θέμις τάδ᾽ αὐδᾶν. Sopu. El. 126. 

ΝΟΤΕ 4. Οὕτως, thus, on this condition, may be prefixed to the 


Optative in protestations, where a wish is expressed upon some Con 
dition ; which condition is usually added in another clause. E. g. 





176 EXPRESSION OF A WISH. [8 82. 


-΄ a , 4 , , 
Οὕτως ὄναισθε τούτων, μὴ περιίδητέ με, May you enjoy these on this 
condition, — do not neglect me. Dem. Aph. LI, 842, 9. 


Note 5. The Optative in wi i i 
De cn ot 1¢ Optative in wishes belonging under this head never 
akes the particle av. : If a wish is expressed in the form of an ordi- 
> chee - ~ > ΄ 
ye Ἐν as πῶς ἂν ὀλοίμην, how gladly I would perish (i. 6. if 
could), it does not belong here, but under § 52, 2. 


§ 83. 1. If the wish refers to the present or the 
past, and it is implied that its object 7s not or was not 
attained, the secondary tenses of the Indicative are 
used. The particles of wishing here cannot be omitted. 

The distinction between the Imperfect and Aorist In- 
dicative is the same as in protasis (8 49, 2) ; the Imper- 
fect referring to present time or to a continued or 
repeated action in past time, and the Aorist to a mo- 


mentary or single action in past time. EK. g. 


” a > , 

Εἴθε τοῦτο ἐποίει, would that he were now doing this, or would 
that he had been doing this; εἴθε τοῦτο ἐποίησεν; would that he had 
done this ; εἴθε ἦ ν ἀληθές, would that tt were true ; εἴθε μὴ eye 
would that it had not happened. : pk ee 

Εἴθ᾽ εἶχες, ὦ τεκοῦσα, βελτίους φρένας, would that thou, Ὁ 
mother, hadst a better understanding. Eur. El. 1061. Ei ya vomit 
την δύναμιν εἶχον, would that I had so great power. Id. ἜΝ 1072 
Εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγενόμην. XEN. Mem. I, 2 46. 
Iw, μὴ γᾶς ἐπὶ ξένας θανεῖν Ex pn les, O that thou hadst not chosen to 


die in a foreign land. Sopu. O. C. 1713. 


REMARK. | The Indicative cannot be used in wishes without εἴθε 
or εἰ yap, as it would occasion ambiguity ; this cannot arise in the 
case of the Optative, which is not regularly used in independent 
sentences without ἄν, except in wishes. The last example quoted 
above shows that the Indicative with μή alone can be used coe 
tive wishes. (This passage is often emended; see, however Her- 
mann’s note on the passage, and on Eur. Iph. Aul. 575.) Ξ 


: 2. The Aorist wdeXov and sometimes the Imperfect 
ὠφέλλον οὗ οφείλω, debeo, may be used with the In- 
finitive in wishes of this class, with the same meaning 
as the secondary tenses of the Indicative. The Present 
Infinitive is used when the wish refers to the present or 
to continued or repeated past action, and the Aorist 
(rarely the Perfect) when it refers to the past. 


§ 83, 2.] “Odehov WITH THE INFINITIVE. 177 


"Ndcdov or ὥφελλον may be preceded by the particles 
. - Ν 
of wishing, εἴθε, εἰ yap, or μή (not ov). E. g. 

*Odede τοῦτο ποιεῖν, would that he were (now) doing this (lit. he 
ought to be doing 11), or would that he had (habitually) done this 
(lit. he ought to have done this). “Qpede τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; would that 
he had done this. 

Ὧν ὄφελον τριτάτην περ ἔχων ἐν δώμασι μοῖραν ναίειν; οἱ δ᾽ ἄν- 
Spes σόοι ἔμμεναι ot τότ᾽ ὄλοντο, O that I were living with evena 
third part, &§c., and that those men were safe who then perished. Od. 
IV, 97. Μὴ ὄφελον νικᾶν τοιῷδ᾽ ἐπ᾿ ἀέθλῳ, O that I had not been 
victorious in such a contest. Od. XI, 548. See 1]. XVIII, 86, ai 
ὄφελες σὺ μὲν αὖθι ναίειν, Πηλεὺς δὲ θνητὴν ἀγαγέσθαι. Τὴν 
ὄφελ᾽ ἐν νήεσσι κατακτάμεν Apreps to, O that Artemis had slain 
her, &c. Tl. XLX, 59. Ὀλέσθαι ὥφελον τῇδ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ; O that I had 
perished on that day. Sopp. O. T. 1157. EW ὦ per’ “Apyous μὴ 
διαπτάσθαι σκάφος Κόλχων ἐς αἶαν κυανέας Συμπληγάδας. EUR. 
Med. 1. Εἰ γὰρ ὥφελον οἷοί τε εἶναι οἱ πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ 
ἐξεργάζεσθαι, O that the multitude were able, &c. Puat. Crit. 44 Ὁ. 
Μή wor ὥφελον λιπεῖν τὴν Σκῦρον, O that I never had left Scyros. 
Sopn. Phil. 969. Αἴθ᾽ ἅμα πάντες “Exropos ὦ φέλ ετ᾽ ἀντὶ θοῇς ἐπὶ 
νηυσὶ πεφάσθαι., would that ye all had been slain instead of Hector. 
Il. XXIV, 253. ᾿Ανδρὸς ἔπειτ᾽ ὥφελλον ἀμείνονος εἶναι ἄκοιτις, 
ὃς ἤδη νέμεσίν τε καὶ αἴσχεα πόλλ᾽ ἀνθρώπων, O that I were the wife of 
a better man, who knew, δῖα. ll. VI, 350. (For ἤδη; see § 64, 2.) 

For the origin of this construction, see § 49, 2, N. 3 (4) and (c). 


Norte 1. The secondary tenses of the Indicative are not used in 
Homer to express wishes; ὥφελον with the Infinitive being gener- 
ally used when it is implied that the wish is not or was not fulfilled. 
(See § 82, Rem. 2.) The latter construction is used chiefly by the 
poets. 


Norte 2. Neither the secondary tenses of the Indicative nor the 
form with ὥφελον in wishes can (like the Optative) be preceded by 
the simple εἰ (without -θε or yap)- 

Ὡς, used as in § 82, N. 3, often precedes ὥφελον, &c. in Homer, 
and rarely in the Attic poets. E. g. 

Ἤλυθες ἐκ πολέμου ; ὡς ὥφελες αὐτόθ᾽ ὀλέσθαι. 1]. ΤΠ, 428. 

Ὡς ὥφελλ᾽ Ἑλένης ἀπὸ φῦλον ὀλέσθαι. Od. XIV, 68. 

Ὡς πρὶν διδάξαι γ᾽ ὥφελες μέσος διαρραγῆναι. Arist. Ran. 955. 





Remark. Expressions of a wish with the Optative or In- 
dicative after εἴθε, εἰ yap, &c. were originally protases with the 


apodosis suppressed. Thus, εἰ yap γένοιτο, O that it may happen 
(lit. if it would only happen), implies an apodosis like εὐτυχὴς ἂν 
SF L 





178 IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS [ὃ 83, 2. 


εἴην, I should be fortunate, or I should rejoice ; εἰ yap ἐγένετο, Ὁ 
that it had happened, implies one like εὐτυχὴς ἂν ἦν (if tt had 
only happened, I should have been fortunate). It will be seen 
that the use of the moods and tenses is precisely the same as 
in the corresponding classes of protasis (ὃ 50,2; § 49,2). The 
analogy with the Latin is the same as in protasis:— εἰ yap 
τοῦτο ποιοίη (Or ποιήσειεν), O si hoc faciat, O that he may do this ; 
εἰ yap τοῦτο ἐποίει, O si hoc faceret, O that he were doing this ; 
ei yap τοῦτο ἐποίησεν, O si hoc fecisset, O that he had done this ; 
ei yap μὴ ἐγένετο, utinam ne factum esset, O that it had not hap- 
pened. 
The form with ὥφελον and the Infinitive, on the other hand, 
is an apodosis with a protasis implied. See § 49, 2, N. 3, ὁ. 





SECTION VII. 


IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS, EXHORTA- 
TIONS, AND PROHIBITIONS. 


ὃ 84, The Imperative is used to express a com- 
mand, an exhortation, or an entreaty. E. g 


Aeye, speak thou. Φεῦγε, begone! ᾿Ἐλθέτω, let him come. Xa- 
ρόντων, let them rejoice. "Ἔρχεσθον κλισίην Πηληιάδεω ᾿Αχιλῆος. 
Il. I, 822. Ζεῦ, Ζεῦ, θεωρὸς τῶνδε πραγμάτων γενοῦ. AESCH. 


Choeph. 246. 


Note 1. The Imperative is often emphasized by dye (or 
ἄγετε), pepe, or ἴθι, come. These words may be in the sin- 
gular when the Imperative is in the plural, and in the second 
person when the Imperative is in the third. E. g. 


Ein’ ἄγε pot καὶ τόνδε, φίλον τέκος, ὅστις ὅδ᾽ ἐστίν. Il. III, 192. 
; > # ΄ ΄ » ΄ 
AAN aye μίμνετε πάντες, ἐυκνήμιδες ᾿Αχαιοί. Il. I, 331. Βάσκ᾽ ἴθι, 
οὖλε ὄνειρε, θοὰς ἐπὶ νῆας ᾿Αχαιῶν. Il. Il, 8. *Aye δὴ ἀκούσατε. 
XEN. Apol.§ 14. Αγετε δειπνήσατε. XEN. Hell. Υ͂, 1,18. Φέρ᾽ 
εἰπὲ δή μοι. Sopn. Ant. 534. Φέρε δή μοι τόδε εἶπέ. ῬῚ,ΑΤ. Crat. 
385 B. Ἔθι δὴ λέξον ἡμῖν πρῶτον τοῦτο. XEN. Mem. III, 3, 3. 
16¢ νυν παρίστασθον. ArisT. Ran. 1378. Ἴθι νυν λιβανωτὸν δεῦρό 
τις καὶ πῦρ δότω. Ib. 871. 


ῦ IN 179 
§ 85.] SUBJUNCTIVE. 


REMARK. Φέρε is not used in this way in Homer. 


Nore 2. The poets sometimes use the second person of the Im- 
perative with πᾶς in hasty commands. E. g. 

*sxove was, hear, every one ! ARIsT. Thesm. 372. are aioe 
ras ὑπηρέτης τόξευε, παῖε" σφενδόνην τίς μοι δότω. Id. Av. 11δέ. 
“Aye δὴ σιώπα πᾶς ἀνήρ. Id. Ran. 1120. 


Nore 3. The Imperative is sometimes used in ie ti 
clauses depending on an interrogative (usually oi Ga), pees 
we should expect the relative clause to be completed ny δεῖ 
with an Infinitive, and the Imperative to stand by itself. E. g. 


5 σκέ tye τὴν πέτραν, but do you know 

a ; ᾿ τραν, but do 1 

᾿Αλλ᾽ οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον; τῷ coreg θένε τὴν ἴω " γᾶ ει (We 

strike ‘eck with your leg/ ARIST. AV. 95. 

what to do? strike the re pith 1 eg : Bi Se 

should expect here οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δεῖ δρᾶσαι; ὃρασον᾽ ete you kn 

Ps v = sal . . . Ξ <<. hen δ ς 

shat to do? if so, do wt: viz. strike the rock, &c.) Οἱσθ ὁ μοισὺυμ 

sin 4 de you know what you must do for me? if so, doit. Eur. 

apatov, do you know what ὃ τ ᾿ e? if sc 

seul 451. Οἷσθά νυν ἅ po yeves Aw; Seopa τοις ξένοισι —— 
i ‘ ; 3 : γ a ν»" -ἂν g 2 

do you know what must be done for me (a δεῖ μοι pe é τὸ 

done then (γενέσθω), viz. put chains on the strangers. Id. Iph. “sn 
Ag . ρῶν ia ~ N iat q . Ν τ a 

20: o> 2. -aingov:. SOPH. Ὁ. T. 543. (Compare Bee 

1203. Otc8 ὡς ποιησον; . ἘΠΕ ἘΝ 

Cycl. 131, οἶσθ᾽ οὖν ὃ δράσεις; dost thou know what tho q 
he € 4 


; 1 \ γῷ > Ss } 
Norte 4. The Imperative sometimes denotes a mere — 
- 3 " . Γ ᾿ . "Ὁ 
and sometimes a supposition (where something 1s suppose 
c ν Α 


true for argument’s sake). E. g. | | 
᾿ ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀπῇ τού ᾿ ειν, τἄλλ 
ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀπῇ τούτων τὸ χαιρειν, 


> ? 
- 1p KaT ΟἰΚΟΡ " : ‘ 
Πλούτει τε yap κι Sopn. Ant. 1168. Προσειπάτω 


oa > ᾿ ; 

ἐγὰ πνοῦ } ν πριαιμῆν. 

aa pour epee as +g eee suppose that both the ruler and 
‘ - ef 

Tiva tALK@S O TE apxX@v 


the private man address, ἕο. XEN. Hier. VIL, 3. 


§ 85. The first person of the Subjunctive (usually 
in the plural) 15 used in exhortations, re δεν: 
a ᾿ € 
want of a first person to the Imperative. Y 
(ἄγετε) or φέρε, come, often precedes. H. g. : 
ixadé περ σὺν νηυσὶ νεώ- 
᾿ [οἱ us qo. Ἴδωμεν, let us see. Otxad τὺ; ' 
rsggaret 3 caper let us sail homeward with our ships, and ome 
. ; ; ~ f ξ , ; Ξ 
him. Il. I, 236. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ δοκεῖ; wre net nn mee 
4 I 39. t 
Phil. 526. ᾿ἘἘπίσχετον, amigo See ae Mag 
is a ἦγον. EUR. Kl. 902. , : 2 
ae nae re δι ὧν μάλιστα δυνησόμεθα κατέχειν ἃ 


-"» κελεύει, a : ) δυνησὸμ - L 5. 
πετἀμθεαν αὐκαρβν τα τε ἡμᾶς αὐτούς, K-T-A. ΧΕΝ. Cyr. Me 
"AN ἄγεθ᾽, ὡς ἂν ἐγὼν εἴπω, πειθώμε θα κὰν: τε Ἄν : 
᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄγε δὴ καὶ νῶι μεδώμεθα θούριδος ἀλκῆς. LU. LV, 516. ρ 


δὴ διαπεράνωμεν λόγους. Eur. Androm. 338. Δεῦτε; φίλοι; τὸν 
ἢ Ἴ T Qc 
ξεῖνον ἐρώμεθα. Od. VIII, 133. 








180 IMPERATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS. [ὃ 85. 


Note 1. The first person singular of the Subjunctive, when it is 
used in this way, almost always takes dye (ἄγετε) or hépe, unless 
some other Imperative precedes. E. g. 


᾿Αλλ᾽ Gye δὴ τὰ χρήματ᾽ ἀριθμήσω καὶ ἴδωμαι. Od. XITI, 
215. ᾿Αλλ᾽ dyed ὑμῖν τεύχε ἐνεΐίκω θωρηχθῆναι. Od. XXII, 139. 
Θάπτε pe ὅττι τάχιστα, πύλας ᾿Αίδαο mepnaow, bury me as 
quickly as possible; let me pass the gates of Hades. Il. XXIII, 71. 
Φέρ᾽ ἀκούσω, come, let me hear. Hort. I, 11. Siya, πνοὰς μάθω" 
φέρε πρὸς οὖς βάλω. Eur. Here. F.1059. Ἐπίσχετ᾽ αὐδὴν των 
a ἐκμάθω. Id. Hippol. 567. Λέγε δὴ, ἴδω. PLat. Rep. V, 
457 C., 


Note 2. The second and third persons of the Subjunctive are 
not regularly used in affirmative exhortations, the Imperative being 
the regular form in these persons. (For the Aorist Subjunctive 
with μή in prohibitions, see ὃ 86.) 

In some cases the Optative in wishes, in the second and third 
persons, has almost the force of an exhortation. (§ 82, N. 1.) 

In a few exceptional cases, we find even the second person of the 
Subjunctive in exhortations, like the first person, but always accom- 
panied by φέρε. Eg. 

Φέρ᾽, ὦ τέκνον, νῦν καὶ τὸ τῆς νήσου μάθη ς. Soru. Phil. 300. 

For the Future Indicative used elliptically in exhortations after 
ὅπως, see § 45, Note 7. 


Remark. The preceding rules apply only to affirmative exhorta- 
tions: these should be carefully distinguished from prohibitions with 
μή (8 86). The use of the Imperative in prohibitions is generally 
confined to the Present tense. 


8 86. In prohibitions, in the second and third per- 
sons, the Present Imperative or the Aorist Subjunctive is 
used after μή and its compounds. The former expresses 
a continued or repeated, the latter a single or momen- 
tary prohibition. 

In the first person (where the Imperative is wanting) 
the Present Subjunctive is allowed. E. g. 


Μὴ ποίει τοῦτο, do not do this (habitually) ; μὴ ποιήσῃς τοῦτο, 
do not do this (singleact). *Efavda, py κεῦθε νόῳ, iva εἴδομεν BiG 
Il. I, 363. ᾿Ατρείδη, μὴ Wevde ἐπιστάμενος σάφα εἰπεῖν. Il. LV, 
404. ᾿Αργεῖοι, μή πώ τι μεθίετε θούριδος ἀλκῆς. Il. IV, 234. Εἰπέ 
μοι εἰρομένῳ νημερτέα, μηδ᾽ ἐπικεύσης. Od. XV, 263. Ἤδη νῦν 
σῷ παιδὶ ἔπος ao, μηδ᾽ ἐπίκευθε. Od. ΧΥ͂Ι, 168, Μηκέτι νῦν δήθ᾽ 
αὖθι λεγώμεθα, μηδ᾽ ἔτι δηρὸν ἀμβαλλώμεθα ἔργον. Il. Il, 435. 
Ὑμεῖς δὲ τῇ γῇ τῇδε μὴ βαρὺν κότον σκήψησθε, μὴ θυμοῦσθε, 


§ 87.] PROHIBITIONS. 181 


μηδ᾽ ἀκιιρπίαν revEnre. AESCH. Eumen. 800. “Ov μήτ᾽ anne ts 
μήτ᾽ ἀφῆτ᾽ ἔπος κακόν. ΞΟΡΗ. O. C. 731. Μὴ ere ἊΨ Wine 
ἀλλὰ τοὺς βλάπτοντας ὑμᾶς λύσατε. Deo. Ol. Il ἡ 1, 11. — 
θέσθε would not be allowed by ὃ 86; although pera in é " 
exhortation, is regular, by ὃ 84.) Μὴ κατὰ τοὺς —, Mid baa 
μὴ β οηθήσατε τῷ πεπονθότι δεινά" μὴ eigen ai Id. 1 < 
15. Μὴ πρίῃ: παῖ, δᾷδα. ARIST. Nub. 613. 4 Kat μηδεὶς ὑπολ pe 
pe βούλεσθαι λαθεῖν. 1506. Phil. p. 101 A. § 93. Kai μηδεὶς οἰέσθω 
μ᾽ ἀγνοεῖν. Id. Paneg. p. 55 C. § 73. 


Note 1. (a.) With the exception of the first person (§ 86), the 
Present Subjunctive is not used in prohibitions. oN Ἰὰς 

An elliptical use of the Subjunctive (sometimes the I — peat 
ιή or ὅπως μή: With a verb of fearing understood, must not be 
ounded with this. (See § 46, N. 4.) 

(b.) The second person of the Aorist Imperative L. igs seldom 
found in prohibitions ; the third person is less rare. Ue σ΄, 

Μηδ᾽ ἡ Bia σε μηδαμῶς νικησάτω. Soru. δ. τοῦς Β΄. ὑρᾳ 
μελησάτω. AESCH. Prom. 332. So ee . αἱ μηδει 
ὑμῶν προσδοκησάτω ἄλλως. PLAT. Apo : Ἴ . wig a 

Μὴ ψεῦσον; ὦ Zev, της ἐπιουσης ἐλπίδος. RIST. 1108. i 


Ὶ ‘son si *even of Aorist Subjune- 
Note 2. The first person singular even of the Aorist Subjune 


tot © 


bd Ἃ 
tive in prohibitions is rare, and is found only in the poets. E. g. 
’ > 4 ‘ \ 
Μή σε, γέρον, κοίλῃσιν ἐγὼ παρα νηυσι Κιχ 


εἰω. Il. I, 26. ᾿Αλλά 
μ᾽ ἔκ ye τῆσδε γῆς πόρθμευσον ὡς τάχιστα, μηδ᾽ αὐτοῦ θάνω. SOPH. 


Tr. 801. Ὦ ξεῖνοι, μὴ δῆτ᾽ ἀδικηθῶ. Id. Ο. C.174. (This may 
be explained also by § 46, N. 4.) 





SECTION Viti. 


SUBJUNCTIVE (LIKE FuTuRE INDICATIVE) IN INDEPENDENT 
SENTENCES. — INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. —Ovu μὴ 
WITH SUBJUNCTIVE AND FuTuRE INDICATIVE. 


§ ΟἿ. In the Homeric language the Subjunctive is 
sometimes used in independent sentences, with the 
force of a weak Future Indicative. Εἰ. g. 


Οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας, οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι; for I never yet sar, 
nor shall I (or can I) ever see such men. I]. I, 262. Ὕμιν ev Ss 
σι περικλυτὰ dap’ ὀνομήνω; I will enumerate the gifts, &c. Il. 1X, 


ΠῚ We ae 2 ya ie ee ΜΝ 
TA eo νον. eg ARP Se IN ρων ΟΕ ΡΟΘΙ, 





I ey ce TT BE TCTs 





Se μὰ 





(82 INDEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE. [§ 87. 


121. Δύσομαι ἐς ’Aidao, καὶ ἐν νεκύεσσι φαείνω, I will descend to 
Hades, and shine among the dead (said by the Sun). Od. XII, 383. 
(Here the Future δύσομαι and the Subjunctive φαείνω hardly differ 
in their force.) Kai ποτέ tis εἴπῃσιν, and some one will perhaps 
say. Il. VI, 459. (In vs. 462, referring to the same thing, we have 
ὥς ποτέ τις ἐρέει.) Οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνὴρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται, οὐδὲ γένη - 
Tat, ὅς κεν Τηλεμάχῳ σῷ υἱέι χεῖρας ἐποίσει. Od. XVI, 487. Μνή- 
σομαι οὐδὲ λάθωμαι ᾿Απόλλωνος ἑκάτοιο, J will remember and will 
not forget the far-shooting Apollo. Hymn. in Apoll. 1. 


REMARK. The Aorist is the tense usually found in this construc- 
tion. The first person singular is the most common, and instances 
of the second person are very rare. 


Note. This Homeric Subjunctive, like the Future Indica- 
tive, is sometimes joined with ἄν or xe to form an apodosis. 
This enabled the earlier language to express an apodosis with 
a sense between that of the Optative with ἄν and that of the 
simple Future Indicative, which the Attic was unable to do. 
(See § 38, 2.) 

Ei δέ κε μὴ δώῃσιν, ἐγὼ dé kev αὐτὸς EXwpat, but if he does not 
give her up, I will take her myself. Il. I, 824. (Here ἕλωμαι κεν has 
a shade of meaning between ἑλοίμην κεν, I would take, and αἱρήσο- 
pat, 1 will take, which neither the Attic Greek nor the English can 
express.) Compare ἣν x’ ὑμῖν σάφα εἴπω; ὅτε πρότερός ye πυθοίμην, 
Od. II, 43, with ἥν χ᾽ ἡμῖν σάφα εἴποι, ὅτε πρότερός γε πύθοιο, Il, 
31,— both referring to the same thing. See also Il. Ill, 54; and 
VI, 448, the last example under § 59, N. 1. 


8 $8. The first person of the Subjunctive is used in 
questions of doubt, where the speaker asks himself or 
another what he is to do. The negative particle is μή. 
In Attic Greek this Subjunctive is often introduced by 
βούλει or βούλεσθε (poetic θέλεις or θέλετε). E. g. 


Εἴπω τοῦτο; shall I say this? or βούλει εἴπω τοῦτο; do you wish 
that I should say this? Μὴ τοῦτο ποιώμεν, shall we not do this? Ti 
εἴπω; or τί βούλεσθε εἴπω; what.shall I say? or what do you want 
me to say? For the Future in such questions, see § 25, 1, N. 4. 

Πῇ yap ἐγὼ, hire τέκνον, ἴω; τεῦ δώμαθ᾽ ἵκωμαι ἀνδρῶν ot κραναὴν 
Ἰθάκην κάτα κοιρανέουσιν ; Ἦ ἰθὺς σῆς μητρὸς ἴω καὶ σοῖο δόμοιο; 
whither shall I go? to whose house shall I come? &c. Od. XV, 509. Ἦ 
αὐτὸς κεύθω; φάσθαι δέ pe θυμὸς ἀνώγει. Od. Χ ΧΙ, 194. Ὦ Zed, 
τί λέξω; ποῖ φρενῶν ἔλθω, πάτερ; ὅοΡη. O. C. 310. “Qua ἐγὼ, 
παβῶ; παστῶ; πᾶ κέλσω; Eur. Hec. 1056. Ποῖ τράπωμαι; 
ποῖ πορευθῶ; Ib. 1099. Εἴπω τι τῶν εἰωθότων, ὦ δέσποτα ; 
Arist. Ran. 1. Τίνα γὰρ μάρτυρα μείζω παράσχωμαι; DEM 


§ 88.] INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 183 


F. L. 416, 7. Mn’, ἐάν τι ὠνῶμαι; . . .«ἔρωμαι ὁπόσου πωλεῖ ; may 
I not ask, Χο. Μηδ᾽ ἀποκρίνωμαι οὖν, ἄν Tis με ἐρωτᾷ νεος; ἐὰν 
εἰδῶ; and may I not answer, &c. XEN. Mem. I. 2,36. M ισθωσώ- 
μεθα οὖν κήρυκα, ἢ αὐτὸς ἀνείπω; PLAT. Rep. IX, 580 B. Me- 
ϑύοντα ἄνδρα πάνυ σφόδρα δέξεσθε συμπότην, ἣ ἀπίωμεν; will you 
receive him, or shall we go away? Id. Symp. 212 E. "Apa μὴ aia xuv- 
θῶμεν τὸν Περσῶν βασιλέα μιμήσασθαι ; shall we then be ashamed 
to imitate the king of the Persians? XEN. Oecon. IV, 4. 

Ποῦ δὴ βούλει καθιζόμενοι ἀναγνῶμεν; where will thou that we 
sit down and read? Puat. Phaedr. 228 E. (So 263 E.) Βούλει 
οὖν ἐπισκοπῶμεν ὅπου ἤδη τὸ δυνατόν ἐστι ; ΧΕΝ. Mem. I, 5, 1. 
Βούλει λάβωμαι δῆτα καὶ θίγω τί σου; Sopu. Phil. 761. Bov- 
λεσθ᾽ ἐπεισπέσωμεν; Eur. Hec. 1042, Θέλεις μείνωμεν avtov 
κἀνακούσωμεν γόων ; SOPH. El. 81. Τίσοι θελεις δῆτ εἰκαθω; 
Id. O. T. 651. Θέλετε θηρασώμεθα Πενθεως Ayauny μητέρ ἐκ 
βακχευμάτων, χάριν τ᾽ ἄνακτι θῶμεν; Eur. Bacch. 71 9. So with 
κελεύετε: ᾿Αλλὰ TOS; εἴπω κελεύετε Kal οὐκ ὀργιεῖσθε; do you 
command me to speak, &c.? DEM. Phil. III, 123, 1. 

In Puat. Rep. II, 372 E, we find βούλεσθε anda Subjunctive with 
<i in protasis: εἰ δ᾽ ad βούλ eg Oe καὶ φλεγμαίνουσαν πόλιν Oewpn- 
σωμεν, οὐδὲν ἀποκωλύει, 1. 6. τ. you will have us examine, Xe. 


(8 49, 1.) 

Remark. In this construction there is an implied appeal to some 
person (sometimes to the speaker himself), so that βούλει or some 
similar word can always be understood, even if it 15 not expressed. 
Homeric examples in which this is not the case fall naturally under 
§ 87. 

In the later Greek the classic form θέλετε εἴπω ; was developed 
into θέλετε ἵνα (or ὅπως) εἴπω ; — from which comes the modern 
Greek θέλετε νὰ εἴπω; or νὰ εἴπω; will you have me speak ? 


Note 1. The third person of the Subjunctive 1s sometimes 
used in questions, but less frequently than the first. This 
ve ae = ἡμὴ 
happens chiefly when a speaker refers to himself by ris. Ex- 
amples of the second person are very rare. EK. g. 
, a > ‘ ee > ὃν. 
Πότερόν σέ τις, Αἰσχίνη, τῆς πόλεως ἐχθρὸν ἢ ἐμὸν εἰναι φῆ; 1. 6. 
shall we call you the city’s enemy, or mine? Dem. Cor. 268, 28. Ezra 
τ = ΄σ . ¢ ‘ τ > ~ ~ ‘ 4 ~ ~ 
ταῦθ᾽ οὗτοι πεισθῶσιν ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν σε ποιεῖν, και τὰ τῆς ONS πονη- 
ρίας ἔργα ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς ἀναδέξωνται; 1. Θ. are these men to believe, 
&e.: and are they to assume, &c. Id. Androt. 613, 3. Te τις εἰναι 
τοῦτο φῇ; Id. F. L. 369, 12. Ovyarep, ποῖ τις φροντίδος € λθῃ; ΞΟΡΗ. 
- 4 ΄ Φ Ἂ ἕ / ΄ 
O. C. 170. Ποῖ τις οὖν ἘΠῚ Id {j. 403. Πόθεν οὖν τις ταυτης 
ἄρξηται μάχης; Prat. Phil. 15 D. Das τις πείθηται; Il. I, 
150. (Πῶς οὖν ἔτ᾽ εἴπῃ ς ὅτι συνέσταλμαι κακοῖς ; Eur. Herc. F. 
1417.) See Kriiger, Vol. I, § 54, 2; Notes 4 and 5. 


Note 2. The Subjunctive is often used in the question 








184 DOUBLE NEGATIVE Οὐ μή. [8 88. 


τί πάθω; what will become of me? or what harm will it do me? 
literally, what shall I undergo? KE. δ. 

"0 μοι ἐγὼ, τί πάθω; Ti νύ μοι μήκιστα γένηται; Od. Υ͂, 465. So 
Tl. XI, 404. Ti πάθω; τί δὲ δρῶ; τί de μήσωμαι; AESCH. Sept. 
1057. Ti πάθω τλήμων; Id. Pers. 912; Arist. Plut. 603. Te 
πάθω; τί δὲ μήσομαι Ν οἴμοι. ΟΡΗ. Trach. 973. Τὸ μέλλον, εἰ χρὴ» 
πείσομαι" τίγὰρπάθω; I shall suffer what is to come, if it must 
be; for what harm can it do me? Eur. Phoen. 895. (The differ- 
ence between this and the ordinary meaning of πάσχω is here seen. ) 
‘Quodéynxa+ ti yap πάθω; PLAT. Euthyd. 302 D. So in the 
plural, Hort. IV, 118; Ti yap πάθωμεν μὴ βουλομένων ὑμέων τιμω- 
ρέειν ; 


. > > δ 
§ 59. The double negative ov μή is sometimes used 
with the Subjunctive and the Future Indicative in inde- 
pendent sentences, being equivalent to a strong single 


. 3 / 
negative. The compounds of both ov and μή can be 
used here as well as the simple forms. 


1. The Subjunctive (sometimes the Future Indica- 
° ‘ > , “ 
tive) with ov μὴ may have the force of an emphatic 


Future with ov. Thus ov μὴ τοῦτο γένηται (sometimes 
ov μὴ τοῦτο γενήσεται) means this surely will not hap- 
pen, being a little more emphatic than ov τοῦτο γενῆ" 
σεται. HK. g. 


(Aor. Subj.) Οὐ μὴ πίθηται, he will not obey. Sopn. Phil. 103. 
Οὔτε yap γίγνεται οὔτε γέγονεν οὐδὲ οὖν μὴ γένηται ἀλλοῖον ἦθος, 
for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, ἕο. PLarT. 

Zep. VI, 492 E. (Here οὐδὲ μὴ γένηται is merely more emphatic 
than the ordinary οὐ γενήσεται.) Kai τῶνδ᾽ ἀκούσας οὔ τι μὴ ληφθῶ 
δόλῳ. AESCH. Sept. 38. Ἀλλ᾽ οὔ ποτ᾽ ἐξ ἐμοῦ ye μὴ πάθῃς τόδε. 
Sopu. ΕἸ. 1029. Οὔτοι σ᾽ ᾿Αχαιῶν, οἶδα, μή τις ὑβρίσῃ. Id. A). 
560. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὔ τι μὴ φύγητε λαιψηρῷ ποδί. Eur. El. 1039. Tov 
ἣν κρατήσωμεν, ov μή τις ἡμῖν ἄλλος στρατὸς ἀντιστῇ κοτε ἀνθρώπων. 
Hpr. VII, 538. 801, 199. Οὐ μή σε κρύψω πρὸς ὅντινα βούλομαι 
ἀφικέσθαι. XEN. Cyr. VII, 3, 18. Οἵ ye Appenot ov μὴ δέξωνται 
τοὺς πολεμίους. Ib. ΠῚ, 2, 8. Ἂν μέντοι καθώμεθα οἴκοι, οὐδέποτ᾽ 
οὐδὲν ἡμῖν οὐ μὴ γένηται τῶν δεόντων. DEM. Phil. I, 53, 4. So 
Phil. IU, 130, 11. 

(Pres. Subj.) Hv yap ἅπαξ δύο ἣ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδὸν ἀπόσχωμεν, 
αὐκέτι μὴ δύνηται βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς καταλαβεῖν. XEN. An. Il, 2, 12. 
So οὐ μὴ δύνωνται, Id. Hier. XI, 15. Πρὸς ταῦτα κακούργει καὶ 
συκοφάντει, εἴ τι δύνασαι - οὐδέν σου παρίεμαι" GAN’ οὐ μὴ οἷός T FS; 


but you will not be able. Piat. Rep. I, 341 B. 


§ 89, 2.] DOUBLE NEGATIVE Οὐ μή. 


(Fut. Ind.) Οὔ σοι μὴ μεθέψομαί ποτε. SOPH. E]. 1052. 
Τοὺς yap πονηροὺς οὐ μή ποτε ποιήσετε βελτίους. AESCHIN. Cor. 
§ 177. Οὔ τοι μήποτέ σ᾽ ἐκ τῶν ἑδράνων, ὦ γέρον. ἄκοντά τις ἄξει. 
ΦΟΡΗ. 00. (. 110. So οὐκ οὖν μὴ ὁδοιπορήσεις; Q. C. 848; and ΗΡ 1. 
Ill, 62. Ma τὸν ᾿Απόλλω ov μή σ᾽ ἐγὼ περιὐψομἀπελθόντ᾽ (i. ὁ. 
περιόψομαι ἀπελθόντα). ARIST. Ran. 508. Εἶπεν ὅτι ἡ Σπάρτη 
οὐδὲν μὴ κάκιον οἰκιεῖται αὐτοῦ ἀποθανόντος. XEN. Hell. | 6, 32. 
(See § 70, 2; and below, Note 1.) 

The Aorist Subjunctive is the most common form in this con- 
struction. 


Note 1. Οὐ μή withthe Future Optative, representing a Future 
Indicative of the direct discourse, occurs in an indirect quotation 
after ὡς: Τά τ᾽ ἄλλα πάντ᾽ ἐθέσπισεν, καὶ τἀπὶ Τροίας πέργαμ᾽ ὡς οὐ 
μή ποτε πέρσοιεν; εἰ μὴ τόνδε ἄγοιντο. Sopu. Phil. 611. (The 
direct discourse was οὐ μή ποτε πέρσετε; ἐὰν μὴ τόνδε ἄγησθε.) In 
the last example under § 89, 1, the Future Indicative is retained in 
the same construction. The Future Infinitive can be used in the 
same way; as, Εἶπε Τειρεσίας οὐ μή ποτε, σοῦ τήνδε γῆν οἰκοῦντος, 
εὖ πράξειν πόλιν. Eur. Phoen. 1590. 

οὐ μή with the Subjunctive occurs in ἃ causal sentence after ὡς, in 
Arist. Av. 461: Λέγε θαρρήσας" ὡς τὰς σπονδὰς οὐ μὴ πρότερον 
παραβῶμεν. 


Nore 2. This construction is often explained by supposing an 
ellipsis of δεινόν ἐστιν or φόβος ἐστίν between the οὐ and the μή: 
this is based on such passages as XEN. Mem. II, 1, 25, ov φόβος μή 
σε ἀγάγω, there is no fear lest I may lead you, which with the φόβος 
omitted would be οὐ μή σε ἀγάγω. This theory, however, leaves the 
following construction (§ 89, 2) entirely unexplained ; and the sup- 
posed ellipsis fails to account for the meaning in many cases, as 1n 
the first example under § 89, 1. 


2. The second person of the Future Indicative (some- 
times the Subjunctive) with ov μή may express a strong 
prohibition. Thus ov μὴ λαλήσεις means you shall not 
prate (or do not prate), being more emphatic than μὴ 
λάλει. EL g. 


Ποῖος Ζεύς; οὐ μὴ ληρήσεις (Anpnoys): οὐδ᾽ ἔστι Ζεύς, i. 6. stop 
your nonsense! Arist. Nub. 367. Ὦ παῖ, τί θροεῖς ; ov μὴ map 
ὄχλῳ τάδε ynpuaer, do not (I beg you) speak out in this way before 
the people. Eur. Hippol. 213. Ὦ θύγατερ, ov μὴ μῦθον ἐπὶ πολλοὺς 
ἐρεῖς. Eur. Supp. 1066. Οὐ μὴ γυναικῶν δειλὸν εἰσοίσεις 
λόγον, do not adopt the cowardly language of women. Eur. Andr. 
757. Ov μὴ ἐξεγερεῖς τὸν ὕπνῳ κάτοχον κἀκκινήσεις κἀναστή- 
σεις φοιτάδα δεινὴν νόσον, ὦ τέκνον, do not wake him. Sopu. Trach. 
978. Τί ποιεῖς; οὐ μὴ καταβήσει, don’t come down. Arist. Vesp 
397. 





is a = wre: "1. Ὅ᾿- dot ot. 
oo ne Rees eimai Sie Bes wut as eee 5 Ot St 


τς το 





186 _ DOUBLE NEGATIVE Οὐ μή. [8 89, 2. 


For the use of the future, see § 25,1. N. 5. For the Subjunctive 
in this construction, see below, Rem. 2. 


Norte 1. A prohibition thus begun by οὐ μή may be con- 
tinued by μηδέ with another Future (or Subjunctive). An 
affirmative command may be added by another Future or an 
Imperative, after ἀλλά or δές E. σ΄. 


Οὐ μὴ καλεῖς μ᾽, ὦνθρωφ᾽, ἱκετεύω, μηδὲ κατερεῖς τοὔνομα, do 
not call to me, I implore you, nor speak my name. ARIST. Ran. 298. 
Ov pn προσοίσεις χεῖρα μηδ᾽ Get πέπλων, do not bring your 
hand near me nor touch my garments. Eur. Hippol. 606. Ov μὴ 
προσοίσεις χεῖρα, βακχεύσεις δ᾽ ἰὼν, pnd’ ἐξομόρξει μωρίαν 
τὴν σὴν ἐμοί, do not bring your hand near me; but go and rage, and 
do not wipe off your folly on me. Id. Bacch. 348. 

Ov μὴ λαλήσεις (λαλήσῃς), ἀλλ᾽ ἀκολουθήσεις ἐμοί, do not 
prate, but follow me. Arist. Nub. 505. Οὐ μὴ διατρίψεις, ἀλλὰ 
γεύσει τῆς θύρας, do not delay, but knock at the door. Id. Ran. 
462. Ov μὴ φλυαρήσεις ἔχων, ὦ Ξανθία, ἀλλ᾽ ἀράμενος οἴσεις 
πάλιν τὰ στρώματα. Ib. 524. Οὐ μὴ δυσμενὴς ἔσει φίλοις, παύσει 
δὲ θυμοῦ καὶ πάλιν στρέψεις κάρα,... δέξει δὲ δῶρα καὶ παραι- 
τήσει πατρός, be not inimical to friends, but cease your rage, &c. 
Eur. Med. 1151. Οὐ μὴ σκώψης μηδὲ ποιή σῃ ς ἅπερ οἱ tpvyodai- 
μονες οὗτοι, ἀλλ᾽ εὐφήμει, do not scoff, nor do what these wretches 
do; but keep silence! Arist. Nub. 296. (Here the Imperative is 
used precisely like the Future with ἀλλά or δέ in the preceding ex- 
amples. ) 

The Future in the clauses with ἀλλά or δέ will be explained by 
§ 25,1, N. 5 (a); in the clauses with μηδέ it may be explained by 
§ 25, 1, N. 5 (δ), or we may consider the construction a continua- 
tion of that with οὐ μή, the μή being repeated without the ov. 


Note 2. In a few cases ov with the Future is used interroga- 
tively expressing an exhortation, followed by another Future with 
μηδέ or καὶ μή expressing a prohibition. E. g. 

Οὐ σῖγ᾽ ἀνέξει, μηδὲ δειλίαν ἀρ εἴ (s), keep silence (lit. will you not 
keep silence?) and do not become a coward. Sopu. Aj. 75. (Here 
perhaps we should punctuate οὐ σῖγ᾽ ἀνέξει; μηδὲ δειλίαν ἀρεῖ. 
See Rem. 1. But the first clause, although strictly interrogative, is 
really an exhortation, and was so considered in the construction of 
the following clause, where the Future is to be explained on the 
principle of Ἔ 25, 1, N. 5 (6). Compare the ex amples under Note 
1.) Ov θᾶσσον οἴσεις. μηδ᾽ ἀπιστήσεις ἐμοΐ, 1. 6. extend your 
hand, and do not distrust me. Id. Trach. 1183. Οὐκ εἶ σύ T οἴκους, 
σύ τε Κρέων κατὰ στέγας, καὶ μὴ τὸ μηδὲν ἄλγος εἰς μέγ᾽ οἴσετε. Id. 


O. T. 637. 


ReMARK 1. The examples under ὃ 89, 2 and the notes are usu- 
ally printed as interrogative, in accordance with the doctrine of 
Elmsley, stated in his note to Eurip. Med. 1120 (1151) and in the 





a nh cen fie eee 


§ 89, 2.] DOUBLE NEGATIVE Οὐ μή. 187 


Quarterly Review for June, 1812. He explains od μὴ λαλήσεις ; 
as meaning will you not stop prating ? lit. will you not not prate? and 
when a second clause in the Future with μηδέ or ἀλλά follows, he 
considers the interrogative force of οὐ to extend also to this. But 
this explanation requires = entirely different theory to account for 
the construction of § 89, 1; whereas the rules given above consider 
the Subjunctive there a relic of the common Homeric Subjunctive 
(§ 87), and explain the Future in § 89, 2 by the principle stated in 
§ 25, 1, N. 5, — οὐ μή having the same force of a strong single negative 
in both constructions. As to the examples in N. 1, the last one (wl 1ere 
the Imperative instead of the Future follows add) seems to be de- 
cisive against the interrogative foree commonly ascribed to the 
Fature in the others. The examples in N. 2 are the strongest sup- 
port of Elmsley’s theory, where the first clause is clearly interroga- 
tive, at least originally ; but the force of the question as an exhort: i- 
tion seems to have guided the construction of the a which 
is finished after the ‘analogy of the examples in N. 1. The explana- 
tion given above (N. 2) is supported by AESCH. Sent 250, ov σῖγα; 
— τῶνδ᾽ ἐρεῖς κατὰ πτόλιν, will you not keep silence? (οὐ σῖγ᾽ ἀνέ- 
ξει ;) say nothing of this kind through the οὖν. 

We may explain the examples in N. 2 as interrogative, by con- 
sidering the first clause a question with ov (implying an affirma- 
tive answer) equiv alent to an exhortation, and the second a 
question with μή (implyi ing a negative answer) equivalent to 
a prohibition. Ov σῖγ᾽ ἀνέξει, μηδὲ δειλίαν ἀρεῖ ; will thus mean, 
will you not keep silence? and you will not become a coward, will 
you ? 


REMARK 2. In modern editions of the classics the Subjunctive is 
not found in the construction of § 89, 2. But in many of the exam- 
ples quoted there and in the notes the first Aorist Subjunctive in 
-ons has been emended to the Future, against the authority of the 
Mss., in conformity to Dawes’s rule. (See § 45, N. 8, with foot- 
note.) Thus, in the three examples from the Clouds, the Mss. have 
the Subjunctive; and in the last (vs. 296) ov py σκώψῃς could 
not be changed to οὐ μὴ σκώψεις, as the Future of σκώπτω is 
σκώψομαι. Elmsley’s emendation σκώΨ εἰ is therefore adopted by 
most editors. But this seems too violent a change to allow in the 
text, merely to sustain an arbitrary rule, which at best has nothing 
but accident to rest on. If both constructions (ὃ 89, 1 and 2) are 
explained on the same principle, there is no longer any reason for 
objecting to the Subjunctive with od μή in prohibitions ; and it 
seems most probable that both the Future and the Subjunctive were 
allowed in both constructions, but that the pare was more 
common in that of § 89, 1, and the Future in that of § 89, 2. 


- ΨΥ ΩΝ 


nit 


σ΄. ΕΣ 
Bee αν 


Ὧν heater aten κε cane tania tite Be κα. γα. ὦ. ὦ 


nl tt th 





ὠρρωανν ταὶ 


“αὐ. RT. TET 


rr 
_ rv 





THE INFINITIVE. 


CHAPTER V. 
THE INFINITIVE. 


§90. The Infinitive mood expresses the simple idea 
of the verb, without limitation of number or person. 
It has the force of a neuter verbal noun, and as such it 
may take the neuter of the article in all its cases. 

It has at the same time the attributes of a verb, so 
that (even when it takes the article) it may have a 
subject, object, and other adjuncts ; and, further, it is 
qualified not by adjectives, but by adverbs. 


591. The Infinitive may as nominative be the sub- 
ject of a finite verb, or as accusative be the subject of 
another Infinitive. The Infinitive is especially common 
as the subject of an impersonal verb, or of ἐστί. It may 
also be a predicate nominative, or it may stand in appo- 
sition with a substantive. 

Such Infinitives stand regularly without the article ; 
but if they are to be especially prominent as containing 
the leading idea of the sentence, the article may be 
used. KE. g. 


Συνέβη αὐτῷ ἐλθεῖν, τὶ happened to him to go. Οὐκ ἔνεστι TOUTO 
ποιῆσαι. ᾿Αδύνατόν ἐστι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι. ᾿Ἐξῆν μένειν. Δεῖ 
αὐτὸν μένειν. Ov μεν γάρ τι κακὸν βασιλευέμεν; for it is no bad 
thing to be a king. Od. I, 392. Εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος, ἀμύνεσθαι 
περὶ πάτρης. Il. XII, 248. ᾿Αεὶ yap ἡβᾷ τοῖς γέρουσιν εὖ μαθεῖν. 
Arscu. Ag. 584. Πολὺ γὰρ ῥᾷον ἔχοντας φυλάττειν ἢ κτήσα- 
σθαι πάντα πέφυκεν. Dem. OL. ἢ, 25, 24. (Compare OL. I, 16, 3: 
Δοκεῖ τὸ φυλάξαι τἀγαθὰ τοῦ κτήσασθαι χαλεπώτερον εἶναι.) 
Ηδὺ πολλοὺς ἐχθροὺς ἔχειν; Dem. F. L. 409, 25. Δοκεῖ οἶκο- 
νόμου ἀγαθοῦ εἶναι εὖ οἰκεῖν τὸν ἑαυτοῦ οἶκον. XEN. Oecon. I, 
2. Φησὶ δεῖν τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; he says that it is necessary to Jo this. 
(Here ποιῆσαι as accus. is the subject of δεῖν: for δεῖν, see § 92, 2.) 
Td γνῶναι ἐπιστήμην που λαβεῖν ἐστίν, to learn is to acquire knowl- 
edge. Prat. Theaet. 209 E. To δίκην διδόναι πότερον πάσχειν 





§ 92, 1.] INFINITIVE AS OBJECT. 189 


τί ἐστιν ἣ ποιεῖν; PLAT. Gorg.476 D. (In the last two examples 
the subject Infinitive has the article to emphasize it, while the pre- 
dicate Infinitives stand alone.) Οὔτοι ἡδύ ἐστι τὸ ἔχειν χρήματα 
οὕτως ὡς ἀνιαρὺν τὸ ἀποβάλλειν. Xen. Cyr. VIII, 8, 42. (Com- 
pare the two examples above from Demosthenes.) Τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ 
ἀδικεῖν, τὸ πλέον τῶν ἄλλων ξητεῖν ἔχειν. Puat. Gorg. 488 C. 
᾽Αλλ᾽ οἶμαι, νῦν μὲν ἐπισκοτεῖ τούτοις τὸ κατορθοῦν. Dem. Ol. II, 
23,27. To yap θάνατον δεδιέναι οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἣ δοκεῖν σοφὸν 
εἶναι μὴ ὄντα" δοκεῖν γὰρ εἰδέναι ἐστὶν ἃ οὐκ οἶδεν. Prat. Apol. 
29 Α. 


§ 92. The Infinitive without the article may be the 
object of a verb. It stands generally as an object accu- 
sative, sometimes as an object genitive, and sometimes 
as an accusative of kindred signification. The classes 
of verbs after which the Infinitive is thus used must be 
learned by practice; but the Infinitive without a sub- 
ject follows «in general the same classes of verbs in 
Greek as in English. The following, however, may be 
specially mentioned : — 


1. In general, any verb whose action directly implies 
another action or state as its object, if such action or 
state is to be expressed by a verb and not by a noun, 
takes the Infinitive. Such are verbs signifying to teach, 
to learn, to accustom, to desire, to ask, to advise, to entreat, 
to exhort, to command, to persuade, to urge, to propose, to 
compel, to need, to cause, to intend, to begin, to attempt, to 
permit, to decide, to dare, to prefer, to choose, to pretend ; 
those expressing fear, unwillingness, eagerness, cau- 
tion, neglect, danger, postponement, forbidding, hindrance, 
escape, &c.; and all implying ability, fitness, desert, 
qualification, sufficency, or their opposites. K. δ. 

Διδάσκουσιν αὐτὸν βάλλειν, they teach him to shoot. "Ἔμαθον τοῦτο 


ποιῆσαι, they learned to do this. Βούλεται ἐλθεῖν. Παραινοῦμέν σοι 
πειθεσθαι. Φοβοῦμαι μένειν. Αἱροῦνται πολεμεῖν. Ἢ πόλις κινδυ- 


νεύει διαφθαρῆναι. Δύναται ἀπελθεῖν. ᾿Εκέλευσεν αὐτὸν περιμεῖναϊΐ 
με. Δέομαι ὑμῶν συγγνώμην μοι ἔχειν. Εἶπε στρατηγοὺς ἑλέσθαι, he 
proposed to choose generals. ᾿Απαγορεύουσιν αὐτοῖς μὴ τοῦτο ποιῆσαι. 

See below, § 95, 2.) Τί κωλύσει αὐτὸν βαδίζειν ὅποι βούλεται, what 
will prevent him from marching, &c.? ᾿Αξιῶ λαμβάνειν. ᾿Αξιοῦται 


PP ον δ ape τὸ 


pit Ay 


+ heat PT SM 


ou ate 
2 secon stn ei ea ini Re ha i TT OS SU 


ΟΝ OOM 


en λυ αν συν σο νωνυνων 


ον φὰ 


τα’ 








190 THE INFINITIVE. [ὃ 92, 1. 


θανεῖν. Ov πέφυκε δουλεύειν, he is not born to be a slave. ᾿Αναβάλ- 
Aerat τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he postpones doing this. 


This use of the Infinitive is too common to need illustration by 
more particular examples, 


ReMARK 1. The Infinitive in this construction is generally equiv- 
alent to the English Infinitive after the same class of verbs; and it 
refers to indefinite or to future time. (See § 15,1.) The Present 
and Aorist are the tenses usually found, with the distinction stated 
in the Remark before ὃ 12: for the Perfect, see § 18, 3 (b); and for 
the occasional use of the Future Infinitive (or even the Infinitive 
with ἄν) after some of these verbs, see § 27, N. 2. 


REMARK 2. Verbs of fearing and caution are included in the list 
given above, although they are generally followed by μή, lest, and 
the Subjunctive or Optative. (See $46.) The Infinitive, however, 
sometimes occurs; and, when it is used, it belongs regularly under 
the rule, § 92,1. (See § 46, N. 8, a and δ.) 

Verbs expressing danger take the Infinitive more frequently than 
μή with the Subjunctive or Optative. (See § 46,N. 8, c.) 


Note 1. Some verbs which do not regularly take an In- 
finitive may be used in unusual significations, so as to allow an 
Infinitive by ὃ 92,1. E. g. 


Ξυνέβησαν τοῖς Πλαταιεῦσι παραδοῦναι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ ὅπλα, 
they made an agreement with the Plataeans to surrender, &c. Tuuc. 
Il, 4. Τίνι δ᾽ ἄν τις μᾶλλον πιστεύσειε παρακαταθέσθαι χρήματα; 
to whom would any one sooner dare to commit money? XEN. Mem. 
IV, 4,17. ’Odvpovra: οἶκόνδε νέεσθαι, they mourn to go home. Il. 
II, 290. ᾿Ἐπευφήμησαν ᾿Αχαιοὶ αἰδεῖσθαι ἑερῆα. Il. J, 22. 


Note 2. When a noun and a verb (especially ἐστί) to- 
gether form an expression equivalent to any of the verbs of 
δ 92, 1, they may take the Infinitive without the article. 
Some other expressions with a similar force take the same 
construction. E. g. 


᾿Ανάγκη ἐστὶ πάντας ἀπελθεῖν. Kivduvos ἦν αὐτῷ παθεῖν τι. 
Ὅκνος ἐστί μοι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι. Φόβος ἐστὶν αὐτῷ ἐλθεῖν. “Apaka 
ἐν αὐταῖς ἦν, κώλυμα οὖσα (τὰς πύλας) προσθεῖναι, α wagon, which 
prevented them from shutting the gates. Tuuc. IV, 67. So ἐπεγένετο 
δὲ ἄλλοις τε ἄλλοθι κωλύματα μὴ αὐξηθῆναι, obstacles to their in- 
crease. Id. I, 16. (See § 95,2, N.1.) Τοῖς στρατιώταις ὁρμὴ ἐνέ- 
πεσε ἐκτειχίσαι τὸ χωρίον. Id. IV, 4. Οὐ μάντις εἰμὶ ταἀφανῇ 
γνῶναι, I am not enough of a prophet to decide, &e. Eur. Hippol. 
346. (Here the idea of ability is implied in μάντις εἰμί.) Τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 
καὶ μένειν καὶ ἀπελθεῖν αἱ νῆες παρέξουσιν. Tuuc. VI, 18. (See 
ἢ 93, 1.) “Exovra τιθασεύεσθαι φύσιν, capable by nature of 








§ 92, 1.] INFINITIVE AS OBJECT. 191 


being tamed (Ξε πεφυκότα τιθασεύεσθαιλ). Prat. Politic. 264 A. Tis 
μηχανὴ μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα καταναλωθῆναι εἰς τὸ τεθνάναι ; (i, 6. τί 
κωλύσει μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα καταναλωθῆναι ;) PLAT. Phaed. 72 0). Ae- 
δοικα μὴ πολλὰ καὶ χαλεπὰ εἰς ἀνάγκην ἔλθωμεν ποιεῖν, lest we may 
come to the necessity of doing. Dem. Ol. I, 13, 25. “ὥρα ἀπιέναι; 
4 is time to go away (like χρὴ ἀπιέναι, we must go away). Pat. 
Apol. 42 A. ’Edmidas ἔχει τοῦτο ποιῆσαι (= ἐλπίζει τοῦτο ποιῆ- 
σαι), he hopes to do this. But ἐλπὶς τοῦ ἑλεῖν, Tuve. II, 56. 
Οἱ δὲ ζῶντες αἴτιοι θανεῖν, and the living are those who caused them 
to die. Sopu. Ant. 1173. We might also have αἴτιοι τοῦ τουτοὺς 
θανεῖν or αἴτιοι τὸ τούτους θανεῖν. (See ὃ 23, 1, N.3.) So in phrases 
like πολλοῦ (or μικροῦ) δέω ποιεῖν τι, I want much (or little) of doing 
anything ; mapa μικρὸν ἦλθον ποιεῖν τι; they came within a little of do- 
ing anything; where the idea of ability, inability, or sufficiency 
appears: so in Tuuc. VII, 70, βραχὺ yap ἀπέλιπον διακόσιαι γενε- 
σθαι. So ἐμποδὼν τούτῳ ἐστὶν ἐλθεῖν (ΞΞ κωλύει τοῦτον ἐλθεῖν), ut 
prevents him from going ; where τοῦ ἐλθεῖν may be used. (See ὃ 94, 
and § 95, 1 and 2.) 

The Infinitive depending on a noun 1s generally an adnominal 
genitive with the article τοῦ. See ὃ 94 and ὃ 95, 1. 


Nore 3. Although the Infinitive depending on the verbs in- 
cluded in § 92, 1 regularly stands without the article, yet ro 1s some- 
times prefixed to give the Infinitive still more the character of a 
noun in the accusative. The Infinitive is sometimes placed for em- 
phasis apart from the main construction, like a synecdochical accu- 
sative. Εἰ g. 

Kai πῶς δὴ τὸ ἀρχικοὺς εἶναι ἀνθρώπων παιδεύεις ; XEN. Oeccon. 
XII, 4. (So παιδεύω τινά τι.) Τὸ δ᾽ av ξυνοικεῖν THO ὁμοῦ re 
ἂν γυνὴ δύναιτο; i. e. as to living with her, what woman could do it 
Sopu. Tr. 545. Τὸ δρᾶν οὐκ ἠθέλησαν. Id. O. C. 442. 

Οὐδείς μ᾽ dv πείσειεν τὸ μὴ οὐκ ἐλθεῖν, πὸ one could persuade me 
not togo. ARIST. Ran. 68. (For μὴ ov, see ὃ 95, 2, N. 1, 5.) So 
Xen. Hell. V, 2, 36. So θέλξει τὸ μὴ κτεῖναι σύνευνον (like 
πείσει τὸ μὴ κτεῖναι), AESCH. Prom. 865. Compare SopuH. Phil. 
1253, οὐδέ τοι σῇ χειρὶ πείθομαι τὸ Spar, 1. 6. I do not trust your 
hand for action (like ob πείθομαί σοι ταῦτα, I do not trust you in 
this.) 


Nore 4. Other active verbs than those included in ὃ 92, 1 may 
take the Infinitive like an ordinary noun, as an object accusative. 
Here, however, the Infinitive takes the article τό. E. g. 


Τὸ τελευτῆσαι πάντων ἡ πεπρωμένη κατέκρινεν, fale awarded 
death to all. Isoc. Demon. p. 11 C. § 43. 


Note 5. A few of the verbs included in ὃ 92, 1, which govern 
the genitive of a noun, allow also the genitive of the Infinitive with 
rov, as well as the simple Infinitive. (See § 95, 1.) This applies 
chiefly to ἀμελέω, ἐπιμελέομαι, and to the verbs of hindrance, &e in 
cluded in ὃ 95,2. E. g. 


Ό 


ae As aN ae hee SIT 


* 
2 An Alar cit diet κι tress 9:2. 


ΒΒ « 
para te OOS 


. ee ee ed 


Pe ay ape a a SE ee 











192 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 92, 1. 


᾿Αμελήσας τοῦ ὀργίζεσθαι. XEN. Mem. II, 3,9. (But ἀμελήσας 
λέγειν, PLAT. Phaed. 98 D.) Most verbs of desiring and neglecting 
take only the simple Infinitive. bg otge τας which usually takes 
ὅπως with the ποεῖ Indicative (ὃ 45), allows also the simple In- 
finitive (Tuuc. VI, 54), and the Infinitive with rod (XEN. Mem. 
Ill, 3,11). See § 45, N. 6, a. 


Remark. For the use of the Infinitive without ro after verbs as 
an accusative by synecdoche (usually found only after adjectives), 
see § 93, 2, Note 3 


Another case in which the Infinitive appears as 
the object of a verb occurs in indirect discourse, after 
verbs implying thought or the expression of thought (verba 
sentiendi et declarandi) or equivalent expressions. Here 


each tense of the Infinitive, instead of referring indefi- 
nitely to the future (as in the former construction, } 92, 
1), represents the corresponding tense of the Indicative 


or Optative 

Remark. For this construction see § 73,1; where also exam- 
ples of the Infinitive with ἄν in indirect discourse are given. For 
the distinction between the Infinitive in this construction and the 
ordinary Infinitive (92, 1), see § 73,1, Remark. For the Infini- 
tive, not in indirect discourse, after some verbs which usually be- 
long to this class, see § 15, 2, Notes 2 and 3; see also § 23, 2, Notes 
2 and 3. 


Nore 1. Of the three common verbs signifying to say, pnp is 
regularly followed only by the Infinitive in indirect discourse, εἶπον 
only by ὅτι or ὡς and the Indicative or Optative, while λέγω allows 
either construction. A singular exception in regard to εἶπον is 
found in Eur. Phoen. 1590, quoted § 89, 1, N. 1. (See § 15, 2, 
N. 3.) 


Note 2. After many verbs of this class in the passive both a 
personal and an impersonal construction are allowed: thus, we can 
say λέγεται ὁ Κῦρος γενέσθαι, Cyrus is said to have been, or λέγεται 
τὸν Κῦρον γενέσθαι, it is said that Cyrus was. Δοκέω in the meaning 
I seem (videor) usually has the personal construction, as in English ; 
as οὗτος δοκεῖ εἶναι, he seems to be. When an Infinitive with ἄν fol- 
lows (§ 73, 1), it must be translated by an impe srsonal construction, 
to suit the English idiom: thus, δοκεῖ τις ἂν ἔχειν must be translated 
it seems that some one would have, although tis is the subject of δοκεῖ ; 
as we cannot use would with our Infinitive, to translate ἔχειν dm» 
(See § 42, 2, Note.) 








§ 93, 1.] INFINITIVE AFTER RELATIVES, ETC. 193 


Note 8. (a.) When an indirect quotation has been intro- 
duced by an Infinitive, a dependent relative or temporal clause 
in the quotation sometimes takes the Infinitive by assimilation, 
where we should expect an Indicative or Optative. The tem- 
poral particles as, ὅτε, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, as well as the relative pro- 
nouns, are used in this construction. Herodotus also uses εἰ, 


if, and even διότι, because, in the same way. LE. g. 


Mera δὲ, ὡς ov παύεσθαι, ἄκεα δίζησθαι (λέγουσι), and afterwards, 
when it did not cease, they say that they sought for remedies. Hprt. I, 
94. (Here we should expect ὡς οὐκ ἐπαύετο.) ‘Qs δ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι 
τοὺς παρόντας, θόρυβον γενέσθαι (φασίν), they say that, when those 
present heard it, there was a tumult. Dem. F. L. 402, 8. ᾿ἘΕπειδὴ δὲ 
γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τῇ οἰκίᾳ τῇ ᾿Αγάθωνος, (ἔφη) ἀνεῳγμένην καταλαμβά- 
νειν τὴν θύραν. PLAT. Symp. 174 D. See Rep. Ἃ. 614: Β. Λέγεται 
᾿Αλκμαίωνι, ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι αὐτὸν, τὸν ᾿Απόλλω ταύτην τὴν γὴν 
χρῆσαι οἰκεῖν. THuc. II, 102. (Se 6 8 15,1, N. 2.) Kai ὅσα αὖ per 
ἐκείνων βουλεύεσθαι, οὐδενὸς ὕστερον γνώμῃ φανῆναι (ἔφασαν). 
Id. I, 91. (Here ἐβουλεύοντο would be the common form.) ‘“Hyov- 
μένης δὴ ἀληθείας οὐκ ἄν ποτε φαῖμεν αὐτῇ χορὸν κακῶν ἀκολουθῆσαι, 
ἀλλ᾽ ὑγιές τε καὶ δίκαιον ἦθος, ᾧ καὶ σωφροσύνην ἔπεσθαι. PLAT. 


Rep. VI, 490 C. 


Ei yap δὴ δεῖν πάντως περιθεῖναι ἄλλῳ τέῳ τὴν βασιληίην, (ἐφη) 
δικαιότερον εἶναι Μήδων τέῳ περιβαλεῖν τοῦτο. ‘Hor. I, 129. (Here εἰ 
δέοι or εἰ δεῖ would be the ordinary expression.) So Hor. III, 105 
and 108; doubtful, Hf, 64 and 172. See Kriiger’s note on I, 129. 
Τιμᾶν δὲ Σαμίους ἔφη, διότι ταφῆναί οἱ τὸν πάππον δημοσίῃ ὑπὸ 
Σαμίων. Hor. IL, 55. 


(b.) In some cases, particularly when the provisions of a law are 
quoted, a relative is used withthe Infinitive, even when no Infini- 
tive precedes. E. g. 


"EOnkev ἐφ᾽ ois ἐξεῖναι ἀποκτιννύναι, he enacted on what conditions 
it is allowed to kill. Dem. Lept. 505,19. Καὶ διὰ ταῦτα, ἄν tis ἀπο- 
κτείνῃ τινὰ, THY βουλὴν δικάζειν ἔγραψε, καὶ οὐχ ἅπερ, ἂν ἁλῷ, εἶναι, 
and he did not enact what should be done if he should be convicted. 
Deo. Aristocr. 629, 2. (Here εἶναι is the reading of the Cod. 3, 
amply defended by the preceding example, in which all editors 
allow ἐξεῖναι.) Δέκα yap ἄνδρας προείλοντο αὐτῷ ξυμβούλους, ἄνευ 
ὧν μὴ κύριον εἶναι ἀπάγειν στρατιὰν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως. ΤῊσσ. V, 63. 


§93. The Infinitive without the article may limit 
the meaning of certain adjectives and adverbs. 


1. Such are particularly adjectives denoting ability, 
jitness, desert, qualification, sufficiency, readiness, and 
9 M 


i NC CE 


τς λον, ἐς Ab ine ect Da lt Be hc SS ἐς Ὑπταρεσ τ 


da en tn lh a at 


aon 


inh δι 


te 
nate as 


CS ee pee 











ee ee τὸ eet eee es τ, = 


Ἀγόν ἀν ὟΝ 


ἐξ 
iy 
wl 
Hi 


᾿ 
f 
᾿ 
ἢ 


ας. τ τ" 
nen 


es 
ae saa 


i 
(th 
iN 
i 


194 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 93, 1. 


their opposites; and, in general, those denoting the 
same relations as the verbs which govern the Infinitive 
(§ 92,1). HEH. g. 


Δυνατὸς ποιεῖν, able to do. Δεινὸς λέγειν, skilled in speaking. 


"Αξιός ἐστι ταῦτα λαβεῖν, he deserves to receive this. ᾿Ανάξιος θαυμάζε- 


σθαι, unworthy to be admired. "Λξιος τιμᾶσθαι, worthy to be honored. 
Οὐχ οἷός τε ἦν τοῦτο ἰδεῖν, he was not able to see this. ἹΠρόθυμος 
λέγειν, eager to speak. Ἑτοῖμος κίνδυνον ὑπομένειν, ready to endure 
danger. 

Θεμιστοκλέα, ἱκανώτατον εἰπεῖν καὶ γνῶναι καὶ πρᾶξαι. Lys. 
Or. Fun. p. 194, § 42. Τὸν δ᾽ ἐπιτήδειον ταῦτα παθεῖν ἔφη, the 
people said that he was a suitable person to suffer this. Dem. Phil. 1Π, 
126, 19. Αἱ γὰρ εὐπραξίαι δειναὶ συγκρύψαι τὰ τοιαῦτα ὀνείδη. 
Id. Ol. Il, 23, 29. Κυρίαν ἐποίησαν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τὰς εὐταξίας, they 

ave it (the Areopagus) power to superintend good order. Isoc. Areop. 
p- 147 Ὁ. § 39. Βίην δὲ ἀδύνατοι ἦσαν προσφέρειν. Hort. Ill, 
138. Μαλακοὶ καρτερεῖν, too effeminate to endure. PLAT. Rep. 
VII, 556 B. Ταπεινὴ ὑμῶν ἡ διάνοια ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἃ ἔγνωτε, your 
minds are too dejected to persevere, ἕο. Tuuc. Il, 61. (In the last 
two examples μαλακοί and ταπεινή govern the Infinitive by the idea 
of inability implied in them.) Χρήματα πορίζειν εὐπορώτατον γυνή. 
Arist. Eccles. 236. Σοφώτεροι δὴ συμφορὰς τὰς τῶν πέλας πάντες 
διαιρεῖν ἢ τύχας τὰς οἴκοθεν. Eur. Alcmen. Fr. 103. ᾿Ἐπιστήμων 
λέγειν τε καὶ σιγᾶν. PLAT. Phaedr. 276 A. τἄλλα εὑρήσεις 
ὑπουργεῖν ὄντας ἡμᾶς ov κακούς. ARIST. Pac. 480. 


For examples of nouns followed by the Infinitive, see § 92, 1, Ν, 2. 


Nore 1. The use of the Infinitive after οἷος in the sense of 
appropriate, likely, capable, and ὅσος in that of sufficient, with or 
without their antecedents, is to be referred to this head. (Οἷός re, 
able, like δυνατός, regularly takes the Infinitive.) E. g. 

Οὐ γὰρ ἦν ὥρα οἷα τὸ πεδίον ἄρδειν, forit was not the proper season 
for irrigating the land. Xen. An. I, 3, 13. Τοιαύτας otas χειμῶνός 
τεστέγειν καὶ θέρους ἱκανὰς εἶναι. PLAT. Rep. ΠΙ, 415 E. Τοιοῦ- 
τος οἷος πείθεσθαι. Id. Crit. 46 Β. Νεμόμενοι τὰ αὑτῶν ἕκαστοι 
ὗσον ἀποζῆν: cullivating their own land to an extent sufficient to live 
upon it, Tuuc. 1, 2. Ἐλείπετο τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταίους διελθεῖν 
τὸ πεδίον, there was left enough of the night for crossing the plain 
in the dark. XEN. An. IV, 1, 5. Ἔφθασε τοσοῦτον ὅσον Taxnre 
ἀνεγνωκέναι τὸ ψήφισμα, tt came 80 much in advance (of the other 
ship), that Paches had already read the decree. Tuuc. III, 49. (See 
§ 18, 3,5.) Examples like the last strongly resemble those under 
§ 98, 1 in which ὥστε has τοσοῦτος for its antecedent. 

Other pronominal adjectives (as rotos, τοιόσδε, THLOUTOS, τηλίκος; 
ποῖος) sometimes take an Infinitive in the same way. 


Note 2. (a.) Certain impersonal verbs (like ἔνεστι, πρέπει; 
προσήκει), which regularly take an Infinitive as their subject 














§ 98, 2.7} IN¥VINITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES, ETC. 195 


(§ 91), are sometimes used in the Participle in a personal sense, in 
which case they may be followed by the Infinitive, the Participle 
having the force of one of the adjectives of ὃ 93,1. Thus τὰ ἐνόντα 
εἰπεῖν is equivalent to ἃ ἔνεστι εἰπεῖν, what it ts permiited to say; τὰ 
προσήκοντα ῥηθῆναι is equivalent to ἃ προσήκει ῥηθῆναι, what is proper 
to be said, as if προσήκει were a personal verb, and as if we could say 
ταῦτα προσήκει, these things are becoming. KE. g. 

Κατιδὼν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ἐνόντων εἰπεῖν. Isoc. Phil. p. 104 Ὁ. 
$110. Τὸν θεὸν καλεῖ οὐδὲν προσήκοντ᾽ ἐν γόοις παραστατεῖν, 
she is calling on the God who ought not to be present at lamentations. 
Arscu. Agam. 1079. (Προσήκοντα is used like adjectives meaning 
fit, proper, as if we could say ὃς ov προσήκει παραστατεῖν.) Spat’, 
ἐπεὶ πρέπων ἔφυς πρὸ τῶνδε φωνεῖν. ϑὅοΡΗ. O. T. 9. So τὰ 
ἡμῖν παραγγελθέντα διεξελθεῖν (—=4 παρηγγέλθη ἡμῖν διεξελθεῖν). 
PLAT. Tim. 90 E. 


(b.) In the same way certain adjectives, like δίκαιος, ἐπικαί- 
pee ἐπιτήδειος, ἐπίδοξος, may be used personally with the 
nfinitive ; as δίκαιός ἐστι τοῦτο ποιεῖν, it is right for him to do this 
(equivalent to δίκαιόν ἐστιν αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιεῖν). ΕἸ. g. 
Φημὶ καὶ πολλῷ μειζόνων ἔτι τούτων δωρεῶν δίκαιος εἶναι τυγ- 
άνειν, i. 6. that it is right for me to receive, ἕο. Drm. Cor. 248, 6. 
Εδόκουν ἐπιτήδειοι εἶναι ὑπεξαιρεθῆναι, they seemed to be con- 
venient persons to be disposed of. Tuuc. VIII, 70. Θεραπεύεσθαι 
ἐπικαίριοι, important persons to be taken care of. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 2, 
25. Τάδε τοι ἐξ αὐτέων ἐπίδοξα γενέσθαι, it is to be expected that 
this will result from it. Hort. I, 89. (Πολλοὶ ἐπίδοξοι τωὐτὸ τοῦτο 
πείσεσθαι, it is to be expected that many will suffer this same thing, 
Id. VI, 12, is an example of the Future Infinitive, § 27, N. 2. So 
in English, many are likely to suffer.) 
These examples resemble those under § 93, 2. 
Nore 3. Rarely the Infinitive with ré is used after adjectives of 
this class. (Compare ὃ 92,1, Ν. 8.) E.g. 
Τὸ προσταλαιπωρεῖν οὐδεὶς πρόθυμος ἦν. Tuc. I, 53. 


2. Any adjective may take the Infinitive without the 
article as an accusative by synecdoche, showing in what 
respect the adjective is applicable to its noun; as θέαμα 
αἰσχρὸν ὁρᾶν, a sight disgraceful to look upon. 

The Infinitive is here regularly active or middle, sel- 
dom passive, even when the latter would seem more 
natural ; as χαλεπὸν ποιεῖν, hard to do, seldom χαλε- 
πὸν ποιεῖσθαι, hard to be done. KH. g. 


5 
> 4 ‘ ‘sd δι: 2 , , Φ mf 
Αἰσχρὸν yap τόδε γ᾽ ἐστὶ καὶ ἐσσομένοισι πυθέσθαι; 1. 6. disgrace 


“ΕΞ... Ip sin GIRLS IRIS A “ bay 8 











196 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 93, 2. 


ful for them to hear. Tl. II, 119. So Il. I, 107 and 589. Τοὺς yap 
ὑπὲρ τούτων λόγους ἐμοὶ μὲν ἀναγκαιοτάτους προε ιπεῖν ἡγοῦμαι, ὑμῖν 
δὲ χρησιμωτάτους ἀκοῦσαι: 8. most necessary for me to say, and 
most useful for you to hear. Dem. Mid. 522, 18. Φοβερὸς προσπο- 
λεμῆσαι; a lerrible man to fight against. Id. Ol. II, 24, 12. Oikia 
ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι, a house most pleasant to live in. XEN. Mem. 
Ill, 8, 8. Ta γαλεπώτατα εὑρεῖν, the things hardest to find: ra 
ῥᾷστα ἐντυγχάνειν; the things easiest to obtain. Ib. 1, 6,9. Πολιτεία 
χαλεπὴ συζῆν. 4 form of government hard to live under: ἄνομος δὲ 
(μοναρχία) χαλεπὴ καὶ βαρυτάτη ξυνοικῆσαι. Piat. Politic. 802 B 
and E. Λόγος δυνατὸς κατα νοῆσαι, α speech which it is possible to 
understand. Id. Phaed. 90 D. Ὃ xpovos βραχὺς ἀξίως διηγή" 
σασθαι, the time is too short for narrating it properly. 14. Menex. 
239 B. ‘H ὁδὸς ἐπιτηδεία πορευομένοις Kal λέγειν καὶ ἀκούειν; 
convenient both for speaking and for hearing. Id. Symp. 173 B. 
Πότερον δὲ λούσασθαι , ea oa (τὸ ὕδωρ) ; is the water there 
colder for bathing ? Xen. Mem. ILI, 13, 3. 

(Passive.) Kuves αἰσχραὶ ὁρᾶσθαι (instead of ὁρᾶν). XEN. 
Cyneg. Ill, 3. Ἔστι δ᾽ ὁ λόγος φιλαπεχθήμων μὲν, ῥηθῆναι δ᾽ οὐκ 
ἀσύμφορος. Isoc. Antid. p. 70, § 1109. 


Note 1. The Infinitive may be used after adverbs which corre- 
spond to the adjectives just mentioned (8 93, 2). E. g. 

Πῶς ἂν τοῖς μὲν εὔνοις κάλλιστα ἰδεῖν ποιοῖτο τὴν ἐξέλασιν, τοῖς 
δὲ δυσμενέσι φοβερώτατα, in a manner most delightful for the friendly 
to behold, and most terrible for the ill-disposed. XEN. Cyr. VIL, 3, 5. 


Nore 2. Certain nouns, which are equivalent in meaning to the 
neuter of any of the adjectives which take the Infinitive, may them- 
selves have the same construction. E. g. 

Θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι,α wonderful thing to behold (like θαυμαστὸν ide- 
σθαι). 

Norte 8. (α.) In Homer verbs expressing excellence or fitness 
sometimes take the Infinitive (as an accusative by synecdoche), 
like the adjectives of § 93,2. E. g. 


“Ἕκτορος ἥδε γυνὴ: ὃς ἀριστεύεσκε μάχεσθαι; this is the wife of 


. 


ὄρνιθας γνῶναι καὶ ἀναίσιμα μυθήσασθαι. Od. Il, 158. Οἱ περὶ 
μὲν βουλὴν Δαναῶν, περὶ δ᾽ ἐστὲμάχεσθαι, ye who excel the Danai 
sn counsel and excel them in battle. 1]. 1, 258. (Here βουλήν and 
μάχεσθαι are alike in the accusative by synecdoche after περὶ - -- 
ἐστέ.) 

(b.) Even in Attic Greek the Infinitive is sometimes used after 
verbs as a synecdochical accusative. The Infinitives ἀκούειν, ἀκοῦσαι; 
in sound, and ὁρᾶν; ἰδεῖν, in appearance, especially, are used in this 
way. Εἰ g. 


Aoxeis οὖν τι διαφέρειν αὐτοὺς ἰδεῖν χάλκεως ; do you think that 


Hector, who was the first in fighting. Il. VI, 460. Ὁμηλικίην ἐκέκαστο 

















§ 95, 1.] INFINITIVE AS GENITIVE OR DATIVE. 197 


they differ at all in appearance from a brazier? PuatT. Rep. VI, 495 
E. Compare εὐρύτερος ἰδέσθαι, 1]. 1Π|,194. ᾿Ακοῦσαι παγκάλως 
ἔχει, it is very fine in is sound. Dem. F. L. 355, 29. Πράγματα 
παρέξουσιν (οἱ ἵπποι) ἐπιμέλεσθαι, the horses will make trouble 
about tending. Xen. Cyr. IV, 5, 46. 


va ie = e ΕΝ . ε 

ΝΟΤΕ 4. The Homeric use of ὁμοῖος, equal, like, with the In- 
finitive is to be referred to the same principle. E. g. 

Λευκότεροι χιόνος, θείειν δ᾽ ἀνέμοισιν ὁμοῖοι, (horses) whiter than 
snow, and like the winds in swiftness, Il. X, 437. Οὐ γάρ οἵ τις 
ξ ~ , ’ 9 A >? ‘Tl b 4} il Ὁ) 
ὁμοῖος ἐπισπέσθαι ποσὶν ἦεν. Il. XIV, 521. 


94. The Infinitive as genitive, dative, or accusa- 
tive is very often governed by prepositions, or by adverbs 
used as prepositions. In this case it always takes the 
article τοῦ, τῷ, or τό. E. g. 

“Τοὺς yap λόγους περὶ τοῦ τιμωρήσασθαι Φίλιππον ὁρῶ γιγνο- 
μένους, for I see that the speeches are made about punishing Philip. 
Deo. Ol. 1Π, 28, 5. Πρὸ τοῦ τοὺς ὅρκους ἀποδοῦναι; before tak- 
ing the oaths. Id. Cor. 234, 6. "Ex τοῦ πρὸς χάριν δημηγορεῖν 
ἐνίους. Id. ΟἹ. 1Π, 29, 18. Πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείας λαβεῖν; 
besides receiving nothing for the embassy. Id. F. L. 413,21. Ἐν τῷ 
πολίτην ποιεῖσθαι (Χαρίδημον), in making Charidemus a citizen. 
Id. Aristocr. 683, 22. Ἕνεκα τοῦ πλείω ποιῆσαι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν 
οὐσίαν. Isoc. Demon. p. 6 A. § 19. ᾿Ἐθαυμάζετο ἐπὶ τῷ εὐθύμως 
ζῆν. Xen. Mem. IV, 8, 2. Ὅμως διὰ τὸ ξένος εἶναι οὐκ ἂν οἴει 
ἀδικηθῆναι, on account of being a stranger. Tb. 11, 1, 15. Πάντων 
διαφέρων ἐφαίνετο, καὶ εἰς τὸ ταχὺ μανθάνειν & δέοι καὶ εἰς τὸ καλῶς 
ἕκαστα ποιεῖν. Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1. 


§95. 1. The genitive and dative of the Infinitive, 
with the article, may stand in most of the constructions 
belonging to those cases; as in that of the adnominal 
genitive, the genitive after comparatives, the genitive 
after verbs and adjectives, the dative of manner, means, 
&c., the dative after such verbs as πιστεύω and after 
adjectives denoting resemblance, &c., and sometimes in 
that of the genitive of cause or motive. KE. g. 

Tod πιεῖν ἐπιθυμία, the desire to drink. Tnuc. VII, 84. Πόνους 
δὲ τοῦ ζῆν ἡδέως ἡγεμόνας νομίζετε. Xen. Cyr. I, 5, 12: Eis 


ἐλπίδα ἦλθον τοῦ ἑλεῖν (τὴν πόλιν), 1, 6. hope of taking the city. 
Truc. ll, 56. (See § 92, 1, N. 2.) Neos τὸ σιγᾶν κρεῖττόν ἐστι 
τοῦ λαλεῖν. MENAND. Monos. 387. Παρεκάλει ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τοῦ 
ὡς φρονιμώτατον εἶναι. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 55. So Ili, 3,21 See 


Rs a ct ss a ai a, δ ΞῪΝ ot, 
Sa ke ese anaes τς, δον.» ae aeblk Rie Rinks 266i ie SSF 





1938 THE INFINITIVE. [8 95, 1. 


§ 92,1, N.5. (Ἐπιμελέομαι usually takes ὅπως with the Future In- 
dicative, by § 45.) Ἐπέσχομεν τοῦ δακρύειν; we ceased to weep. 
Prat. Phaed. 117 E. (See below, ὃ 95, 2.) Καὶ yap ἀήθεις τοῦ 
κατακούειν τινός εἰσιν, for they are unused to obeying any one. 
Dem. Ol. I, 15, 28. 

Οὐδενὶ τῶν πάντων πλέον κεκράτηκε Φίλιππος ἢ TO πρότερος πρὸς 
τοῖς πράγμασι γίγνεσθαι. Id. Chers. 92, 21. ᾿Αλλὰ τῷ φανερὸς 
εἶναι τοιοῦτος dv, by making it plain that he was such a man. XEN. 
Mem. I, 2, 3. Οὐ yap δὴ τῷ ye κοσμίως ζῆν ἄξιον πιστεύειν, to trust 
in an orderly life. Isoc. Antid. p. 315 A. § 24. Ἴσον δὲ τῷ προ- 
στένειν. AescH. Agam. 253. Τῷ ζῆν ἔστι τι ἐναντίον, ὥσπερ τῷ 
ἐγρηγορέναι τὸ καθεύδειν. Ρυατ. Phaed. 71 C. 

Μίνως τὸ ληστικὸν καθήρει, τοῦ Tas προσόδους μᾶλλον ἰέναι αὐτῷ, 
tn order that greater revenues might come in. ΤΉσΟ. I, 4. 


Nore. It will be seen that the nominative and accusative of the 
Infinitive (except the accusative after prepositions) recularly stand 
without the article ; the genitive and dative regularly with the article. 
The Infinitive after the verbs included in § 92, 1, however, gener- 
ally stands without the article, whatever case it represents; and 
further, whenever any word which might govern a genitive or da- 
tive of the Infinitive forms a part of an expression which is equiv- 
alent to any of the verbs of § 92, 1, the simple Infinitive may be 
used. (See § 92, 1, Note 2.) 


2. After verbs and expressions which denote hin- 
drance or freedom from anything, two constructions 
are allowed,—that of the simple Infinitive ($ 92, 
1), and that of the genitive of the Infinitive with TOU 
(§ 95, 1). 

Thus we can say (a) εἴργει σε τοῦτο ποιεῖν, and (0d) εἴργει 
ge τοῦ τοῦτο ποιεῖν (both with the same meaning), he pre- 
vents you from doing this. As the Infinitive after such verbs 
can take the negative μή without affecting the sense, we have 
a third and a fourth form, still with the same meaning : — 
(c) εἴργει σε μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, and (4) εἴργει σε τοῦ μὴ τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν, he prevents you from doing this. Fora fifth form with 
the same meaning, see § 99, 3. (For the negative pn, see 
Note 1, a.) 

If the leading verb is itself negative (or interrogative with a 
negative implied), the double negative μὴ οὐ is generally used 
instead of μή in the form (6) with the simple Infinitive, but 
seldom (or never) in the form (d) with the genitive of the 
Infinitive ; as οὐκ eipye ve μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, he does not pre- 

















§ 95, 2.7 INFINITIVE AFTER VERBS OF HINDRANCE. 199 


vent you from doing this ; seldom (or never) τοῦ μὴ οὐ τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν. See also § 95, 38. (For the double negative, see 
Note 1,6.) E.g. 


(a.) Ἐπὶ ᾿Ολύνθου ἀποπέμπουσιν, ὅπως εἴργωσι τοὺς ἐκεῖθεν ἐπι- 
βοηθεῖν. Τησσ. I, 62. Εἰ τοῦτό τις εἴργει δρᾶν ὄκνος, if any 
hesitation prevents you from doing. this. Puiat. Soph. 242 A. ἴΑλλως 
δέ πως πορίζεσθαι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ὅρκους ἤδη κατέχοντας ἡμᾶς (ἤδειν). 
Xen. An. ΠΙ, 1,20. Κακὸν δὲ ποῖον εἶργε τοῦτ᾽ ἐξειδέναι; SOPH. 
Ὁ. T. 129. Εὐδοκιμεῖν ἐμποδὼν σφίσιν εἶναι. PLAT. Euthyd. 
305 ἢ. Παιδὸς Φέρητος, ὃν θανεῖν ἐρρυσάμην. Eur. Ale. 11. Tov 
Φίλιππον παρελθεῖν οὐκ ἐδύναντο κωλῦσαι. Dem. Pac. 62, 10. 
Τὴν ἰδέαν τῆς γῆς οὐδέν pe κωλύει λέγειν. Prat. Phaed. 108 E. 


(b.) Tod δὲ δραπετεύειν δεσμοῖς ἀπείργουσι; XEN. Mem. II, 
1, 16. Τὸ yap wWevddpevov φαίνεσθαι καὶ τοῦ συγγνώμης τινὸς 
τυγχάνειν ἐμποδὼν μάλιστα ἀνθρώποις γίγνεται. Id. Cyr. 111... 9. 
Εἶπεν ὅτι κωλύσειε (ἂν) τοῦ καίειν ἐπιόντας. Id. An. I, 6, 2. 
᾿Απεσχόμην τοῦ λαβεῖν τοῦ δικαίου ἕνεκα. Dem. F. L. 410, 18. 


(c.) Εἶργε μὴ βλαστάνειν. PLAT. Phaedr. 251 Β. Ὅπερ 
ἔσχε μὴ τὴν Πελοπόννησον πορθεῖν, which prevented him from 
ravaging the Peloponnesus. THUC. I, 73. Διεκώλυσε μὴ διαφθεῖ- 
pac. Id. ΠῚ, 49. ᾿Επεγένετο κωλύματα μὴ αὐξηθῆναι. Id. I, 16. 
(§ 92, 1, N. 2.) Θνητούς γ᾽ ἔπαυσα μὴ προσδέρκεσθαι μόρον. 
Arscu. Prom. 248. Τοὐμὸν φυλάξει σ᾽ ὄνομα μὴ πάσχειν κακῶς. 
5ΟΡΗ. O. C, 667. 

Od yap ἔστι Ἕλλησι οὐδεμία ἔκδυσις μὴ οὐ δόντας λόγον εἶναι 
σοὺς δούλους. Hot. VIII, 100. πΠέμπουσι κήρυκα, ὑποδεξάμενοι 
σχήσειν τὸν Σπαρτιήτην μὴ ἐξιέναι. .. « Οὐ δυνατοὶ αὐτὴν ἴσχειν 
εἰσὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι μὴ οὐκ ἐξιέναι. Id. 1Χ, 12. Ὥστε ξένον γ᾽ ἂν οὐδέν᾽ 
ὄνθ᾽, ὥσπερ σὺ νῦν, ὑπεκτραποίμην μὴ οὐσυνεκσώζειν. SOPH. O. 
C. 565. Τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ ὑβριζομένους ἀποθανεῖν; XEN. An. 
Ill, 1,13. (Τί ἐμποδών here implies οὐδὲν ἐμποδών.) Tivos ἂν δέοιο 
μὴ οὐχὶ πάμπαν εὐδαίμων εἶναι; what would hinder you from being 
perfectly happy? 14. Hell. IV, 1, 36. So Arist. Ran. 695. 

(d.) Πᾶς yap ἀσκὸς δύο ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι, li. 68. 
will keep two men from sinking. XEN. An. Ill, 5,11. “Ὃν οὐδείς πω 
προθεὶς τοῦ μὴ πλέον ἔχειν ἀπετράπετο. Tuuc. I, 76. Εἰ δ᾽ ap’ 
ἐμποδών τι αὐτῷ ἐγένετο TOU μὴ εὐθὺς τότε δικάσασθαι. Dem. 
Apatur. 900, 22. ᾿Ηπίστατο τὴν πόλιν μικρὸν ἀπολιποῦσαν τοῦ μὴ 
ταῖς ἐσχάταις συμφοραῖς περιπεσεῖν. Isoc, Antid. p. 73, § 122. 
᾿Αποσοβοῦντες ἂν ἐμποδὼν γίγνοιντο τοῦ μὴ ὁρᾶν αὐτοὺς τὸ ὅλον 
στράτευμα. XEN. Cyr. II, 4, 23. Εἰδότες ὅτι ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ εἰσι τοῦ 

ηδὲν παθεῖν. Ib. IL, 3, 31. (See Tuvuc. VI, 18, quoted § 92, 
1,N.2.) Τοῦ δὲ μὴ (κακῶς) πάσχειν αὐτοὶ πᾶσαν ἄδειαν ἤγετε; 
you were entirely free from fear of suffering harm. Dem. F. L. 387, 
17. "Evovons οὐδεμιᾶς ἔτ᾽ ἀποστροφῆς τοῦ μὴ τὰ χρήματ᾽ ἔχειν 
ὑμᾶς, there being no longer any escape from the conclusion that you 
have taken bribes. Id. Timoc. 702, 26. 


—e spent 


Μη 


β 
Ϊ 
' 
i 
Ι 
| 
| 
, 





200 THE INFINITIVE. [8 95, 2. 


REMARK. The last two examples show that μὴ can be joined 
with the genitive of the Infinitive, even after nouns implying hin- 
drance or freedom. In the two following the addition of μὴ is more 
peculiar : — 

‘H ἀπορία τοῦ μὴ ἡσυχάζειν, the inability to rest. Tuuc. Il, 49. 
Η τοῦ μὴ ξυμπλεῖν ἀπιστία, the distrust of sailing with them; 1. 6. the 
unwillingness to sail, caused by distrust. Id. 111, 75. 


Note 1. (a.) The use of μή with the Infinitive in the 
forms ὁ and d is to be referred to the general principle, by 
which the Infinitive after all verbs expressing a negative idea 
(as those of denying, distrusting, concealing, forbidding, &c.) 
can always take the negative μή, to strengthen the negation 
implied in the leading verb. ‘Thus we say ἀρνεῖται μὴ ἀληθὲς 
εἶναι τοῦτο, he denies that this ts true ; ἀπηγόρευε μηδένα τοῦτο 


ποιεῖν, he forbade any one to do this. This negative may, how- 


ever, be omitted without affecting the sense. 


(6.) An Infinitive which for any reason would regularly 

x , . . > ὦ . ᾿ ἢ . 
take μή (either affecting the Infinitive itself, as an ordinary 
negative, or strengthening a preceding negation, as in the case 
just mentioned) generally takes the double negative μὴ οὐ, if 
the verb on which it depends is ¢tself negative. Thus the 
example given above, ἀρνεῖται μὴ ἀληθὲς εἶναι τοῦτο, becomes, if 
we negative the leading verb, οὐκ ἀρνεῖται μὴ οὐκ ἀληθὲς εἶναι 
τοῦτο, he does not deny that this is true. So, when the original 

, . > . . . , , , 4 , ~ 
μή really negatives the Infinitive, as in δίκαιόν ἐστι μὴ τοῦτον 
ἀφιέναι, it is just not to acquit him, —if we negative the leading 
verb, we shall have od δίκαιόν ἐστι μὴ οὐ τοῦτον ἀφιέναι, tt is 
not just not to acquit him. See Prat. Rep. IV, 427 E, ὡς 

> av , Δ. ‘ > πὶ ΠῚ ry. ᾿ . 
οὐχ oglov σοι OV μὴ OV βοηθεῖν δικαιοσύνῃ. This applies also to 
the Infinitive with ro (§ 95, 3). 

Μὴ ov is occasionally used before participles, and even before 
nouns, on the same principle, to express an exception to a statement 
containing a negative; as in PLAT. Lys. 210 1), οὐκ dpa ἐστὶ φίλον 
τῷ φιλοῦντι οὐδὲν μὴ οὐκ ἀντιφιλοῦν, unless it loves in return. Here, 
if the negatives (οὐκ and οὐδέν) were removed from the leading 
verb, we should have simply μὴ ἀντιφιλοῦν (with the same meaning), 
which would be the ordinary form with the participle, even after a 
negative. So μὴ οὐκ ἐόντες, unless they were. Hot. VI, 9. Soin 
Den. F. L. 379, 7, we find αἵ re πόλεις πολλαὶ καὶ χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν, 
μὴ οὐ χρόνῳ καὶ πολιορκίᾳ, the cities were many and difficult (= nol 
easy) to capture, except by long siege. 











$ 95, 3.] Τὸ py -WITH THE INFINITIVE. 201 


REMARK. Μὴ ov is very rarely found where the leading verb 
does not at least imply a negative. In Xen. An. II, 3, 11, ὥστε 
πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι μὴ οὐ συσπουδάζειν, so that all were ashamed 
not to join heartily in the work, the double negative may be explained 
by the negative idea of unwillingness implied in αἰσχύνην. See also 
the last example under Ν, 1. 


Nore 2. When the leading verb expressing hindrance, &c. is 
itself negative, the form 6, μὴ ov with the Infinitive, is the most com- 
mon. The form a, the Infinitive alone, is allowed after negative 
(as well as affirmative) verbs, as in Dem. Pac. 62, 10, quoted above 
under a. The form ὅ, τοῦ with the Infinitive (without μή), is not 
used after negative verbs, according to Madvig. 

Even in the form c, we sometimes find the single negative μή (for 
μὴ ov), even when the leading verb is negative. E. g. 

Od πολὺν χρόνον μ᾽ ἐπέσχον μή με ναυστολεῖν ταχύ. ϑὅ0ΡΗ. Phil. 


349. Οὐδέ μ᾽ ὄμματος φρουρὰν παρῆλθε, τόνδε μὴ λεύσσειν στόλον. 
Id. Trach. 226. (Μὴ ov here is a conjecture.) 


3. The Infinitive preceded by To μή is sometimes 
used after verbs and expressions denoting hindrance, 
and also after all expressions which even imply preven 
tion, omission, or denial. 


This Infinitive with ré is less closely connected than the 
simple Infinitive with the leading verb, and often denotes 
merely the result of the prevention or omission of anything: it 
may generally be explained as an accusative by synecdoche, or 
sometimes as an object accusative (as after verbs of denial). 
Here, as before (§ 95, 2), if the leading verb is itself negative, 
or interrogative with a negative implied, μὴ ov is generally 
used instead of py. Εἰ. g. 


Τὸν πλεῖστον ὅμιλον εἶργον τὸ μὴ προεξιόντας τῶν ὅπλων τὰ ἐγγὺς 
τῆς πόλεως κακουργεῖν; they prevented them from injuring, &c. 
Tuvc. Ill, 1. (This adds a fifth expression, εἴργει σε TO μὴ τοῦτο 
ποιεῖν. to the four already given (ὃ 95, 2) as equivalents of the 
English, he prevents you from doing this.) To δὲ μὴ λεηλατῆσαι 
τὴν πόλιν ἔσχε τόδε. Hp. V, 101. Φόβος τε ξυγγενὴς τὸ μὴ ἀδι- 
κεῖν σχήσει. AESCH. Eum. 691. Οὗτοί εἰσιν μόνοι ἔτι ἡμῖν ἐμποδὼν 
τὸ μὴ ἤδη εἶναι ἔνθα πάλαι ἐσπεύδομεν. XEN. An. IV, 8, 14. Οὐκ 
ἀπεσχόμην τὸ μὴ οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν. Prat. Rep. I, 354 B. 
Οὐκ ἀπέσχοντο οὐδ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν φίλων τὸ μὴ οὐχὶ πλεονεκτεῖν αὐτῶν 
πειρᾶσθαι. XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 32. Κίμωνα mapa τρεῖς ἀφεῖσαν 
ψήφους τὸ μὴ θανάτῳ ζημιῶσαι. i. 6. they allowed Cimon by three 
votes ta escape the punishment of death. Dem. Aristocr. 688, 27 

9 * 





THE INFINITIVE. [8 95, ὃ. 


Τρεῖς δὲ μόναι ψῆφοι διήνεγκαν τὸ μὴ θανάτου τιμῆσαι, and on'y 
three votes prevented you from condemning him to death (lit. made the 
difference as to condemr.ng, &c.). Ib. 676,12. Φόβος yap ἀνθ᾽ ὕπνου 
παραστατεῖ τὸ μὴ βεβαίως βλέφαρα συμβαλεῖν ὕπνῳ, i. 6. stands 
by to prevent my closing my eves, &c. ArscH. Agam. 15. 


Ἐπεὶ προθυμεῖσθ᾽, οὐκ ἐναντιώσομαι τὸ μὴ οὐ γεγωνεῖν πᾶν ὅσον 
προσχρήζετε. Id. Prom. 786. Οὐδὲν yap αὐτῷ ταῦτ᾽ ἐπαρκέσει τὸ μὴ 
οὐ πεσεῖν ἀτίμως πτώματ᾽ οὐκ ἀνασχετά, this will not suffice to pre- 
vent him from falling, &c. Tb. 918. Λείπει μὲν οὐδ᾽ ἃ πρόσθεν ἥδεμεν 
τὸ μὴ οὐ βαρύστον᾽ εἶναι, they lack nothing of being heavily griev- 
ous. Sopu. Ὁ. T. 1232. Μήτοι, κασιγνήτη, μ᾽ ἀτιμάσῃς τὸ μὴ οὐ 
θανεῖν τε σὺν σοὶ, τὸν θανόντα θ᾽ ἁγνίσαι; do not think me too mean 
to die with thee, &c. Id. Ant. 544. (Cf. Ant. 22, and Oecd. Col. 49.) 
Αὐτὴν μὴν οὐ μισοῦντ᾽ ἐκείνην τὴν πόλιν τὸ μὴ οὐ μεγάλην εἶναι 
φύσει κεὐδαίμονα, 1. 6. ποί grudging the city its right to be great, &e. 
Arist. Av. 36. (Compare μίσησέν μιν κυσὶ κύρμα γενέσθαι; Il. 
XVII, 272.) Οὐδεὶς ἀντιλέγει τὸ μὴ οὐ λέξειν ὅ τι ἕκαστος ἡγεῖται 
πλείστου ἄξιον ἐπίστασθαι, no one objects to saying, &e. XEN. Conv. 
ILI, 3. Οὐδ᾽ ἄρνησις ἔστιν αὐτοῖς τὸ μὴ ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὲρ Φιλίππου πράτ- 
τειν, it is not even possible for them to deny that they dith these things 
in the interest of Philip. Dem. F. L. 392, 13. Μὴ παρῇς TO μὴ οὐ 

ράσαι, do not omit to speak of it. Sorn. O. T. 283. Οὐδένα 
δύνασθαι κρύπτειν τὸ μὴ οὐχ ἡδέως ἂν καὶ ὠμῶν ἐσθίειν αὐτῶν, that 
no one is able to prevent people from knowing that he would gladly 
even eat some of them raw. XEN. Hell. ΠῚ, 3, 6. 

For μὴ ov, see ὃ 95, 2, Note 1, (0.). 


Note. The simple negative form τὸ μὴ is sometimes found even 
when the leading verb is negative, where regularly τὸ μὴ ov would 
be used. This is more common here than in the corresponding 
case, ὃ 95, 2, Note 2. E. g. 


Οὐκ ἂν ἐσχόμην τὸ μὴ ἀποκλῇσαι τοὐμὸν ἄθλιον δέμας. SOPH. 
Ο. T. 1387. Τίς σοῦ ἀπελείφθη τὸ μή σοι ἀκολουθεῖν; XEN. 
Cyr. V, 1, 25. ἴΑκος δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἐπήρκεσαν τὸ μὴ πόλιν μὲν ὥσπερ οὖν 
ἔχει παθεῖν. Anscu. Agam. 1170. Οὐκ dv ἔστι μηχανὴ οὐδεμία τὸ 
μὴ κεῖνον ἐπιβουλεύειν ἐμοί. Hor. I, 209. Καὶ φημὶ δρᾶσαι; 
κοὐκ ἀπαρνοῦμαι τὸ μή. ὅοΡηΗ. Ant. 443. See also Dem. F. L. 
392, 18, quoted above. 


REMARK. Τὸ μή and τοῦ μή can of course be used with the In- 
finitive as ordinary negatives. See examples, § 92, 1, N. 3. So 
ἐπιμελεῖται τοῦ μὴ δίκην δοῦναι. : 


§96. The Infinitive with its subject, object, or other 
adjuncts (sometimes including dependent verbs) may 
be preceded by the article τό, the whole sentence stand- 
ing as a single noun, either as the subject or object of a 














§ 97.] INFINITIVE EXPRESSING A PURPOSE. 203 


verb, as the object of a preposition, or in apposition 
with a pronoun like τοῦτο. KE. g. 


Τὸ μὲν yap πολλὰ ἀπολωλεκέναι κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον τῆς ἡμετέρας 
ἀμελείας ἄν τις θείη δικαίως " τὸ δὲ μήτε πάλαι τοῦτο πεπονθέναι 
πεφηνέναι τέ τινα ἡμῖν συμμαχίαν τούτων ἀντίρροπον, ἂν βουλώμεθα 
eer τῆς map’ ἐκείνων εὐνοίας εὐεργέτημ᾽ ἂν ἔγωγε θείην. Dem. OL 

12, 3. 


597. The Infinitive without the article often ex- 
presses a purpose. KH. δ. 

Τρώων ἄνδρα ἕκαστον (εἰ) ἕλοίμεθα οἰνοχοεύειν, if we should 
choose every man of the Trojans to be our cup-bearer. Il. II, 127. So 
Il. I, 338, δὸς ἄγειν, and 11, 107, 108. Τὴν ἐξ Δρείου πάγου βουλὴν 
ἐπέστησαν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῆς εὐκοσμίας, i. 6. for the purpose of 
guarding good order. Isoc. Areop. p. 147 B. § 37. Οἱ ἄρχοντες, ous 
ὑμεῖς εἵλεσθε ἄρχειν μου; the rulers, whom you chose to rule me. 
Puat. Apol. 28 E. Aexa δὲ τῶν νεῶν προὔπεμψαν ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα 
πλεῦσαί τε καὶ κατασκέψασθαι, καὶ κηρῦξαι, κ'τ.λ.» i. 6. they sent 
them to sail and examine, and to proclaim, &c. Tuuc. VI, 50. Tovs 
ἱππέας παρείχοντο Πελοποννησίοις ξυστρατεύειν. Id. Il, 12. 
Ξυνέβησαν τοῖς Πλαταιεῦσι παραδοῦναι σφᾶς αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ ὅπλα, 
χρήσασθαι ὅ τι ἂν βούλωνται, i. 6. to do with them whatever they 
pleased. Id. II, 4. (For παραδοῦναι see § 92, 1, N. 1.) Ei BovaAoi- 
μεθά τῳ ἐπιτρέψαι ἢ παῖδας παιδεῦσαι, } χρήματα διασῶσαι, 
K.T-A., Uf we should wish to intrust to any one either children to instruct 
or money to keep, ἕο. XEN. Mem. I, 5,2. At γυναῖκες πιεῖν φέρου- 
σαι, the women bringing them (something) to drink. Xen. Hell. VII, 
2,9. Τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὴν ἄκραν φυλάττειν αὐτοῖς παρέδωκαν, they 
delivered the city and the citadel to them to guard. Ib. IV, 4, 15. Ὃς 
yap ἂν ὑμᾶς λάθῃ, τοῦτον ἀφίετε τοῖς θεοῖς κολάζειν. Dem. F. L. 
363, 25. 

Ἡ θύρα ἡ ἐμὴ ἀνέῳφκτο εἰσιέναι τῷ δεομένῳ τι ἐμοῦ. XEN. Hell. 
V,1, 14. Οὐκ εἶχον ἀργύριον ἐπισιτίζεσθαι, they had no money to 
buy provisions. Id. An. VII, 1, 7. ᾿Αριστάρχῳ ἔδοτε ἡμέραν ἀπολο- 
ynoadat, i. 6. a day to defend himself in. 1d. Hell. I, 7, 28. Ἔμαυ- 
τόν σοι ἐμμελετᾶν παρέχειν οὐ πάνυ δέδοκται. PLat. Phaedr. 228 E. 
οἷς ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι τε ὁ Bios ὁμοίως καὶ ἐντελευτῆσαι ξυνεμε- 
τρήθη. THuc. Il, 44. 

Here, as in § 93, 2, the Infinitive is generally active or middle, 
even where the passive would seem more natural; as κτανεῖν ἐμοί 
νιν ἔδοσαν, they gave her to me to be killed. Eur. Troad. 874. 


Nore 1. The Infinitive is thus used in prose chiefly after verbs 
signifying fo choose or appoint, to give or take (the Infinitive denot 
ing the purpose for which anything is given or taken), and also 
after those signifying fo send or bring. (See the examples.) With 
she last class the Future Participle is more common. A final clause 
after iva, &c. may also be used in the same sense. 


Sa fo AAT a SAGAR ANA Π  6 











204 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 97. 


In poetry the same construction sometimes occurs after verbs of 
motion, like εἶμι. ἥκω, and Baivo; and also after εἰμί, €metpe, 
and πάρειμι (lo be, to be at hand), expressed or understood. E. ¢g 


᾿Αλλά Tis εἴη εἰπεῖν ᾿Ατρείδῃ ᾿Αγαμέμνονι, ποιμένι λαῶν, but let 
some one go to tell Agamemnon. Od. XIV, 496. (See Passow, s. v. 
εἶμι.) By δὲ θέειν, and he started to run. Il. II, 182. Οὐδέ res 
ἔστιν ἀρὴν καὶ λοιγὸν ἀμῦναι, nor ts there any one to keep off curse 
and ruin. Il. XXIV, 489. Πολλοὶ δ᾽ ad σοὶ ᾿Αχαιοὶ ἐναιρέμεν ov 
xe δύνηαι, i. 6. for you to slay whomsoever you can. 1]. VI, 229. Ov 
yap ἔπ᾽ ἀνὴρ οἷος ᾽Οδυσσεὺς ἔσκεν, ἀρὴν ἀπὸ οἴκου ἀμῦναι. Od. IT, 
59. Μανθάνειν yap ἥκομεν, for we are come to learn. Sopu. O. 
C. 12. Πλόκαμος ὅδε καταστέφειν, here ts my hair for you to 
wreathe. Eur. Iph. Aul. 1478. 

Even in prose, the Infinitive occasionally occurs after εἰμί in this 
sense, as in PLAT. Phaedr. 229 A, ἐκεῖ πόα καθίζεσθαι (sc. ἔστιν), 
there is grass to sit upon. See also XEN. An. II, 1,6, πολλαὶ δὲ καὶ 
πέλται καὶ ἅμαξαι ἦσαν φέρεσθαι ἔρημοι, 1. 6. they were left to be 
carried away (for fuel). See the last examples under § 97. 


Note 2. As ὥστε is seldom used in Homer in its sense of 
so as (§ 98, N. 3), the simple Infinitive may there express a 
result as well as a purpose. It thus follows many expressions 
which would not allow it in Attic Greek. E. g. 


Τίς τ᾽ ἄρ σφωε θεῶν ἔριδι ξυνέηκε μάχεσθαι; i. 6. who brought 
them into conflict, so as to contend? 1]. 1,8. So I, 151; and ἐριζέμε- 
vat, Il, 214. "AAN’ ὅτε δὴ κοίλη νηῦς ἤχθετο τοῖσι νέεσθαι, when 
now their ship was loaded, so as (to be ready) to start. Od. XV, 
457. XépuBa δ᾽ ἀμφίπολος προχόῳ ἐπέχευε φέρουσα, . . . . νίψα- 


σθαι, ὶ. 6. for washing. Od. I, 138. 


Note 3. In Homer and Herodotus we often find εἶναι intro- 
duced to denote a purpose, where in Attic Greek a simple noun, as 
a predicate accusative or nominative, connected directly with the 
leading verb, would be sufficient. Εἰ. g. 


Θώρηκα, τόν ποτέ of Κινύρης δῶκε ξεινήιον ε ivat, i. 6. which they 
gave him as a present (lit. to be a present). Il. XI, 20. Λίθον εἵλετο 
χειρὶ παχείῃ. τόν p ἄνδρες πρότεροι θέσαν ἔμμεναι οὖρον ἀρούρης, 
which they had placed (to be) as a boundary. Il. XXI, 405. Δαρεῖος 
καταστήσας ᾿Αρταφέρνεα ὕπαρχον εἶναι Σαρδίων. ἩΡΈΟΎ, 535. 

80 in the passive construction :---͵ έλων ἀπεδέχθη πάσης τῆς ἵππου 
εἶναι ἵππαρχος. Ηνρτ. VII, 154. 

Even in Attic prose this use of εἶναι sometimes occurs ; as in Dem. 
Aph. III, 852, 12, Μνημονεύουσιν ἀφεθέντα τοῦτον ἐλεύθερον εἶναι 
τότε, they remember his having been then manumitted so as to be a free- 
man. So ἀφίησιν αὐτὰ δημόσια εἶναι, Tuue. 11, 13. 


Nore 4. The use of the Infinitive after the comparative an1 7, 


than, is to be referred to this principle. E. g. 


§ 98, 2. ] INFINITIVE AFTER “Qorte. 205 


Ἢ ἀνθρωπίνη φύσις ἀσθενεστέρα ἢ AaB civ τέχνην ὧν ἂν ἦ ἄπειρος, 
human nature is too weak to acquire the art of those things of which τί 
has no experience. PLAT. Theaet. 149 C. Td γὰρ νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ 
φέρειν, i. 6. too great to bear. Sopu. O. T. 1299. 

“Ogre is sometimes expressed before this Infinitive ; as in XEN. 
Hell. IV, 8, 283, Ἤισθοντο αὐτὸν ἐλάττω ἔχοντα δύναμιν ἣ ὥστε τοὺς 
φίλους ὠφελεῖν. 

So, rarely, ὡς in the sens2 of ὥστε (ὃ 98, Note 1); as in Cyr. VI, 
4, 17, Tas ἀσπίδας μείζους ἔχουσιν ἣ ὡς ποιεῖν τι καὶ ὁρᾶν. 


895. 1. The Infinitive is used after ὥστε, so that, 
so as, to express a result. KH. g. 

"Hy πεπαιδευμένος οὕτως ὥστε πάνυ μικρὰ κεκτημένος πάνυ ῥᾳδίως 
ἔχειν ἀρκοῦντα, he had been educated so as very easily to have enough, 
although he possessed very little. Xen. Mem. I, 2, 1. Φῦναι δὲ ὁ 
Κῦρος λέγεται φιλοτιμότατος. ὥστε πάντα μὲν πόνον ἀνατλῆναι; 
πάντα δὲ κίνδυνον ὑπομεῖναι. Id. Ογτ.1, 2,1. ᾿Απέχρη γὰρ ἂν τοῖς 
γνωσθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν, ὥστε μηδεμίαν ἡμῖν εἶναι πρὸς τοῦτον διαφοράν, 
so that we should have no difference with him. Drm. Aph. I, 813, 4. 
Πολλὰς ἐλπίδας ἔχω ἀρκούντως ἐρεῖν, Gore ὑμᾶς μήτ᾽ ἀπολειφθῆ- 
ναι τῶν πραγμάτων μήτ᾽ ἀγνοῆσαι, x-T.A. Ib. 813, 20. Τοιοῦτον 
ἔθος ἡμῖν παρέδοσαν, ate... avven θεῖν ἐς ταὐτόν. ἴϑοσ. Pan. p. 
49 Β. § 43. See Pan. ὃ 45, τοσοῦτόν ἐστιν, ὥστε Kal τοῦτο περιει- 
λῆφθαι. πΠείσομαι γὰρ οὐ τοσοῦτον οὐδὲν ὥστε μὴ οὐ καλῶς 
θανεῖν. Sopu. Ant. 97. Σὺ δὲ σχολάζεις, ὥστε θαυμάζειν ἐμέ. 
Eur. Hee. 730. Μηδ᾽ ἡ βία σε μηδαμῶς νικησάτω τοσόνδε μισεῖν 
ὥστε τὴν δίκην πατεῖν. SOPH. Aj. 1335. Λόγων καὶ βουλευμάτων 
κοινωνὸν ἄν σε ποιοῖντο, ὥστε μηδὲ ἕν σε λεληθέναι ὧν βουλόμεθα 
εἰδέναι, so that not a single one of the things we wish to know should 
have escaped you. XEN. Cyr. VI, 1, 40. (See 8 18, 3,6.) Avo- 
κολία καὶ μανία πολλάκις εἰς τὴν διάνοιαν ἐμπίπτυυσιν οὕτως ὥστε καὶ 

, > ΄ 
τὰς ἐπιστήμας ἐκβάλλειν. 14. Mem. III, 12,6. ᾿Αποληφθέντος, 
ὥστε μὴ ἂν δύνασθαι ἐπανελθεῖν οἴκαδε. Dem. Chers. 98, 25. 
(For δύνασθαι ἄν see Ν. 4.) 
See § 93, 1, Note 1, last example. 


Remark. When the result is to be stated as an inde- 
pendent fact, rather than merely as a result, the Indicative 
‘s used after ὥστε. See § 60, 3. 


re / . 
2. The Infinitive after ὥστε sometimes denotes ἃ con- 
. . ous 2% so © 
dition, being equivalent to the Infinitive after ep ᾧ or 
> ,? Φ . - 5 
ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε; and sometimes it denotes a purpose, like a 
final cause. KE. g. 


~ ¢ , , > ’ > ΄“ 
Ποιοῦνται ὁμολογίαν πρὸς Πάχητα, ὥστε Αθηναίοις ἐξεῖναι βου- 























206 THE INFINITIVE. [8 98, 2. 


λεῦσαι περι τῶν Μυτιληναίων, they make a treaty with Paches, to the 
effect that the Athenians shall be permitted, &c. Tuuc. II, 28. (See 
Tauc. ΠῚ, 114, ξυμμαχίαν ἐποιήσαντο ἐπὶ τοῖσδε, ὥστε... . μὴ 
στρατεύειν.) ᾿ἊἘξὸν αὐτοῖς τῶν λοιπῶν ἄρχειν Ἑλλήνων, dor 
αὐτοὺς ὑπακούειν βασιλεῖ, tt being in their power to rule the rest of 
the Greeks, on condition that they should themselves serve the King. 
Dem. Phil. II, 68,12. Πᾶν ποιοῦσιν, ὥστε δίκην py διδόναι, they 
do everything, so that they may not suffer punishment. PLat. Gorg. 
479 C. (Here iva μή with the Subjunctive might have been used.) 
᾿Εβουλήθησαν ᾿Ἐλευσῖνα ἐξιδιώσασθαι, ὥστε εἶναι σφίσι καταφυγὴν, 
εἰ δεήσειε. XEN. Hell. Il, 4,8. Μηχαναὶ πολλαί εἰσιν, ὥστε δια- 
φεύγειν θάνατον, there are many devices for escaping death. Puar. 


Apol. 39 A. (See ὃ 92, 1, N. 2.) 


Norte 1. ‘Qs is sometimes used with the Infinitive instead 
of ὥστε; generally, however, to express a result, seldom to 


express a purpose. E. g. 


‘Yynrdv δὲ οὕτω δή τι λέγεται, ὡς Tas κορυφὰς αὐτοῦ οὐχ οἷά τε 
εἶναι ἰδέσθαι, and it (the mountain) is said to be so high, that it is not 
possible to see its summits. Hpt. IV, 184. Navyaynoavres ἀντίπαλα 
μὲν καὶ ὡς αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους ἀξιοῦν νικᾶν, and so that each thought 
themselves the victors. Tuuc. VII, 34. Βιασόμεθα, ὦ ς πλεονεκτοῦντες 
δίκην μὴ διδόναι. Prat. Rep. I, 365 D. ‘O ποταμὸς τοσοῦτος τὸ 
βάθος, ὡς μηδὲ τὰ δόρατα ὑπερέχειν τοῦ βάθους. XEN. An. III, 5, 
7. So 11, 3,10. Φέρονται κώθωνα, &s ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀρύσασθαι. 
Id. Cyr. I, 2,8. Ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ ἤδη ἔσονται, ws μηδὲν ἂν ἔτι κακὸν 
παθεῖν. Ib. VIII, 7,27. (For παθεῖν ἄν see N. 4.) 


Note 2. The Infinitive with ὥστε or ὡς is sometimes used where 
we should expect a simple Infinitive, either after the adjectives and 
adverbs included in § 93, or after the verbs and expressions which 
take the Infinitive of the object (§ 92, 1, and N. 2); and rarely 
after those which regularly take an Infinitive as the subject (§ 91). 
E. g. 

Πότερα παῖδές εἰσι φρονιμώτεροι Gore μαθεῖν ra φραζόμενα ἣ 
ἄνδρες ; 1. e. are they wiser than men in learning, &c.? XeEN. Cyr. 
IV, 3,11. ᾿᾽Ολίγοι ἐσμὲν ὡς ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι αὐτῶν. Ib. IV, 5, 15. 
(Cf. ὀλίγαι ἀμύνειν, too few to make a defence. Tuuc. I, 50.) 
Ψυχρόν (ἐστι τὸ ὕδωρ) Sore λούσασθαι, the water is cold for 
bathing. XEN. Mem. III, 13, 3. (Cf λούσασθαι ψυχρότερον, 
and θερμότερον πιεῖν, in the same section.) Ψηφισάμενοι αὐτοὶ 
πρῶτοι ὥστε πάσῃ προθυμίᾳ ἀμύνειν, having voted to defend them, 
&c. Truc. VI, 88. Eis ἀνάγκην καθέσταμεν Gore κινδυνεύειν. 
Isoc. Archid. p. 126 C. § 51. (See ὃ 92, 1, N. 2.) So δύναμιν 
ὥστε ἐγγενέσθαι, PLAT. Rep. IV, 433 B. ᾿Ἐλθόντες πρὸς αὐτοὺς 
πείθουσιν ὥστε μετὰ σφῶν “Apye ἐπιχειρῆσαι. Tuvc. III, 102. 
(In the same chapter, πείθει ᾿Ακαρνᾶνας βοηθῆσαι Ναυπάκτῳ.) 

Πάνυ μοι ἐμέλησεν ὥστε εἰδέναι, tt concerned me very much to 





§100.] INFINITIVE AFTER Eq?’ ᾧ AND ‘Eq’ ᾧτε. 207 


CE ᾿ ᾿Αδύ ὑμῖν @ Πρωταγόρου 
know. Xen. Cyr. VI, 8, 19. ᾿Αδύνατον ὑμιν ὥστε tip 6 
τοῦδε σοφά ερόν τινα ἑλέσθαι. ῬιμΑΤ. Prot. 338 C. So XEN. 


Mem. I, 3, 6. 


Nore 3. In Homer ὥστε is generally used like ὥσπερ; im ὃν» 
sense of as. It occurs with the Infinitive, in the sense of so as, want | 
twice: Il. IX, 42; Od. XVII, 21. ‘Qs, so as, so that, is not res 
in Homer, who generally uses the simple Infinitive where later 
writers would insert ὥστε or as. (See § 97, N. 2.) 


Note 4. The Infinitive after ὥστε may take the adverb . to 
form an apodosis, whenever an Indicative or Optative, ῆνῳ δ 
the place of the Infinitive, would have required an ἄν. ἔρως, Da 
3, Note.) The Infinitive with ay here, as in indirect quota ΝΟ μ 
lows the general rule stated in ὃ 41. (See example in § 41, N. 4; 
and the last examples under § 98, 1 and § 98, 2, N. 1.) 


Nore 5. It will be seen that the Present and Aorist — 
tenses of the Infinitive regularly used after ὥστε. For the perfect 
see § 18, 3, and Note; and for the Future, § 27, N. 2 (6). 


. 5 oot MM has = 
$99. The Infinitive is used after ep @ and ep ᾧτε, 
on condition that, for the purpose of. H. δ. 


, > >. ? , > 4 4 @ 
Eixev ὅτι σπείσασθαι βούλοιτο, ἐφ ᾧ μήτε αὐτὸς τοὺς brag: 383 
> j , 
ἀδικεῖν μήτε ἐκείνους καίειν Tas οἰκίας, λαμβάνει ν τε τἀπιτήδεια 
> ~ * > , 4 , 
ὅσων δέοιντο. XEN. An. 1V,4,6. Tos ἂν οὗτος ἐθέλοι τὰ ἀλλότρια 
᾽ 
ἀποστερεῖν ep ᾧ κακόδοξος ειναιὶ Id. Ages. IV 9 Ι, ἀρ δ᾽ τοι ἐδ 
‘ae 4 i : φι 
ἐπὶ τούτῳ μέντοι, ἐφ ᾧτε μηκετι φιλοσοφεῖν. PLAT. f an 
C Αἱρεθέντες ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ξυγγράψαι νόμους, καθ᾽ οὕστινας πὸ “3 
Xen. Hell. II, 3,11. (For πολιτεύσοιντο, see § 65, 1, N. 
gowto AEN. » πολι Se τ 
1.) "Eq ᾧτε βοηθήσειν. AESCHIN. Cor. 8114. See § 24,2. : 
ra ig 4 " Ν > ᾽ > - 2 ; 
For the Future Indicative after ep ᾧ and ep ᾧτε, especially in 
ἱ ‘ “ oe, ΔΕ ἢ 
Herodotus and Thucydides, see ὃ 69, 2. 


§ 100. The Infinitive may stand absolutely in par- 


enthetical phrases, sometimes alone, but generally pre- 
ς τ + 

ceded by ws or ὅσον. KH. g. tae 

ὸ Ae 2eri κατάρρυτόν τε Kal νεωστὶ, ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; ἀνα- 
abe <<: siecle τ to speak. Hor. Ul, 15. (This ee 
ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν 18 eculiar to Herodotus.) Καὶ ὡς ἐμὲ bis fp i 
σθαι, τὰ ὁ ἑρμηνεὺς μοι ἐπιλεγόμενος τὰ γράμματα g οὐγενι: 8 
member, &c. Id. II, 125. Os μέν νυν ἐν ἀν ον δὴ ns “ Ὁ" 
εἴρηται". ««- ὡς δὲ ἐν πλέονι λόγῳ δηλῶσαι, ὧ δος " i 
Mera δὲ, ov πολλῷ λόγῳ εἰπεῖν, χρόνος διέφυ. Id. 1. ‘os = 
ἔργου, ws ἔπος εἰπεῖν, ἢ οὐδενὸς προσδέονται ἢ κατ με — ἘΠ 
Gore. 450 D. ‘Qs δὲ συντόμως εἰπεῖν, lo spear concisely. XEN. 


il ‘ , J ~ > 0. 
Oec. XII, 19. ‘Qs δὲ ouvedovte εἰπειν.- Id. Mem. Ill, 8, 











y 
fi 
i 


— 





208 THE INFINITIVE. § 100. 


Χῶρος δ᾽ ὅδ᾽ ipis, ὡς ἀπεικάσαι. Sopu. O. C.16. Kai τὸ ξύμπαν 
εἰπεῖν. Tuuc. 1,138. (So VI, 82, ἐς τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν.) ‘Qs 
μικρὸν μεγάλῳ εἰκάσαι. Id. IV, 36. “Qs γ᾽ ἐμοὶ χρῆσθαι κριτῇ. 
Eur. Ale. 801. ‘Qs πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἰρῆσθαι, 1. 6. between us. PLAT. 
Rep. X, 595 B. Οὐδ᾽ ἐγὼ ψέγω τούτους, ὥς ye διακόνους εἶναι 
πόλεως. PLAT. Gorg. 517 B. Ὅσον γέ με εἰδέναι; at least as far as 
I know. Id. Theaet. 145 A. 

So ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν or ἐμοὶ δοκεῖν, like ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, as tt seems 
to me; ὀλίγου δεῖν; to want little, i. 6. almost. (See N. 1.) 


Remark. The force of ὡς in this construction can hardly be ex- 
pressed in English, although it resembles that of ὡς used for ὥστε 
in ὃ 98, 2, Note 1. That it is not a demonstrative, as might be sup- 
posed from the translation of ὡς εἱπεῖν, so to speak, is plain from such 
expressions as ὡς συντόμως εἰπεῖν, to speak concisely. 


Note 1. In the phrase ὀλίγου δεῖν (lit. to want little), little 
short of, almost, δεῖν is often omitted, so that the genitive 


ὀλίγου stands alone in the sense of almost. LE. g. 


Ὀλίγου φροῦδος γεγένημαι, I am almost gone. Artist. Nub. 722. 
The full form is found at the beginning of Dem. Phil. ΠῚ, -- Πολ- 
λῶν λόγων γιγνομένων ὀλίγου δεῖν καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἐκκλησίαν, 1. 6. in 
almost every meeting. 


Nore 2. In the phrase ἑκὼν εἶναι (sometimes τὸ ἑκὼν 
εἶναι), willing or willingly, εἶναι appears to be superfluous: the 
phrase is used chiefly in negative sentences. Elva: appears 
superfluous also in such expressions as τὸ νῦν εἶναι, at present, rd 

, > ‘ Be > , > 
τήμερον ELvat, to-day, and ro ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἰναι, AS far as depends 


on them. E. g. 


‘Exov yap εἶναι οὐδὲν ψεύσομαι, willingly I will tell no falsehood. 
Puat. Symp. 215 A. Οὐκ ᾧμην ye κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς ὑπὸ σοῦ ἑκόντος εἶναι 
ἐξαπατηθήσεσθαι. Id. Gorg. 499 C. ( Ανάγκη ἔχειν) τὴν ἀψεύδειαν 
καὶ τὸ ἑκόντας εἶναι μηδαμῇ προσδέχεσθαι τὸ ψεῦδος. Id. Rep. VI, 
485 C. ᾿Απύχρη μοι τὸ νῦν εἶναι ταῦτ᾽ εἰρηκέναι. Isoc. Antid. p. 
119, ὃ 270. Τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι ἀπωλώλειτε. XEN. Hell. III, 5, 9. 
Τὸ μὲν τήμερον εἶναι χρήσασθαι αὐτῇ, to use it to-day. PLAT. Crat. 
396 Ε. Kara τοῦτο εἶναι, in this respect. Id. Prot. 317 A. 

Similar is the expression τὴν πρώτην εἶναι (for τὴν πρώτην), at 


first, in Hor. I, 153. So ὡς πάλαια εἶναι, considering their an- 


tiguity. Tuc. I, 21. 


§ 101. The Infinitive is sometimes used in the 
sense of the Imperative, especially in Homer. HE. g. 


~ - ΄ J - 
Τῷ νῦν μή ποτε καὶ σὺ γυναικί περ ἤπιος εἶναι" μή οἱ μῦθον ἅπαντα 

, ~ > ? - > ‘ 4 , ‘ 
πιφαυσκέμεν, ὃν κ᾽ ev εἰδῆς, ἀλλὰ τὸ μὲν φάσθαι, τὸ δὲ καὶ κε- 

















8 104.] INFINITIVE USED IMPERATIVELY, ETC. 209 


κρυμμένον εἶναι; now therefore be thou never indulgent to thy wife, &e. 
Od. ΧΙ. 441. So Il. I, 20, 582; II, 10: Hor. I, 32 (ἐπισχέειν μηδὲ 
καλέειν): AESCH. Prom. 712. Σὺ δὲ τὰς πύλας ἀνοίξας ὑπεκθεῖν 
καὶ ἐπείγεσθαι, and do you, having opened the gates, rush out and 
press on, ‘THUC. ¥. %& 


Remark. It will be noticed that, when the Infinitive stands 
for the Imperative, its subject is in the nominative, but in the 
four constructions that follow (88. 102-105) its subject is in the 
accusative. 


§ 102. The Infinitive is sometimes used for the 
Optative in the expression of a wish referring to the 
future. This occurs chiefly in poetry. E. g. 

Ζεῦ πάτερ, ἣ Αἴαντα λαχεῖν ἢ Τυδέος υἱόν, Father Zeus, may the 
lot fall on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus. Il. V ἘΣ, 179; Eppa ᾽μπο- 
aie, τὰν γυναῖκα τὰν ἐμὰν οὕτω μ᾽ ἀποδόσθαι τάν τ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ ματερα; 
O that I could sell my wife and my mother at this rate! ARIST. 


Acharn. 816. Θεοὶ πολῖται, py pe δουλείας τυχεῖν. AESCH. Sept. 
253. 


8 103. In laws, treaties, proclamations, and formal 
commands, the Infinitive is often used in the leading 
. . ¥ ΄ 
sentences, depending on some word like ἔδοξε or δὲ- 
[] , . . 
δοκται, be it enacted, or κέλεύεται, it is commanded ; 
which may be either understood, or expressed in a pre- 
ceding sentence. KH. g. 

Tapias δὲ τῶν ἱερῶν χρημάτων αἱρεῖσθαι μὲν ἐκ τῶν μεγίστων 
τιμημάτων" τὴν δὲ αἵρεσιν τούτων καὶ τὴν δοκιμασίαν γίγνεσθαι 
καθάπερ ἡ τῶν στρατηγῶν ἐγίγνετο, and (be it enacted) that treasurers 
of the sacred funds be chosen, ὅθ. PLAr. Leg. 759 E. So in most 
of the laws (genuine or spurious) standing as quotations in the text 
of the Orators, as in Dem. Aristocr. 627, 21: Δικάζειν δὲ τὴν ἐν 
᾿Αρείῳ πάγῳ φόνου καὶ τραύματος ἐκ προνοίας, K.T- λ. Ἔτη δὲ εἶναι 
τὰς σπονδὰς πεντήκοντα, and that the treaty shall continue fifty years. 
Tuuc. V, 18. ᾿Ακούετε λεῴ᾽ τοὺς ὁπλίτας νυνμενὶ ἀνελομένους Bama 
ἀπιέναι πάλιν οἴκαδε. ARIST. Av. 448. 


5 04. The Infinitive, with or without τό, is used 
in expressions of surprise or indignation. H. g. 


Τὸ δὲ μηδὲ κυνῆν οἴκοθεν ἐλθεῖν ἐμὲ τὸν κακοδαίμον᾽ ἔχοντα; but to 
think that I, wretched fellow, should have come from home without even 
my cap! Anist. Νὰ. 268. Τοῦτον δὲ ὑβρίζειν; ἀναπνεῖν δέ; 

Ν 

















210 THE INFINITIVE. [8 104. 


ὃν εἴ τις ἐᾷ ζῆν, ἀγαπᾶν ἔδει. Dem. Mid, 582, 2. Τῆς μωρίας" τὸ 
Δία νομίζειν, ὄντα τηλικουτονί, what Jolly! to believe in Zeus, now 
you are so big! Arist. Nub. 819. 


Compare Vera. Aen. I, 37: Mene incepto desistere victam. 


$105. In narration the Infinitive often appears to 
stand for the Indicative. It depends, however, on some 
word like λέγεται, it is said, expressed (or at least im- 
plied) in something that precedes. E. g. 


᾿Απικομένους δὲ τοὺς Φοίνικας ἐς δὴ τὸ ἼΑργος τοῦτο, διατίθεσθαι 
τὸν φόρτον, and (they say) that the Phoenicians, when now they were 
come to this Argos, were setting out their cargo for sale. Hor. I, 1. 
(Here διατίθεσθαι is an Imperfect Infinitive, § 15, 3.) “°Ad’, ὦ 
παῖ," φάναι τὸν ᾿Αστυάγην, “ οὐκ ἀχθόμενοι ταῦτα περιπλανώμεθα." 
60. “᾿Αλλὰ καὶ σέ," φάναι τὸν Κῦρον, “dpa,” κι. τ.λ..- .. Καὶ τὸν 
᾿Αστυάγην ἐσερέσθαι, “ καὶ τίνι δὴ σὺ τεκμαιρόμενος λέγεις ; 
“Ὅτι σε," φάναι, “dpa,” «.r-A.... Πρὸς ταῦτα δὲ τὸν ᾿Αστυάγην 
εἰπεῖν, κιτιλ.... Καὶ τὸν Κῦρον εἰπεῖν, κιτιλ. XEN. Cyr. I, 8, 5 
and 6. (Here all these Infinitives, and twelve others which follow, 
depend on λέγεται in ὃ 4.) Καὶ τὸν κελεῦσαι δοῦναι, and he com- 
manded him to give it. Id. I, 3,9. So in Hor. I, 24 the story of 
Arion and the dolphin is told in this construction, the Infinitives 
all depending on a single λέγουσι at the beginning. See § 101, 
Remark. 


$106. Πρίν, before, before that, until, besides tak- 
ing the Indicative, Subjunctive, and Optative, like ἕως 
(ὃ 66), is also followed by the Infinitive. 


For the use of the finite moods after mpiv, see § 67. 


1. In Homer the Infinitive follows πρίν after both 
affirmative and negative sentences. E. g. 


Naie δὲ Πήδαιον πρὶν ἐλθεῖν vias ᾿Αχαιῶν. Tl. XII, 172. Ἔφθη 
ὀρεξάμενος πρὶν οὐτάσαι, οὐδ᾽ ἀφάμαρτεν. Il. XVI, 322. Σφῶιν 
δὲ πρίν περ τρόμος ἔλλαβε φαίδιμα γυῖα, πρὶν πόλεμόν τ᾽ ἰδέειν 
πολέμοιό τε μέρμερα ἔργα, before they saw the war, &c. Il. VIII, 452. 
(See Note 4.) Φεύγει πρίν περ ὅμιλον ἀολλισθήμεναι ἀνδρῶν. 
Il. XV, 588. Ἦ κ᾽ ἔτι πολλοὶ γαῖαν ὀδὰξ εἷλον πρὶν Ἴλιον εἰσαφι- 
κέσθαι. Il. XXII,17. ᾿Αλλά οἱ αὐτῷ Ζεὺς ὀλέσειε βίην πρὶν ἡμῖν πῆμα 
φυτεῦσαι. Od. IV, 668. Αἴθ᾽ ὥφελλ᾽ ... ἄλλοθ᾽ ὀλέσθαι πρὶν ἐλθεῖν. 
Od. XVIII, 402. Οὐ λήξω τὶν Τρῶας ἄδην ἐλάσαι πολέμοιο. 1]. 
XIX, 428. Οὐδέ τι θυμῷ τέρπετο πρὶν πολέμου στόμα δύμεναι 
αἱματόεντος. Il. XIX, 313. Οὐδ᾽ ἀπολήγει πρὶν χροὸς ἀνδρεμέοιο 
διελθεῖν. I, XX, 100. Οὔ μ᾽ ἀποτρέψεις πρὶν χαλκῷ μαχέσα- 








§ 106, 2.] INFINITIVE AFTER Πρίν. 211 


@ >. ~ ’ 4 id 
σθαι. Il. XX, 257. Μηδ᾽ ἀντίος ἵστασ᾽ ἐμεῖο πρίν τι κακὸν παθέειν. 


Il. XX, 198. 
See § 67, Note 1. 


2. Writers later than Homer use the Infinitive after 
πρίν chiefly when the leading sentence is affirmative. 
K. g. 


ε , > 

Πρὶν ὦν παρεῖναι ἐκεῖνον ἐς THY ᾿Αττικὴν, ὑμέις reagg ὑσν ΘΝ 
βωθῆσαι ἐς τὴν Βοιωτίαν, before he comes into Aitica, ce. Hot. V Us, 
143. Οἷον εὗρεν τεσσαράκοντα καὶ ὀκτὼ παρθένοισι, πρὶν praetor: 
ἑλεῖν, ὠκύτατον γάμον. PIND. Pyth. IX, 196. μα = pee 
ἱστορεῖν, ex τῆσδ᾽ ἕδρας ἔξελθε, before mare ἀν... ms — - 
C. 36. ᾿Αποπέμπουσιν οὖν αὐτὸν πρὶν ἀκοῦσαι. — Die Ae 
II, 13, πρὶν ἐσβαλεῖν eis τὴν Αττικήν. Αφίεσαν τὰ Be? n — ἣν 
ἐξικνεῖσθαι. Xen. Cyr. Ill, 3, 60. Πρὶν μὲν — at ‘ 
ἄκρα οὐδὲν ἐδεῖσθε εἰρήνης. 10. Hil, 2, 12. Ἡμεῖς rowvuy | age 
εἵλομεν πρὶν Πέρσας λαβειν , τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ εἰ προ a 
ἠπείρου, καὶ πρὶν οἰκισθῆναϊ τινας τῶν πόλεων τῶν I ” — 
Isoc. Archid. p. 121 A.§ 26. Kat πρὶν ἐξ μῆνας γεγονέναι; 
δωκε. PLat. Prot. 320 A. ᾿Απωλόμεσθ ἄρ᾽, εἰ κακὸν mcrae ττν 
νέον παλαιῷ, πρὶν τόδ᾽ ἐξηντληκέναι;, we are ruined then, if ~ " : 
add a new calamity to the former one, before we shall have exhauste 
that. Eur. Med. 79. (See § 18, 3.) 


Nore 1. The Infinitive after πρίν was probably not accompa 
nied by ἄν. (See Kriiger’s note on Hor. I, 140.) 

Note 2. Πρίν with the Infinitive after negative sentences 18 ka 
in the Attic poets, but more frequent in the Attic prose. (See 
§ 67, Note 2.) E.g. 

Οὐκ ἂν μεθεῖτο, πρὶν καθ᾽ ἡδονὴν κλύειν. Sopa. a eee των 
ἰδεῖν δ᾽, οὐδεὶς μάντις τῶν μελλόντων, ὅ τι πράξει. Id. J- a . So 
Axscu. Sept. 1048, Agam. 1067; ARIST. Av. 964. Καὶ δι αὐτὸ ῳ 
πρὶν πάσχειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπειδὴ ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ ἐσμὲν, τοὺς ξυμμάχους τούσδε 
παρεκαλέσατε. THuc. |, 68. So I, 39 Re 10; Vu, 50. Οὐδὲ γὰρ 
τούτων πρὶν μαθεῖν οὐδεὶς ἠπίστατο. XEN. Cyr. IV, 3, 10. κ᾿ σας 
γυνὴ, πρὶν μὲν ὡς “AdoBov ἐλθεῖν, μίαν ἡμέραν οὐκ ἐχήρευσεν. AEM. 
Onet. I, 873, 10. ΞΕ ᾿ 

if A (pri ) anc 

Note 3. Πρὶν ἤ, πρότερον ἤ (priusquam), πρόσθεν jj, 
even ὕστερον ἤ, like πρίν, may be followed by the Infinitive. (See 
§ 67, Note 3.) E.g. : : 

Oi δὲ Αἰγύπτιοι, πρὶν μὲν Fj Ψαμμίτιχον σφέων bee 
ἐνόμιζον ἑωυτοὺς πρώτους γενέσθαι πάντων ἀνθρώπων. Hor. 11, 2. 
"Emi τοὺς πομπέας πρότερον ἢ αἰσθέσθαι αὑτοὺς εὐθὺς — 
before they perceived them. Tuuc. VI, 58. : So I, 69. Πρὶν δὲ ava- 
στῆναι, ἔτεσιν ὕστερον ἑκατὸν ἢ αὐτοὺς οἰκῆσαι; Πάμμιλον age ol 
res ἐς Σελινοῦντα, i. 6. a hundred years after their own settlement, 


VI, 4. 











212 THE INFINITIVE. [§ 106, 2. 


In Hpr. VI, 108 we find the Infinitive depending on φθάνω 7, the 
verb implying πρότερον or πρίν : — θαίητε ἂν ἐξανδραποδισθέντες ἢ 
τινα πυθέσθαι ἡμέων, you would be reduced to slavery before any of us 
would hear of it. 


Nore 4. Πρίν or πρὶν ἤ is very often preceded by πρότερον; 
πρόσθεν, πάρος, ΟΥ̓ another πρίν (used as an adverb), qualify- 
ing the leading verb. (See § 67, Note 4.) E. g. 

᾿Αποθνήσκουσι πρότερον πρὶν δῆλοι γίγνεσθαι οἷοι ἦσαν. XEN. 
Cyr. V, 2,9. Kai ὥμοσαν μὴ πρὶν ἐς Φώκαιαν ἥξειν πρὶν ἢ τὸν μύ- 
Spov τοῦτον ἀναπεφηνέναι. Hpr. I, 165. Πάρος δ᾽ οὐκ ἔσσεται ἄλλως, 
πρίν ye... νὼ πειρηθῆναι. Il. V, 220. Μὴ πρὶν ταράξῃς, πρὶν τόδ᾽ 
εὖ θέσθαι, τέκνον. Eur. Herc. F. 605. 


Nore 5. Πάρος, in the sense of πρίν, is used in Homer with 


the Infinitive, but never with the other moods. Εἰ g. 


Véxva ἀγρόται ἐξείλοντο πάρος πετεηνὰ γενέσθαι. Od. XVI, 
, - - ie , ; 
918. Οὐδέ οἱ ὕπνος πῖπτεν ἐπὶ βλεφάροισι παρος καταλέξαι ἅπαν- 


ra. Od. XXIII, 309. 





Remark. The rules for the tenses of the Infinitive are 
given in Chapter Second. It will be seen from a comparison 
of these, that the Present and Aorist are the only tenses ordi- 
narily used in constructions in which the Infinitive in ttself 
has no reference to time, that is, in all except indirect dis- 
course. In indirect discourse each tense has its own force, as 
in the Indicative; but in other constructions the Perfect is 
used only in the cases mentioned in 8 18, 3, ὁ, and Note; and 
the Future only in the few cases mentioned in ὃ 27, Note 2,4 


and b. (See § 27, Note 1.) 














THE PARTICIPLE. 


CHAPTER VI. 


THE PARTICIPLE. 


ς 107. The Participle has three distinct uses :— 
first, it may express a simple attribute, like an ordinary 
adjective (8 108); secondly, it may define the czrcum- 
stances under which the action of the sentence takes 
place (88 109-111) ; thirdly, it may form part of the 
predicate with certain verbs, often having a force re- 
sembling that of the Infinitive ($3 112, 113). 


Remark. As the Infinitive may be considered as a verbal noun, 
so the Participle is always a verbal adjective; both alike retaining 
all the attributes of a verb which are consistent with their nature. 
See § 90. 


5 105. 1. The Participle, like any other adjective, 
may qualify a noun. 

In such expressions it must often be translated by a 
finite verb and a relative, especially when the Participle 
is preceded by the article. K. g. 

Πόλις κάλλει διαφέρουσα; a city excelling in beauty. ᾿Ανὴρ κα- 
λῶς πεπαιδευμένος; a man who has been well educated. Oi mpe- 
σβεις οἱ mapa Φιλίππου meph θέντες, the ambassadors who had been 
sent from Philip. “Avdpes ot τοῦτο ποιήσοντες, men who will do this. 

Ἐν τῇ Μεσσηνίᾳ ποτὲ οὔσῃ γῇ» in the lund which was once Mes- 
senia. See § 16, 2. Στρατεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὰς Αἰόλου νήσους καλουμένας 
they sail against the so-called Aeolian islands, lit. the islands called 
those of Aeolus. Tuvc. III, 88. Ai ἄρισται δοκοῦσαι εἶναι φύσεις, 
the natures which seem to be best. Xen. Mem. IV, 1, 3. Αἱ πρὸ τοῦ 
στόματος νῆες ναυμαχοῦσαι. Tuuc. VU, 23. Τὸν κατειληφότα 
κίνδυνον τὴν πύλιν. Dem. Cor. 801, 28. 


2. The Participle preceded by the article may be 
used substantively, like any other adjective. It is then 
equivalent to ἐκεῖνος ὅς (he who) and a finite verb in 
the tense of the Participle. KE. g. 











214 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 108. 


Οἱ κρατοῦντες, the conquerors. 


Oi πεπεισμένοι, those who have been 
convinced. 


Οὗτός ἐστι ὁ τοῦτο ποιήσας, this is the one who did it. 
Οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ ὑμᾶς πάντας adixnoovres, these are the men who will 
wrong you all. 

Παρὰ τοῖς ἀρίστοις δοκοῦσιν εἶναι, amonq those who seem to be best. 
XEN. Mem. IV, 2,6. "Hv δὲ ὁ μὲν τὴν γνώμην ταύτην εἰπὼν Πείσαν- 
ὃρος, and Peisander was the one who gave this opinion. Tuuc. VIII, 
68. Τοῖς ᾿Αρκάδων σφετέροις οὖσι ξυμμάχοις προεῖπον, they pro- 
claimed to those of the Arcadians who were their allies. Id. V, 64. 
> , > ’ ? , ΄ - 
ἀφεκτέον ἐγώ φημι εἶναι (τούτων) τῷ σωφρονεῖν Suv 


A ἡσομένῳ, for 
one who is to be able to be discreet. Xen. Symp. IV, 26. 


Norte 1. When the Participle, in either of these construc- 


tions, refers to a purpose or intention, it is generally Future, 


rarely Present. E. g. 


Νόμον δημοσίᾳ τὸν ταῦτα κωλύσοντα τέθεινται τουτονί, they have 
publicly enacted this law, which is to prevent these things. Dem. Mid. 
530, 10. Τῶν ἐργασομένων ἐνόντων, there being men in the country 
to cultivate it. Xen. An. II, 4, 22. (See § 110, 1.) Ὁ ἡγησό- 
μενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται there will be nobody who will lead us. Ib. Il, 4, 5. 
Πολλοὺς ἕξομεν τοὺς ἑτοίμως συναγωνιζομένους ἡμῖν. Isoc. Pac. 
Ρ. 186 D. § 139. 


See the more common use of the Future Participle to express a 
purpose, § 109, 5. 


Nore 2. Participles, like adjectives, are occasionally used 
substantively even without the article, in an indefinite sense ; 
but generally only in the plural. E. g. 


Ἔπλει δώδεκα τριήρεις ἔχων ἐπὶ πολλὰς vais κεκτημένους, he 
sailed with twelve triremes against men who had many ships. XEN. 
Hell. V, 1,19. Ὅταν πολεμούντων πόλις ἁλῷ, whenever a city of 
belligerents is taken. Id. Cyr. VII, 5, 73. Mera ταῦτα ἀφικνοῦνταί 
po ἀπαγγέλλοντες ὅτι ὁ πατὴρ ἀφεῖται, there come messengers 
announcing, &c. Isoc. Trapez. p. 360 C.§ 11. Εἶδες νοῦν ἔχοντα 
λυπούμενον καὶ χαίροντα ; did you ever see a man of sense (sc. τινά) 
grieved and rejoicing? Prat. Gorg. 498 A. 


Nore 3. In the poets, the Participle with the article sometimes 
becomes so completely a substantive, that it is followed by an ad- 
nominal genitive rather than by the case which its verbal force 
would require. A few expressions like of προσήκοντες, relatives, and 
τὸ συμφέρον or τὰ συμφέροντα, gain, advantage, are used in the same 


way even in prose. KE. Ὁ, 


‘O ἐκείνου τεκών, his father. Eur. El. 335. (We should expect 


ὁ ἐκεῖνον τεκών.) Ta μικρὰ συμφέροντα τῆς πόλεως, the small ad- 
vantages of the state. Dem. Cor. 284, 26. Βασιλέως προσή ςοντέε 
rues. THuc. I, 128. 














3 108. ] PARTICIPLE AS ADJECTIVE. 215 


Norte 4. (a.) In the poets and in Thucydides, the neuter singu- 


im ook stimes used in 
lar of the Present Participle with the article 1s aoe expect the 
the sense of an abstract verbal noun, where we 8 Ἢ 

SER . +10 of 
Infinitive with the article. E. g. ine 
Ἐν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι ἀξυνετώτεροι ἔσονται, in the want of πιὰ ; 
ὃ ‘tava 1 142. (Here we should expect ev τῷ μῇ BE sag 
rc. - 9 ᾽ — ‘ > , ve ἢ TO ε 
oie τὸ μὲν δεδιὸς αὑτοῦ τοὺς ag tag a e Pie 

Ε Toe bak y. Id. J, . ΟΥ̓́ 
θαρσοῦν.. - - ἀδεέστερον ἐσόμενο ᾿ =n νὰ ων 
jor, is used like τὸ δεδιέναι, and τὸ θαρσοῦν, erg τα 102. Ε Καὶ 
or τὸ θάρσος.) Μετὰ τοῦ δρωμε you, with action. ms » daBeiv. 
σέ γ εἰσάξω" τὸ yap νοσοῦν ποθεῖ σε κε pageant te ἕω 

‘ “gel ahs pier BEN, ὁ γὰρ ποθοῦ 
Sopu. Phil. 674. (τὸ νοσοῦν = ἢ μεν ον ᾿ iy Sopx. Trach. 
ἐκμαθεῖν θέλων οὐκ ἂν μεθεῖτο, πρὶν nal’ ἡϑυνὴνν 
190. jective for the 
> neuter singular of an adjective 
Compare the use of the neuter ae ae a Ge a λοον 
corresponding abstract noun; as τὸ καλόν, θέαι, 


i i articiple 
(b.) A similar construction sometimes occurs Ppp: feligincisee 
and a noun are used instead of an Infinitive an ; 


ni ς ἃ. σ΄ 

Enclish we generally use a finite verb. E. g ‘aes 
a 5 € Ἴ εγάλη Κροῖσον; 1. 9. 

Μετὰ δὲ Σόλωνα οἰχόμενον ἔλαβε νέμεσις μεγ a panei 

- é ἢ πόλει οὔτε πολεμ 

Y sas gone. Hort. 1, 34. Ty mode ; 

or rag = τε στάσεως πώποτε αἴτιος ἐγένετο; i. Θ. the ee 
συ αντος OUT 7 : be : : 4: τὴν 
γα νἱ αλπόνβ result of any war (like rov πόλεμον Mae ΡΝ συμβη 
Xen. Mem. I, 2, 63. So ἐς ἠέλιον καταδύντα, 1}. 4, . 


i Dy τῆς πό he rulin 
ReMARK. Such expressions as τὸ κρατοὺν τῆς πόλεως, g 


As Ψύ ζ nfounded 
part of the state, τὸ δοξάζον τῆς ψύχης; a — i = τον 
with the examples belonging under Notes : 


ξ τ δ ὦ al a 
merely cases of the partitive genitive after a participle used 
noun. 


ici i ike 

Norte 5. Some Present Participles are ἀκ φρουροὶ ἔλεον. we 
predicate adjectives after εἰμί or γίγνομαι. Suc mags rhage 
φέρων, ἔχων (with an adverb), προσήκων, πρέπων, ᾽ 
συμφέρον. E. δ. ἶ ᾿ aS aes 

Ti ποτ᾽ ἐστὶν οὗτος ἐκείνου διαφέρων; in what piers st 
from that one? Piat. Gorg. eo. pid tears nevi ~ 
Υ ΟΜ . Ade 5 ave , 
advantageous to the state. Dem. I 35. So ee 
Demosthenes ; as τοῦτο μὲν ‘yap a ὑμᾶς εἰδότας ἡγουμ »J 
think you are aware of this, Cor. 257, 25. 


i i arti- 

Norte 6. The poets sometimes hei nme - Frog “8 
iple with εἰμί is for the simple for 

ciple with εἰμί as a periphrasis f mple * mes 

ne each nant of such expressions has its ordinary meaning 6 

ἐὰν ἦ θέλουσα; πάντ᾽ ἐμοῦ κομίζεται, whatever po a 

always obtains from me. SoPu. 0. T. 580. (Here ἡ ns — . 
for δέλῃ.) Ovdx eis ὄλεθρον; ov σιωπῆσας ETEL; ““" 


ἡμῖν; ort is something that 
τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι γιγνόμενον παρ᾽ ἡμῖν ; or is not this so g 

















216 THE PARTICIPLE. [8 108. 


happens among us? Puat. Phileb. 39 Ὁ. Ἦν yap ὁ Θεμιστοκλῆς 
βεβαιότατα δὴ φύσεως ἰσχὺν δηλώσας, kal... ἄξιος θαυμάσαι, 
Themistocles was one who manifested, ἕο. Tuuc. I, 138. 


For the use of the Perfect Participle in the same way, see § 17, 
Note 2. For the Aorist Participle with ἔχω as a periphrasis for the 
Perfect Indicative, see below, § 112, Note 7. 


§ 109. The Participle is used to define the circum- 
stances under which an action takes place. It may in 
this sense be connected with any substantive in the 


sentence, and agree with it in case. 
The relations expressed by the participle in this use 
are the following : — 


1. Zime, the various tenses of the Participle denoting 
various points of time, which are of course all referred 
to that of the leading verb. E. ο΄. 


Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἀπῇει, when he had said this, he departed. ᾿Απήντησα 
Φιλίππῳ ἀπιόντι, 1 met Philip as he was departing. Τοῦτο rer otn- 
κότες ἀπελεύσονται. Ταῦτα ἔπραττε στρατηγῶν, he did these things 
while he was general. Ταῦτα πράξει στρατηγῶν, he will do these 
things when he is general. Tupavvevoas δὲ ἔτη τρία Ἱππίας ἐχώρει 
ὑπόσπονδος ἐς Σίγειον. THuc. VI. 59. 


2. Means. KE. g. 

Ληιζόμενοι ζῶσιν, they live by plunder. Xen. Cyr. ITI, 2, 25. 
Τοὺς Ἕλληνας ἐδίδαξαν, ὃν tporov διοικοῦντες τὰς αὑτῶν πατρίδας 
καὶ πρὸς ols πολεμοῦντες μεγάλην ἂν τὴν «Ἑλλάδα ποιήσειαν. Isoc. 
Panath. p. 241 D. 8 44. Οὐ γὰρ ἀλλοτρίοις ὑμῖν χρωμένοις παρα- 
δείγμασιν ἀλλ᾽ οἰκείοις, εὐδαίμοσιν ἔξεστι γενέσθαι, by using not foreign 
but domestic examples, &c. Dem. Ol. II, 35,1. (So often χρώμενος 
with the dative.) 


3. Manner, and similar relations, including manner 
of employment, &c. E. g. 

Προεΐλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων ἀποθανεῖν ἣ παρανομῶν 
ζῆν, he preferred to die abiding by the laws, rather than to live disobey- 
ing them. XEN. Mem. IV, 4,4. ᾿Αρπάσαντας τὰ ὅπλα πορεύε- 
σθαι, to march having snatched up their arms (i. 6. eagerly). Drm. ΟἹ. 
III, 34, 8. Τοῦτο ἐποίησεν λαθών, he did this secreily. (See below, 
N. 8.) ᾿Απεδήμει τριηραρχῶν, he was absent on duty as trierarch. 


4. Cause or ground of action. E. g. 








oe 


ἢ 109, 7.] PARTICIPLE EXPRESSING CAUSE, ETC. 21% 


Λέγω δὲ τοῦδ᾽ ἕνεκα, βουλόμενος δόξαι σοὶ ὅπερ ἐμοί, and I 
speak jor this reason, because I wish, &c. PLat. Phaed. 102 Ὁ. 
᾿Απείχοντο κερδῶν, αἰσχρὰ νομίζοντες εἶναι, because they believed 
them to be base. XEN. Mem. I, 2, 22. Τί γὰρ ἂν βουλόμενοι 
ἄνδρες σοφοὶ ὡς ἀληθῶς δεσπότας ἀμείνους αὐτῶν φεύγοιεν, with what 
object in view, &c. (1. 6. wishing what)? PLAT. Phaed. 63 A. (See 
below, Note 7.) 

For the Participle with ὡς, used to express a cause assigned by 
another, see below, Note 4. 


ὃ. Purpose, object, or intention, expressed by the Fu- 
ture Participle, rarely by the Present. E. g. 

Ἦλθε Χυσόμενος θύγατρα, he came to ransom his daughter. Il. 
I. 13. Παρελήλυθα συμβουλεύσων, I have risen to give my advice. 
Isoc. Archid. 8.1. ᾿Εβουλεύσαντο πέμπειν ἐς Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις 
ταῦτά τε ἐροῦντας καὶ Λύσανδρον αἰτήσοντας ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς, in 
order to say this, and to ask for Lysander as admiral. Xen. Hell. II, 
1, 6. ᾿Εὰν εἰς πόλεμον (ἡ πατρὶς) ἄγῃ τρωθησόμενον ἣ ἀποθα- 
νούμενον, ποιητέον ταῦτα, even if it lead any one into war to be 
wounded or to perish. Puat. Crit. 51 B. 

Ἔτυχον yap ai μὲν (νῆες) ἐπὶ Καρίας οἰχόμεναι,... περιαγγέλ- 
λουσαι βοηθεῖν, for some of the ships happened to be gone towards 
Caria, in order to give them notice to send aid. Tuuc. 1,116. So 
ἀρνύμενοι, Il. 1, 159. (The Present here seems to express an attend- 
ant circumstance, rather than a mere purpose.) 


6. Condition, the Participle standing for the protasis 
of a conditional sentence, and its tenses representing 
the various forms of protasis expressed by the Indica- 
tive, Subjunctive, or Optative (ἢ 52,1). E. g. 

Οἴει σὺ ἤλλκηστιν ὑπὲρ ᾿Αδμήτου ἀποθανεῖν ἂν, ἢ ᾿Αχιλλέα Πατρόκλῳ 
ἐπαποθανεῖν, μὴ οἰομένους ἀθάνατον μνήμην ἀρετῆς πέρι ἑαυτῶν 
ἔσεσθαι, do you think thai Alcestis would have died for Admetus, &c., 
uf they had not believed, ἕο. Puat. Symp. 208 D. (Here μὴ οἰομέ- 
vous 18 equivalent to εἰ μὴ @ovro.) Οὐ γὰρ ἂν αὐτοῖς ἔμελεν μὴ τοῦτο “ 
ὑπολαμβάνουσιν, for it would not have concerned them, unless 
they had had this idea. Dem. Phil. III, 122, 21. (Here μὴ ὑπολαμ- 
βάνουσιν is equivalent to εἰ μὴ τοῦτο ὑπελάμβανον.) ἴΑστρων ἂν 
ἔλθοιμ᾽ αἰθέρος πρὸς ἀντολὰς καὶ γῆς ἔνερθε, δυνατὸς ὦ ν δρᾶσαι τάδε, 
if I should be able to do this (εἰ δυνατὸς εἴην). Eur. Phoen. 504. 

See other examples under § 52, 1. 


7. Opposition, or limitation, where the Participle is 
often to be translated by although. HE. 


tas 
Θ᾽ 


? ‘ ‘ “ , c - 
Οὗτος δὲ καὶ μεταπεμφθῆναι φάσκων ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς, καὶ ἐλθὼν 
10 











218 THE PARTICIPLE. [8 109, 7 


els τὴν οἰκίαν, εἰσελθεῖν μὲν οὔ φησιν, Δημοφῶντος δ᾽ ἀκοῦσαι γραμμα- 
τεῖον ἀναγιγνώσκοντος, καὶ προεισεληλυθὼ ς καὶ ἅπαντα διωμολο- 
γημένος πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, and this man, although he admits that he 
was summoned, and although he did go to the house, yet denies that he 
went in, §c., although he had previously gone in and arranged every- 
thing with my father. Dem. Aph. I, 839, 29. Ολίγα δυνάμενοι 
προορᾶν περὶ τοῦ μέλλοντος πολλὰ ἐπιχειροῦμεν πράττειν, although we 
are able to foresee few things, ἕο. Xn. Cyr. Ill, 2, 15. 

The Participle in this sense is very often accompanied by καίπερ 
and other particles. See below, Note 5. 


8. Any attendant circumstance, the Participle being 
merely descriptive. Εἰ. g. 


Kat παραλαβόντες τοὺς Βοιωτοὺς ἐστράτευσαν ἐπὶ Φάρσαλον, and 
having taken the Boeotians with them, they marched against Pharsalus. 
Tuuc. I, 111. Παραγγέλλει τῷ Κλεάρχῳ A aBovre ἥκειν ὅσον ἣν 
αὐτῷ στράτευμα. XEN. An. I, 2,1. Ἔρχεται Μανδάνη τὸν Κῦρον τὸν 
υἱὸν ἔχουσα, Mandane comes with her son Cyrus. Id. Cyr. I, 3, 1. 


(See below, N. 8.) 





Note 1. (a.) The adverbs τότε, ἤδη (τότε ἤδη), ἐνταῦθα, εἶτα, 
ἔπειτα, and οὕτως are often joined to the verb of the sentence in 
which the temporal Participle stands. E. g. 


Ἐκέλευεν αὐτὸν συνδιαβάντα ἔπειτα οὕτως ἀπαλλάττεσθαι, he com~ 
manded that, after he had joined them in crossing, he should then retire 
as he proposed. Xen. An. VII, 1, 2. Πειθομένων δὲ τῶν Σαμίων καὶ 
σχόντων τὴν Ζάγκλην, ἐνθαῦτα οἱ Ζαγκλαῖοι ἐβοήθεον αὐτῇ. Hor. 
VI, 23. ᾿Αποφυγὼν δὲ καὶ τούτους, στρατηγὸς οὕτω ᾿Αθηναίων 
ἀπεδέχθη, and having escaped these also, he was then chosen general 
of the Athenians. Id. V1, 104. 


(b.) Εἶτα, ἔπειτα, and οὕτως sometimes refer in the same way to a 
Participle expressing opposition or limitation; in which case they 
may be translated by nevertheless, after all. E. g. 

Πάντων δ᾽ ἀτοπώτατόν ἐστι, τηλικαύτην ἀνελόντας μαρτυρίαν 
οὕτως οἴεσθαι δεῖν εἰκῇ πιστεύεσθαι παρ᾽ ὑμῖν, that, although they 
have destroyed so important a piece of evidence, they after all think, 
&e. Dem. Aph. II, 837, 10. Δεινὰ μέντ᾽ ἂν πάθοις, εἰ ᾿Αθήναζε 
ἀφικόμενος; οὗ τῆς Ἑλλάδος πλείστη ἐστὶν ἐξουσία τοῦ λέγειν, 
ἔπειτα σὺ ἐνταῦθα τούτου μόνος ἀτυχήσαις, if, alihough you are come 
to Athens, you should after all be the only one to fail in obtaining this. 
Piat. Gorg. 461 E. 


(ς.) Οὕτως, διὰ τοῦτο, and διὰ ταῦτα sometimes refer in the same 
way to a Participle denoting a cause. E. g. 

Νομίξζων ἀμείνονας καὶ κρείττους" πολλῶν βαρβάρων ὑμᾶς εἶναι, 
διὰ τοῦτο προσέλαβον. XEN. An. I, 7, 3. 








δ 109.] THE PARTICIPLE. 219 


Nore 2. The Adverbs ἅμα, μεταξύ, εὐθύς, αὐτίκα, and ἐξαίφνης 
are often connected (in position and in sense) with the temporal 
Participle, although grammatically they qualify the verb of the sen- 
tence. E.g. 


"Apa προιὼν ἐπεσκοπεῖτο εἴ τι δυνατὸν εἴη τοὺς πολεμίους ἀσθενεστέ- 
ρους ποιεῖν, as he advanced, he looked at the same time to see whether it 
was possible, &c. XEN. Cyr. V, 2, 22. “Awa καταλαβόντες προσεκέατά 
σφι, as soon as they had overtaken them, they pressed hard upon them. 
Hpt. 1X, 57. Νεκὼς μεταξὺ ὀρύσσων ἐπαύσατο, μαντηίου ἐμποδίου 
γενομένου, Necho stopped while digging (the canal), &c. Id. II, 158. 
Πολλαχοῦ δή pe ἐπέσχε λέγοντα μεταξύ, it often checked me while 
speaking. Puat. Apol. 40 B. ᾿Ἐπιπόνῳ ἀσκήσει εὐθὺς νέοι ὄντες τὸ 
ἀνδρεῖον μετέρχονται, by loilsome discipline, even while they are still 
young, &e. Tuuc. Il, 39. Τῷ δεξιῷ κέρᾳ εὐθὺ ς ἀποβεβηκότι οἱ Ko- 
ρίνθιοι ἐπέκειντο, the Corinthians pressed upon the right wing, as soon 
as wt was disembarked. Id. IV, 43. ᾿Αρξάμενος εὐθὺς καθισταμένου, 
beginning as soon as it (the war) broke out. Id. 1,1. Διόνυσον λέγου- 
σι ὡς αὐτίκα γενόμενον ἐς τὸν μηρὸν ἐνερράψατο Ζεύς, they say of 
Dionysus that, as soon as he was born, Zeus sewed him into his thigh. 
Hor. I, 146. Τὴν ψυχὴν θεωρῶν ἐξαίφνης ἀποθανόντος ἑκάστου, 
viewing the soul of each one the moment that he is dead. Piat. Gorg. 
523 E. 


ΝΟΤΕ 3. (a.) “Are, οἷον, or οἷα, as, inasmuch as, are used 
to emphasize a Participle denoting the cause or ground of an 
action. Here the cause assigned is stated merely on the au- 
thority of the speaker or writer. (See N. 4.) E. g. 


‘O δὲ Κῦρος, ἅτε mais ὧν καὶ φιλόκαλος καὶ φιλότιμος, ἥδετο τῇ 
στολῇ; but Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a child, Χο. XEN. Cyr. I, 8, 3. 
So dre ληφθέντων, THuc. VII, 85. Mada δὲ χαλεπῶς πορευόμενοι, 
ota δὴ ἐν νυκτί τε καὶ φόβῳ ἀπιόντες, εἰς Aiyoobeva ἀφικνοῦνται, 
inasmuch as they were departing by night, &e. Xen. Hell. VI, 4, 26. 

In Herodotus ὥστε is used in the same sense; as in I, 8, ὥστε 
ταῦτα νομίζων, inasmuch as he believed this. See Tuuc. VII, 24. 


(5.) Ὥσπερ with the Participle occasionally seems to have the 
same force as dre or οἷον ; as in Eur. Hippol. 1307, ὁ δ᾽ ὥσπερ ὧν 
δίκαιος οὐκ ἐφέσπετο λόγοις, inasmuch as he was just, &e. 

For the common use of ὥσπερ with the Participle, see Note 9. 


Notre 4. (a) ‘Qs may be prefixed to many of the Parti- 
ciples of § 109, especially those denoting a cause or & pur- 
pose. It shows that the Participle expresses the idea of the 
subject of the leading verb, or that of some other person promi- - 
nently mentioned in the sentence ; without implying that it is 
al:o the idea of the speaker or writer. E. g 





220 THE PARTICIPLE. [8 109. 


, > 


Τὸν Περικλέα ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον ὡς πείσαντα σφᾶς πολεμεῖν καὶ δὲ 
ἐκεῖνον ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς περιπεπτωκότες, they found fault with 
Pericles, on the ground that he had persuaded them to engage in the 
war, and that through him they had met with the calamities. ‘THuc. 
II. 59. (Here Thucydides himself is not responsible for the state- 
ments made by the Participles ; as he would be if as were omitted.) 
See § 111. ᾿Αγανακτοῦσιν ὡς μεγάλων τινῶν ἀπεστερημένοι, they are 
indignant, because (as they allege) they have been deprived, ἕο. PLAT. 
Rep. I, 329 A. Βασιλεῖ χάριν ἴσασιν, ὡς dt ἐκεῖνον τυχοῦσαι τῆς 
αὐτονομίας ταύτης, i. 6. they thank him because (as they believe) they 
have obtained this independence through him. Isoc. Pan. p. 77 C. 
$175. Οἱ μὲν διώκοντες τοὺς καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς ὡς πάντας νικῶντες; οἱ δ᾽ 
ἁρπάζοντες ὡς ἤδη πάντες νικῶντες; ONE side pursuing those opposed 
to them, thinking that they were victorious over all; and the other side 
proceeding to plunder, thinking that they were all victorious. XEN. An. 
I, 10,4. Τὴν πρόφασιν ἐποιεῖτο ὡς Πισίδας βουλόμενος ἐκβαλεῖν, 
he made his pretence, (apparently) wishing to drive out the Pisidians. 
Ib. I, 2, 1. Ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν ὡς καταστησομένων τούτων εἰς τὸ 
δέον. he said he took courage, on the ground that these matters were 
about to be settled, ἕο. Ib. 1, 3,8. (See § 110, 1, N.1.) ‘Qs yap 
εἰδότων περὶ ὧν ἐπέμφθησαν ἀκούετε, for you hear them as men who 
(as you believe) know about what they were sent for. Dem. F. L. 342, 
25. Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς Toke μήσοντες, the Athenians 
prepared with the (avowed) intention of going towar. Tuue. 1], 7. 


> 


Συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν, he seizes Cyrus with the (avowed) 
object of putting him to death. Xen. An. I, 1, 3. 

It is a common mistake to suppose that ὡς implies that the Parti- 
ciple does not express the idea of the speaker or writer. It implies 
nothing whatever on this point, which is determined (if at all) by the 
context. 


(b.) ‘Qs may also be used before Participles with verbs of know- 
ing, &e., included in ὃ 113. (See § 113, N. 10.) 


Nore 5. (a.) The Participle expressing opposition or limitation 
is often strengthened by καίπερ or καί (aftera negative, by οὐδέ or 
μηδέ, with or without περ); καὶ ταῦτα; and that too. "Opes, neverthe- 
less, may be connected with the Participle (like ἅμα, &c. N. 2), be- 
longing, however, grammatically to the leading verb. 4. 


. 
ὃ 


Yr 

Ἕκτορα καὶ μεμαῶτα μάχης σχήσεσθαι ὀίω. Il. LX, 655. Ἔποι- 
κτείρω δέ νιν δύστηνον ἔμπας, καίπερ ὄντα δυσμενῆ, although he is 
my enemy. SOPH. Aj. 122. Οὐκ ἂν προδοίην, ovde TEP πράσσων 
κὠκῶς. EUR. Phoen. 1624. Γυναικὶ πείθου, μη dé τἀληθὴ κλυων. 
Id. Hipp. Fr. 448. Πείθου γυναιξὶ, καίπερ οὐ στέργων ὅμως. 
AEscuH. Sept. 712. (Here ὅμως qualifies πείθου: although, as usual, 
it is joined with the Participle for emphasis.) ᾿Αδικεῖς ὅτι ἄνδρα 


ἡμῖν τὸν σπουδαιότατον διαφθείρεις γελᾶν ἀναπείθων, καὶ ταῦτα οὕτω 
πολέμιον ὄντα τῷ γέλωτι. XEN. Cyr. IT, 2, 16. 


(b.) In Homer, the two parts of καί .. περ are generally sepa- 








§ 109.] THE PARTICIPLE. 221 


rated by the Participle, or by some emphatic word connevted with 
it. Kai is here very often omitted, so that πέρ stands alone in the 
sense of although. 


Both of these uses are found also in the Attic poets. E. g. 


x κ᾿ » > ‘ > , , κι 
Τὸν μὲν ἔπειτ᾽ εἴασε, καὶ ἀχνύμενός περ ἑταίρου, κεῖσθαι. Il. VITI, 
or > , >A , > & , ‘a ~ 
125. Καὶ κρατερὸς περ ἐὼν. μενέτω τριτάτῃ Evi μοιρῃ- Il. XV, 195. 
, A “eh Ἢ > , , , 
Τέτλαθι, μῆτερ ἐμὴ. Kat ἀνάσχεο κηδομένη περ, μή σε φίλην περ 
ἐοῦσαν ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ἴδωμαι θεινομένην " τότε δ᾽ οὔ τι δυνήσομαι 
> , ΄ ΄ ron 
ἄχνυμενὸς περ χραισμειν. Il. I, 586. 
>? , ~ ? “ Ὁ a 
Κἀγώ σ᾽ ἱκνοῦμαι, καὶ γυνή περ οὖσ᾽ ὅμως. Eur. Orest. 680. 
“ἢ ‘ aes. ‘ ‘ ee , -_ a : , 
Tacbov yap αὐτῇ Kat κατασκαφὰς ἐγώ, γυνὴ περ οὔσα; τῷδε μηχανήσο- 
μαι. AESCH. Sept. 1037. 


REMARK. Καίτοι was very seldom used like καίπερ with the Par- 
ticiple, its only regular use being with finite verbs. E. σ. 
Οὐδέ μοι ἐμμελέως τὸ Πιττάκειον νέμεται, καίτοι σοφοῦ παρὰ 


wros εἰρημένον. SIMON. Fr. 5 (apud Piat. Prot. 339 C). 
P71 I 


Note 6. The Participle dv is sometimes omitted after the parti- 
cles mentioned in the last three notes, leaving an adjective or a 
noun standing by itself. LE. g. 

Αὐτοὺς els τὴν πολιτείαν ov παραδεξόμεθα, Gre τυραννίδος ὑμνητάς 
(sc. ὄντας). PLAT. Rep VIII, 568 B. Αὐτὸ ἐπιτηδεύουσιν ὡς avay- 
καῖον ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ὡς ἀγαθὸν (sc. ὄν), they practise it on the ground that u 
is necessary, and not on the ground that it is a good thing. Ib. Il, 358 
C. Ἦ μὴν ἔτι Ζεὺς, καίπερ αὐθάδης φρενῶν, ἔσται ταπεινός. AESCH. 
Prom. 907. 


Nore 7. (a.) The Participle with any of the meanings included 
in § 109 may stand in relative or interrogative clauses. Such ex- 
pressions can seldom be translated literally into English. Εἰ. g. 


Ti δὲ καὶ δεδιότες σφόδρα οὕτως ἐπείγεσθε; what do you fear, 
that you are in such great haste? Xen. Hell. I, 7, 26. Τί ἂν εἰπών 
σέ τις ὀρθῶς προσείποι ; what could one call you, so as to give you the 
right name? Dem. Cor. 232, 20. Τῶν νόμων ἄπειροι γίγνονται καὶ 
τῶν λόγων, οἷς δεῖ χρώμενον ὁμιλεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, which one must 
use in his intercourse with men. Piat. Gorg. 484 D. 


(b.) Here belong ri μαθών ; and ri παθών; both of which have 
the general force of wherefore? Ti μαθὼν τοῦτο ποιεῖ; however, 
usually signifies what put it into his head to do this? or with what idea 
does he do this? and ri παθὼν τοῦτο ποιεῖ; what has happened to hum 
that he does this? KE. σ. 


o 
Ti τοῦτο μαθὼν προσέγραψεν; with what idea did he add this to 
the law? Dem. Lept. 495, 20. Ti παθοῦσαι, εἴπερ Νεφέλαι γ᾽ 
εἰσὶν ἀληθῶς, θνηταῖς εἴξασι γυναιξίν ; what has happened to them that 
they resemble mortal women? Arist. Nub. 340. 


These phrases may be used even in dependent sentences, ri be- 
coming 6 rz, and the whole phrase meaning because. E. σ. 





222 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 109. 


Ti ἀξιός εἶμι παθεῖν ἣ ἀποτῖσαι; ὅ τι μαθὼν ἐν τῷ βίῳ οὐχ ἡσυχίαν 
ἦγον; what do I deserve to suffer, &c. for not keeping quiet ? i. 6. for 
the idea which came into my head, in consequence of which I did not 
keep quiet. Prat. Apol. 36 B. So Piat. Euthyd. 283 Εἰ, and 299 
A. (See Matthiae, § 567.) 


Nore 8. Certain Participles, when they agree with the subject 
of a verb, have almost the force of adverbs. Such are ap XOpEVOS, 
at first; τελευτῶν, finally; dear trav, after an interval; φέρων. 
hastily; ἀνύσας, quickly; λαθών, secretly; κατατείνας» ear 
nestly; ἔχων, continually; φθάσας: quickly, (See Passow or Lid- 
dell and Scott, under ἄρχω, &c.) 

Ἔχων, ἄγων, φέρων, and λαβών may often be translated 
with. (See example under § 109, 8.) 


Note 9. “ὥσπερ with the Participle generally belongs 
to an implied apodosis, to which the Participle forms the pro- 
tasis (ξ 109, 6). Here ὥσπερ means simply as, and the Parti- 
ciple is translated with an ¢f prefixed. (See § 53, N. 3.) 
E. g. 


Ὥσπερ ἤδη σαφῶς εἰδότες, οὐκ ἐθέλετ᾽ ἀκούειν, you are unwilling 
to hear, as if you already knew well (i. e. as you would be ὃ you 
knew). Isoc. Pac. p. 160 Ὁ. ὃ 9. (Here εἰδότες Ξε εἰ ἤδειμεν, § 52, 
1.) ᾿Απήντων ὀλίγοι πρὸς πολλὰς μυριάδας, ὥσπερ ἐν ἀλλοτρίαις 
ψυχαῖς μέλλοντες κινδυνεύειν, As if they had been about to risk the 
lives of others (i. €. ὥσπερ ἀπήντων ἂν, εἰ ἔμελλον). Id. Pan. p. 58 B. 
§ 86. So Ib. p. 78 C.§ 179, ὥσπερ πρὸς τὸν Δία τὴν χώραν νεμό- 
μενος; ἀλλ᾽ οὐ πρὸς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὰς συνθήκας ποιούμενος: as 
(he would have done) if he had been dividing the country with Zeus, 
and not making a treaty with men. 

: That ὥσπερ means simply as (not as if) is seen when a verb with 
εἰ follows; as in ὥσπερ εἰ λέγοις, as if you should say. See also 1]. 
Il, 780, ἴσαν, ὡς εἴ τε πυρὶ χθὼν πᾶσα νέμοιτο, i. 6. their march 
was as (it would be) if the whole land should be covered with fire. 


$410. 1. Ifa Participle, denoting any of the rela- 
tions included in ὃ 109, belongs to a substantive which 
is not connected with the main construction of the sen- 
tence, both the substantive and the Participle are put 
in the genitive, called absolute. H. g. 


Ταῦτ᾽ ἐπράχθη Κόνωνος στρατηγοῦντος, these things were 
done when Conon was general. Isoc. Evag. p. 200 C. § 56. ᾿Αφίκετο 
δεῦρο τὸ πλοῖον, γνόντων τῶν Κεφαλλήνων, ἀντιπράττοντος τού- 
του, - - - καταπλεῖν, the Cephallenians having determined to sail in, 
although this man opposed ut. DEM. Zenoth. 886, 1. (For the tenses 


8. 110, 1.] GENITIVE ABSOLUTE. 223 


of the Participles, see ὃ 24.) ᾿Αθηναίων δὲ τὸ αὐτὸ τοῦτο παθόντων, 
διπλασίαν ἂν τὴν δύναμιν εἰκάζεσθαι (οἶμαι), i. 6. if the Athenians 
should ever suffer, &c. THUC. I, 10. (See § 52, 1.) Ὅλης yap τῆς 
πόλεως ἐπιτρεπομένης τῷ στρατηγῷ: μεγάλα τά τε ἀγαθὰ κατορ- 


- ~ ’ 
θοῦντος αὐτοῦ καὶ Ta kaka διαμαρτάνοντος εἰκὸς γίγνεσθαι. 


Xen. Mem. III, 1, 3. 


Nore 1. The Participle in the genitive absolute may be accom- 
panied by all the particles mentioned in § 109, Notes 1-9, with the 
same force as in other constructions. It may also stand in the rela- 
tive and interrogative sentences of § 109, N.7. E.g. 

Καὶ αὐτοῦ μεταξὺ ταῦτα λέγοντος ὁ Κλεινίας ἔτυχεν ἀποκρινάμε- 
νος, while he was saying this, &c. Prat. Euthyd. 275 E. Ἔκ δὲ 
τούτων εὐθὺς exnpurrov ἐξιέναι πάντας Θηβαίους, ὡς τῶν τυράννων 
τεθνεώτων, because (as they said) the tyrants were dead. XEN. 
Hell. V, 4,9. (See § 109, N. 4.) ᾿Απελογήσατο ὅτι οὐχ ws τοῖς 
Ἕλλησι πολεμησόντων σφῶν εἴποι, that he said what he did, not 
because they intended to be at war with the Greeks. Id. An. V, 6, 3. 
So ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοντος Τισσαφέρνους ταῖς πόλεσι, on the ground that T. 
was plotting ; An. I, 1, 6. ‘Qs οὐ προσοίσοντος (sc. ἐμοῦ) τὰς 
χεῖρας; - - - δίδασκε; since (as you may feel sure) I will not lay hands 
on you, teach me. Id. Mem. II, 6, 32. Κῦρος δὲ ἀπορίῃσι ἐνείχετο, 
ἅτε χρόνου ἐγγινομένου συχνοῦ, inasmuch as a long time intervened. 
Hpt. 1,190. (See § 109, N. 3.) "Hy yap ἀδύνατος, ὥστε σηπο- 
μένον τοῦ μηροῦ. Id. VI, 136. οἱ Ἕλληνες οὕτως ἠγανάκτησαν, 
ὥσπερ ὅλης τῆς Ἑλλάδος πεπορθημένης; as if the whole of Greece had 
been devastated (i. 6. as they would have been, if it had been devas- 
tated). Isoc. Helen. p. 217 D. § 49. 

For the genitive absolute after ὡς, in connection with verbs of 
knowing, &c., see § 113, Note 10. 


Note 2. A Participle sometimes stands alone in the genitive ab- 
solute, when a noun or pronoun can easily be supplied from the 
context, or when some general word (like ἀνθρώπων, πραγμάτων) is 
understood. E. g. 

οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι, προσιόντων; τέως μὲν ἡσύχαζον, but the enemy, as 
tiey (men before mentioned) came on, for a time kept quiet. XEN. 
An. V, 4,16. So ἐπαγομένων αὐτοὺς, THuc. I, 3. Οὕτω δ᾽ ἐχόν- 
των; εἰκὸς, κι τ. λ., and things being so (sc. πραγμάτων), &c. AEN. 
An. IL], 2, 10. Οὐκ ἐξαιτούμενος, οὐκ ᾿Αμφικτυονικὰς δίκας ἐπα- 
γόντων, οὐκ ἐπαγγελλομένων, οὐδαμῶς ἐγῶ προδέδωκα τὴν εἰς 
ὑωᾶς εὔνοιαν. Dem. Cor. 331, 80. (Here ἀνθρώπων is understood 
with ἐπαγόντων and ἐπαγγελλομένων.) 

So when the Participle denotes a state of the weather; as ὕοντος 
πολλῷ, when it was raining heavily. XeN. Hell. I,1,16. (in such 
cases the Participle is masculine, Atds being understood. See ARIST. 
Nub. 370, dovra; and Il. XII, 25, ὗε δ᾽ ἄρα Zevs-) 


Nore 3. A passive Participle may stand in the genitive absolute 





224 THE PARTICIPLE [§ 110, 1. 


with a clause introduced by ὅτι. If the subject of such a clause is 
plural, the Participle is itself sometimes plural, by a kind of attrac- 


tion. E. g. 


τι ΄ “ » ~ 4 ΕΣ 
ἱ Σαφῶς δηλωθέντος ὅτι ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ τῶν Ἑλλήνων τὰ πράγματα 
ἐγένετο, τί having been clearly shown, that, &e. Tuuc. I, 74. In I, 
116 we find ἐσαγγελθέντων ὅτι Φοίνισσαι νῆες ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς πλέου- 
σιν, tt having been announced, that, &c. 


“om sa ‘ . . 

Note 4. The Participle dv is rarely omitted, leaving a noun and 
an adjective alone in the genitive absolute. E. g. 

ε > ~ , »ἤὦ a) ip 

Qs ἐμοῦ μόνης πέλας (sc. οὔσης). Sopu. O. (Ὁ. 83. 

Note 5. The genitive absolute is regularly used only when a 
new subject is introduced into the sentence (8 110, 1), and not 
when the Participle can be joined with any substantive already be- 


longing to the construction. Yet this rule is sometimes violated, in 
order to give greater prominence to a participial clause. Ἐν g. 


Διαβεβηκότος ἤδη Περικλέους, ἠγγέλθη αὐτῷ ὅτι Me δ... 
κε. Tuuc. I, 114. ἡγγέλθη αὐτῷ ὅτι Μέγαρα ἀφέοτη 


2. The Participles of impersonal verbs stand in the 
accusative absolute, in the neuter singular, when other 
participles would stand in the genitive absolute. Such 


are δέον, ἐξόν, παρόν, προσῆκον, παρέχον, μέλον, μετα- 
μέλον, δοκοῦν, δόξαν, and the like; also passive Parti- 
ciples used impersonally (as προσταχθέν, εἰρημένον ; 
and such expressions as ἀδύνατον ὄν, it being impossible, 


composed of an adjective and ov. HE. g. 


« bd > , g / e - >, «a . 

‘ Oi δ᾽ ov βοηθήσαντες, δέον, ὑγιεῖς ἀπῆλθον; and did those who 
nea gel ng _ it was necessary escape safe and sound? Puar. 
᾿ — Ὥς εἰ δὶ Απλᾶς δὲ λύπας ἐξὸν (sc. φέρειν), οὐκ οἴσω 
ιπλας. “Ε. ph. Taur. 688. Παρέχον δὲ τῆς ᾿Ασίης πάσης ἄρχειν 
a ἄλλο τι αἱρήσεσθε; Hot. V,49. Εὖ δὲ παρασχὸν, and 

when an opportunity offers. Tuuc. I, 120. Οὐ ἢ 
! 4 ὃ. 5 . Ϊ “Ὁ. υ ne 

properly. Id. IV, 95. Συνδό δ᾽ Vaal 2 mes onaced 
Ρ , ¥y- . ; πεῖ υν ὄξαν T® πατρὶ Kat τῇ μητρῖ, γαμει τὴν 
Κυαξάρου θυγατέρα. XEN. Cyr. VIII, 5, 28. Εἰρημένον kictoy 

- ‘ - - , r 
εἰναι ὅ τι ἂν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν ξυμμάχων ψηφίσηται. THuc. V, 30. So 
5. T BRe « 

ας get Net γεγραμμένον, V, 56; and προστεταγμένον, PLAT. 
eg. X, 902 a Καὶ ἐνθένδε πάλιν, προσταχθέ ν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου 
Μένωνα ἄγειν εἰς Ἑλλήσποντον, ὠχόμην. Dem. Polycl. 1210, 5. 
Παρεκελεύοντό τε, ἀδύνατον ὃν ev νυκτὶ ἄλλῳ τῳ σημῆναι. THUC. 

Vu 44 Ἕ @ ᾽ ἔφ c Ko ΙΝ “ ‘ t 7 , ε ss 
Wi, 44. “Eyoy, ἔφη ὁ Κῦρος, οἶμαι, ἅμα μὲν συναγορευόντων ἡμῶν, 
ἅμα δὲ καὶ αἰσχρὸν ὃν τὸ ἀντιλέγειν, κιτιλ. XEN. Cyr. II, 2, 20. 
(The genitive belongs under ὃ 110, 1. See § 111.) ᾿Αντιπαρε- 
σκευάζετο ἐρρωμένως, ws μάχης ἔτι Sen cov, on the ground that there 


§ 111.] ACCUSATIVE ABSOLUTE. 225 


would still he need of a battle. Ib. VI, 1, 26. (See Remark, below.) 
Οἱ δὲ τριάκοντα, ὡς ἐ ξὸν ἤδη αὐτοῖς τυραννεῖν ἀδεῶς, προεῖπον, K.T-A., 
i. 6. thinking that it was now in their power, &c. Id. Hell. II, 4,1. Ἦ 
γὰρ νοεῖς θάπτειν σφ᾽, ἀπόρρητον πόλει (sc. ὄν), when it is forbidden 
to the city. Sopu. Ant. 44. 


Remark. The accusative absolute may take the same particles 
as the genitive absolute (§ 110, 1, Note 1). It may also omit the 
Participle ὄν. (See the last two examples, above.) 


Note 1. Even the Participles of personal verbs sometimes stand 
with their nouns in the accusative absolute, in all genders and num- 
bers, if they are preceded by ὡς (used as in § 109, Note 4), or bv 
ὥσπερ, as if. E. g. 

Alo καὶ τοὺς υἱεῖς of πατέρες ἀπὸ τῶν πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων εἴργουσιν, 
ὡς τὴν μὲν τῶν χρηστῶν ὁμιλίαν ἄσκησιν οὖσαν τῆς ἀρετῆς. τὴν 
δὲ τῶν πονηρῶν κατάλυσιν (sc. οὖσαν). XEN. Mem. I, 2, 20. Φίλους 
κτῶνται ὡς βοηθῶν δεόμενοι, τῶν δ᾽ ἀδελφῶν ἀμελοῦσιν, ὥσπερ ἐκ 
πολιτῶν μὲν γιγνομένους φίλους, ἐξ ἀδελφῶν δὲ οὐγιγνομένους; 
as if friends were made from fellow-citizens, and were not made from 
brothers. Ib. II, 3,3. Μέγιστον οὕτω διακεῖσθαι τὰς γνώμας ὑμῶν, ὡς 
ἕκαστον ἑκόντα προθύμως ὅ τι ἂν δέῃ ποιήσοντα. DEM. Sym. 182, 
8. (See § 113, N. 10, c.) 

Note 2. The accusative absolute used personally without ὡς or 
ὥσπερ is very rare. It occurs chiefly with the neuter of Participles 
which are regularly impersonal. E. g. 

Προσῆκον αὐτῷ τοῦ κλήρου μέρος ὅσονπερ ἐμοί. ISAE. V, ὃ 12. 
Ταῦτα δὲ γινόμενα, πένθεα μεγάλα τοὺς Αἰγυπτίους καταλαμβάνει. 
Hor. Il, 66. Ἤδη ἀμφοτέροις μὲν δοκοῦν ἀναχωρεῖν, κυρωθὲν δὲ 
οὐδὲν, νυκτός τε ἐπιγενομένης, οἱ μὲν Μακεδόνες .. . ἐχώρουν ἐπ᾿ οἴκου. 
Tuuc. IV, 125. Δόξαντα δὲ ταῦτα καὶ περανθέντα, τὰ στρα- 
τεύματα ἀπῆλθε. XEN. Hell. ΠῚ, 2, 19. Δόξαν ἡμῖν ταῦτα occurs 
in ΡιΑτ. Prot. 314 C, where we may supply ποιεῖν. 


§ J. As the Participle in the genitive (or accusative) 
absolute denotes the same relations (time, cause, &c.) as the 
Participle in its ordinary construction (§ 109), both may be 
used in the same sentence, and be connected by conjunctions. 
When several Participles denoting these relations occur in 
any sentence, those which belong to substantives already con- 
nected with the main construction agree with those substan- 
tives in case, while those which refer to some new subject 
stand with that subject in the genitive absolute; any which 
are impersonal standing in the accusative absolute. E. g. 


Οἱ μὲν Ἕλληνες στραφέντες παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ταύτῃ προσιόντος 
108 ο 





226 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 111. 


(se. τοῦ βασιλέως) καὶ δεξόμενοι, they prepared themselves with a 
view to his (the King’s) coming up and to receiving him. Xen. An. I, 
10, 6. Τῆς yap ἐμπορίας οὐκ οὔσης, οὐδ᾽ ἐπιμιγνύντες ἀδεῶς 
ἀλλήλοις, ...vepopevol τε τὰ ἑαυτῶν, . .. ἀδηλὸν ὃν ὁπότε τις 
ἐπε λθὼν καὶ ἀτειχίστων ἅμα ὄντων ἄλλος ἀφαιρήσεται, τῆς τε καθ' 
ἡμέραν. ἀναγκαίου τροφῆς πανταχοῦ ἂν ἡγούμενοι ἐπικρατεῖν, οὐ 
χαλεπῶς ἀπανίσταντο. ΤῊσυσ. 1, 2. Καὶ πάντα διαπραξάμενος ἐν 
τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ (Κλέων), καὶ Ψηφισαμένων ᾿Αθηναίων αὐτῷ τὸν πλοῦν, 
τῶν τε ἐν Πύλῳ στρατηγῶν ἕνα προσελόμενος; τὴν ἀναγωγὴν διὰ 
τάχους ἐποιεῖτο. Id. IV, 29. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης τοῖς Πελοποννησίοις ὕπο- 
πτὸος ὦν, καὶ ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν ἀφικομένη ς ἐπιστολῆς ὥστ᾽ ἀποκτεῖναι; vro- 
χωρεῖ παρὰ Τισσαφέρνην. Id. VIII, 45. 

See the examples collected by Kriiger, Vol. I, § 56, 14, 2; and 
his note to Tuvuc. IV, 5, 1. 


§ 112. The Participle may be joined with certain 
verbs to restrict their meaning to particular actions, 
in a sense which often resembles that of the Infinitive 
($ 92,1). Such a Participle may agree in case with 
either the subject or the object of the verb. 


1. The Participle is thus used especially with verbs signi- 
fying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease (or 
cause to cease), to repent, to be weary of, to be pleased, dis- 
pleased, or ashamed, to represent (as in a poem), to find. 

Further, after verbs signifying to overlook or to allow (wepto- 
ράω, ἐφοράω, with περιεῖδον and ἐπεῖδον, sometimes εἶδον) the 
Participle is used in the sense of the object Infinitive, the Pres- 
ent and Aorist Participles differing merely as the same tenses 
of the Infinitive would differ in similar constructions (8 19, 1; 


§ 23,1). See § 24, Note2. E.g 


σ. 

(α.) “Apfopa λέγων, I will begin to speak. Piat. Symp. 186 B. 
Παῦσαι λέγουσα; cease speaking. Eur. Hippol. 706. (So ἀπειπεῖν 
λέγων.) Οὐκ ἀνέξομαι ζῶσα, I shall not endure to live. Ib. 355. 
Τὴν φιλοσοφίαν παῦσον ταῦτα λέγουσαν, cause philosophy to stop 
saying this. Puat. Gorg. 482 A. Kal ἐγὼ τοῖς ἐρωτῶσι χαίρω 
ἀποκρινόμενος, I like to answer, &c. Id. Prot. 818 D. Τῷ μέν 
pa χαῖρον νοστήσαντι, they rejoiced in his return. Od. XIX, 463. 
Τῆς Αἰολίδος χαλεπῶς ἔφερεν ἀπεστερημένος, he took tt hardly 
that he was deprived of Aeolis. XeN. Hell. IL, 2, 13. Αἰσχύνομαι 
λέγων, Iam ashamed to say. (For αἰσχύνομαι λέγειν, see below, 
N. 6.) ᾿Αποκάμνω τρέχων, 1 am weary of running. Τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου 
δεσμώτας μετεμέλοντο ἀποδεδωκότες, they repented of having given 
them up. Tuuc. V, 35. Πεποίηκε τοὺς ἐν “Atdov τὸν ἀεὶ χρόνον 
τιμωρουμένους, he has represented those in Hades as suffering 


§ 112, 2.] PARTICIPLE WITH VERBS. 227 


punishment. PLAT. Gorg. 525 E. EfSpev δ᾽ εὐρύοπα Κρονίδην ἄτερ 
ἥμενον ἄλλων, she found him sitting apart. Tl. 1,498. So I, 27. 


(b.) Μὴ περιίδωμεν ὑβρισθεῖσαν τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ κατα- 

ρονηθεῖσαν; let us not allow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised. 
soc. Archid. 138 A. 8 108. Μή μ᾽ ἰδεῖν θανόν θ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἀστῶν, not to 
see me killed. Eur. Orest. 746. TAjvai σε δρῶσαν, that thou shouldst 
take courage to do. Soru. El. 943. See examples in § 24, N. 2. 


Remark. In Herodotus πειράομαι is often used with the Parti- 
ciple in the same way}; ἃ8 οὐκ ἐπειρᾶτο ἐπιὼν ὁ Κῦρος, Cyrus did 
not attempt to approach, I, 77. So I, 84; VI, 50. 

᾿Αποδείκνυμι and παρασκευάζω, in the meaning to render, may take 
the Participle as well as the Infinitive; as in XEN. Cyr. I, 6, 18, ἅμα 
καὶ τἀπιτήδεια μάλιστα ἔχοντας ἀποδείξειν καὶ τὰ σώματα ἄριστα 
ἔχοντας παρασκευάσειν. SO Arist. Plut. 210, βλέποντ᾽ ἀπο- 
δείξω σε, I will make you see. See these two verbs in Liddell and 


Scott’s Lexicon. 


2. The Participle used with the following verbs contains 
the leading idea of the expression: 6 ιατελέω, to continue, 
AavOdva, to escape the notice of, τυγχάνω, to happen, φθάνω, 
to anticipate, to get the start of, οἴχομαι, to be gone, and Gapi- 
tw, to be wont or to be frequent. 

So in poetry with κυρέω, fo happen; and in Herodotus 
with συμπίπτω, to happen, and with πολλός εἶμι, πολλὸς ἔγκειμαι; OF 
παντοῖος γίγνομαι; to be urgent ; and in Homer with βῇ for ἔβη. 
E. g. 

Διατελεῦσι τὸ μέχρι ἐμεῦ αἰεὶ ἐόντες ἐλεύθεροι, they still remain 

vee. HUpt. VII, 111. Ὅσην εὔνοιαν ἔχων ἐγὼ διατελῶ, as much 
good will as I continually bear. Dem. Cor. § 1. Ἔλαθεν (αὐτὴν) 
ad $évra πάντα καὶ katapr ex Oévra, everything took fire and was 
consumed before she knew ut. Tuuc. IV, 133. (See § 24, Note 1.) 
Φονέα τοῦ παιδὸς ἐλάνθανε βόσκων; he was unconsciously supporting 
the murderer of his son. Hpt. 1, 44. (See Rem. below.) Ἔτυχον 
ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ ὁπλῖται καθεύδοντες; soldiers happened to be sleeping 
in the market-place. Tuuc. IV, 118. Kara θεὸν yap τινα ἔτυχον 
καθήμενος ἐνταῦθα, I happened to be sitting there. Piat. Euthyd. 
272 E. Οἱ δ᾽ οὐκ ἔφθασαν πυθόμενοι τὸν πόλεμον, καὶ. - - ἧκον; 
they no sooner heard of the war than they came, &c. Isoc. Paneg. 58 
B. § 86. ἜΦφθησαν πολλῷ οἱ Σκύθαι τοὺς Πέρσας ἐπὶ τὴν γέφυραν 
ἀπικόμενοι, the Scythians came to the bridge much before the Per- 
sians. Hpt.1V, 136. Αὐτοὶ φθήσονται τοῦτο δράσαντες, they 
will be the first to do this for themselves. Puat. Rep. Il, 375 C. (See 
§ 24, Ν. 1.) Φθάνουσι ἐπ᾽ αὐτὰ καταφεύγοντες; they are the 
first to run to them. AESCHIN. Cor. § 248. Οἴχεται φεύγων; he has 
taken flight. πρεσβεύων ᾧχετο, he was gone on an embassy. XEN, 





228 THE PARTICIPLE. [§ 112, 2. 


Cyr. V,1,3. Οὔ τι κομιζόμενός ye θάμιζεν, he had not been used 
to being thus cared for. Od. VIII, 451. Od θαμίζεις καταβαίνων 
εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ, you do not come down very often. Puat. Rep. 1, 
$28 Ὁ. 

Τοῦτον οἷσθ᾽ εἰ ζῶν κυρεῖ; dost thou know whether he is perchance 
living? Soru. Phil. 444. Πολλὸς ἦν λισσόμενος ὁ ξεῖνος, the 
stranger entreated urgently. Hor. IX, 91. Γέλων δὲ πολλὸς ἐνέ- 
κειτο λέγων τοιάδε, and Gelon spoke urgently as follows. Id. ὙΠ], 
158. Τότε παντοῖοι ἐγένοντο Σκύθαι δε όμενοι τῶν ᾿Ιώνων λῦσαι τὸν 
πόρον, they begged them in every way (lit. they took every form in 
begging them). Id. ΝῊ, 10. Συνεπεπτώκεε ἔρις ἐοῦσα, there had 
happened to be a quarrel. Id. 1, 82. By φεύγων; he took flight. 1]. 
Il, 665. (See § 97, N. 1.) 


REMARK. Aavédvw being an active verb, meaning to escape the 
notice of, must have an object expressed or understood. When no 
object is expressed, sometimes πάντας is understood, and sometimes 
a reflexive referring to the subject. Thus ἔλαθε τοῦτο ποιήσας may 
mean either he did this without any one’s knowing it (sc. πάντας); or 


he did this unconsciously (sc. ἑαυτόν). 


ΝΌΤΕ 1. ᾿Αρκέω, to be sufficient, and ἱκανός, ἡδίων, κρείσσων, Or 
βελτίων εἰμί are sometimes used in a personal construction with the 
Participle (like δῆλός εἰμι, &c., § 113, N. 1), where we should ex- 
pect an impersonal construction with the Infinitive. E. g. 

᾿Αρκέσω θνήσκουσ᾽ ἐγώ, it will be enough for me to die. Sopu. 
Ant. 547. (We should expect ἀρκέσει ἐμοὶ θνήσκειν.) Κρείσσων 
γὰρ ἦσθα μηκέτ᾽ ὧν ἢ ζῶν τυφλός. Id. O. T. 1868:1(ἃ. Ἡδίους ἔσεσθε 
ἀκούσαντες. Dem. Aristoc. 641, 9. 


Nore 2. As ἀνέχομαι; to endure, may govern either the ac- 
cusative or the genitive, it may take a Participle in either case 
agreeing with the object. Thus we may say either ἀνέχεταί τινα 
λέγοντα; Or ἀνέχεταί τινος λέγοντος; he endures any one’s say- 


ing. 


Note 3. The phrase οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις (or οὐκ ἂν φθάνοιτε), you 
could not be too soon, is used with the Participle as an exhortation, 
meaning the sooner the better. ‘The third person, οὐκ av φθάνοι; 
is sometimes used, meaning, it might as well happen now as ever (for 
it must happen). See Passow. 


Nore 4. The Participle dv is sometimes omitted in the construc- 
tions of 8112. E. g. 

Ei δέ τι τυγχάνει ἀηδές (se. ὄν) Ῥ ΚΑΤ. Gorg. 502 Β. 

Norte 5. Λανθάνω is sometimes followed by ὅτι and a finite verb, 


as in XEN. Mem. III, 5, 24. When it is used impersonally, it regu 
larly takes ὅτι. 


Nore 6. Some verbs of this class are followed by the Infinitive 
as well as by the Participle; generally, however, with some differ. 


- ς Gg 
§ 113.] PARTICIPLE WITH VERBS. 229 


ence in meaning. Thus αἰσχύνομαι λέγων means 7 am ashamed to 
say (but do say); αἰσχύνομαι λέγειν means I am ashamed io aay 
(and therefore do not say). So ἀποκάμνω Touro ποιῶν; εἶ rages 
of doing this ; but ἀποκάμνω τοῦτο ποιεῖν». I cease to do his i 
(See Passow, or Liddell and Scott, under these words ; 


« 


weariness. | ott, | 1 i 
and Passow under ἄρχομαι.) See περιιδεῖν τὴν γῆν τμηθῆναι; 
Truc. IL, 20; and περιιδεῖν αὐτὴν τμηθεῖσαν; II, 18; where it is 
difficult to detect any difference in meaning. See, however, Krii- 


ger’s note on I, 35. 
Note 7. The Aorist (seldom the Perfect) Participle may be 
: BD, pane mae σε asc te 
joined with the subject of exo, forming a periphrastic Perfect. This 
s8 especially common in Sophocles and Euripides. E. g. 
‘ Β΄. , 3, 9 
τὸν μὲν mpoTiaas, τὸν δ᾽ ἀτιμάσας ἐχει. Sopa. Ant. 22. So 
Eur. Med. 33 and 90. Πολλὰ χρήματα ¢xoper ἀνηρπακότες- 


Xen. An. I, 3, 14. | ‘ 
For a similar periphrasis to express the Future Perfect, see § 29, 
Note 4; and § 108, Note 6. 


Note 8. The Participles βουλόμενος, θελων; ἡδόμενος; 
προσδεχόμενος, and ἐλπόμενος sometimes agree in case 
with a dative, which depends on εἰμί OF OD ἃ verb signifying to 
come or to happen; the whole forming a periphrasis for the 
verb of the Participle. Εἰ. δ. 

Ἔστιν αὐτῷ βουλόμενῳ: it is to him wishing it, 1. 6. he wishes at. 
Kai προσδεχομένῳ μοι τὰ τῆς ὀργῆς ὑμῶν ἐς ἐμὲ γεγένηται, 1. Θ. 
1 have been expecting the mantfestations of your anger towards me. 
Tuuc. 11, 60. 


§ $13. The Participle is used also with many verbs 
signifying to see, to perceive, to know, to hear or learn, to 
remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to ae- 
knowledge, and with ἀγγέλλω, to announce. The Parti- 
ciple here resembles the Infinitive in indirect discourse 
(§ 92, 2), each tense representing the corresponding 
tense of the Indicative or Optative. 

The Participle may belong to either the sulject or the 
object of these verbs, and agree with it in case. K. g. 


Μέμνημαι αὐτὸν τοῦτο ποιήσαντα, Ϊ remember that he did this; 
μέμνημαι τοῦτο ποιήσας, 1 remember that I did this. (In the first 
case ἐποίησεν is represented ; 1n the second, ἐποίησα.) Οἰδε τούτους 
εὖ πράξοντας, he knows that they will prosper ; οἷδε αὑτὸς εὖ πράξων, 
he knows that he himself will prosper. δείξω τοῦτον ἐχθρὸν ὄντα; 1 





230 THE PARTICIPLE. [8 118. 


shall prove that he is an enemy; δειχθήσεται οὗτος ἐχθρὸς Sv, he will 
be proved to be an enemy. 

E or other examples see § 73, 2; where examples of the Participle 
with dy after these verbs may be found. See also § 41. 


Note 1. The Participle is used in the same way with 
δῆλός εἶμι and φανερός εἶμι. Eig. 


> 
δὰ ,) >? >? Φ . 

— T hv οἰόμενος. k.T.X., 16 was evident that he thought, &c. 
XEN. An. II, 5, 27. (This is equivalent to δῆλον ἦν ὅτι οἴοιτο. 
See § 112, N. 1.) See below, Note 7. ᾿Απεκόμενοι μὲν φανεροί 
ge πόλιν, it ts evident that they came to the city Oasis 

oF 7 ‘ , ‘ ~ este 

aE II, 26. So with φανερὸν ποιέω : as φανερὸν πᾶσιν ἐποίησαν 
οὐκ ἰδίᾳ πολεμοῦντες they made it evident to all that they were not 
fighting for themselves. Lycura. Leocr. p. 154, § 50. 
TT ‘ed . Φ . 

_Note 2. When any of these verbs has for its object an accusa- 
tive of the reflexive pronoun referring to its subject, the Participle 
agrees with the reflexive. Thus we may have δείξω ἐμαυτὸν τοῦτο 
πεποιηκότα, I shall show that I have done this, for δείξω τοῦτο we- 
TOLNK@S. 

Nore 3. Ifthe Participle of an zmpersonal verb is used in 
this construction, it must stand in the neuter singular (of 
course without a noun). The following example includes this 
and also the ordinary construction : — 

Πειράσομαι δεῖξαι καὶ μετὸν τῆς πόλεως ἡμῖν καὶ πεπονθότα 
ἐμαυτὸν οὐχὶ προσήκοντα, 1 shall try to show not only that we have 
rights in the city, but also that I have suffered, ἕο. Dem. Eubul. 1299 


4, yf 1 0 is >C ἜΘ 7 ) 7 i ὶ ; 
. ( he direct discourse 18 μέτεστι τῆς πόλεως ἡμῖν, καὶ πέπονθα 
αὐτός.) See ὃ 111. 


ΟΝΟΤΕ 4. Some verbs which regularly take the Infinitive in in- 
direct discourse (δ 92, 2) occasionally take the Participle. E. g. 
Νόμιζε ἄνδρα ἀγαθὸν ἀποκτείνων, think that you ; 
o T are putting t 
death a good man. XEN. An. VI, 6, 24. ' τἀν icing 


Note 5. The Participle ὧν may be omitted here Ww 
as 
the verbs of § 112. y ? ell as after 


Note 6. When σύνοιδα and συγγιγνώ oxo are followed 
by a dative of the reflexive pronoun referring to the subject of 
the verb, the Participle can stand either in the dative agreeing 
with the reflexive, or in the nominative agreeing with the sub- 
ject ; as σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ ἠδικημένῳ (or 7dexnpevos), Lam con- 
scious (to myself) that I have been wronged. 


NoTE 7. The verbs included in § 113 may also be followed by 
a clause with ὅτι, instead of the more regular Participle. When 


§ 113.] Ὡς WITH THE PARTICIPLE. 231 


δῆλόν ἐστιν and φανερόν ἐστιν are used impersonally, they regularly 
take a clause with ὅτι. (See § 112, N. 5.) 


Norte 8. Most of these verbs are also found with the Infinitive. 
(See Passow, or Liddell and Scott.) But οἶδα takes the Infinitive 
only when it means (fo know how. Thus οἶδα τοῦτο ποιεῖν means 
I know how to do this, but οἶδα τοῦτο ποι ὦν means I know that I am 


doing this. 


Nore 9. Verbs signifying to remember or to know may be fol- 
lowed by ὅτε (when) and the Indicative, if a particular occasion 18 
referred to with emphasis. Εἰ. g. 

El yap μέμνησαι or ἐγώ σοι ἀπεκρινάμην, for if you remember (the 
time) when I answered you, &c. Prat. Men. 79 ἢ. Oic6’ ὅτε 
χρυσέοις ἐφάνη σὺν ὅπλοις. Eur. Hee. 112. 


Note 10. (a.) ‘Qs is sometimes prefixed to the Participle in 
connection with the verbs of § 113. It implies that the Participle 
expresses the idea of the subject of the leading verb, or that of some 
other person prominently mentioned in the sentence. (See § 109, 
N. 4.) When this is also implied by the context (as it usually is in 
such sentences), the ὡς merely adds emphasis to the expression. Thus 
ἴσθι ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχοντα means know that this is so; but ἴσθι ὡς ταῦτα 
οὕτως ἔχοντα means know that you may assume this tobe so. EK. g. 


Ὡς μηδὲν εἰδότ᾽ ἴσθι μ᾽ ὧν ἀνιστορεῖς, understand (that you must 
look uvon) me as knowing nothing of what you seek. Sopu. Phil. 
253. Qs μηκέτ᾽ ὄντα κεῖνον ἐν φάει νόει, think of him as no longer 
living. Ib. 415. ‘Qs ταῦτ᾽ ἐπίστω Spope ν᾽, οὐ μέλλοντ᾽ ἔτι, under- 
stand that you may assume these things to be going on, &c. Ib. 567. 
Ως μὴ ᾽μπολήσων ἴσθι τὴν ἐμὴν φρένα, be assured that you will not 
buy me off from my determination. Sopnu. Ant. 1063. Δηλοῖς δ᾽ ὥς 
τι σημανῶν νέον, you show that you have something new in your mind 
to disclose. Ib. 242. Δῆλος ἦν Κῦρος os σπεύδων, it was evident (lo 
the minds of the soldiers) that Cyrus was in haste. ΚΕΝ. An. I, 5, 9. 
Πατέρα τὸν σὸν ἀγγελῶν ws οὐκ ἔτ᾽ ὄντα, (he comes) to announce that 
your father is no more. SOPH. O. T. 956. (In vs. 959, the messenger 
himself says εὖ ἴσθ᾽ ἐκεῖνον θανάσιμον Be βήκοτα.) 

The force of ὡς here can seldom be expressed in English. 


(b.) The Participle thus joined with ὡς may stand with its sub- 
stantive in the genitive or accusative absolute. This sometimes 
happens even when the substantive would naturally be the object 
of the verb of knowing, &c., so that if the ws were omitted, the ac- 
cusative would be used (as ina). E. δ. 


Ὡς ὧδ᾽ ἐχόντων τῶνδ᾽ ἐπίστασθαί σε χρή. you must understand 
that this is so. Sopu. Aj. 281. Here the genitive absolute has at 
first the appearance of a dependent clause ; but ὡς does not mean 
that, and the literal translation would be, this being so (as you may 
assume), you must understand it to be so. (See Schneidewin’s note 





232 THE PARTICIPLE. [8 113. 


on the passage.) ‘Qs τοίνυν ὄντων τῶνδέ σοι μαθεῖν πάρα, since this 
is 80, you may learn it, 1. 6. you may learn that this is so. AESCH. 
Prom. 760. ‘Qs πολέμου ὄντος παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ; shall I an- 
nounce from you that there is war? lit. assuming that there is war, 
shall I announce it from you? Xen. An. Il, 1, 21. ‘Qs πάνυ μοι 
δοκοῦν; . -. οὕτως ἴσθι, know that I think so very decidedly, lit. since 
(as you must understand) this seems good to me, be sure of it. Id. 


Mem. [V, 2, 30. 


(c.) We sometimes find the Participle with ὡς even after verbs 
and expressions which do not regularly take the Participle by § 113. 
E. g. 

‘Qs ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς, οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε, be 
of this opinion, that I shall ¢ go, &e. XEN. An. I, 3,6. So Tauc. VU, 
15. Ὅταν ὡς πετόμενοι ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ διανοῶνται, when in their sleep 
they fancy themselves Slying. Piat. Theaet. 158 B. Ὡς τοίνυν μὴ 
ἀκουσομένων, οὕτως διανοεῖσθε, make up your minds then that we 
shall not hear, lit. since then (as you must know) we shall not hear, sc 
make up your minds. Piat. Rep. 1,821 Ὁ. ‘Qs a τῶν 
ἐμὲ μηδεὶς λεγέτω, let no one speak of me as likely to be the general, 
XEN. An. I, 3,15. Οὕτω σκοπῶμεν, ὡς τάχ᾽ ἂν, εἰ τύχοι, καὶ τούτων 
κἀκείνων συμβάντων, let us look αἱ the case, assuming that both this 
and that — perhaps happen if chance should have i so. Dem. 
Aristoc. 638, 25. (Literally, since (as we may assume) both this and 
that might perhaps happen if it should chance to be so, let us look at it 


in this light.) For ἄν, see ὃ 41, 3. 


ReMARK. The examples included in Note 10 (0) and (c) belong 
properly under § 109, μᾷ 4. (See also ὃ 110, 1, N. 1; and the last 
example under § 110, 2, N. 1.) 3 


§ 114, 2.] VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -τέος. 


CHAPTER VII. 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN «τέος. 


. / . ῃ 
8 484. The verbal in -τέος is used both in a per 
sonal and an impersonal construction. 


1. In the personal construction the verbal is always 
passive in sense; expressing necessity (like the Latin 
Participle in -dus) and agreeing with its subject in case. 

I εν oO 
K. g. 
᾿Ωφελητέα σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστί, the city must be benefited by you. 


XEN. Mem. ΠῚ, 6, 3. ἔΑλλας (vais) ἐκ τῶν ξυμμάχων μεταπεμ- 
πτέας εἶναι (ἔφη), he said that others must be sent Sor. Tuuc . VI, 25. 
Ov vag. πρὸ τῆς ἀληθείας τιμητ έος ἀνὴρ, ἀλλ᾽ ὃ λέγω ῥητέον. PLAT. 
Rep. X, 595 C. So VIII, 561 C. Φράζοντες ὡς οὔ σφι περιοπτέη 
ἐστὶ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἀπολλυμένη. Hot. VII, 168. 


Note. The substantive denoting the agent is here in the dative, 
as in the impersonal construction. 


2. In the impersonal construction (which is the most 
common) the verbal stands in the neuter of the nom- 
inative singular (sometimes plural) with ἐστί expressed 
or understood, and is regularly active in sense. The 
expression is equivalent to δεῖ, ἐξ is necessary, with the 
Infinitive active or middle of the verb from which the 
verbal is derived. 

Active verbals of this class may take an object in the 
same case which would follow their verbs. The agent 
is generally expressed by the dative, sometimes by the 
accusative. Εἰ. g. 


Ταῦτα ἡμῖν (or ἡμᾶς) ποιητέον ἐστί, we must do this, equivalent 
to ταῦτα ἡμᾶς δεῖ ποιῆσαι. (See Rem. 2.) Οἰστέον rade, ut ts 
necessary to bear these things. Eur. Orest. 769. ᾿Απαλλακτέον 
αὐτοῦ (τοῦ eee καὶ αὐτῇ τῇ Wyn θεατέον αὐτὰ τὰ πράγματα. 
ΡῬγατ. Phaed. 66 Ε. (Δεῖ ἀπαλλάττεσθαι αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῇ ψυχῇ 





234 VERBALS IN -réos. [8. 114, 2. 


id ΄ 
θεᾶσθαι τὰ πράγματα.) φημὶ δὴ διχῇ βοηθητέον εἶναι “ae ~ 
γμασιν ὑμῖν, that you must give assistance in two ways. Dem. ὌΝ ἐὰν ς 
Τί ἂν αὐτῷ ποιητέον ein; what would he be obliged todo? XEN. 
Mem. I, 7, 2. ᾿Ἐψηφίσαντο πολεμητέα εἰναι (ΞΞ δεῖν πολεμεῖν), 
they voted that they must go to war. THuc. I, 88. Τὴν χώραν, ἐξ ἧς 
αὐτοῖς ὁρμωμενοις πολεμητέα ἦν. Td. Vi, 50. Οὔτε μισθοφο- 
ρητέον ἄλλους ἣ τοὺς στρατευομένους, οὔτε μεθεκτέον τῶν = 
γματων πλείοσιν ἣ πεντακισχιλίοις. Id. VIL, 65. (Here both t - 
accusative and the dative of the agent are found.) See Rem. 2. 
Ἡμῖν δὲ ξύμμαχοι ἀγαθοὶ, obs οὐ παραδοτεα τοῖς Αθηναίοις > ἤβμῃς 
οὐδὲ δίκαις καὶ λόγοις διακριτέα μὴ λόγῳ καὶ (ἡμᾶς) αὐτοὺς B α- 
πτομένους, ἀλλὰ τιμωρητέα ἐν τάχει καὶ παντι a (= ods οὐ 
δεῖ ἡμᾶς παραδοῦναι, κιτ.λ.). Id. I, 86. Ἴτεον ἂν ey —— 
it would be best for us to go and see her. XEN. Mem. Il, 11, 1. 
(Ἡμᾶς is understood.) Οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ φαμὲν ἑκόντας ἀδικητέον εἶναι. 
Ῥιατ. Crit. 49 A. ᾿Ατὰρ οὐ γυναικῶν οὐδέποτ᾽ ἔσθ᾽ ἥττητέα ἡμῖν 
(ΞΞ οὐ γυναικῶν δεῖ ἡττᾶσθαι), but we must never be beaten by women. 
Arist. Lys. 450. So Sopu. Ant. 678. 


Norte. A sentence sometimes begins with an impersonal verbal 
in -réov and is continued with an infinitive, the latter depending on 
δεῖ implied in the verbal. E. g. hi ΤᾺ | 

Πανταχοῦ ποιητέον ἃ ἂν κελεύῃ ἡ πόλις καὶ ἡ πατρὶς, ἣ πείθειν 
αὐτήν. ῬΙΑΤ. Crit. 51 B. | | 

REMARK 1. The same impersonal construction is found in 


Latin, but very seldom with verbs which take an object ——- 
tive; as Eundum est tibi (ἰτέον ἐστί σοι), — Morve ndum est — ie 
— Bello utendum est nobis (τῷ πολέμῳ χρήστεον — pad Pot mus 
employ war. See Madvig’s Latin Grammar, 3 421, a and ὃ). 


REMARK 2. The dative and the accusative of the agent are both 
allowed with the verbal in -réov (or -réa) ; although in the equiva- 
lent construction of δεῖ with the Infinitive the accusative 18 the only 
form regularly used. ‘Thus we can say τοῦτο ἢ μὲν ποιητέον OF τοῦτα 
ἡμᾶς ποιητέον, but only τοῦτο ἡμᾶς δεῖ ποιεῖν. 


AFrPRR PLZ. 


I. On THe RELATIONS OF THE GREEK OPTATIVE TO THR 
SUBJUNCTIVE AND THE INDICATIVE.* 


From the time of the Alexandrian grammarians a special mood 
called the Optative (ἔγκλισις εὐκτική) has been recognized in Greek 
as distinct from the Subjunctive (ἔγκλισις ὑποτακτική). The an- 
cient classification has been called in question in later times, and 
many grammarians of high authority have adopted or favored a 
union of the Subjunctive and Optative in one mood, to be called 
the Subjunctive or Conjunctive, in which the Subjunctive (com- 
monly so called) is to supply the primary tenses, and the forms 
commonly assigned to the Optative the secondary tense. Thus the 
Present Optative would be called an Imperfect Subjunctive; ποιῶ 
and ποιοῖμι, for example, being supposed to bear the same relation 
to each other as faciam and facerem in Latin. 

This was first reduced to a systematic form by Kiihner, who, 1n- 
deed discards the common names Subjunctive and Optative (except 
as explanatory terms), and adopts the cumbrous expressions “ Con- 
junctive of the primary tenses” and “ Conjunctive of the secondary 
tenses.” Rost, in his Griechische Grammatik, § 118, says: “ The so- 
called Optative is nothing but a peculiar form of the Subjunctive, 
and stands to the Greek Subjunctive in the same relation as in 
other languages the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive to the 
Present and Perfect.” Donaldson in his New Cratylus (p. 617, 2d 
ed.) says: “It has long been felt by scholars on syntactical grounds, 
that, considered in their relations to each other and to the other 
moods, they [the Subjunctive and Optative] must be regarded as 
differing in tense only.” Again (p. 618): “These moods have no 
right to a separate classification.” Crosby, in his Grammar, § 591, 
says of this classification, that “it deserves the attention of the 
student, although it is questionable whether it is best to discard the 
old phraseology.” 

As the classification of Kiihner has been introduced into many 
elementary grammars, so that many boys are now taught to call the 
tenses commonly known as the Present and Perfect Optative by 
the strange names of Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, the 
esta nest peieeesepepnespsisnesngmasaapnugils sal 


* Reprinted, with a few changes, from the Proceedings of the American 
Academy of Arts and Sciences for Jan. 8, 1861: Vol. V. pp. 96 -- 102. 





236 APPENDIX. 


uestion becomes not merely of theoretical, but eminently of prac- 
tical importance. In fact it meets every student, and more espe- 
cially every teacher of Greek grammar, the moment he reaches the 
paradigm of the regular verb. If it were merely a question of con- 
venience, therefore, it would be highly important to have it settled, 
for the sake of uniformity. 
The question What shall constitute a distinct mood in any lan- 


guage? must be settled to some extent arbitrarily. No precise rule 
will meet all cases; yet we may safely maintain that, when any 
series of verbal forms in which the chief tenses are represented ex- 
hibits a closer connection in form and use among its members than 
it bears as a whole to any corresponding series, it is entitled to the 
rank of an independent mood. ‘That this is true of the Latin Sub- 
‘unctive is clear; and it is equally clear that the Imperfect and 
Pluperfect of that mood have sufficiently strong bonds of connection 
with the Present and Perfect to prevent them from being marked 
off as a distinct mood. A merely superficial view of the relation of 
the Greek Subjunctive and Optative might lead us to the idea that 
the two combined would form a mood similar to the Latin Subjunce- 
tive, thus simplifying the Greek conjugation and introducing a new 
analogy with the Latin. But it is this fatal error of carrying the 
analogy between the Greek and Latin further than the connection 
of the two languages warrants, which has thrown this whole subject 
into confusion. When the Latin was looked upon as an offspring 
of the Greek, as the result of a union of the Aeolic dialect of Greece 
with barbarian languages in Italy, the presumption was decidedly in 
favor of such an analogy, and it would even have required strong 
proof to convince us of any radical difference in the modal systems 
of the two languages. But the more correct views now entertained 
of the origin of the Latin would rather lead us to believe that each 


language developed its syntax, and especially its modal system, in- » 


dependently. The modal system of the parent language of the 
Indo-European group is of course hopelessly unknown ; and yet the 
comparison of the Latin and Greek verb with the Sanskrit (as the 
oldest representative of the family) sometimes enables us to deter- 
mine special points in regard to the primitive forms with an ap- 
proach to certainty. Thus, to take the simplest case, when we find 
asti in Sanskrit meaning is, we may be sure that some similar form 
existed with that meaning in the parent language of the Sanskrit, 
the Greek, the Latin, the German, &c., from which ἐστί, est, ist, &e. 
were derived. So when we find a Potential mood in Sanskrit, 
which presents striking analogies both to the Greek Optative and 
to the Latin Subjunctive, and furthermore find the analogy extend- 
ing even to the Gothic, we must conclude that the primitive lan- 
guage contained the elements which the Greek developed into its 
Optative, and the Latin into its Subjunctive. (See Bopp’s Ver- 
gleichende Grammatik, 11. pp. 257-259.) Again, the absence in 
later Sanskrit of any form corresponding to the Greek Subjunctive 
might lead us to think that the Greek developed that mood by 


APPENDIX. 237 


itself: but in the Vedic dialect a few relics are found of a true Sub- 
junctive, with a long connecting-vowel as its characteristic; for 
example, patdli, bearing the same relation to the Present Indicative 
patdti as βούληται to βούλεται. This seems to show that a similar 
mood existed in the parent language. If this testimony can be 
relied on, we must conclude, not only that the Latin and Greek 
derived the rudiments of their modal forms from a common ances- 
tor, but that they inherited them from a period anterior to the 
separation of the Indian branch from the Indo-European family. 
We should therefore expect to find that the elements are generally 
the same in the two languages, but that the development is essen- 
tially different; and that the refinements in signification, for which 
the Greek modal forms are especially conspicuous, have been for 
the most part developed by each language within itself. 

Let us now examine the forms themselves, to see how far a paral- 
lel can be drawn betweeen the Greek and Latin moods. In clauses 
expressing a purpose or object after iva, ὅπως, &c., we certainly find 
the Subjunctive and Optative used like primary and secondary 
tenses of the same mood: thus where in Latin we have manet ut hoc 


faciat, and manebat ut hoc faceret, we have μένει ἵνα τοῦτο ποιῇ , and 


ἔμενεν ἵνα τοῦτο ποιοίη. But even in this case of strongest resem- 
blance there is no place for the Future Optative, which correspond¢ 
to the Future Indicative. Again, in clauses expressing general sup- 
positions after ἐάν or εἰ, or after relatives or temporal particles, de- 
pending on verbs which denote general truths or repeated actions, 
a correlation of the Subjunctive and Optative is found, analogous 
to that of the two divisions of the Latin Subjunctive ; for example, 
in ἐὰν τοῦτο ποιῇ θαυμάζουσιν, and εἰ τοῦτο ποιοίη ἐθαύμαζον, which 
are sometimes represented in Latin by such forms as si hoc faciat 
mirantur, and si hoc faceret mirabantur, although generally the In- 
dicative is preferred. Here, however, the analogy ceases, if we 
except certain cases of indirect question hereafter to be noticed, 
and a Homeric construction in relative sentences expressing a 
purpose, which almost disappears from the more cultivated lan- 
guage. 

Let us turn now to the Optative in wishes; for here, if anywhere, 
we may look for the primary meaning of this mood. From this use 
it derives its name; and especially this is its only regular use in 
independent sentences, except in apodosis with a. ~Here some 
have been so far misled by the supposed analogy of the Latin, as to 
translate the Present Optative by the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive ; 
but a slight examination will show that the Present and Aorist Op- 
tative are here so far from being secondary tenses of the Subjunc- 
tive, that they are equivalent to the Present Subjunctive in Latin, 
and refer to the future, while the Greek Subjunctive cannot even 
regularly stand in such expressions. Thus εἴθε εἴην is utinam sim, O 
that I may be ; εἴθε γένοιτο, utinam fiat, O that it may happen ; whereas 
ulinam esset and utinam factum esset correspond to εἴθε ἦν and εἴθε 
ἐγένετο. 


rh elena 





TIARA. ES UI RE NA! τα OU ee a AEN AL 8 lS TO OT AO: κου a tae 
. - - 8 . ; ialteeedpalalligtiemniabicaiamn baled κασεναα. μδμαθαπιαρ τω εὐνι. ἐσ. omnes maceration aedtate i eee 
wae “er - - crane -- rm 


238 APPENDIX. 


In ordinary protasis and apodosis the same relation is seen. The 
four Greek forms, ἐὰν ποιῇ. ἐὰν ποιήσῃ; εἰ ποιοίη; and εἰ ποιή- 
σειε, find in the Latin Subjunctive only one equivalent, st faciat. 
(For the first two the Latin generally preferred the Future or 
Future Perfect Indicative.) Here therefore the absurdity of classi- 
fying the last two as secondary forms of the first two, in conformity 
to a Latin analogy, is especially clear. What the Latin analogy 
would lead us to expect as secondary forms, the equivalents of s2 
faceret and si fecisset, can be expressed in Greek only by the Indica- 
tive. In apodosis the Optative with ἄν is equivalent to the pri- 
mary, not to the secondary, tenses of the Latin Subjunctive; thus, 
ποιήσαιμι ἄν is equivalent to faciam (not to fecissem, which would be 
ἐποίησα ἄν). Here likewise the Subjunctive cannot be used in 
Attic Greek. This analogy between the Optative and the primary 
tenses of the Latin Subjunctive might lead us even to the view that 
the latter ought rather to be called an Optative, for which view 
there are certainly much stronger reasons than for the opposite one 
which we are considering. 

An Homeric exception to the principles of the last two para- 
graphs (explained in § 49, 2, Note 6, and § 82, Remark 2 of the 
present work) has little or no weight in this discussion; for, al- 
though we find examples in which the Optative in conditional 
sentences and wishes is used like the secondary tenses of the Latin 
Subjunctive, the ordinary use of the Optative referring to the 
future in those constructions is perfectly well established in the 
Homeric language. It would be a mere gratuitous assumption to 
maintain that the exceptions (like Il. V, 311 and 388) represent the 
original idiom of the language. 

In indirect quotations and questions the Optative is used after 
past tenses, each tense of the Indicative or Subjunctive in the 
direct discourse being then changed to the corresponding tense of. 
the Optative. Thus, εἶπεν ὅτι ἃ δύναιτο ποιήσοι, he said that he would 
do what he could, implies that the direct discourse was 4 ἂν δύνω - 
μαι ποιήσω, I shall do what I may be able. Here the first Optative 
is the correlative of the Subjunctive; but it is quite as often the 
correlative of the Indicative, as when we say εἶπεν ὅτι ἃ δύναιτο 
ποιοίη, he said that he was doing what he could, where the direct dis- 
course is ἃ δύναμαι ποιῶ, J am doing what I am able. One tense 
of the Optative, the Future, can never represent a Subjunctive, as 
that mood has no corresponding tense; but it always represents a 
Future Indicative. Nothing more need be said to show the absurd- 
ity of calling this tense a secondary tense of the Subjunctive: The 
three remaining tenses of the Optative can with no more propriety 
be called secondary tenses of the Subjunctive than of the Indicative, 
for they represent both on precisely the same principles. This is 
especially obvious in regard to the Aorist, which has two distinct 
meanings in indirect questions, — one when it represents an Aorist 
Indicative, and another when it represents an Aorist Subjunctive, 
the direct form. Thus, ἠγνόει τί ποιήσειεν may mean either he 


APPENDIX. 239 


tnew not what he had done, or he knew not what he should do; as the 
direct question may have been either τί ἐποίησα ; what did Ido? or 
ri ποιήσω ; (Aor. Subj.), what shall I do? Strangely enough, this 
very class of sentences is supposed to furnish the most striking 
analogy between the Latin Subjunctive and the Greek Subjunctive 
and Optative combined. Non habet quo se vertat and non habebat quo 
se verteret are indeed equivalent to οὐκ ἔχει ὅπη τράπηται and οὐκ 
εἶχον ὅπη τράποιτο, but a single example like ἠρώτων αὐτὸν εἰ ava- 
πλεύσειεν, 1 asked him whether he had set sal (Dem. in Polyel. p. 
1223, 21), in which ἀναπλεύσειεν represents an Aorist Indicative 
(ἀνέπλευσας ;) shows that the argument proves too much. Indirect 
quotations and questions therefore afford us no more proof that the 
Optative is a secondary form of the Subjunctive, than that it 15 ἃ 
secondary form of the Indicative. 

Two tenses of the Indicative, the Imperfect and Pluperfect, have 
no corresponding tenses in the Optative, so that these are regularly 
retained in the Indicative in indirect discourse ; thus εἶπεν ὅτι ἐμά- 
xovro means he said that they had been | fighting, i. 6. he said ἐμάχοντο. 
A rare exception to the last principle shows conclusively the pro- 
priety of the names commonly given to the tenses of the Optative. 
The want of a tense in the Optative to represent the Imperfect 
Indicative in examples like the last was naturally felt as a defect; 
and in the Infinitive and the Participle this want was supplied by 
using the Present in a new sense to represent the Imperfect, the 
peculiar use being always denoted by something in the context. 
In a few instances we find the Present Optative used in the same 
way to supply the want of an Imperfect, the context making it clear 
that the tense is not used in its ordinary sense. Such an instance 
is found in Dem. Onet. I, 869, 123 ἀπεκρίναντο ὅτι οὐδεὶς μάρτυς 
παρείη, κομίζοιτο δὲ λαμβάνων καθ᾽ ὁποσονοῦν δέοιτο Αφοβος 
παρ᾽ αὐτῶν, they replied that no witness had been present, but that 
Aphobus had received the money from them, taking it in such sums as 
he happened to want. Here παρείη represents παρῆν, and κομίζοιτο 
represents ἐκομίζετο, which would ordinarily be retained in such 
asentence. See § 70, 2, Note 1 (0) of the present work. If now the 
name of Imperfect be given to the Present Optative in its ordinary 
use, (when it represents a Present of the direct discourse, and 18 
merely translated by an Imperfect to suit the English idiom,) what 
shall we call this true Jmperfect Optative, which really repre- 
sents an Imperfect Indicative, and stands where an Imperfect Indic- 
ative is the regular form ? 

We see then that the Optative was used in the whole class of con- 
structions krown as oratio obliqua, or indirect discourse, as the corre- 
lative not merely of the Subjunctive, but also of the Indicative, and 
that it possessed the power of expressing in an oblique form every 
tense of both those moods in a manner of which the Latin presents 
hardly a trace. In fact, this use of the Greek Optative presents 
one of the most striking examples of the versatility and flexibility 
of the language, and of its wonderful adaptation to the expression 





240 APPENDIX. 


of the nicest shades of thought of which the human mind is capable. 
This single use of the mood seems sufficient in itself to prevent us 
from assigning to it the subordinate rank of a secondary form 
attached to the Subjunctive. 





II. Own THE TIME DENOTED BY THE TENSES OF THE IN- 
FINITIVE WHEN THEY ARE PRECEDED BY THE ARTICLE 
AND HAVE A SUBJECT EXPRESSED. 


Tue able and instructive treatise of Madvig on the two uses of 
the Aorist Infinitive in Greek (in his Bemerkungen iiber einige 
Puncte der griechischen Wortfiigungslehre, published as a supplement 
to his Syntax der griechischen Sprache) contains the earliest com- 
plete statement of the ordinary uses of that tense. The same prin- 
ciple, as far as it refers to indirect discourse, is clearly stated in 
Sophocles’s Greek Grammar (published in the same year, 1847). 
But with these exceptions, no distinct statement had been made, 
either in elementary grammars or in more elaborate treatises, of the 
simple principle w hich distinguishes the use of the Aorist Infinitive 
in βούλεται ἐλθεῖν, he wishes to go, from that in φησὶν ἐλθεῖν, he says 
that he went. According to Madvig, however, the use of the Aorist 
Infinitive as a past tense is not confined to indirect discourse, but 
extends also to cases in which the Infinitive “has a subject ex- 
pressed and at the same time is preceded by the article.” ee 
principle was too hastily adopted, on Madvig’s high authority, 
the first edition of the present work ; and; as there seemed no ie 
ground for distinguishing the Aorist from the Present Infinitive in 
similar construction, the general principle was stated, that any tense 
of the Infinitive could retain its designation of time (as in indirect 
discourse) when it had at the same time the article and a subject. 
The same class of sentences which seemed to confirm Madvig’s view 
of the Aorist furnished also examples of the Present, and the use of 
this tense as an Imperfect made an exception here almost im- 
possible. 

A more careful review of all the examples quoted by Madvig, and 
of all that I have met with in reading since adopting his principle, 
has convinced me that the Aorist Infinitive here presents no pecu- 
liarity, and that it differs from the Present only in the ordinary 

way, by referring to a single or momentary act rather than toa 
repeated or continued act. The single ex xample quoted by Madvig 
in his Syntax (8 172) to support his ‘principle is Dem. F. L. Ρ 860, 
10, § 61: TO μηδεμίαν τῶν πόλεων ἁλῶναι πολιορκίᾳ μέγιστόν ἐστι 
σημεῖον τοῦ διὰ τούτους πεισθέντας αὐτοὺς ταῦτα παθεῖν, the fact 
that no one of the cities was taken by siege is the greatest proof that they 


APPENDIX. 241 


suffered these things, &c. In the later treatise he adds Tuvc. I, 
μὴς τὸ δι’ ἡμᾶς τ ὦ" αὐτοῖς μὴ βοηθῆσαι, --- XEN. Mem. 

I, 2, 1, Cyr. II, 2, 3, IV, 5, 12,—-Dem. Chers. p. 105, 28; § 65,— 
and Raat. Nub. 268. It will be seen that all these examples can 
be explained by the ordinary principle of the Aorist Infinitive stated 
above; that is, the Infinitive is a mere verbal noun, designating no 
time of itself, and is referred to special time only by the context, 
which in these examples happens to refer it to the past. But when 
the Infinitive with τοῦ expresses a purpose (where Madvig himself 
admits an exception), it is referred by the context or by the general 
meaning of the passage to the future: so in the following example 
from Dem. Cor. p- 236, 20, ὃ 33, where on Madvig’s principle the 
Infinitive must refer to the past: ἦν ev φόβῳ μὴ, εἰ πρὸ τοῦ τοὺς 
Φωκέας ἀπολέσθαι ψηφίσαισθε βοηθεῖν, ἐκφύγοι τὰ πράγματ᾽ αὐτόν, 
he was in fear lest, if before the Phocians should be destroyed you 
should vote to assist them, he might lose control of the business. 

Other cases in which the Aorist Infinitive might seem to retain 
its force as a past tense are satisfactorily explained by Madvig. 
On the whole, it would be difficult to establish an exception tothe 
general principle, that the Aorist Infinitive is a past tense only in 
indirect discourse, when it represents an Aorist Indicative after 
verbs of saying, thinking, &c. 





INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 





INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES 


AESCHINEs. 165. : 45 | APPIAN. 
ADDED IN THE THIRD AND FOURTH EDITIONS. In Timarch.— 205. 5 | Bell. Civ. | a ΒΞ 
“" " " 5 | 248. i 
ἱ 125 : 292. ' ᾿ ARISTOPHANES. 
§ 127. I : 45 232, ! g Acharn. 312 . 
De Falsa Legat.— 470. . 816 
eee | ae 45 | Aves, 36 
F § 145 (168). 697 
age | Page . age ὁ 151 (16 49 | 712 
Ὕ Tig Ϊ ᾿ ἢ 9 y ( 30) 5 . (14 ε 
AESCHINES. HoMER. Repub. IV, 434 A In Ctesiph.— | 747 


In Ctes.§ 10. =. δίῃ) X11. , 15 V, 460 A τ ΕΝ 760. 
$114. 207) Odyss. II, 27 ae ee | 786 
ΜΝ ΣΝ ΒΝ  ὴν ν 824. 
4 Ἔ5 SOPHOCLES. § 83 : ᾿ 835 
ARISTOPHANES. V, 216. 171 | Elect. 47 $90 . ὶ ae 865. 
Tom. te sw ΙΝ. τ 948 cers νῳ 90ὅ 
XI, 489. 129 1478 eran 907. 
XIII, 809 171 | Oed. Col. 1770. § 147 ‘ H 20 918 
Philoct. 232 . $177. ᾿ “1: 930. 
DEMOSTHENES. | Trachin. 984 ome. . ; 27 | 979 
De Falsa Legatione. PLATO. | AESCHYLUS. 100 
. 891,11. ὁ 159 99 sain Ἢ 
fice tus tna | Apol. 30 D “om - , ae | 
Gorg. 498 A. XENOPHON. a , a, | sept. 38 ᾿ . 184] ; 
Protag. 310 A Mem. IV. 3.1 a “i oe 9. , 111 | Equit. 112 
EURIPIDES. 313 C Dem. LV, ὁ, ° 253 . ; 250 , 187 | 696 . 


Alcest. 3886 . . 2 ae ee) ee τς i 
StF 3 | s aaa : ' ῥῶ 429 . _ 94 Lysistr. 450 
ee | oT filha ee 23 |. 511 
= ee ae 712... , Ψ Nubes, & 
| 1041 ee ν᾿. ὦ 86 | 63 
ADDITIONAL EXAMPLES (1878). im. st] ee 
- is . . | - 
Ὁ a ὩΣ ὧν 
AESCHINES, in Ctes. ὃ 60 . aa oe" Ι 211 | a "186. 187 
DEMOSTHENES, De Corona, p. 255, 2, § 88 . . Choeph. 246 bese ty 8 Suppl. 490 ἡ πὴ ge | oan ἐς i 241 
: 594 " 5 8607. . 185 


Herovotvs, 1,81. " ‘ . . ᾿ Ε 298 AnDOC 
Homer, Il. I, 22 ᾿ ᾿ ‘ , . oa 4 ° . ὃ ee 870 . ."»κ-.- 
τ, pl Myst 16,28 448 ὦ (Gap 7 ΣΝ 


PLATO, Men. 72 C . . : : δι, ‘ 493 3 
800 ANTIPHON. a ᾿ ᾿ 88 
505 . ᾿ 186 


τ ΟΝ ΕΒ. . , ‘ , . ι ' 
Pers. 912 as De Caed. Herod. 520 174 


SopHoc.es, Aj. 1183 . : ᾿ | 
TuucyDIbDEs, IV, 16 ‘ Prora 10 : 9 | p. 181, 36. §19 . 126] 5385. 156 
12. . 72) 188, 40. § 87. 7 | 613 . 181 





2 ped 


μὲ μι μαὶ μαὶ τῷ 
et μαὶ ὧι et “ἢ μι 


bo :9 
9O “Th CO 
O00 Ὁ Ol we Cr 





~] 


t 





244 


Nubes, 722 - 208 
792. ᾿ 110 

819 210 

904. 110 

1130 42 
1141. " 38 

1151 184 
1250. 129 

1255 174 
Ivy. 22 

1301 88 
1352. 37 

1383 111 
1426. 23 

1433 bi ae 
1436. 21, 43 

1466 a 68 

Pac. 480 . 194 
1179 130 
Plut. 210 227 
603 184 
Po ae 44 
Ran.1 . 182 
68 ‘ 191 

96 & 98 139 
298 . Φ 186 
462 . . ΒΕ 
δ08, 609 . 8ῦ, 185 
524 . . soo 
579 . 98 
586 61, 103 
695 199 
830 . 5. 
866 99 
871 178 
955 . 117 
1120 68 
1125 179 
1378 178 
1446 136 
1449 . 117 
1459 - ‘ 142 
Thesm. 372 . 418 
870 181 

Vesp. 283 154 
897 . . 185 


DEMOSTHENES. 


| I. p. 15, 28. § 28. 
| 10,8. § 28 


16, 25. 26 651, 118 | 
| II. p. 20, 12. § 8 


20,18.§8 1 


—" 
bo 


bo be 
[Oo OM 


81, 11. § 10 


84, 8. ὁ 20 
84, 17. § 21 
35, 1. ὁ 23 


Philipp. 
I. p. 40, 1. § 1 
ae a 


72, 25. § 29 
74, 24. § 87 
III. p. 110, 1. § 1 





$2, 16. ὁ 14. 


85, 18. § 25. 


INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


198 | Ill. p.114,15.§15 17 


188 | 
- 159 
13, 157 


20,27.§9 4, 131 | 


45 
137 
10, 108 
47 
189 


194 | 


196 
120 
120 
141 
188 





114, 20. § 15 17 

217 

183 

60 

84 

. 155 

125, 10. § 6 80 

126,19.§61 194 

128, 22.469 27,130 

128, 25. § 69 80 

129,14.§71 112 

130,11.§75 184 

130, 14. § 75 82 
De Corona. 


|p. 225,183.61 . 227 


197 | 


197 
71 
42 

181 

111 

216 
15 

216 


23 


144 
95 
33 

134 
95 

130 

119 

111 
49 

107 

128 

135 

128 

120 

184 

161 

103 
44 

131 

126, 

174 

79, 140 

139 

206 
13 

114 

15, 53 
63 
62 
140 
205 





232,20.§22. 221 
234,5.§26 . 161 
234,6.§26 . 197 
234, . 214 
236, 12. ὁ 32 . 75 
428. 9.08 . 28 
286, 20 . 81,240 
236, τ 
240, ; | a 
241, 137 
242, 111 
243, 195 
246, 98 
251, 95 
257, ! 215 
260, ! 101 
268, 86 
268, ! 188 
214, 119 
276, 115 
276, 23. 163 
284, 151 
291, ! 15 
291, 119 
295, 81 
296, 2 117 
301, : 213 
302, 117 
111 
58 
87 


“I Co mm CO 


© 


Pr “9 on 


ee 
_ 
DO DO et Or © 


μ- 
«Ὁ {ὌιιΦ'ο.'. Ὁ ΜΕ atti 
μι μι μὲ. μὰ μ΄ μι © OT CO CO CO CO 
ooo oc ὦ» σι 
δϑιμιΦ ὦ © & 
. . 


CoS δῇ δὰ ΒΘ bo ὃ ὃ ὃ καὶ 


846, 14. 
345, 27. 
847, 26. 


Ὁ. 350, 8. § 29 
861, 4. ὁ 832 . 
851 18.84.8. 
352, δ. 87. 
853, 14 & 18. § 39 
853, 24.§ 40 . 
354, 8. § 41 
855, 17. § 45 
855, 29. ὁ 47 
356, 10. § 48 
856, 13. § 48 
357, 3. § 51 
860,10.§61 . 
864, 11 & 12. § 74 


364, 18. 45, 
864, 25 : 
869, 

370, : 

872, 

378, 4. 

818, 2: 

879, 

979, 

379, 


$81, 5. § 129 ‘ 
$81,10.§130 15, 
387, 
387, 
388, 
888, 5 
888, 
990, ὅ. 
392, 
396, 30. 
402, 
409, : 
410, 18. 


3. 
439, 29. § 
441, 21. § 312. 
450, 27. § 342 
De Pace. 
p. 62,10. ὁ 20 199, 
De Chersoneso. 
Se 
92,21.§11 . 
98, 25. ὁ 8 . 
99, 14. ὁ 38 . 
De Symmoriis. 


p.178,17.§23 . 


182, 8. § 14. 


INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


134 
6 
168 
158 
158 
49 
161 
79 
197 
158 
157 
64 
240 
88, 
112 
158 
215 
183 
79 
84 
155 
151 
98 
200 
13, 
108 
17 
158 
15 
199 
14 
27 
165 
64 
202 


4, 160 


193 
188 
199 
23 
197 
183 
166 
74 
86 
15 


59 





De Rhodiis. 
Ρ. 197, 9. § 28 


De Megalopol. 
τ. 


In Leptinem. 
. 495, 20. § 127 
496, 8. § 129 . 
505, 9. § 157 
505, 19. ὁ 158. 


In Midiam. 


15. § 64 
6,1.§66 . 
3, 25. § 69 
3, 17. § 104. 
3, 20. § 104 

24.§ 105. 

26. § 151 

2. § 209 


15. § 211 


Androtionem. 


Aristocratem. 
3,11. §7 
20. § y ᾿ 


688, 27. 

In Timocratem. 
. 702, 26. ὁ 9 
711,8.§35 . 
721, 6. § 64 ; 
733, 20. § 106. 


In Aristog. I. 
p. 773, 1. § 11 
In Aphobum. 
I, p. 813, 4. § 1 
813, 20. § 2. 
814, 4. ὁ 8 
828, 23. § 48 


49, 73 


162 
209 
193 
127 
232 





245 


| I, p. 828, 25, 26.§49 29, 


152 
829,28.§52 . 104 
830, 8.§ 53 . 120 
831,5.§56 . 165 
831, 10-12.§56 59, 

2, 158 

833, 12-19.§63 95 
834,18.§66 . 155 
834, 24, 25. § 67 104, 
123 

II, p. 887, 10. ὁ δ᾽. 218 
837, 11. § 5 72 

839, 29. ὁ 14. 218 
842,9. 20 176 
842,14, 15.§21 49, 

104 

842, 16.§ 21. 128 

III, p. 846, 15.§6 128 
849, 24. 17 72 

852, 12. ὁ 25 204 


In Onetorem I. 

p. 865, 24. § 7 ae 
07, Lt. 20 
869, 9 &10.§19 153, 

164 

869, 12.§ 20 153, 239 
869, 18. § 20 
870, 11. § 28 
870, 27. § 25 

873, 8. § 88 
73, 10. § 33 
In Zenothemin. 
Ρ. 886, 1. 14. 84, 222 


In Apaturium. 
p- 900, 22.§25 . 199 
903,22.§84 . 142 


In Phaenippum. 
p. 1040,20.§5 . 40 


In Olympiodorum. 
p- 1112, 1.8 16 . 165 


In Timotheum. 
Ρ. 1194, 18.§35 . 165 
1194, 20. § 35 68,158 
1201,19.§58 . 101 


In Polyclem. 
p- 1210, 5. ὁ 12 224 
1223, 20,21.§55 29, 
151, 239 
1227,2.§67 . 165 
De Coron. Trierarch. 
.1228,28. 8. 9 


In Eubulidem. 
p-1299,4.§1 . 280 
1906. 6.46 3° 9 
1808, 2. 11 . 160 


Ρ 














246 INDEX TO THE 


p. 1308, 22.§16. 168 
1303, 25. ὁ 16 27, 128 
1312, 17. § 44 20, 106 
ἯΙ δὲ . δ. 
1820, 25. 4 10. 10ὅ 


DINARCHUS. 

In Demosth. p. 91,24 72 
EvcLIpD. 

1,9 a ae - 


EvURIPIDBs. 
Alcest. 11 


δῶ. . 
671 : 26, 
755 . muh 3 
758 
784 . 
801 
1072 . 
Androm. 61 
833 
757 
929 
Bacch. 343 
719 
Cycl. 131 
Elect. 126 
835 
484 . 
962 
967 
1039 
1061 . 
1124 
Hecub. 112 
730 
836 
839 
863 
1042 
1056 
1099 
1138 
Heracl. 248 
451 
αι Ν᾿ 
791 
Herc. Fur. 538 
605 . 
746 
1059 
1417 
Hippol. 346 
893 
567 
606 
1307 
1410 . 
Ion. 1560 


Iph. Aul. 462 
1478 
Iph. Taur. 688 
995 

1014 
1108 
1203 


Med. 1 
83 
79 
90 . ° 
941 = 
1151 (1120) 
1173 
1320 
Orest. 879. 
418 
680 . 
746 
769 
770 
1132 . 
1529 
Phoeniss. 92 
504. 
895 
1590 . 
1624 
Suppl. 1066 
1084 
Troad. 874 


Aeg. Frag. 5. ‘ 
Alemen. Frag. 103 
seller. - 206 
Ino, - ae 
εἰ { 424 
Hippol. “ 442 

ee “a 443 
Frag. Incert. 1057 


HERODOTUS. 





EXAMPLES. 


38 | I, 36 


204 
224 

86 
31 

5 
179 
177 
229 
211 
229 





37 
39 
42 
44 
44 
44 
61 
63 
67 
68 
68 
69 
75 
77 
82 
88 
84 
85 
89 
94 
99 
116 
129 
136 
153 
165 
165 
171 
187 
190 
199 
209 
II, 2 
13 
15 
25 


64 


III, 139 . 


IV, 46 
78 
118 
118 
118 
136 
156 
184 
V,25. 
49 
101 . 
VI, 9 
12 
23 
27 
45 
49 
50 
104 
108 
136 
VII, 5 
10 
10 
18 
53 
54 
111 
153 
154 
158 
168 
218 
220 
235 
VIII, 22 
85 
100 
148 
IX, 12 
91 
57 
61 


HEsIoD. 


HomeER. 
liad. 


INDEX TO THE 


I, 60 
61 
66 
81 
82 

107 
118 
120 
128 
132 
135 
136 
137 
189 
150 
151 
159 
161 
168 
166 
174 
178 
191 
198 
218 
281 
232 
242 
244 
255 
258 
262 
802 
322 
924 
338 
844 
358 
863 
408 . 
482 " 
487, 439 
465 ᾿ 
493 . 
498 
509 
518 
§22 
524 
555 
558 
564 
580 
582 
586 
589 
601 
II, 3 
8 
10 





EXAMPLES. 


56, 78 


107 | II, 36. 
98| 48, 45 
115} 80. 


109| 106, 10] 
144| 107,108. 


196 | 119 
δι! τ᾿. 
170] 139 
102 182. 
172; 214 
114; 236 
77 250 
151 252. 
55 259 
183 290 
204 322 
217 331 
158 364 
133 881 
108 


92 
155 
122 
131 
172 
110 
128 
172 
105 
196 
181 
112 
178 
182 
2038 

71 

9§ 
180 
115 

25 





247 


38 


‘ 
102 
8 
208 
196 
208 
179 
204 
204 
179 
112 
77 
174 
190 
143 
178 
102 
. ὃ. 
180 
228 
222 
168 
33 
182 
76 
48 
178 
197 
102 
104 
143 
155 
83 
177 
189 
175 
55 
138 
180 
128 
156 
175 
92 
168 
180 
179 
133 
19 
101 
70 
212 
22 
107 
81 
106 
101 
104 
101 
133 











V, 411 
433 
456 
679 

vI, 49 
128 
146 
164 
177 
229 
258 
829 
350 
361 
448 
459 
460 
521 

VI, 28. 
303, 305 
133. 
157 
179. 

VIIl, 32 

86. 
125 
130. 
366 
452. 

42 
321. 
165 
167 
312 
820 
897 
500 
619 
588 . 
655 
684 . 
702 
704. 

X, 5-9 
100 . 
111 
222 
437 
488 . 

XI, 20 
67-71 
404 ‘ 


XII, 25 . 


167-172 


243. 
245 
892. 
407 
437. 


ΧΠΙ. 127. 


INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


XIII, 172 
317 
321 
$29 
843 
868 
667 
§25 
XIV, 247 
261 
267 
521 
XV, 70 
196 
218 
223 
588 
701 
XVI, 84 
242 
822 
389 ul 
XVU,70 . 
177 


972 


δ ε 
XVIII, 86 
| 838. 
XIX, 59 

313 

| 423 
x = 
39 | 100 
. 198 

257 
801 
8] XXI, 327 
405 . 
459 


522 . 


20 | 580. 
XXII, Si? 
389 
Zi. αὶ . 
274 " 
526 
653 - 656 ‘ 
805 . 
XXIV, 253 . 
489 
751 
Odyssey. 











. 51, 129, 


210 
135 
51 
142 
129 
43 
82 
178 
129 
81 
δ8 
197 
148 
221 
ἊΣ 


210 
48 
69 
68 

210 
46 

101 
45 


202 


e 177 


6 
177 
210 
210 
104 
219 
211 
211 

68 
204 
76 


133 


I, 232 
295 
390 
892. 

Π, 81 

43 

54 

59. 
111 


874 
Ill, 19 
129 
205 
223 
284 
327 
359 
IV, 97 
163 
171 
181 
195 
363 


477 


VIII, 20 
147 


352 





158. 


133 . 
844, 


451. 
523 - 


XIII, 209 
214 
215 
865 
876 
XIV, 68 
156 
181 
812 
888 
872 
440 
496 
XV, 268 
457 
458 
509 
XVI, 
168 
218 
437 
XVII, 21 
250 
22 
862 
475 
539 
549 
593 
XVIII, 132 


272 
402 
XIX, 463 
XX, 121 
XXI, 194 
201 . 
XXII, 139 
262 . 
414 
XXIII, 43 . 
134 
309 . 
XXIV, 334 . . 


Hymn. in Apoll. 1 


ISAEUS. 
Cleon. § 26 . . 
Dicaeog.§12 . 
Menecl.§10. 89, 
Philoct.§35 . 


IsOCRATES. 
Aeginet. 
p. 888 Ὁ. § 22 


INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


p- 811 C. §7 
315 A. § 24 


Archid. 


feel el μὰ μαὶ μαὶ et μαὶ 

Οὐ Οὐ 59 09 ἢ9 μα 
COCO RP OD OD 
> PPaAOb > 
POV nor 
pet μῚὶ Οὐ CD δι DS μὲ 


co 
δ τ &> 
a mt 


162 Ὁ. § 18 
163 A. § 20 


Panathen. 


. 241 Ὁ. § 44 
254 A.§ 108. 
Panegyr. 

. 48D.§14. 

44 Α.ὁ 1 

44 C. 
18 δια 
49 B. ὶ 
49 C. καὶ 
49 E. § 
J 
§ 
ὁ ὃ 
Σ 
§ 





16 
9 
8 


55 C. 
55 Ὁ. 
57 C. 
58 B. 
58 B. 





3 
4 
5 
3 
4 
33 
36 
56 


186 ἢ. ὁ 139. 


160 
198 


217 
211 
206 
86 
94 
104 








p. 87 A. § 28. 
93 Ὁ. § 56 
101 A. § 98. 
104 Ὁ. 110. 
109 Β. § 138 


Plataic. 
803 E. § 38 
Trapezit. 
. 860 C. 4 11 
361 D. § 15 
861 E. ὁ 16 
363 B. § 22 


LYCURGUS. 


In Leocrat. 
.154,§50 . 
155, § 60 
155,§61 . 


LyYsIAS. 


ge Agorat. 
162 
162 
88 
88 
ὃ 108 
118 


6 ST ST ὧν So γιό 
“7..γσὺ μα. μ- 


»4§ 
ὃ 
ἜΣ: 
ati 
7, § 
9, ὁ 


μὲ μεν μεὶ μοὶ 
oe δὴ So δὴ Se me 
= Οὐ Co bv 


9¢ 
5 Alcib. Il. 
145, 68s 117 
De Arist. Bon. 
Se ee Ψῃ 
157,§61 τ 128 
In Eratosth. 
.121,414 . 161 
123, ὁ 82 100 
124,448 . 100 
127, § 74 an 
127,676 . .» 167 
De Morte Eratosth. 
p.95,§34 « « B 
Or. Funebr. 
p- 192, 522 . - 162 
194, § 42 aa 
Or. X. 
Ρ. 117,8 25 . - 157 
Or. XXVIL. 
p- 178, §§ 8, 9 59 





250 INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. is. INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


i 2 c . 7 7 . " . a 
— egg? mone Cos : Phaed. 78 A . 94 II, 360 B . 140) X, 609B 
182. § 12 Charm. 156 A 160 aes. « ; ’ . Ἴ 
182, § 18 . i ig - ς Ὶ 196 8605 D ° 206 614 B 
164 B 137 481A . ai anaes 4-3 
MENANDER. 171E 127 482 A. 26 oe 616 . 
μιν 1]. a τξς : : 112] 872E πὶ 620D . 
Col. Fr. 6 x 46 | Cratyl.385B . 178 483 C 
, - : 1141] 8110. 113 | Soph. 242 A 
Frag. Incert. 41 19 396 C - 144 484 D - 
5. πόδε SE « on τ : 192 875 Ὁ . 227| Symp. 173 B 
Monos.45 . «- 36 396 E 208 486B - é 6 976 A 26. 28 174 D 
387 197 401 D 487D. 7 . 26,2 74 
eed . . vo 430 Ε 489 C 169 3876 C rue 175 C. 
cil Ὁ ἘΝ ΕΣ oat | 217| 379 B 134 186 B 
MIMNERMUS. 436 B 500 C , 199 | III, 393 E 40 188 A 
1,2 61, 114] Crit.43B . 502 Β. 198 897 D 37 193 E 
oe . 40 503 A Phaedr. 227 D 141 898 A 64 194 D 
é tth. XI . . 5 ΄ ne C aa u ὃ ‘ Δ 
TxVia . = | eh 2288. 203| 412A. 38 202 D 
San 10.46 . 46 B “Saale 229 A 204 412 B 36 208 D 
Joh. X11. 34 ? 47D 8 ΒΕΙ6Ε : 230 A . 8 412D. 129 212 E 
: i —* ἐν 282 Β 47 415 B 78 213 D 
HILEMON. 49 A Ω 96 232 E 146 4150 82 215A 
Frag. Incert. 29 ΠΣ. “, rr “Μ΄, 251 Β 199 415 E 194 | Theaet. 142 A 
Pp 3 50 A 59 Ὁ: ny ‘ 257 C 81 ᾿ 416 C 7 188 148 E 
INDAR. 50 B ᾿ ᾿ς 263 E 183 | IV, 427 E 43 144 B 
Ol. XI(X), 34 51 B on 4 266 A 145 427 E. 200 145 A 
XIV, 30. : 52 Cc Lach. 194 A 279 C 114} 4888Β. 206 149 C 
Pyth. VIII, 20 . 9 Ι πὸ Phileb.13 A. 82 433 E 76 155 A 
y ’ 52 D 196 C 
IX’ 196 ἐν δι ἕω IV 16 Ὁ 188 439Β. 64 158 B 
Nem. VII, 25. in wie by} 20g. 20 890. 210 49E . «. 163 188 E 
VII, 68 Sritias, 108 © vr 63 A 10|V, 451A. 82 209 E 
Isthm. IV, 16 Euthyde ’ Politic. 264 A 191 455 B 156 | Theag. 123 B 
p 27 302 B 196 457 ° 180| Tim. 18C. 

: omen Protag. 313 A 101 | 473 D 103 18 E 
Alcib. I, 115 B Lvs. 210 D 314 Ὁ 925 | VI, 485C. 208 81 B 
Apol. 17 4 ὙΠ : ; 8166 33 489 Β 94 90 E 

"π᾿ 210 Β 818 D 228 4906. 198 
18 Ὁ 215 B 820 A 911 492 E 184 SIMONIDES. 
20B. 218 D 828 B 45 495E. 197| Frag.6. «. « 
21 A : ' 329 B 107 501 C 148 


. DOR ( 74B. 
21B. , 79 D 882 ἢ 26 502 A. SoPHOCLEs. 


x. 835 C 173 508 C, D ae 8. ιν 
89 E 835 D 173 | Vl,515 Ὁ. 3|°"" vs 
920. 838 C 201) Si5E . ἡ se 
Menex. 239 B 839 C . 221 —s ° 281 
245 A De Republica. VII 540 B Ἵ = 
Phaed. 58 A. I, 327 C. 115 F449 EB γον 


688 827 C 232 553 A 536 
8286. 228 557 Β 550 


829 A 220 561 C 55 
830 A . δ᾿ 561 E on 
837 A 163 564 C 567 
τὰ δ 78 556 B 572 

78 567 A 674 


839 A 78 568 B 715 
aoe 184 | IX, 573 C . 986 

64) 5808 1082 
854 B 201|X,595B . 1221 
128 » UL, 3688 116] 5950 1334 
476 D 358 C 41:1 6070 . 1335 





> b> σι OO lO ὦν τ 
ve 


ow kr © bh Ow © 





Bb bo 


m. 


bo bo bo bo ἘΦ ΕΘ 19 
ΟοΟ Ὁ “1.1.1. 
S co 02 COC) σι OND 
~T > bo « 


t 


* 
er 
-- 

















INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. « INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


. 211] Oed. Col. 667 . 199 | Phil. 961 145 : 167 1 I 
202, 229 731 181 969 ae 2061 ᾿ 
78, 150 761. 58 978 8 ' 75 
=e 816 44 1253 . 191 162 
149 848. 185 1342 103 170 
62 956 Trach. 26 a 199 
. ἘΝ 1040. 196 ᾿ 215 155 
128 1180 197 . “ἃ 70 
205 1442. 226 201 75 70 
92 1528 401 a 211 74 
132 1713. . 545 . 191 7 re 75 
111) Qed. Tyr. 9 604 78 "ΚΕ ΤΣ ; 80 
170 129 . 9 631 . 83 27, 45, 109 : 83 
111 283 ‘ 687 169 . 84 : 88 
231 864 . 801 . . 181 7 ° ‘ 8 89 
155 395 8: 944 . 109 . 58, 199 ᾿ ; 89 
84 505 . 973 184 . 224 ‘ 98 
136 543 978 . 185 ᾿ 59 102 
126 548 1129 81 . 5. 85, 59, 158, 229 114 
60 580 1188 . .- 186 199 . « WY, eerily, ὁ 
202 637 . ΠΕ i: ae sa ον ee 
τὴν 651 Hippon. Fr. 280 . 172 234 eee 17 
vo 736 ve . 128 examp.) 27,180 

= 796 THEOCRITUS. . 234 ae 
= 834 mie. Ss Oe 88, 54, 160 παρ 
228 840 . Ὶ ot . 160 
130 918 . THEOGNIS. ‘ . 151 : 62 
106 956, “i. ee . 6,167] 4: a 
135 1146 5 ol Stic 5 ; . 161 . 203 
234 1157 | . 170 f . 46 
170 1281 33 | THUCYDIDES. “Ἂν . 193 : 61 
109 1232 219 167 . 200 
- 231 1245 17 . 181 ; 195 
. 179 1293 226 86 . 191,197 
$2, 191 1368 194 140 . oe 
. 84 1387 15 36 i. ae 
- 110 1391 223 218 117 
118} phil. ἴδ᾽. 198 140 172 
183 103. 150 224 229 
62 253 94 86 126 
113 281. . ἯἋἙ 217 194 
134 800 : | ’ 224 130 
184 826. ᾿ 111, 228 86 61 
185 849 ; a 81 44 
141 381. ; 17 224 132 

68 418 31 | ' — 137 

Oed. Col. 204 444. ‘ 190, 199 ᾿ 167 
208 493 ; . 130 . 154 
211 i ae eo 60 
202 526 2 2 128 46 
122 b39. ei 81 ; : 25 

224 567 ; — τ Ἦν 88 
172 694. . 80, 155 
183 611 ¢. Epes : 
. κ1.ν 617 . a ie τέ 

185 674. +. = 5 
. 141 674, 675 126 3 208, 216 . 71 


182 "761 .« | ; . 215 . δ6 42 
117 


. a 826. 211 : 42, 160 
199 17 ς . 241 215 . 165 


ΠῚ, 88 
84 
40 
40 
49 
49 
53 
53 


Co “ἃ σι σι». om γ»». CO ὦ bo 








© © Ol wm 6 Co bo bo bo μὰ 























190, 199 


INDEX TO THE 


63 | VII, 70 
70. 

6 71 
174 72. 
105 
233 
169 
61 
7 
74 
59 
60 


70. 
71 
74 . 


ΧΙ, 35 . 


pw 
° 


μκὶ μὰ μαὶ μὰ 
ΣΦ ΣΦ) ὦ 
~) 


- 


3 
3 
5. 
6 
1 


oO 


~ 


ν᾽ 9 μα ll oo 


~ 


~~ 


a woe 
ΡΥ 
. 


co CO bo tS 
μὰ pt μὰ CO OD 
So 
.- πὶ Φ 


~j 


~ 


~~ 


χὰ 
μ᾿ 
Go 


- 


> 
μι et pe Tt 
Go CO bo 
° 


~ 
- 


iv) 


~ 
. 


~~ 


“J =I GQ GS Ot Ot > 


~ 


~ 


ok pet bt μὰ --ἶἰ Οϑ Οὐ CO BO bt CO 
. 


- 


τ ΘΟ Φ οὐ οὐ 1 





TYRTAEUS. 


XENOPHON. 
Anabasis. 


EXAMPLES. 


23 

- 191 

47, 109 
= 

87 

- 164 

. 81, 197 
. 219 

169 

« & 

226 

. Ἐπ 

284 

. 108 

8, 214 

. 195 

60 

42 


109 


wbncoccn& 


bo CO 





~ 


o 


~ 


bo bo μπὸὶ οὐ Οὺ ὃ» 


μὰ μά peek fk ὑπαὶ μεὶ 
aoe « @ ὦ 
mp Op © 
° . . 


~~ 


©2 Οὐ co Co Co Co ΒΘ bo 
© oer Φ 


Pa ee ae) 


bS po bo bo με μὰ et μὰ σὺ ὃ 


oarFf © 
. 


- 


wm we CO Co OO O° 


~ 


i ie 
Spee oc 
Ww οὐ bo po © “1 
e Ἀ e 


μι μι μὰ ὃ 
>) 
. 


- 


μεθ 


σὺ D2 σι σι σι δι σι». 
»» boar 
. 


~] 


oe 


et et μὰ MT OO > DO 
©o wo 


co Co μ"Ὁ 


. 58, 158 


226 

ὁ. = 
158 
160 
155 
152 
95 

. 204 
156 


146, 157 


232 
151 
184 
11, 151 
163 
206 
201 


194 


159 
83 
- 143 
141 
27, 128 
44 
. ιὲ 
20, 67 
117 
29 
. 5:8 
56 
64 
69 
162 
230 


" 98, 131 


10, 67 
- 154 
199 
. ἘΞ 
146 
. ἘΞ 
29 
. ἘΞ 
29 
. πὲὲ 
228 
ΕΣ 26 
9, 67 


— 


— 
» 
.7..7.7 Cd > 6S OD ὧδ μὰ μὰ μὰ κ.. GD OD OT me μὲ με td μα et μα Ὁ 


»- 
- 


00 Co bo bo bo bo bo Ὁ μὲ 


- 


»Ὁ Δ,» 5 μὰ Οὗ μὰ Ὁ. Οὐ σι 


- 


Oo 


- 


oo ew 


00 60 Se Ot Ot mm BS BS μὰ μὰ 


» 


- 


- 


STAT DP CO Ὁ μὰ μὰ 
προ « Saal tual cia 


bo ee oD 
5 


. ὦ Οὐ) Φιῷ “1 


- 


~J 
7 


- 
. 


[ 


- 


~~ we «ἡ 


Q σι co = "Ὁ δ mh μὰ μὰ CO μὶ aT DD DD DD mH © δ "Ὁ ὃ9 


4 OR μὰ μὶ 


ὦ τ Ὁ © 


σι» 


- - 


Wr Go 


~ 


~~ «= 


~~ ese 


Ὁ ὦ 
[-.} 


~ 


~ Ὁ ~~~ Ὁ 
. 


- 


BD et μὰ AT DOD et CO σι CO μὲ μι οὐ 00 DD μὶ μὰ DOD 


> 1 i Hm im Co CO Co Co 
μι» CO 


yropaedia. 


197, 218 


. 145, 168 


INDEX TO THE 


194 | I, 4, 23 


5 


ὦ a) 


- 


Θὺ δὴ ὺ Φὺ δὺ δὺ σὺ Φὺ δὺ Φὺ 
ve > pe om Be im CO DOD DO DO DS DO μὲ μὲ μαὰ μὰ LY 


> © bo 55 5 BS ΕΘ Ὁ DS et μὴ μὰ tt Ὁ 


Co bo tw 


Co DD μὰ ATER DH τῷ Οὐ Οὐ Οὴ Οϑ δῷ τῷ οὐ 9 OM 


Φὺ ©) DD μὰ μὶ μὰ OO pet (Ὁ Οὐ GO μὲ μὰ μὶ A Ὁ 
. . . > . 


Or oO Φι δι οὺυ bo. 


w~weewee Ὁ ὦ 
μι Φ μὰ 
. ε 


wwpewyww Ὁ 
oo 
. 


- 


ee ee ee ee 


- 


-. a ae 


΄ 


- 


oD 


- 


~ 


~ 


219 
210 
210 
143 

83 

81 
168 
155 


σιμι © 


- 


. 


Or δι συ im GO CO ὁ bo bt μὰ 
"Ὁ. CO μὸ μ» μα μὶ μὰ Tt μὰ 


oo “τοι 


- 


dS bh = ..2 
© © 9 οὐ 


- 
οι 


108 





- 


EXAMPLES. 


. 146 
68 

. ἣν 
128 

. ἘῈ 
129 

76 

138 

80 


~~ ee! 


i) 


Or or Or Or Or 9 Co 
00 ὃ Οὐ ST OD et μὰ 


TJ 7 OF σι sm CO CO DD DO μὰ με μὰ μὰ μαὰ 


- 


a ῳ- - . 


a ee oe ee” or ee 


~ 
_ 


oO 


bo bo St οὐ ἴ μὰ 
~ 


CO pt CT μὰ DD OD pm OOD 


~ < ὦ a 
bt pet 
. . 





He > CO 02 CD μὰ μὰ 


» 


oe & COO © 


bo BD et μὰ μὰς Orb Do Ree oD DS οὐ 
Cobo SG bo = ᾿ 


[9 


“I co 


x 


7, 27 
Hellenica. 


155, 156 


137 
224 
86 
114 
62 
206 


223 
162 
185 
153 
221 
203 
151 
217 


89, 137, 138 
. 89, 188, 207 


130 
225 
206 





INDEX TO THE EXAMPLES. 


67 | IV, 
168 
17 
225 
217 
183 


ὩΣ ; , ENGLISH INDEX. 


Oo 


1651 I, 
᾿ 164 

~ 226 
. 225 
143, 168 
. 202 
75 

. 208 
86 


e 199 
ν 10 
29, 174 
° 203 
rs 160 
162 

70 

205 
203 

178 

214 
162 

15 

161 
191 

23 

88 

161 
228 

132 

86 

161 
219 

40 

150 

152 

164 

150 

153 

203 

135 

161 
142 

e ° 155 


, —) oe 
Memorabilia. 


~ 
~ 


- 
my 


- 
- 


+ 
+ 


Φ oO & 





- 
ὦ 


_ 
- 


197 
215 
165 
τα > N.B. The figures refer to Pages. 
203 

87, 107 

9G 

196 re Absolute, Genitive, 222, 225,232; Accusa-] sense, 46,47. With ἂν in a podosis, 59, 

234 3 tive, 224, 225. 113, 114, 157 ; see “Av. 

. 129 | : ¢ Antecedent, definite or indefinite, 121, 122, , Participle, 34-36. With λανθάνω, 
197 | 123 - 125. φθάνω, &c., coinciding with the verb in 
199 | ! t Aorist, Indicative, 24. Distinguished from time, 34; with περιοράω, &c., 35. With 

87, 93 ¢ Imperf., 7, 8, 24. Of verbs denoting a ὁμολογέω, 36. With ἔχω, as periphras- 

. state or condition, 24. Used for Perf. tic Per., 229. With ἔσομαι, as periphr. 
or Pluperf., 25. Expressing a momen- Fut. Perf., 44. Primary or secondary 
tary action just taking place, 25. In tense, 54. As protasis, equiv. to Aor. 
epistles, 25. In Final clauses, 72. In Ind., Subj., or Opt., 110, 217. With ἂν 
Protasis and Apodosis (implying non- in apodosis (never in protasis), 63, 113, 
fulfilment of condition), 93-102; how 114, 159 ; see “Av. 
distinguished from Imperf., 94, 96 (δ) ; | Apodosis, defined, 87, 125; see Protasis. 
how from Pluperf., 96 (ὁ). With ἄν in| Assimilation in conditional Relative clauses, 
Apod., 56, 93-96; rarely referring to 135, 136. 

Cyneg. III,2. 96 present time, 101. Gnomic, 45 ; with πολ- 
Hier. VIII, 8 Aaxts or ἤδη, 46 ; in Hom. similes, 46 ; a | Causal sentences, 171-173 ; see Contents, 
XI, 15 primary tense, 49; see Aor. Inf. Itera- Chap. IV, Sect. V. Introduced by Rela- 
Hipp. LX, 2 tive, w. av, 47 ; iterative forms in-cxov,| tives, 141; negative particle in, 142. 
| Oecon. I, 3. ς ᾿ -σκόμην (W. av, in Hdt.), 47, 48. Expressed by Participles, 216 ; by Part. 
IV, 4 » in dependent moods, 25-36. How|  w. ws, 219, 220. 
MS 4 distinguished from Present, 8 (R.). See | Caution, verbs of; see Fear. 
| ὙΠ’ ro + Contents, Chap. II.; and Subj., Opt., | Conditional sentences, 110-121; see Con- 
| Vir ὃ : Imperat., and Infin. tents, Chap. IV, Sect. Il. Cond. Rela- 
| ΧΠ 19 ’ Subjunctive, 26-28. As Fut. Perf., tive sentences, 125 - 137. 
| XIII, 4 after ἐπειδάν, &c., 26. How distinguished 


os 
- 


9 


- 
se 





ϑ- 
A 
J 


~ 


. 
- 


- 





τ 
- 


= 
“- 


ὦ 
- 


5 
- 





- 


< 


- 


- 
~ 


Oar, OQ 


~ 


ον 
- 


- 
- 


_ 


Co CO bo DO ee μὰ ODS μα DS CO μὶ Οϑ 09 OF μὰ ῷ OD Οὐ "9 μὶ μα Οὐ 59 
ot Go οὐ Ὁ 


ΘΟ bo ὦ 


- 
- 


- 
- 





- 
- 


- 
“««ῳ ὦ ὦ 


Area ὦ οο“ 1:1 


- 


1 
2 
2 
2 
2 
8 
8 
5 
5 
1 
1 
1 
4 
7 
8 
8 
8, 
1 
1 
1 
2 
2 
2 
2 
4 
4 
4 
4 
1 
1 
4 
4 
4 


~~ 


o* 
bo 


μὰ Οὐ et Ὁ ὃ Cd μὲ μὰ CO Οὐ μὰ Co” 


co ὃ μὰ 
Οὐ δ», © 


bt bet τῷ Ὁ AT ST OD Od C2 09 C9 C9 Οϑ BO DD bet bet μὰ μιὰ tT A GD Or σι σι». CO Co BS ΒΘ ΒΘ BO 59 PS bo bo bo 


a ae ee) 


μι 


- 


ΧΥ 2. from Perf. Subj., 28. With μή in pro- | Danger, expressions of ; see Fear. 
Ἐπ. - hibitions, 180. With ov μή, 184. Dative after Verbals in -réos, 233, 234. 
8| Rep. Ath. I, 16 » Fass. . Optative, 28-30. After ἐπειδή, &c.,| Dependence of moods and tenses, 48- 
Rep. Lac. XIV, 5 ἘΣ 29. In indirect quotations and questions, 54. 
2|\Symp. II, 11 ‘ aa 29, 30; ambiguity of, in indirect ques- | Direct Quotations, distinguished from indi- 
Π| 8. Ξ ἀν tions, 30. rect, 147 ; introduced by or, 171. 
ΙΝ. 6 ‘ ΝΗ ————, Imperative, 30. Rarely used in 
' 1V, 26. ὝΦΟΣ prohibitions (for Aor. Subj.), 181. Exhortations, Imperative in, 178. Subj. in, 
VII, 2 ἘΠῚ ~——, Infinitive, with indef. time, 30-32. 179. Opt. in (poet.), 175. Fut. Ind. in, 
196, 206 VIL, 25. 74 es After xpdw, θεσπίζω, &c., 31; see Pres- W. ὅπως (86. σκόπει), 78, 79. 
ao ent. After αἴτιός εἰμι, 82. In indirect 
quotation, referring to the past, 82, 33. | Fear, caution, and danger, expressions 
Used for the Future: after verbs of of, 80-87. Followed by μή w. Subj. or 
hoping, promising, &c., 32 ; after verbs Opt., 80, see Object clauses ; by μή w. 
of thinking, saying, &c.,33. After λέγω Fut. Ind. (seldom), 82; by μή w. Pres, 
and εἶπον, to command, 34. Primary and Past tenses of Indic., 83-85; by ὡς 
Or secondary tense, 53. In a gnomic or ὅπως w. Indic. (as in indir. discourse), 


+ 


σι» im wm 6 59 


- 


os 


- 


94 
168 
59 
205 
198 
169 


᾿" 
a 


- 


~~ 
- 


- 





μὲ μά μὰ OD CO Od 60 Or ὧν Or CO CO "Ὁ BO 


B2DO BO et ht μα 


— 








ee 








vo 


85; by Fut. Inf., 85; by εἰ; whether, 
ὅπως, how, &c.,85 5 by a causal sentence 
with ὅτι, 86; by Infin., 86, 87, 190. 
Final clauses (pure), after iva, ws, ὅπως, 
ὄφρα, and μή; 67 -- 73 5 distinguished from 
object clauses, &c., 66, 67. Subj. and 
Opt. in, 67. Fut. Ind. in, 68. Subj. in, 
after secondary tenses, 70. Secondary 
tenses of Indic. in, 72. "Av or κέ in: 
with Subj., 69 ; π΄. Opt., 69, 70. 
Final and Object clauses w. ὅπως and ὅπως 
py, after verbs of striving, effecting, δου 
"3-80. Fut. Ind. in, 73, 74. Subj. or 
Opt. in, 73, 74; Fut. Opt. 74, 39. Ὅπως 
ἂν w. Subj. in, 76. Homeric construction 
in, 76,77. Μή (without ὅπως) in, ΤΊ. Ὡς 
for ὅπως in, 11. After verbs of exhort- 
ing, forbidding, &c , 77,78 1 rarely intro- 
duced by iva, 78; see iva. “Ὅπως OF 
ὅπως μή W. Fut. Ind., by ellipsis of the 
leading verb, 78 (N. 7, @) 5; μή alone in 
prohibitions, 79 (N. 7, δ). Second Aor. 
Subj. Act. and Mid. preferred in, 79 ; 
Dawes’s Canon, 79, 80. See Object clauses 
after μή. 
Finite moods, 1. 
Future, Indicative, 36-33. In gnomic 
sense, 36. Expressing ἃ general truth 
hereafter to be recognized, 36. Like mild 
imperative, 37. In prohibitions W. μή, 
81, 79. In Final clauses, w. ὅπως, ὄφρα, 
μή, 68. With ὅπως or ὅπως μ ἥ, after verbs 
of striving, effecting, &c. 73. With ὅπως 
or ὅπως μή, in exhortations and prohibi- 
tions (sc. σκόπει), 78. With μή, after verbs 
of fearing, 82. In Protasis W. εἰ : €X- 
pressing a future condition, 103 5 expr. ἃ 
present intention, &c., 93. In Rel. clauses 
expr. a purpose, 137. With ov μή, 184 - 
187. With ay: in Homer, 55; in Attic, 
66. Periphrastic form of, w. μέλλω, 38. 

, Optative, in indirect quotation, 38. 
After ὅπως or ὅπως μή, 39-41, 73, 14. 

. Infinitive, 41-43. After verbs of 
saying, thinking, &c.,in indirect quota- 
tion, 41. For Pres. or Aor. Inf., after 
verbs of wishing, &c., after ὥστε, and 
even in other constructions, 42. Regu- 
larly used after verbs of hoping, &e., 43. 
With ἄν (rarely), 60. Primary or second- 
ary tense, 53. 

, Participle, 43. Expressing 8 pur- 
pose, 217, 214. With av (rarely), 60. 
Primary or secondary tense, 53. 

Future Perfect, Indicative, 43-45. Com- 
pound forms of: Perf. Part. w. ἔσομαι, 
44; rarely Aor. Part. w. ἔσομαι; 44, 215. 


58 ENGLISH INDEX. 


Often nearly = Fut., 44. In the depend- 
ent moods, 44. 


General and particular suppositions, how 


distinguished, 88, 89. 


Genitive Absolute, 222, 225, 232. 
Guomic Aorist and Perf. See Aor. and 


Perf. 


Hindrance, verbs implying, w. Infin., 198 - 


202. See Infinitive. 


Hoping, promising, &c., verbs of, w. Fut. 


Infin., 43 ; w. Pres. Infin., 14; w. Aor 
Inf., 32, 33. 


Imperative, 2. Tenses of, see Present, Per- 


fect, &c. Not used w. ἄν, 57. In com- 
mands, exhortations, Xc., 178 5 w- aye, 
φέρε, ἴθι, 178 5 second person w. πᾶς; 119. 
After οἷσθ᾽ ὃ, &c., 119. In prohibitions 
w. μή (Present, rarely Aor.), 180, 181. 


Imperfect, 6-8. Distinguished from Aor., 


1,8, 24. Denoting attempted action, 7. 
In sense of Pluperf. (when Pres. = Perf.), 
ἢ. Sometimes not distinguished from 
Aor., 7,8. Expressing past likelihood, 
intention, or danger, 7. Expressing ὃ 
fact just recognized, 8. In Final clauses, 
"2. In Protasis or Apodosis (implying 
non-fulfilment of condition), 93-102; 
how distinguished from Aor., 94, 96 (b) ; 
how from Pluperf., 96 (δ) ; in Hom. usu- 
ally past, 96. With av, in Apodosis, 56, 
93-96. Iterative, w. av, 47; iterative 
forms in -cxov and -σκόμην (Ww. ἄν, in 
Hat.), 47, 48. How expressed in Infin. 
and Part. (Imperf. Inf. and Part.), 15, 
17. How expressed in Optative (Imperf. 
Opt.), 153 


Indicative, 1. Tenses of, see Present, &e. 


Primary and secondary tenses of, 3, 49, 
50. With ἄν, see “Av. Fut., in Final 
and Object clauses after ὅπως, ὅτ. ; see 
Future. Secondary tenses of, in Final 
clauses, 72. Present and past tenses of, 
after μή, lest, 83-85. Present and past 
tenses of, in Protasis, 92. Secondary 
tenses of, in both Protasis and Apodosis 
(av in Apod.), 93 - 102; see "Av. Fut. : 
in Protasis, 103; in Apodosis, 102. For 
Subj. in general suppositions, 109. After 
Relative w. definite antecedent, 122. In 
causal Rel sentences, 141. In condi- 
tional Rel. sentences: present and past 
tenses, 125 ; secondary tenses (implying 
non-fulfilment of a condition). 126. For 
Subj. and Opt. in general suppositions 


ENGLISH INDEX. 259 


after Rel., 131. In Rel. sentences after a 
general negative, 132. Secondary tenses 
of, incond. Rel. sentences, by assimila- 
tion, 136. Future after Rel., expressing 


@ purpose, 137. Fut. after ἐφ᾽ ᾧ and 


ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, 140. After ὥστε, 140. After 
ἕως, &c., until, 142; second. tenses, re- 


ferring to a result not attained, 143. 
After mpiv, 145 ; distinguished from In- 
fin., 144, 145, 210. In indirect quotation 
after ὅτι and ws, and in indir. questions, 
149, 150; may be retained even after 
second. tenses, 151, 152; in depend- 
ent clauses of indir. quot., 160-165. In 
causal sentences, 171. Secondary tenses 
of, in wishes, 173, 176. Future after οὐ 
μή, 185, 184 ; see Future. 

Indirect Questions, 147 ; see Contents,Chap. 
IV, Sect. IV. 


Indirect Quotation, 147-171 ; see Contents, 


Chap. IV, Sect. IV. Moods used in, see 
Indicative, &c. Tenses used in, see Pres- 
ent, &c. ; and Contents, Chap. IT. 


Infinitive, 2, 188-212. Tenses of, 212 ; | 


see Present, &c., and Contents, Chap. 11. 
With av, see “Av. After verbs of fearing, 


86, 87,190. In Apodosis, 113. In indi- | 
rect quotations, 147, 148,157-159. After | 


ὥφελον in wishes, 176, 177. Fut. w. ov 


μή, in indir. quot., 185. See Contents, | 


Chap. V. 


Interrogative Subj., 182-184. In indirect | 


questions, 154. 


Iterative Imperfect and Aorist. See Im- 


perfect and Aorist. 
| 


Moods, general view of, Chap. I. Use of, | 


Chap. IV. Constructions enumerated, 65; | 
see Indicative, &c. | 


Narration, Infin. in, 210. | 


Object clauses with μή after Verbs of fear- 


ing, &c., 66, 80. Subj. and Opt. in, 80. 

Μή and μὴ ov in, 80, 67. How related to 
Final clauses, 66, 81. Fut. Ind. in, 82. | 
Ὅπως μή (= μή) in, 82. Μὴ ἂν w. Opt. | 
(in Apod.) in, 82,83. Μή alone w. Subj., | 


&c., in pure Fin. clauses, 67. With ὅπως 
and ὅπως μή, after verbs of striving, &c., 
(seldom), 73, 74. With μή, after verbs 
of fearing, &c., 80. In Protasis w. ci, 
91: in particular suppositions, 105 ὁ in 
general suppos., 107, 108. In Apodosis 
w. av, 57, 105, see”"Av: w. Protasis sup- 
pressed, 112; as mild command or ex- 
hortation, or resembling Fut. Ind » 113. 
In conditional Rel. sentences: in par- 
ticular suppositions, 128; in genera] 
suppos., 129; by assimilation, 135. In 
Rel. clauses expressing a purpose (Epic, 
rarely Attic),138. After ἕως, &c., until, 
142, 143 ; implying a purpose, 143, 166- 
168 (d). After πρίν, 145. In indirect 
quotations and questions, 148 ; see Con- 
tents, Chap. IV, Sect. IV. In causal 
sentences, 172. In wishes, 173, 174; ex- 
pressing concession or exhortation, 175. 
Future, 38 - 415 rarely w. ov μή, after ὡς 
in indirect quotation, 185. 


Participle, 3, 213-232. Tenses of, see 
Present, &c. With ἄν, 866 ᾽Αν. Condi- 
tional (as Protasis) representing Indic., 
Subj., or Opt., 217, 110. As Apodosis 
(with or without av), 113. In indirect 
quotation, 159, 229. See Contents, Chap. 
VI. 

Particular and general suppositions, how 
distinguished, 88, 89. 

Perfect Indicative, 18,19. Why primary, 
18. Compound form of, 18. Of certain 
verbs, in sense of Present, 19. In epis 
ties, 19. Referring to the future for em- 
phasis (0AwAa), 19. Not used w. ἄν, 55. 
Gnomic, 45 ; see Perf. Infin. 

- in dependent moods, relations of to 
Pres. of those moods, 19. Subj. and Opt., 
20. Imperat., 21: in mathematical lan- 
guage, 21; second person of (rare), 22 ; 
in sense of Present, 22. Infin., 22: w. 
ὥφελον in wishes, 176, 177; primary or 
secondary tense, 63; w. ἄν, 59; in a 
gnomic sense, 47 ; as Pluperf. Infin., 2 
(Rem.), 59. Partic., 23 ; primary or sec- 
ondary, 53. 


by ellipsis of the leading verb, 83. μή, Pluperfect, 18,19. Compound form of, 18. 


W. present and past tenses of Indic. in, | 
83 -- 85, foot-note ¢ to 84. Other construc- 


tions allowed in, see Fear, caution, and 
danger. 


HOptative, 2,174. Its relations to the Indic. | 


and Subjunctive., Appendix I. Tenses 
of, see Present, ὅσ. ἢ when primary and 
when secondary, 50-53. With iva, ὅπως, | 


Of certain verbs, in sense of Imperf., 19. 
Sometimes nearly = Aor. (Hom. and 
Hdt.), 19. Expressing past certainty, 
&c.,19. In Final clauses, 72. In Pro- 
tasis and Apodosis, how distinguished 
from Imperf. and Aor., 96 (δ). With av, 
in Apod., 56, 93,94. How expressed ix 
Infin. and Partic., 23 (Rem.). 





ΒΕ ΦΟΡΈΣ ΤῊΣ τ 


ς SS ISS 


See οὐσσοσσοο κα eer 


260 ENGLISH INDEX. 


Present, Indicative, 4. Expressing a gen- 
eral truth, 4, 46; ap attempted action, 5. 
With adverbs of past time (88 πάλαι), 5. 
Of certain verbs, in sense of Perf., 5. Of 
verbs signifying to hear, to learn, &e., 
6. Of εἶμι, as Fut., sometimes as Pres., 
6. Expressing likelihood, intention, or 
danger, 6. Not used w. av, 55. Historic, 
6; a secondary tense, 49. 

, in dependent moods, 8-17. How 
distinguished from the Aor., 8. See 
Contents, Chap. Il.; and Subj., Opt., 
Imperat., and Infin. 

, Subjunctive, 9, 10. In first person, 
in prohibitions w. μή, 180; see Aor. Subj. 
With οὐ μή, 184. 

, Optative, 10-12. In indirect quo- 
tations and questions, 11; ambiguity in 
indirect questions, 12. 

, Imperative, 12. In prohibitions w. 
uy, 180. See Aor. Subj. 

, Infinitive, three uses of, 12. With 
indef. time, 12. After xpaw, θεσπίζω, 
&c., 13. In indirect quotation, 13. For 
Fut., after verbs of hoping, &c., 14. ΑΓ 
ter λέγω and εἶπον, to command, 14. 
As Imperfect Infin., 15,16. With dv in 
Apodosis, 58, 113, 1575 see “Av. With 
av, representing iterative Imperf., 60. 
Primary or secondary tense, 53. 

——, Participle, 16,17. As Imperf. Part., 
17. Primary or secondary, 53. As Pro- 
tasis (= Pres. Ind., Subj., or Opt.), 110, 
217. With ἄν, in Apod. (never in Prot.), 
58, 113, 159; see "Av. 

Prevention, verbs implying, w. Inf., 198- 
202. See Infinitive. 

Primary and Secondary tenses, 3, 48 -54; 
see Tenses. 

Prohibitions, Subj. and Imperat. in, 180 ; 
Aor. Imperat. rare in, 181. Fut. Ind. in, 
w. ὅπως μή or μή (86. σκόπει), 78. See 
οὐ μή. 

Promising, verbs of ; see Hoping. 

Protasis and Apodosis, defined, 87. Moods 
and tenses in, see indic., &c.; Present, 
&c. ; and Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. II. 

Purpose, expressed by Final clause w. iva, 
&c., 67; by Relat. w. Fut. Ind., 137 ; 
by Rel. w. Subj. and Opt. in Hom. (rare- 
ly in Attic), 138; by ἕως w. Subj. and 
Opt., 143, 167, 168 (d); by ὥστε w. In- 
fin., 205; by Inf. alone, 203 ; by Fut. 
Part., 214, 217. 


Questions, of doudt, w. first pers. of Subj. 
(sometimes w. βούλει or θέλεις), 182 5 
rarely w. third person of Subj., 183: see 





Subjunctive. Indirect, 147 ; see Indirect 
quotation. 


Quotation, see Direct and Indirect. 


Relative and Temporal sentences, 121 - 146; 


see Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. ITI. Rela 
tive with Infinitive, 193. 


Secondary, see Tenses. 
Similes (Homeric) : Gnomic Aor. in, 46, 


133 ; Subj. (without av) and Pres. Indic. 
in, 133. 


Subjunctive, 1. Its relations to the Opt., 


Appendix I. Tenses of ; see Pres., Perf., 
and Aor.; always primary, 50. With 
ἄν or κέ, see "Av. With iva, ὅπως, &e., 
in pure Final clauses, 67: after secondary 
tenses, 70. With ὅπως and ὅπως μή after 
verbs of striving, ὅσ. (seldom), 73. 
With μή after verbs of fearing, &c., 80. 
In Protasis w. ἐάν (ἄν, ἤν)» 90, 91; in 
particular suppositions, 102; in general 
suppos., 107, 108; w- ei (without av), see 
"Av. In Apodosis w. κέ or av (Hom.), 57, 
182; see"Av. In conditional Relat. sen- 
tences: in particular suppositions, 127 ; 
in general suppos., 129; by assimilation, 
135. In Homeric similes after ὡς, WS OTE, 
132. In Rel. causes expressing a purpose 
(Epic), 138. After ἕως, &c., until, 142, 
143 ; implying a purpose, 143, 167, 168 
(4). After πρίν, 148. In indirect ques- 
tions, representing Interrog. Subj., 154, 
155. In indir. quotations, repres. de 
pendent Subj., 148, 160; may be changed 
to Opt. or retained, after second. tenses, 
148, 160, 166. First person of, in exhor- 
tations, 179; see aye, φέρε. Aor. in pro- 
hibitions w. μή, 180; Pres. only in first 
person (rarely sing-), 180, 181. Inde- 
pendent (like Fut. Ind.) in Hom., 181; 
w. av or κέ, 182. Interrog. (in questions 
of doubt), 182. With ov μή, as strong 
future, 184. 


Temporal sentences, see Relative. With 


ἕως, &c., until, 142-144. With πρίν, 
144-147, 210. 


Tenses, enumeration of, 3. Primary and 


secondary, 3, 48-54. Relative or abso- 
lute time denoted by, 3,4. Gnomic and 
iterative, 45-48. Use of, see Contents, 
Chap. II. See also Present, &c. 


Verbal in -réos, 3; see Contents, Chap. VIL 


Wish, expression of, 173-1775; see Con- 
tents, Chap. IV., Sect. VI. Ind and Opt. 
in, see Ind. and Opt. Latin and Greek 
expressions of, compared, 177. Infin. in 
(poet.), 209. 





25 PASSA PERSE SS 2 eR Sie 


$2 se 


δὴν 


“ae 


Ne: stort 
Ye 


7, 


ects 
; 


les μέτα 


GREEK 


INDEX. 





N.B. The figures refer to Pages. 





Ayavaxtew ei, 120. 

᾿Αγαπάω εἰ, 120. 

Aye or ἄγετε w. Imperat., 178, 179, 180. 

᾿Αδικέω as Perf., 5. 

Αἰσχύνομαι With Part. and Inf., 228. Ai- 
σχύνομαι εἰ, 120. 

Airids εἰμι, w. Inf. (sometimes w. τοῦ or 
τό), 190, 191 ; w. Aor. Inf., 32. 

᾿Ακούειν, ἀκοῦσαι, in sound, 196. 

᾿Αλίσκομαι as Perf., 5. 

᾿Αλλά or αὐτάρ (like δέ) in Apodosis, 121, 
137 (Rem.). 

"Aua w. Partic., 219. 

"ἂν (4), Adv., two uses of, in Apodosis and 
in Protasis, 54. Not used w. Pres. and 
Perf. Indic., 55. With Fut. Ind.: in 
early poets, 55, 104; in Attic, 56. With 
secondary tenses of Ind. in Apodosis, 56, 
87, 90, 94, 127; omitted for emphasis, 96; 
regularly omitted in Apod. formed by 
Infin. and ἐχρῆν, ἔδει, &c., 97-100. With 
Imperf. and Aor. Ind. in iterative sense, 
47. With Subjunctive: in Protasis (ἐάν, 
av, or ἤν), 56, 87, 102, 108; in conditional 
Rel. and Temporal clauses, 56, 125, 128, 
130, 143, 144, 145; often omitted in Hom. 
(rarely in Attic), 104, 105, 109, 133. In 
Final clauses after ws ὅπως, ὄφρα: W. 
Subj., 68, 69; rarely w. Opt. 69, 70. 
Omitted from ἐάν, ὅταν, ὃς av, &c., 
when the Subj. is changed to Opt. 
after past tenses, 149; rarely retained, 
163, 169. Seldom w. ὡς and Subj. 
in Hom. similes, 132. Epic use of, w. 
Subj. in Apodosis, 57, 104, 182. With 
Optative, always forming Apodosis, 57, 
105, 128, see Optative ; never w. Fut. 
Opt., 57; rarely omitted, 100. With an 
Opt. in Protasis which is also an Apod., 
107, 133. Ei xe w. Opt. in Hom., 107. 
Never used w. Imperat., 57. With Infin. 
and Part.: in Apodosis, 57 -- 61, 113, 157, 


159, 192, 232; never in Protasis, 62; use | 





of each tense with, see Present, &c. With 
Inf. for iterative Imperf. and Aor. w. 
av, 60. Position of, 61, 62. Repetition 
of, 62-64. Without a verb, 63. Tax’ 
av, perhaps, 64. 

Av (a), contracted for, ἐάν. See Ἐάν. 

"Avatpéw, to give an oracular response, 
see Xpaw. 

᾿Ανέχομαι W. Part., 228. 

᾿Αποκάμνω W. Part. and Inf., 228. 

᾿Αρκέω Ww. Part., 228. 


"Are, ἅτε δή, W. Part., 219. 


Αὐτίκα W. Part., 219. 
“Axpt, 866 Ἕως. ἴΑχρι οὗ, 142. 


Βελτίων w. Part., 228. 
Βούλει or βούλεσθε w. Interrog. Subj., 182, 
Βουλομένῳ μοι τοῦτό ἐστιν, 229. 


Teyovévat, to be, 19. 


Aé, in Apodosis, 121. In antecedent clauses, 
137. 

Acixvupe W. Part., 229. 

Δεινόν ἐστιν εἰ, 120. 

Δῆλός εἰμι W. Part., 230. 

Διατελέω W. Part., 227 ; see Λανθάνω- 

Aidwut, to offer, 5. Imperf. of, 7. 

Δίκαιος w. Inf., 195. 

Διόπερ, 171. 

Διότι, 171; w. Inf. (Hdt.), 193. 


Ἐάν (εἰ av), contracted av (a) or ἥν, 56, 87, 
104 ; w. Subj., 102, 108. 

Ἐβουλόμην with Infinitive in Apodosis, 
without av, 98. 


Ἔδει, ἐχρῆν (χρῆν), ἐξῆν, ἐνὴν προσῆκεν, 


εἰκὸς ἦν ἥρμοττεν, ἦν ΟΥ̓ ὑπῆρχεν, With 
Infin. in Apodosis, without ἄν, 97 -- 100. 


Ei, if, 87, 92, 93, 105, 108 ; see "Av. Sup- 


posing that, 115, 168. After θαυμάζω, 
&c., 120. With Inf. (Hdt.), 193. Εἰ 
γάρ, or ei, in wishes, 173 - 177. 





NM Bae eS 


Ἧ 
4 
ἢ 
ἕω. 
ree | 
Bhat 
ih 
| 
iy 
i 
1 
ἢ 
ἣ 
aaa) | 
ΠΝ, 
ἯΙ 
fl 
14] 
i 
3 


962 GREEK 


_ 


Ei, whether, 120, 147, 151; after verbs 
of fearing. 85. 

Ei γάρ in wishes, see Εἰ. 

Ei & aye, 111. 

Ei δὲ μή in alternatives, 112. 

Eide in wishes, 173-177. 

Eixds ἦν in Apodosis, see Ἔδει. 

Elue te be going: as Future, 6; as Pres., 
6; w. Inf., 204. 

Εἶναι, expressing a purpose, 204. 

Εἶπον, I commanded, w. Inf., 14, 34. 

Eis 6 (for ἕως) w. Indic. (Hdt.), 142. 

Εἰσόκε w. Subj. and Opt., 143 ; see” ως. 

᾿"Εκὼν εἶναι, 208. 

Ἔνεστι, Partic. of, used personally w. Inf., 
194, 195. 

Ἐνῆν in Apodosis, 566 Ἔδει. 

᾿Ἐξαίφνης w. Part., 219. 

᾿Ἐξῆν in Apodosis, see Ἔδει. 

πάν or ἐπήν, see” Ὅταν. 

Ἐπεάν, Ionic for ἐπήν. 

Ἐπεὶ or ἐπειδή (temporal) ; w. Aor. Indic. 
(not Pluperf.), 25; w. Aor. Opt., 29; w. 
Infin., 193. Causal, 171. 

Ἐπειδάν, w. Aor. Subj. as Fut. Perf., 26. 
866 Ὅταν. 

᾿Ἐπίδοξος w. Inf. 195. 

"Emxaiptos W. Inf., 195. 

᾿ἘἘπιμελέομαι (ἐπιμέλομαι), W. ὅπως and 
Fut. Ind., 73; w. Inf., or Inf. w. τοῦ, 
192. 

᾿Ἐπιτήδειος W. Inf., 195. 

᾿Επιτρέπω W. Part., 226. 

"Eote, until, see” Ἕως. 

Εὐθύς w. Part., 219. 

Evpicxw w. Part., 226. 

Ἔφην, in Homer, 99. 

ἜΦ᾽ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ Gre, w. Fut. Ind., 140; w Inf., 
207. 

Ἐχρῆν in Apodosis. See Ἔδει. 

Ἔχω w. Aor. or Perf. Part. as periphrastic 
Perf., 229. 

"Ews, ἔστε, ἄχρι, μέχρι, εἰσόκε, ὄφρα, UN- 
til, 142-144; expressing a purpose, 143, 
167, 168. 

"Ews, ὄφρα, 80 long as, see Relative. 


Ἥκω as Perf., 5. Imperf. of, 7. 
*Hpuorrev in Apodosis, see Ἔδει. 
"Ηττάομαι, as Perf., 5. 


Θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, 196. 
Θαυμάζω εἰ, θαυμαστόν ἐστιν εἰ, 120. 
Θέλεις or θέλετε w. Interrog. Subjunctive 


(poet.), 182. 
Θεσπίζω, see Xpaw. 


INDEX. 


Ἰδεῖν, ὁρᾶν, in appearance, 196 
Ἴθι w. Imperat., 178. 
Ἱκανός w. Part., 228. 
"Ixw or ixavw as Perf. (Hom.), 5. 
"Iva, in Final clauses: w. Subj. and pt., 
67, 70; w. second. tenses of Indic 72. 
Not used with av, 70; ἵνα xe, 70. In 
Object clauses after λίσσομαι (Hom.), 785 
similar constr. in N. Test., 78. 

, where, with av, 70 (R.). 


Kd, Doric for κέ; see “Av. 

Kai, καίπερ (kai. +. wep), W- Part., 220, 
221. 

Καίτοι w. Part. (rare), 221. 

Ké or κέν, see "Av. 

Κεκλῆσθαι, to be called, 19. 

Κινδυνεύω w. Inf. in Apodosis, 99. 
Kparéw, see Nixaw. 

Κρείσσων w. Part., 228. 

Κυρέω w. Part. (poet.), 227. 


Λανθάνω, φθάνω, τυγχάνω, διατελέω, W 
Part., 227; w. Aor. Part., 34. 
Aéyw, to command, w. Inf., 14, 34. 


MéAAw,w. Inf. as periphrastic Fut., 38; tense 
of Inf. with, 38. Imperf. of, w. Inf.: ex- 
pressing past intention, &c., 38, 99; form- 
ing Apodosis (without av), 99. 

Μέμνημαι, I remember, 19; Ww. Part., 229; 
Ww. OTE, 231. 

Μεταξύ w. Part., 219. 

Μέχρι, see"Ews. Μέχρι οὗ, 142. 

Μή, lest, in Final clauses: w. Subj. and 
Opt., 67, 70; rarely w. Fut Ind., 68. 
After verbs of striving, &c. (for ὅπως μή), 
77, With Fut. Ind. in prohibitions, 37, 
79,187. After verbs of fearing, &e. : 
w. Subj. and Opt., 80; w. Fut. Ind., 82. 
With Subj. (by ellipsis of a verb of fear- 
ing), 83. With ἄν, 83. With present 
and past tenses of Indic., 83-85; never 
interrog., 84. With Fut. Opt. 39, 40. 

, not, W. iva, ὅπως, &c., in Final and 
Object clause, 67. In Protasis, 88. In 
Rel. clauses w. indef. anteoed., 122, 124. 
In wishes (with and without εἰ), 174, 176. 
In prohibitions, 180. With interrog. Subj., 
181. With Inf., after verbs implying ne- 
gation, 198, 200, 201. 

Μὴ ov (double neg.): w. Inf., 198, 200, 201; 
w. Part., 200 ; before Nouns, 200. 


Nixdw and xparéw, a8 Perf., 5. 
Νομίζω, οἴομαι, and φημί, w. Aorist. Inf. 





referring to the future (?), 33. 





GREEK INDEX. 263 


“Ὃ for ὅτι (in Hom.), 170. 

Oléa (novi), 1 know, 19 ; see Οἶσθα. 

Οἴομαι w. Aor. Inf. for Fut. (?), 33. 

Oios w. Infin., 194. Οἷον, οἵα, οἵα δή, w. 
Part., 219. 

Οἷσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον ; 179. 

Οἴχομαι as Perf., ὅ. Imperf. of, 7. 

᾿Ολίγου (δεῖν), almost, 208. 

Ὅλλυμαι as Perf. (Trag.), 5. 

Ὅλωλα, I shall perish, 19. 

*Opotos Ww. Infin. (Hom.), 197. 

‘Ororay, see ταν. 

Ὁπότε, when, see Relative. Since (causal), 
171. 

Ὅπως, originally Rel. Adv., 75; as indirect 
inter.og., 75, 77, 85, 154. In order that, 
that, in Final clauses; w. Subj. and Opt., 
67,70; w. av and Subj., 68, 69; w. Fut. 
Ind., 68 ; w. second. tenses of Indic., 72. 
After verbs of striving, &c.: w. Fut. 


Ind. (sometimes Subj. and Opt.), 73; w. | 


av and Subj. (rare), 76. That (like μή), 
after verbs of fearing, &c., 85. That 
(like ὡς or ὅτι), in indirect quotations, 
170. 

Ὅπως μή (for μή), lest, that, after verbs of 
Searing, &c., 82. 

Ὃρᾶν, ἰδεῖν, in appearance, 196. 

Ὅσον or ws w. Absol. Infin. 207. 

"Ogos w. Infin. 294. 

Ὅστις ἂν ἢ, Ὅστις ποτ᾽ ἐστίν, 134. 

Ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπάν or ἐπήν (ἐπεάν), and 
ἐπειδάν, 55, 125, 127, 129 ; see "Av. 

Ὅτε, when, see Relative. After μέμνημαι, 
231. With Infin., 193. 

- » Since (causal), 171. 

Ὅτι, that, in indirect quotations, 147: π΄. 
Ind. and Opt., 148, 149, 150; w. Ind. or 
Opt. w. ἄν, 156. Before direct quot., 171. 

» because (causal), 171-173, see 
Contents, Chap. IV., Sect. V.; after verbs 
of fearing, 86. 


Οὐ, after μή, lest, 67, 80. In Apodosis, 88; 
rarely in Protasis, 88 (N.). In Rel. 
clauses w. def. anteced., 122. In causal 
Rel. clauses, 142 (R.). In indirect dis- 
course, 149. 


q Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις (φθάνοιτε), 228. 


Οὐκ οἷδα ἂν εἰ, 62. 
v μή, 184-187; see Contents, Chapter 
IV., Section VIII. Dawes’s Canon on, 
79, 80. 
jwexa, because, 171. 
ὕτως, implying a Protasis, 110. With Opt. 
| ‘0 protestations, 175. Referring to a 
' Participle, 218 


"Odedrov, see Ὥφελον. 

Ὅφρα (Epic and Lyric), as final particle : 
w. Subj. and Opt., 67; w. av, 69. With 

| Fut. Ind., 68. 

» as temporal particle, until, 142 - 

144; see ἕως. So long as, see Relative, 





Πάλαι w. Present, 5. 
 Παντοῖος γίγνομαι (Ion.) w. Participle, 227. 
| Πάρος (like πρίν) w. Inf. (Hom.), 212. 
| Πᾶς w. Imperat. (2d pers.), 179. 
| Παύω w. Part., 226. 
| Πείθω, to try to persuade, δ. Imperfect 
| of, 7. 
| Πειράομαι w. Part. (Hdt.), 227. 
| Περιοράω, W. Part., 226; w. Aor. Part., 35. 
| Πιστεύω w. Inf. and τῷ, 197. 
IloAAds e€iut, πολλὸς ἔγκειμαι, Ἢ. Part. 
;  (1on.), 227. 
| Πρέπει, Partic. of, used personally w. In- 
| fin., 194, 195. 
| Πρίν, w. Ind., Subj., and Opt., 145, 146. 
With Infin., 210-212. As Adverb, soon- 
er, 146 (N. 5). 
| Πρίν γ᾽ ore (Hom.), 146. 
| Πρὶν ἤ, 146, 211, 212. 
Προσδεχομένῳ μοι τοῦτό ἐστιν, 229. 
Προσῆκεν in Apodosis, see "Ede. 
Προσήκει, Partic. of, used personally w. 
Infin., 194, 195. 
Πρόσθεν ἥ, 146, 211. 
| Πρότερον 7, 146, 211. 
Πῶς yap av; Πῶς οὐκ av; &o., 63. 


Σύνοιδα, σνγγιγνώσκω, W. Part., 230 


Tax’ av, 64. 
Τεθνηκέναι, to be dead, 19. 





| “τέος (-τέον, -réa), Verbal in, 3, 233, 234; 


see Contents, Chapter VII. 


| Τί λέξεις ; 88. 
‘ing, | Τί μαθών; Ti παθών; wherefore? 221, 
O τι ποτ᾽ ἐστίν, Ὅστις ποτ᾽ ἐστίν, &c., 134. | 
| Τί πάθω; 183, 188, 

Τίκτω (in tragedy) as Perf., 5. 


222. 


Τὸ νῦν εἶναι, 208. 


| Τυγχάνω w. Part., 227; see Λανθάνω. 


ΠῚ" ἥ W. Infin., 211. 


Φανερός εἰμι W. Part., 230. Φανερὸν ποιεῖν 
w. Part., 230. 


| Φέρε w. Imperat., 178, 179, 180. 
Φεύγω as Perf., 5. 


Φημί w. Aor. Inf. for Fut. (?), 33. 


| Φθάνω w. Part., 227; see AavOdvw. Φθάνω 


ἤ π΄ Infin. (Hdt.), 212. 





GREEK INDEX. 


Ὥς, because, 171-178. 
, in wishes: w. Opt., 175; w. ὥφελον, 
177. With Inf., 206, 207, 208. With 
Ὡς, originally Rel. Adv., 75 (R.). In order Partic., 219, 220, 225, 231, 232 ; w. Part. 
that, that, in Final clauses: w. Subj. and av 232. 
and Opt., 67,70; w- ἄν and Subj., 68, 69; [Ὥσπερ w. Partic., 219, 222, 226. 
w. Fut. Ind., 68; w. second. tenses of |"Qo7ep av et (ὡσπερανεί), 63, 116. 
Indic., 72. Sometimes (for ὅπως) after Ὥστε, so that, w. Indic., 140. With Inf., 


Xpdw, avatpéw, θεσπίζω, w. Pres. or Aor. 
Inf., 13, 31 ; sometimes w. Fut. Inf, 13. 


verbs of striving, &c., 77 (N. 4); Ho- 
meric construction of, with Subj. or Opt., 
76 (N. 2.). Sometimes (for μή) after 
verbs of fearing, 85. 

-, when, see Relative 
193. 


With Infin., 


205; after verbs and adject. which com- 
monly take Inf. alone, 206 (N. 2.), 205. 
With Opt., Indic., or Inf. w. av, 141, 207. 
With Imperat., 141. 

» in Homer, = ὥσπερ, as if, 207. In 
Hdt., w. Partic.,= are, 219, 223. 


, that, in indirect quotation (like ὅτι), | Ὥφελον or ὥφελλον in wishes, 98, 176, 
147, 148, 149, 150. Once w. Subj. for Fut. 177. 
{nd. (Hom.), 78, 171. 











Cambridge : Stereotyped and Printed by Welch, Bigelow, & Ca. 





Mo 






































2 bee 






































= 


ΝΣ ws 


















































